Fran De Aquino

T O E

Theory of Everything





November
2012
Fran De Aquino






T O E

Theory of Everything





November
2012
















ABSTRACT



This is a set of 25 articles, developed starting from the Relativistic
Theory of Quantum Gravity (first article). Together they form the
Theory of Everything.


CONTENTS
(421 pages)

1. Mathematical Foundations of the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity

2. Gravity Control by means of Electromagnetic Field through Gas or Plasma at Ultra-Low Pressure

3. Physical Foundations of Quantum Psychology

4. The Gravitational Spacecraft

5. Possibility of controlled nuclear fusion by means of Gravity Control

6. High-power ELF radiation generated by modulated HF heating of the ionosphere can cause
Earthquakes, Cyclones and localized heating

7. The Universal Quantum Fluid

8. The Gravitational Mass of a Charged Supercapacitor

9. Beyond the Material Universe

10. On the Cosmological Variation of the Fine Structure Constant

11. The velocity of neutrinos

12. Proca Equations and the Photon Imaginary Mass

13. Gravity Control by means of Modified Electromagnetic Radiation

14. Transmission of DNA Genetic Information into Water by means of
Electromagnetic Fields of Extremely-low Frequencies

15. A Possible Explanation for Anomalous Heat Production in Ni-H Systems

16. Engineering the Ni-H Bomb

17. Gravitational Shockwave Weapons

18. A System to convert Gravitational Energy directly into Electrical Energy

19. Superconducting State generated by Cooper Pairs bound by Intensified Gravitational Interaction

20. Gravitational Separator of Isotopes

21. Gravitational Atomic Synthesis at Room Temperature

22. Ultrafast Conversion of Graphite to Diamond in Gravitational Pressure Apparatus

23. Artificial Gravitational Lenses

24. Gravitational Blueshift and Redshift generated at Laboratory Scale

25. Quantum Reversal of Soul Energy


*
* *
Mathematical Foundations of the
Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2008-2011 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved

Abstract: Starting from the action function, we have derived a theoretical background that leads to
the quantization of gravity and the deduction of a correlation between the gravitational and the inertial
masses, which depends on the kinetic momentum of the particle. We show that the strong equivalence
principle is reaffirmed and, consequently, Einstein's equations are preserved. In fact, such equations
are deduced here directly from this new approach to Gravitation. Moreover, we have obtained a
generalized equation for the inertial forces, which incorporates the Mach's principle into Gravitation.
Also, we have deduced the equation of Entropy; the Hamiltonian for a particle in an electromagnetic
field and the reciprocal fine structure constant directly from this new approach. It was also possible to
deduce the expression of the Casimir force and to explain the Inflation Period and the Missing Matter,
without assuming existence of vacuum fluctuations. This new approach to Gravitation will allow us to
understand some crucial matters in Cosmology.

Key words: Quantum Gravity, Quantum Cosmology, Unified Field.
PACs: 04.60.-m; 98.80.Qc; 04.50. +h

Contents

1. Introduction 3

2. Theory 3

Generalization of Relativistic Time 4

Quantization of Space, Mass and Gravity 6

Quantization of Velocity 7

Quantization of Time 7

Correlation Between Gravitational and Inertial Masses 8

Generalization of Lorentz's Force 12

Gravity Control by means of the Angular Velocity 13

Gravitoelectromagnetic fields and gravitational shielding effect 14

Gravitational Effects produced by ELF radiation upon electric current 26

Magnetic Fields affect gravitational mass and the momentum 27

Gravitational Motor 28

Gravitational mass and Earthquakes 28

The Strong Equivalence Principle 30

2
Incorporation of the Mach's Principle into Gravitation Theory 30

Deduction of the Equations of General Relativity 30

Gravitons: Gravitational Forces are also Gauge forces 31

Deduction of Entropy Equation starting from the Gravity Theory 31

Unification of the Electromagnetic and Gravitational Fields 32

Elementary Quantum of Matter and Continuous Universal Fluid 34

The Casimir Force is a gravitational effect related to the Uncertainty Principle 35

The Shape of the Universe and Maximum speed of Tachyons 36

The expanding Universe is accelerating and not slowing down 38

Gravitational and Inertial Masses of the Photon 39

What causes the fundamental particles to have masses? 40

Electrons Imaginary Masses 41

Transitions to the Imaginary space-time 44

Explanation for red-shift anomalies 50

Superparticles (hypermassive Higgs bosons) and Big-Bang 51

Deduction of Reciprocal Fine Structure Constant and the Uncertainty Principle 53

Dark Matter, Dark Energy and Inflation Period 53

The Origin of the Universe 59

Solution for the Black Hole Information Paradox 61

A Creators need 63

The Origin of Gravity and Genesis of the Gravitational Energy 64

Explanation for the anomalous acceleration of Pioneer 10 66

New type of interaction 68

Appendix A 71

Allais effect explained 71

Appendix B 74


References 75

3

1. INTRODUCTION

Quantum Gravity was originally
studied, by Dirac and others, as the
problem of quantizing General
Relativity. This approach presents
many difficulties, detailed by Isham
[1]. In the 1970's, physicists tried an
even more conventional approach:
simplifying Einstein's equations by
assuming that they are almost linear,
and then applying the standard
methods of quantum field theory to
the thus oversimplified equations. But
this method, too, failed. In the 1980's
a very different approach, known as
string theory, became popular. Thus
far, there are many enthusiasts of
string theory. But the mathematical
difficulties in string theory are
formidable, and it is far from clear that
they will be resolved any time soon.
At the end of 1997, Isham [2] pointed
out several "Structural Problems
Facing Quantum Gravity Theory". At
the beginning of this new century,
the problem of quantizing the
gravitational field was still open.
In this work, we propose a new
approach to Quantum Gravity.
Starting from the generalization of the
action function we have derived a
theoretical background that leads to
the quantization of gravity. Einstein's
General Relativity equations are
deduced directly from this theory of
Quantum Gravity. Also, this theory
leads to a complete description of the
Electromagnetic Field, providing a
consistent unification of gravity with
electromagnetism.

2. THEORY

We start with the action for a
free-particle that, as we know, is
given by

=
b
a
ds S
where is a quantity which
characterizes the particle.
In Relativistic Mechanics, the
action can be written in the following
form [3]:
dt c V c Ldt S
t
t
t
t

= =
2
1
2
1
2 2
1
where
2 2
1 c V c L =
is the Lagrange's function.
In Classical Mechanics, the
Lagrange's function for a free-particle
is, as we know, given by:
where V is the speed of the particle
and is a quantity hypothetically [
2
aV L =
a 4]
given by:
2 m a =
where is the mass of the particle.
However, there is no distinction about
the kind of mass (if gravitational
mass, , or inertial mass ) neither
about its sign
m
g
m
i
m
( ) .
The correlation between and a
can be established based on the
fact that, on the limit , the
relativistic expression for
c
L must be
reduced to the classic expression
.The result [
2
aV L = 5] is: c V L 2
2
= .
Therefore, if mc ac = 2 = , we obtain
. Now, we must decide if
2
aV L =
g
m m = or
i
m m = . We will see in this
work that the definition of includes
. Thus, the right option is , i.e.,
g
m
i
m
g
m
. m a
g
2 =
Consequently, c m
g
= and the
generalized expression for the action
of a free-particle will have the
following form:
( ) 1

=
b
a
g
ds c m S
or
4
( ) 2 1
2 2 2
2
1
dt c V c m S
t
t
g
=

where the Lagrange's function is
( ) 3 1
2 2 2
. c V c m L
g
=
The integral dt c V c m S
t
t
g
2 2 2
1
2
1
=

,
preceded by the plus sign, cannot
have a minimum. Thus, the integrand
of Eq.(2) must be always positive.
Therefore, if , then necessarily
; if , then . The
possibility of is based on the
well-known equation
0 >
g
m
0 > t 0 <
g
m 0 < t
0 < t
2 2
0
1 c V t t =
of Einstein's Theory.
Thus if the gravitational mass
of a particle is positive, then t is also
positive and, therefore, given by
2 2
0
1 c V t t + = . This leads to the
well-known relativistic prediction that
the particle goes to the future, if
. However, if the gravitational
mass of the particle is negative, then
is negative and given by
c V
t
2 2
0
1 c V t t = . In this case, the
prediction is that the particle goes to
the past, if . Consequently,
is the necessary condition for
the particle to go to the past. Further
on, a correlation between the
gravitational and the inertial masses
will be derived, which contains the
possibility of .
c V
0 <
g
m
0 <
g
m
The Lorentz's transforms follow
the same rule for and 0 >
g
m 0 <
g
m ,
i.e., the sign before
2 2
1 c V will be
when and if ( ) + 0 >
g
m ( ) 0 <
g
m .
The momentum, as we know,
is the vector V L p
r
r
= .Thus, from
Eq.(3) we obtain
V M
c V
V m
p
g
g
r
r
r
=

=
2 2
1
The sign in the equation above
will be used when and the
( ) +
0 >
g
m ( )
sign if 0 <
g
m . Consequently, we will
express the momentum in the
following form
p
r
( ) 4
1
2 2
V M
c V
V m
p
g
g
r
r
r
=

=
The derivative dt p d
r
is the
inertial force which acts on the
particle. If the force is perpendicular
to the speed, we have
i
F
( ) 5
1
2 2
dt
V d
c V
m
F
g
i
r
r

=
However, if the force and the speed
have the same direction, we find that
( )
( ) 6
1
2
3
2 2
dt
V d
c V
m
F
g
i
r
r

=
From Mechanics [6], we know that
L V p
r
r
denotes the energy of the
particle. Thus, we can write
( ) 7
1
2
2 2
2
c M
c V
c m
L V p E
g
g
g
=

= =
r
r
Note that is not null for
g
E 0 = V , but
that it has the finite value

( ) 8
2
0 0
c m E
g g
=
Equation (7) can be rewritten in
the following form:
( ) ( ) 9
1
1
0
2
2 2
2
2
2
2 2
2
2
i
i
g
Ki i
i
g
E
i
i
i
i
g
g
g
g g
E
m
m
E E
m
m
c m
c V
c m
c m
m
m
c m
c V
c m
c m E
Ki
= + =
=

+ =
=

=
4 4 4 3 4 4 4 2 1
By analogy to Eq. (8), into
the equation above, is the
inertial energy at rest. Thus,
2
0 0
c m E
i i
=
Ki i i
E E E + =
0
is the total inertial
energy, where is the kinetic
Ki
E
5
inertial energy. From Eqs. (7) and (9)
we thus obtain
( ) 10
1
2
2 2
2
0
. c M
c V
c m
E
i
i
i
=

=
For small velocities , we
obtain
( c V << )
( ) 11
2
2
1
2
0
V m c m E
i i i
+
where we recognize the classical
expression for the inertial kinetic
energy of the particle.
The expression for the
gravitational kinetic energy, , is
easily deduced by comparing Eq.(7)
with Eq.(9). The result is
Kg
E
( ) 12 . E
m
m
E
Ki
i
g
Kg
=
In the presented picture, we
can say that the gravity, , in a
gravitational field produced by a
particle of gravitational mass ,
depends on the particle's gravitational
energy, (given by Eq.(7)), because
we can write
g
r
g
M
g
E
( ) 13
2 2
2
2 2
c r
c M
G
c r
E
G g
g g
= =
Due to r g = , the expression of
the relativistic gravitational potential,
, is given by
2 2
1 c V r
Gm
r
GM
g g

= =
Then, it follows that

2 2 2 2
1 1 c V c V r
Gm
r
GM
g g

= =


where r Gm
g
= .
Then we get
2 2 2 2 2
1 1 c V r
Gm
c V r
r
g

=


=

whence we conclude that
2 2 2
1 c V r
Gm
r
g

By definition, the gravitational
potential energy per unit of
gravitational mass of a particle inside
a gravitational field is equal to the
gravitational potential of the field.
Thus, we can write that

( )
g
m
r U

=
Then, it follows that

( )
2 2 2
1 c V r
m m
G
r
m
r
r U
F
g g
g g

=

If and 0 >
g
m 0 <
g
m , or and 0 <
g
m
0 >
g
m the force will be repulsive; the
force will never be null due to the
existence of a minimum value for
(see Eq. (24)). However, if
g
m
0 <
g
m
and 0 <
g
m , or and 0 >
g
m 0 >
g
m
the force will be attractive. J ust
for
i g
m m = and we obtain
the Newton's attraction law.
i g
m m =
On the other hand, as we
know, the gravitational force is
conservative. Thus, gravitational
energy, in agreement with the energy
conservation law, can be expressed
by the decrease of the inertial energy,
i.e.,
( ) 14
i g
E E =
This equation expresses the fact that
a decrease of gravitational energy
corresponds to an increase of the
inertial energy.
Therefore, a variation
i
E in
yields a variation
i
E
i g
E E = in .
Thus
g
E
i i i
E E E + =
0
;
i g g g g
E E E E E = + =
0 0
and
( ) 15
0 0 i g i g
E E E E + = +
Comparison between (7) and (10)
shows that
0 0 i g
E E = , i.e.,
0 0 i g
m m = .
Consequently, we have
6

( ) 16 2
0 0 0 i i g i g
E E E E E = + = +
However
Ki i i
E E E + =
0
.Thus, (16) becomes
( ) 17
0
. E E E
Ki i g
=
Note the symmetry in the equations of
and .Substitution of
i
E
g
E
Ki i i
E E E =
0

into (17) yields
( ) 18 2
Ki g i
E E E =
Squaring the Eqs.(4) and (7) and
comparing the result, we find the
following correlation between
gravitational energy and momentum :
( ) 19
2 2 2
2
2
. c m p
c
E
g
g
+ =
The energy expressed as a function of
the momentum is, as we know, called
Hamiltonian or Hamilton's function:
( ) 20
2 2 2
. c m p c H
g g
+ =
Let us now consider the problem
of quantization of gravity. Clearly there is
something unsatisfactory about the
whole notion of quantization. It is
important to bear in mind that the
quantization process is a series of rules-
of-thumb rather than a well-defined
algorithm, and contains many
ambiguities. In fact, for electromagnetism
we find that there are (at least) two
different approaches to quantization and
that while they appear to give the same
theory they may lead us to very different
quantum theories of gravity. Here we will
follow a new theoretical strategy: It is
known that starting from the Schrdinger
equation we may obtain the well-known
expression for the energy of a particle in
periodic motion inside a cubical box of
edge length L [ 7 ]. The result now is
( ) 21 ,... 3 , 2 , 1
8
2
2 2
= = n
L m
h n
E
g
n
Note that the term
2 2
8 L m h
g
(energy)
will be minimum for where
is the maximum edge length of a cubical
box whose maximum diameter
max
L L =
max
L
( ) 22 3
max max
L d =
is equal to the maximum length scale of
the Universe.
The minimum energy of a particle
is obviously its inertial energy at rest
. Therefore we can write
2 2
c m c m
i g
=
2
2
2 2
8
c m
L m
h n
g
max g
=
Then from the equation above it follows
that
( ) 23
8
max
g
cL
nh
m =
whence we see that there is a minimum
value for given by
g
m
( )
( ) 24
8
max
min g
cL
h
m =
The relativistic gravitational mass
( )
2
1
2 2
1

= c V m M
g g
, defined in the
Eqs.(4), shows that
( ) ( )
( ) 25
min min g g
m M =
The box normalization leads to the
conclusion that the propagation number
2 = = k k
r
is restricted to the
values L n k 2 = . This is deduced
assuming an arbitrarily large but finite
cubical box of volume [
3
L 8]. Thus, we
have
n L =
From this equation, we conclude that
min
max
max
L
n

=
and
min min min min
n L = =
Since 1 =
min
n . Therefore, we can write
that
( ) 26
min max max
L n L =
From this equation, we thus conclude
that
( ) 27
min
nL L =
or
( ) 28
n
L
L
max
=
Multiplying (27) and (28) by 3 and
reminding that 3 L d = , we obtain
7
( ) 29
n
d
d or nd d
max
min
= =
Equations above show that the length
(and therefore the space) is quantized.
By analogy to (23) we can also
conclude that
( )
( ) 30
8
min
max
max
cL
h n
M
g
=
since the relativistic gravitational mass,
( )
2
1
2 2
1

= c V m M
g g
, is just a
multiple of .
g
m
Equation (26) tells us that
max max min
n L L = . Thus, Eq.(30) can be
rewritten as follows
( )
( ) 31
8
2
max
max
max
cL
h n
M
g
=
Comparison of (31) with (24) shows that
( ) ( )
( ) 32
min
2
max max g g
m n M =
which leads to following conclusion that
( )
( ) 33
min
2
g g
m n M =
This equation shows that the
gravitational mass is quantized.
Substitution of (33) into (13) leads
to quantization of gravity, i.e.,
( )
( )
( ) 34
min
4
2
max
min 2
2
g n
n r
Gm
n
r
GM
g
g g
=
=

= =
From the Hubble's law, it follows that
( ) 2
max max max
d H
~
l H
~
V = =
( ) 2
min min min
d H
~
l H
~
V = =
whence
min
max
min
max
d
d
V
V
=
Equations (29) tell us that
max min max
n d d = . Thus the equation
above gives
( ) 35
max
max
min
n
V
V =
which leads to following conclusion
( ) 36
n
V
V
max
=
this equation shows that velocity is also
quantized.
From this equation one concludes
that we can have or
max
V V =
2
max
V V = , but there is nothing in
between. This shows clearly that
cannot be equal to c (speed of light in
vacuum). Thus, it follows that
max
V
( )
( )
( )
.
....... .......... .......... ..... ..........
........ .......... ........
max
max
max
max
max
max
max
number big a is n where
n V V n n
Tardyons n V V n n
c n V V n n
n V V n n
Tachyons V V n
V V n
V V n
x
x x
x x
x x
x x
2 2
1 1
1 1
3 3
2 2
1
+ = + =
+ = + =
= = =

= =
= =
= =
= =
Then is the speed upper limit of
the Tardyons and also the speed lower
limit of the Tachyons. Obviously, this limit
is always the same in all inertial frames.
Therefore can be used as a reference
speed, to which we may compare any
speed , as occurs for the relativistic
factor
c
c
V
2 2
1 c V . Thus, in this factor,
does not refer to maximum propagation
speed of the interactions such as some
authors suggest; is just a speed limit
which remains the same in any inertial
frame.
c
c
The temporal coordinate of
space-time is now (
is then obtained when ).
Substitution of into this
equation yields
0
x
t V x
max
=
0
ct x =
0
c V
max

( l H
~
n nV V
max
= = )
( )( ) l x H
~
n V x t
max
0 0
1 = = .
On the other hand, since l H
~
V = and
n V V
max
= we can write that
n H
~
V l
max
1
= .Thus( ) ( )
max
t H
~
nt H
~
l x = =
0
.
Therefore, we can finally write

( )( ) ( ) 37 1
0
n t l x H
~
n t
max
= =

which shows the quantization of time.
8
From Eqs. (27) and (37) we can
easily conclude that the spacetime is not
continuous it is quantized.
Now, let us go back to Eq. (20)
which will be called the gravitational
Hamiltonian to distinguish it from the
inertial Hamiltonian :
i
H
( ) 38
2
2
0
2
. c m p c H
i i
+ =
Consequently, Eq. (18) can be rewritten
in the following form:
( ) 39 2
i g i
H H H =
where
i
H is the variation on the
inertial Hamiltonian or inertial kinetic
energy. A momentum variation p yields
a variation
i
H given by:
( ) ( ) 40
4
2
0
2 2 4
2
0
2
2
c m c p c m c p p H
i i i
+ + + =
By considering that the particle is
initially at rest ( . Then, Eqs. (20),
(38) and (39) give respectively: ,
and
) 0 = p
2
c m H
g g
=
2
0
c m H
i i
=
2
0
2
0
1 1 c m
c m
p
H
i
i
i

+ =
By substituting , and into
Eq.(39), we get
g
H
i
H
i
H

( ) 41 1 1 2
0
2
0
0
.
i
i
i g
m
c m
p
m m

+ =

This is the general expression of the
correlation between the gravitational and
inertial mass. Note that
for ( ) 2 5
0
c m p
i
> , the value of
becomes negative.
g
m
Equation (41) shows that
decreases of for an increase of
. Thus, starting from (4) we
obtain
g
m
g
m
p
( )
( )
2
1 c V
V m m
p p
g g

= +
By considering that the particle is initially
at rest , the equation above gives ( 0 = p
( )
( )
2
1 c V
V m m
p
g g

=
From the Eq.(16) we obtain:
( )
i i i i i i i g
E E E E E E E E = + = =
0 0 0 0
2 2
However, Eq.(14) tells us that
g i
E E = ;
what leads to
g i g
E E E + =
0
or
g i g
m m m + =
0
.
Thus, in the expression of p we
can replace( )
g g
m m for , i.e,
0 i
m
( )
2
0
1 c V
V m
p
i

=
We can therefore write
( )
( ) 42
1
2
0 c V
c V
c m
p
i
=

By substitution of the expression above

into Eq. (41), we thus obtain:

( ) ( ) 43 1 1 2
0
2 2
0
2
1
i i g
m c V m m

=


For 0 = V we obtain .Then,
0 i g
m m =
( ) ( ) min min 0 i g
m m =
Substitution of into the quantized
expression of (Eq. (33)) gives
(min g
m
)
)
g
M

( ) min 0
2
i g
m n M =

where is the elementary
quantum of inertial mass to be
determined.
(min 0 i
m
For 0 = V , the relativistic
expression
2 2
1 c V m M
g g
= becomes
0 0 g g g
m M M = = . However, Eq. (43) shows
that
0 0 i g
m m = . Thus, the quantized
expression of reduces to
g
M
( ) min 0
2
0 i i
m n m =
In order to define the inertial quantum
number, we will change n in the
expression above for . Thus we have
i
n

( )
( ) 44
min 0
2
0 i i i
m n m =

)
9
which shows the quantization of
inertial mass; is the inertial
quantum number.
i
n
We will change in the quantized
expression of for in order to
define the gravitational quantum
number. Thus, we have
n
g
M
g
n

( )
( ) a m n M
i g g
44
0
2
min
=

Finally, by substituting
given by Eq. (43) into the relativistic
expression of , we readily obtain
g
m
g
M
( ) ( ) 45 1 1 2
1
2
1
2 2
2 2
i i
g
g
M c V M
c V
m
M

=
=

By expanding in power series
and neglecting infinitesimals, we
arrive at:

( ) 46 1
2
2
i g
M
c
V
M

=

Thus, the well-known expression for
the simple pendulum
period, ( )( ) g l M M T
g i
2 = , can be rewritten
in the following form:
c V for
c
V
g
l
T <<

+ =
2
2
2
1 2
Now, it is possible to learn why
Newtons experiments using simple
penduli do not find any difference
between and . The reason is
due to the fact that, in the case of
penduli, the ratio
g
M
i
M
2 2
2c V is less than
, which is much smaller than the
accuracy of the mentioned
experiments.
17
10

Newtons experiments have

been improved upon (one part in
60,000) by Friedrich Wilhelm Bessel
(17841846). In 1890, Etvos
confirmed Newtons results with
accuracy of one part in .
Posteriorly, Etvos experiment has
been repeated with accuracy of one
part in . In 1963, the experiment
was repeated with an even greater
accuracy, one part in . The result
was the same previously obtained.
7
10
9
10
11
10
In all these experiments, the
ratio
2 2
2c V is less than , which
is much smaller than the accuracy of
obtained in the previous more
precise experiment.
17
10

11
10

Then, we arrive at the

conclusion that all these experiments
say nothing in regard to the relativistic
behavior of masses in relative motion.
Let us now consider a planet in
the Suns gravitational field to which,
in the absence of external forces, we
apply Lagranges equations. We
arrive at the well-known equation:
h =
=

dt
d
r
r
GM
dt
d
r
dt
dr
i

2
2
2
2
2
E
where is the inertial mass of the
Sun. The term
i
M
a GM
i
= E , as we
know, is called the energy constant;
is the semiaxis major of the Kepler-
ellipse described by the planet
around the Sun.
a
By replacing into the
differential equation above for the
expression given by Eq. (46), and
expanding in power series, neglecting
infinitesimals, we arrive, at:
i
M

+ =

2
2
2
2
2
2 2
c
V
r
GM
r
GM
dt
d
r
dt
dr
g g
E

Since ( ) dt d r r V = = , we get

2
2
2
2
2
2 2

+ =

dt
d
c
r GM
r
GM
dt
d
r
dt
dr
g g

E
which is the Einsteinian equation of the
planetary motion.
10
Multiplying this equation by
( )
2
d dt and remembering that
( )
2 4 2
h r d dt = , we obtain
2 2
3
2
4
2
2
2 2
c
r GM r GM
r
r
d
dr
g g
+ +

= +

h h
E

Making u r 1 = and multiplying both

members of the equation by u , we
get
4
2
3
2 2
2
2
2 2
c
u GM u GM
u
d
du
g g
+ + = +

h h
E

This leads to the following expression

+ = +
2
2 2
2 2
2
3
1
c
u
GM
u
d
u d
g
h
h
In the absence of term
2 2 2
3 c u h , the
integration of the equation should be
immediate, leading to 2 period. In
order to obtain the value of the
perturbation we can use any of the
well-known methods, which lead to
an angle , for two successive
perihelions, given by
2 2
2 2
6
2
h c
M G
g
+
Calculating per century, in the case of
Mercury, we arrive at an angle of 43
for the perihelion advance.
This result is the best
theoretical proof of the accuracy of
Eq. (45).
Now consider a relativistic
particle inside a gravitational field.
The condition for it to escape from the
gravitational field is that its inertial
kinetic energy becomes equal to the
absolute value of the gravitational
energy of the field, which is given
( )
2 2
1 c V r
M Gm
r
M GM
r U
g g
g g

=
=

=
Since ( )
g
M r U = and r g =
then, we get

2 2 2
1 c V r
Gm
g
g

=

where is the velocity of the mass
, in respect to the observer. V is
also the velocity
V
g
m
with which the
observer moves away from
g
m
. If
the observer is inside the gravitational
field produced by , then, V is the
velocity with which the observer
escapes from (or the escape
velocity from the gravitational field of
). Since the gravitational field is
created by a particle with non-null
gravitational mass, then obviously,
g
m
g
m
g
m
c V < . If c V << the escape velocity is
given by

r
M m
G V M
g g
g

=
2
2
1

whence we obtain

r
Gm
V
g
2
2
=

By substituting this expression into
the equation of
g
, above obtained,
the result is

2 2
2 1 rc Gm r
Gm
r
g
g
g

=

whence we recognize the
Schwzarzschilds equation. Note in
this equation the presence of ,
whose value, according to Eq. (41)
can be reduced or made negative. In
g
m
11
this case
*
, the singularity g ,
produced by Schwzarzschilds radius
2
2 c Gm r
g
=
, ( )
i g
m m = , obviously
does not occur. Consequently, Black
Hole does not exist.
For we get c V <<
2 2 2 2
2 1 1 c V c V + .
Since r Gm V
g
2
2
= , then we can write that
2 2
2 2
1 1 1
c rc
Gm
c V
g

+ = +

Substitution of
2 2 2
1 1 c c V + = into the
well-known expression below
2 2
1 c V t T =
which expresses the relativistic
correlation between own time (T) and
universal time (t), gives

+ =
2
1
c
t T

It is known from the Optics that the

*
This can occur, for example, in a stage of
gravitational contraction of a neutron star (mass >
2.4M

), when the gravitational masses of the

neutrons, in the core of star, are progressively
turned negative, as a consequence of the increase
of the density of magnetic energy inside the
neutrons,
2
0 2
1
n n
H W = , reciprocally produced by
the spin magnetic fields of the own neutrons,
( ) ( )
3 3
0 2
1
4 2
n n n n n n n
r m S e r M H
r r r
= = due to the
decrease of the neutrons radii, , along the very
strong compression at which they are subjected.
Since , and , then
increases much more rapidly with the decrease
of than
n
r
6

n n
r W
3

n n
r
n
W
n
r
n
. Consequently, the ratio
n n
W increases progressively with the
compression of the neutrons star. According to
Eq. (41), the gravitational masses of the neutrons
can be turned negative at given stage of the
compression. Thus, due to the difference of
pressure, the value of
n n
W in the crust is
smaller than the value in the core. This means
that, the gravitational mass of the core becomes
negative before of the gravitational mass of the
crust. This makes the gravitational contraction
culminates with an explosion, due to the repulsive
gravitational forces between the core and the
crust. Therefore, the contraction has a limit and,
consequently, the singularity does not occur.

frequency of a wave, measured in units
of universal time, remains constant
during its propagation, and that it can be
expressed by
t

0
where dt d is the derivative of the
eikonal with respect to the time.
On the other hand, the frequency
of the wave measured in units of own
time is given by
T

Thus, we conclude that

T
t

=
0

whence we obtain

+
= =
2
0
1
1
c
T
t

By expanding in power series, neglecting

infinitesimals, we arrive at:

=
2
0
1
c

In this way, if a light ray with a frequency
0
is emitted from a point where the
gravitational potential is
1
, it will have a
frequency
1
. Upon reaching a point
where the gravitational potential is
2
its
frequency will be
2
. Then, according to
equation above, it follows that

=
2
2
0 2
2
1
0 1
1 1
c
and
c

Thus, from point 1 to point 2 the
frequency will be shifted in the
interval
2 1
= , given by

=
2
1 2
0
c


If 0 < , ( )
2 1
> , the shift occurs in the
direction of the decreasing frequencies
(red-shift). If 0 > , (
2 1
) < the blue-
shift occurs.
Let us now consider another
consequence of the existence of
correlation between and .
g
M
i
M
Lorentz's force is usually written in
the following form:
12
B V q E q dt d
r r r
r
+ = p
where
2 2
0
1 c V V m
i
=
r
r
p . However,
Eq.(4) tells us that
2 2
1 c V V m p
g
=
r
.
Therefore, the expressions above must
be corrected by multiplying its members
by
0 i g
m m ,i.e.,
p
c V
V m
c V
V m
m
m
m
m
g
i
i
g
i
g
r
r
r
r
=

=
2 2 2 2
0
0 0 1 1
p
and
( )
0 0
p
i
g
i
g
m
m
B V q E q
m
m
dt
d
dt
p d
r r r
r
r
+ =

=
That is now the general expression for
Lorentz's force. Note that it depends on
.
g
m
When the force is perpendicular to
the speed, Eq. (5) gives
( )
2 2
1 c V dt V d m dt p d
g
=
r
r
.By comparing
with Eq.(46), we thus obtain
( )( ) B V q E q dt V d c V m
i
r r r r
+ =
2 2
0
1
Note that this equation is the expression
of an inertial force.
Starting from this equation, well-
known experiments have been carried
out in order to verify the relativistic
expression:
2 2
1 c V m
i
. In general,
the momentum variation p is
expressed by t F p = where is the
applied force during a time interval
F
t .
Note that there is no restriction
concerning the nature of the force ,
i.e., it can be mechanical,
electromagnetic, etc.
F
For example, we can look on the
momentum variation p as due to
absorption or emission of
electromagnetic energy by the particle
(by means of radiation and/or by means
of Lorentz's force upon the charge of the
particle).
In the case of radiation (any
type), p can be obtained as follows. It
is known that the radiation pressure ,
, upon an area of a
volume
dP dxdy dA =
dxdydz d = V of a particle( the
incident radiation normal to the
surface )is equal to the energy
absorbed per unit volume
dA dU
( ) V d dU .i.e.,
( ) 47
dAdz
dU
dxdydz
dU
d
dU
dP = = =
V
Substitution of vdt dz = ( is the speed
of radiation) into the equation above
gives
v
( )
( ) 48
v
dD
v
dAdt dU
d
dU
dP = = =
V
Since dF dPdA = we can write:
( ) 49
v
dU
dFdt =
However we know that dt dp dF= , then
( ) 50
v
dU
dp =
From Eq. (48), it follows that
( ) 51
v
dD d
dPd dU
V
V = =
Substitution into (50) yields
( ) 52
2
v
dD d
dp
V
=
or

=
D p
dD d
v
dp
0 0
2
0
1 V
V

whence
( ) 53
2
v
D
p
V
=
This expression is general for all types of
waves including non-electromagnetic
waves such as sound waves. In this
case, in Eq.(53), will be the speed of
sound in the medium and the intensity
of the sound radiation.
v
D
In the case of electromagnetic
waves, the Electrodynamics tells us that
will be given by v
( )

+ +
= = =
1 1
2
2

r r
r
c
dt
dz
v
where is the real part of the
propagation vector
r
k
k
r
;
i r
ik k k k + = =
r
;
, and , are the electromagnetic
characteristics of the medium in which
the incident (or emitted) radiation is
propagating (
0

r
= where
r
is the
relative dielectric permittivity and
; m F/ 10 854 . 8
12
0

=
0

r
= where
13
r
is the relative magnetic permeability
and ; m / H
7
0
10 4

= is the
electrical conductivity). For an atom
inside a body, the incident (or emitted)
radiation on this atom will be propagating
inside the body, and consequently,
=
body
, =
body
, =
body
.
It is then evident that the index of
refraction v c n
r
= will be given by
( ) ( ) 54 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n
On the other hand, from Eq. (50) follows
that
r
n
c
U
c
c
v
U
p =

=
Substitution into Eq. (41) yields
( ) 55 1 1 2 1
0
2
2
0
i r
i
g
m n
c m
U
m

+ =
If the body is also rotating, with an
angular speed around its central axis,
then it acquires an additional energy
equal to its rotational energy
( )
2
2
1
I E
k
= . Since this is an increase
in the internal energy of the body, and
this energy is basically electromagnetic,
we can assume that , such as U ,
corresponds to an amount of
electromagnetic energy absorbed by the
body. Thus, we can consider as an
increase in the electromagnetic
energy absorbed by the body.
Consequently, in this case, we must
replace in Eq. (55) for( )
k
E
k
E
k
E U =
U
U U U + . If
U U << , the Eq. (55) reduces to
0
2
2
0
2
1
2
1 2 1
i
i
r
g
m
c m
n I
m

+

For << , Eq. (54) shows that
r r r
v c n = = and f c n
r
4
2
= in
the case of >> . In this case, if the
body is a Mumetal disk
( )
1 7
. 10 1 . 2 ; 100 000 , 105

= = m S gauss at
r

with radius R , ( )
2
0 2
1
R m I
i
= , the equation
above shows that the gravitational mass
of the disk is
( ) ( ) disk i disk g
m
f
R
m
0
4 4
13
1 10 12 . 1 1 2 1

+


Note that the effect of the
electromagnetic radiation applied upon
the disk is highly relevant, because in the
absence of this radiation the index of
refraction, present in equations above,
becomes equal to 1. Under these
circumstances, the possibility of strongly
reducing the gravitational mass of the
disk practically disappears. In addition,
the equation above shows that, in
practice, the frequency of the
radiation cannot be high, and that
extremely-low frequencies (ELF) are
most appropriated. Thus, if the frequency
of the electromagnetic radiation applied
upon the disk is
f
Hz f 1 . 0 = (See Fig. I (a))
and the radius of the disk is ,
and its angular speed
m R 15 . 0 =
( ) rpm s rad 000 , 100 ~ / 10 05 . 1
4
= , the
result is
( ) ( ) disk i disk g
m m
0
6 . 2
This shows that the gravitational mass of
a body can also be controlled by means
of its angular velocity.
In order to satisfy the condition
U U << , we must have dt U d dt dU << ,
where dt dU P
r
= is the radiation power.
By integrating this expression, we
get f P U
r
2 = . Thus we can conclude
that, for U U << , we must have
2
2
1
2 I f P
r
<< , i.e.,
f I P
r
2
<<
By dividing both members of the
expression above by the area ,
we obtain
2
4 r S =
2
2
4 r
f I
D
r

<<
Therefore, this is the necessary condition
in order to obtain . In the case
of the Mumetal disk, we must have
U U <<
( )
2 2 5
/ 10 m watts r D
r
<<
From Electrodynamics, we know
that a radiation with frequency f
propagating within a material with
electromagnetic characteristics , and
has the amplitudes of its waves
14
attenuated by e
1
=0.37 (37%) when it
penetrates a distance z, given by

( )

+
=
1 1
1
2
2
1

z
For >> , equation above reduces to
f
z
1
=
In the case of the Mumetal subjected to
an ELF radiation with frequency
, the value is .
Obviously, the thickness of the Mumetal
disk must be less than this value.
Hz f 1 . 0 = mm z 07 . 1 =
Equation (55) is general for all
types of electromagnetic fields including
gravitoelectromagnetic fields (See Fig. I
(b)).
Acceleration
Gravitoelectric
Field
Gravitomagnetic
Field
Fig. I (a) Experimental set-up in order to measure the
gravitational mass decreasing in the rotating Mumetal
disk. A sample connected to a dynamometer can measure
the decreasing of gravity above the disk. (b)
Gravitoelectromagnetic Field.
(b)




















(a)
























Transmitter
ELF electromagnetic radiation
Mumetal disk
Motor
Balance

The Maxwell-like equations for
weak gravitational fields are [9]

Quevedo, C. P. (1978) Eletromagnetismo

McGraw-Hill, p.269-270.

t
D
j H
B
t
B
E
D
G
G G
G
G
G
G

+ =
=

=
=
0 .
.
where
G G rG G
E D
0
4 = is the
gravitodisplacement field (
rG
is the
gravitoelectric relative permittivity of the
medium;
G 0
is the gravitoelectric
permittivity for free space and g E
G
=
is the gravitoelectric field intensity); is
the density of local rest mass in the local
rest frame of the matter;
G G rG G
H B
0
= is the gravitomagnetic
field (
rG

is the gravitomagnetic relative
permeability,
G 0
is the gravitomagnetic
permeability for free space and is
the gravitomagnetic field intensity;

G
H
G G G
E j = is the local rest-mass
current density in this frame (
G
is the
gravitoelectric conductivity of the
medium).
Then, for free space we can write
that

= = =
2
0 0 0
4 4 4
r
GM
g E D
G G G G G

But from the electrodynamics we know
that
2
4 r
q
E D

= =
By analogy we can write that
2
4 r
M
D
g
G

=
By comparing this expression with the
previous expression of , we get
G
D
2 1 2 8
0
. . 10 98 . 2
16
1

= = m N kg
G
G

which is the expression of the

gravitoelectric permittivity for free
space.
The gravitomagnetic permeability
for free space [10,11] is
kg m
c
G
G
26
2
0
10 73 3
16

= = .

We then convert Maxwell-like equations

15
for weak gravity into a wave equation for
free space in the standard way. We
conclude that the speed of Gravitational
Waves in free space is
c v
G G
= =
0 0
1

This means that both electromagnetic
and gravitational plane waves propagate
at the free space with the same speed.
Thus, the impedance for free space is
c
G
c
H
E
Z
G G G
G
G
G

16
0 0 0
= = = =
and the Poynting-like vector is
G G
H E S
r r r
=
For a plane wave propagating in the
vacuum, we have
G G G
H Z E = . Then, it
follows that
2
0
2 2
2
2
2
32 2 2
1
i
G
G
G
h
G
c
h
Z
E
Z
S

= = =
r r r
which is the power per unit area of a
harmonic plane wave of angular
frequency .
In classical electrodynamics the
density of energy in an electromagnetic
field, , has the following expression
e
W
2
0
2
1
2
0
2
1
H E W
r r e
+ =
In analogy with this expression we
define the energy density in a
gravitoelectromagnetic field, , as
follows
G
W
2
0
2
1
2
0
2
1
G G rG G G rG G
H E W + =
For free space we obtain
1 = =
rG rG

2
0 0
1 c
G G
=
c H E
G G G 0
=
and
G G G
H B
0
=
Thus, we can rewrite the equation of
as follows
G
W
G
G
G
G
G G
G
G
B B
B c
c
W
0
2
2
0
0
2
1
2 2
2
0
2
1
1

=

Since V
G G
W U = , (V is the volume of the
particle) and for free space we
can write (55) in the following form
1 =
r
n
( ) a m
c
B
m
c
W
m
i
G
G
i
G
g
55 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
0
2
2
0
2
0
2
2

+ =

+ =

where V
0 i
m = .
This equation shows how the
gravitational mass of a particle is altered
by a gravitomagnetic field.
A gravitomagnetic field, according
to Einstein's theory of general relativity,
arises from moving matter (matter
current) just as an ordinary magnetic
field arises from moving charges. The
Earth rotation is the source of a very
weak gravitomagnetic field given by
1 14 0
10
16

= s rad
r
M
B
Earth
G
Earth G
.
,

Perhaps ultra-fast rotating stars can

generate very strong gravitomagnetic
fields, which can make the gravitational
mass of particles inside and near the star
negative. According to (55a) this will
occur if
G G
c B
0
06 1. > . Usually,
however, gravitomagnetic fields
produced by normal matter are very
weak.
Recently Tajmar, M. et al., [12]
have proposed that in addition to
the London moment, ,
(
L
B
( )
11
10 1 1 2

= .
* *
e m B
L
; and
are the Cooper-pair mass and charge
respectively), a rotating superconductor
should exhibit also a large
gravitomagnetic field, , to explain an
apparent mass increase of Niobium
Cooper-pairs discovered by Tate et
al[
*
m
*
e
G
B
13,14]. According to Tajmar and Matos
[15], in the case of coherent matter,
is given by: where
G
B
2
0
2
gr G c G
B =
c

is the mass density of coherent matter
and
gr
is the graviphoton wavelength.
By choosing
gr
proportional to the local
density of coherent matter,
c
. i.e.,
16
c G
gr
gr
c m

0
2
1
=

=
h
we obtain

2
1
2 2
0
0
2
0
=
=

= =
c G
G c gr G c G
B
and the graviphoton mass, , is
gr
m
c m
c G gr
h
0
=
Note that if we take the case of no
local sources of coherent matter( ) 0 =
c
,
the graviphoton mass will be zero.
However, graviphoton will have non-zero
mass inside coherent matter( ) 0
c
.
This can be interpreted as a
consequence of the graviphoton gaining
mass inside the superconductor via the
Higgs mechanism due to the breaking of
gauge symmetry.
It is important to note that the
minus sign in the expression for
can be understood as due to the
change from the normal to the
coherent state of matter, i.e., a switch
between real and imaginary values
for the particles inside the material
when going from the normal to the
coherent state of matter. Consequently,
in this case the variable U in (55)
must be replaced by and not by
only. Thus we obtain
G
B
G
iU
G
U
( ) b m n
c m
U
m
i r
i
G
g
55 1 1 2 1
0
2
2
0

=
Since V
G G
W U = , we can write (55b)
for , in the following form 1 =
r
n
( ) c m
c
B
m
c
W
m
i
c G
G
i
c
G
g
55 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
0
2
2
0
2
0
2
2

where V
0 i c
m = is the local density
of coherent matter.
Note the different sign (inside
the square root) with respect to (55a).
By means of (55c) it is possible to
check the changes in the gravitational
mass of the coherent part of a given
material (e.g. the Cooper-pair fluid). Thus
for the electrons of the Cooper-pairs we
have

ie e ie
ie
e G
ie
ie
e G
G
ie ge
m m
m
c
m
m
c
B
m m

+ =
=

+ =
=

+ =
2
2
0
2
2
2
0
2
4
1 1 2
1 1 2

where
e
is the mass density of the
electrons.
In order to check the changes in
the gravitational mass of neutrons and
protons (non-coherent part) inside the
superconductor, we must use Eq. (55a)
and [Tajmar and
Matos, op.cit.]. Due to ,
that expression of can be rewritten in
the following form
2
0
2
gr G G
B =
1
2
0
=
gr c G

G
B
( )
c gr G G
B 2 2
2
0
= =
Thus we have
( )
in n in
in
n G
c n
in
in
n G
G
in gn
m m
m
c
m
m
c
B
m m

=
=

+ =
=

+ =
1
4
1 2
1 1 2
2
2
0
2 2
2
2
0
2
( )
ip p ip
ip
p G
c p
ip
ip
p G
G
ip gp
m m
m
c
m
m
c
B
m m

+ =
=

+ =
1
4
1 2
1 1 2
2
2
0
2 2
2
2
0
2
=
17
where
n
and
p
are the mass density
of neutrons and protons respectively.
In Tajmars experiment, induced
accelerations fields outside the
superconductor in the order of g 100 , at
angular velocities of about
were observed.
1
500

s rad.
Starting from
( )
r Gm g
initial g
= we
can write that
( )
( ) r m m G g g
g initial g
+ = + .
Then we get r m G g
g
= . For
( )
r Gm g g
initial g
= = it follows that
( ) i initial g g
m m m = = . Therefore a
variation of g g = corresponds to a
gravitational mass variation
0 i g
m m = .
Thus corresponds
to
g g g
4
10 1 100

=
0
4
10 1
i g
m m


On the other hand, the total
gravitational mass of a particle can be
expressed by
( ) ( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
2
2
2
2
2
c E N m N m N m N m
c E N m N m N m N
c E N m N m N m N
c E N m m N
m m N m m N
c E N m N m N m N m
p ie e e ip p p in n n i
p ie e e ip p p in n n
p ie e ip p in n
p ie e ie e
ip p ip p in n in n
p ge e gp p gn n g
+ + + =
= + + +
+ + + =
= + +
+ +
= + + + =

where E is the interaction
energy; , , are the number of
neutrons, protons and electrons
respectively. Since and
n
N
p
N
e
N
ip in
m m
p n
it follows that
p n
and
consequently the expression of
reduces to
g
m

( ) ( ) d c E N m N m N m m
p ie e e ip p p i g
55 2
2
0
+ +

Assuming that
ip p p ie e e
m N m N 2 << and
ip p p p
m N c E N 2
2
<< Eq. (55d) reduces to

( ) e m m m N m m
i p i ip p p i g
55 2
0
=
or
0 0 i p i g g
m m m m = =

By comparing this expression with
which has been
obtained from Tajmars experiment, we
conclude that at angular velocities
we have
i g
m m
4
10 1


1
500

s rad.
4
10 1


p

From the expression of we get

gp
m
( )

+ =
=

+ =
1
4
1 2
1 1 2
2
2
0
2 2
2
2
0
2
c
c
B
p G
c p
p G
G
p

where
p
V
p p
m = is the mass density
of the protons.
In order to calculate
p
V we need
to know the type of space (metric) inside
the proton. It is known that there are just
3 types of space: the space of positive
curvature, the space of negative
curvature and the space of null
curvature. The negative type is
obviously excluded since the volume of
the proton is finite. On the other hand,
the space of null curvature is also
excluded since the space inside the
proton is strongly curved by its enormous
mass density. Thus we can conclude that
inside the proton the space has positive
curvature. Consequently, the volume of
the proton,
p
V , will be expressed by the
3-dimensional space that corresponds to
a hypersphere in a 4-dimentional space,
i.e.,
p
V will be the space of positive
curvature the volume of which is [16]
3 2 2
2
0 0 0
3
2
p p
r d d d r

= =

sin sin
p
V
In the case of Earth, for example,
p Earth
<< .
Consequently the
curvature of the space inside the Earth is
approximately null (space approximately
flat). Then
3
3
4
Earth Earth
r V .
For we then get m r
p
15
10 4 1

= .
18
3 16
10 3 m kg
m
p
p
/ =
p
V

Starting from the London moment

it is easy to see that by precisely
measuring the magnetic field and the
angular velocity of the
superconductor, one can calculate the
mass of the Cooper-pairs. This has
been done for both classical and high-Tc
superconductors [17-20]. In the
experiment with the highest precision to
date, Tate et al, op.cit., reported a
disagreement between the theoretically
predicted Cooper-pair mass in Niobium
of 999992 0 2 . m m
e
*
= and its
experimental value of ( ) 21 000084 1. ,
where is the electron mass. This
anomaly was actively discussed in the
literature without any apparent solution
[
e
m
21-24].
If we consider that the apparent
mass increase from Tates
measurements results from an increase
in the gravitational mass of the
Cooper-pairs due to , then we can
write
*
g
m
G
B
( )
* * *
* *
* * * * *
*
* *
.
.
.
i i
i i
i g initial g g g
i
g
e
g
m m
m m
m m m m m
m
m
m
m
= + =
= =
= = =
= =
4
10 84 0
000084 1
000084 1
2
where .
4
10 84 0

= .
*

From (55c) we can write that

* * *
*
*
* *
i i
i
G
i g
m m
m
c
m m

+ =
=

+ =
2
2
0
2
4
1 1 2

where is the Cooper-pair mass
density.
*

Consequently we can write

4
2
2
0
2
10 84 0
4
1 1 2

=

= .
*
*
c
G

From this equation we then obtain

3 16
10 3 m kg /
*

Note that .
*

p
Now we can calculate the
graviphoton mass, , inside the
Cooper-pairs fluid (coherent part of the
superconductor) as
gr
m

kg c m
G gr
52
0
10 4

= h
*


Outside the coherent matter ( ) 0 =
c
the
graviphoton mass will be zero
( ) 0
0
= = c m
c G gr
h .
Substitution of
p
,
*
=
c
and
into the expression of
1
500

s rad.
p
gives

4
10 1


p

Compare this value with that one
obtained from the Tajmar experiment.
Therefore, the decrease in the
gravitational mass of the superconductor,
expressed by (55e), is
SC i SC i
SC i p SC i SC g
m m
m m m
, ,
, , ,
4
10

This corresponds to a decrease of the
order of in respect to the initial
gravitational mass of the superconductor.
However, we must also consider the
gravitational shielding effect, produced
by this decrease of in the
gravitational mass of the particles inside
the superconductor (see Fig. II).
Therefore, the total weight decrease in
the superconductor will be much greater
than . According to Podkletnov
experiment [
%
2
10

%
2
10

%
2
10

25] it can reach up to 1% of

the total weight of the superconductor
at
1
6 523

s rad. . ( ) rpm 5000 . In this
experiment a slight decrease (up to
% 1 ) in the weight of samples hung
above the disk (rotating at 5000rpm) was
19
observed. A smaller effect on the order
of has been observed when the
disk is not rotating. The percentage of
weight decrease is the same for samples
of different masses and chemical
compounds. The effect does not seem to
diminish with increases in elevation
above the disk. There appears to be a
shielding cylinder over the disk that
extends upwards for at least 3 meters.
No weight reduction has been observed
under the disk.
% .1 0
It is easy to see that the decrease
in the weight of samples hung above the
disk (inside the shielding cylinder over
the disk) in the Podkletnov experiment,
is also a consequence of the
Gravitational Shielding Effect showed in
Fig. II.
In order to explain the
Gravitational Shielding Effect, we start
with the gravitational field,

2
R
GM
g
g
=
r
, produced by a particle
with gravitational mass, . The
gravitational flux,
g
M
g
, through a spherical
surface, with area and radius S R ,
concentric with the mass , is given
by
g
M
( )
g
g
S S
g
GM R
R
GM
S g dS g S d g

4 4
2
2
= =
= = = =

r
r

Note that the flux
g
does not depend on
the radius R of the surface , i.e., it is
the same through any surface concentric
with the mass .
S
g
M
Now consider a particle with
gravitational mass, , placed into the
gravitational field produced by .
According to Eq. (41), we can
have
g
m
g
M
1
0
=
i g
m m , 0
0

i g
m m

, 1
0
=
i g
m m ,
etc. In the first case, the gravity

The quantization of the gravitational mass

(Eq.(33)) shows that for n =1 the gravitational
mass is not zero but equal to m
g(min)
.Although the
gravitational mass of a particle is never null,
Eq.(41) shows that it can be turned very close to
zero.
acceleration, g , upon the particle
g
m ,
is
2
R
GM
g g
g
+ = =
r
. This means that
in this case, the gravitational flux,
g
,
through the particle will be given by
g
m
g g
gS S g = = = , i.e., it will be
symmetric in respect to the flux when
0 i g
m m = (third case). In the second case
( ) 0
g
m , the intensity of the
gravitational force between and
will be very close to zero. This is
equivalent to say that the gravity
acceleration upon the particle with mass
g
m
g
M
g
m will be 0 g . Consequently we can
write that 0 = S g
g
. It is easy to see
that there is a correlation between
0 i g
m m and
g g
, i.e.,

_ If 1
0
=
i g
m m 1 =
g g


_ If 1
0
=
i g
m m 1 =
g g


_ If 0
0

i g
m m 0
g g


J ust a simple algebraic form contains the
requisites mentioned above, the
correlation
0 i
g
g
g
m
m

By making =
0 i g
m m we get

g g
=

This is the expression of the gravitational
flux through
g
m . It explains the
Gravitational Shielding Effect presented
in Fig. II.
As gS
g
= and S g
g
= , we obtain

g g =
This is the gravity acceleration inside
g
m .
Figure II (b) shows the gravitational
shielding effect produced by two particles
at the same direction. In this case, the
20
gravity acceleration inside and above the
second particle will be if g
2

1 2 i g
m m = .
These particles are representative
of any material particles or material
substance (solid, liquid, gas, plasma,
electrons flux, etc.), whose gravitational
mass have been reduced by the
factor . Thus, above the substance, the
gravity acceleration is reduced at the
same proportion
g
0 i g
m m = , and,
consequently, g g = , where is the
gravity acceleration below the substance.
g
Figure III shows an experimental
set-up in order to check the factor
above a high-speed electrons flux. As we
have shown (Eq. 43), the gravitational
mass of a particle decreases with the
increase of the velocity V of the particle.
Since the theory says that the
factor is given by the correlation
0 i g
m m then, in the case of an electrons
flux, we will have that
ie ge
m m = where
as function of the velocity V is
given by Eq. (43). Thus, we can write
that
ge
m

= = 1
1
1
2 1
2 2
c V
m
m
ie
ge

Therefore, if we know the velocity V of
the electrons we can calculate . ( is
the electron mass at rest).
ie
m
When an electron penetrates the
electric field (see Fig. III) an electric
force,
y
E
y E
E e F
r r
= , will act upon the
electron. The direction of will be
contrary to the direction of
E
F
r
y
E
r
. The
magnetic force which acts upon the
electron, due to the magnetic field
B
F
r
B
r
, is
and will be opposite to eVB F
B
=
r
E
F
r

because the electron charge is negative.
By adjusting conveniently B we
can make
E B
F F
r r
= . Under these
circumstances in which the total force is
zero, the spot produced by the electrons
flux on the surface returns from O to
and is detected by the
galvanometerG. That is, there is no
deflection for the cathodic rays. Then it
follows that
O
y
eE eVB= since
E B
F F
r r
= .
Then, we get
B
E
V
y
=
This gives a measure of the velocity of
the electrons.
Thus, by means of the
experimental set-up, shown in Fig. III, we
can easily obtain the velocity V of the
electrons below the body , in order to
calculate the theoretical value of . The
experimental value of can be obtained
by dividing the weight, g m
g
P =

of
the body for a voltage drop V
~
across
the anode and cathode, by its
weight, g P

m
g
= , when the voltage
V
~
is zero, i.e.,
g
g
P
P

=

According to Eq. (4), the gravitational
mass, , is defined by
g
M
2 2
1 c V
m
M
g
g

=
While Eq. (43) defines by means of
the following expression
g
m
0
2 2
1
1
1
2 1
i g
m
c V
m

=
In order to check the gravitational mass
of the electrons it is necessary to know
the pressure produced by the
electrons flux. Thus, we have put a
piezoelectric sensor in the bottom of the
glass tube as shown in Fig. III. The
electrons flux radiated from the cathode
is accelerated by the anode1 and strikes
on the piezoelectric sensor yielding a
pressure
P
P which is measured by
means of the sensor.



21






Fig. I I The Gravitational Shielding effect.
(a)
m
g
= m
i
m
g
< m
i
m
g
<0
(b)
g <g due to the gravitational
shielding effect produced by m
g 1

Particle 1
m
g 1

Particle 2
m
g 2

m
g 1
=x m
i 1
; x <1
g
g
P
2
=m
g 2
g = m
g 2
( x g )
P
1
=m
g 1
g =x m
i 1
g
g g g
g <g g g <0

22

Let us now deduce the correlation
between P and .
ge
M
When the electrons flux strikes
the sensor, the electrons transfer to it
a momentum .
Since
V M n q n Q
ge e e e
= =
V Fd t F Q 2 = = , we conclude that

=
e
ge
n
F
V
d
M
2
2
The amount of electrons, , is given
by
e
n
Sd n
e
= where is the amount of
electrons per unit of volume
(electrons/m

3
); is the cross-section
of the electrons flux and the
distance between cathode and
anode.
S
d
In order to calculate we will
start from the Langmuir-Child law and
the Ohm vectorial law, respectively
given by
e
n
d
V
J
2
3
~
= and V J
c
= , ( ) e
c
=
where is the thermoionic current
density;
J
2
3
1 6
10 33 2


= V m A . . . is
the called Childs constant; V
~
is the
voltage drop across the anode and
cathode electrodes, and V is the
velocity of the electrons.
By comparing the Langmuir-
Child law with the Ohm vectorial law
we obtain
V ed
V
2
2
3
~

=
Thus, we can write that
edV
S V
n
e
2
3
~

=
and
P
V V
ed
M
ge

=
2
3
2
2
~

Where S F P = , is the pressure to be

measured by the piezoelectric
sensor.
In the experimental set-up the
total force acting on the
piezoelectric sensor is the resultant of
all the forces produced by each
electrons flux that passes through
each hole of area in the grid of the
anode 1, and is given by
F

S
( )
2
3
2
2
V V M
ed
nS
PS n nF F
ge
~

= = =



where is the number of holes in the
grid. By means of the piezoelectric
sensor we can measure and
consequently obtain .
n
F
ge
M
We can use the equation
above to evaluate the magnitude of
the force to be measured by the
piezoelectric sensor. First, we will find
the expression of V as a function of
F
V
~
since the electrons speed V
depends on the voltage V
~
.
We will start from Eq. (46)
which is the general expression for
Lorentzs force, i.e.,
( )
0 i
g
m
m
B V q E q
dt
p d
r r r
r
+ =
When the force and the speed
have the same direction Eq. (6) gives
( )
dt
V d
c V
m
dt
p d
g
r
r
2
3
2 2
1
=
By comparing these expressions we
obtain
( )
B V q E q
dt
V d
c V
m
i
r r r
r
+ =

2
3
2 2
0
1
In the case of electrons accelerated
by a sole electric field , the
equation above gives
( 0 = B )
( )
ie ie
m
V e
c V
m
E e
dt
V d
a
~
2
1
2 2
= =
r r
r

Therefore, the velocity V of the
electrons in the experimental set-up
is
( )
ie
m
V e
c V ad V
~
2
1 2
4
3
2 2
= =
From Eq. (43) we conclude that
23









Dynamometer (D)





Fig. III Experimental set-up in order to check the factor above a high-speed electrons flux.
The set-up may also check the velocities and the gravitational masses of the electrons.
G
- +
V
~
B
+
y
V
~


E
y
y
O


+

i
G
R
F
e V e O
+

Anode 1 Filaments Cathode Anode 2
Piezoelectric
sensor


d
Collimators g= g g
Grid d Collimators


24

0
ge
m when . Substitution
of this value of V into equation above
givesV
c V 745 0.
KV 1 479.
~
. This is the
voltage drop necessary to be applied
across the anode and cathode
electrodes in order to obtain 0
ge
m .
Since the equation above can
be used to evaluate the velocity V of
the electrons flux for a givenV
~
, then
we can use the obtained value of V to
evaluate the intensity of B
r
in order to
produce
y
eE eVB = in the
experimental set-up. Then by
adjusting B we can check when the
electrons flux is detected by the
galvanometer . In this case, as we
have already seen, , and
the velocity of the electrons flux is
calculated by means of the
expression
G
y
eE eVB =
B E V
y
= . Substitution of
into the expressions of and
, respectively given by
V
ge
m
ge
M
ie ge
m
c V
m

= 1
1
1
2 1
2 2

and
2 2
1 c V
m
M
ge
ge

=
yields the corresponding values of
and which can be compared
with the values obtained in the
experimental set-up:
ge
m
ge
M

( )

=
= =

nS
ed
V V
F
M
m P P m m
ge
ie ie ge
2
2
~
2
3

where and are measured by
the dynamometer and is
measured by the piezoelectric
sensor.

P

P
D F
If we have and
2
16 0 m nS .

m d 08 0. = in the experimental set-up

then it follows that
2
3
14
10 82 1 V V M F
ge
~
. =
By varying V
~
from 10KV up to 500KV
we note that the maximum value for
occurs when F KV V 7 344.
~
. Under
these circumstances, and c V 7 0.
ie ge
m M 28 0. . Thus the maximum
value for is F
gf N F 190 9 1 .
max
Consequently, for KV V 500 =
max
~
, the
piezoelectric sensor must satisfy the
following characteristics:

Capacity 200gf
Readability 0.001gf

Let us now return to the
explanation for the findings of
Podkletnovs experiment. Next, we
will explain the decrease of 0.1% in
the weight of the superconductor
when the disk is only levitating but not
rotating.
Equation (55) shows how the
gravitational mass is altered by
electromagnetic fields.
The expression of for
r
n
>> can be obtained from (54),
in the form
( ) 56
4
2
f
c
v
c
n
r

= =
Substitution of (56) into (55) leads to
0
2
1
4
1 2 1
i
i
g
m
c m
U
f
m

+ =

This equation shows that atoms of

ferromagnetic materials with very-
high can have gravitational
masses strongly reduced by means
of Extremely Low Frequency (ELF)
electromagnetic radiation. It also
shows that atoms of superconducting
25
materials (due to very-high ) can
also have its gravitational masses
strongly reduced by means of ELF
electromagnetic radiation.
Alternatively, we may put
Eq.(55) as a function of the power
density ( or intensity ), , of the
radiation. The integration of (51)
gives
D
v D U V = . Thus, we can write
(55) in the following form:
( ) 57 1 1 2 1
0
2
3
2
i
r
g
m
c
D n
m

+ =

where V
0 i
m = .
For >> , will be given by
(56) and consequently (57) becomes
r
n
( ) 58 1
4
1 2 1
0
2
i g
m
c f
D
m

+ =

In the case of Thermal

radiation, it is common to relate
the energy of photons to
temperature, T, through the
relation,
T hf
where is the
Boltzmanns constant. On the other
hand it is known that
K J =

/ .
23
10 38 1
4
T D
B
=
where
4 2 8
10 67 5 K m watts
B
=

/ .
is the Stefan-Boltzmanns constant.
Thus we can rewrite (58) in the
following form
( ) a m
c
hT
m
i
B
g
58 1
4
1 2 1
0
2
3

+ =

Starting from this equation, we can

evaluate the effect of the thermal
radiation upon the gravitational mass
of the Copper-pair fluid, .
Below the transition temperature, ,
CPfluid g
m
,
c
T
( 5 0. <
c
T T ) the conductivity of the
superconducting materials is usually
larger than [ m S /
22
10 26]. On the
other hand the transition temperature,
for high critical temperature (HTC)
superconducting materials, is in the
order of . Thus (58a) gives K
2
10
( ) b m m
CPfluid i
CPfluid
CPfluid g
58 1
10 ~
1 2 1
,
2
9
,

+ =

Assuming that the number of Copper-

pairs per unit volume is
[
3 26
10

m N
27] we can write that
3 4
10 m kg Nm
CPfluid
/
*
=
Substitution of this value into (58b)
yields

CPfluid i
CPfluid i
CPfluid g
m m m
,
,
,
1 . 0 =

This means that the gravitational
masses of the electrons are
decreased of ~10%. This
corresponds to a decrease in the
gravitational mass of the
superconductor given by
( )
( )
999976 . 0
9 . 0
2
2
2
2
2
2
,
,
=
=

+ + +
+ + +
=
=

+ + +
+ + +
=
=
+ + +
+ + +
=
c E m m m
c E m m m
c E m m m
c E m m m
c E m m m N
c E m m m N
m
m
in ip ie
in ip ie
in ip ie
gn gp ge
in ip ie
gn gp ge
SC i
SC g

Where E is the interaction energy.
Therefore, a decrease of
( )
5
10 999976 0 1

. , i.e., approximately
in respect to the initial
gravitational mass of the
superconductor, due to the local
thermal radiation only. However, here
we must also consider the
gravitational shielding effect
produced, in this case, by the
decrease of in the
gravitational mass of the particles
inside the superconductor (see Fig.
II). Therefore the total weight
decrease in the superconductor will
%
3
10

%
3
10

26
be much greater than . This
can explain the smaller effect on the
order of observed in the
Podkletnov measurements when the
disk is not rotating.
%
3
10

% .1 0
Let us now consider an electric
current I through a conductor
subjected to electromagnetic
radiation with power density and
frequency .
D
f
Under these circumstances the
gravitational mass of the
electrons of the conductor, according
to Eq. (58), is given by
ge
m
e ge
m
c f
D
m

+ = 1
4
1 2 1
2

where . kg . m
e
31
10 11 9

=
Note that if the radiation upon
the conductor has extremely-low
frequency (ELF radiation) then
can be strongly reduced. For
example, if ,
and the conductor is made of copper
(
ge
m
Hz f
6
10

2 5
10 m / W D
0
; and
) then
m / S .
7
10 8 5 =
3
8900 m / kg =
1
4

c f
D

and consequently .
e ge
m . m 1 0
According to Eq. (6) the force
upon each free electron is given by

( )
E e
dt
V d
c V
m
F
ge
e
r
r
r
=

=
2
3
2 2
1


where E is the applied electric field.
Therefore, the decrease of
produces an increase in the velocity
of the free electrons and
consequently the drift velocity is
also increased. It is known that the
density of electric current through
a conductor [
ge
m
V
d
V
J
28] is given by
d e
V J
r r
=
where
e
is the density of the
free electric charges ( For cooper
conductors ).
Therefore increasing produces an
increase in the electric current
3 10
10 3 1 m / C .
e
=
d
V
I .
Thus if is reduced 10 times
ge
m
( )
e ge
m . m 1 0 the drift velocity is
increased 10 times as well as the
electric current. Thus we conclude
that strong fluxes of ELF radiation
upon electric/electronic circuits can
suddenly increase the electric
currents and consequently damage
these circuits.
d
V
Since the orbital electrons
moment of inertia is given
by ( )
2
j j i i
r m I = , where refers to
inertial mass and not to gravitational
mass, then the momentum
i
m

i
I L = of
the conductor orbital electrons are not
affected by the ELF radiation.
Consequently, this radiation just
affects the conductors free electrons
velocities. Similarly, in the case of
superconducting materials, the
momentum,
i
I L = , of the orbital
electrons are not affected by the
gravitomagnetic fields.
The vector ( )v U D
r
r
V = , which we
may define from (48), has the same
direction of the propagation vector k
r

and evidently corresponds to the
Poynting vector. Then can be
replaced by
D
r
H E
r r
.Thus we can write
( ) ( ) [ ] ( )
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1 E v v E E B E EH D = = = = .
For >> Eq. (54) tells us that
f v 4 = . Consequently, we obtain

f
E D
4
2
2
1
=
This expression refers to the
instantaneous values of and D E .
The average value for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E because E varies sinusoidaly
27
( is the maximum value for
m
E E ).
Substitution of the expression of
into (58) gives
D
( ) a m
E
f c
m
i g
59 1
4 4
1 2 1
0
2
2
3
2

+ =


Since 2
m rms
E E = and
2
2
1
2
m
E E = we
can write the equation above in the
following form
( ) a m
E
f c
m
i
rms
g
59 1
4 4
1 2 1
0
2
2
3
2

+ =


Note that for extremely-low
frequencies the value of in this
equation becomes highly expressive.
3
f
Since equation (59a)
can also be put as a function of
vB E =
B ,
i.e.,
( ) b m
B
c f
m
i g
59 1
4
1 2 1
0
2
4
2

+ =

For conducting materials with

; m / S
7
10 1 =
r
;
the expression (59b) gives
3 3
10 m / kg
0
4
12
1
10
1 2 1
i g
m B
f
m

+ =

This equation shows that the
decreasing in the gravitational mass
of these conductors can become
experimentally detectable for
example, starting from 100Teslas at
10mHz.
One can then conclude that an
interesting situation arises when a
body penetrates a magnetic field in
the direction of its center. The
gravitational mass of the body
decreases progressively. This is due
to the intensity increase of the
magnetic field upon the body while it
penetrates the field. In order to
understand this phenomenon we
might, based on (43), think of the
inertial mass as being formed by two
parts: one positive and another
negative. Thus, when the body
penetrates the magnetic field, its
negative inertial mass increases, but
its total inertial mass decreases, i.e.,
although there is an increase of
inertial mass, the total inertial mass
(which is equivalent to gravitational
mass) will be reduced.
On the other hand, Eq.(4)
shows that the velocity of the body
must increase as consequence of
the gravitational mass decreasing
since the momentum is conserved.
Consider for example a spacecraft
with velocity and gravitational
mass . If is reduced to
then the velocity becomes
s
V
g
M
g
M
g
m
( )
s g g s
V m M V =
In addition, Eqs. 5 and 6 tell us that
the inertial forces depend on .
Only in the particular case of
g
m
0 i g
m m = the expressions (5) and
(6) reduce to the well-known
Newtonian expression .
Consequently, one can conclude that
the inertial effects on the spacecraft
will also be reduced due to the
decreasing of its gravitational mass.
Obviously this leads to a new
concept of aerospace flight.
a m F
i 0
=
Now consider an electric
current ft sin i i 2
0
= through a
conductor. Since the current density,
J
r
, is expressed by E S d di J
r r r
= = ,
then we can write that
( ) ft sin S i S i E 2
0
= = . Substitution
of this equation into (59a) gives
( ) c m ft
f S c
i
m
i g
59 1 2
64
1 2 1
0
4
3 4 2 2 3
4
0

+ =


sin
If the conductor is a supermalloy rod
( ) mm 400 1 1 then 000 100,
r
=
(initial); ;
and . Substitution of
these values into the equation above
yields the following expression for the
3
8770 m / kg = m / S .
6
10 6 1 =
2 6
10 1 m S

=
28
gravitational mass of the supermalloy
rod
( )
( )
( ) sm i sm g
m ft f i m

+ =

1 2 sin 10 71 . 5 1 2 1
4 3 4
0
12

Some oscillators like the HP3325A
(Op.002 High Voltage Output) can
generate sinusoidal voltages with
extremely-low frequencies down to
and amplitude up to
20V (into
Hz f
6
10 1

=
50 load). The maximum
output current is .
pp
A .08 0
Thus, for ( )
pp
A . A . 08 0 04
Hz . f
6
10 25 2

<
i 0
0
=
and the equation
above shows that the gravitational
mass of the rod becomes negative at
2 2 = ft ; for at Hz . f
6
10 7 1


h . s . f t 8 40 10 47 1 4 1
5
= = it shows
that .
( ) ( ) sm i sm g
m m
This leads to the idea of the
Gravitational Motor. See in Fig. IV a
type of gravitational motor (Rotational
Gravitational Motor) based on the
possibility of gravity control on a
ferromagnetic wire.
It is important to realize that
this is not the unique way of
decreasing the gravitational mass of
a body. It was noted earlier that the
expression (53) is general for all
types of waves including non-
electromagnetic waves like sound
waves for example. In this case, the
velocity v in (53) will be the speed of
sound in the body and the intensity
of the sound radiation. Thus from (53)
we can write that
D
2
cv
D
c m
D
c m
p
i i

= =
V
It can easily be shown that
where v A f D
2 2 2
2 =
2
2 v P A = ;
3 2
0
2 cv c m
i

=
2
P p
Substitution of this expression into
(41) gives
( ) 60 1
2
1 2 1
0
2
3 2
2
i g
m
cv
P
m

+ =

2 13
m / N
This expression shows that in the
case of sound waves the decreasing
of gravitational mass is relevant for
very strong pressures only.
It is known that in the nucleus
of the Earth the pressure can reach
values greater than 10 . The
equation above tells us that sound
waves produced by pressure
variations of this magnitude can
cause strong decreasing of the
gravitational mass at the
surroundings of the point where the
sound waves were generated. This
obviously must cause an abrupt
decreasing of the pressure at this
place since pressure =weight /area =
m
g
g/area). Consequently a local
instability will be produced due to the
opposite internal pressure. The
conclusion is that this effect may
cause Earthquakes.
Consider a sphere of radius r
around the point where the sound
waves were generated (at
depth; the Earth's radius is ).
If the maximum pressure, at the
explosion place ( sphere of radius ),
is and the pressure
at the distance is
km ,000 1
km ,378 6
0
r
2 13
10 m / N P
max

km r 10 =
( )
2 9 2
0
10 m / N P r r P
max min
= then we can
consider that in the sphere
2 11
10 m / N P P P
min max
= .Thus assuming
and we can
calculate the variation of gravitational
mass in the sphere by means of the
equation of , i.e.,
s / m v
3
10
3 3
10 m / kg
A and P are respectively the
amplitude and maximum pressure
variation of the sound wave.
Therefore we readily obtain
g
m


29








Fig. IV - Rotational Gravitational Motor
One plate of ferromagnetic wire
of the Rotor
~
Axis
of the
Rotor
r
F =m
g
g = m
i
g
Ferromagnetic wire
P = m
i
g
i
Several plates of
ferromagnetic wire
Rotor of the Motor

+ = 1
64
1 2 1
3 4 2 2 3
4

f S c
i

ELF current
source


30


( )
kg V
cv
P
m
cv
P
m
m m m
i i
g initial g g
11
2
3 2
2
0
2
3 2
2
0
10 1
2
1 2
1
2
1 2 1

+ =
=

+ =
= =

The transitory loss of this great

amount of gravitational mass may
evidently produce a strong pressure
variation and consequently a strong
Earthquake.
Finally, we can evaluate the
energy necessary to generate those
sound waves. From (48) we can write
. Thus, the
released power is
2 16
10 m / W v P D
max max
=
( ) W r D P
max
21 2
0 0
10 4 =
and the energy E released at the
time interval t must be t P E
0
= .
Assuming we readily obtain s t
3
10

Megatons joules t P E
4 18
0
10 10 =
This is the amount of energy released
by an earthquake of magnitude 9
), i.e., ( 9 =
s
M
( )
joules . E
s
M . 18 44 1 5
10 10 74 1 =
+
.
The maximum magnitude in the
Richter scale is 12. Note that the sole
releasing of this energy at 1000km
depth (without the effect of
gravitational mass decreasing)
cannot produce an Earthquake, since
the sound waves reach 1km depth
with pressures less than 10N/cm
2
.
Let us now return to the Theory.
The equivalence between
frames of non-inertial reference and
gravitational fields assumed
i g
m m
because the inertial forces were given
by a m F
i i
r
r
= , while the equivalent
gravitational forces, by g m F
g g
r
r
= .
Thus, to satisfy the equivalence
( and g a
r r

g i
F F
r
) it

was necessary
that . Now, the inertial
force,
i g
m m
i
F
r
, is given by Eq.(6), and from
Eq.(13) we can obtain the
gravitational force,
g
F
r
. Thus,
g i
F F
r r

leads to
( )
( ) ( )
( ) 61
1 1
1
1
1
2
3
2
3
2
3
2 2 2 2
2
2 2
2
2 2
2 2
c V
m
g
c V
m
r
m
G
c V
m
c V r
m
G a
c V
m
g g g
g g g

r
r
whence results
( ) 62 g a
r r

Consequently, the equivalence is

evident, and therefore Einstein's
equations from the General Relativity
continue obviously valid.
The new expression for
(Eqs. (5) and (6)) shows that the
inertial forces are proportional to the
gravitational mass, . This means
that these forces result from the
gravitational interaction between the
particle and the other gravitational
masses of the Universe, just as
Machs principle predicts. Therefore
the new expression for the inertial
forces incorporates the Machs
principle into Gravitation Theory, and
furthermore reveals that the inertial
effects upon a particle can be
reduced because, as we have seen,
the gravitational mass may be
reduced. When the
nonrelativistic equation for inertial
forces,
i
F
g
m
0 i g
m m =
a m F
g i
r
r
= , reduces to
a m F
i i
r
r
0
= . This is the well-known
Newton's second law for motion.
In Einstein's Special Relativity
Theory the motion of a free-particle is
described by means of 0 = S [29].
Now based on Eq. (1), 0 = S will be
given by the following expression
( ) 63 . 0

= = ds c m S
g

which also describes the motion of
the particle inside the gravitational
31
field. Thus, Einstein's equations from
the General Relativity can be derived
starting from ( ) 0 = +
g m
S S , where
and refer to the action of the
gravitational field and the action of
the matter, respectively [
g
S
m
S
30].
g
S The variations and
m
S can
be written as follows [31]:
( ) ( ) 64
16
2
1
3
=

d g g R g R
G
c
S
ik
ik ik g

( ) 65
2
1
=

d g g T
c
S
ik
ik m

where is the Ricci's tensor; the
metric tensor and the matter's
energy-momentum tensor:
ik
R
ik
g
ik
T
( ) ( ) 66
ik k i g ik
Pg P T + + =
where P is the pressure and
is now, the density of gravitational
energy, , of the particle;
2
c
g g
=
g
E
g
is then
the density of gravitational mass of
the particle, i.e., at the volume
unit.
g
M
Substitution of (64) and (65) into
0 = +
g m
S S yields
( ) 0
16
4
8
2
1
3
=

d g g T R g R
G
c
ik
ik
c
G
ik ik
whence,
( ) 67 0
4
8
2
1
=

ik
c
G
ik ik
T R g R

because the
ik
g are arbitrary.
Equations (67) in the following form
( ) 68
4
8
2
1
ik
c
G
ik ik
T R g R

=
or
( ) 69 .
4
8
2
1 k
i
c
G k
i
k
i
T R g R

=
are the Einstein's equations from the
General Relativity.
It is known that these equations
are only valid if the spacetime is
continuous. We have shown at the
beginning of this work that the
spacetime is not continuous it is
quantized. However, the spacetime
can be considered approximately
continuous when the quantum
number is very large (Classical
limit). Therefore, just under these
circumstances the Einstein's
equations from the General Relativity
can be used in order to classicalize
the quantum theory by means of
approximated description of the
spacetime.
n
Later on we will show that the
length of Eq. (29) is given by
min
d
( ) ( ) 70 10
~ ~
34 3
min
2
1
m c G k l k d
planck

= = h
(See Eq. (100)). On the other hand,
we will find in the Eq. (129) the length
scale of the initial Universe, i.e.,
. Thus, from the Eq. (29)
we get:
m d
initial
14
10

20 34 14
min
10 10 10 = =

d d n
initial

this is the quantum number of the
spacetime at initial instant. That
quantum number is sufficiently large
for the spacetime to be considered
approximately continuous starting
from the beginning of the Universe.
Therefore Einstein's equations can be
used even at the Initial Universe.
Now, it is easy to conclude why
the attempt to quantize gravity
starting from the General Relativity
was a bad theoretical strategy.
Since the gravitational
interaction can be repulsive, besides
attractive, such as the
electromagnetic interaction, then the
graviton must have spin 1 (called
graviphoton) and not 2.
Consequently, the gravitational forces
are also gauge forces because they
are yielded by the exchange of the
so-called "virtual" quanta of spin 1,
such as the electromagnetic forces
and the weak and strong nuclear
forces.
Let us now deduce the Entropy
Differential Equation starting from Eq.
(55). Comparison of Eqs. (55) and
(41) shows that pc Un
r
= . For small
velocities, i.e., ( ) c V << , we have
. Under these
2
0
c m Un
i r
<<
32
circumstances, the development of
Eq. (55) in power of( )
2
0
c m Un
i r
gives
( ) 71
0
2
2
0
0 i
i
r
i g
m
c m
Un
m m

=
In the particular case of thermal
radiation, it is usual to relate the
energy of the photons to the
temperature, through the relationship
kT h where K J . k
23
10 38 1

= is
the Boltzmann's constant. Thus, in
that case, the energy absorbed by the
particle will be kT h U = ,
where is a particle-dependent
absorption/emission coefficient.
Therefore, Eq.(71) may be rewritten
in the following form:
( ) 72
0
2
2
2
2
0 i
r
i g
m
m
T
c
k n
m m

=

0 i

For electrons at T=300K, we have
17
2
2
2
2
10

r
T
c
k n

e
m
Comparing (72) with (18), we obtain
( ) 73
2
1
0
2
2
.
i
r
Ki
m
T
c
k n
E

=

The derivative of with respect to
temperature T is
Ki
E
( ) ( ) (74
0
2
i r
Ki
m T c k n
E
=

)
T
Thus,
( )
( ) 75
2
0
2
c m
kT n
T
E
T
i
r Ki

=

Substitution of into (75)

gives
0 i i Ki
E E E =
( )
( ) 76
2
0
2
0
c m
kT n
T
E
T
E
T
i
r i i

=

By comparing the Eqs.(76) and (73)

and considering that 0
0
= T E
i

because does not depend on
( ) ( ) 77 2
Ki i
E T E T =
However, Eq.(18) shows that
g i Ki
E E E = 2 .Therefore Eq.(77) becomes
0 i
E T ,
the Eq.(76) reduces to
( ) ( ) 78 T E T E
i i g
E =
Here, we can identify the energy
with the free-energy of the system-F
and with the internal energy of
the system-U. Thus we can write the
Eq.(78) in the following form:
i
E
g
E
( ) ( ) 79 T F U T F =
This is the well-known equation of
Thermodynamics. On the other hand,
remembering that U Q + = (1
st
principle of Thermodynamics) and
( ) 80 TS U F =
(Helmholtz's function), we can easily
obtain from (79), the following
equation
( ) 81 . S T Q + =
0 = For isolated systems, , we have
( ) 82 S T Q =
which is the well-known Entropy
Differential Equation.
Let us now consider the
Eq.(55) in the ultra-relativistic case
where the inertial energy of the
particle is much larger than
its inertial energy at rest .
Comparison of (4) and (10) leads to
2
c M E
i i
=
2
0
c m
i
2
c V E p
i
= which, in the ultra-
relativistic case, gives
c M c E c V E p
i i i
=
2
. On the other
hand, comparison of (55) and (41)
shows that Un pc
r
=
2
0
2
c m c M pc Un
i i r
>> =
. Thus
. Consequently,
Eq.(55) reduces to

( ) 83 2
2
0
c Un m m
r i g
=

Therefore, the action for such
particle, in agreement with the Eq.(2),
is
33
( )
[ ] ( ) 84 1 2 1
2
1
1
2
2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2

+ =
t
t
r i
t
r i
t
. dt c V Un c V c m
1 2
1
2
1
2 2 2 2

= + =
= =
t
t
g
dt c V c c Un m
dt c V c m S
The integrant function is the
Lagrangean, i.e.,
( )
2 2 2 2 2
85 1 2 1
0
c V Un c V c m L
r i
+ =
Starting from the Lagrangean we can
find the Hamiltonian of the particle, by
means of the well-known general
formula:
( ) . L V L V H =
The result is
( )
( ) 86
1
2 4
1
2 2
2 2
2 2
2
0
.

=
c V
c V
Un
c V
c m
H
r
i
The second term on the right hand
side of Eq.(86) results from the
particle's interaction with the
electromagnetic field. Note the
similarity between the obtained
Hamiltonian and the well-known
Hamiltonian for the particle in an
electromagnetic field [32]:

( ) 87 1
2 2 2
0
. Q c V c m H
i
+ =

in which is the electric charge and Q
, the field's scalar potential. The
quantity Q expresses, as we
know, the particle's interaction with
the electromagnetic field in the same
way as the second term on the right
hand side of the Eq. (86).
It is therefore evident that it is
the same quantity, expressed by
different variables.
Thus, we can conclude that, in
ultra-high energy conditions
( )
2
0
2
c m c M Un
i i r
> , the gravitational
and electromagnetic fields can
be described by the same
Hamiltonian, i.e., in these
circumstances they are unified !
It is known that starting from
that Hamiltonian we may obtain a
complete description of the
electromagnetic field. This means
that from the present theory for
gravity we can also derive the
equations of the electromagnetic
field.
Due to the
second term on the right hand side of
Eq.(86) can be written as follows
2
c M pc Un
i r
=
( )
( )
2 2
0
0
2
2 2
2 2
2 2
2 2
1 4
4
1
2 4
1
2 4
c V r
Q Q
R
Q Q
Q
c M
c V
c V
c V
c V
pc
i

= =
=

=
=

whence
( )
r
Q Q
c M c V
i
0
2 2 2
4
2 4

=
The factor ( ) 2 4
2 2
c V becomes
equal to 2 in the ultra-relativistic case,
then it follows that
( ) 88
4
2
0
2
r
Q Q
c M
i

=
From (44), we know that there is a
minimum value for given by
i
M
( ) ( ) min i min i
m M = . Eq.(43) shows that
) ( ) (min min 0 i g
m m = and Eq.(23) gives
( ) max max min g
cd h cL h m 8 3 8 = = .
Thus we can write
( ) ( )
( ) 89 8 3
0 max min min
cd h m M
i i
= =
According to (88) the value
is correlated to
( )
2
2 c M
min i
( )
max min min
r Q r Q Q
0
2
0
4 4 = ,
i.e.,
( )
( ) 90 2
4
2
0
2
c M
r
Q
min i
max
min
=

where is the minimum electric

charge in the Universe ( therefore
equal to minimum electric charge of
the quarks, i.e.,
min
Q
e
3
1
); is the
maximum distance between and
max
r
Q
Q , which should be equal to the so-
34
called "diameter", , of the visible
Universe ( where is obtained
from the Hubble's law for , i.e.,
). Thus, from (90) we readily
obtain
c
d
c c
l d 2 =
c
l
c V =
1
= H
~
c l
c
( )
( )
( ) 91
96
24
3
1
1 2
0
0
e
d H
~
hc
d d hc Q
max
max c min
=
= =
= =

whence we find
m . d
max
30
10 4 3 =
This will be the maximum "diameter" that
the Universe will reach. Consequently,
Eq.(89) tells us that the elementary
quantum of matter is

( )
kg cd h m
i
73
0
10 9 3 8 3

= = .
max min

This is, therefore, the smallest indivisible
particle of matter.
Considering that, the inertial mass
of the Observable Universe is
kg G H c M
U
53
0
3
10 2 = and that its volume
is ( )
3 79 3
0
3
4
3
3
4
10 m H c R V
U U
= = ,
where is the Hubble
constant, we can conclude that the
number of these particles in the
Observable Universe is
1 18
0
10 75 . 1

= s H
( )
particles
m
M
n
i
U
U
125
min 0
10 =
By dividing this number by , we get
U
V
3 46
/ 10 m particles
V
n
U
U

Obviously, the dimensions of the

smallest indivisible particle of matter
depend on its state of compression. In
free space, for example, its volume is
U U
n V . Consequently, its radius is
m n R
U U
15
3
10

.
If particles with diameter N fill
all space of then . Thus, if
then the number of particles,
with this diameter, necessary to fill
all is . Since the
number of smallest indivisible particles of
matter in the Universe is
3
1m 1
3
= N
m
15
10

3
1m particles N
45
10
3 46
/ 10 m particles V n
U U
we can conclude
that these particles fill all space in the
Universe, by forming a Continuous
4

Universal Medium or Continuous
Universal Fluid (CUF), the density of
which is
( )
3 27
min 0
/ 10 m kg
V
m n
U
i U
CUF

=
Note that this density is much smaller
than the density of the Intergalactic
Medium ( )
3 26
/ 10 m kg
IGM

.
The extremely-low density of the
Continuous Universal Fluid shows that its
local gravitational mass can be strongly
affected by electromagnetic fields
(including gravitoelectromagnetic fields),
pressure, etc. (See Eqs. 57, 58, 59a,
59b, 55a, 55c and 60). The density of
this fluid is clearly not uniform along the
Universe, since it can be strongly
compressed in several regions (galaxies,
stars, blackholes, planets, etc). At the
normal state (free space), the mentioned
fluid is invisible. However, at super
compressed state it can become visible
by giving origin to the known matter
since matter, as we have seen, is
quantized and consequently, formed by
an integer number of elementary
quantum of matter with mass .
Inside the proton, for example, there are
( ) min 0 i
m
( )
45
min 0
10 =
i p p
m m n elementary quanta
of matter at supercompressed state, with
volume
p proton
n V and radius
m n R
p p
30
3
10

.
Therefore, the solidification of the
matter is just a transitory state of this
Universal Fluid, which can back to the
primitive state when the cohesion
conditions disappear.
Let us now study another aspect
of the present theory. By combination of
gravity and the uncertainty principle we
will derive the expression for the Casimir
force.
An uncertainty
i
m in
produces an uncertainty
i
m
p in and p

4
At very small scale.
35
therefore an uncertainty
g
m in ,
which according to Eq.(41) , is given
by
g
m
( ) 92 1 1 2
2
i
i
i g
m
c m
p
m m

+ =
From the uncertainty principle for
position and momentum, we know
that the product of the uncertainties of
the simultaneously measurable
values of the corresponding position
and momentum components is at
least of the magnitude order of ,
i.e.,
h
h ~ r p
Substitution of r ~ p h into (92) yields
( ) 93 1 1 2
2
i
i
i g
m
r
c m
m m

+ =
h
Therefore if
( ) 94
c m
r
i

h
<<
then the expression (93) reduces to:
( ) 95
2
rc
m
g

h

Note that
g
m does not depend on
.
g
m
Consequently, the uncertainty
F in the gravitational
force
2
r m Gm F
g g
= , will be given by

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 96
2
3 2 2
2

=
=

=
c
G
r
hc
r
r
m m
G F
g g
h

The amount ( ) m . c G
35 3
10 61 1
2
1

= h
is called the Planck length, ,( the
length scale on which quantum
fluctuations of the metric of the space
time are expected to be of order
unity). Thus, we can write the
expression of
planck
l
F as follows

( )
( )
( )
( ) 97
480
960
480
2
4
0
2
2 4
2
4
r
hc A
l
r
hc
l
r
hc
F
planck
planck

=
=

=
=

=
or
( ) 98
480
4
0
0
r
hc A
F

=

which is the expression of the Casimir
force for ( )
2 2
0
960
planck
l A A = = .
This suggests that is an
elementary area related to the
existence of a minimum length
0
A
planck min
l k
~
d = what is in accordance
with the quantization of space (29)
and which points out to the existence
of .
min
d
It can be easily shown that the
minimum area related to is the
area of an equilateral triangle of side
length ,i.e.,
min
d
min
d
( ) ( )
2 2
4
3 2
4
3
planck min min
l k
~
d A = =
On the other hand, the maximum
area related to is the area of a
sphere of radius ,i.e.,
min
d
min
d
2 2 2
planck min max
l k
~
d A = =
Thus, the elementary area
( ) 99
2 2 2
0 planck A min A
l k
~
d A = =
must have a value between and
, i.e.,
min
A
max
A
< <
A 4
3
The previous assumption that
( )
2 2
0
960
planck
l A = shows that
2 2
960 = k
~
A
what means that
9 14 6 5 . k
~
. < <
Therefore we conclude that
( ) 100 10
34
. m l k
~
d
planck min

=
The esimal n area after is
0
A
36
( ) ( ) 101
0
2 2
A n nd A
min A
= =
It can also be easily shown that
the minimum volume related to
is the volume of a regular tetrahedron
of edge length , i.e.,
min
d
min
d
( ) ( )
3 3
12
2 3
12
2
planck min min
l k
~
d = =
The maximum volume is the volume
of a sphere of radius , i.e.,
min
d
( ) ( )
3 3
3
4
3
3
4
planck min max
l k
~
d

= =
Thus, the elementary volume
3 3 3
0 planck V min V
l k
~
d = = must have a
value between
min
and
max
, i.e.,
( )
3
4
12
2
< <
V
On the other hand, the
volume after
esimal n
0
is
( ) . n ,..., , , n n nd
max min V
3 2 1
0
3 3
= = =
The existence of given by
(26), i.e.,
max
n
( )
64 30
10 10 4 3 =
= = =
planck
min max min max max
l k
~
.
d d L L n
shows that the Universe must have a
finite volume whose value at the
present stage is
( )
3 3 3
0
3
p V min V min p Up Up
d d d d n = = =
where is the present length scale
of the Universe. In addition as
p
d
( )
3
4
12
2
< <
V
we conclude that the
Universe must have a polyhedral
space topology with volume between
the volume of a regular tetrahedron
of edge length and the volume of
the sphere of diameter .
p
d
p
d
A recent analysis of
astronomical data suggests not only
that the Universe is finite, but also
that it has a dodecahedral space
topology [33,34], what is in strong
accordance with the previous
theoretical predictions.
From (22) and (26) we have
that . d n d L
min max max max
3 3= = Since
(100) gives and
we conclude that . From
the Hubble's law and (22) we have
that
m d
min
34
10

64
10
max
n
m L
max
30
10

( ) ( )
max max max max
L H
~
d H
~
l H
~
V 2 3 2 = = =

where
1 18
10 7 1

= s . H
~
. Therefore we
obtain
s m V /
max
12
10 .

This is the speed upper limit imposed
by the quantization of velocity (Eq.
36). It is known that the speed upper
limit for real particles is equal to c .
However, also it is known that
imaginary particles can have
velocities greater than
(Tachyons). Thus, we conclude that
is the speed upper limit for
imaginary particles in our ordinary
space-time. Later on, we will see that
also exists a speed upper limit to the
imaginary particles in the imaginary
space-time.
c
max
V
Now, multiplying Eq. (98) (the
expression of ) by we obtain
0
F
2
n
( ) 102
480 480
4 4
0
2
0
2
r
hc A
r
hc A n
F n F

= =

This is the general expression of the
Casimir force.
Thus, we conclude that the
Casimir effect is just a gravitational
effect related to the uncertainty
principle.
Note that Eq. (102) arises only
when
i
m and
i
m satisfy Eq.(94). If
only
i
m satisfies Eq.(94), i.e.,
rc m
i
h << but rc m
i
h >> then
g
m and
g
m will be respectively
given by

i g g
m m and rc m h 2

Consequently, the expression (96)
becomes
37
( ) ( )
( )
( ) 103
4 3
4
2
3 2 3

=
=

=
c
E G
r
hc
c
c m G
r
hc
c
m G
r
hc
F
i i

However, from the uncertainty

principle for energy and time we know
that
( ) 104 t ~ E h
Therefore, we can write the
expression (103) in the following
form:
( )
( )
( ) 105
1
1
2
3
3 3

=
=

=
c t
l
r
hc
c t c
G
r
hc
F
planck

h
From the General Relativity Theory
we know that
00
g cdt dr = . If the
field is weak then
2
00
2 1 c g = and
( ) ( )
2 2 2
1 1 c r Gm cdt c cdt dr = + = .
For 1
2 2
<< c r Gm we obtain cdt dr .
Thus, if then r d dr = t d dt = . This
means that we can change ( ) c t by
( r) into (105). The result is
( )
( )
( )
4
0
2
2 4
2
4
960
480
480
1
0
2
1
r
hc A
l
r
hc
l
r
hc
F
A
planck
planck

=
=

=
=

=
43 42 1
or
4
0
0
960 r
hc A
F

=

whence
( ) 106
960
4
r
hc
A
F

=

Now, the Casimir force is repulsive,
and its intensity is half of the intensity
previously obtained (102).
Consider the case when both
i
m
and
i
m do not satisfy Eq.(94), and
rc m
rc m
i
i


h
h
>>
>>
In this case,
i g
m m and
i g
m m . Thus,
( )
( )( )
( )
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
4
0 2
2 4
2
4
2 2 2 3 2
2
4
2
2 2
2
1920
960
1920
2
1
1
r
hc A
l
r
hc
l
r
hc
t c r
hc
c
G
r
t
c
G
r
c E c E
G
r
m m
G F
planck
planck
i i

=
=

=
=

=
=

=
h h
whence
( ) 107
1920
4
r
hc
A
F

=

The force will be attractive and its
intensity will be the fourth part of the
intensity given by the first expression
(102) for the Casimir force.
We can also use this theory to
explain some relevant cosmological
phenomena. For example, the recent
discovery that the cosmic expansion
of the Universe may be accelerating,
and not decelerating as many
cosmologists had anticipated [35].
We start from Eq. (6) which
shows that the inertial forces,
i
F
r
,
whose action on a particle, in the
case of force and speed with same
direction, is given by
( )
a
c V
m
F
g
i
r
r
2
3
2 2
1
=
Substitution of given by (43) into
the expression above gives
g
m
( ) ( )
a m
c V c V
F
i i
r
r
0
2
2 2 2 2
1
2
1
3
2
3

=
whence we conclude that a particle
with rest inertial mass, , subjected
to a force,
0 i
m
i
F
r
, acquires an
acceleration a
r
given by
38
( ) ( )
0
2
2 2 2 2
1
2
1
3
2
3 i
i
m
c V c V
F
a

=
r
r
By substituting the well-known
expression of Hubbles law for
velocity, , ( is
the Hubble constant) into the
expression of , we get the
acceleration for any particle in the
expanding Universe, i.e.,
l H V
~
=
1 18
10 7 1

= s H .
~
a
r
( ) ( )
0
2
2 2 2 2 2 2
~
1
2
~
1
3
2
3 i
i
m
c l H c l H
F
a

=
r
r
Obviously, the distance l increases
with the expansion of the Universe.
Under these circumstances, it is easy
to see that the term
( ) ( )

2
2 2 2 2 2 2
~
1
2
~
1
3
2
3
c l H c l H
decreases, increasing the acceleration of
the expanding Universe.
Let us now consider the
phenomenon of gravitational
deflection of light.
A distant stars light ray,
under the Suns gravitational force
field describes the usual central force
hyperbolic orbit. The deflection of the
light ray is illustrated in Fig. V, with
the bending greatly exaggerated for a
better view of the angle of deflection.
The distance CS is the
distance of closest approach. The
angle of deflection of the light ray,
d
,
is shown in the Figure V and is
. 2 =
where is the angle of the
asymptote to the hyperbole. Then, it
follows that
( ) 2 2 tan tan tan = =
From the Figure V we obtain
. tan
c
V
y
=













Fig. V Gravitational deflection of light about
the Sun.
S C

Photons

Since and are very small we can
write that
2 = and
c
V
y
=
Then
c
V
y
2
=
Consider the motion of the
photons at some time after it has
passed the point of closest approach.
We impose Cartesian Co-ordinates
with the origin at the point of closest
approach, the x axis pointing along its
path and the y axis towards the Sun.
The gravitational pull of the Sun is
t
2
r
M M
G P
gp gS
=
where is the relativistic
gravitational mass of the photon and
the relativistic gravitational mass
of the Sun. Thus, the component in a
perpendicular direction is
gp
M
gS
M
2 2 2
2 2 2
2
sin
t c d
d
t c d
M M
G
r
M M
G F
gp gS
gp gS
y
+
+
=
= =
According to Eq. (6) the expression of
the force is
y
F
( )
dt
dV
c V
m
F
y
y
gp
y

=
2
3
2 2
1
By substituting Eq. (43) into this
expression, we get
39
( )
( )
dt
dV
M
c V
c V
F
y
ip
y
y
y

=
2
3
2 2
2 2
1
2
1
3
For , we can write this
expression in the following form
c V
y
<<
( ) dt dV M F
y ip y
= . This force acts on
the photons for a time causing an
increase in the transverse velocity
t
dt
M
F
dV
ip
y
y
=
Thus the component of transverse
velocity acquired after passing the
point of closest approach is
( )
( )

=
=
+

=

ip
gp gS
ip
gp gS
gS
ip
gp
y
m
m
dc
GM
M
M
dc
GM
dt
t c d
GM d
M
M
V
2
3
2 2 2
Since the angle of deflection
is given by
c
V
y
2
2 = =
we readily obtain

= =
ip
gp gS y
m
m
d c
GM
c
V
2
2 2

If 2 =
ip gp
m m , the expression above
gives
d c
GM
gS
2
4
=
As we know, this is the correct
formula indicated by the experimental
results.
Equation (4) says that
ip
ip
gp
m
c m
p
m

+ = 1 1 2 1
2
Since 2 =
ip gp
m m then, by making
h p = into the equation above we
get
i
c
hf
m
ip

+ =
2
3
2
Due to 2 =
ip gp
m m we get
i
c
hf
m
gp

+ =
2
3
4
This means that the gravitational and
inertial masses of the photon are
imaginaries, and invariants with
respect to speed of photon, i.e.
ip ip
m M = and .On the other
hand, we can write that
gp gp
m M =
( ) ( )
i
c
hf
m m m
imaginary ip real ip ip

= + =
2
3
2

and
( ) ( )
i
c
hf
m m m
imaginary gp real gp gp

= + =
2
3
4
This means that we must have
( ) ( )
0 = =
real gp real ip
m m
The phenomenon of gravitational
deflection of light about the Sun
shows that the gravitational
interaction between the Sun and the
photons is attractive. Thus, due to the
gravitational force between the Sun
and a photon can be expressed by
( ) ( )
2
r m M G F
imaginary gp Sun g
= , where
)
is a quantity positive and
imaginary, we conclude that the
force
(imaginary gp
m
F will only be attractive if the
matter ( ) has negative
imaginary gravitational mass.
(Sun g
M
)
The Eq. (41) shows that if the
inertial mass of a particle is null then its
gravitational mass is given by
c p m
g
= 2
where p is the momentum variation due
to the energy absorbed by the particle. If
the energy of the particle is invariant,
then 0 = p and, consequently, its
gravitational mass will also be null. This
is the case of the photons, i.e., they have
an invariant energy and a momentum hf
h . As they cannot absorb additional
energy, the variation in the momentum
will be null ( ) 0 = p and, therefore, their
gravitational masses will also be null.
However, if the energy of the
particle is not invariant (it is able to
absorb energy) then the absorbed
energy will transfer the amount of motion
40
(momentum) to the particle, and
consequently its gravitational mass will
be increased. This means that the
motion generates gravitational mass.
On the other hand, if the
gravitational mass of a particle is null
then its inertial mass, according to Eq.
(41), will be given by
c
p
m
i

=
5
2
From Eqs. (4) and (7) we get
V
c
p
V
c
E
p
g

=
0
2
Thus we have
V
c
p
m
g

=
2
0
2
and V
c
p
m
i

=
2
0
5
2

Note that, like the gravitational mass, the
inertial mass is also directly related to the
motion, i.e., it is also generated by the
motion.
Thus, we can conclude that is the
motion, or rather, the velocity is what
makes the two types of mass.
In this picture, the fundamental
particles can be considered as
immaterial vortex of velocity; it is the
velocity of these vortexes that causes the
fundamental particles to have masses.
That is, there exists not matter in the
usual sense; but just motion. Thus, the
difference between matter and energy
just consists of the diversity of the motion
direction; rotating, closed in itself, in the
matter; ondulatory, with open cycle, in
the energy (See Fig. VI).
Under this context, the Higgs
mechanism

appears as a process, by
which the velocity of an immaterial vortex
can be increased or decreased by

imaginary ip
)

The Standard Model is the name given to

the current theory of fundamental particles and
how they interact. This theory includes: Strong
interaction and a combined theory of weak and
electromagnetic interaction, known as
electroweak theory. One part of the Standard
Model is not yet well established. What causes
the fundamental particles to have masses? The
simplest idea is called the Higgs mechanism. This
mechanism involves one additional particle,
called the Higgs boson, and one additional force
type, mediated by exchanges of this boson.

making the vortex (particle) gain or lose
mass. If real motion is what makes real
mass then, by analogy, we can say that
imaginary mass is made by imaginary
motion. This is not only a simple
generalization of the process based on
the theory of the imaginary functions, but
also a fundamental conclusion related to
the concept of imaginary mass that, as it
will be shown, provides a coherent
explanation for the materialization of the
fundamental particles, in the beginning of
the Universe.
It is known that the simultaneous
disappearance of a pair
(electron/positron) liberates an amount of
energy, , under the form of
two photons with frequency , in such a
way that
( )
2
0
2 c m
real e i
f

( )
hf c m
real e i
2 2
2
0
=
Since the photon has imaginary masses
associated to it, the phenomenon of
transformation of the energy
into suggests that the imaginary
energy of the photon, m ,
comes from the transformation of
imaginary energy of the electron,
, just as the real energy of
the photon, , results from the
transformation of real energy of the
electron, i.e.,
( )
2
0
2 c m
real e i
hf 2
( )
2
c
(
2
0
c m
imaginary e i
hf

( ) ( )
( )
hf c m
c m c m
imaginary p i
real e i imaginary e i
2 2
2 2
2
0
2
0
2
0
+ =
= +



Then, it follows that

( ) ( ) imaginary ip imaginary e i
m m =
0


The sign (-) in the equation above, is due
to the imaginary mass of the photon to
be positive, on the contrary of the
imaginary gravitational mass of the
matter, which is negative, as we have
already seen.


41





Real Particles Imaginary Particles
(Tardyons) (Tachyons)
Real Inertial Mass Imaginary Inertial Mass
Non-null Null Non-null Null

V < c c < V V
max
*


v =c v =
* *

V 0v<c V 0v<c V 0v<V
max
V 0v<V
max


Vortex Anti-vortex Vortex Anti-vortex
(Particle) (Anti-Particle) Real Photons (Particle) (Anti-particle) Imaginary Photons
( virtual photons )
(Real Bodies) (Real Radiation) (Imaginary Bodies) (Imaginary Radiation)


* V
max
is the speed upper limit for Tachyons with non-null imaginary inertial mass. It has been previously
obtained starting from the Hubble's law and Eq.(22). The result is: ( )
1 12
10 2 3

= s m L H V .
~
max max
.
**
In order to communicate instantaneously theinteractions at infinite distance the velocity of thequanta
(virtual photons) must be infinity and consequently their imaginary masses must be null .

Fig. VI - Real and Imaginary Particles.
Thus, we then conclude that

( ) ( )
( )
( )
( )
i m i c h
i c hf
m m
real e i e
e
imaginary ip imaginary e i
0
3
2
3
2
2
3
2
0
= =
= =
= =

where
( )
c m h
real e i e 0
= is the Broglies
wavelength for the electron.
By analogy, we can write for
the neutron and the proton the
following masses:
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
i m m
i m m
real proton i imaginary proton i
real neutron i imaginary neutron i
0
3
2
0
0
3
2
0
+ =
=
The sign (+) in the expression of
is due to the fact
that and
must have contrary
signs, as will be shown later on.
(imaginary proton i
m
0
Thus, the electron, the neutron
and the proton have respectively,
the following masses:
Electron
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) im e i e
im e i
im e i
im e
im ge
real e i e
real e i
real e i
real e
real ge
real e i im e i
real e i
m
m
c m
U
m
m
m
c m
U
m
i m m
kg m
0
0
2
2
0
0
0
2
2
0
0
3
2
0
31
0
1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
10 11 . 9

=
=

+ =
=
=

+ =
=
=

)
)
)
(imaginary neutron i
m
0
(imaginary proton i
m
0

42

Neutron
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) im n i n
im n i
im n i
im n
im gn
real n i n
real n i
real n i
real n
real gn
real n i im n i
real n i
m
m
c m
U
m
m
m
c m
U
m
i m m
kg m
0
0
2
2
0
0
0
2
2
0
0
3
2
0
27
0
1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
10 6747 . 1

=
=

+ =
=
=

+ =
=
=

Proton
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) im pr i pr
im pr i
im pr i
im pr
im gpr
real pr i pr
real pr i
real pr i
real pr
real gpr
real pr i im pr i
real pr i
m
m
c m
U
m
m
m
c m
U
m
i m m
kg m
0
0
2
2
0
0
0
2
2
0
0
3
2
0
27
0
1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
10 6723 . 1

=
=

+ =
=
=

+ =
+ =
=

)
where and are
respectively, the real and imaginary
energies absorbed by the particles.
(real
U
( ) im
U
When neutrons, protons and
electrons were created after the Big-
bang, they absorbed quantities of
electromagnetic energy, respectively
given by
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
i kT U kT U
i kT U kT U
i kT U kT U
e e imaginary e e e real e
pr pr imaginary pr pr pr real pr
n n imaginary n n n real n



= =
= =
= =

where
n
,
pr
and
e
are the
absorption factors respectively, for the
neutrons, protons and electrons;
is the Boltzmann
constant; , and are the
temperatures of the Universe,
respectively when neutrons, protons
and electrons were created.
K J k / 10 38 . 1
23
=
n
T
pr
T
e
T
In the case of the electrons, it
was previously shown that 1 . 0
e
.
Thus, by considering that
, we get K T
e
31
10 2 . 6
( )
i i kT U
e e im e
7
10 5 . 8 = =
It is known that the protons were
created at the same epoch. Thus, we
will assume that
( )
i i kT U
pr pr im pr
7
10 5 . 8 = =
Then, it follows that
21
10 8 . 1 =
e

17
10 7 . 9 =
pr

Now, consider the gravitational forces,

due to the imaginary masses of two
electrons, , two protons, , and
one electron and one proton, , all at
rest.
ee
F
prpr
F
epr
F
( )
( )
( )
( )
) (
2
28
2
2
0
2
2
2
0
3
2
2
2
2
10 3 . 2
3
4
repulsion
real e i
e
real e i
e
im ge
ee
r r
m
G
r
i m
G
r
m
G F

+
= + =
=

= =

( )
( )
( )
) (
2
28
2
2
0 2
2
2
0
3
2
2
2
2
10 3 . 2
3
4
repulsion
real pr i
pr
real pr i
pr
im gpr
prpr
r r
m
G
r
i m
G
r
m
G F

+
= + =
=

+
= =

( ) ( )
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
) (
2
28
2
0 0
2
0
3
2
0
3
2
2
10 3 . 2
3
4
atraction
real pr i real e i
pr e
real pr i real e i
pr e
im gpr im ge
epr
r r
m m
G
r
i m i m
G
r
m m
G F

= =
=

=
= =



43
Note that
2
28
2
0
2
10 3 . 2
4 r r
e
F
electric

= =

Therefore, we can conclude that

) (
4
2
0
2
repulsion
r
e
F F F
electric prpr ee

+ = =
and
) (
4
2
0
2
atraction
r
e
F F
electric ep

=
These correlations permit to define the
electric charge by means of the
following relation:

( )
i m G q
imaginary g 0
4 =

For example, in the case of the
electron, we have

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) C m G
i m G
i m G
i m G q
real e i e
real e i e
imaginary e i e
imaginary ge e
19
0
3
2
0
2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
10 6 . 1 4
4
4
4

= =
= =
= =
= =

In the case of the proton, we get

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) C m G
i m G
i m G
i m G q
real pr i pr
real pr i pr
imaginary pr i pr
imaginary gpr pr
19
0
3
2
0
2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
10 6 . 1 4
4
4
4

+ = =
= + =
= =
= =

For the neutron, it follows that
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
real n i n
real n i n
imaginary n i n
imaginary gn n
m G
i m G
i m G
i m G q
0
3
2
0
2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
4
4
4
4

=
= =
= =
= =
However, based on the quantization of
the mass (Eq. 44), we can write that
( ) ( )
0
min 0
2
0
3
2
= n m n m
i real n i n

Since can have only discrete values

different of zero (See Appendix B), we
conclude that
n
n
cannot be null.
However, it is known that the electric
charge of the neutron is null. Thus, it is
necessary to assume that

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( ) [ ] 0 4
4
4
4
4
2
0
3
2 2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
= + + =
= +
+

=
= +
+ = + =

+ +
i m i m G
i m G
i m G
i m G
i m G q q q
n i n n i n
imaginary n i n
imaginary n i
n
imaginary gn
imaginary gn
n n n

We then conclude that in the neutron,
half of the total amount of elementary
quanta of electric charge, , is negative,
while the other half is positive.
min
q
In order to obtain the value of
the elementary quantum of electric
charge, , we start with the
expression obtained here for the
electric charge, where we
change by its quantized
expression ,
derived from Eq. (44a). Thus, we get
min
q
(imaginary g
m
)
) ( ) ( )(min 0
2
imaginary i imaginary g
m n m =

( )
( )( )
( )
( ) [ ]
( ) min 0
2
0
3
2
min 0
3
2
2
0
min 0
2
0
0
4
4
4
4
i
i
imaginary i
imaginary g
m n G
i i m n G
i m n G
i m G q

m =
= =
= =
= =

This is the quantized expression of the
electric charge.
For 1 = n we obtain the value of
the elementary quantum of electric
charge, , i.e.,
min
q

( )
C m G q
i
83
min 0 0
3
2
min
10 8 . 3 4

= = m m

where is the elementary
quantum of matter, whose value
previously calculated, is
.
(min 0 i
m
)
( )
kg m
i
73
min 0
10 9 . 3

=
The existence of imaginary mass
associated to a real particle suggests
the possible existence of imaginary
44
particles with imaginary masses in
Nature.
In this case, the concept of wave
associated to a particle (De Broglies
waves) would also be applied to the
imaginary particles. Then, by analogy,
the imaginary wave associated to an
imaginary particle with imaginary
masses and m would be
described by the following expressions
i g
m


h
r
h
r
=
=
E
k p
Henceforth, for the sake of simplicity,
we will use the Greek letter to stand
for the word imaginary; is the
momentum carried by the

p
r
wave and
its energy;

E

2 = k
r
is the
propagation number and

the
wavelength of the wave;

f 2 =
is the cyclical frequency.
According to Eq. (4), the
momentum is

p
r
V M p
g
r
r

=
V where is the velocity of the
particle.
By comparing the expressions of
we get

p
r
V M
h
g

=

It is known that the variable
quantity which characterizes the De
Broglies waves is called wave function,
usually indicated by symbol . The
wave function associated with a
material particle describes the dynamic
state of the particle: its value at a
particular point x, y, z, t is related to the
probability of finding the particle in that
place and instant. Although does
not have a physical interpretation, its
square (or

2 *
) calculated for a
particular point x, y, z, t is proportional
to the probability of finding the particle
in that place and instant.
Since is proportional to the
probability of finding the particle
described by , the integral of
2

P
2
on
the whole space must be finite
inasmuch as the particle is somewhere.
On the other hand, if
0
2
=

+
V d


the interpretation is that the particle will
not exist. However, if
( ) 108
2
=

+
V d
The particle will be everywhere
simultaneously.
In Quantum Mechanics, the wave
function corresponds, as we know,
to the displacement y of the
undulatory motion of a rope.
However, , as opposed to y , is not a
measurable quantity and can, hence,
be a complex quantity. For this reason,
it is assumed that is described in the
direction x by
( )( ) px Et h i
e

=
2
0
This is the expression of the wave
function for a free particle, with total
energy E and momentum , moving in
the direction
p
r
x + .
As to the imaginary particle, the
imaginary particle wave function will be
denoted by

and, by analogy the

expression of , will be expressed by:

( )( ) x p t E h i
e


=
2
0

Therefore, the general expression of
the wave function for a free particle can
be written in the following form

( )
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( )( ) x p t E h i
x p t E h i
real
e
e
real real

+
+ =
2
2
0
0


It is known that the uncertainty
principle can also be written as a
function of E (uncertainty in the
energy) and t (uncertainty in the
time), i.e.,

t E.

h
This expression shows that a
variation of energy E , during a
45
time interval , can only be
detected if
t
E t h . Consequently,
a variation of energy E , during a
time interval E t < h , cannot be
experimentally detected. This is a
limitation imposed by Nature and not
by our equipments.
Thus, a quantum of energy
that varies during a time
interval
hf E =
E c f t < = = h 1 (wave
period) cannot be experimentally
detected. This is an imaginary
photon or a virtual photon.
Now, consider a particle with
energy . The DeBroglies
gravitational and inertial wavelengths
are respectively
2
c M
g
c M h
g g
= and
c M h
i i
= . In Quantum Mechanics,
particles of matter and quanta of
radiation are described by means of
wave packet (DeBroglies waves)
with average wavelength
i
.
Therefore, we can say that during a
time interval c t
i
= , a quantum of
energy varies. According
to the uncertainty principle, the
particle will be detected if
2
c M E
g
=
E t h ,
i.e., if
2
c M c
g i
h or 2
g i
.
This condition is usually satisfied
when . In this case,
i g
M M =
i g
=
and obviously, 2
i i
> . However,
when decreases
g
M
g
increases
and 2
g
can become bigger than
i
, making the particle non-
detectable or imaginary.
According to Eqs. (7) and (41)
we can write in the following
form:
g
M

i
i
g
g
M
m
m
M

=
2 2 2 2
c V c V 1 1

where

( )

+ = 1 1 2 1
2
0
c m p
i

Since the condition to make
the particle imaginary is

2
g
i
<
and

2 2
i
i g
g
c M c M
= = =
h h

Then we get

159 . 0
2
1
= <

However, can be positive or
negative ( 159 . 0 + < or 159 . 0 > ).This
means that when

159 0 159 0 . . + < <

the particle becomes imaginary.
Under these circumstances, we can
say that the particle made a
transition to the imaginary space-
time.
Note that, when a particle
becomes imaginary, its gravitational
and inertial masses also become
imaginary. However, the factor
( ) ( ) imaginary i imaginary g
M M = remains
real because

( )
( )
real
M
M
i M
i M
M
M
i
g
i
g
imaginary i
imaginary g
= = = =









46














+0.159
V 0

Imaginary Body

0 Imaginary Space-time


Virtual Photons ( = V )
0.159








Fig. VII Travel in the imaginary space-time. Similarly to the virtual photons,
imaginary bodies can have infinite speed in the imaginary space-time.
Ordinary Space-time
c V < 0
Body
Ordinary Space-time

Real Photons ( c V = )












47

Real particle Real particle
t
1
E

t
2
c (speed upper limit)

t
3
Imaginary Space-time Ordinary Space-time
t
3
t
2
V
max

(speed upper limit)

E

t
1

Imaginary particle

Imaginary particle


Fig. VIII Virtual Transitions (a) Virtual Transitions of a real particle to theimaginary
space-time. The speed upper limit for real particle in the imaginary space-time is c.
(b) - Virtual Transitions of an imaginary particle to theordinary space-time. The
speed upper limit for imaginary particle in theordinary space-time is
1 12
10

s m V .
max
Note that to occur a virtual transition it is necessary thatt=t
1
+t
2
+t
3
</E
Thus, even at principle, it will be impossible to determine any variation of energyin
the particle (uncertainty principle).

(a)
(b)










48

Thus, if the gravitational mass of the
particle is reduced by means of the
absorption of an amount of
electromagnetic energy U , for
example, we have

( )

+ = = 1 1 2 1
2
2
0
c m U
M
M
i
i
g

This shows that the energyU of the
electromagnetic field remains acting
on the imaginary particle. In
practice, this means that
electromagnetic fields act on
imaginary particles.
The gravity acceleration on a
imaginary particle (due to the rest of
the imaginary Universe) are given
by

. ,..., , , n j g g
j j
3 2 1 = =

where
( ) ( ) imaginary i imaginary g
M M =
and
( )
2
j imaginary gj j
r Gm g = . Thus,
the gravitational forces acting on the
particle are given by

( )
( ) ( )
( )
( ) .
2 2
2
j gj g j gj g
j imaginary gj imaginary g
j imaginary g gj
r m GM r i Gm i M
r Gm M
g M F


+ = =
= =
= =

Note that these forces are real.
Remind that, the Machs principle
says that the inertial effects upon a
particle are consequence of the
gravitational interaction of the
particle with the rest of the Universe.
Then we can conclude that the
inertial forces upon an imaginary
particle are also real.
Equation (7) shows that , in
the case of imaginary particles, the
relativistic mass is


( )
( )
1 1
1
2 2 2 2
2 2

=
=

=
c V
i m
c V i
i m
c V
m
M
g g
imaginary g
imaginary g

This expression shows that
imaginary particles can have
velocities greater than in our
ordinary space-time (Tachyons).
The quantization of velocity (Eq. 36)
shows that there is a speed upper
limit . As we have already
calculated previously, ,
(Eq.102).
V c
c V >
max
1 12
10

s m V .
max
Note that this is the speed
upper limit for imaginary particles in
our ordinary space-time not in the
imaginary space-time (Fig.7)
because the infinite speed of the
virtual quanta of the interactions
shows that imaginary particles can
have infinite speed in the imaginary
space-time.
While the speed upper limit
for imaginary particles in the
ordinary space-time is
, the speed upper limit
for real particles in the imaginary
space-time is c , because the
relativistic expression of the mass
shows that the velocity of real
particles cannot be larger than c in
any space-time. The uncertainty
principle permits that particles make
virtual transitions, during a time
interval
1 12
10

s m V .
max
t , if E t < h . The
virtual transition of mesons emitted
from nucleons that do not change of
mass, during a time interval
2
c m t

h < , is a well-known
example of virtual transition of
particles. During a virtual
transition of a real particle, the
speed upper limit in the imaginary
space-time is c , while the speed
upper limit for an imaginary particle
49
in the our ordinary space-time is
. (See Fig. 8).
1 12
10

s m V .
max
There is a crucial
cosmological problem to be solved:
the problem of the hidden mass.
Most theories predict that the
amount of known matter, detectable
and available in the universe, is only
about 1/100 to 1/10 of the amount
needed to close the universe. That
is, to achieve the density sufficient
to close-up the universe by
maintaining the gravitational
curvature (escape velocity equal to
the speed of light) at the outer
boundary.
Eq. (43) may solve this
problem. We will start by substituting
the expression of Hubble's law for
velocity, l H
~
V = , into Eq.(43). The
expression obtained shows that
particles which are at distances
( )( ) m . H
~
c l l
26
0
10 3 1 3 5 = = = have
quasi null gravitational mass
)
; beyond this distance,
the particles have negative
gravitational mass. Therefore, there
are two well-defined regions in the
Universe; the region of the bodies
with positive gravitational masses
and the region of the bodies with
negative gravitational mass. The
total gravitational mass of the first
region, in accordance with Eq.(45),
will be given by
(min g g
m m =
1
2 2
1
1
1 1
1
i
i
i g
m
c V
m
M M

=
where is the total inertial mass
of the bodies of the mentioned
region;
1 i
m
c V <<
1
is the average
velocity of the bodies at region 1.
The total gravitational mass of the
second region is
2
2 2
2
2
1
1
1
2 1
i g
M
c V
M

=
where
2
V is the average velocity
of the bodies ;
2 2
2 2 2
1 c V m M
i i
= and is the
total inertial mass of the bodies of
region 2.
2 i
m
Now consider that from
Eq.(7), we can write
2
2
c
c M E
g
g g
= = =
V V
where is the energy density of
matter.
Note that the expression of
only reduces to the well-known
expression , where
2
c is the
sum of the inertial masses per
volume unit, when .
Therefore, in the derivation of the
well-known difference
i g
m m =
2
3
8
H
G
U
~

which gives the sign of the curvature
of the Universe [36], we must use
instead of .The
result obviously is
2
c
gU
=
2
c
U
=
( ) 109
3
8
2
H
~
G
gU

where
( ) 110
2 1
U
g g
U
gU
gU
M M M
V V
+
= =
gU
M and
U
V are respectively the
total gravitational mass and the
volume of the Universe.
Substitution of and
into expression (110) gives
1 g
M
2 g
M
U
i i iU
gU
m m
c V
c V
m
V

+
=
2 2
2 2
2
2 2
2
1
2
1
3

where
2 1 i i iU
m m m + = is the total
inertial mass of the Universe.
The volume
1
V of the region 1
and the volume
2
V of the region 2,
are respectively given by

50
1
3 2
2
3
0
2
1
2 2 V V V = =
c
l and l

where m . H
~
c l
c
26
10 8 1 = = is the
so-called "radius" of the visible
Universe. Moreover,
1 1 1
V
i i
m = and
2 2 2
V
i i
m = . Due to the hypothesis
of the uniform distribution of matter
in the space, it follows that
2 1 i i
= .Thus, we can write
38 0
3
0
2
1
2
1
.
l
l
m
m
c i
i
=

= =
V
V
Similarly,
1
1
2
2
V V V
i i
U
iU
m m m
= =
Therefore,
iU iU
c
iU
U
i
m . m
l
l
m m 62 0 1
3
0 2
2
=

= =
V
V
and .
iU i
m . m 38 0
1
=
Substitution of into the
expression of
2 i
m
gU
yields

U
iU iU
gU
m
c V
c V
m
V
62 0
1
24 1
1
86 1
2 2
2
2 2
2
.
. .

+
=

Due to c V
2
, we conclude that the
term between bracket is much larger
than . The amount is the
mass of matter in the universe (1/10
to 1/100 of the amount needed to
close the Universe).
iU
m 10
iU
m
Consequently, the total
mass
iU iU
m
c V
c V
m 62 0
1
24 1
1
86 1
2 2
2
2 2
2
.
. .

+

must be sufficient to close
the Universe.
There is another cosmological
problem to be solved: the problem of
the anomalies in the spectral red-
shift of certain galaxies and stars.
Several observers have
noticed red-shift values that cannot
be explained by the Doppler-
Fizeau effect or by the Einstein
effect (the gravitational spectrum
shift, supplied by Einstein's theory).
This is the case of the so-
called Stefan's quintet (a set of five
galaxies which were discovered in
1877), whose galaxies are located
at approximately the same distance
from the Earth, according to very
reliable and precise measuring
methods. But, when the velocities of
the galaxies are measured by its
red-shifts, the velocity of one of
them is much larger than the
velocity of the others.
Similar observations have
been made on the Virgo
constellation and spiral galaxies.
Also the Sun presents a red-shift
greater than the predicted value by
the Einstein effect.
It seems that some of these
anomalies can be explained if we
consider the Eq.(45) in the
calculation of the gravitational mass
of the point of emission.
The expression of the
gravitational spectrum shift was
previously obtained in this work. It is
the same supplied by Einstein's
theory [37], and is given by
( ) 111
0
2
1 1 2 2
0
2
1 2
2 1

c
r Gm r Gm
c
g g
+
=
=

= =
where
1
is the frequency of the
light at the point of emission ;
2
is
the frequency at the point of
observation;
1
and
2
are
respectively, the Newtonian
gravitational potentials at the point
of emission and at the point of
observation.
51
In Einstein theory, this
expression has been deduced from
00
g t T = [38] which correlates
own time (real time),t , with the
temporal coordinate x
0
of the space-
time ( c x t
0
= ).
When the gravitational field is
weak, the temporal component
of the metric tensor is given by
2
[
00
g

2 1 c / g
oo
= 39].Thus, we readily
obtain
( ) 112 2 1
2
rc Gm t T
g
=
This is the same equation that we
have obtained previously in this
work.
Curiously, this equation tell us
that we can have when
; and for . In addition, if
t T < 0 >
g
m
t T > 0 <
g
m
G r c m
g
2
2
= , i.e., if
2
2 c Gm r
g
=
(Schwarzschild radius) we obtain

0 = T .
Let us now consider the well-
known process of stars' gravitational
contraction. It is known that the
destination of the star is directly
correlated to its mass. If the star's
mass is less than 1.4M

(Schemberg-Chandrasekhar's limit),
it becomes a white dwarf. If its mass
exceeds that limit, the pressure
produced by the degenerate state of
the matter no longer
counterbalances the gravitational
pressure, and the star's contraction
continues. Afterwards there occurs
the reactions between protons and
electrons (capture of electrons),
where neutrons and anti-neutrinos
are produced.

The contraction continues
until the system regains stability
(when the pressure produced by the
neutrons is sufficient to stop the
gravitational collapse). Such systems
are called neutron stars.

There is also a critical mass
for the stable configuration of
neutron stars. This limit has not
been fully defined as yet, but it is
known that it is located between
1.8M

and 2.4M

. Thus, if the mass

of the star exceeds 2.4M

, the
contraction will continue.
According to Hawking [40]
collapsed objects cannot have mass
less than kg . G c
8
10 1 1 4

= h . This
means that, with the progressing of
the compression, the neutrons
cluster must become a cluster of
superparticles where the minimal
inertial mass of the superparticle is

( )
( ) 113 10 1 1
8
. kg . m
sp i

=

Symmetry is a fundamental
attribute of the Universe that
enables an investigator to study
particular aspects of physical
systems by themselves. For
example, the assumption that space
is homogeneous and isotropic is
based on Symmetry Principle. Also
here, by symmetry, we can assume
that there are only superparticles
with mass in the
cluster of superparticles.
( )
kg . m
sp i
8
10 1 1

=
Based on the mass-energy of
the superparticles ( ~10
18
GeV ) we
can say that they belong to a
putative class of particles with mass-
energy beyond the supermassive
Higgs bosons ( the so-called X
bosons). It is known that the GUT's
theories predict an entirely new
force mediated by a new type of
boson, called simply X (or X boson
). The X bosons carry both
electromagnetic and color charge, in
order to ensure proper conservation
of those charges in any interactions.
The X bosons must be extremely
massive, with mass-energy in the
unification range of about 10
16
GeV.
If we assume the
superparticles are not hypermassive
Higgs bosons then the possibility of
the neutrons cluster become a
52
Higgs bosons cluster before
becoming a superparticles cluster
must be considered. On the other
hand, the fact that superparticles
must be so massive also means that
it is not possible to create them in
any conceivable particle accelerator
that could be built. They can exist as
free particles only at a very early
stage of the Big Bang from which
the universe emerged.
Let us now imagine the
Universe coming back to the past.
There will be an instant in which it
will be similar to a neutrons cluster,
such as the stars at the final state of
gravitational contraction. Thus, with
the progressing of the compression,
the neutrons cluster becomes a
superparticles cluster. Obviously,
this only can occur before 10
-23
s
(after the Big-Bang).
The temperature T of the
Universe at the 10
-43
s< t < 10
-23
s
period can be calculated by means
of the well-known expression[41]:
( ) ( ) 114 10 10
2
1
23 22

t T
Thus at (at the first
spontaneous breaking of symmetry)
the temperature was
(10
s t
43
10

K T
32
10
19
GeV).Therefore, we can
assume that the absorbed
electromagnetic energy by each
superparticle, before , was
(see Eqs.(71) and
(72)). By comparing with
, we conclude that
. Therefore, the
unification condition
s t
43
10

J kT U
9
10 1 > =
( )
J c m
sp i
8 2
10 9
( )
c m U
sp i
>
( )
2 2
c m c M Un
i i r
>
is satisfied. This means that, before
,the gravitational and
electromagnetic interactions were
unified.
s t
43
10

From the unification condition

( )
2
c M Un
i r
, we may conclude that
the superparticles' relativistic inertial
mass is
( ) sp i
M
( )
( ) 115 10
8
2 2
kg
c
kT n
c
Un
M
r r
sp i

=

Comparing with the superparticles'
inertial mass at rest (113), we
conclude that

( ) ( )
( ) 116 10 1 1
8
kg . m M
sp i sp i

=

From Eqs.(83) and (115), we obtain
the superparticle's gravitational
mass at rest:
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
( ) 117
2
2
c
kT n
M
M m m
r
sp i
sp i sp i sp g

=
Consequently, the superparticle's
relativistic gravitational mass, is
( )
( )
( ) 118
1
1
2 2 2
2 2
c V c
kT n
c V
m
M
r
sp g
sp g

=
=

Thus, the gravitational forces

between two superparticles ,
according to (13), is given by:
( ) ( )
( )
( )
( ) ( ) 119
21
2
2
5
2
21
2
21 12

r
c
T n
c
G
m
M

r
M M
G F F
r
sp i
sp i
'
sp g sp g
h
h
r r

=
= = =

Due to the unification of the
gravitational and electromagnetic
interactions at that period, we have
53
( ) ( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 120
4
2
0
r
=
2
21
2
2
5
2
21
2
21 12
e

r
c
T
c
G
m
M

r
M M
G F F
sp i
sp i
'
sp g sp g

=
= = =
h
h
r r
From the equation above we can
write
( )
( )
( ) ( ) 121
4
0
2
5

e
c T
c
G
m
sp i
sp i
=

h
h
2
2
M


( )
( )
Now assuming that
( )
2
5

T
c
G
h
( ) 122
2
=

m
M
sp i
sp i
the Eq. (121) can be rewritten in the
following form:
( ) 123
137
1
4
0
2
= =
c
e
h

which is the well-known reciprocal

fine structure constant.
For the Eq.(122)
gives
K T
32
10 =
( )

( )
( ) ( )
1
2
2


G
M
sp i
( ) ( )
124
100
5

= T n
c m
r
sp i

h

This value has the same order of
magnitude as the exact value(1/137)
of the reciprocal fine structure
constant.
From equation (120) we can
write:
( ) 125 h
r
r
=

r
r c
M M
G
'
sp g sp g

p
The term between parentheses has
the same dimensions as the linear
momentum
r
. Thus, (125) tells us
that
( ) 126 . r p h
r r
=
A component of the momentum of a
particle cannot be precisely
specified without loss of all
knowledge of the corresponding
component of its position at that
time ,i.e., a particle cannot be
precisely located in a particular
direction without loss of all
knowledge of its momentum
component in that direction . This
means that in intermediate cases
the product of the uncertainties of
the simultaneously measurable
values of corresponding position
and momentum components is at
least of the magnitude order of , h

( ) 127 h r . p

This relation, directly obtained here
from the Unified Theory, is the well-
known relation of the Uncertainty
Principle for position and
momentum.
According to Eq.(83), the
gravitational mass of the
superparticles at the center of the
cluster becomes negative when
( ) sp i r
m c kT n >
2
2
( )
, i.e., when
. 10
2
32
2
K
k n
c m
T T
r
sp i
critical
= >

s
c
43
10

According to Eq. (114) this
temperature corresponds tot .
With the progressing of the
compression, more superparticles
into the center will have negative
gravitational mass. Consequently,
there will be a critical point in which
the repulsive gravitational forces
between the superparticles with
negative gravitational masses and
the superparticles with positive
gravitational masses will be so
strong that an explosion will occur.
This is the event that we call the Big
Bang.
Now, starting from the Big
Bang to the present time.
Immediately after the Big Bang, the
superparticles' decompression
54
begins. The gravitational mass of
the most central superparticle will
only be positive when the
temperature becomes smaller than
the critical temperature, .
At the maximum state of
compression (exactly at the Big
Bang) the volumes of the
superparticles were equal to
the elementary volume
and the volume of the Universe was
where
was the initial length scale of the
Universe. At this very moment the
average density of the Universe was
equal to the average density of the
superparticles, thus we can write
K T
critical
32
10
3
0 min
d
V
=
initial
d ( )
3 3
initial V min V
d nd = =
( )
( )
( ) 128
sp i
U i
min
initial
m
M
d
d
=

3
( )
kg M
U i
53
10
k
where is the inertial
mass of the Universe. It has already
been shown that
. m l
~
d
min
34
10

=
planck
Then, from
Eq.(128), we obtain:
( ) 129 10
14
m

d
initial

d
cr
d
K
critical
32
10
initial cr
d d
After the Big Bang the
Universe expands itself from
up to (when the temperature
decrease reaches the critical
temperatureT , and the
gravity becomes attractive). Thus, it
expands by , under
effect of the repulsive gravity
initial

( )
( ) ( ) [ ]
( )
( ) [ ]
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ) ( )
( )
initial cr
U i
initial cr
U i sp i
cr U i initial U g
min max
d d
GM
d d
M m G
d M G d M G
g g g

2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
= =
= =
= =

initial cr
U i sp g
initial cr
U i U g
d d
M m G
d d
M M G 2 2
= = =


during a period of time
.Thus,
s t
c
43
10

( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( ) 130
2 2
2
1
c
initial cr
U i
c initial cr
t
d d
GM
t g d d = =
( )
( )
The Eq.(83), gives

( ) ( )
2
2
1
2
1
c m
kT n
m
Un
m
m
sp i
r r
sp i
sp g

= = =
2
c
sp i

Calculations by Carr, B.J
[41], indicate that it would seem
reasonable to suppose that the
fraction of initial primordial black
hole mass ultimately converted into
photons is about . This means
that we can take
11 . 0
11 . 0 =
Thus, the amount ,
where is the total inertial mass
of the Universe, expresses the total
amount of inertial energy converted
into photons at the initial instant of
the Universe(Primordial Photons).
2
c M
iU

iU
M
It was previously shown that
photons and also the matter have
imaginary gravitational masses
associated to them. The matter has
negative imaginary gravitational
mass, while the photons have
positive imaginary gravitational
mass, given by

( ) ( )
i
c
hf
M M
imaginary ip imaginary gp

+ = =
2
3
4
2

where is the imaginary
inertial mass of the photons.
) (imaginary ip
M
Then, from the above we can
conclude that, at the initial instant of
the Universe, an amount of
imaginary gravitational mass,
, which was associated
to the fraction of the matter
transformed into photons, has been
converted into imaginary
gravitational mass of the primordial
total
imaginary gm
M
) (
55
photons, , while an
amount of real inertial mass of the
matter, , has been
converted into real energy of the
primordial photons, , i.e.,
total
imaginary gp
M
) (
2
) (
c M M
iU
total
real im
=

=
=
N
j
j p
hf E
1


43 42 1
2
) ( ) (
) ( ) (
c
E
total
real ip
total
imaginary gp
total
real im
total
imaginary gm
p
M M
M M
+ =
= +

where and
total
imaginary gp
total
imaginary gm
M M
) ( ) (
=

iU iU
total
real im
total
real ip p
M M M M c E 11 . 0
) ( ) (
2
= =

It was previously shown that, for the
photons equation: , is
valid. This means that
ip gp
M M 2 =

(
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 1
4 4 4 4 3 4 4 4 4 2 1
ip
gp
M
real ip imagimary ip
M
real gp imagimary gp
M M
M M
) ( ) (
) ( ) (
2 + =
= +
)
3
By substituting
into the equation above, we get
( ) ( ) imaginary ip imaginary gp
M M 2 =

( ) ( ) real ip real gp
M M 2 =

Therefore we can write that
( ) ( )
iU
total
real ip
total
real gp
M M M 22 . 0 2 = =
The phenomenon of
gravitational deflection of light about
the Sun shows that the gravitational
interaction between the Sun and the
photons is attractive. This is due to
the gravitational force between the
Sun and a photon, which is given by

( ) ( )
2
r m M G F
imaginary gp imaginary gSun
= ,

where (the imaginary
gravitational mass of the photon) is
a quantity positive and imaginary,
and (the imaginary
gravitational mass associated to the
matter of the Sun) is a quantity
negative and imaginary.
(imaginary gp
m
)
) (imaginary gSun
M
The fact of the gravitational
interaction between the imaginary
gravitational masses of the
primordial photons and the
imaginary gravitational mass of the
matter be attractive is highly
relevant, because it shows that it is
necessary to consider the effect of
this gravitational interaction, which is
equivalent to the gravitational effect
produced by the amount of real
gravitational mass, ,
sprayed by all the Universe.
( )
iU
total
real gp
M M 22 . 0
This means that this amount,
which corresponds to 22% of the
total inertial mass of the Universe,
must be added to the overall
computation of the total mass of the
matter (stars, galaxies, etc., gas and
dust of interstellar and intergalactic
media). Therefore, this additional
portion corresponds to what has
been called Dark Matter (See Fig.
IX).
On the other hand, the total
amount of gravitational mass at the
initial instant, , according to
Eq.(41), can be expressed by
total
g
M
iU
total
g
M M =
This mass includes the total
negative gravitational mass of the
matter, , plus the total
gravitational mass, ,
converted into primordial photons.
This tells us that we can put
total
gm
M
) (
total
real gp
M
) (

iU
total
real gp
total
gm
total
g
M M M M = + =
) ( ) (

whence
56


Fig. IX Conversion of part of the Real Gravitational Mass of the Primordial Universe into
Primordial Photons. The gravitational effect caused by the gravitational interaction of imaginary
gravitational masses of the primordial photons with the imaginary gravitational mass associated to
the matter is equivalent to the effect produced by the amount of real gravitational mass,
( )
iU
total
real gp
M M 22 . 0 , sprayed by all Universe. This additional portion of mass corresponds to what
has been called Dark Matter.
10
-14
m
Real spacetime
Imaginary spacetime
( ) ( )
total
ip
total
gp real imaginary
M M +

( ) ( )
total
im
total
gm real imaginary
M M +


At the Initial Instant

iU
M
Primordial Photons
( ) ( )
43 42 1
2
c
E
total
ip
total
gp
p
real imaginary
M M +








57
iU iU
total
gm
M M M 22 . 0
) (
=

In order to calculate the value
of we can start from the
expression previously obtained for
, i.e.,
critical
sp i
r
sp i
sp g
T
T
c m
kT n
m
m
= = = 1
2
1
2
) (
) (
) (

where

K
k n
c m
T
r
sp i
critical
32
2
) (
10 3 . 3
2
= =

and

2 2
2
2 2
) (
2
) (
1
2
1
2
c V
T
k n
c
c V
m
k n
c M
T
critical
r
sp i
r
sp i

= =


We thus obtain

2 2
1
1
1
c V
=

By substitution of this expression
into the equation of , we get
total
gm
M
) (

iU
total
gm
M
c V
M

2 2
) (
1
1
78 . 0

On the other hand, the Unification
condition ( ) previously
shown and Eq. (41) show that at the
initial instant of the Universe,
has the following value:
2
c M pc Un
iU r
=
) (sp g
M

) ( ) (
) (
) (
1 . 0 1 1 2 1
sp i sp i
sp i
r
sp g
M M
M
Un
M

+ =

Similarly, Eq.(45) tells us that

( )
) (
2 2
) (
2
1
1 2 1
sp i sp g
M c V M

=


By comparing this expression with
the equation above, we obtain

5 . 1
1
1
2 2

c V

Substitution of this value into the
expressions of and results
in
total
gm
M
) (

5 . 0 =

and



iU
total
gm
M M 72 . 0
) (

This means that 72% of the total

energy of the Universe ( ) is
due to negative gravitational mass
of the matter created at the initial
instant.
2
c M
iU
Since the gravitational mass
is correlated to the inertial mass (Eq.
(41)), the energy related to the
negative gravitational mass is where
there is inertial energy (inertial
mass). In this way, this negative
gravitational energy permeates all
space and tends to increase the rate
of expansion of the Universe due to
produce a strong gravitational
repulsion between the material
particles. Thus, this energy
corresponds to what has been
called Dark Energy (See Fig. X).
The value of 5 . 0 = at the
initial instant of the Universe shows
that the gravitational interaction was
repulsive at the Big-Bang. It remains
repulsive until the temperature of the
Universe is reduced down to the
critical limit, . Below this
temperature limit,
critical
T
58





















72%
6%
22%
Negat i ve
Gr avit at ional Mass of Mat t er
Posi t i ve
Gr avi t at i onal Mass of
Mat t er
Fig. X - Distribution of Gravitational Masses in the Universe. The total
energy related to negative gravitational mass of all the matter in the
Universe corresponds to what has been called Dark Energy. While
theDark Matter corresponds to the total gravitational mass carried by the
primordial photons, which is manifested in the interaction of the
imaginary gravitational masses of the primordial photons with the
imaginary mass of matter.
Positive Gravitational Mass
carried by the primordial photons





























59

the attractive component of the
gravitational interaction became
greater than the repulsive
component, making attractive the
resultant gravitational interaction.
Therefore, at the beginning of the
Universe before the temperature
decreased down to , there
occurred an expansion of the
Universe that was exponential in
time rather than a normal power-law
expansion. Thus, there was an
evident Inflation Period during the
beginning of the expansion of the
Universe (See Fig. XI).
critical
T
With the progressing of the
decompression the superparticles
cluster becomes a neutrons cluster.
This means that the neutrons are
created without its antiparticle, the
antineutron. Thus, this solves the
matter/antimatter dilemma that is
unresolved in many cosmologies.
Now a question: How did the
primordial superparticles appear at
the beginning of the Universe?
It is a proven quantum fact
that a wave function may collapse,
and that, at this moment, all the
possibilities that it describes are
suddenly expressed in reality. This
means that, through this process,
particles can be suddenly
materialized.
The materialization of the
primordial superparticles into a
critical volume denotes knowledge
of what would happen with the
Universe starting from that initial
condition, a fact that points towards
the existence of a Creator.
It was shown previously the
possible existence of imaginary
particles with imaginary masses in
Nature. These particles can be
associated with real particles, such as
in case of the photons and electrons, as
we have shown, or they can be
associated with others imaginary
particles by constituting the
imaginary bodies. J ust as the real
particles constitute the real bodies.
The idea that we make about
a consciousness is basically that of
an imaginary body containing
psychic energy and intrinsic
knowledge. We can relate psychic
energy with psychic mass (psychic
mass=psychic energy/c
2
). Thus, by
analogy with the real bodies the
psychic bodies would be constituted
by psychic particles with psychic
mass. Consequently, the psychic
particles that constitute a
consciousness would be equivalent
to imaginary particles, and the
psychic mass , ,of the psychic
particles would be equivalent to the
imaginary mass, i.e.,

m

( )
( ) 131
imaginary i
m m =

Thus, the imaginary masses
associated to the photons and
electrons would be elementary
psyche actually, i.e.,

( )
( ) 132
3
2
2
i
c
hf
m m
photon imaginary i photon

=
= =

( )
( )
( ) 133
0
3
2
2 3
2
i m
i
c
hf
m m
electron real i
electron
electron imaginary i electron
=
=

=
= =

The idea that electrons have
elementary psyche associated to
themselves is not new. It comes
from the pre-Socratic period.
By proposing the existence of
psyche associated with matter, we
are adopting what is called
panpsychic posture. Panpsychism
dates back to the pre-Socratic period;
60

Fig. XI Inflation Period. The value of 5 . 0 at the Initial Instant of the Universe shows that the
gravitational interaction was repulsive at the Big-Bang. It remains repulsive until the temperature of
the Universe is reduced down to the critical limit,
critical
T . Below this temperature limit, the
attractive component of the gravitational interaction became greater than the repulsive component,
making attractive the resultant gravitational interaction. Therefore, at beginning of the Universe
before the temperature to be decreased down to
critical
T , there occurred an expansion of the Universe
that was exponential in time rather than a normal power-law expansion. Thus, there was an evident
inflation period during the beginning of the expansion of the Universe.
0 = t
s t
43
10

K T T
critical
32
10 3 . 3 = =
Inflation Period
K T 7 . 2 =
s t
43
10

s t
43
10

s t
43
10

s t
43
10

s t
43
10

years billion t 15

5 . 0

61

remnants of organized panpsychism
may be found in the Uno of
Parmenides or in Heracleituss
Divine Flow. The scholars of
Miletuss school were called
hylozoists, that is, those who
believe that matter is alive. More
recently, we will find the
panpsychistic thought in Spinoza,
Whitehead and Teilhard de Chardin,
among others. The latter one
admitted the existence of proto-
conscious properties at the
elementary particles level.
We can find experimental
evidences of the existence of
psyche associated to electron in an
experiment similar to that commonly
used to show the wave duality of
light. (Fig. XII). One merely
substitutes an electron ray (fine
electron beam) for the light ray. J ust
as in the experiment mentioned
above, the ray which goes through
the holes is detected as a wave if a
wave detector is used (it is then
observed that the interference
pattern left on the detector screen is
analogous with that produced by the
light ray), and as a particle if a
particle detector is used.
Since the electrons are
detected on the other side of the
metal sheet, it becomes obvious
then that they passed through the
holes. On the other hand, it is also
evident that when they approached
the holes, they had to decide which
one of them to go through.
How can an electron decide
which hole to go through? Where
there is choice, isnt there also
psyche, by definition?
If the primordial superparticles
that have been materialized at the
beginning of the Universe came
from the collapse of a primordial
wave function, then the
psychic form described by this wave
function must have been generated
in a consciousness with a psychic
mass much greater than that
needed to materialize the Universe
(material and psychic).
This giant consciousness, in
its turn, would not only be the
greatest of all consciences in the
Universe but also the substratum of
everything that exists and,
obviously, everything that exists
would be entirely contained within it,
including all the spacetime.
Thus, if the consciousness we
refer to contains all the space, its
volume is necessarily infinite,
consequently having an infinite
psychic mass.
This means that it contains all
the existing psychic mass and,
therefore, any other consciousness
that exists will be contained in it.
Hence, we may conclude that It is
the Supreme Consciousness and
that there is no other equal to It: It is
unique.
Since the Supreme
Consciousness also contains all time;
past, present and future, then, for It
the time does not flow as it flows for
us.
Within this framework, when
we talk about the Creation of the
Universe, the use of the verb to
create means that something that
was not came into being, thus
presupposing the concept of time
flow. For the Supreme
Consciousness, however, the
instant of Creation is mixed up with
all other times, consequently there
being no before or after the
Creation and, thus, the following
question is not justifiable: What did
the Supreme Consciousness do before
Creation?
On the other hand, we may
also infer, from the above that the

62








Light

(a)

Dw









Light

(b)

Dp








?

Electrons
(c)




Fig. XII A light ray, after going through the holes in the metal sheet, will be detected as a
wave(a) by a wave detector Dw or as a particle if the wave detector is substituted for the wave
detector Dp. Electron ray (c) has similar behavior as that of a light ray. However, before going
through the holes, the electrons must decide which one to go through.



?

63

existence of the Supreme
Consciousness has no defined limit
(beginning and end), what confers
upon It the unique characteristic of
uncreated and eternal.
If the Supreme Consciousness is
eternal, Its wave function shall
never collapse (will never be null).
Thus, for having an infinite psychic
mass, the value of will be always
infinite and, hence, we may write that
SC

2
SC

+

dV
SC
2

By comparing this equation with Eq.
(108) derived from Quantum
Mechanics, we conclude that the
Supreme Consciousness is
simultaneously everywhere, i.e., It is
omnipresent.
Since the Supreme Consciousness
contains all consciences, it is expected
that It also contain all the knowledge.
Therefore, It is also omniscient.
Consequently, It knows how to
formulate well-defined mental images
with psychic masses sufficient for its
contents to materialize. In this way, It
can materialize everything It wishes
(omnipotence).
All these characteristics of the
Supreme Consciousness (infinite,
unique, uncreated, eternal,
omnipresent, omniscient and
omnipotent) coincide with those
traditionally ascribed to God by most
religions.
It was shown in this work that
the virtual quanta of the gravitational
interaction must have spin 1 and not 2,
and that they are virtual photons
(graviphotons) with zero mass outside
the coherent matter. Inside the
coherent matter the graviphoton mass
is non-zero. Therefore, the
gravitational forces are also gauge
forces, because they are yielded by the
exchange of "virtual" quanta of spin 1,
such as the electromagnetic forces and
the weak and strong nuclear forces.
Thus, the gravitational forces are
produced by the exchange of virtual
photons. Consequently, this is
precisely the origin of the gravity.
Newtons theory of gravity does
not explain why objects attract one
another; it simply models this
observation. Also Einsteins theory
does not explain the origin of gravity.
Einsteins theory of gravity only
describes gravity with more precision
than Newtons theory does.
Besides, there is nothing in both
theories explaining the origin of the
energy that produces the gravitational
forces. Earths gravity attracts all
objects on the surface of our planet.
This has been going on for well over
4.5 billions years, yet no known energy
source is being converted to support
this tremendous ongoing energy
expenditure. Also is the enormous
continuous energy expended by
Earths gravitational field for
maintaining the Moon in its orbit -
millennium after millennium. In spite of
the ongoing energy expended by
Earths gravitational field to hold
objects down on surface and the Moon
in orbit, why the energy of the field
never diminishes in strength or drains
its energy source? Is this energy
expenditure balanced by a conversion
of energy from an unknown energy
source?
The energy necessary to
support the effort expended by the
gravitational forces is well-known
and given by
W
F

r
m M
G Fdr W
g g
r
= =

According to the principle of energy
conservation, this energy expenditure
must be balanced by a conversion of
energy from another energy type.
64
The Uncertainty Principle tells us
that, due to the occurrence of
exchange of graviphotons in a time
interval E t < h (where E is the
energy of the graviphoton), the energy
variation E cannot be detected in the
system . Since the total energy
is the sum of the energy of the n
graviphotons, i.e.,
g g
m M
W
n
E E E W + + + = ...
2 1
,
then the energy W cannot be detected
as well. However, as we know it can be
converted into another type of energy,
for example, in rotational kinetic
energy, as in the hydroelectric plants,
or in the Gravitational Motor, as shown
in this work.
It is known that a quantum of
energy which varies during a
time interval
hf E =
E c f t < = = h 1
(wave period) cannot be
experimentally detected. This is an
imaginary photon or a virtual photon.
Thus, the graviphotons are imaginary
photons, i.e., the energies of the
graviphotons are imaginaries energies
and therefore the energy
is also an
imaginary energy. Consequently, it
belongs to the imaginary space-time.
i
E
n
E E E W + + + = ...
2 1
According to Eq. (131),
imaginary energy is equal to psychic
energy. Consequently, the imaginary
space-time is, in fact, the psychic
space-time, which contains the
Supreme Consciousness. Since the
Supreme Consciousness has infinite
psychic mass, then the psychic space-
time has infinite psychic energy. This is
highly relevant, because it confers to
the psychic space-time the
characteristic of unlimited source of
energy.
This can be easily confirmed by
the fact that, in spite of the enormous
amount of energy expended by Earths
gravitational field to hold objects down
on the surface of the planet and
maintain the Moon in its orbit, the
energy of Earths gravitational field
never diminishes in strength or
drains its energy source.
If an experiment involves a large
number of identical particles, all
described by the same wave function
, real density of mass of these
particles in x, y, z, t is proportional to
the corresponding value (
2

2
is
known as density of probability. If is
complex then . Thus,
). Similarly, in the case
of psychic particles, the density of
psychic mass,
*
=
2
*
. =
2

, in x, y, z, will be
expressed by . It is
known that is always real and
positive while
*

=
2

V m

= is an
imaginary quantity. Thus, as the
modulus of an imaginary number is
always real and positive, we can
transform the proportion , in
equality in the following form:
2



( ) 134
2

= k

where is a proportionality constant
(real and positive) to be determined.
k
In Quantum Mechanics we have
studied the Superpositon Principle,
which affirms that, if a particle (or
system of particles) is in a dynamic
state represented by a wave function
1
and may also be in another
dynamic state described by
2
then,
the general dynamic state of the
particle may be described by ,
where is a linear
combination(superposition)of and
1

2
,
i.e.,
( ) 135
2 2 1 1
+ = c c
Complex constants and
respectively indicates the percentage
of dynamic state, represented
by
1
c
2
c
1
and
2
in the formation of the
general dynamic state described by .
In the case of psychic particles
(psychic bodies, consciousness, etc.),
65
by analogy, if , ,..., refer
to the different dynamic states the
psychic particle assume, then its
general dynamic state may be
described by the wave function
1

,
given by:

( ) 136
2 2 1 1 n n
c c c

+ + + = ...

The state of superposition of wave
functions is, therefore, common for
both psychic and material particles. In
the case of material particles, it can be
verified, for instance, when an electron
changes from one orbit to another.
Before effecting the transition to
another energy level, the electron
carries out virtual transitions [42]. A
kind of relationship with other electrons
before performing the real transition.
During this relationship period, its wave
function remains scattered by a wide
region of the space [43] thus
superposing the wave functions of the
other electrons. In this relationship the
electrons mutually influence one
another, with the possibility of
intertwining their wave functions

.
When this happens, there occurs the
so-called Phase Relationship
according to quantum-mechanics
concept.
In the electrons virtual
transition mentioned before, the
listing of all the possibilities of the
electrons is described, as we know, by
Schrdingers wave equation.
Otherwise, it is general for material
particles. By analogy, in the case of
psychic particles, we may say that the
listing of all the possibilities of the
psyches involved in the relationship will
be described by Schrdingers
equation for psychic case, i.e.,

Since the electrons are simultaneously waves and

particles, their wave aspects will interfere with each
other; besides superposition, there is also the
possibility of occurrence of intertwining of their
wave functions.
( ) 137 0
2
2
2
= +

h
p

Because the wave functions are
capable of intertwining themselves, the
quantum systems may penetrate
each other, thus establishing an
internal relationship where all of them
are affected by the relationship, no
longer being isolated systems but
becoming an integrated part of a larger
system. This type of internal
relationship, which exists only in
quantum systems, was called
Relational Holism [44].
The equation of quantization of
mass (33), in the generalized form,
leads us to the following expression:
( ) ( )( ) min 0
2
imagynary i imaginary i
m n m =
Thus, we can also conclude that the
psychic mass is also quantized, due to
(imaginary i
m m
)
=

(Eq. 131), i.e.,

( )
( ) 138
2
min
= m n m
where
( )
( )
( )
( ) 139
min 0
3
2
2
min
3
2
min
i m
i c hf m
real i
=
= =

It was shown that the minimum
quantum of real inertial mass in the
Universe, , is given by:
( )min 0 real i
m
( )
( ) 140 10 9 . 3
8 3
73
max min 0
kg
cd h m
real i

=
= =
By analogy to Eqs. (132) and (133),
the expressions of the psychic masses
associated to the proton and the
neutron are respectively given by:

( )
( )
( )
( ) 141
0
3
2
2
3
2
i m
i c hf
m m
proton real i
proton
proton imaginary i proton
+ =
= + =
= =

66
( )
( )
( )
( ) 142
0
3
2
2
3
2
i m
i c hf
m m
neutron real i
neutron
neutron imaginary i neutron
=
= =
= =

The imaginary gravitational
masses of the atoms must be much
smaller than their real gravitational
masses. On the contrary, the weight of
the bodies would be very different of
the observed values. This fact shows
that and
must have contrary signs. In this way,
the imaginary gravitational mass of an
atom can be expressed by means of
the following expression
( ) proton imaginary i
m
( )neutron imaginary i
m
( )
( ) i
c
E
m m m N m
p n e atom imaginary i

+ =
2
where, E , is the interaction energy.
By comparing this expression with the
following expression
( )

+ + + =
2
c
E
m m m N m
n p e atom real i

Thus,
( ) ( )atom real i atom imaginary i
m m <<
Now consider a monatomic body with
real mass and imaginary mass
. Then we have
(real i
M
)
) (imaginary i
M

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
i
c
E
m m m
c
E
m m m
c
E
c
E
m m m n
i
c
E
c
E
m m m n
c
E
m
c
i E
m
M
M
n p e
p n e
a
n p e
a
p n e
a
atom real i
a
atom imaginary i
real i
imaginary i

+ + +

+ + +

+
=
=

+
=
2
2
2 2
2 2
2
2

Since . E E
a
<<
The intensity of the gravitational
forces between and an
imaginary particle with mass
, both at rest, is given by
(imaginary g
M

( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( )
2
2
2
2
r
i m i M
G
c
E
m m m
c
E
m m m
r m M G F
real i real i
n p e
p n e
imaginary i imaginary i

+ + +

= =

Therefore, the total gravity is
( )
( )
( )
( )
2
2
2
2
r
M
G
c
E
m m m
c
E
m m m
r
M
G g g
real i
n p e
p n e
real i
imaginary real

+ + +

= +

Thus, the imaginary gravitational mass
of a body produces an excess of
gravity acceleration, , given by g

( )
( )
2
2
2
r
M
G
c
E
m m m
c
E
m m m
g
real i
n p e
p n e

+ + +

+


In the case of soft atoms we can
consider . Thus, in
this case we obtain
joules E
13
10 2


( ) 143 10 6
2
4
r
M
G g
i

In the case of the Sun, for example,
there is an excess of gravity
acceleration, due to its imaginary
gravitational mass, given by
( )
2
4
10 6
r
M
G g
iS

At a distance from the Sun of
the value of is m r
13
10 0 . 1 = g

2 10
. 10 8

s m g

Experiments in the pioneer 10
spacecraft, at a distance from the Sun
of about 67 AU or [ m r
13
10 0 . 1 = 45],
measured an excess acceleration
towards the Sun of

)
) (imaginary g
m
2 10
. 10 33 . 1 74 . 8

= s m g

67
Note that the general expression for
the gravity acceleration of the Sun is

( )
2
4
10 6 1
r
M
G g
iS
+ =
Therefore, in the case of the
gravitational deflection of light about
the Sun, the new expression for the
deflection of the light is
( ) ( ) 144
4
10 6 1
2
4
d c
GM
iS
+ =
Thus, the increase in due to the
excess acceleration towards the Sun
can be considered negligible.
Similarly to the collapse of the
real wave function, the collapse of the
psychic wave function must suddenly
also express in reality all the
possibilities described by it. This is,
therefore, a point of decision in which
there occurs the compelling need of
realization of the psychic form. Thus,
this is moment in which the content of
the psychic form realizes itself in the
space-time. For an observer in space-
time, something is real when it is in the
form of matter or radiation. Therefore,
the content of the psychic form may
realize itself in space-time exclusively
under the form of radiation, that is, it
does not materialize. This must occur
when the Materialization Condition is
not satisfied, i.e., when the content of
the psychic form is undefined
(impossible to be defined by its own
psychic) or it does not contain enough
psychic mass to materialize

the
respective psychic contents.
Nevertheless, in both cases,
there must always be a production of
virtual photons to convey the psychic
interaction to the other psychic
particles, according to the quantum
field theory, only through this type of
quanta will interaction be conveyed,
since it has an infinite reach and may
be either attractive or repulsive, just as

By this we mean not only materialization proper

but also the movement of matter to realize its
psychic content (including radiation).
electromagnetic interaction which,
as we know, is conveyed by the
exchange of virtual photons.
If electrons, protons and neutrons
have psychic mass, then we can infer
that the psychic mass of the atoms are
Phase Condensates
***
. In the case of
the molecules the situation is similar.
More molecular mass means more
atoms and consequently, more psychic
mass. In this case the phase
condensate also becomes more
structured because the great amount
of elementary psyches inside the
condensate requires, by stability
reasons, a better distribution of them.
Thus, in the case of molecules with
very large molecular masses
(macromolecules) it is possible that
their psychic masses already constitute
the most organized shape of a Phase
Condensate, called Bose-Einstein
Condensate

.
The fundamental characteristic of
a Bose-Einstein condensate is, as we
know, that the various parts making up
the condensed system not only behave
as a whole but also become a whole,
i.e., in the psychic case, the various
consciousnesses of the system
become a single consciousness with
psychic mass equal to the sum of the
psychic masses of all the
consciousness of the condensate. This
obviously, increases the available
knowledge in the system since it is
proportional to the psychic mass of the

***
Ice and NaCl crystals are common examples of
imprecisely-structured phase condensates. Lasers,
super fluids, superconductors and magnets are
examples of phase condensates more structured.

Several authors have suggested the possibility of

the Bose-Einstein condensate occurring in the
brain, and that it might be the physical base of
memory, although they have not been able to find a
suitable mechanism to underpin such a hypothesis.
Evidences of the existence of Bose-Einstein
condensates in living tissues abound (Popp, F.A
Experientia, Vol. 44, p.576-585; Inaba, H., New
Scientist, May89, p.41; Rattermeyer, M and Popp,
F. A. Naturwissenschaften, Vol.68, N5, p.577.)

68
consciousness. This unity confers an
individual character to this type of
consciousness. For this reason, from
now on they will be called Individual
Material Consciousness.
We can derive from the above
that most bodies do not possess
individual material consciousness. In
an iron rod, for instance, the cluster of
elementary psyches in the iron
molecules does not constitute Bose-
Einstein condensate; therefore, the
iron rod does not have an individual
consciousness. Its consciousness is
consequently, much more simple and
constitutes just a phase condensate
imprecisely structured made by the
consciousness of the iron atoms.
The existence of consciousnesses
in the atoms is revealed in the
molecular formation, where atoms with
strong mutual affinity (their
consciousnesses) combine to form
molecules. It is the case, for instance
of the water molecules, in which two
Hydrogen atoms join an Oxygen atom.
Well, how come the combination
between these atoms is always the
same: the same grouping and the
same invariable proportion? In the
case of molecular combinations the
phenomenon repeats itself. Thus, the
chemical substances either mutually
attract or repel themselves, carrying
out specific motions for this reason. It
is the so-called Chemical Affinity. This
phenomenon certainly results from a
specific interaction between the
consciousnesses. From now on, it will
be called Psychic Interaction.
Mutual Affinity is a
dimensionless psychic quantity with
which we are familiar and of which we
have perfect understanding as to its
meaning. The degree of Mutual
Affinity, A, in the case of two
consciousnesses, respectively
described by and , must be
1

correlated to and
2
1

2
2

. Only
a simple algebraic form fills the
requirements of interchange of the
indices, the product
( ) 145
. .
1 , 2 2 , 1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
A A A = = =
= =

In the above expression, A is due to
the product will be always
positive. From equations (143) and
(134) we get
2
2
2
1
.
( ) 146
.
2
2
1
1 2
2 1
2 2
2
2
1
V
m
V
m
k
k A


=
= = =

The psychic interaction can be
described starting from the psychic
mass because the psychic mass is the
source of the psychic field. Basically,
the psychic mass is gravitational mass,
(imaginary g
m m
)

. In this way, the

equations of the gravitational
interaction are also applied to the
Psychic Interaction. However, due to
the psychic mass, , to be an
imaginary quantity, it is necessary to
put

m into the mentioned equations

in order to homogenize them, because
as we know, the module of an
imaginary number is always real and
positive.
Thus, based on gravity theory,
we can write the equation of the
psychic field in nonrelativistic
Mechanics.
( ) 147 4

= G

Quantum Mechanics tells us that do not have

a physical interpretation or a simple meaning and
also it cannot be experimentally observed. However
such restriction does not apply to , which is
known as density of probability and represents the
probability of finding the body, described by the
wave function

, in the point x, y, z at the

moment t. A large value of means a strong
possibility to find the body, while a small value of
means a weak possibility to find the body.
2

69
It is similar to the equation of the
gravitational field, with the difference
that now instead of the density of
gravitational mass we have the density
of psychic mass. Then, we can write
the general solution of Eq. (147), in the
following form:
( ) 148
2

=
r
dV
G

This equation expresses, with
nonrelativistic approximation, the
potential of the psychic field of any
distribution of psychic mass.
Particularly, for the potential of
the field of only one particle with
psychic mass , we get:
1
m
( ) 149
1
r
m G

=
Then the force produced by this field
upon another particle with psychic
mass is
2
m
( ) 150
2
2 1
2 21 12
r
m m
G
r
m F F


=
=

= =
r r
By comparing equations (150) and
(146) we obtain

( ) 151
2 2
2 1
21 12
r k
V V
A G F F = =

r r
In the vectorial form the above
equation is written as follows
( ) 152
2 2
2 1
21 12

r k
V V
GA F F = =

r r
Versor has the direction of the line
connecting the mass centers (psychic
mass) of both particles and oriented
from to .
1
m
2
m
In general, we may distinguish
and quantify two types of mutual
affinity: positive and negative
(aversion). The occurrence of the first
type is synonym of psychic attraction,
(as in the case of the atoms in the
water molecule) while the aversion is
synonym of repulsion. In fact, Eq. (152)
shows that the forces and
12
F
r
21
F
r
are
attractive, if A is positive
(expressing positive mutual affinity
between the two psychic bodies), and
repulsive if A is negative (expressing
negative mutual affinity between the
two psychic bodies). Contrary to the
interaction of the matter, where the
opposites attract themselves here, the
opposites repel themselves.
A method and device to obtain
images of psychic bodies have been
previously proposed [46]. By means of
this device, whose operation is based
on the gravitational interaction and the
piezoelectric effect, it will be possible
to observe psychic bodies.
Expression (146) can be
rewritten in the following form:
( ) 153
2
2
1
1 2
V
m
V
m
k A =

The psychic masses and are
imaginary quantities. However, the
product is a real quantity. One
can then conclude from the previous
expression that the degree of mutual
affinity between two consciousnesses
depends basically on the densities of
their psychic masses, and that:
1
m
2
m
2 1
m m .
1) If and then
(positive mutual affinity
between them)
0
1
>

m 0
2
>

m
0 > A
2) If 0
1
<

m and then
(positive mutual affinity
between them)
0
2
<

m
0 > A
3) If and then 0
1
>

m 0
2
<

m
0 < A (negative mutual affinity
between them)
4) If 0
1
<

m and then 0
2
>

m
0 < A (negative mutual affinity
between them)
In this relationship, as occurs in the
case of material particles (virtual
transition of the electrons previously
mentioned), the consciousnesses
interact mutually, intertwining or not
their wave functions. When this
happens, there occurs the so-called
Phase Relationship according to
quantum-mechanics concept.
70
Otherwise a Trivial Relationship takes
place.
The psychic forces such as the
gravitational forces, must be very weak
when we consider the interaction
between two particles. However, in
spite of the subtleties, those forces
stimulate the relationship of the
consciousnesses with themselves and
with the Universe (Eq.152).
From all the preceding, we
perceive that Psychic Interaction
unified with matter interactions,
constitutes a single Law which links
things and beings together and, in a
network of continuous relations and
exchanges, governs the Universe both
in its material and psychic aspects. We
can also observe that in the
interactions the same principle
reappears always identical. This unity
of principle is the most evident
expression of monism in the Universe.














































































71




APPENDIX A: Allais effect explained

A Foucault-type pendulum slightly
increases its period of oscillation at sites
experiencing a solar eclipse, as compared
with any other time. This effect was first
observed by Allais [47] over 40 years ago.
Also Saxl and Allen [48], using a torsion
pendulum, have observed the
phenomenon. Recently, an anomalous
eclipse effect on gravimeters has become
well-established [49], while some of the
pendulum experiments have not. Here,
we will show that the Allais gravity and
pendulum effects during solar eclipses
result from a shielding effect of the Suns
gravity when the Moon is between the Sun
and the Earth.
The interplanetary medium includes
interplanetary dust, cosmic rays and hot
plasma from the solar wind. Its density is
inversely proportional to the squared
distance from the Sun, decreasing as this
distance increases. Near the Earth-Moon
system, this density is very low, with
values about
3
/ 5 cm protons ( )
3 21
10 3 . 8 m kg

.
However, this density is highly variable. It
can be increased up to
3
/ 100 ~ cm protons ( )
3 19
10 7 . 1 m g k

[50].
The atmosphere of the Moon is
very tenuous and insignificant in
comparison with that of the Earth. The
average daytime abundances of the
elements known to be present in the lunar
atmosphere, in atoms per cubic
centimeter, are as follows: H <17, He 2-
40x10
3
, Na 70,K 17, Air 4x10
4
, yielding
~8x10
4
total atoms per cubic
centimeter( )
3 16
. 10

m kg [51]. According to
pik [52], near the Moon surface, the
density of the lunar atmosphere can reach
values up to .The minimum
possible
3 12
. 10

m kg
density of the lunar atmosphere is
in the top of the atmosphere and is
essentially very close to the value of the
interplanetary medium.
Since the density of the
interplanetary medium is very small it
cannot work as gravitational shielding.
However, there is a top layer in the lunar
atmosphere with density
that can work as a
gravitational shielding and explain the
Allais and pendulum effects. Below this
layer, the density of the lunar atmosphere
increases, making the effect of
gravitational shielding negligible.
3 18
. 10 3 . 1

m kg
During the solar eclipses, when the
Moon is between the Sun and the Earth,
two gravitational shieldings and ,
are established in the top layer of the lunar
atmosphere (See Fig. 1A). In order to
understand how these gravitational
shieldings work (the gravitational shielding
effect) see Fig. II. Thus, right after
(inside the system Moon-Lunar
atmosphere), the Suns gravity
acceleration,
1 Sh 2 Sh
1 Sh
S
g
r
, becomes
S
g
r
where,
according to Eq. (57) is given by

( ) A
c
D n
r
1 1 1 2 1
2
3
2

+ =

The total density of solar radiation

arriving at the top layer of the lunar
atmosphere is given by
D
2 7 4
/ 10 32 . 6 m W T D = =
Since the temperature of the surface of the
Sun is and
. The density of
the top layer is then
Eq. (1A) gives
K T
3
10 778 . 5 =
4 2 8
. . 10 67 . 5

= K m W
3 18
. 10 3 . 1

m kg

1 . 1 =

The negative sign of shows that
S
g
r
, has opposite direction to
S
g
r
. As
previously showed (see Fig. II), after
the second gravitational shielding

The text in red in wrong. But the value of

is correct. It is not the solar radiation
that produces the phenomenon. The exact
description of the phenomenon starting from the
same equation (1A) is presented in the end of my
paper: Scattering of Sunlight in Lunar Exosphere
Caused by Gravitational Microclusters of Lunar Dust
(2013).
1 . 1 =
72
) ( 2 Sh the gravity acceleration
S
g
r

becomes . This means that
S
g
r
2

S
g
r
2

has the same direction of
S
g
r
. In
addition, right after the lunar
gravity becomes
( 2 Sh )
moon
g
r
. Therefore, the
total gravity acceleration in the Earth
will be given by

( ) A g g g g
moon S
2
2
r r r r
=


Since and
Eq. (2A), gives
2 3
/ 10 9 . 5 s m g
S

2 5
/ 10 3 . 3 s m g
moon

( ) ( )
( ) ( ) A g
s m g
g g g g
Moon S
3 10 3 . 7 1
. 10 1 . 7
1 . 1 1 . 1
4
2 3
2

=
=
= =

This decrease in g increases the
period g l T 2 = of a paraconical
pendulum (Allais effect) in about
( )
T
g
g
T T 00037 . 1
10 3 . 7 1
4
=

=

This corresponds to increase

in the period, and is roughly the value
(0.0372%) obtained by Saxl and Allen
during the total solar eclipse in March
1970 [
% 037 . 0
48].
As we have seen, the density of
the interplanetary medium near the
Moon is highly variable and can reach
values up to
3
/ 100 ~ cm protons
( )
3 19
10 7 . 1 m g k

.
When the density of the
interplanetary medium increases, the
top layer of the lunar atmosphere can
also increase its density, by absorbing
particles from the interplanetary
medium due to the lunar gravitational
attraction. In the case of a density
increase of roughly 30%
( )
3 18
10 7 . 1 m g k

, the value for

becomes
4 . 0 =
Consequently, we get

( ) ( )
( ) ( ) A g
s m g
g g g g
Moon S
4 10 7 . 9 1
. 10 6 . 9
4 . 0 4 . 0
5
2 4
2

=
=
= =
This decrease in increases the
pendulums period by about
g
( )
T
g
g
T T 000048 . 1
10 4 . 9 1
5
=

=

This corresponds to increase

in the pendulums period. J uns
abstract [
% 0048 . 0
53] tells us of a relative
change less than 0.005% in the
pendulums period associated with the
1990 solar eclipse.
For example, if the density of the
top layer of the lunar atmosphere
increase up to
3 18
10 0917 . 2 m g k

, the
value for becomes

3
10 5 . 1

=

Thus, we obtain
( ) ( )
( ) ( ) A g
s m g
g g g g
Moon S
5 10 4 . 6 1
. 10 3 . 6
10 5 . 1 10 5 . 1
9
2 8
3
2
3

=
=
= =
So, the total gravity acceleration in the
Earth will decrease during the solar
eclipses by about

g
9
10 4 . 6

The size of the effect, as measured
with a gravimeter, during the 1997
eclipse, was roughly
[
( )

g
9
10 7 5
54, 55].
The decrease will be even
smaller for 10 0917 . 2
-18
kg.m
-3
. The
lower limit now is set by Lageos
satellites, which suffer an anomalous
acceleration of only about ,
during seasons where the satellite
experiences eclipses of the Sun by the
Earth [

g
13
10 3
56].



73


Fig. 1A Schematic diagram of the Gravitational Shielding around the Moon The top layer of the
Moons atmosphere with density of the order of 10
-18
kg.m
-3
, produces a gravitational shielding
when subjected to the radiation from the Sun. Thus, the solar gravity
S
g
r
becomes
S
g
r
after the
first shielding 1 Sh and
S
g
r
2
after the second shielding 2 Sh . The Moon gravity becomes
Moon
g
r

after 2 Sh . Therefore the total gravity acceleration in the Earth will be given by
moon S
g g g g
r r r r
=

2
.

Top layer of the Moons atmosphere
(Gravitational Shielding)
Moon Earth
S
g
r

Moon
g
r

g
r

S
g
r
2

S
g
r
2

S
g
r

Moon
g
r

Interplanetary medium
3 19
10 m kg

10
18
kg.m
-3

Moon
g
r

10
17
kg.m
-3

10
12
kg.m
-3

Sh1 Sh2
Solar radiation







74


APPENDIX B
In this appendix we will show
why, in the quantized gravity equation
(Eq.34), is excluded from the
sequence of possible values of .
Obviously, the exclusion of
0 = n
n
0 = n ,
means that the gravity can have only
discrete values different of zero.
Equation (33) shows that the
gravitational mass is quantized and
given by

( ) min
2
g g
m n M =

Since Eq. (43) leads to

( ) ( ) min min io g
m m =

where

( )
kg cd h m
i
73
max min 0
10 9 . 3 8 3

= =

is the elementary quantum of inertial
mass. Then the equation
for becomes
g
M

( ) ( ) min
2
min
2
i g g
m n m n M = =
On the other hand, Eq. (44)
shows that
( ) min 0
2
i i i
m n M =
Thus, we can write that

( ) B M M or
n
n
M
M
i g
i i
g
1
2
2
=

=

where
i
n n = is a quantum number
different of n .
By multiplying both members of
Eq. (1B) by
2 2
1 c V we get
( ) B m m
i g
2
2
=
By substituting (2B) into Eq. (21)
we get



( ) B
L m
h n
L m
h n
E
i g
n
3
8 8
2 2
2 2
2
2 2

= =
From this equation we can easily
conclude that cannot be
zero( )
0
0

n n
E or E . On the
other hand, the Eq. (2B) shows that the
exclusion of 0 = means the exclusion
of 0 =
g
m as a possible value for the
gravitational mass. Obviously, this also
means the exclusion of 0 =
g
M
(Relativistic mass). Equation (33) tells
us that , thus we can
conclude that the exclusion of
(min
2
g g
m n M =
)
0 =
g
M
implies in the exclusion of since 0 = n
( ) ( )
value finite m m
i g
= =
min 0 min
(elementary
quantum of mass). Therefore Eq. (3B)
is only valid for values of and n
different of zero. Finally, from the
quantized gravity equation (Eq. 34),
( )
( )
min
4
2
max
min 2
2
g n
n r
Gm
n
r
GM
g
g g
=
=

= =
we conclude that the exclusion of 0 = n
means that the gravity can have only
discrete values different of zero.


















75


REFERENCES

[1] Isham, C. J . (1975) Quantum gravity, an
Oxford Symposium, OUP.
[2] Isham, C.J ., (1997) "Structural Problems
Facing Quantum Gravity Theory'', in M,
Francaviglia, G, Longhi, L, Lusanna, and
E, Sorace, eds., Proceedings of the 14th
International Conference on General
Relativity and Gravitation, 167-209,
(World Scientific, Singapore, 1997).
[3] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E. (1969) Theorie
du Champ, Ed.MIR, Moscow, Portuguese
version (1974) Ed. Hemus, S.Paulo, p.35.
[4] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E. (1969)
Mecanique, Ed.MIR, Moscow, 15.
[5] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E.[3], p.35.
[6] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E.[3], p.36.
[7] Beiser, A. (1967) Concepts of Modern
Physics, McGraw-Hill, Portuguese version
(1969) Ed. Poligno, S.Paulo, p.151.
[8] Schiff, L.I. (1981) Quantum Mechanics,
McGraw-Hill, p.54.
[9] V.B. Braginsky, C.M. Caves, and
K.S.Thorne (1977) Phys. Rev. D15, 2047.
[10] L.D. Landau and E.M. Lifshitz,(1951)
The Classical Theory of Fields,
1
st
. Edition (Addison-Wesley), p.328.
[11] R.L. Forward,(1961) Proc. IRE 49, 892.
[12] Tajmar, M. et at., (2006) Experimental
Detection of the Gravitomagnetic
London Moment. gr-qc/0603033.
[13] Tate, J ., Cabrera, B., Felch, S.B.,
Anderson, J .T., (1989) Precise
Determination of the Cooper-Pair Mass.
Phys. Rev. Lett. 62(8), 845-848.
[14] Tate, J ., Cabrera, B., Felch, S.B.,
Anderson, J .T., (1990) Determination of
the Cooper-Pair Mass in Niobium. Phys.
Rev. B 42(13), 7885-7893.
[15] Tajmar, M. and De Matos, C.J (2006)
Local Photon and Graviton Mass and its
Consequences, gr-qc / 0603032.
[16] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E.[3], p.426-427.
[17] Hildebrandt, A.F.,(1964) Magnetic
Field of a Rotating Superconductor.
Phys. Rev.Lett. 12(8), 190-191.
[18] Verheijen, A.A., van Ruitenbeek, J .M.,
de Bruyn Ouboter, R., and de Jongh,
L.J ., (1990) The London Moment for
High Temperature Superconductors.
Physica B 165-166, 1181-1182.







[19] Verheijen, A.A., van Ruitenbeek, J .M.,
de Bruyn Ouboter, R., and de J ongh,
L.J ., (1990) Measurement of the London
Moment for Two High Temperature
Superconductors. Nature 345, 418-419.
[20] Sanzari, M.A., Cui, H.L., and Karwacki,
F., (1996) London Moment for Heavy-
Fermion Superconductors. Appl. Phys.
Lett., 68(26), 3802-3804.
[21] Liu, M., (1998) Rotating Superconductors
and the Frame-Independent London
Equation. Phys. Rev. Lett. 81(15), 3223-3226.
[22] J iang, Y., and Liu, M. Rotating (2001)
Superconductors and the London
Moment: Thermodynamics versus
Microscopics. Phys. Rev. B 63, 184506.
[23] Capellmann, H., (2002) Rotating
Superconductors: Ginzburg-Landau
Equations.Europ. Phys. J. B 25, 25-30.
[24] Berger, J ., (2004) Nonlinearity of the
Field Induced by a Rotating
Superconducting Shell. Phys. Rev. B 70,
212502.
[25] Podkletnov, E. and Nieminen, R. (1992)
Physica C, 203, 441.
[26] Ference J r, M., Lemon, H.B., Stephenson,
R.J ., Analytical Experimental Physics,
Chicago Press, Chicago, Illinois,.
Portuguese version (Eletromagnetismo),
Ed. Blcher, S.Paulo, Brazil, p.73.
[27] Modanese, G. (1996), gr-qc/9612022, p.4
[28] Quevedo, C.P.(1978) Eletromagnetismo,
McGraw-Hill, p. 102.
[29] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E.[3], p.324.
[30] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E.[3], p.357.
[31] Landau, L.and Lifchitz,E.[3],p.p.358-359.
[32] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E.[3], p.64.
[33] Luminet, J . at al.,(2003)Nature 425,593595.
[34] Ellis, G.F.R (2003) Nature 425, 566567.
[35] Hogan, C. et al. (1999) Surveying Space-
time with Supernovae, Scientific America,
vol.280, J anuary, pp. 46-51.
[36] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E.[3], p.440-441.
[37] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E.[3], p.333.
[38] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E.[3], p.331.
[39] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E.[3], p.327.
[40] Hawking, S.W (1971) MNRAS., 152, 75.
[41] Carr, B.J .(1976) Astrophys.J., 206,10.
[42] Bohm, D. (1951) Quantum Theory,
Prentice-Hall, N.Y, p.415.



76



[43] DEspagnat, B. The Question of Quantum
Reality, Scientific American, 241,128.
[44] Teller, P. Relational Holism and Quantum
Mechanics, British J ournal for the
Philosophy of Science, 37, 71-81.
[45] Anderson, J .D, et al., (2002) Study of the
anomalous acceleration of Pioneer 10
and 11, Phys. Rev.D65, 082004.
[46] De Aquino, F. (2007) Gravity Control
by means of Electromagnetic Field
through Gas at Ultra-Low Pressure,
physics/0701091.
[47] Allais, M. (1959) Acad. Sci. URSS
244,2469;245,1875(1959);245,2001
(1959);245,2170(1959);245,2467
(1959).
[48] Saxl, E. and Allen, M. (1971) Phys.
Rev.D3,823-825.
[49] http://science.nasa.gov/newhome/headli
nes/ast06aug991.htm
[50] Martin, M. and Turyshev, S.G. (2004)
Int. J. Mod. Phys.D13, 899-906.
[51] Stern, S.A. (1999) Rev. Geophys.
37, 453 [54] pik, E,J (1957) The
Density of the Lunar Atmosphere,
Irish Astr. J., Vol4 (6), p.186.
[52] pik, E,J (1957) The Density of
the Lunar Atmosphere, Irish Astr. J .,
Vol4(6), p.186.
[53] J un, L., et al. (1991) Phys. Rev. D
44,2611-2613.
[54] http://www.spacedaily.com/news/
china-01zi.httml
[55] Wang. Q et al., (2000) Phys. Rev. D 62,
041101(R).
[56] Rubincam, D. P. (1990) J . Geophys. Res.,
[Atmos.] 95, 4881.





Gravity Control by means of Electromagnetic Field
through Gas or Plasma at Ultra-Low Pressure

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2007-2010 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved

It is shown that the gravity acceleration just above a chamber filled with gas or plasma at ultra-low
pressure can be strongly reduced by applying an Extra Low-Frequency (ELF) electromagnetic field
across the gas or the plasma. This Gravitational Shielding Effect is related to recent discovery of
quantum correlation between gravitational mass and inertial mass. According to the theory samples
hung above the gas or the plasma should exhibit a weight decrease when the frequency of the
electromagnetic field is decreased or when the intensity of the electromagnetic field is increased. This
Gravitational Shielding Effect is unprecedented in the literature and can not be understood in the
framework of the General Relativity. From the technical point of view, there are several applications for
this discovery; possibly it will change the paradigms of energy generation, transportation and
telecommunications.

Key words: Phenomenology of quantum gravity, Experimental Tests of Gravitational Theories,
Vacuum Chambers, Plasmas devices. PACs: 04.60.Bc, 04.80.Cc, 07.30.Kf, 52.75.-d.



CONTENTS

I. INTRODUCTION 02

II. THEORY 02
Gravity Control Cells (GCC) 07

III. CONSEQUENCES 09
Gravitational Motor using GCC 11
Gravitational Spacecraft 12
Decreasing of inertial forces on the Gravitational Spacecraft 13
Gravity Control inside the Gravitational Spacecraft 13
Gravitational Thrusters 14
Artificial Atmosphere surrounds the Gravitational Spacecraft. 15
Gravitational Lifter 15
High Power Electromagnetic Bomb (A new type of E-bomb). 16
Gravitational Press of Ultra-High Pressure 16
Generation and Detection of Gravitational Radiation 17
Quantum Gravitational Antennas. Quantum Transceivers 18
Instantaneous Interstellar Communications 18
Wireless Electric Power Transmission, by using Quantum Gravitational Antennas. 18
Method and Device using GCCs for obtaining images of Imaginary Bodies 19
Energy shieldings 19
Possibility of Controlled Nuclear Fusion by means of Gravity Control 20

IV. CONCLUSION 21

APPENDIX A 42

APPENDIX B 70

References 74




2

I. INTRODUCTION
It will be shown that the local
gravity acceleration can be controlled by
means of a device called Gravity Control
Cell (GCC) which is basically a recipient
filled with gas or plasma where is applied
an electromagnetic field. According to
the theory samples hung above the gas
or plasma should exhibit a weight
decrease when the frequency of the
electromagnetic field is decreased or
when the intensity of the electromagnetic
field is increased. The electrical
conductivity and the density of the gas or
plasma are also highly relevant in this
process.
With a GCC it is possible to
convert the gravitational energy into
rotational mechanical energy by means
of the Gravitational Motor. In addition, a
new concept of spacecraft (the
Gravitational Spacecraft) and aerospace
flight is presented here based on the
possibility of gravity control. We will also
see that the gravity control will be very
important to Telecommunication.

II. THEORY
It was shown [1] that the relativistic
gravitational mass
2 2
1 c V m M
g g
=
and the relativistic inertial mass
2 2
0
1 c V m M
i i
= are quantized, and
given by ,
where and are respectively, the
gravitational quantum number and the
inertial quantum number ;
is the elementary
quantum of inertial mass. The masses
and are correlated by means of
the following expression:
(min 0
2
i g g
m n M =
) ( ) min 0
2
i i i
m n M =
g
n
i
n
( )
kg m
i
73
0
10 9 3

= .
min
g
m
0 i
m
( ) 1 1 1 2
0
2
0
.
i
i
i g
m
c m
p
m m

+ =
Where p is the momentum variation on
the particle and is the inertial mass
at rest.
0 i
m

In general, the momentum variation
p is expressed by t F p = where
is the applied force during a time
interval
F
t . Note that there is no
restriction concerning the nature of the
force , i.e., it can be mechanical,
electromagnetic, etc.
F
For example, we can look on the
momentum variation p as due to
absorption or emission of electromagnetic
energy by the particle.
In the case of radiation, p can be
obtained as follows: It is known that the
radiation pressure, , upon an area dP
dxdy dA = of a volume dxdydz d = V of
a particle ( the incident radiation normal
to the surface )is equal to the
energy absorbed per unit volume
dA
dU
( ) V d dU .i.e.,
( ) 2
dAdz
dU
dxdydz
dU
d
dU
dP = = =
V

Substitution of vdt dz = ( v is the speed
of radiation) into the equation above
gives
( )
( ) 3
v
dD
v
dAdt dU
d
dU
dP = = =
V

Since dF dPdA = we can write:
( ) 4
v
dU
dFdt=
However we know that dt dp dF= , then
( ) 5
v
dU
dp =
From this equation it follows that
r
n
c
U
c
c
v
U
p =

=
Substitution into Eq. (1) yields
( ) 6 1 1 2 1
0
2
2
0
i r
i
g
m n
c m
U
m

+ =
WhereU , is the electromagnetic energy
absorbed by the particle; is the index
of refraction.
r
n
3
Equation (6) can be rewritten in
the following form
( ) 7 1 1 2 1
0
2
2
i r g
m n
c
W
m

+ =

Where V U W = is the density of

electromagnetic energy and V
0 i
m =
is the density of inertial mass.
The Eq. (7) is the expression of the
quantum correlation between the
gravitational mass and the inertial mass
as a function of the density of
electromagnetic energy. This is also the
expression of correlation between
gravitation and electromagnetism.
The density of electromagnetic
energy in an electromagnetic field can be
deduced from Maxwells equations [2]
and has the following expression
( ) 8
2
2
1
2
2
1
H E W + =
It is known that H B = ,
r
k B E = [3]
and
( )
( ) 9
1 1
2
2

+ +
= = =

r r
r
c
dt
dz
v
Where is the real part of the
propagation vector
r
k
k
r
(also called phase
constant [4]);
i r
ik k k k + = =
r
; , and ,
are the electromagnetic characteristics of
the medium in which the incident (or
emitted) radiation is propagating
(
0

r
= where
r
is the relative
dielectric permittivity and
;
m F/ 10 854 . 8
12
0

=
0

r
= where
r
is the relative
magnetic permeability and ; m / H
7
0
10 4

=
is the electrical conductivity). It is
known that for free-space 0 = and
1 = =
r r
then Eq. (9) gives
( ) 10 c v =
From (9) we see that the index of
refraction v c n
r
= will be given by
( ) ( ) 11 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n

Equation (9) shows that v
r
= . Thus,
v k B E
r
= = , i.e., H v vB E = = .
Then, Eq. (8) can be rewritten in the
following form:
( ) ( ) 12
2
2
1 2 2
2
1
H H v W + =
For << , Eq. (9) reduces to
r r
c
v

=
Then, Eq. (12) gives
( ) 13
2 2
2
1 2
2
2
1
H H H
c
W
r r


= +

=
This equation can be rewritten in the
following forms:
( ) 14
2

B
W =
or
( ) 15
2
E W =
For >> , Eq. (9) gives
( ) 16
2

= v
Then, from Eq. (12) we get
( ) 17
2
2
2
1
2
2
1 2 2
2
1 2
2
1
H
H H H H W

= +

=
Since H v vB E = = , we can rewrite (17)
in the following forms:
( ) 18
2
2

B
W
or
( ) 19
4
2
E W

By comparing equations (14) (15) (18)

and (19) we see that Eq. (19) shows that
the better way to obtain a strong value of
in practice is by applying an Extra
Low-Frequency (ELF) electric field
W
( ) Hz f w 1 2 << = through a mean with
high electrical conductivity.
Substitution of Eq. (19) into Eq.
(7), gives
( ) 20 1
4 4
1 2 1
0
2
4
3
2
i g
m
E
f c
m

+ =


This equation shows clearly that if an
4
electrical conductor mean has
and
3
1

<< m Kg. 1 >> , then it is
possible obtain strong changes in its
gravitational mass, with a relatively small
ELF electric field. An electrical conductor
mean with is obviously a
plasma.
3
1

<< m Kg.
There is a very simple way to test
Eq. (20). It is known that inside a
fluorescent lamp lit there is low-pressure
Mercury plasma. Consider a 20W
T-12 fluorescent lamp (80044
F20T12/C50/ECO GE, Ecolux T12),
whose characteristics and dimensions
are well-known [5]. At around
, an optimum mercury
vapor pressure of
is obtained, which is required for
maintenance of high luminous efficacy
throughout life. Under these conditions,
the mass density of the Hg plasma can
be calculated by means of the well-
known Equation of State
K T
0
15 318.
2 3
8 0 10 6

= = m N Torr P . .
( ) 21
0
ZRT
PM
=
Where is the
molecular mass of the Hg;
1
0
2006 0

= mol kg M . .
1 Z is the
compressibility factor for the Hg plasma;
is the gases
universal constant. Thus we get
1 0 1
314 8

= K mol joule R . . .
( ) 22 10 067 6
3 5
m kg
plasma Hg
. .
The electrical conductivity of the Hg
plasma can be deduced from the
continuum form of Ohm's Law E j
r r
= ,
since the operating current through the
lamp and the current density are well-
known and respectively given by
[ A i 35 0. = 5] and
2
4 int

i S i j
lamp
= = , where
mm 1 36.
int
= is the inner diameter of the
lamp. The voltage drop across the
electrodes of the lamp is [ V 57 5] and the
distance between theml . Then
the electrical field along the lamp is
given by
( ) 23 419 3
1
= = m S
E
j
lamp
lamp
plasma Hg
. .
Substitution of (22) and (23) into (20)
yields
( )
( )
( ) 24 1 10 909 1 1 2 1
3
4
17

+ =

f
E
m
m
plasma Hg i
plasma Hg g
.
Thus, if an Extra Low-Frequency electric
field with the following
characteristics: and
ELF
E
1
100

m V E
ELF
.
mHZ f 1 < is applied through the
Mercury plasma then a strong decrease
in the gravitational mass of the Hg
plasma will be produced.
It was shown [1] that there is an
additional effect of gravitational shielding
produced by a substance under these
conditions. Above the substance the
gravity acceleration is reduced at the
same ratio
1
g
0 i g
m m = , i.e., ,
(
g g =
1
g is the gravity acceleration under the
substance). Therefore, due to the
gravitational shielding effect produced by
the decrease of
)
in the region
where the ELF electric field is
applied, the gravity acceleration just
above this region will be given by
( plasma Hg g
m
ELF
E
( )
( )
( )
( ) 25 1 10 909 1 1 2 1
3
4
17
1
g
f
E
g
m
m
g g
ELF
ELF
plasma Hg i
plasma Hg g
plasma Hg

+ =
= = =

The trajectories of the

electrons/ions through the lamp are
determined by the electric field along
the lamp. If the ELF electric field across
the lamp is much greater than ,
the current through the lamp can be
interrupted. However, if
lamp
E
ELF
E
lamp
E
lamp ELF
E E << , these
trajectories will be only slightly modified.
Since here , then we can
arbitrarily choose . This
means that the maximum voltage drop,
which can be applied across the metallic
1
100

= m V E
lamp
.
1
33

m V E
ELF
.
max
mm 570 =
lamp
E
1
100 570 0 57

= = m V m V E
lamp
. . .
Thus, we have
5
=
plates, placed at distance d , is equal to
the outer diameter (max
*
) of the
bulb of the 20W T-12 Fluorescent
lamp, is given by
max
lamp

V E V
lamp ELF
5 1.
max max
max

Since [ mm
lamp
3 40.
max
= 5].
Substitution of into
(25) yields
1
33

m V E
ELF
.
max
( )
( )
( )
( ) 26 1
10 264 2
1 2 1
3
11
1
g
f
g
m
m
g g
ELF
plasma Hg i
plasma Hg g
plasma Hg

+ =
= = =

Note that, for , the

gravity acceleration can be strongly
reduced. These conclusions show that
the ELF Voltage Source of the set-up
shown in Fig.1 should have the following
characteristics:
Hz mHz f
3
10 1

= <

- Voltage range: 0 1.5 V
- Frequency range: 10
-4
Hz 10
-3
Hz

In the experimental arrangement
shown in Fig.1, an ELF electric field with
intensity d V E
ELF
= crosses the
fluorescent lamp; V is the voltage drop
across the metallic plates of the
capacitor and .
When the ELF electric field is applied,
the gravity acceleration just above the
lamp (inside the dotted box) decreases
according to (25) and the changes can
be measured by means of the system
balance/sphere presented on the top of
Figure 1.
mm d
lamp
3 40.
max
= =
In Fig. 2 is presented an
experimental arrangement with two
fluorescent lamps in order to test the
gravity acceleration above the second
lamp. Since gravity acceleration above
the first lamp is given by
(
g g
plasma Hg )
r r
1 1
= , where

*
After heating.
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 27 1 10 909 1 1 2 1
3
1
4
1
17
1
1
1

+ =
= =

ELF
ELF
plasma Hg i
plasma Hg g
plasma Hg
f
E
m
m
.

Then, above the second lamp, the

gravity acceleration becomes

( ) ( ) ( )
( ) 28
1 2 1 2 2
g g g
plasma Hg plasma Hg plasma Hg
r r r
= =
where
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 29 1 10 909 1 1 2 1
3
2
4
2
17
2
2
2

+ =
= =

ELF
ELF
plasma Hg i
plasma Hg g
plasma Hg
f
E
m
m
.

Then, results
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 30 1 10 909 1 1 2 1
1 10 909 1 1 2 1
3
2
4
2
17
3
1
4
1
17 2

+ =

ELF
ELF
ELF
ELF
f
E
f
E
g
g
.
.

From Eq. (28), we then conclude that if
( )
0
1
<
plasma Hg
and also
( )
0
2
<
plasma Hg
,
then will have the same direction
of . This way it is possible to intensify
several times the gravity in the direction
of
2
g
g
g
r
. On the other hand, if
( )
0
1
<
plasma Hg

and
( )
0
2
>
plasma Hg
the direction of
2
g
r
will
be contrary to direction of . In this case
will be possible to intensify and
become
g
r
2
g
r
repulsive in respect tog
r
.
If we put a lamp above the second
lamp, the gravity acceleration above the
third lamp becomes
( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) 31
1 2 3
2 3 3
g
g g
plasma Hg plasma Hg plasma Hg
plasma Hg
r
r r

=
= =
or

6
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 32 1 10 909 1 1 2 1
1 10 909 1 1 2 1
1 10 909 1 1 2 1
3
3
4
3
17
3
2
4
2
17
3
1
4
1
17 3

+ =

ELF
ELF
ELF
ELF
ELF
ELF
f
E
f
E
f
E
g
g
.
.
.
If and
( ) ( ) ( )
f f f f
ELF ELF ELF
= = =
3 2 1


( ) ( ) ( )
. 2 sin 814 . 24
3 . 40 sin
0
0
3 2 1
ft V
mm t V
V E E E
ELF ELF ELF

=
= =
= = = =

Then, for 4 T t = we get
( ) ( ) ( ) 0 3 2 1
814 24 V E E E
ELF ELF ELF
. = = = .
Thus, Eq. (32) gives
( ) 33 1 10 237 7 1 2 1
3
3
4
0 12 3

+ =

f
V
g
g
.
For and V V 5 1
0
. = mHz f 2 0. =
( ) 20.83min 1250 4 = = = s T t the gravity
acceleration above the third lamp will
be given by
3
g
r
g g
r r
126 5
3
. =
Above the second lamp, the gravity
acceleration given by (30), is
g g
r r
2.972
2
+ = .
According to (27) the gravity acceleration
above the first lamp is
g g
r r
-1,724
1
=
Note that, by this process an
acceleration can be increased several
times in the direction of or in the
opposite direction.
g
r
g
r
In the experiment proposed in Fig.
1, we can start with ELF voltage
sinusoidal wave of amplitude V V 0 1
0
. =
and frequency . Next, the frequency
will be progressively decreased down
to , , and
. Afterwards, the amplitude of the
voltage wave must be increased to
and the frequency decreased
in the above mentioned sequence.
mHz 1
mHz 8 0. mHz 6 0. mHz 4 0.
mHz 2 0.
V V 5 1
0
. =
Table1 presents the theoretical
values for and , calculated
respectively by means of (25) and
(30).They are also plotted on Figures 5,
6 and 7 as a function of the
frequency .
1
g
2
g
ELF
f
Now consider a chamber filled
with Air at and 300K as
shown in Figure 8 (a). Under these
circumstances, the mass density of the
air inside the chamber, according to Eq.
(21) is .
torr
12
10 3

3 15
10 94 4

m kg
air
. .
If the frequency of the magnetic
field, B , through the air is then
. Assuming that
the electric conductivity of the air inside
the chamber,
Hz f 60 =
m S f /
9
10 3 2

=
( ) air
is much less than ,
i.e.,
( )
<<
air
(The atmospheric air
conductivity is of the order of
[
1 15
10 100 2

m S . 6, 7]) then we can
rewritten the Eq. (11) as follows

( )
( ) 34 1
r r air r
n

From Eqs. (7), (14) and (34) we thus
obtain
( ) ( ) ( )
[ ] { }
( )
( ) 35 1 10 2 3 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
4 6
2
2
2
air i
air i air r
air air
air g
m B
m n
c
B
m
+ =
=

+ =
.


Therefore, due to the gravitational
shielding effect produced by the
decreasing of , the gravity
acceleration above the air inside the
chamber will be given by
( ) air g
m
( )
( )
[ ] { }g B
g
m
m
g g
air i
air g
air
1 10 2 3 1 2 1
4 6
+ =
= = =
.

Note that the gravity acceleration
above the air becomes negative
for . T B
2
10 5 2

> .
7
For the gravity
acceleration above the air becomes
T B 1 0. =

g g 8 32.

Therefore the ultra-low pressure air
inside the chamber, such as the Hg
plasma inside the fluorescent lamp,
works like a Gravitational Shield that in
practice, may be used to build Gravity
Control Cells (GCC) for several practical
applications.
Consider for example the GCCs of
Plasma presented in Fig.3. The
ionization of the plasma can be made of
several manners. For example, by
means of an electric field between the
electrodes (Fig. 3(a)) or by means of a
RF signal (Fig. 3(b)). In the first case the
ELF electric field and the ionizing electric
field can be the same.
Figure 3(c) shows a GCC filled
with air (at ambient temperature and 1
atm) strongly ionized by means of alpha
particles emitted from 36 radioactive ions
sources (a very small quantity of
Americium 241

). The radioactive
element Americium has a half-life of 432
years, and emits alpha particles and low
energy gamma rays( ) KeV 60 . In order
to shield the alpha particles and gamma
rays emitted from the Americium 241 it is
sufficient to encapsulate the GCC with
epoxy. The alpha particles generated by
the americium ionize the oxygen and

The radioactive element Americium (Am-241) is

widely used in ionization smoke detectors. This
type of smoke detector is more common because
it is inexpensive and better at detecting the
smaller amounts of smoke produced by flaming
fires. Inside an ionization detector there is a small
amount (perhaps 1/5000th of a gram) of
americium-241. The Americium is present in
oxide form (AmO
2
) in the detector. The cost of
the AmO
2
is US$ 1,500 per gram. The amount of
radiation in a smoke detector is extremely small.
It is also predominantly alpha radiation. Alpha
radiation cannot penetrate a sheet of paper, and
it is blocked by several centimeters of air. The
americium in the smoke detector could only pose
a danger if inhaled.

nitrogen atoms of the air in the
ionization chamber (See Fig. 3(c))
increasing the electrical conductivity of
the air inside the chamber. The high-
speed alpha particles hit molecules in
the air and knock off electrons to form
ions, according to the following
expressions

+ + + + +
+ + + + +
+ + +
+ + +
e e
e e
H e N H N
H e O H O
2 2
2 2


It is known that the electrical
conductivity is proportional to both the
concentration and the mobility of the ions
and the free electrons, and is expressed
by
i i e e
+ =
Where
e
and
i
express respectively
the concentrations ( )
3
m C of electrons
and ions;
e
and
i
are respectively the
mobilities of the electrons and the ions.
In order to calculate the electrical
conductivity of the air inside the
ionization chamber, we first need to
calculate the concentrations
e
and
i
.
We start calculating the disintegration
constant, , for the Am 241 :
( )
1 11
7
10 1 5
10 15 3 432
693 0 693 0
2
1

=

= = s
s
T
.
.
. .

Where years T 432

2
1
= is the half-life of
the Am 241.
One of an isotope has mass
equal to atomic mass of the isotope
expressed in kilograms. Therefore, of
Am 241 has
kmole
g 1
kmoles
kmole kg
kg
6
3
10 15 4
241
10

= .
One of any isotope contains the
Avogadros number of atoms. Therefore
of Am 241 has
kmole
g 1

atoms kmole atoms
kmoles N
21 26
6
10 50 2 10 025 6
10 15 4
=
=

. .
.

Thus, the activity [8] of the sample is
8
disintegrations/s.
11
10 3 1 = = . N R

However, we will use 36 ionization
sources each one with 1/5000th of a
gram of Am 241. Therefore we will only
use of Am 241. Thus, g
3
10 2 7

. R
reduces to:

disintegrations/s
9
10 = N R

This means that at one second, about
hit molecules in the air
and knock off electrons to form ions
and inside the ionization chamber.
Assuming that each alpha particle yields
one ion at each
particles
9
10
+
2
O
+
2
N
9
10 1 second then the
total number of ions produced in one
second will be ions N
i
18
10 . This
corresponds to an ions concentration
( )
3
1 0 m C eN
i i
V . V =
Where V is the volume of the ionization
chamber. Obviously, the concentration of
electrons will be the same, i.e.,
i e
= .
For and cm d 2 = cm 20 = (See Fig.3(c))
we obtain
( ) ( )
3 4 2
2
4
10 28 6 10 2 20 0 m

= = . . V

The
n we get:

3 2
10 m C
i e
=

This corresponds to the minimum
concentration level in the case of
conducting materials. For these
materials, at temperature of 300K, the
mobilities
e
and
i
vary from 10 up
to [
1 1 2
100

s V m 9]. Then we can assume
that . (minimum
mobility level for conducting materials).
Under these conditions, the electrical
conductivity of the air inside the
ionization chamber is
1 1 2
10

= s V m
i e


1 3
10

+ = m S
i i e e air
.

At temperature of 300K, the air
density inside the GCC, is
. Thus, for
3
1452 1

= m kg
air
. . cm d 2 = ,
and Eq. (20)
gives
1 3
10

m S
air
. Hz f 60 =
( )
( )
[ ] { } 1 10 10 3 1 2 1
1
4 4
1 2 1
4 16
2 4
4
3
2
+ =
=

+ =
= =

rms
air
rms air
air i
air g
air
V
d
V
f c
m
m
.

Note that, for KV V
rms
96 7. , we obtain:
( )
0
air
. Therefore, if the voltages
range of this GCC is: then it is
possible to reach
KV 10 0
1
air
when
KV V
rms
10 .
It is interesting to note that
air
can
be strongly increased by increasing the
amount of Am 241. For example, by
using of Am 241 the value of g 1 0. R
increases to:

disintegrations/s
10
10 = N R

This means ions N
i
20
10 that yield
( )
3
10 m C eN
i i
V V =
Then, by reducing, and d
respectively, to 5mm and to 11.5cm, the
volume of the ionization chamber
reduces to:
( ) ( )
3 5 3
2
4
10 19 5 10 5 115 0 m

= = . . V

Consequently, we get:

3 5
10 m C
i e
=

Assuming that ,
then the electrical conductivity of the air
inside the ionization chamber becomes
1 1 2
10

= s V m
i e


1 6
10

+ = m S
i i e e air
.

This reduces for the voltage
necessary to yield
V V
rms
8 18.
( )
0
air
and reduces
9
to the voltage necessary to
reach
V V
rms
5 23.
1
air
.
If the outer surface of a metallic
sphere with radius is covered with a
radioactive element (for example Am
241), then the electrical conductivity of
the air (very close to the sphere) can be
strongly increased (for example up
to ). By applying a low-
frequency electrical potential to the
sphere, in order to produce an electric
field starting from the outer surface
of the sphere, then very close to the
sphere the low-frequency electromagnetic
field is
a
1 6
10

m s
air
.
rms
V
rms
E
a V E
rms rms
= , and according to
Eq. (20), the gravitational mass of the air
in this region expressed by
( ) ( ) air i
air
rms air
air g
m
a
V
f c
m
0
2 4
4
3
2
0
1
4 4
1 2 1

+ =


,
can be easily reduced, making possible
to produce a controlled Gravitational
Shielding (similar to a GCC) surround
the sphere.
This becomes possible to build a
spacecraft to work with a gravitational
shielding as shown in Fig. 4.
The gravity accelerations on the
spacecraft (due to the rest of the
Universe. See Fig.4) is given by


i air i
g g = i =1, 2, 3 n

Where
( ) ( ) air i air g air
m m
0
= . Thus, the
gravitational forces acting on the
spacecraft are given by

( )
i air g i g is
g M g M F = =

By reducing the value of
air
, these
forces can be reduced.
According to the Machs principle;

The local inertial forces are
determined by the gravitational
interactions of the local system with the
distribution of the cosmic masses.
Thus, the local inertia is just the
gravitational influence of the rest of
matter existing in the Universe.
Consequently, if we reduce the
gravitational interactions between a
spacecraft and the rest of the Universe,
then the inertial properties of the
spacecraft will be also reduced. This
effect leads to a new concept of
spacecraft and space flight.
Since
air
is given by

( )
( )

+ = = 1
4 4
1 2 1
2 4
4
3
2
0
0 air
rms air
air i
air g
air
a
V
f c m
m




Then, for , ,
1 6
10

m s
air
. Hz f 6 = m a 5 = ,
and we get
3
1

m Kg
air
. KV V
rms
35 3. =

0
air

Under these conditions, the gravitational
forces upon the spacecraft become
approximately nulls and consequently,
the spacecraft practically loses its inertial
properties.
Out of the terrestrial atmosphere,
the gravity acceleration upon the
spacecraft is negligible and therefore the
gravitational shielding is not necessary.
However, if the spacecraft is in the outer
space and we want to use the
gravitational shielding then,
air
must be
replaced by
vac
where

( )
( )

+ = = 1
4 4
1 2 1
2 4
4
3
2
0
0 vac
rms vac
vac i
vac g
vac
a
V
f c m
m

The electrical conductivity of the
ionized outer space (very close to the
spacecraft) is small; however, its density
is remarkably small ( )
3 16
10

<< m Kg. , in
such a manner that the smaller value of
the factor
2 3
vac vac
can be easily
compensated by the increase of .
rms
V
10
It was shown that, when the
gravitational mass of a particle is
reduced to ranging between
to , it becomes imaginary [
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0. 1],
i.e., the gravitational and the inertial
masses of the particle become
imaginary. Consequently, the particle
disappears from our ordinary space-time.
However, the factor
( ) ( ) imaginary i imaginary g
M M = remains real
because
( )
( )
real
M
M
i M
i M
M
M
i
g
i
g
imaginary i
imaginary g
= = = =
Thus, if the gravitational mass of the
particle is reduced by means of
absorption of an amount of
electromagnetic energy U , for example,
we have
( )

+ = = 1 1 2 1
2
2
0
c m U
M
M
i
i
g

This shows that the energyU of the

electromagnetic field remains acting on
the imaginary particle. In practice, this
means that electromagnetic fields act on
imaginary particles. Therefore, the
electromagnetic field of a GCC remains
acting on the particles inside the GCC
even when their gravitational masses
reach the gravitational mass ranging
between to and
they become imaginary particles. This is
very important because it means that the
GCCs of a gravitational spacecraft keep
on working when the spacecraft
becomes imaginary.
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0.
)
Under these conditions, the gravity
accelerations on the imaginary
spacecraft particle (due to the rest of the
imaginary Universe) are given by

. ,..., , , n j g g
j j
3 2 1 = =

Where
( ) (imaginary i imaginary g
M M =
and
( )
2
j imaginary gj j
r Gm g = . Thus, the
gravitational forces acting on the
spacecraft are given by
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( ) .
2 2
2
j gj g j gj g
j imaginary gj imaginary g
j imaginary g gj
r m GM r i Gm i M
r Gm M
g M F


+ = =
= =
= =
Note that these forces are real. Remind
that, the Machs principle says that the
inertial effects upon a particle are
consequence of the gravitational
interaction of the particle with the rest of
the Universe. Then we can conclude that
the inertial forces upon an imaginary
spacecraft are also real. Consequently, it
can travel in the imaginary space-time
using its thrusters.
It was shown that, imaginary
particles can have infinite speed in the
imaginary space-time [1] . Therefore, this
is also the speed upper limit for the
spacecraft in the imaginary space-time.
Since the gravitational spacecraft
can use its thrusters after to becoming
an imaginary body, then if the thrusters
produce a total thrust and
the gravitational mass of the spacecraft
is reduced from down
to , the acceleration of the
spacecraft will be,
kN F 1000 =
kg M M
i g
5
10 = =
kg M
g
6
10

2 12
10

= s m M F a
g
. .
With this acceleration the spacecraft
crosses the visible Universe
( ) in a time interval m d diameter
26
10 =
months s m a d t 5 5 10 4 1 2
1 7
. . . =


Since the inertial effects upon the
spacecraft are reduced by
11
10

i g
M M then, in spite of the
effective spacecraft acceleration be
, the effects for the crew
and for the spacecraft will be equivalent
to an acceleration given by
1 12
10

= s m a .
a
1
10

= s m a
M
M
a
i
g
.
This is the order of magnitude of the
acceleration upon of a commercial jet
aircraft.
On the other hand, the travel in the
imaginary space-time can be very safe,
because there wont any material body
along the trajectory of the spacecraft.
11
Now consider the GCCs presented
in Fig. 8 (a). Note that below and above
the air are the bottom and the top of the
chamber. Therefore the choice of the
material of the chamber is highly
relevant. If the chamber is made of steel,
for example, and the gravity acceleration
below the chamber is then at the
bottom of the chamber, the gravity
becomes
g
g g
steel
= ; in the air, the
gravity is g g g
steel air air
= = . At the top
of the chamber, .
Thus, out of the chamber (close to the
top) the gravity acceleration becomes
. (See Fig. 8 (a)). However, for the
steel at and , we
have
( ) g g g
air steel steel

2
= =
g
T B 300 < Hz f
6
10 1

=
( )
( )
( )
( )
1 1
4
1 2 1
2 2
4

+ = =
c f
B
m
m
steel
steel
steel i
steel g
steel

Since ,
1 6
10 1 1

= m S
steel
. . 300 =
r
and
.
( )
3
7800

= m k
steel
.
Thus, due to 1
steel
it follows
that
g g g g
air air
=
If instead of one GCC we have
three GCC, all with steel box (Fig. 8(b)),
then the gravity acceleration above the
second GCC, will be given by
2
g
g g g
air air air

1 2
and the gravity acceleration above the
third GCC, will be expressed by
3
g
g g g
air air
3
3



III. CONSEQUENCES

These results point to the
possibility to convert gravitational energy
into rotational mechanical energy.
Consider for example the system
presented in Fig. 9. Basically it is a motor
with massive iron rotor and a box filled
with gas or plasma at ultra-low pressure
(Gravity Control Cell-GCC) as shown in
Fig. 9. The GCC is placed below the
rotor in order to become negative the
acceleration of gravity inside half of the
rotor ( ) ( ) ng g g g
air air steel
= =
2
.
Obviously this causes a torque
( )r F F T + = and the rotor spins with
angular velocity. The average
power, , of the motor is given by P

( ) [ ] ( ) 36 r F F T P + = =
Where

g m F
g
=
2
1
g m F
g
2
1
=

and
i g
m m ( mass of the rotor ). Thus,
Eq. (36) gives
( ) ( ) 37
2
1
r g m
n P
i

+ =
On the other hand, we have that
( ) 38
2
r g g = +
Therefore the angular speed of the rotor
is given by
( )
( ) 39
1
r
g n +
=

By substituting (39) into (37) we obtain
the expression of the average power of
the gravitational motor, i.e.,
( ) ( ) 40 1
3
3
2
1
r g n m P
i
+ =
Now consider an electric generator
coupling to the gravitational motor in
order to produce electric energy.
Since f 2 = then for Hz f 60 =
we have . rpm s rad 3600 120
1
= =

.
Therefore for and
1
120

= s rad .
788 = n ( ) T B 22 0. the Eq. (40) tell us
that we must have
( )
m
g n
r 0545 0
1
2
. =
+
=

Since 3 R r = and where h R m

i
2
= ,
R and are respectively the mass
density, the radius and the height of the
h
rotor then for and
(iron) we obtain
m h 5 0. =
3
7800

= m Kg.

kg m
i
05 327. =
12

Then Eq. (40) gives
( ) 41 294 219 10 19 2
5
HP KW watts P .
This shows that the gravitational motor
can be used to yield electric energy at
large scale.
The possibility of gravity control
leads to a new concept of spacecraft
which is presented in Fig. 10. Due to the
Meissner effect, the magnetic field B is
expelled from the superconducting shell.
The Eq. (35) shows that a magnetic
field, B , through the aluminum shell of
the spacecraft reduces its gravitational
mass according to the following
expression:
( )
( )
( ) ( )
( ) 42 1 1 2 1
2
2
2
Al i Al r
Al
Al g
m n
c
B
m

+ =

If the frequency of the magnetic field is
then we have that Hz f
4
10

=
( )
>>
Al
since the electric
conductivity of the aluminum
is . In this case, the
Eq. (11) tell us that
( )
1 7
10 82 3

= m S
Al
. .
( )
( )
( ) 43
4
2
f
c
n
Al
Al r

=
Substitution of (43) into (42) yields
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 44 1
4
1 2 1
2 2
4
Al i
Al
Al
Al g
m
c f
B
m

+ =

Since the mass density of the Aluminum

is then the Eq. (44)
can be rewritten in the following form:
( )
3
2700

= m kg
Al
.
( )
( )
[ { ( ) 45 1 10 68 3 1 2 1
4 8
+ = =

B
m
m
Al i
Al g
Al
. ]}
In practice it is possible to adjust in
order to become, for example,
. This occurs to .
(Novel superconducting magnets are
able to produce up to [
B
9
10

Al
T B 3 76.
T .7 14 10, 11]).
Then the gravity acceleration in
any direction inside the spacecraft, ,
will be reduced and given by
l
g
( )
( )
n l g g g
m
m
g
l l Al l
Al i
Al g
l
,.., ,2 1 10
9
= = =

Where is the external gravity in the

direction . We thus conclude that the
gravity acceleration inside the spacecraft
becomes negligible if .
This means that the aluminum shell,
under these conditions, works like a
gravity shielding.
l
g
l
2 9
10

<< s m g
l
.
Consequently, the gravitational
forces between anyone point inside the
spacecraft with gravitational mass, ,
and another external to the spacecraft
(gravitational mass ) are given by
gj
m
gk
m

2
jk
gk gj
k j
r
m m
G F F = =
r r

where
ik gk
m m and
ij Al gj
m m = .
Therefore we can rewrite equation above
in the following form

2
jk
ik ij
Al k j
r
m m
G F F = =
r r
Note that when the initial
gravitational forces are
0 = B

2
jk
ik ij
k j
r
m m
G F F = =
r r
Thus, if then the initial
gravitational forces are reduced from 10
9
10

Al

9

times and become repulsives.
According to the new expression
for the inertial forces [1], a m F
g
r
r
= , we
see that these forces have origin in the
gravitational interaction between a
particle and the others of the Universe,
just as Machs principle predicts. Hence
mentioned expression incorporates the
Machs principle into Gravitation Theory,
and furthermore reveals that the inertial
effects upon a body can be strongly
reduced by means of the decreasing of
its gravitational mass.
Consequently, we conclude that if
the gravitational forces upon the
spacecraft are reduced from 10
9
times
then also the inertial forces upon the
13
spacecraft will be reduced from 10
9
times
when . Under these
conditions, the inertial effects on the
crew would be strongly decreased.
Obviously this leads to a new concept of
aerospace flight.
9
10

Al

Inside the spacecraft the

gravitational forces between the
dielectric with gravitational mass,
and the man (gravitational mass, ),
when are
g
M
g
m
0 = B
( ) 46
2

r
m M
G F F
g g
M m
= =
r r
or
( ) 47
2

M g g
g
m
g m m
r
M
G F = =
r
( ) 48
2

m g g
g
M
g M M
r
m
G F + = + =
r
If the superconducting box under
(Fig. 10) is filled with air at ultra-low
pressure (310
g
M
-12
torr, 300K for example)
then, when , the gravitational mass
of the air will be reduced according to
(35). Consequently, we have
0 B
( ) ( ) 49
2
M air M air steel M
g g g =
( ) ( ) 50
2
m air m air steel m
g g g =
Then the forces
m
F
r
and become
M
F
r
( ) ( ) 51
M air g m
g m F =
r
( ) ( ) 52
m air g M
g M F + =
r
Therefore if n
air
= we will have
( ) 53
M g m
g nm F + =
r
( ) 54
m g M
g nM F =
r
Thus,
m
F
r
and become repulsive.
Consequently, the man inside the
spacecraft is subjected to a gravity
acceleration given by
M
F
r
( ) 55
2

r
M
G ng a
g
air M man
= =
r
Inside the GCC we have,
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 56 1
4
1 2 1
2 2
4

+ = =
c f
B
m
m
air
air
air i
air g
air

By ionizing the air inside the GCC

(Fig. 10), for example, by means of a
radioactive material, it is possible to
increase the air conductivity inside the
GCC up to . Then
for ;
(Air at 3 10
( )
1 6
10

m S
air
.
Hz f 10 =
( )
3 15
10 94 4

= m kg
air
. .
-12
torr, 300K) and we obtain
[ ] { } ( ) 57 1 1 10 8 2 1 2
4 21
+ = B
air
.
For T B B
GCC
1 0. = = (note that, due to
the Meissner effect, the magnetic field
stay confined inside the
superconducting box) the Eq. (57) yields
GCC
B

9
10
air

Since there is no magnetic
field through the dielectric presented in
Fig.10 then,
i
. Therefore if
g
M M
Kg M M
i g
100 = and the
gravity acceleration upon the man,
according to Eq. (55), is
m r r 1
0
=
1
10

s m a
man
.
Consequently it is easy to see that this
system is ideal to yield artificial gravity
inside the spacecraft in the case of inter-
stellar travel, when the gravity
acceleration out of the spacecraft - due
to the Universe - becomes negligible.
The vertical displacement of the
spacecraft can be produced by means of
Gravitational Thrusters. A schematic
diagram of a Gravitational Thruster is
shown in Fig.11. The Gravitational
Thrusters can also provide the horizontal
displacement of the spacecraft.
The concept of Gravitational
Thruster results from the theory of the
Gravity Control Battery, showed in Fig. 8
(b). Note that the number of GCC
increases the thrust of the thruster. For
example, if the thruster has three GCCs
then the gravity acceleration upon the
gas sprayed inside the thruster will be
repulsive in respect to (See Fig.
11(a)) and given by
g
M
( ) ( ) ( )
2
0
3 4 3
r
M
G g a
g
air steel air gas
=
Thus, if inside the GCCs,
9
10
air

14
(See Eq. 56 and 57) then the equation
above gives
2
0
27
10
r
M
G a
i
gas
+
For , and
the thrust is
kg M
i
10 m r 1
0
kg m
gas
12
10

N a m F
gas gas
5
10 =
Thus, the Gravitational Thrusters are
able to produce strong thrusts.
Note that in the case of very
strong
air
, for example , the
gravity accelerations upon the boxes of
the second and third GCCs become very
strong (Fig.11 (a)). Obviously, the walls
of the mentioned boxes cannot to stand
the enormous pressures. However, it is
possible to build a similar system with 3
or more GCCs, without material boxes.
Consider for example, a surface with
several radioactive sources (Am-241, for
example). The alpha particles emitted
from the Am-241 cannot reach besides
10cm of air. Due to the trajectory of the
alpha particles, three or more successive
layers of air, with different electrical
conductivities
9
10
air

1
,
2
and
3
, will be
established in the ionized region (See
Fig.11 (b)). It is easy to see that the
gravitational shielding effect produced by
these three layers is similar to the effect
produced by the 3 GCCs shown in Fig.
11 (a).
It is important to note that if is
force produced by a thruster then the
spacecraft acquires acceleration
given by [
F
spacecraft
a 1]
( ) ( ) ( ) Al i inside i Al spacecraft g
spacecraft
m M
F
M
F
a
+
= =

Therefore if ;
and (inertial mass of the
aluminum shell) then it will be necessary
to produce
9
10

Al

( )
Kg M
inside i
4
10 =
( )
Kg m
Al i
100 =
kN F 10 =
2
100

= s m a
spacecraft
.
Note that the concept of Gravitational
Thrusters leads directly to the
Gravitational Turbo Motor concept (See
Fig. 12).
Let us now calculate the
gravitational forces between two very
close thin layers of the air around the
spacecraft. (See Fig. 13).
The gravitational force that
exerts upon , and the
gravitational force that exerts
upon are given by
12
dF
1 g
dm
2 g
dm
21
dF
2 g
dm
1 g
dm
( ) 58
2
1 2
21 12

r
dm dm
G F d F d
g g
= =
r r
Thus, the gravitational forces between
the air layer 1, gravitational mass ,
and the air layer 2, gravitational mass
, around the spacecraft are
1 g
m
2 g
m
( ) 59
2
2 1
2
2 1
0 0
2 1
2
21 12
1 2

r
m m
G
r
m m
G
dm dm
r
G
F F
i i
air air
g g
m m
g g
g g
= =
= = =

r r
At 100km altitude the air pressure is
torr
3
10 691 5

. and [
( )
3 6
10 998 5

= m kg
air
. . 12].
By ionizing the air surround the
spacecraft, for example, by means of an
oscillating electric field, , starting
from the surface of the spacecraft ( See
Fig. 13) it is possible to increase the air
conductivity near the spacecraft up to
. Since and, in
this case
osc
E
( )
1 6
10

m S
air
. Hz f 1 =
( )
>>
air
, then, according to
Eq. (11),
( )
f c n
air r
4
2
= . From
Eq.(56) we thus obtain
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 60 1
4
1 2 1
2 2
0
4

+ = =
c f
B
m
m
air
air
air i
air g
air

Then for T B 763 = the Eq. (60) gives

[ ] { } ( ) 61 10 1 10 1 2 1
8 4 4
+ = B
air
~

By substitution of into Eq.,
(59) we get
8
10
air

( ) 62 10
2
2 1 16
21 12

r
m m
G F F
i i
= =
r r

15
If , and
we obtain
kg m m
air air i i
8
2 1 2 1
10

= V V
m r
3
10

=
( ) 63 10
4
21 12
N F F

=
r r

These forces are much more intense
than the inter-atomic forces (the forces
which maintain joined atoms, and
molecules that make the solids and
liquids) whose intensities, according to
the Coulombs law, is of the order of
1-100010
-8
N.
Consequently, the air around the
spacecraft will be strongly compressed
upon their surface, making an air shell
that will accompany the spacecraft
during its displacement and will protect
the aluminum shell of the direct attrition
with the Earths atmosphere.
In this way, during the flight, the
attrition would occur just between the air
shell and the atmospheric air around
her. Thus, the spacecraft would stay free
of the thermal effects that would be
produced by the direct attrition of the
aluminum shell with the Earths
atmosphere.
Another interesting effect produced
by the magnetic field B of the
spacecraft is the possibility of to lift a
body from the surface of the Earth to the
spacecraft as shown in Fig. 14. By
ionizing the air surround the spacecraft,
by means of an oscillating electric field,
, the air conductivity near the
spacecraft can reach, for example,
. Then for
osc
E
( )
1 6
10

m S
air
. Hz f 1 = ;
and (300K and
1 atm) the Eq. (56) yields
T B 8 40. =
( )
3
2 1

m kg
air
. .

1 0 1 10 9 4 1 2 1
4 7
. .

+ =

B
air

Thus, the weight of the body becomes
( ) ( ) ( )
g m g m g m P
body i body i air body g body
= = =
Consequently, the body will be lifted on
the direction of the spacecraft with
acceleration
1
98 0

+ = s m g g
air
. .
Let us now consider an important
aspect of the flight dynamics of a
Gravitational Spacecraft.
Before starting the flight, the
gravitational mass of the spacecraft, ,
must be strongly reduced, by means of a
gravity control system, in order to
produce with a weak thrust , a strong
acceleration,
g
M
F
r
a
r
, given by [1]
g
M
F
a
r
r
=
In this way, the spacecraft could be
strongly accelerated and quickly to reach
very high speeds near speed of light.
If the gravity control system of the
spacecraft is suddenly turned off, the
gravitational mass of the spacecraft
becomes immediately equal to its inertial
mass, ,
i
M ( )
i g
M M = and the velocity
V
r
becomes equal to V
r
. According to
the Momentum Conservation Principle,
we have that
V M V M
g g
=
Supposing that the spacecraft was
traveling in space with speed c V , and
that its gravitational mass it was
Kg M
g
1 = and then the
velocity of the spacecraft is reduced to
Kg M
i
4
10 =
c V
M
M
V
M
M
V
i
g
g
g
4
10

=
Initially, when the velocity of the
spacecraft is V
r
, its kinetic energy is
( )
2
c m M E
g g k
= . Where
2 2
1 c V m M
g g
= .
At the instant in which the gravity control
system of the spacecraft is turned off,
the kinetic energy becomes
( )
2
c m M E
g g k
= . Where
2 2
1 c V m M
g g
= .
We can rewritten the expressions of
and
k
E
k
E in the following form
( )
V
c
V m V M E
g g k
2
=
( )
V
c
V m V M E
g g k

=
2
Substitution of p V M V M
g g
= = ,
16
2 2
1 c V p V m
g
= and
2 2
1 c V p V m
g
= into
the equations of and gives
k
E
k
E
( )
V
pc
c V E
k
2
2 2
1 1 =
( )
V
pc
c V E
k

=
2
2 2
1 1
Since then follows that c V

pc E
k


On the other hand, since we get c V <<
( )
pc
c
V
V
pc
c
V
V
pc
c V E
k

+

=

=
2
2
1
1
1
1 1
2
2
2
2
2 2
...
Therefore we conclude that
k k
E E >> .
Consequently, when the gravity control
system of the spacecraft is turned off,
occurs an abrupt decrease in the kinetic
energy of the spacecraft, , given by
k
E

J c M pc E E E
g k k k
17 2
10 =

By comparing the energy with the
inertial energy of the spacecraft,
, we conclude that
k
E
2
c M E
i i
=
2 4
10 c M E
M
M
E
i i
i
g
k

The energy (several megatons)
must be released in very short time
interval. It is approximately the same
amount of energy that would be released
in the case of collision of the spacecraft
k
E

.
However, the situation is very different of
a collision ( just becomes suddenly
equal to ), and possibly the energy
is converted into a High Power
Electromagnetic Pulse.
g
M
i
M
k
E

In this case, the collision of the spacecraft would

release 10
17
J (several megatons) and it would be
similar to a powerful kinetic weapon.
Obviously this electromagnetic
pulse (EMP) will induce heavy currents
in all electronic equipment that mainly
contains semiconducting and conducting
materials. This produces immense heat
that melts the circuitry inside. As such,
while not being directly responsible for
the loss of lives, these EMP are capable
of disabling electric/electronic systems.
Therefore, we possibly have a new type
of electromagnetic bomb. An
electromagnetic bomb or E-bomb is a
well-known weapon designed to disable
electric/electronic systems on a wide
scale with an intense electromagnetic
pulse.
Based on the theory of the GCC it
is also possible to build a Gravitational
Press of ultra-high pressure as shown in
Fig.15.
The chamber 1 and 2 are GCCs
with air at 110
-4
torr, 300K
( ) ( )
( )
3 8 1 6
10 5 10

= m kg m S
air air
. ; . .
Thus, for Hz f 10 = and we
have
T B 107 0. =
( )
( )
118 1
4
1 2 1
2 2
0
4

+ =
c f
B
air
air
air

The gravity acceleration above the
air of the chamber 1 is
( ) 64 10 15 1
3
1
. + = g g
air stell
r
Since, in this case, 1
steel
; is an
unitary vector in the opposite direction of
g
r
.
Above the air of the chamber 2 the
gravity acceleration becomes

( ) ( ) ( ) 65 10 4 1
5
2 2
2
. = g g
air stell
r

Therefore the resultant force R
r
acting on
, and is
2
m
1
m m

17
1 1 2 2 1 2
g m g m g m F F F R = + + = + + =
r r r r
r r r
( ) 66 10 4 1
81 9 10 15 1 10 4 1
2
5
1
3
2
5

.
. . .
m
m m m

= + =

where
( ) 67

steel

inn
2 9
10
4
2
2 2

= = H V m
inn steel disk steel

Thus, for we can write
that
3 4
10 m kg.
H F
2


For the steel
consequently we must have
2 9 2 5
10 10

= m kg cm kg . .
2 9
2
10

< m kg S F .

H S
inn
(

= see Fig.15).
This means that
2 9
2 9
10

10 < m kg
H
inn
.

H
inn

Then we conclude that

m
inn
1 3. <
For m
inn
2 = and the Eq. (67) gives m H 1 =
kg m
4
2
10 3
2 4
10 m S

=
Therefore from the Eq. (66) we obtain
N R
10
10
Consequently, in the area of
the Gravitational Press, the pressure is
The GCCs can also be applied
on generation and detection of
Gravitational Radiation.
Consider a cylindrical GCC (GCC
antenna) as shown in Fig.16 (a). The
gravitational mass of the air inside the
GCC is
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 68 1
4
1 2 1
2 2
4
air i
air
air
air g
m
c f
B
m

+ =

By varying B one can varies and

consequently to vary the gravitational
field generated by , producing then
gravitational radiation. Then a GCC can
work like a Gravitational Antenna.
( ) air g
m
( ) air g
m
Apparently, Newtons theory of
gravity had no gravitational waves
because, if a gravitational field changed
in some way, that change took place
instantaneously everywhere in space,
and one can think that there is not a
wave in this case. However, we have
already seen that the gravitational
interaction can be repulsive, besides
attractive. Thus, as with electromagnetic
interaction, the gravitational interaction
must be produced by the exchange of
"virtual" quanta of spin 1 and mass null,
i.e., the gravitational "virtual" quanta
(graviphoton) must have spin 1 and not
2. Consequently, the fact of a change in
a gravitational field reach
instantaneously everywhere in space
occurs simply due to the speed of the
graviphoton to be infinite. It is known that
there is no speed limit for virtual
photons. On the contrary, the
electromagnetic quanta (virtual
photons) could not communicate the
electromagnetic interaction an infinite
distance.
2
2 11
10 617 3

m N. .
14
10 = m N
S
R
p .
This enormous pressure is much
greater than the pressure in the center of
the Earth ( ) [13]. It is
near of the gas pressure in the center of
the sun ( ). Under the action
of such intensities new states of matter
are created and astrophysical
phenomena may be simulated in the lab
for the first time, e.g. supernova
explosions. Controlled thermonuclear
fusion by inertial confinement, fast
nuclear ignition for energy gain, novel
collective acceleration schemes of
particles and the numerous variants of
material processing constitute examples
of progressive applications of such
Gravitational Press of ultra-high
pressure.
2 16
10 2

m N.
Thus, there are two types of
gravitational radiation: the real and
virtual, which is constituted of
graviphotons; the real gravitational
waves are ripples in the space-time
generated by gravitational field changes.
According to Einsteins theory of gravity
the velocity of propagation of these
waves is equal to the speed of light (c).
18
Unlike the electromagnetic waves the
real gravitational waves have low interaction
with matter and consequently low scattering.
Therefore real gravitational waves are
suitable as a means of transmitting
information. However, when the distance
between transmitter and receiver is too
large, for example of the order of magnitude
of several light-years, the transmission of
information by means of gravitational waves
becomes impracticable due to the long time
necessary to receive the information. On the
other hand, there is no delay during the
transmissions by means of virtual
gravitational radiation. In addition the
scattering of this radiation is null. Therefore
the virtual gravitational radiation is very
suitable as a means of transmitting
information at any distances including
astronomical distances.
As concerns detection of the
virtual gravitational radiation from GCC
antenna, there are many options. Due to
Resonance Principle a similar GCC antenna
(receiver) tuned at the same frequency can
absorb energy from an incident virtual
gravitational radiation (See Fig.16 (b)).
Consequently, the gravitational mass of the
air inside the GCC receiver will vary such as
the gravitational mass of the air inside the
GCC transmitter. This will induce a magnetic
field similar to the magnetic field of the GCC
transmitter and therefore the current through
the coil inside the GCC receiver will have the
same characteristics of the current through
the coil inside the GCC transmitter.
However, the volume and pressure of the air
inside the two GCCs must be exactly the
same; also the type and the quantity of
atoms in the air inside the two GCCs must
be exactly the same. Thus, the GCC
antennas are simple but they are not easy to
build.
Note that a GCC antenna radiates
graviphotons and gravitational waves
simultaneously (Fig. 16 (a)). Thus, it is not
only a gravitational antenna: it is a
Quantum Gravitational Antenna because it
can also emit and detect gravitational
"virtual" quanta (graviphotons), which, in
turn, can transmit information
instantaneously from any distance in the
Universe without scattering.
Due to the difficulty to build two similar
GCC antennas and, considering that the
electric current in the receiver antenna can
be detectable even if the gravitational
mass of the nuclei of the antennas are not
strongly reduced, then we propose to
replace the gas at the nuclei of the antennas
by a thin dielectric lamina. The dielectric
lamina with exactly 10
8
atoms (10
3
atoms
10
3
atoms 10
2
atoms) is placed between the
plates (electrodes) as shown in Fig. 17.
When the virtual gravitational radiation
strikes upon the dielectric lamina, its
gravitational mass varies similarly to the
gravitational mass of the dielectric lamina of
the transmitter antenna, inducing an
electromagnetic field ( , E B ) similar to the
transmitter antenna. Thus, the electric
current in the receiver antenna will have the
same characteristics of the current in the
transmitter antenna. In this way, it is then
possible to build two similar antennas whose
nuclei have the same volumes and the same
types and quantities of atoms.
Note that the Quantum Gravitational
Antennas can also be used to transmit
electric power. It is easy to see that the
Transmitter and Receiver (Fig. 17(a)) can
work with strong voltages and electric
currents. This means that strong electric
power can be transmitted among Quantum
Gravitational Antennas. This obviously
solves the problem of wireless electric power
transmission.
The existence of imaginary masses has
been predicted in a previous work [1]. Here
we will propose a method and a device using
GCCs for obtaining images of imaginary
bodies.
It was shown that the inertial
imaginary mass associated to an electron is
given by
( )
( )
( ) 69
3
2
3
2
2
i m i
c
hf
m
real ie
ima ie
=

=
Assuming that the correlation between the
gravitational mass and the inertial mass
(Eq.6) is the same for both imaginary and
real masses then follows that the
gravitational imaginary mass associated to
an electron can be written in the following
form:
( ) ( )
( ) 70 1 1 2 1
2
2
ima ie r
i
ima ge
m n
c m
U
m

+ =
Thus, the gravitational imaginary mass
associated to matter can be reduced, made
19
negative and increased, just as the
gravitational real mass.
It was shown that also photons have
imaginary mass. Therefore, the imaginary
mass can be associated or not to the matter.
In a general way, the gravitational
forces between two gravitational imaginary
masses are then given by
( )( )
( ) 71
2 2

r
m M
G
r
im iM
G F F
g g g g
+ = = =
r r

Note that these forces are real and
repulsive.
Now consider a gravitational
imaginary mass,
( ) g ima g
im m = , not associated
with matter (like the gravitational imaginary
mass associated to the photons) and
another gravitational imaginary mass
associated to a material
body.
( ) g ima g
iM M =
Any material body has an imaginary
mass associated to it, due to the existence
of imaginary masses associated to the
electrons. We will choose a quartz crystal
(for the material body with gravitational
imaginary mass ) because
quartz crystals are widely used to detect
forces (piezoelectric effect).
( ) g ima g
iM M =
By using GCCs as shown in Fig. 18(b)
and Fig.18(c), we can increase the
gravitational acceleration, , produced by
the imaginary mass upon the crystals.
Then it becomes
a
r
g
im
( ) 72
2
3
r
m
G a
g
air
=
As we have seen, the value of
air
can be
increased up to (See Eq.57).
Note that in this case, the gravitational
forces become attractive. In addition, if
is not small, the gravitational forces between
the imaginary body of mass and the
crystals can become sufficiently intense to
be easily detectable.
9
10
air

g
m
g
im
Due to the piezoelectric effect, the
gravitational force acting on the crystal will
produce a voltage proportional to its
intensity. Then consider a board with
hundreds micro-crystals behind a set of
GCCs, as shown in Fig.18(c). By amplifying
the voltages generated in each micro-crystal
and sending to an appropriated data
acquisition system, it will be thus possible to
obtain an image of the imaginary body of
mass placed in front of the board.
( ) ima g
m
In order to decrease strongly the
gravitational effects produced by bodies
placed behind the imaginary body of mass
, one can put five GCCs making a
Gravitational Shielding as shown in
Fig.18(c). If the GCCs are filled with air at
300Kand
g
im
torr
12
10 3

.Then
and
1
. Thus, for and
3 15
10 94 4

= m kg
air
. .
14
10 1

m S
air
. Hz f 60 =
T B 7 0. the Eq. (56) gives
( )
( )
( ) 73 10 1 5 1 2 1
2 4

+ = = B
m
m
air i
air g
air

For the gravitational shielding

presented in Fig.18(c) will reduce any value
of
2
10

air

g to . This will be
sufficiently to reduce strongly the
gravitational effects proceeding from both
sides of the gravitational shielding.
g g
air
10 5
10

Another important consequence of the
correlation between gravitational mass and
inertial mass expressed by Eq. (1) is the
possibility of building Energy Shieldings
around objects in order to protect them from
high-energy particles and ultra-intense fluxes
of radiation.
In order to explain that possibility, we
start from the new expression [1] for the
momentum of a particle with gravitational
mass and velocityV , which is given by
q
g
M
( ) 74 V M q
g
=
where
2 2
1 c V m M
g g
= and [
i g
m m = 1].
Thus, we can write
( ) 75
1 1
2 2 2 2
c V
m
c V
m
i
g

Therefore, we get
( ) 76
i g
M M =
It is known from the Relativistic Mechanics
that
( ) 77
2
c
UV
q =
where is the total energy of the particle.
This expression is valid for any velocity V of
the particle, including .
U
c V =
By comparing Eq. (77) with Eq. (74)
we obtain
20
( ) 78
2
c M U
g
=
It is a well-known experimental fact that
( ) 79
2
hf c M
i
=
Therefore, by substituting Eq. (79) and Eq.
(76) into Eq. (74), gives
( ) 80

h
c
V
q =
Note that this expression is valid for any
velocity of the particle. In the particular
case of , it reduces to
V
c V =
( ) 81

h
q =

By comparing Eq. (80) with Eq. (77), we
obtain
( ) 82 hf U =

Note that only for 1 = the Eq. (81) and Eq.
(82) are reduced to the well=known
expressions of DeBroglie ( ) h q = and
Einstein . ( ) hf U =
Equations (80) and (82) show for
example, that any real particle (material
particles, real photons, etc) that penetrates a
region (with density and electrical
conductivity ), where there is an ELF
electric fieldE , will have its momentum
and its energy U reduced by the factor
q
,
given by
( ) 83 1
4 4
1 2 1
2
4
3
2

+ = =

E
f c m
m
i
g
The remaining amount of momentum
and energy, respectively given by
( )

h
c
V

1 and( , are
transferred to the imaginary particle
associated to the real particle
) hf 1

(material
particles or real photons) that penetrated the
mentioned region.
It was previously shown that, when the
gravitational mass of a particle is reduced to
ranging between to ,
i.e., when
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0.
159 . 0 < , it becomes imaginary
[1], i.e., the gravitational and the inertial
masses of the particle become imaginary.
Consequently, the particle disappears from

As previously shown, there are imaginary particles

associated to each real particle [1].
our ordinary space-time. It goes to the
Imaginary Universe. On the other hand,
when the gravitational mass of the particle
becomes greater than , or less
than
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0. , i.e., when 159 . 0 > , the
particle return to our Universe.
Figure 19 (a) clarifies the
phenomenon of reduction of the momentum
for 159 . 0 > , and Figure 19 (b) shows the
effect in the case of 159 . 0 < . In this case,
the particles become imaginary and
consequently, they go to the imaginary
space-time when they penetrate the electric
fieldE . However, the electric field E stays
at the real space-time. Consequently, the
particles return immediately to the real
space-time in order to return soon after to
the imaginary space-time, due to the action
of the electric fieldE . Since the particles are
moving at a direction, they appear and
disappear while they are crossing the region,
up to collide with the plate (See Fig.19) with
a momentum,

h
c
V
q
m

= , in the case
of the material particle, and

h
q
r
= in the
case of the photon. Note that by
making 0 , it is possible to block high-
energy particles and ultra-intense fluxes of
radiation. These Energy Shieldings can be
built around objects in order to protect them
from such particles and radiation.
It is also important to note that the
gravity control process described here points
to the possibility of obtaining Controlled
Nuclear Fusion by means of increasing of
the intensity of the gravitational interaction
between the nuclei. When the gravitational
forces
2
r m Gm F
g g G
= become greater than
the electrical forces
2
0
4 r q q F
E
=
between the nuclei, then nuclear fusion
reactions can occur.
Note that, according to Eq. (83), the
gravitational mass can be strongly
increased. Thus, if t E E
m
sin = , then the
average value for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E ,
because E varies sinusoidaly ( is the
maximum value for
m
E
E ). On the other hand,
2
m rms
E E = . Consequently, we can replace
21
4
E for . In addition, as
4
rms
E E j = (Ohm's
vectorial Law), then Eq. (83) can be rewritten
as follows
( ) 84 1 1 2 1
3 2
4
0

+ = =
f
j
K
m
m
rms r
i
g

where and
27
10 758 . 1

= K 2 j j
rms
= .
Thus, the gravitational force equation
can be expressed by

( ) 85 1 1 2 1
2
0 0
2
3 2
4
2
0 0
2 2
r m Gm
f
j
K
r m Gm r m Gm F
i i
rms r
i i g g G

+ =
= = =

In order to obtain we must have
E G
F F >
( ) 86
4
1 1 2 1
0 0
0
3 2
4
i i
rms r
m Gm
q q
f
j
K

>

The carbon fusion is a set of nuclear

fusion reactions that take place in massive
stars (at least at birth). It requires high
temperatures ( ) and densities
( ). The principal reactions are:
sun
M 8
K
8
10 5 >
3 9
. 10 3

> m kg

23
Na +p +2.24 MeV

12
C +
12
C
20
Ne + +4.62 MeV


24
Mg + +13.93 MeV
In the case of Carbon nuclei (
12
C) of a thin
carbon wire ( ; )
Eq. (86) becomes
1 4
. 10 4

m S
1 3
. 10 2 . 2

= m S
2
0
2
3
4
39
16
1 10 08 . 9 1 2 1
p
rms
Gm
e
f
j

>

+

whence we conclude that the condition for
the
12
C +
12
C fusion reactions occur is
( ) 87 10 7 . 1
4
3
18
f j
rms
>
If the electric current through the carbon wire
has Extremely-Low Frequency (ELF), for
example, if Hz f 1 = , then the current
density, , must have the following value:
rms
j
( ) 88 . 10 4 . 5
2 13
> m A j
rms
Since S i j
rms rms
= where 4
2
= S is the
area of the cross section of the wire, we can
conclude that, for an ultra-thin carbon wire
with m 10 -diameter, it is necessary that
the current through the wire, , have the
following intensity
rms
i

A k i
rms
24 . 4 >

Obviously, this current will explode the
carbon wire. However, this explosion
becomes negligible in comparison with the
very strong gravitational implosion, which
occurs simultaneously due to the enormous
increase in intensities of the gravitational
forces among the carbon nuclei produced by
means of the ELF current through the
carbon wire as predicted by Eq. (85). Since,
in this case, the gravitational forces among
the carbon nuclei become greater than the
repulsive electric forces among them the
result is the production of
12
C +
12
C fusion
reactions.
Similar reactions can occur by using a
lithium wire. In addition, it is important to
note that is directly proportional
to
rms
j
4
3
f (Eq. 87). Thus, for example,
if , the current necessary to
produce the nuclear reactions will be
Hz f
8
10

=
A i
rms
130 = .


IV.CONCLUSION

The process described here is clearly
the better way in order to control the gravity.
This is because the Gravity Control Cell in
this case is very easy to be built, the cost is
low and it works at ambient temperature.
The Gravity Control is the starting point for
the generation of and detection of Virtual
Gravitational Radiation (Quantum
Gravitational Transceiver) also for the
construction of the Gravitational Motor and
the Gravitational Spacecraft which includes
the system for generation of artificial gravity
presented in Fig.10 and the Gravitational
Thruster (Fig.11). While the Gravitational
Transceiver leads to a new concept in
Telecommunication, the Gravitational Motor
changes the paradigm of energy conversion
and the Gravitational Spacecraft points to a
new concept in aerospace flight.



22



g g
ELF Voltage Source
(0 1.5V, 1mHz 0.1mHz)
Extra Low-Frequency Electric Field
(1mHz 0.1mHz)
E
ELF
20W T-12 Fluorescent Lamp lit
(F20T12/C50/ECO GE, EcoluxT12)
Inside the dotted box the gravity
acceleration can become different of g
( )
( )
g
m
m
g g
plasma Hg i
plasma Hg g
plasma Hg
= =
1

Low-pressure Hg Plasma
( 610
-5
Kg.m
-3
, 3.4S.m
-1
@ 610
-3
Torr)
Fig. 1 Gravitational Shielding Effect by means of an ELF electric field through
low- pressure Hg Plasma.
Metallic Plate
Fixed pulley g
1
=-g


g
1
0


g
1
=g
220V, 60 Hz

23

g
g
Inside the dotted box the gravity
acceleration above the second lamp
becomes
( ) g
g g
plasma Hg plasma Hg
plasma Hg
1 2
1 2 2

=
= =

Fig. 2 Gravity acceleration above a second fluorescent lamp.
g
1
g
2
plasma Hg 1

plasma Hg 2

2
1 f
ELF(2)
f
ELF(1)



24




(a)
RF
Transmitter
ELF Voltage Source
( )
( )
g
m
m
g
plasma Hg i
plasma Hg g
=
1
Fig. 3 Schematic diagram of Gravity Control Cells (GCCs).
(a) GCC where the ELF electric field and the ionizing electric field can be the same. (b) GCC
where the plasma is ionized by means of a RF signal. (c) GCC filled with air (at ambient
temperature and 1 atm) strongly ionized by means of alpha particles emitted from radioactive
ions sources (Am 241, half-life 432 years). Since the electrical conductivity of the ionized air
depends on the amount of ions then it can be strongly increased by increasing the amount of Am
241 in the GCC. This GCC has 36 radioactive ions sources each one with 1/5000
th
of gram of
Am 241, conveniently positioned around the ionization chamber, in order to
obtain
1 3
10

m S
air
. .
RF Signal Low-density plasma
Electrodes
Low-density plasma
g
g
Electrodes
ELF Voltage Source
(b)
~
( )
( )
g
m
m
g
plasma Hg i
plasma Hg g
=
1
~
~ V , f
Air @ 1 atm, 25C
Radioactive ions sources
(Americium 241)
Insulating holder Epoxy Ionization chamber
Aluminium, 1mm-thickness

d
(c)





25





Fig. 4 Gravitational Shielding surround a Spherical Spacecraft.

air
m
g
r

Gravitational Shielding

M
g
The gravity accelerations on the spacecraft (due to the rest of the Universe) can be controlled by
means of the gravitational shielding, i.e.,
g
i
=
air
g
i
i =1, 2, 3 n
Thus,
F
is
=F
si
=M
g
g
i
=M
g
(
air
g
i
)
Then the inertial forces acting on the spacecraft (s) can be strongly reduced. According to the Machs
principle this effect can reduce the inertial properties of the spacecraft and consequently, leads to a new
concept of spacecraft and aerospace flight.
E
rms
(low frequency)
g =G m
g
/ r
2
g =
air
g

Spacecraft

a



26










t =T /4 g
1
/ g g
2
/ g V =V
0
(Volts) (s) ( min)
E
ELF (1)
(V/m)
f
ELF (1)
(mHz)

Exp. Teo.
E
ELF (2)
(V/m)
f
ELF (2)
(mHz)
Exp. Teo.
250 4.17 24.81 1 - 0.993 24.81 1 - 0.986
312.5 5.21 24.81 0.8 - 0.986 24.81 0.8 - 0.972
416.6 6.94 24.81 0.6 - 0.967 24.81 0.6 - 0.935
625 10.42 24.81 0.4 - 0.890 24.81 0.4 - 0.792


1.0 V
1250 20.83 24.81 0.2 - 0.240 24.81 0.2 - 0.058
250 4.17 37.22 1 - 0.964 37.22 1 - 0.929
312.5 5.21 37.22 0.8 - 0.930 37.22 0.8 - 0.865
416.6 6.94 37.22 0.6 - 0.837 37.22 0.6 - 0.700
625 10.42 37.22 0.4 - 0,492 37.22 0.4 - 0.242


1.5V
1250 20.83 37.22 0.2 - -1,724 37.22 0.2 - 2.972



Table 1 Theoretical Results.

























27
Fig. 5- Distribution of the correlation g1/ g as a function of f ELF
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0
f ELF (mHz)
g 1 / g
g1/g
1.0V
g1/g
1.5V













28
Fig. 6- Distribution of the correlation g2 / g as a function of f ELF
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0
f ELF (mHz)
g 2 / g
g2/g 1.0V
g2/g
1.5V













29


Fig. 7- Distribution of the correlations gi / g as a function of f ELF
-2
-1
0
1
2
3
0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0
f ELF (mHz)
g i / g
g1/g
1.5V
g2/g
1.5V











30

Air at ultra-low pressure

Inductor
Steel Box
g
g g
air
=

Fig. 8 (a) Gravity Control Cell (GCC) filled with air at ultra-low pressure.
(b) Gravity Control Battery (Note that if
1
1
2 1
= =


then g g = )
(a)
(b)


g g
1 2 3 3
=

3
GCC 3

g g
1 2 2
=
Steel Boxes
2
GCC 2

g g
1 1
=

1
GCC 1

g
g
( ) g g g
air steel steel

2
= =
g g
steel
=
( For B <300T 1
steel
then g g )
















































31
g
g
Massive Rotor
Gravity Control Cell
(Steel box)
r
r
R
( ) g g
air steel

2
= ( ) ( ) g g
air steel
2 4
=
1
steel

( ) ( )
n
air air
= =
1
2 1

ng g g g =












g

= g

Gravity Control Cell
(Steel box)
















g


Note that and therefore for

and we get and






Fig. 9 The Gravitational Motor


32
Fig. 10 The Gravitational Spacecraft Due to the Meissner effect, the magnetic field
B is expelled from the superconducting shell. Similarly, the magnetic field B
GCC
, of the
GCC stay confined inside the superconducting box.
M
g
F
M
m
g
F
m

Gravity Control Cell- GCC

Superconducting
Ring
Dielectric
Aluminum Shell
Superconducting
Shell
Superconducting
Box
B



















































33



Gas


m
g


F
m

Gas
Fig. 11 The Gravitational Thruster .
(a) Using material boxes. (b) Without material boxes
GCC
M
g


F
M
GCC GCC
a
gas
Material boxes
(a)
(b)




















Am - 241

3
<
2
(
air 3
)



2
<
1
(
air 2
)



1
(
air 1
)



g=
air 3
g=
air 3

air 2

air 1
g




g =
air 2
g =
air 2

air 1
g
g =
air 1
g


















g













34
GCC GCC GCC
Gas Helix







Gas
HIGH




SPEED Motor axis




GAS
Fig. 12 - The Gravitational Turbo Motor The gravitationally accelerated gas, by
means of the GCCs, propels the helix which movies the motor axis.











35
r
dm
g2
dm
g1
dF
12
dF
21
Air Layer 2 Air Layer 1


Fig. 13 Gravitational forces between two layers of the air shell. The electric field E
osc

provides the ionization of the air.
Spacecraft
E
osc










































36






Fig. 14 The Gravitational Lifter

( ) . .
2
98 0

+ = s m g g
air
r
E
osc
Spacecraft
E
osc

air

B



























37





Fig. 15 Gravitational Press
H
H
0.20
0.20
0.20
B
inn

S
2 6
2
10 4 1

s m g . .

2 3
1
10 3

+ s m g .
2
81 9

= s m g . .
Chamber 1 Air
Chamber 2 Air
g g


m
2





m
1





m

S
P=R/S








38



i
f


(a) GCC Antenna



i i
f f

Transmitter (b) Receiver


Fig. 16 - Transmitter and Receiver of Virtual Gravitational Radiation.


Real Gravitational Waves
v =c
Graviphotons
v =

GCC

GCC
Graviphotons
v =
GCC
Coil

39
10
3
atoms
Dielectric
(10
8
atoms)
Graviphotons

v =
(a)
Transmitter Receiver
10
2
atoms
Fig. 17 Quantum Gravitational Microantenna
(b)
Microantenna
Conductor Conductor
10
3
atoms
Dielectric
f f

40

(a)
(b)
(c)

Data
Acquisition
System
v


V
( )( )
2 2
r
m M
G
r
im iM
G F
g g g g
+ = =


F


Imaginary body
img
Crystal

F

iMg






F


Imaginary body
img
Crystal



iMg
Imaginary body
img

Mg = Mi

(Mi =inertial mass)


F =M
g
a M
i
a

a = - (
air
)
3
Gm
g
/ r
2
micro-crystals

A
M
P
L
Y
F
I
E
R
Display
GCC GCC GCC

air
-10
9
GCC GCC GCC

air
5
g
air
5
g
air
4
g
air
3
g
air
2
g
air

g g

Gravitational Shielding


air
10
-2


g
air
g
air
2
g
air
3
g
air
4
g
air
5
g
air
5
g
GCC GCC GCC GCC GCC
Fig.18 Method and device using GCCs for obtaining images of imaginary bodies.



41




















(a)
* There are a type of neutrino, called "ghost neutrino, predicted by General Relativity, with zero mass
and zero momentum. In spite its momentum be zero, it is known that there are wave functions that
describe these neutrinos and that prove that really they exist.

(b)
ig. 19 The phenomenon of reduction of the momentum. (a) Shows the reduction o



















F f
momentum for 159 . 0 > . (b) Shows the effect when 159 . 0 < . Note that in both cases, the
material particles collide with the cowl with the momentum ( )( ) h c V q
m
= , and the
photons with

h
q
r
= . Therefore, that by making 0 , it is possible to block high-energy
particles and ultra-intense fluxes of radiation.
material particle
imaginary particle
associated to the
material particle
real photon
imaginary photon
associated to the
real photon
, , f E
159 . 0 >

h
c
V
q
m

=
[ ]

h
q
i
= 1

h
q
r
=
[ ]

h
c
V
q
i

= 1

h
c
V
q
m

*
0 =
i
q

h
q
r

0 =
i
q
material particle
imaginary particle
associated to the
material particle
real photon
imaginary photon
associated to the
real photon
, , f E
159 . 0 <

h
c
V
q
m

=
[ ]

h
q
i
= 1

h
q
r
=
[ ]

h
c
V
q
i

= 1

h
c
V
q
m

0 =
i
q

h
q
r

0 =
i
q


42

APPENDIX A: THE SIMPLEST METHOD TO CONTROL THE GRAVITY

In this Appendix we show the simplest
method to control the gravity.
Consider a body with mass density and
the following electric characteristics:
r
,
r
,
(relative permeability, relative permittivity and
electric conductivity, respectively). Through this
body, passes an electric currentI , which is the
sum of a sinusoidal current t i i
osc
sin
0
= and
the DC current , i.e.,
DC
I t i I I
DC
sin
0
+ =
; f 2 = . If then . Thus, the
current
DC
I i <<
0 DC
I I
I varies with the frequency , but the
variation of its intensity is quite small in
comparison with , i.e.,
f
DC
I I will be practically
constant (Fig. 1A). This is of fundamental
importance for maintaining the value of the
gravitational mass of the body, , sufficiently
stable during all the time.
g
m
The gravitational mass of the body is given
by [1]
( ) 1 1 1 2 1
0
2
2
0
A m
c m
U n
m
i
i
r
g

+ =

whereU , is the electromagnetic energy
absorbed by the body and is the index of
refraction of the body.
r
n
Equation (A1) can also be rewritten in the
following form

( ) 2 1 1 2 1
2
2
0
A
c
W n
m
m
r
i
g

+ =

where, V U W = is the density of
electromagnetic energy and V
0 i
m = is the
density of inertial mass.
The instantaneous values of the density of
electromagnetic energy in an electromagnetic
field can be deduced from Maxwells equations
and has the following expression

( ) 3
2
2
1
2
2
1
A H E W + =

where t E E
m
sin = and t H H sin = are the
instantaneous values of the electric field and the
magnetic field respectively.





















Fig. A1 - The electric current I varies with
frequency f . But the variation of

I is quite small
in comparison with
DC
I due to
DC o
I i << . In this
way, we can consider
DC
I I .
t
I
DC
I =I
DC
+i
osc
i
0

It is known that H B = ,
r
k B E = [11] and
( )
( ) 4
1 1
2
2
A
c
dt
dz
v
r r r

+ +
= = =

where is the real part of the propagation

vector
r
k
k
r
(also called phase constant );
i r
ik k k k + = =
r
; , and , are the
electromagnetic characteristics of the medium in
which the incident (or emitted) radiation is
propagating(
0

r
= ;
;
m F/ 10 854 . 8
12
0

=
0

r
= where ). It is
known that for free-space
m / H
7
0
10 4

=
0 = and 1 = =
r r
. Then Eq. (A4) gives
c v =
From (A4), we see that the index of refraction
v c n
r
= is given by

( ) ( ) 5 1 1
2
2
A
v
c
n
r r
r

+ + = =



43
Equation (A4) shows that v
r
= .
Thus, v k B E
r
= = , i.e.,
( ) 6 A H v vB E = =
Then, Eq. (A3) can be rewritten in the following
form:
( ) ( ) 7
2
2
1 2 2
2
1
A H H v W + =
For << , Eq. (A4) reduces to

r r
c
v

=

Then, Eq. (A7) gives

2 2
2
1
2
2
2
1
H H H
c
W
r r


= +

=

This equation can be rewritten in the following
forms:
( ) 8
2
A
B
W

=
or
( ) 9
2
A E W =

For >> , Eq. (A4) gives
( ) 10
2
A v

=
Then, from Eq. (A7) we get

( ) 11
2
2
2
1
2
2
1 2 2
2
1 2
2
1
A H
H H H H W

= +

=

Since H v vB E = = , we can rewrite (A11) in
the following forms:
( ) 12
2
2
A
B
W

or
( ) 13
4
2
A E W

By comparing equations (A8) (A9) (A12) and

(A13), we can see that Eq. (A13) shows that the
best way to obtain a strong value of W in
practice is by applying an Extra Low-Frequency
(ELF) electric field ( ) Hz f w 1 2 << = through a
medium with high electrical conductivity.
Substitution of Eq. (A13) into Eq. (A2),
gives
( ) 14
1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
1
256
1 2 1
1
4 4
1 2 1
0
4
3 2
3
27
0
4
3 2
3
2 3
0
0
2
4
3
2
A
m E
f
m E
f c
m
E
f c
m
i
r
i
r
i g

+ =
=

+ =
=

+ =

Note that t E E
m
sin = .The average value for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E because E varies
sinusoidaly ( is the maximum value for
m
E E ).
On the other hand, 2
m rms
E E = . Consequently,
we can change
4
E by , and the equation
above can be rewritten as follows
4
rms
E
0
4
3 2
3
27
1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
i rms
r
g
m E
f
m

+ =

Substitution of the well-known equation of the
Ohm's vectorial Law: E j = into (A14), we get
( ) 15 1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
0
3 2
4
27
A m
f
j
m
i
rms r
g

+ =

where 2 j j
rms
= .
Consider a 15 cm square Aluminum thin
foil of 10.5 microns thickness with the following
characteristics: 1 =
r
; ;
. Then, (A15) gives
1 7
. 10 82 . 3

= m S
3
. 2700

= m Kg
( ) 16 1 10 313 . 6 1 2 1
0
3
4
42
A m
f
j
m
i
rms
g

+ =

Now, consider that the ELF electric
current t i I I
DC
sin
0
+ = , ( )
DC
I i <<
0

passes through that Aluminum foil. Then, the
current density is
( ) 17 A
S
I
S
I
j
DC rms
rms
=
where

( )
2 6 6
10 57 . 1 10 5 . 10 15 . 0 m m m S

= =

If the ELF electric current has
frequency , then, the
gravitational mass of the aluminum foil, given by
(A16), is expressed by
Hz Hz f
6
10 2 2

= =
44
[ ] { } ( ) 18 1 13 . 0 1 2 1
1 10 89 . 7 1 2 1
0
4
0
4
4
25
A m I
m
S
I
m
i DC
i
DC
g
+ =
=

+ =

Then,
[ ] { } ( ) 19 1 13 . 0 1 2 1
4
0
A I
m
m
DC
i
g
+ =
For , the equation above gives A I
DC
2 . 2 =
( ) 20 1
0
A
m
m
i
g

=
This means that the gravitational shielding
produced by the aluminum foil can change the
gravity acceleration above the foil down to
( ) 21 1 A g g g =
Under these conditions, the Aluminum foil works
basically as a Gravity Control Cell (GCC).
In order to check these theoretical
predictions, we suggest an experimental set-up
shown in Fig.A2.
A 15cm square Aluminum foil of 10.5
microns thickness with the following composition:
Al 98.02%; Fe 0.80%; Si 0.70%; Mn 0.10%; Cu
0.10%; Zn 0.10%; Ti 0.08%; Mg 0.05%; Cr
0.05%, and with the following characteristics:
1 =
r
; ; , is
fixed on a 17 cm square Foam Board
1 7
. 10 82 . 3

= m S
3
. 2700

= m Kg
**
plate of
6mm thickness as shown in Fig.A3. This device
(the simplest Gravity Control Cell GCC) is placed
on a pan balance shown in Fig.A2.
Above the Aluminum foil, a sample (any
type of material, any mass) connected to a
dynamometer will check the decrease of the local
gravity acceleration upon the sample
( ) g g = , due to the gravitational shielding
produced by the decreasing of gravitational mass
of the Aluminum foil ( )
0 i g
m m = . Initially, the
sample lies 5 cm above the Aluminum foil. As
shown in Fig.A2, the board with the dynamometer
can be displaced up to few meters in height.
Thus, the initial distance between the Aluminum
foil and the sample can be increased in order to
check the reach of the gravitational shielding
produced by the Aluminum foil.
In order to generate the ELF electric
current of Hz f 2 = , we can use the widely-

**
Foam board is a very strong, lightweight (density:
24.03 kg.m
-3
) and easily cut material used for the
mounting of photographic prints, as backing in picture
framing, in 3D design, and in painting. It consists of
three layers an inner layer of polystyrene clad with
outer facing of either white clay coated paper or brown
Kraft paper.
known Function Generator HP3325A (Op.002
High Voltage Output) that can generate
sinusoidal voltages with extremely-low
frequencies down to and
amplitude up to 20V (40V
Hz f
6
10 1

=
pp
into load). The
maximum output current is ; output
impedance <2 at ELF.
500
pp
A .08 0
Figure A4 shows the equivalent electric
circuit for the experimental set-up. The
electromotive forces are:
1
(HP3325A) and
2

(12V DC Battery).The values of the resistors are
: W R 2 500
1
= ; ; < 2
1 i
r W R 40 4
2
= ;
< 1 . 0
2 i
r ; ; Rheostat (0
R 10 - 90W). The coupling transformer has the
following characteristics: air core with diameter
=
3
10 5 . 2
p
R
mm 10 = ; area
2 5 2
10 8 . 7 4 m S

= = ;
wire#12AWG; 20
2 1
= = = N N N ; mm l 42 = ;
( ) H l S N L L L
7 2
0 2 1
10 3 . 9

= = = = .Thus, we
get
( ) ( ) + + = 501
2 2
1 1 1
L r R Z
i

and
( ) ( )
2 2
2 2 2
L R R r R Z
p i
+ + + + =
For 0 = R we get ; for = 4
min
2 2
Z Z
=10 R the result is . Thus, = 14
max
2 2
Z Z

+ = + = 505
2
2
1 min
2 1
min
, 1 1
min
, 1
N
N
Z Z Z Z Z
reflected total

+ = + = 515
2
2
1 max
2 1
max
, 1 1
max
, 1
N
N
Z Z Z Z Z
reflected total
The maxima rms currents have the
following values:
mA Z V I
total pp
56 40
min
, 1
2
1
max
1
= =
(The maximum output current of the Function
Generator HP3325A (Op.002 High Voltage
Output) is
rms pp
mA mA 5 . 56 80 );
A
Z
I 3
min
2
2 max
2
= =

and
A I I I 3
max
1
max
2
max
3
+ =

The new expression for the inertial forces,
(Eq.5) a M F
g i
r
r
= , shows that the inertial forces
are proportional to gravitational mass. Only in the
particular case of , the expression
above reduces to the well-known Newtonian
expression
0 i g
m m =
a m F
i i
r
r
0
= . The equivalence
45
between gravitational and inertial forces ( )
g i
F F
r r

[1] shows then that a balance measures the
gravitational mass subjected to
acceleration g a = . Here, the decrease in the
gravitational mass of the Aluminum foil will be
measured by a pan balance with the following
characteristics: range 0-200g; readability 0.01g.
The mass of the Foam Board plate is:
, the mass of the Aluminum foil is:
, the total mass of the ends and the
electric wires of connection is . Thus,
initially the balance will show .
According to (A18), when the electric current
through the Aluminum foil
(resistance
g 17 . 4
g 64 . 0
g 5
g 81 . 9
= =
3 *
10 5 . 2 S l r
p
) reaches the
value: , we will get .
Under these circumstances, the balance will
show:
A I 2 . 2
3

( ) ( ) Al i Al g
m m
0

g g g g 53 . 8 64 . 0 64 . 0 81 . 9
and the gravity acceleration above the
Aluminum foil, becomes .
g
g g g 1 =
It was shown [1] that, when the
gravitational mass of a particle is reduced to the
gravitational mass ranging between
to , it becomes imaginary, i.e., the
gravitational and the inertial masses of the
particle become imaginary. Consequently, the
particle disappears from our ordinary space-time.
This phenomenon can be observed in the
proposed experiment, i.e., the Aluminum foil will
disappear when its gravitational mass becomes
smaller than . It will become visible
again, only when its gravitational mass becomes
smaller than , or when it becomes
greater than .
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0.
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0.
i
M 159 0. +
Equation (A18) shows that the gravitational
mass of the Aluminum foil, , goes close to
zero when . Consequently, the
gravity acceleration above the Aluminum foil also
goes close to zero since
( ) Al g
m
A I 76 . 1
3

( ) ( ) Al i Al g
m m g g
0
= = . Under these
circumstances, the Aluminum foil remains
invisible.
Now consider a rigid Aluminum wire #14
AWG. The area of its cross section is
( )
2 6
2
3
10 08 . 2 4 10 628 . 1 m m S

= =
If an ELF electric current with
frequency passes through
this wire, its gravitational mass, given by (A16),
will be expressed by
Hz Hz f
6
10 2 2

= =
[ ] { } ( ) 22 1 13 . 0 1 2 1
1 10 89 . 7 1 2 1
1 10 313 . 6 1 2 1
0
4
0
4
4
25
0
3
4
42
A m I
m
S
I
m
f
j
m
i DC
i
DC
i
rms
g
+ =
=

+ =
=

+ =

For A I
DC
3 the equation above gives

0
8 . 3
i g
m m

Note that we can replace the Aluminum foil for
this wire in the experimental set-up shown in
Fig.A2. It is important also to note that an ELF
electric current that passes through a wire - which
makes a spherical form, as shown in Fig A5 -
reduces the gravitational mass of the wire (Eq.
A22), and the gravity inside sphere at the same
proportion,
0 i g
m m = , (Gravitational Shielding
Effect). In this case, that effect can be checked
by means of the Experimental set-up 2 (Fig.A6).
Note that the spherical form can be transformed
into an ellipsoidal form or a disc in order to coat,
for example, a Gravitational Spacecraft. It is also
possible to coat with a wire several forms, such
as cylinders, cones, cubes, etc.
The circuit shown in Fig.A4 (a) can be
modified in order to produce a new type of
Gravitational Shielding, as shown in Fig.A4 (b).
In this case, the Gravitational Shielding will be
produced in the Aluminum plate, with thickness
, of the parallel plate capacitor connected in the
point
h
P of the circuit (See Fig.A4 (b)). Note that,
in this circuit, the Aluminum foil (resistance )
(Fig.A4(a)) has been replaced by a Copper wire #
14 AWG with 1cm length ( ) in order to
produce a resistance . Thus,
the voltage in the point
p
R
cm l 1 =
=
5
10 21 . 5

R
P of the circuit will have
the maximum value when
the resistance of the rheostat is null (
V V
p
4 max
10 1 . 1

=
) 0 = R and
the minimum value when V V
p
5 min
10 03 . 4

=
=10 R . In this way, the voltage (with
frequency
p
V
Hz f 2 = ) applied on the capacitor
will produce an electric field with intensity
p
E
h V E
p p
= through the Aluminum plate of
thickness mm h 3 = . It is important to note that this
plate cannot be connected to ground (earth), in
other words, cannot be grounded, because, in
46
this case, the electric field through it will be null

.
According to Eq. A14, when
m V h V E
p p
/ 036 . 0
max max
= = , Hz f 2 = and
,
(Aluminum), we get
m S
Al
/ 10 82 . 3
7
=
3
/ 2700 m kg
Al
=
( )
( )
9 . 0 =
Al i
Al
m
m

Under these conditions, the maximum current

density through the plate with thickness will be
given by (It is
well-known that the maximum current density
supported by the Aluminum is ).
h
2 6 max max
/ 10 4 . 1 m A E j
p Al
= =
2 8
/ 10 m A
Since the area of the plate is
, then the maximum current is
. Despite this enormous
current, the maximum dissipated power will be
just , because the
resistance of the plate is very small, i.e.,
( )
2 2 2
10 4 2 . 0 m A

= =
kA A j i 56
max max
= =
( ) W R i P
plate
2 . 6
2
max max
= =
=
9
10 2 A h R
Al plate
.
Note that the area of the plate (where
the Gravitational Shielding takes place) can have
several geometrical configurations. For example,
it can be the area of the external surface of an
ellipsoid, sphere, etc. Thus, it can be the area of
the external surface of a Gravitational Spacecraft.
In this case, if , for example, the
maximum dissipated power will be
, i.e., approximately .
A
2
100m A
kW P 4 . 15
max

2
/ 154 m W
All of these systems work with Extra-Low
Frequencies ( ) Hz f
3
10

<< . Now, we show that,

by simply changing the geometry of the surface
of the Aluminum foil, it is possible to increase the
working frequency up to more than 1Hz. f
Consider the Aluminum foil, now with
several semi-spheres stamped on its surface, as
shown in Fig. A7 . The semi-spheres have
radius , and are joined one to
another. The Aluminum foil is now coated by an
mm r 9 . 0
0
=

r

When the voltage V

p
is applied on the capacitor, the
charge distribution in the dielectric induces positive
and negative charges, respectively on opposite sides of
the Aluminum plate with thickness h. If the plate is not
connected to the ground (Earth) this charge
distribution produces an electric field E
p
=V
p
/h through
the plate. However, if the plate is connected to the
ground, the negative charges (electrons) escapes for
the ground and the positive charges are redistributed
along the entire surface of the Aluminum plate making
null the electric field through it.
insulation layer with relative permittivity
and dielectric strength . A voltage source is
connected to the Aluminum foil in order to provide
a voltage (rms) with frequency . Thus, the
electric potential V at a distance
k
0
V f
r , in the
interval from to , is given by
0
r a
( ) 23
4
1
0
A
r
q
V =
r

In the interval b r a < the electric potential is
( ) 24
4
1
0
A
r
q
V

=
since for the air we have 1
r
.
Thus, on the surface of the metallic
spheres( )
0
r r = we get
( ) 25
4
1
0 0
0
A
r
q
V
r

=
Consequently, the electric field is
( ) 26
4
1
2
0 0
0
A
r
q
E
r

=
By comparing (A26) with (A25), we obtain
( ) 27
0
0
0
A
r
V
E =
The electric potential at is
b
V b r =
( ) 28
4
1
0 0
0
A
b
r V
b
q
V
r
b

= =
Consequently, the electric field is given by
b
E
( ) 29
4
1
2
0 0
2
0
A
b
r V
b
q
E
r
b

= =
From
0
r r = up to the electric
field is approximately constant (See Fig. A7).
Along the distance it will be called . For
d a b r + = =
d
air
E
d a r + > , the electric field stops being constant.
Thus, the intensity of the electric field at
d a b r + = = is approximately equal to ,
i.e.,
0
E
0
E E
b
. Then, we can write that
( ) 30
0
0
2
0 0
A
r
V
b
r V
r

whence we get
( ) 31
0
A r b
r

Since the intensity of the electric field through the
air, , is
air
E
0
E E E
b air
, then, we can write that
( ) 32
4
1
2
0 0
2
0
A
b
r V
b
q
E
r
air

= =
Note that
r
refers to the relative permittivity of
47
the insulation layer, which is covering the
Aluminum foil.
If the intensity of this field is greater than
the dielectric strength of the air ( ) m V / 10 3
6

there will occur the well-known Corona effect.
Here, this effect is necessary in order to increase
the electric conductivity of the air at this region
(layer with thickness d). Thus, we will assume
m V
r
V
b
r V
E
r
air
/ 10 3
6
min
0
2
0
min
0 min
= = =

0
and
( ) 33 / 10 1
7
0
max
0
2
0
max
0 max
A m V
r
V
b
r V
E
r
air
= = =

The electric field will
produce an electrons flux in a direction and an
ions flux in an opposite direction. From the
viewpoint of electric current, the ions flux can be
considered as an electrons flux at the same
direction of the real electrons flux. Thus, the
current density through the air, , will be the
double of the current density expressed by the
well-known equation of Langmuir-Child
max min
air air air
E E E
air
j
( ) 34 10 33 . 2
2
9
4
2
6
2 2
0
2
3
2
3
2
3
A
d
V
d
V
d
V
m
e
j
e
r

= = =
where 1
r
for the air; is the
called Childs constant.
6
= 10 33 . 2
Thus, we have
( ) 35 2
2
2
3
A
d
V
j
air
=
where , in this case, is the thickness of the air
layer where the electric field is approximately
constant and V is the voltage drop given by
d
( ) 36
4
1
4
1
0
0
0 0
0 0
A V
ab
d r
ab
a b
r V
b
q
a
q
V V V
r
r
b a

=
= = =

By substituting (A36) into (A35), we get
( ) 37
2
2 2
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
3
2
0 0 0 0
2
A
a
b
E
d
a
b
b
V r
d
ab
dV r
d
j
air
r r
air

=
=

According to the equation of the Ohm's vectorial
Law: E j = , we can write that
( ) 38 A
E
j
air
air
=
( ) 39 2
2
3
2
1
A
a
b
d
E
air
air

=
If the insulation layer has thickness
, mm 6 . 0 = 5 . 3
r
(1- 60Hz),
mm kV k / 17 = (Acrylic sheet 1.5mm thickness),
and the semi-spheres stamped on the metallic
surface have (See Fig.A7) then mm r 9 . 0
0
=
mm r a 5 . 1
0
= + = . Thus, we obtain from Eq.
(A33) that
kV V 7 . 2
min
0
=
( ) 40 9
max
0
A kV V =
From equation (A31), we obtain the following
value for : b
( ) 41 10 68 . 1
3
0
A m r b
r

= =
Since b d a + = we get
m d
4
10 8 . 1

=
Substitution of , , and A(32) into (A39)
produces
a b d
2
1
2
1
0
2 4
10 375 . 1 10 117 . 4 V E
air air

= =
Substitution of
air
, and
into (A14) gives
(rms E
air
)
3
. 2 . 1

= m kg
air

( )
( )
( ) 42 1 10 923 . 4 1 2 1
1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
3
5 . 5
0 21
3 2
4 3
27
0
A
f
V
f
E
m
m
air
air air
air i
air g

+ =
=

+ =

For V and , the result is kV V 9

max
0 0
= = Hz f 2 =
( )
( )
2 . 1
0

air i
air g
m
m
Note that, by increasing , the values of
and
0
V
air
E
air
are increased. Thus, as show
(A42), there are two ways for decrease the value
of
)
: increasing the value of V or
decreasing the value of .
(air g
m
0
f
Since and
then the dielectric strength of the
insulation must be . As
mentioned above, the dielectric strength of the
acrylic is17 .
mm kV m V E / 10 / 10
7 max
0
= =
mm 6 . 0 =
mm kV / 7 . 16
mm kV /
It is important to note that, due to the
strong value of (Eq. A37) the drift velocity
,
air
E
d
v (
air
Substitution of (A37) into (A38) yields
) ne E ne j v
air air air d
= = of the free
charges inside the ionized air put them at a
48
distance m fv t v x
d d
4 . 0 2 = = , which is much
greater than the distance .
Consequently, the number of free charges
decreases strongly inside the air layer of
thickness
m d
4
10 8 . 1

=
n
d

, except, obviously, in a thin layer,

very close to the dielectric, where the number of
free charges remains sufficiently increased, to
maintain the air conductivity with m S
air
/ 1 . 1
(Eq. A39).
The thickness of this thin air layer close
to the dielectric can be easily evaluated starting
from the charge distribution in the neighborhood
of the dielectric, and of the repulsion forces
established among them. The result is
h
m E e h
9
0
10 4 4 06 . 0

= . This is, therefore,
the thickness of the Air Gravitational Shielding. If
the area of this Gravitational Shielding is equal to
the area of a format A4 sheet of paper,
i.e., , we obtain the
following value for the resistance of the
Gravitational Shielding:
2
0582 . 0 291 . 0 20 . 0 m A = =
air
R
=
8
10 6 A h R
air air
.
Since the maximum electrical current through this
air layer is , then the
maximum power radiated from the Gravitational
Shielding is . This
means that a very strong light will be radiated
from this type of Gravitational Shielding. Note that
this device can also be used as a lamp, which will
be much more efficient than conventional lamps.
kA A j i 400
max max
=
( ) kW i R P
air air air
10
2
max max
=
Coating a ceiling with this lighting system
enables the entire area of ceiling to produce light.
This is a form of lighting very different from those
usually known.
Note that the value , defines the
power of the transformer shown in Fig.A10. Thus,
the maximum current in the secondary is
kW P
air
10
max

A kW kV i
s
9 . 0 10 9
max
= = .
Above the Gravitational Shielding,
air
is
reduced to the normal value of conductivity of the
atmospheric air ( ) m S / 10
14
. Thus, the power
radiated from this region is

( )( )
( ) ( ) W E A h d
A i h d P
air air
air air air
4
2
max
2
max max
10

=
= =

Now, we will describe a method to coat the
Aluminum semi-spheres with acrylic in the
necessary dimensions(
0
r a ) = , we propose
the following method. First, take an Aluminum
plate with (A4 format). By cm cm 1 . 29 21

Reducing therefore, the conductivity

air
, to the
normal value of conductivity of the atmospheric air.
means of a convenient process, several semi-
spheres can be stamped on its surface. The
semi-spheres have radius , and
are joined one to another. Next, take an acrylic
sheet (A4 format) with 1.5mm thickness (See
Fig.A8 (a)). Put a heater below the Aluminum
plate in order to heat the Aluminum (Fig.A8 (b)).
When the Aluminum is sufficiently heated up, the
acrylic sheet and the Aluminum plate are
pressed, one against the other, as shown in Fig.
A8 (c). The two D devices shown in this figure are
used in order to impede that the press
compresses the acrylic and the aluminum to a
distance shorter than . After some seconds,
remove the press and the heater. The device is
ready to be subjected to a voltage with
frequency , as shown in Fig.A9. Note that, in
this case, the balance is not necessary, because
the substance that produces the gravitational
shielding is an air layer with thickness above
the acrylic sheet. This is, therefore, more a type
of Gravity Control Cell (GCC) with external
gravitational shielding.
mm r 9 . 0
0
=
a y +
0
V
f
d
It is important to note that this GCC can be
made very thin and as flexible as a fabric. Thus, it
can be used to produce anti- gravity clothes.
These clothes can be extremely useful, for
example, to walk on the surface of high gravity
planets.
Figure A11 shows some geometrical
forms that can be stamped on a metallic surface
in order to produce a Gravitational Shielding
effect, similar to the produced by the semi-
spherical form.
An obvious evolution from the semi-
spherical form is the semi-cylindrical form shown
in Fig. A11 (b); Fig.A11(c) shows concentric
metallic rings stamped on the metallic surface, an
evolution from Fig.A11 (b). These geometrical
forms produce the same effect as the semi-
spherical form, shown in Fig.A11 (a). By using
concentric metallic rings, it is possible to build
Gravitational Shieldings around bodies or
spacecrafts with several formats (spheres,
ellipsoids, etc); Fig. A11 (d) shows a Gravitational
Shielding around a Spacecraft with ellipsoidal
form.
The previously mentioned Gravitational
Shielding, produced on a thin layer of ionized air,
has a behavior different from the Gravitational
Shielding produced on a rigid substance. When
the gravitational masses of the air molecules,
inside the shielding, are reduced to within the
range
i g i
m m m 159 . 0 159 . 0 < < + , they go to
the imaginary space-time, as previously shown in
this article. However, the electric field stays
at the real space-time. Consequently, the
molecules return immediately to the real space-
air
E
49

time in order to return soon after to the imaginary
space-time, due to the action of the electric
field .
air
E
In the case of the Gravitational Shielding
produced on a solid substance, when the
molecules of the substance go to the imaginary
space-time, the electric field that produces the
effect, also goes to the imaginary space-time
together with them, since in this case, the
substance of the Gravitational Shielding is rigidly
connected to the metal that produces the electric
field. (See Fig. A12 (b)). This is the fundamental
difference between the non-solid and solid
Gravitational Shieldings.
Now, consider a Gravitational Spacecraft
that is able to produce an Air Gravitational
Shielding and also a Solid Gravitational
Shielding, as shown in Fig. A13 (a)

. Assuming
that the intensity of the electric field, ,
necessary to reduce the gravitational mass of
the air molecules to within the range
, is much smaller
than the intensity of the electric field, ,
necessary to reduce the gravitational mass of
the solid substance to within the range
, then we
conclude that the Gravitational Shielding made of
ionized air goes to the imaginary space-time
before the Gravitational Shielding made of solid
substance. When this occurs the spacecraft does
not go to the imaginary space-time together with
the Gravitational Shielding of air, because the air
molecules are not rigidly connected to the
spacecraft. Thus, while the air molecules go into
the imaginary space-time, the spacecraft stays in
the real space-time, and remains subjected to the
effects of the Gravitational Shielding around it,
air
E
i g i
m m m 159 . 0 159 . 0 < < +
rs
E
i g i
m m m 159 . 0 159 . 0 < < +

The solid Gravitational Shielding can also be

obtained by means of an ELF electric current through
a metallic lamina placed between the semi-spheres
and the Gravitational Shielding of Air (See Fig.A13
(a)). The gravitational mass of the solid Gravitational
Shielding will be controlled just by means of the
intensity of the ELF electric current. Recently, it was
discovered that Carbon nanotubes (CNTs) can be
added to Alumina (Al
2
O
3
) to convert it into a good
electrical conductor. It was found that the electrical
conductivity increased up to 3375 S/m at 77C in
samples that were 15% nanotubes by volume [12]. It
is known that the density of -Alumina is 3.98kg.m
-3

and that it can withstand 10-20 KV/mm. Thus, these
values show that the Alumina-CNT can be used to
make a solid Gravitational Shielding. In this case, the
electric field produced by means of the semi-spheres
will be used to control the gravitational mass of the
Alumina-CNT.

since the shielding does not stop to work, due
to its extremely short permanence at the
imaginary space-time. Under these
circumstances, the gravitational mass of the
Gravitational Shielding can be reduced to
0
g
m . For example, . Thus, if
the inertial mass of the Gravitational Shielding is
kg m
g
4
10

kg m
i
1
0
, then
4
0
10

=
i g
m m . As we
have seen, this means that the inertial effects on
the spacecraft will be reduced by . Then,
in spite of the effective acceleration of the
spacecraft be, for example, , the
effects on the crew of the spacecraft will be
equivalent to an acceleration of only
4
10

2 5
. 10

= s m a

1
0
. 10

= = s m a a
m
m
a
i
g

This is the magnitude of the acceleration upon
the passengers in a contemporary commercial
jet.
Then, it is noticed that Gravitational
Spacecrafts can be subjected to enormous
accelerations (or decelerations) without imposing
any harmful impacts whatsoever on the
spacecrafts or its crew.
Now, imagine that the intensity of the
electric field that produces the Gravitational
Shielding around the spacecraft is increased up
to reaching the value that reduces the
gravitational mass of the solid Gravitational
Shielding to within the range
rs
E
i g i
m m m 159 . 0 159 . 0 < < + . Under these
circumstances, the solid Gravitational Shielding
goes to the imaginary space-time and, since it is
rigidly connected to the spacecraft, also the
spacecraft goes to the imaginary space-time
together with the Gravitational Shielding. Thus,
the spacecraft can travel within the imaginary
space-time and make use of the Gravitational
Shielding around it.
As we have already seen, the maximum
velocity of propagation of the interactions in the
imaginary space-time is infinite (in the real space-
time this limit is equal to the light velocity c ). This
means that there are no limits for the velocity of
the spacecraft in the imaginary space-time. Thus,
the acceleration of the spacecraft can reach, for
example, , which leads the
spacecraft to attain velocities
(about 1 million times the speed
of light) after one day of trip. With this velocity,
after 1 month of trip the spacecraft would have
traveled about . In order to have idea of
this distance, it is enough to remind that the
diameter of our Universe (visible Universe) is of
the order of .
2 9
. 10

= s m a
1 14
. 10

s m V
m
21
10
m
26
10
50
Due to the extremely low density of the
imaginary bodies, the collision between them
cannot have the same consequences of the
collision between the real bodies.
Thus, for a Gravitational Spacecraft in
imaginary state, the problem of the collision in
high-speed doesn't exist. Consequently, the
Gravitational Spacecraft can transit freely in the
imaginary Universe and, in this way, reach easily
any point of our real Universe once they can
make the transition back to our Universe by only
increasing the gravitational mass of the
Gravitational Shielding of the spacecraft in such
way that it leaves the range of
to .
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0.
The return trip would be done in similar
way. That is to say, the spacecraft would transit
in the imaginary Universe back to the departure
place where would reappear in our Universe.
Thus, trips through our Universe that would delay
millions of years, at speeds close to the speed of
light, could be done in just a few months in the
imaginary Universe.
In order to produce the acceleration of
upon the spacecraft we propose a
Gravitational Thruster with 10 GCCs (10
Gravitational Shieldings) of the type with several
semi-spheres stamped on the metallic surface, as
previously shown, or with the semi-cylindrical
form shown in Figs. A11 (b) and (c). The 10
GCCs are filled with air at 1 atm and 300K. If the
insulation layer is made with Mica
2 9
. 10

s m a
( ) 4 . 5
r
and
has thickness , and the semi-
spheres stamped on the metallic surface have
(See Fig.A7) then
mm 1 . 0 =
mm r 4 . 0
0
=
mm r a 5 . 0
0
= + = . Thus, we get
m r b
r
4
0
10 295 . 9

= =
and
m a b d
4
10 295 . 4

= =
Then, from Eq. A42 we obtain
( )
( )

+ =
=

+ = =

1 10 0 . 1 1 2 1
1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
3
5 . 5
0 18
3 2
4 3
27
0
f
V
f
E
m
m
air
air air
air i
air g
air

For and kV V V 6 . 15
max
0 0
= = Hz f 12 . 0 = , the result is
( )
( )
4
0
10 6 . 1 =
air i
air g
air
m
m

Since
0
max
0
max
0
r V E = is now given by
mm kV mm kV E / 3 . 17 9 . 0 6 . 15
max
0
= = and
then the dielectric strength of the insulation
must be . As shown in the table
below
mm 1 . 0 =
mm kV / 173
***
, 0.1mm - thickness of Mica can
withstand 17.6 kV (that is greater
than ), in such way that the
dielectric strength is 176 kV/mm.
kV V 6 . 15
max
0
=
The Gravitational Thrusters are positioned
at the spacecraft, as shown in Fig. A13 (b).
Then, when the spacecraft is in the intergalactic
space, the gravity acceleration upon the
gravitational mass of the bottom of the
thruster (See Fig.A13 (c)), is given by [
gt
m
2]
( ) ( )
2
10 10
r
M
G g a
g
air M air

r r

where is the gravitational mass in front of
the spacecraft.
g
M
For simplicity, let us consider just the effect
of a hypothetical volume
of intergalactic
matter in front of the spacecraft ( ) . The
average density of matter in the intergalactic
medium (IGM) is )
3 7 3 3
10 10 10 10 m V = =
m r 30
3 26
. 10

m kg
ig

. Thus,
for we get
4
10 6 . 1
air

( ) ( )
2 9
2
19
11
10
4
. 10
30
10
10 67 . 6 10 6 . 1

=
=

=
s m
a

In spite of this gigantic acceleration, the inertial
effects for the crew of the spacecraft can be
strongly reduced if, for example, the gravitational
mass of the Gravitational Shielding is reduced

***
The dielectric strength of some dielectrics can have
different values in lower thicknesses. This is, for
example, the case of the Mica.
Dielectric Thickness (mm) Dielectric Strength (kV/mm)
Mica 0.01 mm 200
Mica 0.1 mm 176
Mica 1 mm 61

Some theories put the average density of the

Universe as the equivalent of one hydrogen atom per
cubic meter [13,14]. The density of the universe,
however, is clearly not uniform. Surrounding and
stretching between galaxies, there is a rarefied plasma
[15] that is thought to possess a cosmic filamentary
structure [16] and that is slightly denser than the
average density in the universe. This material is called
the intergalactic medium (IGM) and is mostly ionized
hydrogen; i.e. a plasma consisting of equal numbers of
electrons and protons. The IGM is thought to exist at a
density of 10 to 100 times the average density of the
Universe (10 to 100 hydrogen atoms per cubic meter,
i.e., ).
3 26
. 10

m kg
51
down to and its inertial mass is
. Then, we get
kg m
g
6
10

kg m
i
100
0

8
0
10

=
i g
m m . Therefore, the inertial
effects on the spacecraft will be reduced by
, and consequently, the inertial effects on
the crew of the spacecraft would be equivalent to
an acceleration of only
8
10

a
( )( )
2 9 8
0
. 10 10 10

= = s m a
m
m
a
i
g
Note that the Gravitational Thrusters in the
spacecraft must have a very small diameter (of
the order of millimeters) since, obviously, the hole
through the Gravitational Shielding cannot be
large. Thus, these thrusters are in fact, Micro-
Gravitational Thrusters. As shown in Fig. A13
(b), it is possible to place several micro-
gravitational thrusters in the spacecraft. This
gives to the Gravitational Spacecraft, several
degrees of freedom and shows the enormous
superiority of this spacecraft in relation to the
contemporaries spacecrafts.
The density of matter in the intergalactic
medium (IGM) is about 10
-26
kg.m
-3
, which is
very less than the density of matter in the
interstellar medium (~10
-21
kg.m
-3
) that is less
than the density of matter in the interplanetary
medium (~10
-20
kg.m
-3
). The density of matter is
enormously increased inside the Earths
atmosphere (1.2kg.m
-3
near to Earths surface).
Figure A14 shows the gravitational acceleration
acquired by a Gravitational Spacecraft, in these
media, using Micro-Gravitational thrusters.
In relation to the Interstellar and
Interplanetary medium, the Intergalactic medium
requires the greatest value of
air
( inside the
Micro-Gravitational Thrusters), i.e.,
. This value strongly decreases
when the spacecraft is within the Earths
atmosphere. In this case, it is sufficient
only
4
10 6 . 1
air

10
air
in order to obtain:
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( )
2 4
2
7
11 10
2
10
. 10
20
10 2 . 1
10 67 . 6 10


=
s m
r
V
G a
atm
air

With this acceleration the Gravitational

This value is within the range of values of

( ) 15 . . 10
3
A Eq See < , which can be produced by
means of ELF electric currents through metals as
Aluminum, etc. This means that, in this case, if
convenient, we can replace air inside the GCCs of the
Gravitational Micro-thrusters by metal laminas with
ELF electric currents through them.
Spacecraft can reach about 50000 km/h in a
few seconds. Obviously, the Gravitational
Shielding of the spacecraft will reduce strongly
the inertial effects upon the crew of the
spacecraft, in such way that the inertial effects of
this strong acceleration will not be felt. In
addition, the artificial atmosphere, which is
possible to build around the spacecraft, by means
of gravity control technologies shown in this
article (See Fig.6) and [2], will protect it from the
heating produced by the friction with the Earths
atmosphere. Also, the gravity can be controlled
inside of the Gravitational Spacecraft in order to
maintain a value close to the Earths gravity as
shown in Fig.3.
Finally, it is important to note that a Micro-
Gravitational Thruster does not work outside a
Gravitational Shielding, because, in this case, the
resultant upon the thruster is null due to the
symmetry (See Fig. A15 (a)). Figure A15 (b)
shows a micro-gravitational thruster inside a
Gravitational Shielding. This thruster has 10
Gravitational Shieldings, in such way that the
gravitational acceleration upon the bottom of the
thruster, due to a gravitational mass in front
of the thruster, is where
g
M
0
10
10
a a
air
=
2
0
r M G a
g
= is the gravitational acceleration
acting on the front of the micro-gravitational
thruster. In the opposite direction, the
gravitational acceleration upon the bottom of the
thruster, produced by a gravitational mass ,
is
g
M

( ) 0
2
0
= r GM a
g s


since 0
s
due to the Gravitational Shielding
around the micro-thruster (See Fig. A15 (b)).
Similarly, the acceleration in front of the thruster
is

( ) [ ]
s g air air
r GM a a
2 10
0
10
10
= =

where ( ) [ ]
10
2 10
a r GM
g air
< , since r r > .
Thus, for and we
conclude that . This means that
. Therefore, we can write that the
resultant on the micro-thruster can be expressed
by means of the following relation
2 9
10
. 10

s m a
8
10

2
10
. 10

< s m a
10 10
a a <<

0
10
10
F F R
air
=

Figure A15 (c) shows a Micro-Gravitational
Thruster with 10 Air Gravitational Shieldings (10
GCCs). Thin Metallic laminas are placed after
52
each Air Gravitational Shielding in order to retain
the electric field x V E
b 0
= , produced by metallic
surface behind the semi-spheres. The laminas
with semi-spheres stamped on its surfaces are
connected to the ELF voltage source and the
thin laminas in front of the Air Gravitational
Shieldings are grounded. The air inside this
Micro-Gravitational Thruster is at 300K, 1atm.
0
V
We have seen that the insulation layer of a
GCC can be made up of Acrylic, Mica, etc. Now,
we will design a GCC using Water (distilled
water,
( )
80
2
=
O H r
) and Aluminum semi-
cylinders with radius . Thus,
for , the new value of a is .
Then, we get
mm r 3 . 1
0
=
mm 6 . 0 = mm a 9 . 1 =
( )
( ) 43 10 63 . 11
3
0
2
A m r b
O H r

= =
( ) 44 10 73 . 9
3
A m a b d

= =
and
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 45 1 . 1111
4
1
0
0
0 0 0
2
0 0
2
0
2
A V
r
V r V
b
r V
b
q
E
air r
air r
r
air r
air
O
H
= =
= =
= =

Note that
( )
( ) O H r
O H
r V
E
2
2
0 0

=
and
( )
( ) acrylic r
acrylic
r V
E

0 0
=
Therefore, and are much
smaller than . Note that for the
intensities of and are not
sufficient to produce the ionization effect, which
increases the electrical conductivity.
Consequently, the conductivities of the water and
the acrylic remain . In this way, with
and much smaller than ,
and
( O H
E
2
) )
) )
) )
(acrylic
E
air
E kV V 9
0

( O H
E
2
(acrylic
E
1
. 1

<< m S
( O H
E
2
(acrylic
E
air
E
( )
1
2
<<
O H
,
( )
1 <<
acrylic
, the decrease in
both the gravitational mass of the acrylic and the
gravitational mass of water, according to Eq.A14,
is negligible. This means that only in the air layer
the decrease in the gravitational mass will be
relevant.
Equation A39 gives the electrical
conductivity of the air layer, i.e.,
( ) 46 029 . 0 2
2
1
2
3
2
1
0
A V
a
b
d
E
air
air
=

=
Note that
( ) O H r
r b
2
0
= . Therefore, here the
value of b is larger than in the case of the acrylic.
Consequently, the electrical conductivity of the air
layer will be larger here than in the case of
acrylic.
Substitution of
( ) air
, (rms) and
into Eq. A14, gives
air
E
3
. 2 . 1

= m kg
air

( )
( )
( ) 47 1 10 54 . 4 1 2 1
3
5 . 5
0 20
0
A
f
V
m
m
air i
air g

+ =


For and , the result
is
kV V V 9
max
0 0
= = Hz f 2 =
( )
( )
4 . 8
0

air i
air g
m
m
This shows that, by using water instead of acrylic,
the result is much better.
In order to build the GCC based on the
calculations above (See Fig. A16), take an Acrylic
plate with 885mm X 885m and 2mm thickness,
then paste on it an Aluminum sheet with
895.2mm X 885mm and 0.5mm thickness(note
that two edges of the Aluminum sheet are bent as
shown in Figure A16 (b)). Next, take 342
Aluminum yarns with 884mm length and
2.588mm diameter (wire #10 AWG) and insert
them side by side on the Aluminum sheet. See in
Fig. A16 (b) the detail of fixing of the yarns on the
Aluminum sheet. Now, paste acrylic strips (with
13.43mm height and 2mm thickness) around the
Aluminum/Acrylic, making a box. Put distilled
water (approximately 1 litter) inside this box, up to
a height of exactly 3.7mm from the edge of the
acrylic base. Afterwards, paste an Acrylic lid
(889mm X 889mm and 2mm thickness) on the
box. Note that above the water there is an air
layer with 885mm X 885mm and 7.73mm
thickness (See Fig. A16). This thickness plus the
acrylic lid thickness (2mm) is equal to
mm a b d 73 . 9 = = where
( )
mm r b
O H r
63 . 11
2
0
= =
and mm r a 99 . 1
0
= + = , since mm r 3 . 1
0
= ,
( )
80
2
=
O H r
and mm 6 . 0 = .
Note that the gravitational action of the
electric field , extends itself only up to the
distance , which, in this GCC, is given by the
sum of the Air layer thickness (7.73mm) plus the
thickness of the Acrylic lid (2mm).
air
E
d
Thus, it is ensured the gravitational effect
on the air layer while it is practically nullified in
53
the acrylic sheet above the air layer, since
and
( ) air acrylic
E E <<
( )
1 <<
acrylic
.
With this GCC, we can carry out an
experiment where the gravitational mass of the
air layer is progressively reduced when the
voltage applied to the GCC is increased (or when
the frequency is decreased). A precision balance
is placed below the GCC in order to measure the
mentioned mass decrease for comparison with
the values predicted by Eq. A(47). In total, this
GCC weighs about 6kg; the air layer 7.3grams.
The balance has the following characteristics:
range 0-6kg; readability 0.1g. Also, in order to
prove the Gravitational Shielding Effect, we can
put a sample (connected to a dynamometer)
above the GCC in order to check the gravity
acceleration in this region.
In order to prove the exponential effect
produced by the superposition of the
Gravitational Shieldings, we can take three
similar GCCs and put them one above the other,
in such way that above the GCC 1 the gravity
acceleration will be ; above the GCC2
, and above the GCC3 .
Where
g g =
g g
2
= g g
3
=
is given by Eq. (A47).
It is important to note that the intensity of
the electric field through the air below the GCC is
much smaller than the intensity of the electric
field through the air layer inside the GCC. In
addition, the electrical conductivity of the air
below the GCC is much smaller than the
conductivity of the air layer inside the GCC.
Consequently, the decrease of the gravitational
mass of the air below the GCC, according to
Eq.A14, is negligible. This means that the GCC1,
GCC2 and GCC3 can be simply overlaid, on the
experiment proposed above. However, since it is
necessary to put samples among them in order to
measure the gravity above each GCC, we
suggest a spacing of 30cm or more among them.








































































54
Figure A2 Experimental Set-up 1.




50 mm
R
Foam Board Aluminum foil

2
R

1
R
Rheostat
10 - 90W
Battery 12V
Function Generation
HP3325A

1


2

Pan balance
Dynamometer
Flexible Copper wire
#12 AWG
g g
g g =
Sample
GCC
4
Coupling
Transformer
- 40W
500 - 2W
Flexible Copper wire
#12 AWG

55










Figure A3 The Simplest Gravity Control Cell (GCC).






















15 cm square Aluminum foil
(10.5 microns thickness)
Gum
(Loctite Super Bonder)
17 cm square Foam Board plate
(6mm thickness)
Foam Board
Aluminum foil
FlexibleCopper Wire
#12 AWG
56
C
(a)

C
(b)



Fig. A4 Equivalent Electric Circuits



GC




GC

P
+
r
r
1 i
2 i

p
R

1
R

2
R
R

1


2

1
I
2
I
2 1 3
I I I

+ =

( )
( ) ( )
mm l N
Generator Function r Transforme Coupling
rms A I A I rms mA I
W R Reostat R W R
Battery r DC V W R r
Option
p
i i
42 ; 20 N AWG; 12 # wire diameter; mm - 10 core Air
Battery the from the isolate to
3 ; 3 ; 56
90 10 0 ; 10 5 . 2 ; 40 4
; 1 . 0 ; 12 ; 2 500 ; 2
Output) Voltage High 002 HP3325A( Generator Function
2 1
max
3
max
2
max
1
3
2
2 2 1 1
1
= = =
= =
= = =
< = = <
=

Hz f 2 =
~
Wire #12 AWG

Gravitational
Shielding
+

1 i
r
2 i
=
5
10 23 . 5

R

1
R

r
R
1


2

1
I
2
I
2 1 3
I I I + =
Hz f 2 =
~
Wire #12 AWG
V V R
V V R
p
p
5 min
4 max
10 0 . 4 10
10 1 . 1 0

= =
= =

2
R
cm l 1 =
0.5 2 h =3mm
200 mm
Gravitational
Shielding
Al
#12 AWG
T
l
d
i
e
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

57



0
3 2
4
27
1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
i
r
g
m
f
j
m

+ =

Figure A5 An ELF electric current through a wire, that makes a spherical form as shown above,
reduces the gravitational mass of the wire and the gravity inside sphere at the same proportion
0 i g
m m = (Gravitational Shielding Effect). Note that this spherical formcan be transformed into
n ellipsoidal form or a disc in order to coat, for example, a Gravitational Spacecraft. It is also a
possible to coat with a wire several forms, such as cylinders, cones, cubes, etc. The characteristics
of the wire are expressed by:
r
, , ; j is the electric current density and f is the frequency.
Wire
j
j
ELF electric current






58
Figure A6 Experimental set-up 2.



50 mm
Dynamometer
Flexible Copper wire
#12 AWG
R

1
R
Rheostat
Battery 12V
Function Generation
HP3325A

1


2

Coupling
Transformer




























Rigid Aluminum wire
#14 AWG
Length =28.6 m
R
S
=0.36

2
R
4 - 40W
Flexible Copper wire
#12 AWG

59


Figure A7 Gravitational shielding produced by semi-spheres stamped on the Aluminum
foil - By simply changing the geometry of the surfaceof the Aluminum foil it is possible to
ncrease the working frequency f up to more than 1Hz.

i
~
d
b
a
r
0

V
0
, f
E
air
,
air
Insulation
Gravitational Shielding

r
Aluminum Foil
Air

60


(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)
Figure A8 Method to coat the Aluminum semi-spheres with acrylic ( ) mm r a 6 . 0
0
= = .
(a)Acrylic sheet (A4 format) with 1.5mm thickness and an Aluminum plate (A4) with several
semi-spheres (radius mm r 9 . 0
0
= ) stamped on its surface. (b)A heater is placed below the
Aluminum plate in order to heat the Aluminum. (c)When the Aluminum is sufficiently heated
up, the acrylic sheet and the Aluminum plate are pressed, one against the other (The two D
devices shown in this figure are used in order to impede that the press compresses the acrylic
and the aluminum besides distance a y + ). (d)After some seconds, the press and the heater are
removed, and the device is ready to be used.
y
Heater
Aluminum Plate
Acrylic sheet
Press
=0.6 mm
a =1.5 mm
r
0
=0.9 mm
a =1.5 mm
r
0
=0.9 mm
D D
y + a
61

Figure A9 Experimental Set-up using a GCC subjected to high-voltage
0
V with frequency
Hz f 1 > . Note that in this case, the pan balance is not necessary because the substance of the
Gravitational Shielding is an air layer with thickness d above the acrylic sheet. This is therefore,


more a type of Gravity Control Cell (GCC) with external gravitational shielding.
50 mm
GCC
Acrylic/Aluminum
Dynamometer
Flexible Copper wire
#12 AWG
g g
g g =
Sample
Rheostat
Oscillator
f > 1Hz
Transformer
High-voltage V
0
62
(b)



Figure A10 (a) Equivalent Electric Circuit. (b) Details of the electrical connection with the


Gravitational Shielding




(a)
Aluminum plate. Note that others connection modes (by the top of the device) can produce
destructible interference on the electric lines of the
air
E field.


0
V

d
R
GCC
crylic /Aluminum A

kV V 9
max
0
=
kV V 7 . 2
min
0
=
~
Oscillator
Hz f 1 >
Acrylic
Aluminum
Pin
Connector
(High-voltage)
10kV
wire


63







(a) (b)







(c)






(d)


Figure A11 Geometrical forms with similar effects as those produced by the semi-spherical form (a)
shows the semi-spherical form stamped on the metallic surface; (b) shows the semi-cylindrical form (an
obvious evolution from the semi-spherical form); (c) shows concentric metallic rings stamped on
the metallic surface, an evolution fromsemi-cylindrical form. These geometrical forms produce
the same effect as that of the semi-spherical form, shown in Fig.A11 (a). By using concentric
metallic rings, it is possible to build Gravitational Shieldings around bodies or spacecrafts with
several formats (spheres, ellipsoids, etc); (d) shows a Gravitational Shielding around a Spacecraft
with ellipsoidal form.
Dielectric layer
Gravitational Shielding
Metallic Rings

r
Ellipsoidal metallic base
Oscillator

Transformer
f
V
0

Metallic Rings
Metallic base
E
air
Ionized air

64
t



(a) (b)
Figure A12 Non-solid and Solid Gravitational Shieldings - In the case of the Gravitational
Shielding produced on a solid substance (b), when its molecules go to the imaginary space-time,
he electric field that produces the effect also goes to the imaginary space-time together with
them, because in this case, the substance of the Gravitational Shielding is rigidly connected (by
means of the dielectric) to the metal that produces the electric field. This does not occur in the
case of Air Gravitational Shielding.
E
Metal Dielectric
Solid Gravitational Shielding
(rigidly connected to the dielectric)
Non-solid Gravitational Shielding
Metal
Spacecraft Spacecraft
Dielectric
(rigidly connected to the spacecraft)
E






65




(a)


(b)



2
10
2
10
r
V
G
r
M
G a
igm g

= =

(c)
igure A13 Double Gravitational Shielding and Micro-thrusters (a) Shows a double
ravitational shielding that makes possible to decrease the inertial effects upon the spacecraft
F
g
when it is traveling both in the imaginary space-time and in the real space-time. The solid
Gravitational Shielding also can be obtained by means of an ELF electric current through a metallic
lamina placed between the semi-spheres and the Gravitational Shielding of Air as shown above. (b)
Shows 6 micro-thrusters placed inside a Gravitational Spacecraft, in order to propel the
spacecraft in the directions x, y and z. Note that the Gravitational Thrusters in the spacecraft
must have a very small diameter (of the order of millimeters) because the hole through the
Gravitational Shielding of the spacecraft cannot be large. Thus, these thrusters are in fact Micro-
thrusters. (c) Shows a micro-thruster inside a spacecraft, and in front of a volume V of the
intergalactic medium (IGM). Under these conditions, the spacecraft acquires an acceleration a in
the direction of the volume V.
E
air
Metal Dielectric
Solid Gravitational Shielding
i ELF electric current
Spacecraft Spacecraft
E
rs
Air Gravitational Shielding
Metal Dielectric
A
l
u
m
i
n
u
m
Micro-Gravitational Thruster
r
a
Micro-Gravitational Thruster with 10 gravitational shieldings
Gravitational Spacecraft
VolumeV
of the
Intergallactic
medium
(IGM)
M
g

igm
10
-26
kg.m
-3
Gravitational Shielding
gt
m

66



2
10
2
10
r
V
G
r
M
G a
ism
g

= =
(a)



2
10
2
10
r
V
G
r
M
G a
ipm g

= =
(b)



2
10
2
10
r
V
G
r
M
G a
atm
g

= =

(c)
Figure A14 Gravitational Propulsion using Micro-Gravitational Thruster (a) Gravitational
acceleration produced by a gravitational mass M
g
of the Interstellar Medium. The density of the
nterstellar Medium is about 10
5
times greater than the density of the Intergalactic Medium (b)
ravitational acceleration produced in the Interplanetary Medium. (c) Gravitational acceleration
I
G
produced in the Earths atmosphere. Note that, in this case,
atm
(near to the Earths surface)is about
10
26
times greater than the density of the Intergalactic Medium.
r
a
Micro-Gravitational Thruster with 10 gravitational shieldings
Gravitational Spacecraft
VolumeV
of the
Interstellar
medium
(ISM)
M
g

ism
10
-21
kg.m
-3

r
a
Gravitational Spacecraft
VolumeV
of the
Interplanetary
medium
(IPM)
M
g

ipm
10
-20
kg.m
-3

r
a
Gravitational Spacecraft
VolumeV
of the
Earths
atmospheric

M
g

atm
1.2kg.m
-3

Gravitational Shielding
Gravitational Shielding
Gravitational Shielding
Micro-Gravitational Thruster with 10 gravitational shieldings
Micro-Gravitational Thruster with 10 gravitational shieldings


67





(a)

(b)


(c)
Figure A15 Dynamics and Structure of the Micro-Gravitational Thrusters - (a) The Micro-Gravitational
Thrusters do not work outside the Gravitational Shielding, because, in this case, the resultant upon the thruster is
null due to the symmetry. (b) The Gravitational Shielding ( )
8
10

s
reduces strongly the intensities of the
gravitational forces acting on the micro-gravitational thruster, except obviously, through the hole in the
gravitational shielding. (c) Micro-Gravitational Thruster with 10 Air Gravitational Shieldings (10GCCs). The
grounded metallic laminas are placed so as to retain the electric field produced by metallic surface behind the
semi-spheres.
Mica
Metal
1 GCC

Air Gravitational Shielding
10mm
~400 mm
Gravitational Shielding
Micro-Gravitational Thruster
with 10 gravitational shieldings
F
1
=
air
F
0
S
1
a
0
=
s
(-GM
g
/r
2
)
F
0
= F
0
=> R = (F
0
F
2
) + (F
1
F
1
) + (F
2
F
0
) = 0
ELF
~
V
0
Hole in the Gravitational Shielding

Grounded Metallic laminas
M
g
M
g
r r
S
2
F
0
F
0
F
1
=
air
F
0
F
2
=
air
2
F
0
8
10

a
0
=- GM
g
/r
2

0
10
10
F F R
air
=
M
g
r r
M
g
x
F
2
=
air
2
F
0
a
10
=
air
10
a
0
a
0

68



GCC Cross-section Front view
(a)


GCC Cross-section Side View
(b)
Fig. A16 A GCC using distilled Water.
In total this GCC weighs about 6kg; the air layer 7.3 grams. The balance has the
following characteristics: Range 0 6kg; readability 0.1g. The yarns are inserted
side by side on the Aluminum sheet. Note the detail of fixing of the yarns on the
Aluminum sheet.
Air layer
Distilled Water
0.885 m
Balance
Transformer
g= g
g
Sample
Any type of material; any mass
m
g (air)
= m
i (air)
~
2 Hz
V
0
max
=9 kV
Acrylic Box
(2mm thickness)
Aluminum sheet
(0.5 mm thickness)
342 Aluminum yarns (#10 AWG)
(2.558 mm diameter; 0.884 mm length)
2 mm
2 mm
7.73 mm
a =1.9 mm
1.8 mm
d =9.73 mm
3.2 mm
Balance
0.885 m
0.884 m
Aluminum sheet
(0.5 mm thickness)
342 Aluminum yarns (#10 AWG)
(2.558 mm diameter; 0.884 mm length)
1mm 1mm

0.5 mm
3.6mm
1.5mm
0.885 m

69





Fig. A17 Experimental set-up. In order to prove the exponential effect produced by the
superposition of the Gravitational Shieldings, we can take three similar GCCs and put them one above
the other, in such way that above the GCC 1 the gravity acceleration will be g g = ; above the
GCC2 g g
2
= , and above the GCC3 g g
3
= . Where is given by Eq. (A47). The arrangement
above has been designed for values of g m
g
13 < and up to -9 or kg m
g
1 < and up to -2 .
Balance
140 cm
5Kg
70
cm
Balance
5Kg
70
cm
Balance
5Kg
70
cm
m
g
m
g
m
g
Sample
Any type of material; any mass
GCC 3
GCC 2
GCC 1
g g =
g g
2
=
g g
3
=
g


70

APPENDIX B: A DIDACTIC GCC USING A BATTERY OF CAPACITORS

Let us now show a new type of GCC - easy to
be built with materials and equipments that also can
be obtained with easiness.
Consider a battery of parallel plate
capacitors with capacitances , , ,, ,
connected in parallel. The voltage applied is V ;
n
1
C
2
C
3
C
n
C
A
is the area of each plate of the capacitors and d is
the distance between the plates;
( ) water r
is the
relative permittivity of the dielectric (water). Then the
electric charge on the plates of the capacitors is
given by
q

( )
( )
( ) ( ) 1 ...
0 3 2 1
B V
d
A
n V C C C C q
water r n
= + + + + =


In Fig. I we show a GCC with two capacitors
connected in parallel. It is easy to see that the
electric charge density
0
on each area az A =
0

of the edges B of the thin laminas (z is the thickness
of the edges B and a is the length of them, see
Fig.B2) is given by
( )
( ) ( ) 2
0
0
0
B V
azd
A
n
A
q
water r
= =
Thus, the electric field E between the edges B is
( )
( )
( )
( ) 3 2
2
0
0
B V
azd
A
n E
air r
water r
air r

= =

Since , we can write that
y x
L L A =

( )
( )
( ) 4 2 B V
azd
L L
n E
y x
air r
water r

Assuming
( )
81 =
water r

****
(bidistilled
water);
( )
1
air r
(vacuum 10
-4
Torr; 300K); 2 = n ;
; ; and
we obtain
m L L
y x
30 0. = = m a 12 0. = mm z 1 0. =
mm d 10 =

V E
8
10 43 2 = .

For , the electric field is V V 220 =
max


****
It is easy to see that by substituting the water for
Barium Titanate (BaTiO
3
) the dimensions of the
capacitors can be strongly reduced due to
y x
L L ,
( )
1200
BaTiO3
=
r
.


m V E / .
max
10
10 3 5 =

Therefore, if the frequency of the wave voltage
is Hz f 60 = ,( ) f 2 = , we have that
. It is known that the electric
conductivity of the air,
1 9
10 3 3

= m S
air
. .
air
, at 10
-4
Torr and 300K,
is much smaller than this value, i.e.,
air air
<<
Under this circumstance( ) << , we can
substitute Eq. 15 and 34 into Eq. 7. Thus, we get

( ) ( )
( )
( ) 5 1 10 68 . 9 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
0
2
4
57
0
2
4
2
3
B m
E
m
E
c
m
air i
air
air i
air
air air
air g

+ =

+ =

The density of the air at 10
-4
Torr and 300K is
3 7
10 5 1

= m kg
air
. .
Thus, we can write

( )
( )
( ) 6 1 10 3 . 4 1 2 1
4 43
B E
m
m
air i
air g

+ =
= =

Substitution of E for into
this equation gives
m V E / .
max
10
10 3 5 =

2 1.
max


This means that, in this case, the gravitational
shielding produced in the vacuum between the
edges B of the thin laminas can reduce the local
gravitational acceleration down to g
g g 2 . 1
1

Under these circumstances, the weight, g m P
g
+ = ,
of any body just above the gravitational shielding
becomes

g m g m P
g g
2 1
1
. = =



71




Vertical Cross Section











Figure B1 Gravity Control Cell (GCC) using a battery of capacitors. According to Eq. 7 , the
electric field, E, through the air at 10
-4
Torr; 300K, in the vacuum chamber, produces a gravitational
shielding effect. The gravity acceleration above this gravitational shielding is reduced to g where
<1.
V (60Hz)
V
max
=220V
Gravitational
Shielding

r (air)
g
1
= g
g
Vacuum Chamber
(INOX)
(10
- 4
Torr, 300K)
< 1
E
z
Parallel plate
Capacitors
Dielectric:
Bidistilled Water

r (water)
=81
L
x

d =10 mm
q =(C
1
+C
2
+...+C
n
) V =
= n [
r (water)
/
r (air)
] [A/A
0
] V / d

r (water)
=81 ;
r (air)
1

E =[q/A
0
] /
r (air)

0
=n [
r (water)
/
r (air)
] [A/A
0
] V / d

A is the area of the plates of the capacitors and A
0
the
cross section area of the edges B of the thin laminas (z is
the thickness of the edges).

B B
Encapsulating
(EPOXI)
Insulating holder
Edge B of the
Thin Lamina
(0.1mmthickness)
Lamina




72



Top view
Figure B2 The gravitational shielding produced between the thin laminas.

a
a
L
x

L
y

E
A
0
=a z ; A =L
x
L
y

EPOXI
Vacuum Chamber
Gravitational Shielding
Lamina
Lamina
Thin laminas
Thickness =z
Length =a

73


+ P
0
P


Figure B3 Experimental arrangement with a GCC using battery of capacitors. By means of this
set-up it is possible to check the weight of the sample even when it becomes negative.

Sample
Any type of material
Any mass
g
1
= g <1
Elementar Motor
Gravitational
Shielding
GCC
GCC
m
g
g
1
= - g m
g

g



74

REFERENCES
1. DeAquino, F. 2010. Mathematical Foundations
of the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity.
Pacific J ournal of Science and Technology.
11(1), pp.173-232.

2. Freire, G. F. O and Diniz, A. B. (1973)
Ondas Eletromagnticas, Ed. USP,p.26.

3. Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968)
Physics, J . Willey & Sons, Portuguese
Version, Ed. USP, p.1118.

4. Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo,
McGraw-Hill, p.255 and 269.

5. GE Technical Publications (2007),
80044 F20T12/C50/ECO, GE Ecolux T12.

6. Aplin, K. L. (2000) PhD thesis, The
University of Reading, UK

7. Aplin K. L (2005) Rev. Sci. Instrum. 76,
104501.

8. Beiser, A. (1967) Concepts of Modern
Physics, McGraw-Hill,Portuguese version
(1969) Ed. Polgono, S.Paulo, p.362-363.

9. Hayt, W. H. (1974), Engineering
Electromagnetics, McGraw-Hill.
Portuguese version (1978) Ed. Livros
Tcnicos e Cientficos Editora S.A, RJ ,
Brasil. P.146.

10. Benjegerdes, R. et al.,(2001) Proceedings
of the 2001Particle Accelerator Conference,
Chicago.
http://epaper.kek.jp/p01/PAPERS/TOAB009.PDF

11. Gourlay, S. et al., (2000) Fabrication
and Test of a 14T, Nb3Sn
Superconducting Racetrack Dipole
Magnetic, IEE Trans on Applied
Superconductivity, p.294.

12. BPE soft, Extreme High Altitude
Conditions Calculator.
http://bpesoft.com/s/wleizero/xhac/?M=p

13. Handbook of Chemistry and Physics,
77
th
ed.1996.

14. Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968)
Physics, J . Willey & Sons,
Portuguese Version, Ed. USP, p.1118.



15. Zhan, G.D et al. (2003) Appl. Phys. Lett.
83, 1228.

16. Davidson, K. & Smoot, G. (2008)
Wrinkles in Time. N. Y: Avon, 158-163.

17. Silk, J oseph. (1977) Big Bang. N.Y,
Freeman, 299.

18. J afelice, L.C. and Opher, R. (1992). The
origin of intergalactic magnetic fields
due to extragalactic jets. RAS.
http://adsabs.harvard.edu/cgi-bin/nph-
bib query? Bib code =1992 MNRAS.
257. 135J . Retrieved 2009-06-19.

19. Wadsley, J ., et al. (2002). The Universe
in Hot Gas. NASA.
http://antwrp.gsfc.nasa.gov/apod/ap
020820. html. Retrieved 2009-06-19.



Physical Foundations of Quantum Psychology

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2007 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.

Abstract: The existence of imaginary mass associated to the neutrino is already well-known.
Although its imaginary mass is not physically observable, its square is. This amount is found
experimentally to be negative. Recently, it was shown that quanta of imaginary mass exist
associated to the electron and the photon too. These imaginary masses have unusual
properties that violate the Parity Conservation Principle. The non-conservation of the parity is
also found in the weak interactions, and possibly can be explained by means of the existence of
the imaginary masses. Also protons and neutrons would have imaginary masses associated to
them and, in this way, atoms and molecules would also have imaginary masses directly
proportional to their atomic and molecular masses. The Parity Conservation Principle holds that
the material particles are not able to distinguish their right from their left. The non-conservation
of the parity would necessarily imply capability of "choice". Thus, as the particles with imaginary
mass don't conserve the parity, they would have the elementary capability of choosing between
their right or left. Where there is choice isnt there also psychism, by definition? This
fundamental discovery shows that, in some way, the consciousnesses are related to the
imaginary masses. This fact, make it possible to redefine Psychology on a Quantum Physics
basis.

Key words: Quantum Psychology, Quantized Fields, Unification and Mass Relations,
Quantum Mechanics, Bose-Einstein Condensation, Origin of the Universe.
PACs: 03.70.+k; 12.10.Kt; 14.80.Cp; 03.65.-w; 03.75.Nt; 98.80.Bp.

1. INTRODUCTION

In the last decades it has become evident that the theoretical foundations of
Natural Sciences are based on Physics. Todays Chemistry is completely based on
Quantum Mechanics, Quantum Statistics, Thermodynamics and Kinetic Physics. Also
Biology becomes progressively based on Physics, as more and more biological
phenomena are being described on the basis of Quantum Physics. Modern Biophysics
is now considered a branch of Physics and no longer a secondary part of Biology and
Physiology. As regards Psychology, there are recently several authors making use of
Quantum Physics in order to explain psychic phenomena [1,2].
The idea of psyche associated with matter dates back to the pre-Socratic period
and is usually called panpsychism. Remnants of organized panpsychism may be found
in the Uno of Parmenides or in Heracleituss Divine Flux. Scholars of Miletuss school
were called hylozoists, that is, those who believe that matter is alive. More recently,
we will find the panpsychistic thought in Spinoza, Whitehead and Teilhard de Chardin,
among others. The latter one admitted the existence of proto-conscious properties at
level of elementary particles.
Generally, the people believe that there is some type of psyche associated to the
animals, and some biologists agree that even very simple animals like the ameba and
the sea anemone are endowed with psychism. This led several authors to consider the
possibility of the psychic phenomena to be described in a theory based on Physics
[3,4,5,6].
This work presents a possible theoretical foundation for Psychology based on
Quantum Physics, starting from discoveries published in a recent article [7], where it is
shown that there is a quantum of imaginary mass associated to the electron, which
would be equivalent to an elementary particle that does not conserves the parity. Thus,
besides its inertial mass the electron would have an imaginary mass that would have
elementary capacity of choice. The theory here presented describes the structures
2
and the interaction between these imaginary particles and also explain their relations
with the matter on all levels, from the atom to man. In addition, it gives us a better
understanding of life and a more complete cosmological view, which lead us to
understand our relationship with ourselves, with others, with the Universe and with
God.


2. THEORY

It was shown [7] that quanta of imaginary mass exist associated to the
electron and the photon and that these imaginary masses would have psychic
properties (elementary capacity of choice). Thus, we can say that, besides its
inertial mass, the electron would have a psychic mass, given by
( ) ( )
( ) 01
3
4
2 3
4
i m i
c
hf
m m
electron real i
electron
electron imaginary g electron
=

= =

Where is the real inertial mass of the electron. In the

case of the photons, it was shown that the imaginary gravitational mass of the
photon is:
( )
kg m
electron real i
31
10 11 9

= .
( )
i
c
hf
m
photon imaginary g

=
2
3
4
. Therefore, the psychic mass associated
to a photon with frequency is expressed by the following equation: f
( )
( ) 02
3
4
2
i
c
hf
m m
photon imaginary g photon

= =

The equation of quantization of mass [7], in the generalized form is expressed
by: . Thus, we can also conclude that the psychic
mass is also quantized, due to
( ) ( )(min imagynary g imaginary g
m n m
2
=
)
) (imaginary g
m m =

, i.e.,
( )
( ) 03
2
min
= m n m
Where
( )
( )
( )
( ) 04
3
4
2
3
4
i m i c hf m
real i min min min
= =

The minimum quantum of real inertial mass in the Universe, , is given
by [7]:
( )min real i
m
( )
( ) 05 10 9 3 8 3
73
kg cd h m
real i

= = .
max min

By analogy to Eq. (01), the expressions of the psychic masses associated to the
proton and the neutron are respectively given by:

( )
( )
( )
( ) 06
3
4
2
3
4
i m i c hf m m
proton real i proton proton imaginary g proton
= = =

( )
( )
( )
( ) 07
3
4
2
3
4
i m i c hf m m
neutron real i neutron neutron imaginary g neutron
= = =

3
Where and are respectively the frequencies of the DeBroglies
waves associated to the proton and the neutron.
proton
f
neutron
f
Thus, from a quantum viewpoint, the psychic particles are similar to the
material particles, so that we can use the Quantum Mechanics to describe the
psychic particles. In this case, by analogy to the material particles, a particle
with psychic mass will be described by the following expressions:

m

( )
( ) 09
08


h
r
h
r
=
=
E
k p

Where V m p
r
r

is the momentum carried by the wave and its energy;

E

2 = k
r
is the propagation number and V m h

=

the wavelength and

f 2 = its cyclic frequency.
The variable quantity that characterizes DeBroglies waves is called Wave
Function, usually indicated by . The wave function associated to a material
particle describes the dynamic state of the particle: its value at a particular point
x, y, z, t is related to the probability of finding the particle in that place and
instant. Although does not have a physical interpretation, its square
2

or ) calculated for a particular point x, y, z, t is proportional to the
probability of experimentally finding the particle in that place and instant.

Since is proportional to the probability
2
P of finding the particle
described by , the integral of
2
on the whole space must be finite
inasmuch as the particle is someplace. Therefore, if
( ) 10 0 V
2
=

+

d
The interpretation is that the particle does not exist. However, if
( ) 11 V
2
=

+

d
the particle will be everywhere simultaneously (Omnipresence).
The wave function corresponds, as we know, to the displacement
of the undulatory motion of a rope. However,
y
as opposed to , is not a
measurable quantity and can, hence, be a complex quantity. For this reason, it
is admitted that is described in the
y
x -direction by
( )( )
( ) 12
2 px Et h i
Be

=

This equation is the mathematical description of the wave associated with a free
material particle, with total energy E and momentum , moving in the direction p
x + .
As concerns the psychic particle, the variable quantity characterizing
psyche waves will also be called wave function, denoted by

( to differentiate
it from the material particle wave function), and, by analogy with equation Eq.
(12), expressed by:


4
( )( )
( ) 13
2
0
x p t E h i
e

=


If an experiment involves a large number of identical particles, all described by
the same wave function , real density of mass of these particles in x, y, z,
t is proportional to the corresponding value
2
(
2
is known as density of
probability. If is complex then
*
=
2
. Thus, ). Similarly,
in the case of psychic particles, the density of psychic mass,
*
. =
2

, in x, y, z, will
be expressed by . It is known that is always real and
positive while
*

=
2

V m

= is an imaginary quantity. Thus, as the modulus of an
imaginary number is always real and positive, we can transform the proportion
, in equality in the following form:
2


( ) 14
2

= k
Where is a proportionality constant (real and positive) to be determined. k
In Quantum Mechanics we have studied the Superpositon Principle,
which affirms that, if a particle (or system of particles) is in a dynamic state
represented by a wave function
1
and may also be in another dynamic state
described by then, the general dynamic state of the particle may be
described by , where is a linear combination (superposition) of and
, i.e.,
2

( ) 15
2 2 1 1
+ = c c
Complex constants e respectively indicate the percentage of dynamic
state, represented by e in the formation of the general dynamic state
described by .
1
c
2
c
1

In the case of psychic particles (psychic bodies, consciousness, etc.), by

analogy, if ,
1

2
,..., refer to the different dynamic states the psychic
particle assume, then its general dynamic state may be described by the wave
function , given by:
n

( ) 16
2 2 1 1 n n
c c c

+ + + = ...
The state of superposition of wave functions is, therefore, common for both
psychic and material particles. In the case of material particles, it can be
verified, for instance, when an electron changes from one orbit to another.
Before effecting the transition to another energy level, the electron carries out
virtual transitions [8]. A kind of relationship with other electrons before
performing the real transition. During this relationship period, its wave function
remains scattered by a wide region of the space [9] thus superposing the
wave functions of the other electrons. In this relationship the electrons mutually
influence each other, with the possibility of intertwining their wave functions
1
.
When this happens, there occurs the so-called Phase Relationship according to
quantum-mechanics concept.




1
Since the electrons are simultaneously waves and particles, their wave aspects will interfere with each
other; besides superposition, there is also the possibility of occurrence of intertwining of their wave
functions.
5
In the electrons virtual transition mentioned before, the listing of all the
possibilities of the electrons is described, as we know, by Schrdingers wave equation.
Otherwise, it is general for material particles. By analogy, in the case of psychic
particles, we may say that the listing of all the possibilities of the psyches involved in
the relationship will be described by Schrdingers equation for psychic case, i.e.,
0
2
2
2
= +

h
p
Because the wave functions are capable of intertwining themselves, the quantum
systems may penetrate each other, thus establishing an internal relationship where all
of them are affected by the relationship, no longer being isolated systems but
becoming an integrated part of a larger system. This type of internal relationship, which
exists only in quantum systems, was called Relational Holism [10].
It is a proven quantum fact that a wave function may collapse, and that, at this
moment, all the possibilities that it describes are suddenly expressed in reality. This
means that, through this process, particles can be suddenly materialized. Similarly, the
collapse of the psychic wave function must suddenly also express in reality all the
possibilities described by it. This is, therefore, a point of decision in which there occurs
the compelling need of realization of the psychic form. Thus, this is moment in which
the content of the psychic form realizes itself in the space-time. For an observer in
space-time, something is real when it is under a matter or radiation form. Therefore, the
content of the psychic form may realize itself in space-time exclusively under the form
of radiation, that is, it does not materialize. This must occur when the Materialization
Condition is not satisfied, i.e., when the content of the psychic form is undefined
(impossible to be defined by its own psychic) or it does not contain enough psychic
mass to materialize
2
the respective psychic contents.
Nevertheless, in both cases, there must always be a production of virtual
photons to convey the psychic interaction to the other psychic particles, according to
the quantum field theory, only through this type of quanta will interaction be conveyed,
since it has an infinite reach and may be either attractive or repulsive, just as
electromagnetic interaction which, as we know, is conveyed by the exchange of
virtual photons.
If electrons, protons and neutrons have psychic mass, then we can infer that the
psychic mass of the atoms are Phase Condensates
3
. In the case of the molecules the
situation is similar. More molecular mass means more atoms and consequently, more
psychic mass. In this case the phase condensate also becomes more structured
because the great amount of elementary psyches inside the condensate requires, by
stability reasons, a better distribution of them. Thus, in the case of molecules with very
large molecular masses (macromolecules) it is possible that their psychic masses
already constitute the most organized shape of a Phase Condensate, called Bose-
Einstein Condensate
4
.


2
By this we mean not only materialization proper but also the movement of matter to realize its psychic
content (including radiation).
3
Ice and NaCl crystals are common examples of imprecisely-structured phase condensates. Lasers, super
fluids, superconductors and magnets are examples of phase condensates more structured.
4
Several authors have suggested the possibility of the Bose-Einstein condensate occurring in the brain,
and that it might be the physical base of memory, although they have not been able to find a suitable
mechanism to underpin such a hypothesis. Evidences of the existence of Bose-Einstein condensates in
living tissues abound (Popp, F.A Experientia, Vol. 44, p.576-585; Inaba, H., New Scientist, May89, p.41;
Rattermeyer, M and Popp, F. A. Naturwissenschaften, Vol.68, N5, p.577.)

6
The fundamental characteristic of a Bose-Einstein condensate is, as we
know, that the various parts making up the condensed system not only behave
as a whole but also become a whole, i.e., in the psychic case, the various
consciousnesses of the system become a single consciousness with psychic
mass equal to the sum of the psychic masses of all the consciousness of the
condensate. This obviously, increases the available knowledge in the system
since it is proportional to the psychic mass of the consciousness. This unity
confers an individual character to this type of consciousness. For this reason,
from now on they will be called Individual Material Consciousness.
It derives from the above that most bodies do not possess individual
material consciousness. In an iron rod, for instance, the cluster of elementary
psyches in the iron molecules does not constitute Bose-Einstein condensate;
therefore, the iron rod does not have an individual consciousness. Its
consciousness is consequently, much more simple and constitutes just a phase
condensate imprecisely structured made by the consciousness of the iron
atoms.
The existence of consciousnesses in the atoms is revealed in the
molecular formation, where atoms with strong mutual affinity (their
consciousnesses) combine to form molecules. It is the case, for instance of the
water molecules, in which two Hydrogen atoms join an Oxygen atom. Well, how
come the combination between these atoms is always the same: the same
grouping and the same invariable proportion? In the case of molecular
combinations the phenomenon repeats itself. Thus, the chemical substances
either mutually attract or repel themselves, carrying out specific motions for this
reason. It is the so-called Chemical Affinity. This phenomenon certainly results
from a specific interaction between the consciousnesses. From now on, it will
be called Psychic Interaction.
Mutual Affinity is a dimensionless psychic quantity with which we are
familiar and of which we have perfect understanding as to its meaning. The
degree of Mutual Affinity, A, in the case of two consciousnesses, respectively
described by e , must be correlated to e
1

2
1

2
2

5
. Only a simple
algebraic form fills the requirements of interchange of the indices, the product

( ) 17
1 2 2 1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
A A A = = = =
, ,
. .

In the above expression, A is due to the product will be always
positive. From equations (17) and (14) we get
2
2
2
1
.
(18
2
2
1
1 2
2 1
2 2
2
2
1
V
m
V
m
k k A


= = = . )





5
Quantum Mechanics tells us that does not have a physical interpretation nor a simple meaning and
also it cannot be experimentally observed. However such restriction does not apply to , which is
known as density of probability and represents the probability of finding the body, described by the wave
function , in the point x, y, z at the moment t. A large value of means a strong possibility to find
the body, while a small value of means a weak possibility to find the body.

7
The psychic interaction can be described starting from the psychic mass
because the psychic mass is the source of the psychic field. Basically, the
psychic mass is gravitational mass, since
) (imaginary g
m m =

. In this way, the

equations of the gravitational interaction are also applied to the Psychic
Interaction. That is, we can use Einsteins General Relativity equations, given
by:
( ) ( ) 19
8
2
1
4
T T
c
G
R
k
i
k
i
k
i

=
in order to describe the Psychic Interaction. In this case, the expression of the
energy-momentum tensor, , must have the following form [11]:
k
i
T
( ) 20
2 k
i
k
i
c T

=
The psychic mass density,

, is a imaginary quantity. Thus, in order to
homogenize the above equation it is necessary to put

because, as we
know, the module of an imaginary number is always real and positive.
Making on the transition to Classical Mechanics [12] one can verify that
Eqs. (19) are reduced to:
( ) 21 4

= G
This is, therefore, the equation of the psychic field in nonrelativistic Mechanics.
With respect to its form, it is similar to the equation of the gravitational field, with
the difference that now, instead of the density of gravitational mass we have the
density of psychic mass. Then, we can write the general solution of Eq. (21), in
the following form:
( ) 22
2

=
r
dV
G

This equation expresses, with nonrelativistic approximation, the potential of the
psychic field of any distribution of psychic mass.
Particularly, for the potential of the field of only one particle with psychic
mass , we get:
1
m
( ) 23
1
r
m G

=
Then the force produced by this field upon another particle with psychic mass
is
2
m
( ) 24
2
2 1
2 21 12
r
m m
G
r
m F F


=

= =
r r

By comparing equations (24) and (18) we obtain
(25
2 2
2 1
21 12
)
r k
V V
A G F F = =

r r

In the vectorial form the above equation is written as follows
( ) 26
2 2
2 1
21 12

r k
V V
GA F F = =

r r

Versor has the direction of the line connecting the mass centers (psychic
mass) of both particles and oriented from to .
1
m
2
m
In general, we may distinguish and quantify two types of mutual affinity:
positive and negative (aversion). The occurrence of the first type is synonym of
8
psychic attraction, (as in the case of the atoms in the water molecule) while the
aversion is synonym of repulsion. In fact, Eq. (26) shows that the forces
12
F
r
and
21
F
r
are attractive, if A is positive (expressing positive mutual affinity
between the two psychic bodies), and repulsive if A is negative (expressing
negative mutual affinity between the two psychic bodies). Contrary to the
interaction of the matter, where the opposites attract themselves here, the
opposites repel themselves.
A method and device to obtain images of psychic bodies have been
previously proposed [13]. By means of this device, whose operation is based on
the gravitational interaction and the piezoelectric effect, it will be possible to
observe psychic bodies.
Expression (18) can be rewritten in the following form:
( ) 27
2
2
1
1 2
V
m
V
m
k A

=
The psychic masses and are imaginary quantities. However, the product
is a real quantity. One can then conclude from the previous expression
that the degree of mutual affinity between two consciousnesses depends
basically on the densities of their psychic masses, and that:
1
m
2
m
2 1
m m .

1) If and then (positive mutual affinity between them) 0
1
>

m 0
2
>

m 0 > A
2) If and then (positive mutual affinity between them) 0
1
<

m 0
2
<

m 0 > A
3) If and then 0
1
>

m 0
2
<

m 0 < A (negative mutual affinity between them)

4) If and then 0
1
<

m 0
2
>

m 0 < A (negative mutual affinity between them)

In this relationship, such as occurs in the case of material particles (virtual
transition of the electrons previously mentioned), the consciousnesses interact
mutually, intertwining or not their wave functions. When this happens, there
occurs the so-called Phase Relationship according to quantum-mechanics
concept. Otherwise a Trivial Relationship takes place.
The psychic forces such as the gravitational forces, must be very weak
when we consider the interaction between two particles. However, in spite of
the subtleties, those forces stimulate the relationship of the consciousnesses
with themselves and with the Universe (Eq.26).
From all the preceding, we perceive that Psychic Interaction unified with
matter interactions, constitutes a single Law which links things and beings
together and, in a network of continuous relations and exchanges, governs the
Universe both in its material and psychic aspects. We can also observe that in
the interactions the same principle reappears always identical. This unity of
principle is the most evident expression of monism in the Universe.









9

3. UNIFIED COSMOLOGY

In traditional Cosmology, the Universe arises from a great explosion
where everything that exists would be initially concentrated in a minuscule
particle with the size of a proton and with a gigantic mass equal to the mass of
the Universe. However, the origin this tiny particle is not explained, nor is the
reason for its critical volume.
This critical volume denotes knowledge of what would happen with the
Universe starting from that initial condition, a fact that points towards the
existence of a Creator.
It was shown that a wave function may collapse and, at this moment, all
the possibilities that it describes are suddenly expressed in reality. This means
that, through this process, particles can be suddenly materialized. This is a
materialization process which can explain the materialization of the Universe.
That is, the Primordial Universe would have arisen at the exact moment in
which the Primordial Wave Function collapsed (Initial Instant) realizing the
content of the psychic form generated at the consciousness of the Creator when
He thought to create the Universe.
The psychic form described by this primordial wave function must have
been generated in a consciousness with a psychic mass much greater than that
needed to materialize the Universe (material and psychic).
This giant consciousness, in its turn, would not only be the greatest of all
consciousnesses in the Universe but also the substratum of everything that
exists and, obviously, everything that exists would be entirely contained within
it, including all the spacetime.
Based on General Theory of Relativity and recent cosmological
observations, it is known today that the Universe occupies a space of positive
curvature. This space, as we known, is closed in itself, its volume is finite but,
clearly understood, the space has no frontiers, it is unlimited. Thus, if the
consciousness we refer to contains all the space, its volume is necessarily
infinite, consequently having an infinite psychic mass.
This means that It contains all the existing psychic mass and, therefore,
any other consciousness that may exist will contained in It. Hence, we may
conclude that It is the Supreme Consciousness and that there no other equal to
It: It is unique.
The manifestation of the knowledge or auto-accessible knowledge in a
consciousness should be related to its quantity of psychic mass. In the
Supreme Consciousness, whose psychic mass is infinite, the manifestation of
the knowledge is total, and as such, necessarily, It should be omniscient. In the
elementary psyche
( )
( )
min
m most of the knowledge should be in latent state.
Being omniscient, the Supreme Conscience knows evidently, how to formulate
well-defined mental images and with sufficiently psychic masses in order to
materialize their contents (Materialization Condition). Consequently, It can
materialize everything which It wants (Omnipotence).
Since the Supreme Consciousness occupies all the space, we can
conclude that It cannot be displaced by another consciousness, not even by
Itself. Therefore, the Supreme Consciousness is immovable.
As Augustine says (Gen. Ad lit viii, 20), "The Creator Spirit moves Himself
neither by time, nor by place."
10
Thomas Aquinas also had already considered Creator's immobility as
necessary:
From this we infer that it is necessary that the God that moves everything is
immovable. (Summa Theologica).
On the other hand, since the Supreme Consciousness contains all the
space-time, It should contain obviously, all the time. More explicit, for the
Supreme Consciousness, past, present and future are an eternal present, and
the time does not flow as it flows for us.
Within this framework, when we talk about the Creation of the Universe,
the use of the verb to create means that something that was not came into
being, thus presupposing the concept of time flow. For the Supreme
Consciousness, however, the instant of Creation is mixed up with all other
times, consequently there being no before or after the Creation and, thus,
the following questions like What did the Supreme Consciousness do before
Creation?
We can also infer from the above that the existence of the Supreme
Consciousness has no defined limit (beginning and end), which confers upon It
the unique characteristic of uncreated and eternal.
Being eternal, Its wave function
SC
shall never collapse. On the other
hand, for having an infinite psychic mass, the value of
SC
will always be infinite
and, hence, in agreement with Eq. (11), the Supreme Consciousness is
simultaneously everywhere, that is, It is omnipresent.
All these characteristics of the Supreme Consciousness (infinite, unique,
uncreated, eternal, omnipresent, omniscient and omnipotent) coincide with
those traditionally ascribed to God by most religions.
The option of the Supreme Consciousness to materialize the primordial
Universe into a critical volume denotes the knowledge of what was would
happen in the Universe starting from that initial condition. Therefore, It knew
how the Universe would behave under already existing laws. Consequently, the
laws were not created for the Universe and, hence, are not Natures laws or
laws placed on Nature by God, as written by Descartes. They already existed
as an intrinsic part of the Supreme Consciousness; Thomas Aquinas had a very
clear understanding about this. He talks about the Eternal Law which exists
in Gods mind and governs the whole Universe.
The Supreme Consciousness had all freedom to choose the initial
conditions of the Universe, but opted for the concentration in a critical volume
so that the evolution of the Universe would proceed in the most convenient form
for the purpose It had in mind and in accordance with the laws inherent in Its
own nature. This reasoning then answers Einsteins famous question: What
level of choice would God have had when building the Universe?
Apparently, Newton was the first one to notice the Divine option. In his
book Optiks, he gives us a perfect view of how he imagined the creation of the
Universe:
It seems possible to me that God, in the beginning, gave form to matter in
solid, compacted particles[] in the best manner possible to contribute to the
purpose He had in mind
With what purpose did the Supreme Consciousness create the Universe?
This question seems to be difficult to answer. Nevertheless, if we admit the
Supreme Consciousnesss primordial desire to procreate, i.e., to generate
11
individual consciousnesses from Itself so that the latter could evolve and
manifest Its same creating attributes, then we can infer that, in order for them to
evolve, such consciousness would need a Universe, and this might have been
the main reason for its creation. Therefore, the origin of the Universe would be
related to the generation of said consciousness and, consequently, the
materialization of the primordial Universe must have taken place at the same
epoch when the Supreme Consciousness decided to individualize the
postulated consciousness, hereinafter called Primordial Consciousness.
For having been directly individualized from the Supreme Consciousness,
the primordial consciousness certainly contained in themselves, although in a
latent state, all the possibilities of the Supreme Consciousness, including the
germ of independent will, which enables original starting points to be
established. However, in spite of the similarity to Supreme Consciousness, the
primordial consciousness could not have the understanding of themselves. This
self-understanding only arises with the creative mental state that such
consciousnesses can only reach by evolution.
Thus, in the first evolutionary period, the primordial consciousness must
have remained in total unconscious state, this being then the beginning of an
evolutionary pilgrimage from unconsciousness to superconsciousness.
The evolution of the primordial consciousness in this unconsciousness
period takes place basically through psychic relationship among them
(superposition of psychic wave functions, having or not intertwining). Thus, the
speed at which they evolved was determined by what they obtained in these
relationships.
After the origin of the first planets, some of them came to develop
favorable conditions for the appearance of macromolecules. These
macromolecules, as we have shown, may have a special type of consciousness
formed by a Bose-Einstein condensate (Individual Material Consciousness). In
this case, since the molecular masses of the macromolecules are very large,
they will have individual material consciousness of large psychic mass and,
therefore, access to a considerable amount of information in its own
consciousness. Consequently, macromolecules with individual material
consciousness are potentially very capable and some certainly already can
carry out autonomous motions, thus being considered as living entities.
However, if we decompose one of these molecules so as to destroy its
individual consciousness, its parts will no longer have access to the information
which instructed said molecule and, hence, will not be able to carry out the
autonomous motions it previously did. Thus, the life of the molecule
disappears as we can see, Delbrcks Paradox is then solved
6
.
The appearance of living molecules in a planet marks the beginning of
the most important evolutionary stage for the psyche of matter, for it is from the
combination of these molecules that there appear living beings with individual
material consciousness with even larger psychic masses.
Biologists have shown that all living organisms existing on Earth come
from two types of molecules aminoacids and nucleotides which make up the
fundamental building blocks of living beings. That is, the nucleotides and

6
This paradox ascribed to Max Delbrck (Delbrck, Max., (1978) Mind from Matter? American Scholar,
47. pp.339-53.) remained unsolved and was posed as follows: How come the same matter studied by
Physics, when incorporated into a living organism, assumes an unexpected behavior, although not
contradicting physical laws?
12
aminoacids are identical in all living beings, whether they are bacteria, mollusks
or men. There are twenty different species of aminoacids and five of
nucleotides.
In 1952, Stanley Miller and Harold Urey proved that aminoacids could be
produced from inert chemical products present in the atmosphere and oceans in
the first years of existence of the Earth. Later, in 1962, nucleotides were created
in laboratory under similar conditions. Thus, it was proved that the molecular
units making up the living beings could have formed during the Earths primitive
history.
Therefore, we can imagine what happened from the moment said
molecules appeared. The concentration of aminoacids and nucleotides in the
oceans gradually increased. After a long period of time, when the amount of
nucleotides was already large enough, they began to group themselves by
mutual psychic attraction, forming the molecules that in the future will become
DNA molecules.
When the molecular masses of these molecules became large enough,
the distribution of elementary psyches in their consciousnesses took the most
orderly possible form of phase condensate (Bose-Einstein condensate) and
such consciousnesses became the individual material consciousness.
Since the psychic mass of the consciousnesses of these molecules is
very large (as compared with the psychic mass of the atoms), the amount of
self-accessible knowledge became considerable in such consciousnesses and
thus, they became apt to instruct the joining of aminoacids in the formation of
the first proteins (origin of the Genetic Code). Consequently, the DNAs
capability to serve as guide for the joining of aminoacids in the formation of
proteins is fundamentally a result of their psychism.
In the psychic of DNA molecules, the formation of proteins certainly had a
definite objective: the construction of cells.
During the cellular construction, the most important function played by the
consciousnesses of the DNA molecules may have been that of organizing the
distribution of the new molecules incorporated to the system so that the
consciousnesses of these molecules jointly formed with the consciousness of
the system a Bose-Einstein condensate. In this manner, more knowledge would
be available to the system and, after the cell is completed, the latter would also
have an individual material consciousness.
Afterwards, under the action of psychic interaction, the cells began to
group themselves according to different degrees of positive mutual affinity, in an
organized manner so that the distribution of their consciousnesses would also
form Bose-Einstein condensates. Hence, collective cell units began to appear
with individual consciousnesses of larger psychic masses and, therefore, with
access to more knowledge. With greater knowledge available, these groups of
cells began to perform specialized functions to obtain food, assimilation, etc.
That is when the first multi-celled beings appeared.
Upon forming the tissues, the cells gather structurally together in an
organized manner. Thus, the tissues and, hence, the organs and the organisms
themselves also possess individual material consciousnesses.
The existence of the material consciousness of the organisms is proved
in a well-known experiment by Karl Lashley, a pioneer in neurophysiology.
Lashley initially taught guinea pigs to run through a maze, an ability they
remember and keep in their memories in the same way as we acquire new
13
skills. He then systematically removed small portions of the brain tissue of said
guinea pigs. He thought that, if the guinea pigs still remembered how to run
through the maze, the memory centers would still be intact.
Little by little he removed the brain mass; the guinea pigs, curiously
enough, kept remembering how to run through the maze. Finally, with more
than90% of their cortex removed, the guinea pigs still kept remembering how to
run through the maze. Well, as we have seen, the consciousness of an
organism is formed by the concretion of all its cellular consciousnesses.
Therefore, the removal of a portion of the organism cells does not make it
disappear. Their cells, or better saying, the consciousnesses of their cells
contribute to the formation of the consciousness of the organism just as the
others, and it is exactly due to this that, even when we remove almost all of the
guinea pigs cortex, they were still able to remember from the memories of their
individual material consciousnesses. In this manner, what Lashleys experiment
proved was precisely the existence of individual material consciousnesses in
the guinea pigs.
Another proof of the existence of the individual material
consciousnesses in organisms is given by the regeneration phenomenon, so
frequent in animals of simple structure: sponges, isolated coelenterates, worms
of various groups, mollusks, echinoderms and tunicates. The arthropods
regenerate their pods. Lizards may regenerate only their tail after autoctomy.
Some starfish may regenerate so easily that a simple detached arm may, for
example, give origin to a wholly new animal.
The organization of the psychic parts in the composition of an organisms
individual material consciousness is directly related to the organization of the
material parts of the organism, as we have already seen. Thus, due to this
interrelationship between body and consciousness, any disturbance of a
material (physiological) nature in the body of the being will affect its individual
material consciousness, and any psychic disturbance imposed upon its
consciousness affects the physiology of its body.
When a consciousness is strongly affected to the extent of unmaking the
Bose-Einsteins condensate, which gives it the status of individual
consciousness, there also occurs the simultaneous disappearance of the
knowledge made accessible by said condensation. Therefore, when a cells
consciousness no longer constitutes a Bose-Einstein condensate, there is also
the simultaneous disappearance of the knowledge that instructs and maintains
the cellular metabolism. Consequently, the cell no longer functions thus
initiating its decomposition (molecular disaggregation).
Similarly, when the consciousness of an animal (or plant) no longer
constitutes a Bose-Einstein condensate, the knowledge that instructs and
maintains its body functioning also disappears, and it dies. In this process, after
the unmaking of the beings individual consciousness, there follows the
unmaking of the individual consciousnesses of the organs; next will be the
consciousnesses of their own cells which no longer exit. At the end there will
remain the isolated psyches of the molecules and atoms. Death, indeed,
destroys nothing, neither what makes up matter nor what makes up psyche.
As we have seen, all the information available in the consciousnesses of
the beings is also accessible by the consciousnesses of their organs up to their
molecules. Thus, when an individual undergoes a certain experience, the
information concerning it not only is recorded somewhere in this consciousness
14
but also pervades all the individual consciousnesses that make up its total
consciousness. Consequently, psychic disturbances imposed to a being reflect
up to the level of their individual molecular consciousnesses, perhaps even
structurally affecting said molecules, due to the interrelationship between body
and consciousness already mentioned here.
Therefore, one can expect that there may occur modifications in the
sequences of nucleotides of DNA molecules when the psychism of the
organism to which they are incorporated is sufficiently affected.
It is known that such modifications in the structure of DNA molecules may
also occur because of the chemical products in the blood stream ( as in the
case of the mustard gas used in chemical warface) or by the action of radiation
sufficiently energetic.
Modifications in the sequences of nucleotides in DNA molecules are
called mutations. Mutations as we know, determine hereditary variations which
make up the basis of Darwins theory of evolution.
There may occur favorable and unfavorable mutation to the individuals;
the former enhances the individuals possibility of survival, whereas the latter
decrease such possibility.
The theory of evolution is established as a consequence of individuals
efforts to survive in the environment where they live. This means that their
descendants may become different from their ancestors. This is the mechanism
that leads to the frequent appearance of new species. Darwin believed that the
mutation process was slow and gradual. Nevertheless, it is known today that
this is not the general rule, for there are evidences of the appearance of new
species in a relatively short period of time [14]. We also know that the
characteristics are transmitted from parents to offsprings by means of genes
and that the recombination of the parents genes, when genetic instructions are
transmitted by such genes.
However, it was shown that the genetic instructions are basically
associated with the psychism of DNA molecules. Consequently, the genes
transmit not only physiological but also psychic differences.
Thus, as a consequence of genetic transmission, besides the great
physiological difference between individuals of the same species, there is also a
great psychic dissimilarity.
Such psychic dissimilarity associated with the progressive enhancement
of the individuals psychic quantities may have given rise, in immemorial time, to
a variety of individuals (most probably among anthropoid primates) which
unconsciously established a positive mutual affinity with primordial
consciousnesses must have been attracted to the Earth. Thus, the relationship
established among them and the consciousnesses of said individuals is
enhanced.
In the course of evolutionary transformation, there was a time when the
fetuses of said variety already presented such a high degree of mutual affinity
with the primordial consciousnesses attracted to the Earth that, during
pregnancy, the incorporation of primordial consciousnesses may have occurred
in said fetuses.
In spite of absolute psychic mass of the fetuss material consciousness
being much smaller than that of the mothers consciousness, the degree of
positive mutual affinity between the fetuss consciousness and the primordial
consciousness that is going to be incorporated is much greater than that
15
between the latter and the mothers, which makes the psychic attraction
between the fetuss consciousness and primordial consciousness much
stronger than the attraction between the latter and the mothers. That is the
reason why primordial consciousness incorporates the fetus. Thus, when these
new individuals are born, they bring along, besides their individual material
consciousness, an individualized consciousness of the Supreme
Consciousness. This is how the first hominids were born.
Having been directly individualized from Supreme Consciousness, the
primordial consciousnesses constitutes as perfect individualities and not as
phase condensates as the consciousnesses of matter. In this manner, they do
not dissociate upon the death of those that incorporated them. Afterwards, upon
the action of psychic attraction, they were again able to incorporate into other
fetuses to proceed with their evolution.
These consciousnesses (hereinafter called human consciousness)
constitutes individualities and, therefore, the larger their psychic mass the more
available knowledge they will have and, consequently, greater ability to evolve.
J ust as the human race evolves biologically, human consciousnesses
have also been evolving. When they are incorporated, the difficulties of the
material world provide them with more and better opportunities to acquire
psychic mass (later on we will see how said consciousnesses may gain or lose
psychic mass). That is why they need to perform successive reincorporations.
Each reincorporation arises as a new opportunity for said consciousnesses to
increase their psychic mass and thus evolve.
The belief in the reincarnation is millenary and well known, although it has
not yet been scientifically recognized, due to its antecedent probability being
very small. In other words, there is small amount of data contributing to its
confirmation. This, however, does not mean that the phenomenon is not true,
but only that there is the need for a considerable amount of experiments to
establish a significant degree of antecedent probability.
The rational acceptance of reincarnation entails deep modifications in
the general philosophy of the human being. For instance, it frees him from
negative feelings, such as nationalistic or racial prejudices and other response
patterns based on the naive conception that we are simply what we appear to
be.
Darwins lucid perception upon affirming that not only the individuals
corporeal qualities but also his psychic qualities tend to improve made implicit in
his natural selection one of the most important rules of evolution: the psychic
selection, which basically consists in the survival of the most apt
consciousnesses. Psychic aptitude means, in the case of human
consciousnesses, mental quality, i.e., quality of thinking.
Further on, we will see that the human consciousnesses may gain or lose
psychic mass from the Supreme consciousness, respectively due to the mode
of resonance (quality) of their thoughts. This means that the consciousnesses
that cultivate a greater amount of bad-quality thoughts will have a lesser chance
of psychic survival than the others. A human consciousness that permanently
cultivates bad-quality thoughts progressively loses psychic mass and may even
be extinguished.
With the progressive disappearance of psychically less apt
consciousnesses, it will be increasingly easy for the more apt consciousnesses
to increase their psychic masses during reincorporation periods. There will be a
16
time when psychic selection will have produced consciousnesses of large
psychic mass and, therefore, highly evolved. It may happen that such time will
precede the critical time from which material life will no longer be possible in the
Universe.

4. INTERACTION OF HUMAN CONSCIOUSNESSES

The thought originated in a consciousness (static thought) presupposes
the individualization of a quantum of psychic mass

m in the very
consciousness where the thought originated. Consequently, the wave function
associated with this psychic body must collapse after a time interval

t ,
expressing in the space-time its psychic content when it contains sufficiently
psychic mass for that, or otherwise transforming itself in radiation (psychic
radiation). In both cases, there is also production of virtual photons (virtual
psychic radiation) to convey the psychic interaction.
According to the Uncertainty Principle, virtual quanta cannot be
observed experimentally. However, since they are interaction quanta, their
effects may be verified in the very particles or bodies subjected to the
interactions.
Obviously, only one specific type of interaction occurs between two
particles if each one absorbs the quanta of said interaction emitted by the other;
otherwise, the interaction will be null. Thus, the null interaction between psychic
bodies particularly means that there is no mutual absorption of the virtual
psychic photons (psychic interaction quanta) emitted by them. That is, the
emission spectrum of each one of them does not coincide with the absorption
spectrum of the other.
By analogy with material bodies, whose emission spectra are, as we
know, identical with the absorption ones, also the psychic bodies must absorb
within the spectrum they emit. Specifically, in the case of human
consciousness, their thoughts cause them to become emitters of psychic
radiation in certain frequency spectra and, consequently, receivers in the same
spectra. Thus, when a human consciousness, by its thoughts, is receptive
coming from a certain thought, said radiation will be absorbed by the
consciousness (resonance absorption). Under these circumstances, the
radiation absorbed must stimulate through the Resonance Principle said
consciousness to emit in the same spectrum, just as it happens with matter.
Nevertheless, in order for that emission to occur in a human
consciousness, it must be preceded by the individualization of thoughts identical
with that which originated the radiation absorbed because obviously only
identical thoughts will be able to reproduce, when they collapse, the spectrum of
virtual psychic radiations absorbed.
These induced thoughts such as the thoughts of consciousnesses
themselves must remain individualized for a period of time t (lifetime of the
thought) after which its wave function will collapse, thus producing the virtual
psychic radiation in the same spectrum of frequencies absorbed.
The Supreme Consciousness, just as the other consciousnesses, has Its
own spectrum of absorption determined by Its thoughts which make up the
standard of a good-quality thought is hereby established. That is, they are
resonant thoughts in Supreme Consciousness. Thus, only thoughts of this kind,
17
produced in human consciousnesses, may induce the individualization of similar
thoughts in Supreme Consciousness.
In this context, a system of judgment is established in which the good and
the evil are psychic values, with their origin in free thought. The good is related
to the good-quality thoughts, which are thoughts resonant in Supreme
Consciousness. The evil, in turn, is related to the bad-quality thoughts, non-
resonant in the Supreme Consciousness.
Consequently, the moral derived thereof results from the Law itself,
inherent in the Supreme Consciousness and, therefore, this psychic moral must
be the fundamental moral. Thus, fundamental ethics is neither biological nor
located in the aggressive action, as thought by Nietzsche. It is psychic and
located in the good-quality thoughts. It has a theological basis and in it the
creation of the Universe by a pre-existing God is of an essential nature,
opposed, for instance, to Spinozas geometrical ethics, which eliminated the
ideas of the Creation of the Universe by a pre-existing God the main
underpinning of Christian theology and philosophy. However, it is very close to
Aristotles ethics, to the extent that, from it, we understand that we are what we
repeatedly do (think) and that excellence is not an act, but a habit (Ethics, II, 4).
According to Aristotle: the goodness of a man is a work of the soul towards
excellence in a complete lifetime: it is not a day or a short period that makes
a man fortunate and happy. (Ibid, I, 7).
The virtual psychic radiation coming from a thought may induce several
similar thoughts in the consciousness absorbing it, because each photon of
radiation absorbed carries in itself the electromagnetic expression of the
thought which produced it and, consequently, each one of them stimulates the
individualization of a similar thought. However, the amount of thoughts induced
is, of course, limited by the amount of psychic mass of the consciousness
proper.
In the specific case of the Supreme Consciousness, the virtual psychic
radiation coming from a good-quality thought must induce many similar
thoughts. On the other hand, since Supreme Consciousness involves human
consciousness the induced thoughts appear in the surroundings of the very
consciousness which induced them. These thoughts are then strongly attracted
by said consciousness and fuse therewith, for just as the thoughts generated in
a consciousness have a high degree of positive mutual affinity with it, they will
also have the thoughts induced by it.
The fusion of these thoughts in the consciousness obviously determines
an increase in its psychic mass. We then conclude that the cultivation of good-
quality thoughts is highly beneficial to the individual. On the contrary, the
cultivation of bad-quality thoughts makes consciousness lose psychic mass.
When bad-quality thoughts are generated in a consciousness, they do not
induce identical thoughts in Supreme Consciousness, because the absorption
spectrum of Supreme Consciousness excludes psychic radiations coming from
bad-quality thoughts. Thus, such radiation directs itself to other
consciousnesses; however, it will only induce identical thoughts in those that
are receptive in the same frequency spectrum. When this happens and right
after the wave functions corresponding to these induced thoughts collapse and
materialize said thoughts or changing them into radiation, the receptive
consciousness will lose psychic mass, similarly to what happens in the
consciousness which first produced the thought. Consequently, both the
18
consciousness which gave rise to the bad-quality thought and those receptive to
the psychic radiations coming from this type of thoughts will lose psychic mass.
We must observe, however, that our thoughts are not limited only to
harming or benefiting ourselves, since they also can, as we have already seen,
induce similar thoughts in other consciousnesses, thus affecting them. In this
case, it is important to observe that the psychic radiation produced by the
induced thoughts may return to the consciousness which initially produced the
bad-quality thought, inducing other similar thoughts in it, which evidently cause
more loss of psychic mass in said consciousness.
The fact of our thoughts not being restricted to influencing ourselves is
highly relevant because it leads us to understand we have a great responsibility
towards the others as regards what we think.
Let us now approach the intensity of thoughts. If two thoughts have the
same psychic form and equal psychic masses, they have the same psychic
density and, consequently, the same intensity, from the psychic viewpoint.
However, if one of them has more psychic mass than the other, it will evidently
have a larger psychic density and, thus, will be more intense.
The same thought repeated with different intensities in a consciousness
in a time period much shorter than the lifetime of thought has its psychic mass
increased due to the fusion of the psychic masses corresponding to each
repetition. The fusion is caused by a strong psychic attraction between them,
because the inertial thought and the repeated ones have high degree of positive
mutual affinity.
It is then possible by this process that the thought may appear with
enough psychic mass to materialize when its wave function collapses.
If the process is jointly shared with other consciousnesses, the thoughts
in these consciousnesses evidently correspond to different dynamics states in
the same thought. Thus, if ,
1

2
,...,
n
refer to the different dynamic
states that the same thought may assume, then its general dynamic state,
according to the superposition principle, may be described by a single wave
function , given by:

n n
c c c

+ + + = ...
2 2 1 1
Therefore, everything happens as if there were only a single thought
described by , with psychic mass determined by the set of psychic masses
of all the similar thoughts repeated in the various consciousnesses. In this
manner, it is possible that in this process the thought materializes even faster
than in the case of a single consciousness.

It was shown that the consciousnesses may increase their psychic

masses by cultivating good-quality thoughts and avoiding the bad-quality
thoughts ones. However, both the cultivation of good thoughts and the ability to
instantly perceive nature in our thoughts to quickly repel the bad-quality
thoughts result in a slow and difficult process.
The fact of intense enough mental images being capable of materializing
suggests that we must be careful with mental images of fear. Thus more than
anything else, it is imperative to avoid their repetition in our consciousnesses,
because at each repetition they acquire more psychic mass.
Great are the possibilities encompassed in the consciousnesses, just as
many are the effects of psychic interaction. At cellular level, the intervention of
19
psychic interaction in the formation of the embryos organs is particularly
interesting.
Despite the recent advances in Embryology, embryologists cannot
understand how the cells of the internal cellular mass
7
migrate to defined
places in the embryo in order to form the organs of the future child.
We will show that this is a typical biological phenomenon which is
fundamentally derived from the psychic interaction between the cells
consciousnesses.
J ust as the consciousnesses of the children have a high degree of
positive mutual affinity with the consciousnesses of their parents, and among
themselves (principle of familiar formation), the embryo cells, by having
originated from cellular duplication, have a high degree of positive mutual
affinity. The embryo cells result, as we know, from the cellular duplication of a
single cell containing the paternal and maternal genes and, hence, have a high
degree of positive mutual affinity.
Thus, under the action of psychic interaction the cells of the internal
cellular mass start gathering into small groups, according to the different
degrees of mutual affinity.
When there is a positive mutual affinity between two consciousnesses
there occurs the intertwining between their wave functions, and a Phase
Relationship is established among them. Consequently, since the degree of
positive mutual affinity among the embryo cells is high, also the relationship
among them will be intense, and it is exactly this what enables the construction
of the organs of the future child. In other words, when a cell is attracted by
certain group in the embryo, it is through the cell-group relationship that
determines where the cell is to aggregate to the group. In this manner, each cell
finds its correct place in the embryo; that is why observers frequently say that,
the cells appear to know where to go, when experimentally observed.
The cells of the internal cellular mass are capable of originating any
organ, and are hence called totipotents; thus, the organs begin to appear. In the
endoderm, there appear the urinary organs, the respiratory system, and part of
the digestive system; in the mesoderm are formed the muscles, bones,
cartilages, blood, vessels, heart, kidneys; in the ectoderm there appear the skin,
the nervous system, etc.
Thus, it is the mutual affinity among the consciousnesses of the cells that
determines the formation of the body organs and keeps their own physical
integrity. For this reason, every body rejects cells from other bodies, unless the
latter have positive mutual affinity with their own cells. The higher the degree of
cellular positive mutual affinity, the faster the integration of the transplanted
cells and, therefore, the less problematic the transplant. In the case of cells from
identical twins, this integration takes place practically with no problems, since
said degree of mutual affinity is very high.

7
When a spermatozoon penetrates the ovum, an egg is formed. Roughly twelve to
fourteen hours later, the egg divides into two identical cells. This is the beginning of the
phase where the embryo is called morula. Six days later, in the blastula phase, the
external cells fix the embryo to the uterus. The cells inside the blastula remain equal to
each other and are known as internal cellular mass.

20
In eight weeks of life, all organs are practically formed in the embryo.
From there on, it begins to be called fetus.
The embryos material individual consciousness is formed by the
consciousnesses of its cells united in a Bose-Einstein condensate. As more
cells become incorporated into the embryo, its material consciousness acquires
more psychic mass. This means that this type of consciousness will be greater
in the fetus than in the embryo and even greater in the child.
Thus, the psychic mass of the mother-fetus consciousness progressively
increases during pregnancy, consequently increasing the psychic attraction
between this consciousness and that new one about to incorporate. In normal
pregnancies, this psychic attraction also increases due to the habitual increase
in the degree of positive mutual affinity between said consciousnesses.
Since the embryo's consciousness has greater degree of positive mutual
affinity with the consciousness that is going to incorporate, then the embryo's
consciousness becomes the center of psychic attraction to where the human
consciousness destined to the fetus will go.
When the psychic attraction becomes intense enough, human
consciousness penetrates the mother-fetus consciousness, forming with it a
new BoseEinstein condensate. From that instant on, the fetus begins to have
two consciousnesses: the individual material one and the human consciousness
attracted to it.
It easy to see that the psychic attraction upon this human consciousness
tends to continue, being progressively compressed until effectively incorporating
the fetus. When this takes place, it will be ready to be born.
It is probably due to this psychic compression process that the
incorporated consciousness suffers amnesia of its preceding history. Upon
death, after the psychic decompression that arises from the definitive
disincorporation of the consciousness, the preceding memory must return.
It was shown that particles of matter perform transitions to the imaginary
space-time when their gravitational masses reach the gravitational mass
ranging between
i
M 159 0. + to
i
M 159 0. [7]. Under these circumstances, the
total energy of the particle becomes imaginary and consequently it disappears
from our ordinary space-time. Since imaginary mass is equal to psychic mass
we can infer that the particle makes a transition to the psychic space-time.
The consciousnesses are in the psychic space-time. Therefore, if material
bodies can become psychic bodies and to interact with others psychic bodies in
this space-time, then they reach a new part of the Universe where the
consciousnesses live and from where they come in order to incorporate the
human fetus, and to where they should return, after the death of the material
bodies. Consequently, the transition to the psychic space-time is a door for us
to visit the spiritual Universe.








21


REFERENCES

[1] Capra, F. (1988) O Tao da Fsica, Ed. Cultrix, S.Paulo.

[2] Zohar, D. (1990) O Ser Quntico, Ed. Best Seller, S.Paulo.

[3] Winger, K. (1967) Symmetries And Reflections, Blooming, Ind., Indiana
University Press.

[4] Young, A.M. (1976) The Geometry of Meaning, Delacorte Press, N.Y;
Young, A.M. The Reflexive Universe: Evolution of Consciousness, Delacorte
Press, N.Y.

[5] Herbert, N. (1979) Mind Science: A Physics of Consciousness Primer,
Boulder Creek, Cal: C -Life Institute.

[6] Bohm, D. (1980) A New Theory of Relation of Mind and Matter, The J ournal
of the American Society of Psychical Research, Vol. 80, N 2, p.129.

[7] De Aquino, F. (2007) Mathematical Foundations of the Relativistic Theory
of Quantum Gravity, preprint, physics/0212033.

[8] Bohm, D. (1951) Quantum Theory, Prentice-Hall, N.Y, p.415.

[9] DEspagnat, B. The Question of Quantum Reality, Scientific American,
241,128.

[10] Teller, P. Relational Holism and Quantum Mechanics, British J ournal for the
Philosophy of Science, 37, 71-81.

[11] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E. (1969) Theorie du Champ, Ed.MIR, Moscow,
Portuguese version (1974) Ed. Hemus, S.Paulo, pp.116 and 363.

[12] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E. (1969) Theorie du Champ, Ed.MIR, Moscow,
Portuguese version (1974) Ed. Hemus, S.Paulo, pp.363-364.

[13] De Aquino, F. (2007) Gravity Control by means of Electromagnetic
Field through Gas at Ultra-Low Pressure, physics/0701091.

[14] Grant, P.R., and Grant, B.R. (1995). Predicting microevolutionary responses
to directional selection on heritable variation. Evolution 49:241-251.







The Gravitational Spacecraft

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 1997-2010 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved

There is an electromagnetic factor of correlation between gravitational mass and inertial mass,
which in specific electromagnetic conditions, can be reduced, made negative and increased in
numerical value. This means that gravitational forces can be reduced, inverted and intensified
by means of electromagnetic fields. Such control of the gravitational interaction can have a lot
of practical applications. For example, a new concept of spacecraft and aerospace flight arises
from the possibility of the electromagnetic control of the gravitational mass. The novel
spacecraft called Gravitational Spacecraft possibly will change the paradigm of space flight
and transportation in general. Here, its operation principles and flight possibilities, it will be
described. Also it will be shown that other devices based on gravity control, such as the
Gravitational Motor and the Quantum Transceivers, can be used in the spacecraft,
respectively, for Energy Generation and Telecommunications.


Key words: Gravity, Gravity Control, Quantum Devices.


CONTENTS

1. Introduction 02

2. Gravitational Shielding 02

3. Gravitational Motor: Free Energy 05

4. The Gravitational Spacecraft 06

5. The Imaginary Space-time 13

6. Past and Future 18

7. Instantaneous Interstellar Communications 20

8. Origin of Gravity and Genesis of Gravitational Energy 23

Appendix A 26
Appendix B 58
Appendix C 66
Appendix D 71
References 74






2
1. Introduction

The discovery of the correlation
between gravitational mass and inertial
mass [1] has shown that the gravity
can be reduced, nullified and inverted.
Starting from this discovery several
ways were proposed in order to obtain
experimentally the local gravity
control [2]. Consequently, new
concepts of spacecraft and aerospace
flight have arisen. This novel
spacecraft, called Gravitational
Spacecraft, can be equipped with other
devices also based on gravity control,
such as the Gravitational Motor and
the Quantum Transceiver that can be
used, respectively, for energy
generation and telecommunications.
Based on the theoretical background
which led to the gravity control, the
operation principles of the
Gravitational Spacecraft and of the
devices above mentioned, will be
described in this work.

2. Gravitational Shielding

The contemporary greatest
challenge of the Theoretical Physics
was to prove that, Gravity is a
quantum phenomenon. Since the
General Relativity describes gravity as
related to the curvature of the space-
time then, the quantization of the
gravity implies the quantization of the
proper space-time. Until the end of the
century XX, several attempts to
quantify gravity were accomplished.
However, all of them resulted fruitless
[3, 4].





In the beginning of this century,
it has been clearly noticed that there
was something unsatisfactory about
the whole notion of quantization and
that the quantization process had many
ambiguities. Then, a new approach has
been proposed starting from the
generalization of the action function
*
.
The result has been the derivation of a
theoretical background, which finally
led to the so-sought quantization of the
gravity and of the space-time.
Published under the title:
Mathematical Foundations of the
Relativistic Theory of Quantum
Gravity

, this theory predicts a

consistent unification of Gravity with
Electromagnetism. It shows that the
strong equivalence principle is
reaffirmed and, consequently
Einsteins equations are preserved. In
fact, Einsteins equations can be
deduced directly from the Relativistic
Theory of Quantum Gravity. This
shows, therefore, that the General
Relativity is a particularization of this
new theory, just as the Newtons
theory is a particular case from the
General Relativity. Besides, it was
deduced from the new theory an
important correlation between the
gravitational mass and the inertial
mass, which shows that the
gravitational mass of a particle can be
decreased and even made negative,
independently of its inertial mass, i.e.,
while the gravitational mass is

*
The formulation of the action in Classical Mechanics
extends to the Quantum Mechanics and it has been the
basis for the development of the Strings Theory.

http://arxiv.org/abs/physics/0212033

3
progressively reduced, the inertial
mass does not vary. This is highly
relevant because it means that the
weight of a body can also be reduced
and even inverted in certain
circumstances, since Newtons gravity
law defines the weight of a body as
the product of its gravitational mass
by the local gravity acceleration ,
i.e.,
P
g
m g

( ) 1 g m P
g
=

It arises from the mentioned law
that the gravity acceleration (or simply
the gravity) produced by a body with
gravitational mass is given by
g
M

( ) 2
2
r
GM
g
g
=

The physical property of mass
has two distinct aspects: gravitational
mass m
g
and inertial mass m
i
. The
gravitational mass produces and
responds to gravitational fields. It
supplies the mass factors in Newton's
famous inverse-square law of
gravity( )
2
r m GM F
g g
= . The inertial
mass is the mass factor in Newton's
2nd Law of Motion . These
two masses are not equivalent but
correlated by means of the following
factor [1]:
( a m F
i
= )

( ) 3 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ =
c m
p
m
m
i i
g

Where is the rest inertial mass and
is the variation in the particles
kinetic momentum; is the speed of
light.
0 i
m
p
c
This equation shows that only
for 0 = p the gravitational mass is
equal to the inertial mass. Instances in
which p is produced by
electromagnetic radiation, Eq. (3) can
be rewritten as follows:
( ) 4 1 1 2 1
2
3
2
0

+ =
c
D n
m
m
r
i
g

Where is the refraction index of the
particle; is the power density of the
electromagnetic radiation absorbed by
the particle; and
r
n
D
its density of
inertial mass.
It was shown [1] that there is an
additional effect of gravitational
shielding produced by a substance
whose gravitational mass was reduced
or made negative. This effect shows
that just above the substance the
gravity acceleration will be reduced
at the same proportion
1
g
0 i g
m m = ,
i.e., , ( is the gravity
acceleration bellow the substance).
g g =
1
g
Equation (4) shows, for
example, that, in the case of a gas at
ultra-low pressure (very low density of
inertial mass), the gravitational mass
of the gas can be strongly reduced or
made negative by means of the
incidence of electromagnetic radiation
with power density relatively low.
Thus, it is possible to use this
effect in order to produce gravitational
shieldings and, thus, to control the
local gravity.
The Gravity Control Cells
(GCC) shown in the article Gravity
Control by means of Electromagnetic
4

Field through Gas or Plasma at Ultra-
Low Pressure

, are devices designed

on the basis, of this effect, and usually
are chambers containing gas or plasma
at ultra-low pressure. Therefore, when
an oscillating electromagnetic field is
applied upon the gas its gravitational
mass will be reduced and,
consequently, the gravity above the
mentioned GCC will also be reduced
at the same proportion.
It was also shown that it is
possible to make a gravitational
shielding even with the chamber filled
with Air at one atmosphere. In this
case, the electric conductivity of the
air must be strongly increased in order
to reduce the intensity of the
electromagnetic field or the power
density of the applied radiation.
This is easily obtained by
ionizing the air in the local where we
want to build the gravitational
shielding. There are several manners
of ionizing the air. One of them is by
means of ionizing radiation produced
by a radioactive source of low
intensity, for example, by using the
radioactive element Americium (Am-
241). The Americium is widely used
as air ionizer in smoke detectors.
Inside the detectors, there is just a little
amount of americium 241 (about of
1/5000 grams) in the form of AmO

2
.
Its cost is very low (about of US$
1500 per gram). The dominant
radiation is composed of alpha
particles. Alpha particles cannot cross
a paper sheet and are also blocked by
some centimeters of air. The
Americium used in the smoke

http://arxiv.org/abs/physics/0701091

detectors can only be dangerous if
inhaled.
The Relativistic Theory of
Quantum Gravity also shows the
existence of a generalized equation for
the inertial forces which has the
following form

( ) 5 a M F
g i
=

This expression means a new law for
the Inertia. Further on, it will be
shown that it incorporates the Machs
principle to Gravitation theory [5].
Equation (3) tell us that the
gravitational mass is only equal to the
inertial mass when . Therefore,
we can easily conclude that only in
this particular situation the new
expression of reduces to
0 = p
i
F a m F
i i
= ,
which is the expression for Newton's
2nd Law of Motion. Consequently,
this Newtons law is just a particular
case from the new law expressed by
the Eq. (5), which clearly shows how
the local inertial forces are correlated
to the gravitational interaction of the
local system with the distribution of
cosmic masses (via ) and thus,
incorporates definitively the Machs
principle to the Gravity theory.
g
m
The Machs principle postulates
that: The local inertial forces would
be produced by the gravitational
interaction of the local system with the
distribution of cosmic masses.
However, in spite of the several
attempts carried out, this principle had
not yet been incorporated to the
Gravitation theory. Also Einstein had
carried out several attempts. The ad
hoc introduction of the cosmological
5
term in his gravitation equations has
been one of these attempts.
With the advent of equation (5),
the origin of the inertia - that was
considered the most obscure point of
the particles theory and field theory
becomes now evident.
In addition, this equation also
reveals that, if the gravitational mass
of a body is very close to zero or if
there is around the body a
gravitational shielding which reduces
closely down to zero the gravity
accelerations due to the rest of the
Universe, then the intensities of the
inertial forces that act on the body
become also very close to zero.
This conclusion is highly
relevant because it shows that, under
these conditions, the spacecraft could
describe, with great velocities, unusual
trajectories (such as curves in right
angles, abrupt inversion of direction,
etc.) without inertial impacts on the
occupants of the spacecraft.
Obviously, out of the above-
mentioned condition, the spacecraft
and the crew would be destroyed due
to the strong presence of the inertia.
When we make a sharp curve
with our car we are pushed towards a
direction contrary to that of the motion
of the car. This happens due to
existence of the inertial forces.
However, if our car is involved by a
gravitational shielding, which reduces
strongly the gravitational interaction of
the car (and everything that is inside
the car) with the rest of the Universe,
then in accordance with the Machs
principle, the local inertial forces
would also be strongly reduced and,
consequently, we would not feel
anything during the maneuvers of the
car.

3. Gravitational Motor: Free Energy

It is known that the energy of
the gravitational field of the Earth can
be converted into rotational kinetic
energy and electric energy. In fact, this
is exactly what takes place in
hydroelectric plants. However, the
construction these hydroelectric plants
have a high cost of construction and
can only be built, obviously, where
there are rivers.
The gravity control by means of
any of the processes mentioned in the
article: Gravity Control by means of
Electromagnetic Field through Gas or
Plasma at Ultra-Low Pressure allows
the inversion of the weight of any
body, practically at any place.
Consequently, the conversion of the
gravitational energy into rotational
mechanical energy can also be carried
out at any place.
In Fig. (1), we show a schematic
diagram of a Gravitational Motor. The
first Gravity Control Cell (GCC1)
changes the local gravity from
to
g
ng g = , propelling the left side of
the rotor in a direction contrary to the
motion of the right side. The second
GCC changes the gravity back again to
i.e., from g ng g = to , in such a
way that the gravitational change
occurs just on the region indicated in
Fig.1. Thus, a torque
g
T given by

( ) ( ) ( ) [ ]
( ) gr m n
r g m g m r F F T
g
g g
2
1
1
2 2
+ =
= + = + =

6
Is applied on the rotor of gravitational
mass , making the rotor spin with
angular velocity
g
m
.
The average power, , of the
motor is
P
T P = . However,
.Thus, we have r g g
2
= +
( ) ( ) 6 1
3 3
2
1
r g n m P
i
+ =
Consider a cylindrical rotor of iron
( )
3
. 7800

= m Kg with height ,
radius
m h 5 0. =
m R r 0545 . 0 3 = = and inertial
mass . By adjusting
the GCC 1 in order to obtain
kg h R m
i
05 . 327
2
= =
( ) ( ) ( )
19
1
= = = n m m
air i air g air
and, since
, then Eq. (6) gives
2
. 81 . 9

= s m g

HP KW watts P 294 219 10 19 . 2
5


This shows that this small motor
can be used, for example, to substitute
the conventional motors used in the
cars. It can also be coupled to an
electric generator in order to produce
electric energy. The conversion of the
rotational mechanical energy into
electric energy is not a problem since
it is a problem technologically
resolved several decades ago. Electric
generators are usually produced by the
industries and they are commercially
available, so that it is enough to couple
a gravitational motor to an electric
generator for we obtaining electric
energy. In this case, just a gravitational
motor with the power above
mentioned it would be enough to
supply the need of electric energy of,
for example, at least 20 residences.
Finally, it can substitute the
conventional motors of the same
power, with the great advantage of not
needing of fuel for its operation. What
means that the gravitational motors
can produce energy practically free.
It is easy to see that gravitational
motors of this kind can be designed for
powers needs of just some watts up to
millions of kilowatts.
g
g= -ng
Rotor
r
r
R

ar(2)
= (
ar(1)
)
-1

ar(1)
= -n = m
g(ar)
/m
i(ar)

g=
air(2)
g = g

g=
air(1)
g






GCC (2)














GCC (1)



g





Fig. 1 Gravitational Motor - The first Gravity Control Cell
(GCC1) changes the local gravity from g to ng g = , propelling
the left side of the rotor in contrary direction to the motion of the
right side. The second GCC changes the gravity back again to g i.e.,
from ng g = to g , in such a way that the gravitational change
occurs just on the region shown in figure above.

4. The Gravitational Spacecraft

Consider a metallic sphere with
radius in the terrestrial atmosphere.
If the external surface of the sphere is
recovered with a radioactive substance
(for example, containing Americium
241) then the air in the space close to
the surface of the sphere will be
strongly ionized by the radiation
emitted from the radioactive element
and, consequently, the electric
conductivity of the air close to sphere
will become strongly increased.
s
r
7
By applying to the sphere an
electric potential of low frequency ,
in order to produce an electric field
starting from the surface of the
sphere, then very close to the surface,
the intensity of the electric field will
be
rms
V
rms
E
s rms rms
r V E = and, in agreement with
Eq. (4), the gravitational mass of the
Air in this region will be expressed by
( ) ( )
( ) 7 1
4 4
1 2 1
0
2 4
4
3
2
0
air i
air s
rms air
air g
m
r
V
f c
m

+ =


Therefore we will have
( )
( )
( ) 8 1
4 4
1 2 1
2 4
4
3
2
0
0

+ = =
air s
rms air
air i
air g
air
r
V
f c m
m

The gravity accelerations acting on the

sphere, due to the rest of the Universe
(See Fig. 2), will be given by

n i g g
i air i
,..., 2 , 1 = =

Note that by varying or the
frequency , we can easily to reduce
and control
rms
V
f
air
. Consequently, we can
also control the intensities of the
gravity accelerations in order to
produce a controllable gravitational
shielding around the sphere.
i
g
Thus, the gravitational forces
acting on the sphere, due to the rest of
the Universe, will be given by
( )
i air g i g gi
g M g M F = =
where is the gravitational mass of
the sphere.
g
M
The gravitational shielding
around of the sphere reduces both the
gravity accelerations acting on the
sphere, due to the rest of the Universe,
and the gravity acceleration produced
by the gravitational mass of the
own sphere. That is, if inside the
shielding the gravity produced by the
sphere is
g
M
2
r M G g
g
= , then, out of the
shielding it becomes g g
air
= .Thus,
( ) ( )
2 2 2
r Gm r M G r M G g
g g air g air
= = = ,
where
g air g
M m =
Therefore, for the Universe out of the
shielding the gravitational mass of the
sphere is and not . In these
circumstances, the inertial forces
acting on the sphere, in agreement
with the new law for inertia, expressed
by Eq. (5), will be given by
g
m
g
M
( ) 9
i g ii
a m F =
Thus, these forces will be almost null
when becomes almost null by
means of the action of the gravitational
shielding. This means that, in these
circumstances, the sphere practically
loses its inertial properties. This effect
leads to a new concept of spacecraft
and aerospatial flight. The spherical
form of the spacecraft is just one form
that the Gravitational Spacecraft can
have, since the gravitational shielding
can also be obtained with other
formats.
g
m
An important aspect to be
observed is that it is possible to control
the gravitational mass of the
spacecraft, , simply by
controlling the gravitational mass of a
body inside the spacecraft. For
instance, consider a parallel plate
capacitor inside the spacecraft. The
gravitational mass of the dielectric
between the plates of the capacitor can
be controlled by means of the ELF
electromagnetic field through it. Under
these circumstances, the total
gravitational mass of the spacecraft
will be given by
(spacecraf g
M
)
8


( )
( )
( ) 10
0 0 i dielectric i
g spacecraf g
total
spacecraf g
m M
m M M
+ =
= + =
where is the rest inertial mass of
the spacecraft(without the dielectric)
and is the rest inertial mass of the
dielectric;
0 i
M
0 i
m
0 i g dielectric
m m = , where
is the gravitational mass of the
dielectric. By decreasing the value of
g
m
dielectric
, the gravitational mass of the
spacecraft decreases. It was shown,
that the value of can be negative.
Thus, when
0 0 i i dielectric
m M , the
gravitational mass of the spacecraft
gets very close to zero.
When
0 0 i i dielectric
m M < , the gravitational
mass of the spacecraft becomes
negative.
Therefore, for an observer out
of the spacecraft, the gravitational
mass of the spacecraft is
( ) 0 0 i dielectric i spacecraf g
m M M + = , and not
.
0 0 i i
m M +
Another important aspect to be
observed is that we can control the
gravity inside the spacecraft, in order
to produce, for example, a gravity
acceleration equal to the Earths
gravity ( )
2
. 81 . 9

= s m g . This will be
very useful in the case of space flight,
and can be easily obtained by putting
in the ceiling of the spacecraft the
system shown in Fig. 3. This system
has three GCC with nuclei of ionized
air (or air at low pressure). Above
these GCC there is a massive block
with mass .
g
M

air
M
g
r

M
g
E
rms
g
1
= - G M
g
/ r
2
g
1
=
air
g
1
S
Gravitational Shielding

Fig.2- The gravitational shielding reduces the gravity
accelerations ( g
1
) acting on the sphere (due to the rest of the
Universe) and also reduces the gravity acceleration that the sphere
produces upon all the particles of the Universe (g). For the
Universe, the gravitational mass of the sphere will be m
g
=
air
M
g.
g = -
air
g = -
air
G M
g
/ r
2
=

= - Gm
g
/ r
2


m
g
=
air
M
g

g

= - G M
g
/ r
2
As we have shown [2], a
gravitational repulsion is established
between the mass and any positive
gravitational mass below the
mentioned system. This means that the
particles in this region will stay
subjected to a gravity acceleration ,
given by
g
M
b
a
( ) ( ) ( ) 11
2
0
3 3

r
M
G g a
g
air M air b

r r
If the Air inside the GCCs is
sufficiently ionized, in such way that
, and if ,
, and
then the Eq.8 shows that inside the
GCCs we will have
1 3
. 10

m S
air
Hz f 1 =
3
. 1

m kg
air
KV V
rms
10 cm d 1 =
( )
( )
3
2 4
4
3
2
0
0
10 1
4 4
1 2 1

+ = =
air
rms air
air i
air g
air
d
V
f c m
m

9
























Fig.3 If the Air inside the GCC is sufficiently
ionized, in such way that
1 3
. 10

m S
air
and
if Hz f 1 = ; cm d 1 = ;
3
. 1

m kg
air
and KV V
rms
10
then Eq. 8 shows that inside the CCGs we will have
3
10
air
. Therefore, for kg M M
i g
100 and
m r
o
1 the gravity acceleration inside the spacecraft
will be directed from the ceiling to the floor of the
spacecraft and its intensity will be
2
. 10

s m a
b
.
GCC 1
G CC3
GCC 2
M
g
F
M
( ) ( )
2
0
3 3
r
M
G g a
g
air M air b

r r
a
b
air

air

air


Ceiling

Floor
r
0
d

Therefore the equation (11) gives

( ) 12 10
2
0
9
r
M
G a
g
b
+
For and (See
Fig.3), the gravity inside the spacecraft
will be directed from the ceiling to the
floor and its intensity will have the
following value
kg M M
i g
100 m r 1
0

( ) 13 . 10
2
s m a
b
Therefore, an interstellar travel in a
gravitational spacecraft will be
particularly comfortable, since we can
travel during all the time subjected to
the gravity which we are accustomed
to here in the Earth.
We can also use the system
shown in Fig. 3 as a thruster in order
to propel the spacecraft. Note that the
gravitational repulsion that occurs
between the block with mass and
any particle after the GCCs does not
depend on of the place where the
system is working. Thus, this
Gravitational Thruster can propel the
gravitational spacecraft in any
direction. Moreover, it can work in the
terrestrial atmosphere as well as in the
cosmic space. In this case, the energy
that produces the propulsion is
obviously the gravitational energy,
which is always present in any point of
the Universe.
g
M
The schematic diagram in Fig. 4
shows in details the operation of the
Gravitational Thruster. A gas of any
type injected into the chamber beyond
the GCCs acquires an acceleration
, as shown in Fig.4, the intensity of
which, as we have seen, is given by
gas
a
( ) ( ) ( ) 14
2
0
3 3
r
M
G g a
g
gas M gas gas
=
Thus, if inside of the GCCs,
then the equation above gives
9
10
gas

( ) 15 10
2
0
27
r
M
G a
g
gas
+
For kg M M
i g
10 , we have
. With this enormous
acceleration the particles of the gas
reach velocities close to the speed of
the light in just a few nanoseconds.
Thus, if the emission rate of the gas is
m r 1
0

2 17
. 10 6 . 6

s m a
gas
hour litres s kg dt dm
gas
/ 4000 / 10
3


, then
the trust produced by the gravitational
thruster will be

10
( ) 16 10
5
N
dt
dm
c
dt
dm
v F
gas gas
gas
=



Gas


m
g


F
m

Gas
GCC
1
M
g


F
M
GCC
3
GCC
2 a
gas
Fig. 4 Gravitational Thruster Schematic diagram
showing the operation of the Gravitational Thruster. Note
that in the case of very strong
air
, for
example
9
10
air
, the gravity accelerations upon the
boxes of the second and third GCCs become very strong.
Obviously, the walls of the mentioned boxes cannot to stand
the enormous pressures. However, it is possible to build a
similar system [2] with 3 or more GCCs, without material
boxes. Consider for example, a surface with several
radioactive sources (Am-241, for example). The alpha
particles emitted from the Am-241 cannot reach besides
10cm of air. Due to the trajectory of the alpha particles, three
or more successive layers of air, with different electrical
conductivities
1
,
2
and
3
, will be established in the
ionized region. It is easy to see that the gravitational
shielding effect produced by these three layers is similar to
the effect produced by the 3 GCCs above.
r
0

It is easy to see that the gravitational
thrusters are able to produce strong
trusts (similarly to the produced by the
powerful thrusters of the modern
aircrafts) just by consuming the
injected gas for its operation.
It is important to note that, if
is the thrust produced by the
gravitational thruster then, in
agreement with Eq. (5), the spacecraft
acquires an acceleration ,
expressed by the following equation
F
spacecraft
a
( ) ( )
( ) 17
spacecraft i out spacecraft g
spacecraft
M
F
M
F
a

= =
Where
out
, given by Eq. (8), is the
factor of gravitational shielding which
depends on the external medium
where the spacecraft is placed. By
adjusting the shielding for 01 . 0 =
out

and if then for a thrust
, the acceleration of the
spacecraft will be
Kg M
spacecraft
4
10 =
N F
5
10
( ) 18 . 1000
2
= s m a
spacecraft

With this acceleration, in just at 1(one)
day, the velocity of the spacecraft will
be close to the speed of light.
However it is easy to see that
out
can
still be much more reduced and,
consequently, the thrust much more
increased so that it is possible to
increase up to 1 million times the
acceleration of the spacecraft.
It is important to note that, the
inertial effects upon the spacecraft will
be reduced by 01 . 0 =
i g out
M M . Then,
in spite of its effective acceleration to
be , the effects for the crew
of the spacecraft will be equivalents to
an acceleration of only
2
. 1000

= s m a

1
. 10

= s m a
M
M
a
i
g

This is the magnitude of the
acceleration on the passengers in a
contemporary commercial jet.
Then, it is noticed that the
gravitational spacecrafts can be
subjected to enormous accelerations
(or decelerations) without imposing
any harmful impacts whatsoever on
the spacecrafts or its crew.
We can also use the system
shown in Fig. 3, as a lifter, inclusively
within the spacecraft, in order to lift
peoples or things into the spacecraft as
shown in Fig. 5. Just using two GCCs,
the gravitational acceleration produced
below the GCCs will be
11
( ) ( ) ( ) 19
2
0
2 2
r M G g a
g air M air g
=
r

Note that, in this case, if
air
is
negative, the acceleration
g
a
r
will have
a direction contrary to the versor ,
i.e., the body will be attracted in the
direction of the GCCs, as shown in
Fig.5. In practice, this will occur when
the air inside the GCCs is sufficiently
ionized, in such a way that
. Thus, if the internal
thickness of the GCCs is now
1 3
. 10

m S
air

mm d 1 =
and if ; and
, we will then have
. Therefore, for
Hz f 1 =
3
. 1

m kg
air

KV V
rms
10
5
10
air
kg M M
i g
100
and, for example, the
gravitational acceleration acting on the
body will be . It is obvious
that this value can be easily increased
or decreased, simply by varying the
voltage . Thus, by means of this
Gravitational Lifter, we can lift or
lower persons or materials with great
versatility of operation.
m r 10
0

2
. 6 . 0

s m a
b
rms
V
It was shown [1] that, when the
gravitational mass of a particle is
reduced into the range, to
, it becomes imaginary, i.e.,
its masses (gravitational and inertial)
becomes imaginary. Consequently, the
particle disappears from our ordinary
Universe, i.e., it becomes invisible for
us. This is therefore a manner of to
obtain the transitory invisibility of
persons, animals, spacecraft, etc.
However, the factor
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0.
( ) ( ) imaginary i imaginary g
M M = remains real
because

( )
( )
real
M
M
i M
i M
M
M
i
g
i
g
imaginary i
imaginary g
= = = =
Thus, if the gravitational mass of
the particle is reduced by means of the
absorption of an amount of
electromagnetic energy U , for
example, then we have
( )

+ = = 1 1 2 1
2
2
0
c m U
M
M
i
i
g

This shows that the energy U
continues acting on the particle turned
imaginary. In practice this means that
electromagnetic fields act on
imaginary particles. Therefore, the
internal electromagnetic field of a
GCC remains acting upon the particles
inside the GCC even when their
gravitational masses are in the range
i
M 159 0. + to
i
M 159 0. , turning them
imaginaries. This is very important
because it means that the GCCs of a
gravitational spacecraft remain
working even when the spacecraft
becomes imaginary.
Under these conditions, the
gravity accelerations acting on the
imaginary spacecraft, due to the rest of
the Universe will be, as we have see,
given by
n i g g
i i
,..., 2 , 1 = =
Where
( ) ( ) imaginary i imaginary g
M M = and
( )
2
i imaginary gi i
r Gm g = . Thus, the
gravitational forces acting on the
spacecraft will be given by

( )
( ) ( )
( )
( ) ( ) 20 .
2 2
2
i gi g i gi g
j imaginary gj imaginary g
i imaginary g gi
r m GM r i Gm i M
r Gm M
g M F


+ = =
= =
= =

Note that these forces are real. By
calling that, the Machs principle says
that the inertial effects upon a particle
are consequence of the gravitational
interaction of the particle with the rest
12
of the Universe. Then we can conclude
that the inertial forces acting on the
spacecraft in imaginary state are also
real. Therefore, it can travel in the
imaginary space-time using the
gravitational thrusters.






















Fig.5 The Gravitational Lifter If the air inside the
GCCs is sufficiently ionized, in such way that
1 3
. 10

m S
air
and the internal thickness of the
GCCs is now mm d 1 = then, if Hz f 1 = ;
3
. 1

m kg
air
and KV V
rms
10 , we have
5
10
air
. Therefore, for kg M M
i g
100 and
m r 10
0
the gravity acceleration acting on the
body will be
2
. 6 . 0

s m a
b
.
GCC 1
GCC 2
M
g
( ) ( )
2
2 2
b
g
air M air b
r
M
G g a
r r
a
b
air

air


r
b
It was also shown [1] that
imaginary particles can have infinity
velocity in the imaginary space-time.
Therefore, this is also the upper limit
of velocity for the gravitational
spacecrafts traveling in the imaginary
space-time. On the other hand, the
travel in the imaginary space-time can
be very safe, because there will not be
any material body in the trajectory of
the spacecraft.
It is easy to show that the
gravitational forces between two thin
layers of air (with masses and
) around the spacecraft , are
expressed by
1 g
m
2 g
m
( ) ( ) 21
2
2 1 2
21 12

r
m m
G F F
i i
air
= =
r r
Note that these forces can be strongly
increased by increasing the value of
air
. In these circumstances, the air
around the spacecraft would be
strongly compressed upon the external
surface of the spacecraft creating an
atmosphere around it. This can be
particularly useful in order to
minimize the friction between the
spacecraft and the atmosphere of the
planet in the case of very high speed
movements of the spacecraft. With the
atmosphere around the spacecraft the
friction will occur between the
atmosphere of the spacecraft and the
atmosphere of the planet. In this way,
the friction will be minimum and the
spacecraft could travel at very high
speeds without overheating.
However, in order for this to occur,
it is necessary to put the gravitational
shielding in another position as shown
in Fig.2. Thus, the values of
airB

and
airA
will be independent (See
Fig.6). Thus, while inside the
gravitational shielding, the value of
airB
is put close to zero, in order to
strongly reduce the gravitational mass
of the spacecraft (inner part of the
shielding), the value of
airA
must be
reduced to about in order to
strongly increase the gravitational
attraction between the air molecules
around the spacecraft. Thus, by
8
10
13
8
10
airA
substituting intoEq.21, we
get
( ) 22 10
2
2 1 16
21 12

r
m m
G F F
i i
= =
r r
If, and
then Eq. 22 gives
kg m m
air air i i
8
2 1 2 1
10 V V

=
m r
3
10

=
( ) 23 10
4
21 12
N F F

=
r r
These forces are much more intense
than the inter-atomic forces (the forces
that unite the atoms and molecules) the
intensities of which are of the order of
. Consequently, the air
around the spacecraft will be strongly
compressed upon the surface of the
spacecraft and thus will produce a
crust of air which will accompany the
spacecraft during its displacement and
will protect it from the friction with
the atmosphere of the planet.
N
8
10 1000 1





















Fig. 6 Artificial atmosphere around the gravitational
spacecraft - while inside the gravitational shielding
the value of
airB
is putted close to zero, in order to
strongly reduces the gravitational mass of the
spacecraft (inner part of the shielding), the value of
airA
must be reduced for about
8
10 in order to
strongly increase the gravitational attraction between
the air molecules around the spacecraft.
airB

airA

rms
E
Atmosphere
of the
Spacecraft
Gravitational Shielding
(GCC)
Gravitational
Spacecraft



5. The Imaginary Space-time

The speed of light in free space
is, as we know, about of 300.000 km/s.
The speeds of the fastest modern
airplanes of the present time do not
reach 2 km/s and the speed of rockets
do not surpass 20 km/s. This shows
how much our aircraft and rockets are
slow when compared with the speed of
light.
The star nearest to the Earth
(excluding the Sun obviously) is the
Alpha of Centaur, which is about of 4
light-years distant from the Earth
(Approximately 37.8 trillions of
kilometers). Traveling at a speed about
100 times greater than the maximum
speed of our faster spacecrafts, we
would take about 600 years to reach
Alpha of Centaur. Then imagine how
many years we would take to leave our
own galaxy. In fact, it is not difficult
to see that our spacecrafts are very
slow, even for travels in our own solar
system.
One of the fundamental
characteristics of the gravitational
spacecraft, as we already saw, is its
capability to acquire enormous
accelerations without submitting the
crew to any discomfort.
Impelled by gravitational
thrusters gravitational spacecrafts can
acquire accelerations until or
more. This means that these
spacecrafts can reach speeds very
close to the speed of light in just a few
seconds. These gigantic accelerations
can be unconceivable for a layman,
however they are common in our
Universe. For example, when we
submit an electron to an electric field
2 8
. 10

s m
14
of just it acquires an
acceleration , given by
m Volt / 1
a

( )( )
2 11
31
19
. 10
10 11 . 9
/ 1 10 6 . 1

= = s m
m V C
m
eE
a
e


As we see, this acceleration is about
100 times greater than that acquired by
the gravitational spacecraft previously
mentioned.
By using the gravitational
shieldings it is possible to reduce the
inertial effects upon the spacecraft. As
we have shown, they are reduced by
the factor
i g out
M M = . Thus, if the
inertial mass of the spacecraft is
and, by means of the
gravitational shielding effect the
gravitational mass of the spacecraft is
reduced to then , in spite
of the effective acceleration to be
gigantic, for example, , the
effects for the crew of the spacecraft
would be equivalents to an
acceleration of only
kg M
i
000 . 10 =
i g
M M
8
10

2 9
. 10

s m a
a
( )( )
2 9 8
. 10 10 10

= = s m a
M
M
a
i
g
This acceleration is similar to that
which the passengers of a
contemporary commercial jet are
subjected.
Therefore the crew of the
gravitational spacecraft would be
comfortable while the spacecraft
would reach speeds close to the speed
of light in few seconds. However to
travel at such velocities in the
Universe may note be practical. Take
for example, Alpha of Centaur (4
light-years far from the Earth): a round
trip to it would last about eight years.
Trips beyond that star could take then
several decades, and this obviously is
impracticable. Besides, to travel at
such a speed would be very dangerous,
because a shock with other celestial
bodies would be inevitable. However,
as we showed [1] there is a possibility
of a spacecraft travel quickly far
beyond our galaxy without the risk of
being destroyed by a sudden shock
with some celestial body. The solution
is the gravitational spacecraft travel
through the Imaginary or Complex
Space-time.
It was shown [1] that it is
possible to carry out a transition to the
Imaginary space-time or Imaginary
Universe. It is enough that the body
has its gravitational mass reduced to a
value in the range of
to
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0. . In these circumstances,
the masses of the body (gravitational
and inertial) become imaginaries and,
so does the body. (Fig.7).
Consequently, the body disappears
from our ordinary space-time and
appears in the imaginary space-time.
In other words, it becomes invisible
for an observer at the real Universe.
Therefore, this is a way to get
temporary invisibility of human
beings, animals, spacecrafts, etc.
Thus, a spacecraft can leave our
Universe and appear in the Imaginary
Universe, where it can travel at any
speed since in the Imaginary Universe
there is no speed limit for the
gravitational spacecraft, as it occurs in
our Universe, where the particles
cannot surpass the light speed. In this
way, as the gravitational spacecraft is
propelled by the gravitational
thrusters, it can attain accelerations up
to , then after one day of trip
with this acceleration, it can
2 9
. 10

s m
15






transition
( 0.159 > m
g
> +0.159 )



1 light-year




d
AB
= 1 light-year





transition
( 0.159 < m
g
< +0.159 ) m
g

Gravitational Spacecraft

Fig. 7 Travel in the Imaginary Space-time.

t
AB
=1 second
A
B
t
AB
=1 year
photon
V
max
= V
max
= c
reach velocities (about 1
million times the speed of light). With
this velocity, after 1 month of trip the
spacecraft would have traveled
about . In order to have idea of
this distance, it is enough to remind
that the diameter of our Universe
(visible Universe) is of the order
of .
1 14
. 10

s m V
m
21
10
m
26
10
Due to the extremely low
density of the imaginary bodies, the
collision between them cannot have
the same consequences of the collision
between the dense real bodies.
Thus for a gravitational
spacecraft in imaginary state the
problem of the collision doesn't exist
in high-speed. Consequently, the
gravitational spacecraft can transit
freely in the imaginary Universe and,
in this way reach easily any point of
our real Universe once they can make
the transition back to our Universe by
only increasing the gravitational mass
of the spacecraft in such way that it
leaves the range of
to
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0. . Thus the spacecraft can
reappear in our Universe near its
target.
The return trip would be done in
similar way. That is to say, the
spacecraft would transit in the
imaginary Universe back to the
departure place where would reappear
in our Universe and it would make the
approach flight to the wanted point.
Thus, trips through our Universe that
would delay millions of years, at
speeds close to the speed of light,
could be done in just a few months in
the imaginary Universe.
What will an observer see when
in the imaginary space-time? It will
see light, bodies, planets, stars, etc.,
everything formed by imaginary
photons, imaginary atoms, imaginary
protons, imaginary neutrons and
imaginary electrons. That is to say,
the observer will find an Universe
similar to ours, just formed by
particles with imaginary masses. The
term imaginary adopted from the
Mathematics, as we already saw, gives
the false impression that these masses
do not exist. In order to avoid this
misunderstanding we researched the
true nature of that new mass type and
matter.
The existence of imaginary mass
associated to the neutrino is well-
known. Although its imaginary mass is
not physically observable, its square
is. This amount is found
experimentally to be negative.
Recently, it was shown [1] that quanta
of imaginary mass exist associated to
the photons, electrons, neutrons, and
16
protons, and that these imaginary
masses would have psychic properties
(elementary capability of choice).
Thus, the true nature of this new kind
of mass and matter shall be psychic
and, therefore we should not use the
term imaginary any longer.
Consequently from the above exposed
we can conclude that the gravitational
spacecraft penetrates in the Psychic
Universe and not in an imaginary
Universe.
In this Universe, the matter
would be, obviously composed by
psychic molecules and psychic atoms
formed by psychic neutrons, psychic
protons and psychic electrons. i.e., the
matter would have psychic mass and
consequently it would be subtle, much
less dense than the matter of our real
Universe.
Thus, from a quantum viewpoint,
the psychic particles are similar to the
material particles, so that we can use
the Quantum Mechanics to describe
the psychic particles. In this case, by
analogy to the material particles, a
particle with psychic mass will be
described by the following
expressions:

m



h
r
h
r
=
=
E
k p

Where is the momentum
carried by the wave and its energy;
V m p
r
r

E

2 = k
r
is the propagation number
and V m h

=

the wavelength and

f 2 = its cyclic frequency.
The variable quantity that
characterizes DeBroglies waves is
called Wave Function, usually
indicated by . The wave function
associated to a material particle
describes the dynamic state of the
particle: its value at a particular point
x, y, z, t is related to the probability of
finding the particle in that place and
instant. Although does not have a
physical interpretation, its square

2

(or
*
) calculated for a particular
point x, y, z, t is proportional to the
probability of experimentally finding
the particle in that place and instant.
Since
2
is proportional to the
probability P of finding the particle
described by , the integral of
2
on
the whole space must be finite
inasmuch as the particle is someplace.
Therefore, if
0 V
2
=

+

d
The interpretation is that the particle
does not exist. Conversely, if
=

+

V
2
d
the particle will be everywhere
simultaneously.
The wave function
corresponds, as we know, to the
displacement y of the undulatory
motion of a rope. However, as
opposed to y , is not a measurable
quantity and can, hence, being a
complex quantity. For this reason, it is
admitted that is described in the x -
direction by
( )( ) px Et h i
Be

=
2
This equation is the mathematical
description of the wave associated
with a free material particle, with total
energy E and momentum , moving in
the direction
p
x + .
As concerns the psychic
particle, the variable quantity
characterizing psyche waves will also
17
be called wave function, denoted by
( to distinguish it from the material
particle wave function), and, by
analogy with equation of

,
expressed by:
( )( ) x p t E h i
e

=
2
0
If an experiment involves a
large number of identical particles, all
described by the same wave function
, the real density of mass of
these particles in x, y, z, t is
proportional to the corresponding
value ( is known as density of
probability. If is complex then
. Thus, ).
Similarly, in the case of psychic
particles, the density of psychic mass,
2

*
=
2 *
. =
2

, in x, y, z, will be expressed by
. It is known that
is always real and positive while
*

=
2

V m

= is an imaginary quantity.
Thus, as the modulus of an imaginary
number is always real and positive, we
can transform the proportion ,
in equality in the following form:
2



= k
2
Where is a proportionality constant
(real and positive) to be determined.
k
In Quantum Mechanics we have
studied the Superposition Principle,
which affirms that, if a particle (or
system of particles) is in a dynamic
state represented by a wave function
and may also be in another
dynamic state described by then,
the general dynamic state of the
particle may be described by
1

,
where is a linear combination
(superposition) of and , i.e.,

2 2 1 1
+ = c c
The Complex constants e
respectively express the percentage of
dynamic state, represented by
1
c
2
c
1
e
2
in the formation of the general
dynamic state described by .
In the case of psychic particles
(psychic bodies, consciousness, etc.),
by analogy, if
1
, ,..., refer
to the different dynamic states the
psychic particle takes, then its general
dynamic state may be described by the
wave function
2

, given by:
n n
c c c

+ + + = ...
2 2 1 1
The state of superposition of wave
functions is, therefore, common for
both psychic and material particles. In
the case of material particles, it can be
verified, for instance, when an electron
changes from one orbit to another.
Before effecting the transition to
another energy level, the electron
carries out virtual transitions [6]. A
kind of relationship with other
electrons before performing the real
transition. During this relationship
period, its wave function remains
scattered by a wide region of the
space [7] thus superposing the wave
functions of the other electrons. In this
relationship the electrons mutually
influence each other, with the
possibility of intertwining their wave
functions

. When this happens, there

occurs the so-called Phase
Relationship according to quantum-
mechanics concept.
In the electrons virtual
transition mentioned before, the
listing of all the possibilities of the
electrons is described, as we know, by
Schrdingers wave equation.

Since the electrons are simultaneously waves and

particles, their wave aspects will interfere with each
other; besides superposition, there is also the
possibility of occurrence of intertwining of their wave
functions.
18
Otherwise, it is general for material
particles. By analogy, in the case of
psychic particles, we may say that the
listing of all the possibilities of the
psyches involved in the relationship
will be described by Schrdingers
equation for psychic case, i.e.,
0
2
2
2
= +

h
p
Because the wave functions are
capable of intertwining themselves,
the quantum systems may penetrate
each other, thus establishing an
internal relationship where all of them
are affected by the relationship, no
longer being isolated systems but
becoming an integrated part of a larger
system. This type of internal
relationship, which exists only in
quantum systems, was called
Relational Holism [8].
We have used the Quantum
Mechanics in order to describe the
foundations of the Psychic Universe
which the Gravitational Spacecrafts
will find, and that influences us daily.
These foundations recently discovered
particularly the Psychic Interaction,
show us that a rigorous description of
the Universe cannot to exclude the
psychic energy and the psychic
particles. This verification makes
evident the need of to redefine the
Psychology with basis on the quantum
foundations recently discovered. This
has been made in the article: Physical
Foundations of Quantum
Psychology
**
[9], recently published,
where it is shown that the Psychic
Interaction leads us to understand the
Psychic Universe and the
extraordinary relationship that the

**
http://htpprints.yorku.ca/archive/00000297
human consciousnesses establish
among themselves and with the
Ordinary Universe. Besides, we have
shown that the Psychic Interaction
postulates a new model for the
evolution theory, in which the
evolution is interpreted not only as a
biological fact, but mainly as psychic
fact. Therefore, is not only the
mankind that evolves in the Earths
planet, but all the ecosystem of the
Earth.


6. Past and Future

It was shown [1,9] that the
collapse of the psychic wave function
must suddenly also express in reality
(real space-time) all the possibilities
described by it. This is, therefore, a
point of decision in which there occurs
the compelling need of realization of
the psychic form. We have seen that
the materialization of the psychic
form, in the real space-time, occurs
when it contains enough psychic mass
for the total materialization

of the
psychic form (Materialization
Condition). When this happens, all the
psychic energy contained in the
psychic form is transformed in real
energy in the real space-time. Thus, in
the psychic space-time just the
holographic register of the psychic
form, which gives origin to that fact,
survives, since the psychic energy
deforms the metric of the psychic
space-time

, producing the

By this we mean not only materialization proper but

also the movement of matter to realize its psychic
content (including radiation).

As shown in General Theory of Relativity the

energy modifies the metric of the space-time
(deforming the space-time).
19
holographic register. Thus, the past
survive in the psychic space-time just
in the form of holographic register.
That is to say, all that have occurred in
the past is holographically registered
in the psychic space-time. Further
ahead, it will be seen that this register
can be accessed by an observer in the
psychic space-time as well as by an
observer in the real space-time.
A psychic form is intensified by
means of a continuous addition of
psychic mass. Thus, when it acquires
sufficiently psychic mass, its
realization occurs in the real space-
time. Thus the future is going being
built in the present. By means of our
current thoughts we shape the psychic
forms that will go (or will not) take
place in the future. Consequently,
those psychic forms are continually
being holographically registered in the
psychic space-time and, just as the
holographic registrations of the past
these future registration can also be
accessed by the psychic space-time as
well as by the real space-time.
The access to the holographic
registration of the past doesn't allow,
obviously, the modification of the
past. This is not possible because there
would be a clear violation of the
principle of causality that says that the
causes should precede the effects.
However, the psychic forms that are
being shaped now in order to manifest
themselves in the future, can be
modified before they manifest
themselves. Thus, the access to the
registration of those psychic forms
becomes highly relevant for our
present life, since we can avoid the
manifestation of many unpleasant facts
in the future.
Since both registrations are in
the psychic space-time, then the access
to their information only occur by
means of the interaction with another
psychic body, for example, our
consciousness or a psychic observer
(body totally formed by psychic mass).
We have seen that, if the gravitational
mass of a body is reduced to within the
range
i
M 159 0. + to , its
gravitational and inertial masses
become imaginaries (psychics) and,
therefore, the body becomes a psychic
body. Thus, a real observer can also
become in a psychic observer. In this
way, a gravitational spacecraft can
transform all its inertial mass into
psychic mass, and thus carry out a
transition to the psychic space-time
and become a psychic spacecraft. In
these circumstances, an observer
inside the spacecraft also will have its
mass transformed into psychic mass,
and, therefore, the observer also will
be transformed into a psychic
observer. What will this observer see
when it penetrates the psychic
Universe? According to the
Correspondence principle, all that
exists in the real Universe must have
the correspondent in the psychic
Universe and vice-versa. This
principle reminds us that we live in
more than one world. At the present
time, we live in the real Universe, but
we can also live in the psychic
Universe. Therefore, the psychic
observer will see the psychic bodies
and their correspondents in the real
Universe. Thus, a pilot of a
gravitational spacecraft, in travel
through the psychic space-time, won't
have difficulty to spot the spacecraft in
its trips through the Universe.
i
M 159 0.
20
The fact of the psychic forms
manifest themselves in the real space-
time exactly at its images and likeness,
it indicates that real forms (forms in
the real space-time) are prior to all
reflective images of psychic forms of
the past. Thus, the real space-time is a
mirror of the psychic space-time.
Consequently, any register in the
psychic space-time will have a
correspondent image in the real space-
time. This means that it is possible that
we find in the real space-time the
image of the holographic register
existing in the psychic space-time,
corresponding to our past. Similarly,
every psychic form that is being
shaped in the psychic space-time will
have reflective image in the real space-
time. Thus, the image of the
holographic register of our future
(existing in the psychic space-time)
can also be found in the real space-
time.
Each image of the holographic
register of our future will be obviously
correlated to a future epoch in the
temporal coordinate of the space-time.
In the same way, each image of the
holographic registration of our past
will be correlated to a passed time in
the temporal coordinate of the referred
space-time. Thus, in order to access
the mentioned registrations we should
accomplish trips to the past or future
in the real space-time. This is possible
now, with the advent of the
gravitational spacecrafts because they
allow us to reach speeds close to the
speed of light. Thus, by varying the
gravitational mass of the spacecraft for
negative or positive we can go
respectively to the past or future [1].
If the gravitational mass of a
particle is positive, then is always
positive and given by
t

2 2
0
1 c V t t + =

This leads to the well-known
relativistic prediction that the particle
goes to the future if . However,
if the gravitational mass of the particle
is negative, then t is also negative and,
therefore, given by
c V

2 2
0
1 c V t t =

In this case, the prevision is that the
particle goes to the past if . In
this way, negative gravitational mass
is the necessary condition to the
particle to go to the past.
c V
Since the acceleration of a
spacecraft with gravitational mass ,
is given by
g
m
g
m F a = , where is the
thrust of its thrusters, then the more we
reduce the value of the bigger the
acceleration of the spacecraft will be.
However, since the value of cannot
be reduced to the range to
F
g
m
g
m
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0. because the spacecraft
would become a psychic body, and it
needs to remain in the real space-time
in order to access the past or the future
in the real space-time, then, the ideal
values for the spacecraft to operate
with safety would be . Let us
consider a gravitational spacecraft
whose inertial mass is . If
its gravitational mass was made
negative and equal to
i
m 2 . 0
kg m
i
000 . 10 =
kg m m
i g
2000 2 . 0 = = and, at this
instant the thrust produced by the
21
thrusters of the spacecraft was
then, the spacecraft would
acquire acceleration
N F
5
10 =
2
. 50

= = s m m F a
g

and, after , the
speed of the spacecraft would be
. Therefore, right
after that the spacecraft returned to the
Earth, its crew would find the Earth in
the past (due to the negative
gravitational mass of the spacecraft) at
a time
s days t
6
10 5 . 2 30 = =
c s m v 4 . 0 . 10 2 . 1
1 8
= =

2 2
0
1 c V t t = ; is the time
measured by an observer at rest on the
Earth. Thus, if AD, the time
interval would be expressed
by
0
t
2009
0
= t
0
t t t =

years t
t
c V
t t t t
183 091 . 0
1
16 . 0 1
1
1
1
1
0
0
2 2
0 0

= =


That is, the spacecraft would be in the
year 1826 AD. On the other hand, if
the gravitational mass of the spacecraft
would have become positive
, instead of
negative, then the spacecraft would be
in the future at
kg m m
i g
2000 2 . 0 + = + =
years t 183 + = from
2009. That is, it would be in the year
2192 AD.

7. Instantaneous Interestelar
Communications

Consider a cylindrical GCC
(GCC antenna) as shown in Fig.8. The
gravitational mass of the air inside the
GCC is
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 24 1
4
1 2 1
2 2
4
air i
air
air
air g
m
c f
B
m

+ =

Where
( ) ar
is the electric conductivity
of the ionized air inside the GCC
and
( ) ar
is its density; is the
frequency of the magnetic field.
f
By varying B one can vary
and consequently to vary the
gravitational field generated by ,
producing then Gravitational
Radiation. Then a GCC can work as a
Gravitational Antenna.
( ) air g
m
( ) air g
m
Apparently, Newtons theory of
gravity had no gravitational waves
because, if a gravitational field
changed in some way, that change
would have taken place
instantaneously everywhere in space,
and one can think that there is not a
wave in this case. However, we have
already seen that the gravitational
interaction can be repulsive, besides











i

f




(a) Antenna GCC










i i

f f



Transmitter (b) Receiver

Fig. 8 Transmitter and Receiver of Virtual Gravitational Radiation.
Real gravitational waves
v = c
Graviphotons
v =
Graviphoton
v =
GCC
Air
Coil

GCC

GCC
22
attractive. Thus, as with
electromagnetic interaction, the
gravitational interaction must be
produced by the exchange of "virtual"
quanta of spin 1 and mass null, i.e., the
gravitational "virtual" quanta
(graviphoton) must have spin 1 and
not 2. Consequently, the fact that a
change in a gravitational field reaches
instantaneously every point in space
occurs simply due to the speed of the
graviphoton to be infinite. It is known
that there is no speed limit for
virtual photons. On the other hand,
the electromagnetic quanta (virtual
photons) can not communicate the
electromagnetic interaction to an
infinite distance.
Thus, there are two types of
gravitational radiation: the real and
virtual, which is constituted of
graviphotons; the real gravitational
waves are ripples in the space-time
generated by gravitational field
changes. According to Einsteins
theory of gravity the velocity of
propagation of these waves is equal to
the speed of light [10].
Unlike the electromagnetic
waves the real gravitational waves
have low interaction with matter and
consequently low scattering. Therefore
real gravitational waves are suitable as
a means of transmitting information.
However, when the distance between
transmitter and receiver is too
large, for example of the order of
magnitude of several light-years, the
transmission of information by means
of gravitational waves becomes
impracticable due to the long time
necessary to receive the information.
On the other hand, there is no delay
during the transmissions by means of
virtual gravitational radiation. In
addition, the scattering of this
radiation is null. Therefore the virtual
gravitational radiation is very suitable
as a means of transmitting information
at any distances, including
astronomical distances.
As concerns detection of the
virtual gravitational radiation from
GCC antenna, there are many options.
Due to Resonance Principle a similar
GCC antenna (receiver) tuned at the
same frequency can absorb energy
from an incident virtual gravitational
radiation (See Fig.8 (b)).
Consequently, the gravitational mass
of the air inside the GCC receiver will
vary such as the gravitational mass of
the air inside the GCC transmitter.
This will induce a magnetic field
similar to the magnetic field of the
GCC transmitter and therefore the
current through the coil inside the
GCC receiver will have the same
characteristics of the current through
the coil inside the GCC transmitter.
However, the volume and pressure of
the air inside the two GCCs must be
exactly the same; also the type and the
quantity of atoms in the air inside the
two GCCs must be exactly the same.
Thus, the GCC antennas are simple
but they are not easy to build.
Note that a GCC antenna
radiates graviphotons and
gravitational waves simultaneously
(Fig. 8 (a)). Thus, it is not only a
gravitational antenna: it is a Quantum
Gravitational Antenna because it can
also emit and detect gravitational
"virtual" quanta (graviphotons),
which, in turn, can transmit
information instantaneously from any
23
E
distance in the Universe without
scattering.
Due to the difficulty to build
two similar GCC antennas and,
considering that the electric current in
the receiver antenna can be detectable
even if the gravitational mass of the
nuclei of the antennas are not strongly
reduced, then we propose to replace
the gas at the nuclei of the antennas by
a thin dielectric lamina. When the
virtual gravitational radiation strikes
upon the dielectric lamina, its
gravitational mass varies similarly to
the gravitational mass of the dielectric
lamina of the transmitter antenna,
inducing an electromagnetic field
( , B ) similar to the transmitter
antenna. Thus, the electric current in
the receiver antenna will have the
same characteristics of the current in
the transmitter antenna. In this way, it
is then possible to build two similar
antennas whose nuclei have the same
volumes and the same types and
quantities of atoms.
Note that the Quantum
Gravitational Antennas can also be
used to transmit electric power. It is
easy to see that the Transmitter and
Receiver can work with strong
voltages and electric currents. This
means that strong electric power can
be transmitted among Quantum
Gravitational Antennas. This
obviously solves the problem of
wireless electric power transmission.
Thus, we can conclude that the
spacecrafts do not necessarily need to
have a system for generation of
electric energy inside them. Since the
electric energy to be used in the
spacecraft can be instantaneously
transmitted from any point of the
Universe, by means of the above
mentioned systems of transmission
and reception of virtual gravitational
waves.

8. Origin of Gravity and Genesis of
the Gravitational Energy

It was shown [1] that the
virtual quanta of the gravitational
interaction must have spin 1 and not 2,
and that they are virtual photons
(graviphotons) with zero mass outside
the coherent matter. Inside the
coherent matter the graviphotons mass
is non-zero. Therefore, the
gravitational forces are also gauge
forces, because they are yielded by the
exchange of "virtual" quanta of spin 1,
such as the electromagnetic forces and
the weak and strong nuclear forces.
Thus, the gravitational forces
are produced by the exchanging of
virtual photons (Fig.9).
Consequently, this is precisely the
origin of the gravity.
Newtons theory of gravity does
not explain why objects attract one
another; it simply models this
observation. Also Einsteins theory
does not explain the origin of gravity.
Einsteins theory of gravity only
describes gravity with more precision
than Newtons theory does.
Besides, there is nothing in both
theories explaining the origin of the
energy that produces the gravitational
forces. Earths gravity attracts all
objects on the surface of our planet.
This has been going on for over 4.5
billions years, yet no known energy
source is being converted to support
this tremendous ongoing energy
expenditure. Also is the enormous
24
continuous energy expended by
Earths gravitational field for
maintaining the Moon in its orbit -
millennium after millennium. In spite
of the ongoing energy expended by
Earths gravitational field to hold
objects down on surface and the Moon
in orbit, why the energy of the field
never diminishes in strength or drains
its energy source? Is this energy
expenditure balanced by a conversion
of energy from an unknown energy
source?





















Fig. 9 Origin of Gravity: The gravitational forces are
produced by the exchanging of virtual photons
(graviphotons).
Exchanging of virtual photons
(graviphotons)
g

The energy W necessary to support
the effort expended by the
gravitational forces is well-known
and given by
F
r
m M
G Fdr W
g g
r
= =

According to the Principle of Energy

Conservation, the spending of this
energy must be compensated by a
conversion of another type of energy.
The Uncertainty Principle
tells us that, due to the occurrence of
exchange of graviphotons in a time
interval E t < h (where E is the
energy of the graviphoton), the energy
variation E cannot be detected in the
system
g g
m M . Since the total energy
is the sum of the energy of the
graviphotons, i.e.,
W n
n
E E E W + + + = ...
2 1
,
then the energy W cannot be detected
as well. However, as we know it can
be converted into another type of
energy, for example, in rotational
kinetic energy, as in the hydroelectric
plants, or in the Gravitational Motor,
as shown in this work.
It is known that a quantum of
energy hf E = , which varies during a
time interval E c f t < = = h 1
(wave period) cannot be
experimentally detected. This is an
imaginary photon or a virtual
photon. Thus, the graviphotons are
imaginary photons, i.e., the energies
i
E of the graviphotons are
imaginaries energies and therefore the
energy
n
E E E W + + + = ...
2 1
is also
an imaginary energy. Consequently, it
belongs to the imaginary space-time.
It was shown [1] that, imaginary
energy is equal to psychic energy.
Consequently, the imaginary space-
time is, in fact, the psychic space-time,
which contains the Supreme
Consciousness. Since the Supreme
Consciousness has infinite psychic
mass [1], then the psychic space-time
contains infinite psychic energy. This
is highly relevant, because it confers to
the Psychic Universe the characteristic
of unlimited source of energy. Thus,
as the origin of the gravitational
energy it is correlated to the psychic
25
energy, then the spending of
gravitational energy can be supplied
indefinitely by the Psychic Universe.
This can be easily confirmed by
the fact that, in spite of the enormous
amount of energy expended by Earths
gravitational field to hold objects
down on the surface of the planet and
maintain the Moon in its orbit, the
energy of Earths gravitational field
never diminishes in strength or drains
its energy source.



Acknowledgement

The author would like to thank Dr.
Getlio Marques Martins (COPPE
UFRJ, Rio de Janeiro-Brasil) for
revising the manuscript.



































































26

APPENDIX A: The Simplest Method to Control the Gravity

In this Appendix we show the
simplest method to control the gravity.
Consider a body with mass
density and the following electric
characteristics:
r
,
r
, (relative
permeability, relative permittivity and
electric conductivity, respectively).
Through this body, passes an electric
current I , which is the sum of a
sinusoidal current t i i
osc
sin
0
= and the
DC current , i.e.,
DC
I t i I I
DC
sin
0
+ =
; f 2 = . If then
DC
I i <<
0 DC
I I .
Thus, the current I varies with the
frequency , but the variation of its
intensity is quite small in comparison
with , i.e.,
f
DC
I I will be practically
constant (Fig. A1). This is of
fundamental importance for
maintaining the value of the
gravitational mass of the body, ,
sufficiently stable during all the time.
g
m
The gravitational mass of the
body is given by [1]

( ) 1 1 1 2 1
0
2
2
0
A m
c m
U n
m
i
i
r
g

+ =

whereU , is the electromagnetic energy
absorbed by the body and is the
index of refraction of the body.
r
n
Equation (A1) can also be rewritten in
the following form

( ) 2 1 1 2 1
2
2
0
A
c
W n
m
m
r
i
g

+ =

Fig. A1 - The electric current I varies with
frequency f . But the variation of

I is quite small
in comparison with
DC
I due to
DC o
I i << . In this
way, we can consider
DC
I I .
t
I
DC
I = I
DC
+ i
osc
i
0


where, V U W = is the density of
electromagnetic energy and V
0 i
m =
is the density of inertial mass.
The instantaneous values of the
density of electromagnetic energy in
an electromagnetic field can be
deduced from Maxwells equations
and has the following expression

( ) 3
2
2
1
2
2
1
A H E W + =

where t E E
m
sin = and t H H sin = are
the instantaneous values of the electric
field and the magnetic field
respectively.
It is known that H B = ,
r
k B E = [11] and
27
( )
( ) 4
1 1
2
2
A
c
dt
dz
v
r r r

+ +
= = =

where is the real part of the

propagation vector k
r
k
r
(also called
phase constant );
i r
ik k k k + = =
r
; ,
and , are the electromagnetic
characteristics of the medium in which
the incident (or emitted) radiation is
propagating(
0

r
= ;
;
m F/ 10 854 . 8
12
0

=
0

r
= where ). It is
known that for free-space
m / H
7
0
10 4

=
0 = and 1 = =
r r
. Then Eq. (A4)
gives
c v =
From (A4), we see that the index of
refraction v c n
r
= is given by

( ) ( ) 5 1 1
2
2
A
v
c
n
r r
r

+ + = =


Equation (A4) shows that
v
r
= .Thus, v k B E
r
= = , i.e.,
( ) 6 A H v vB E = =
Then, Eq. (A3) can be rewritten in the
following form:
( ) ( ) 7
2
2
1 2 2
2
1
A H H v W + =
For << , Eq. (A4) reduces to

r r
c
v

=

Then, Eq. (A7) gives

2 2
2
1
2
2
2
1
H H H
c
W
r r


= +

=

This equation can be rewritten in the
following forms:
( ) 8
2
A
B
W

=
or
( ) 9
2
A E W =
For >> , Eq. (A4) gives
( ) 10
2
A v

=
Then, from Eq. (A7) we get

( ) 11
2
2
2
1
2
2
1 2 2
2
1 2
2
1
A H
H H H H W

= +

=

Since H v vB E = = , we can rewrite
(A11) in the following forms:
( ) 12
2
2
A
B
W

or
( ) 13
4
2
A E W

By comparing equations (A8) (A9)

(A12) and (A13), we can see that Eq.
(A13) shows that the best way to
obtain a strong value of W in practice
is by applying an Extra Low-
Frequency (ELF) electric field
( ) Hz f w 1 2 << = through a medium
with high electrical conductivity.
Substitution of Eq. (A13) into
Eq. (A2), gives
( ) 14
1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
1
256
1 2 1
1
4 4
1 2 1
0
4
3 2
3
27
0
4
3 2
3
2 3
0
0
2
4
3
2
A
m E
f
m E
f c
m
E
f c
m
i
r
i
r
i g

+ =
=

+ =
=

+ =

Note that t E E
m
sin = .The average
value for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E because
28
E varies sinusoidaly ( is the
maximum value for
m
E
E ). On the other
hand, 2
m rms
E E = . Consequently we
can change
4
E by , and the
equation above can be rewritten as
follows
4
rms
E
0
4
3 2
3
27
1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
i rms
r
g
m E
f
m

+ =

Substitution of the well-known
equation of the Ohm's vectorial Law:
E j = into (A14), we get
( ) 15 1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
0
3 2
4
27
A m
f
j
m
i
rms r
g

+ =

where 2 j j
rms
= .
Consider a 15 cm square
Aluminum thin foil of 10.5 microns
thickness with the following
characteristics: 1 =
r
; ;
. Then, (A15) gives
1 7
. 10 82 . 3

= m S
3
. 2700

= m Kg
( ) 16 1 10 313 . 6 1 2 1
0
3
4
42
A m
f
j
m
i
rms
g

+ =

Now, consider that the ELF electric
current t i I I
DC
sin
0
+ = ,
passes through that Aluminum foil.
Then, the current density is
(
DC
I i <<
0
)
( ) 17 A
S
I
S
I
j
DC rms
rms
=
where

( )
2 6 6
10 57 . 1 10 5 . 10 15 . 0 m m m S

= =

If the ELF electric current has
frequency , then, the
gravitational mass of the aluminum
foil, given by (A16), is expressed by
Hz Hz f
6
10 2 2

= =
[ ] { } ( ) 18 1 13 . 0 1 2 1
1 10 89 . 7 1 2 1
0
4
0
4
4
25
A m I
m
S
I
m
i DC
i
DC
g
+ =
=

+ =

Then,

[ ] { } ( ) 19 1 13 . 0 1 2 1
4
0
A I
m
m
DC
i
g
+ =

For A I
DC
2 . 2 = , the equation above
gives
( ) 20 1
0
A
m
m
i
g

=
This means that the gravitational
shielding produced by the aluminum
foil can change the gravity
acceleration above the foil down to

( ) 21 1 A g g g =

Under these conditions, the Aluminum
foil works basically as a Gravity
Control Cell (GCC).
In order to check these
theoretical predictions, we suggest an
experimental set-up shown in Fig.A2.
A 15cm square Aluminum foil
of 10.5 microns thickness with the
following composition: Al 98.02%; Fe
0.80%; Si 0.70%; Mn 0.10%; Cu
0.10%; Zn 0.10%; Ti 0.08%; Mg
0.05%; Cr 0.05%, and with the
following characteristics: 1 =
r
;
; , is fixed
on a 17 cm square Foam Board
1 7
. 10 82 . 3

= m S
3
. 2700

= m Kg

plate of 6mm thickness as shown in
Fig.A3. This device (the simplest

Foam board is a very strong, lightweight (density:

24.03 kg.m
-3
) and easily cut material used for the
mounting of photographic prints, as backing in picture
framing, in 3D design, and in painting. It consists of
three layers an inner layer of polystyrene clad with
outer facing of either white clay coated paper or
brown Kraft paper.
29
Gravity Control Cell GCC) is placed
on a pan balance shown in Fig.A2.
Above the Aluminum foil, a
sample (any type of material, any
mass) connected to a dynamometer
will check the decrease of the local
gravity acceleration upon the sample
( ) g g = , due to the gravitational
shielding produced by the decreasing
of gravitational mass of the Aluminum
foil ( )
0 i g
m m = . Initially, the sample
lies 5 cm above the Aluminum foil. As
shown in Fig.A2, the board with the
dynamometer can be displaced up to
few meters in height. Thus, the initial
distance between the Aluminum foil
and the sample can be increased in
order to check the reach of the
gravitational shielding produced by the
Aluminum foil.
In order to generate the ELF
electric current of Hz f 2 = , we can
use the widely-known Function
Generator HP3325A (Op.002 High
Voltage Output) that can generate
sinusoidal voltages with extremely-low
frequencies down to and
amplitude up to 20V (40V
Hz f
6
10 1

=
pp
into 500
load). The maximum output current
is ; output impedance <2 at
ELF .
pp
A .08 0
Figure A4 (a) shows the
equivalent electric circuit for the
experimental set-up. The
electromotive forces are:
1
(HP3325A)
and
2
(12V DC Battery).The values
of the resistors are
: ; ; W R 2 500
1
= < 2
1 i
r W R 40 4
2
=
; ; ; Rheostat
(0 R 10 - 90W). The coupling
transformer has the following
characteristics: air core with diameter
< 1 . 0
2 i
r =
3
10 5 . 2
p
R
mm 10 = ; area
2 5 2
10 8 . 7 4 m

= = S ;
wire#12AWG; 20
2 1
= = = N N N ; ; mm l 42 =
( ) H l S N L L L
7 2
0 2 1
10 3 . 9

= = = = .Thus,
we get
( ) ( ) + + = 501
2 2
1 1 1
L r R Z
i

and
( ) ( )
2 2
2 2 2
L R R r R Z
p i
+ + + + =

For 0 = R we get ; for = 4
min
2 2
Z Z
=10 R the result is .
Thus,
= 14
max
2 2
Z Z

+ = + = 505
2
2
1 min
2 1
min
, 1 1
min
, 1
N
N
Z Z Z Z Z
reflected total

+ = + = 515
2
2
1 max
2 1
max
, 1 1
max
, 1
N
N
Z Z Z Z Z
reflected total

The maxima rms currents have
the following values:
mA Z V I
total pp
56 40
min
, 1
2
1
max
1
= =
(The maximum output current of the
Function Generator HP3325A (Op.002
High Voltage Output) is
rms pp
mA mA 5 . 56 80 );
A
Z
I 3
min
2
2 max
2
= =

and
A I I I 3
max
1
max
2
max
3
+ =

The new expression for the
inertial forces, (Eq.5) , shows
that the inertial forces are proportional
to gravitational mass. Only in the
particular case of , the
expression above reduces to the well-
known Newtonian expression
a M F
g i
r
r
=
0 i g
m m =
a m F
i i
r
r
0
= . The equivalence between
gravitational and inertial forces ( )
g i
F F
r r

[1] shows then that a balance measures
the gravitational mass subjected to
30
acceleration . Here, the decrease
in the gravitational mass of the
Aluminum foil will be measured by a
pan balance with the following
characteristics: range 0-200g;
readability 0.01g.
g a =
The mass of the Foam Board
plate is: , the mass of the
Aluminum foil is:
g 17 . 4
g 64 . 0 , the total
mass of the ends and the electric wires
of connection is . Thus, initially
the balance will show .
According to (A18), when the electric
current through the Aluminum foil
(resistance
g 5
g 81 . 9
= =
3 *
10 5 . 2 S l r
p
) reaches
the value , we will get
. Under these
circumstances, the balance will show:
A I 2 . 2
3

( ) ( ) Al i Al g
m m
0


g g g g 53 . 8 64 . 0 64 . 0 81 . 9

and the gravity acceleration above
the Aluminum foil, becomes
.
g
g g g 1 =
It was shown [1] that, when the
gravitational mass of a particle is
reduced to the gravitational mass
ranging between to
, it becomes imaginary, i.e.,
the gravitational and the inertial
masses of the particle become
imaginary. Consequently, the particle
disappears from our ordinary space-
time. This phenomenon can be
observed in the proposed experiment,
i.e., the Aluminum foil will disappear
when its gravitational mass becomes
smaller than . It will become
visible again, only when its
gravitational mass becomes smaller
than
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0.
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0. , or when it becomes
greater than
i
M 159 0. + .
Equation (A18) shows that the
gravitational mass of the Aluminum
foil, , goes close to zero when
. Consequently, the gravity
acceleration above the Aluminum foil
also goes close to zero since
( ) Al g
m
A I 76 . 1
3

( ) ( ) Al i Al g
m m g g
0
= = . Under these
circumstances, the Aluminum foil
remains invisible.
Now consider a rigid Aluminum
wire # 14 AWG. The area of its cross
section is

( )
2 6
2
3
10 08 . 2 4 10 628 . 1 m m S

= =

If an ELF electric current with
frequency passes
through this wire, its gravitational
mass, given by (A16), will be
expressed by
Hz Hz f
6
10 2 2

= =
[ ] { } ( ) 22 1 13 . 0 1 2 1
1 10 89 . 7 1 2 1
1 10 313 . 6 1 2 1
0
4
0
4
4
25
0
3
4
42
A m I
m
S
I
m
f
j
m
i DC
i
DC
i
rms
g
+ =
=

+ =
=

+ =

For A I
DC
3 the equation above gives


0
8 . 3
i g
m m
Note that we can replace the
Aluminum foil for this wire in the
experimental set-up shown in Fig.A2.
It is important also to note that an ELF
electric current that passes through a
wire - which makes a spherical form,
as shown in Fig A5 - reduces the
gravitational mass of the wire (Eq.
31
A22), and the gravity inside sphere at
the same proportion,
0 i g
m m = ,
(Gravitational Shielding Effect). In
this case, that effect can be checked by
means of the Experimental set-up 2
(Fig.A6). Note that the spherical form
can be transformed into an ellipsoidal
form or a disc in order to coat, for
example, a Gravitational Spacecraft. It
is also possible to coat with a wire
several forms, such as cylinders,
cones, cubes, etc.
The circuit shown in Fig.A4 (a)
can be modified in order to produce a
new type of Gravitational Shielding, as
shown in Fig.A4 (b). In this case, the
Gravitational Shielding will be
produced in the Aluminum plate, with
thickness , of the parallel plate
capacitor connected in the point
h
P of
the circuit (See Fig.A4 (b)). Note that,
in this circuit, the Aluminum foil
(resistance ) (Fig.A4(a)) has been
replaced by a Copper wire # 14 AWG
with 1cm length (
p
R
cm l 1 = ) in order to
produce a resistance .
Thus, the voltage in the point
=
5
10 21 . 5

R
P of the
circuit will have the maximum value
when the resistance of
the rheostat is null and the
minimum value when
. In this way, the voltage
(with frequency
V V
p
4 max
10 1 . 1

=
( 0 = R )
V V
p
5 min
10 03 . 4

=
=10 R
p
V Hz f 2 = ) applied
on the capacitor will produce an
electric field with intensity
p
E
h V E
p p
= through the Aluminum plate
of thickness . It is important to
note that this plate cannot be
connected to ground (earth), in other
words, cannot be grounded, because,
in this case, the electric field
through it will be null
mm h 3 =
***
.
According to Eq. A14,
when m V h V E
p p
/ 036 . 0
max max
= = , Hz f 2 = and
,
(Aluminum), we get
m S
Al
/ 10 82 . 3
7
=
3
/ 2700 m kg
Al
=
( )
( )
9 . 0 =
Al i
Al
m
m

Under these conditions, the maximum

current density through the plate with
thickness will be given by
(It is well-
known that the maximum current
density supported by the Aluminum
is ).
h
2 6 max max
/ 10 4 . 1 m A E j
p Al
= =
2 8
/ 10 m A
Since the area of the plate is
( )
2 2 2
10 4 2 . 0 m A

= = , then the maximum
current is . Despite
this enormous current, the maximum
dissipated power will be just
kA A j i 56
max max
= =
( ) W R i P
plate
2 . 6
2
max max
= = , because the
resistance of the plate is very small,
i.e., =
9
10 2 A h R
Al plate
.
Note that the area of the plate
(where the Gravitational Shielding
takes place) can have several
geometrical configurations. For
example, it can be the area of the
external surface of an ellipsoid, sphere,
etc. Thus, it can be the area of the
external surface of a Gravitational
Spacecraft. In this case, if ,
for example, the maximum dissipated
A
2
100m A

***
When the voltage V
p
is applied on the capacitor, the
charge distribution in the dielectric induces positive
and negative charges, respectively on opposite sides of
the Aluminum plate with thickness h. If the plate is
not connected to the ground (Earth) this charge
distribution produces an electric field E
p
=V
p
/h through
the plate. However, if the plate is connected to the
ground, the negative charges (electrons) escapes for
the ground and the positive charges are redistributed
along the entire surface of the Aluminum plate making
null the electric field through it.
32
power will be , i.e.,
approximately .
kW P 4 . 15
max

2
/ 154 m W
All of these systems work with
Extra-Low Frequencies ( ) Hz f
3
10

<< .
Now, we show that, by simply
changing the geometry of the surface
of the Aluminum foil, it is possible to
increase the working frequency up
to more than 1Hz.
f
Consider the Aluminum foil,
now with several semi-spheres
stamped on its surface, as shown in
Fig. A7 . The semi-spheres have
radius , and are joined one
to another. The Aluminum foil is now
coated by an insulation layer with
relative permittivity
mm r 9 . 0
0
=
r
and dielectric
strength . A voltage source is
connected to the Aluminum foil in
order to provide a voltage (rms)
with frequency . Thus, the electric
potential at a distance
k
0
V
f
V r , in the
interval from to , is given by
0
r a
( ) 23
4
1
0
A
r
q
V
r

=
In the interval the electric
potential is
b r a <
( ) 24
4
1
0
A
r
q
V

=
since for the air we have 1
r
.
Thus, on the surface of the
metallic spheres ( we get )
0
r r =
( ) 25
4
1
0 0
0
A
r
q
V
r

=
Consequently, the electric field is
( ) 26
4
1
2
0 0
0
A
r
q
E
r

=
By comparing (A26) with (A25), we
obtain
( ) 27
0
0
0
A
r
V
E =
The electric potential at is
b
V b r =
( ) 28
4
1
0 0
0
A
b
r V
b
q
V
r
b

= =
Consequently, the electric field is
given by
b
E
( ) 29
4
1
2
0 0
2
0
A
b
r V
b
q
E
r
b

= =
From
0
r r = up to d a b r + = = the
electric field is approximately constant
(See Fig. A7). Along the distance it
will be called . For
d
air
E d a r + > , the
electric field stops being constant.
Thus, the intensity of the electric field
at d a b r + = = is approximately equal
to , i.e.,
0
E
0
E E
b
. Then, we can write
that
( ) 30
0
0
2
0 0
A
r
V
b
r V
r

whence we get
( ) 31
0
A r b
r

Since the intensity of the electric field
through the air, , is
air
E
0
E E E
b air
,
then, we can write that
( ) 32
4
1
2
0 0
2
0
A
b
r V
b
q
E
r
air

= =
Note that,
r
refers to the relative
permittivity of the insulation layer,
which is covering the Aluminum foil.
If the intensity of this field is
greater than the dielectric strength of
the air ( ) m V / 10 3
6
there will occur the
well-known Corona effect. Here, this
effect is necessary in order to increase
the electric conductivity of the air at
this region (layer with thickness d).
Thus, we will assume
m V
r
V
b
r V
E
r
air
/ 10 3
6
0
min
0
2
0
min
0 min
= = =

and
( ) 33 / 10 1
7
0
max
0
2
0
max
0 max
A m V
r
V
b
r V
E
r
air
= = =

The electric field will

max min
air air air
E E E
33
produce an electrons flux in a direction
and an ions flux in an opposite
direction. From the viewpoint of
electric current, the ions flux can be
considered as an electrons flux at the
same direction of the real electrons
flux. Thus, the current density through
the air, , will be the double of the
current density expressed by the well-
known equation of Langmuir-Child
air
j
( ) 34 10 33 . 2
2
9
4
2
6
2 2
0
2
3
2
3
2
3
A
d
V
d
V
d
V
m
e
j
e
r

= = =
where 1
r
for the air;
is the called Childs constant.
6
10 33 . 2

=
Thus, we have
( ) 35 2
2
2
3
A
d
V
j
air
=
where , in this case, is the thickness
of the air layer where the electric field
is approximately constant and V is the
voltage drop given by
d
( ) 36
4
1
4
1
0
0
0 0
0 0
A V
d r a b
r V
b
q
a
q
V V V
r
r
b a

=
= = =

ab ab

By substituting (A36) into (A35), we
get
( ) 37
2
2 2
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
3
2
0 0 0 0
2
A
a
b
E
d
a
b
b
V r
d
ab
dV r
d
j
air
r r
air

=
=

According to the equation of the
Ohm's vectorial Law: E j = , we can
write that
( ) 38 A
j
air
air
=
E
air
Substitution of (A37) into (A38) yields
( ) 39 2
2
3
2
1
A
a
b
d
E
air
air

=
If the insulation layer has
thickness , mm 6 . 0 = 5 . 3
r
(1-
60Hz), mm kV k / 17 = (Acrylic sheet
1.5mm thickness), and the semi-
spheres stamped on the metallic
surface have (See Fig.A7)
then
mm r 9 . 0
0
=
mm r a 5 . 1
0
= + = . Thus, we obtain
from Eq. (A33) that
kV V 7 . 2
min
0
=
( ) 40 9
max
0
A kV V =
From equation (A31), we obtain the
following value for b :

( ) 41 10 68 . 1
3
0
A m
r

= r b =

Since d a b + = we get

m
4
=
d
d 10 8 . 1

Substitution of a, , and A(32) into
(A39) produces
b
2
1
0
4
10 117 . 4 V E
air air

=
2
1
2
10 375 . 1

=

Substitution of
air
, and
into (A14) gives
( ) rms E
air
3
. 2 . 1

= m kg
air

( )
( )
( ) 42 10 923 . 4 1 2 1
1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
3 2
4 3
27
0
A
f
E
m
m
air
air air
air i
air g

+ =
=

+ =

Hz f 2 =
( )
1
3
5 . 5
0 21
f
V

For and , the

result is
kV V V 9
max
0 0
= =
( )
2 . 1
0

i
air g
m
m
air
air
Note that, by increasing the
values of and
0
V
air
E are increased.
Thus, as show (A42), there are two
ways for decrease the value of
)
m :
increasing the value of V or
decreasing the value of .
(air g
0
f
34
mm kV m V E / 10 / 10
7 max
0
= =
mm 6 . 0 =
mm
/
air
E
d
v
Since and
then the dielectric strength
of the insulation must be .
As mentioned above, the dielectric
strength of the acrylic is .
kV / 7 . 16
mm kV 17
It is important to note that, due
to the strong value of (Eq. A37)
the drift velocity ,
( ne E ne j v
air air air d
) = = of the free
charges inside the ionized air put them
at a distance m fv t v x
d d
4 . 0 2 = = , which is
much greater than the distance
. Consequently, the number
of free charges decreases strongly
inside the air layer of thickness
m d
4
10 8 . 1

=
n
d

,
except, obviously, in a thin layer, very
close to the dielectric, where the
number of free charges remains
sufficiently increased, to maintain the
air conductivity with m S
air
/ 1 . 1 (Eq.
A39).
The thickness of this thin air
layer close to the dielectric can be
easily evaluated starting from the
charge distribution in the
neighborhood of the dielectric, and of
the repulsion forces established among
them. The result is
h
m E e h
9
0
10 4 4 06 . 0

= . This is,
therefore, the thickness of the Air
Gravitational Shielding. If the area of
this Gravitational Shielding is equal to
the area of a format A4 sheet of paper,
i.e., , we obtain
the following value for the resistance
of the Gravitational Shielding:
2
0582 . 0 291 . 0 20 . 0 m A = =
air
R
=
8
10 6 A h R
air air
. Since the
maximum electrical current through
this air layer is , then
the maximum power radiated from the
kA A j i 400
max max
=

Reducing therefore the conductivity,

air
, to the
normal value of the conductivity of atmospheric air.
Gravitational Shielding is
( ) kW i R P
air air air
10
2
max max
= . This means that
a very strong light will be radiated
from this type of Gravitational
Shielding. Note that this device can
also be used as a lamp, which will be
much more efficient than conventional
lamps.
Coating a ceiling with this
lighting system enables the entire area
of ceiling to produce light. This is a
form of lighting very different from
those usually known.
Note that the value ,
defines the power of the transformer
shown in Fig.A10. Thus, the
maximum current in the secondary is
kW P
air
10
max

A kW kV i
s
9 . 0 10 9
max
= = .
Above the Gravitational
Shielding,
air
is reduced to the
normal value of conductivity of the
atmospheric air ( ) m S / 10
14
. Thus, the
power radiated from this region is

( )( )
( ) ( ) W E A h d
A i h d P
air air
air air air
4
2
max
2
max max
10

=
= =

Now, we will describe a method
to coat the Aluminum semi-spheres
with acrylic in the necessary
dimension ( )
0
r a = . First, take an
Aluminum plate with cm cm 1 . 29 21
(A4 format). By means of a convenient
process, several semi-spheres can be
stamped on its surface. The semi-
spheres have radius , and
are joined one to another. Next, take
an acrylic sheet (A4 format) with
1.5mm thickness (See Fig.A8 (a)).
Put a heater below the Aluminum plate
in order to heat the Aluminum (Fig.A8
(b)). When the Aluminum is
mm r 9 . 0
0
=
35
sufficiently heated up, the acrylic sheet
and the Aluminum plate are pressed,
one against the other, as shown in Fig.
A8 (c). The two D devices shown in
this figure are used in order to impede
that the press compresses the acrylic
and the aluminum to a distance shorter
than . After some seconds, remove
the press and the heater. The device is
ready to be subjected to a voltage
with frequency , as shown in Fig.A9.
Note that, in this case, the balance is
not necessary, because the substance
that produces the gravitational
shielding is an air layer with thickness
above the acrylic sheet. This is,
therefore, more a type of Gravity
Control Cell (GCC) with external
gravitational shielding.
a y +
0
V
f
d
It is important to note that this
GCC can be made very thin and as
flexible as a fabric. Thus, it can be
used to produce anti- gravity clothes.
These clothes can be extremely useful,
for example, to walk on the surface of
high gravity planets.
Figure A11 shows some
geometrical forms that can be stamped
on a metallic surface in order to
produce a Gravitational Shielding
effect, similar to the produced by the
semi-spherical form.
An obvious evolution from the
semi-spherical form is the semi-
cylindrical form shown in Fig. A11
(b); Fig.A11(c) shows concentric
metallic rings stamped on the metallic
surface, an evolution from Fig.A11
(b). These geometrical forms produce
the same effect as the semi-spherical
form, shown in Fig.A11 (a). By using
concentric metallic rings, it is possible
to build Gravitational Shieldings
around bodies or spacecrafts with
several formats (spheres, ellipsoids,
etc); Fig. A11 (d) shows a
Gravitational Shielding around a
Spacecraft with ellipsoidal form.
The previously mentioned
Gravitational Shielding, produced on a
thin layer of ionized air, has a
behavior different from the
Gravitational Shielding produced on a
rigid substance. When the
gravitational masses of the air
molecules, inside the shielding, are
reduced to within the range
i g i
m m m 159 . 0 159 . 0 < < + , they go to
the imaginary space-time, as
previously shown in this article.
However, the electric field stays at
the real space-time. Consequently, the
molecules return immediately to the
real space-time in order to return soon
after to the imaginary space-time, due
to the action of the electric field .
air
E
air
E
In the case of the Gravitational
Shielding produced on a solid
substance, when the molecules of the
substance go to the imaginary space-
time, the electric field that produces
the effect, also goes to the imaginary
space-time together with them, since in
this case, the substance of the
Gravitational Shielding is rigidly
connected to the metal that produces
the electric field. (See Fig. A12 (b)).
This is the fundamental difference
between the non-solid and solid
Gravitational Shieldings.
Now, consider a Gravitational
Spacecraft that is able to produce an
Air Gravitational Shielding and also a
Solid Gravitational Shielding, as
36
i g i
m m m 159 . 0 159 . 0 < < +

shown in Fig. A13 (a)

. Assuming
that the intensity of the electric field,
, necessary to reduce the
gravitational mass of the air molecules
to within the range
, is much
smaller than the intensity of the
electric field, , necessary to reduce
the gravitational mass of the solid
substance to within the range
, then we
conclude that the Gravitational
Shielding made of ionized air goes to
the imaginary space-time before the
Gravitational Shielding made of solid
substance. When this occurs the
spacecraft does not go to the
imaginary space-time together with the
Gravitational Shielding of air, because
the air molecules are not rigidly
connected to the spacecraft. Thus,
while the air molecules go into the
imaginary space-time, the spacecraft
stays in the real space-time, and
remains subjected to the effects of the
Gravitational Shielding around it,
since the shielding does not stop to
work, due to its extremely short
permanence at the imaginary space-
air
E
i g i
m m m 159 . 0 159 . 0 < < +
rs
E

The solid Gravitational Shielding can also be

obtained by means of an ELF electric current through
a metallic lamina placed between the semi-spheres
and the Gravitational Shielding of Air (See Fig.A13
(a)). The gravitational mass of the solid Gravitational
Shielding will be controlled just by means of the
intensity of the ELF electric current. Recently, it was
discovered that Carbon nanotubes (CNTs) can be
added to Alumina (Al
2
O
3
) to convert it into a good
electrical conductor. It was found that the electrical
conductivity increased up to 3375 S/m at 77C in
samples that were 15% nanotubes by volume [12]. It
is known that the density of -Alumina is
3.9810
3
kg.m
-3
and that it can withstand 10-20
KV/mm. Thus, these values show that the Alumina-
CNT can be used to make a solid Gravitational
Shielding.

time. Under these circumstances,
the gravitational mass of the
Gravitational Shielding can be reduced
to 0
g
m m
g
kg m
i
1
0
. For example, .
Thus, if the inertial mass of the
Gravitational Shielding is
kg
4
10

,
then
4
0
10

i
=
g
m m
2 5
. 10

= s m a
. As we have
seen, this means that the inertial
effects on the spacecraft will be
reduced by . Then, in spite of the
effective acceleration of the spacecraft
be, for example, , the effects
on the crew of the spacecraft will be
equivalent to an acceleration of only
4
10

1
0
. 10

= = s m a a
m
m
a
i
g

This is the magnitude of the
acceleration upon the passengers in a
contemporary commercial jet.
Then, it is noticed that
Gravitational Spacecrafts can be
subjected to enormous accelerations
(or decelerations) without imposing
any harmful impacts whatsoever on
the spacecrafts or its crew.
Now, imagine that the intensity
of the electric field that produces the
Gravitational Shielding around the
spacecraft is increased up to reaching
the value that reduces the
gravitational mass of the solid
Gravitational Shielding to within the
range
rs
E
i g i
m m m 159 . 0 159 . 0 < < + . Under
these circumstances, the solid
Gravitational Shielding goes to the
imaginary space-time and, since it is
rigidly connected to the spacecraft,
also the spacecraft goes to the
imaginary space-time together with the
Gravitational Shielding. Thus, the
spacecraft can travel within the
37
)
imaginary space-time and make use of
the Gravitational Shielding around it.
As we have already seen, the
maximum velocity of propagation of
the interactions in the imaginary
space-time is infinite (in the real
space-time this limit is equal to the
light velocity ). This means that there
are no limits for the velocity of the
spacecraft in the imaginary space-
time. Thus, the acceleration of the
spacecraft can reach, for example,
, which leads the spacecraft
to attain velocities (about
1 million times the speed of light) after
one day of trip. With this velocity,
after 1 month of trip the spacecraft
would have traveled about . In
order to have idea of this distance, it is
enough to remind that the diameter of
our Universe (visible Universe) is of
the order of .
c
2 9
. 10

= s m a
1 14
. 10

s m V
m
21
10
m
26
10
Due to the extremely low
density of the imaginary bodies, the
collision between them cannot have
the same consequences of the collision
between the real bodies.
Thus, for a Gravitational
Spacecraft in imaginary state, the
problem of the collision in high-speed
doesn't exist. Consequently, the
Gravitational Spacecraft can transit
freely in the imaginary Universe and,
in this way, reach easily any point of
our real Universe once they can make
the transition back to our Universe by
only increasing the gravitational mass
of the Gravitational Shielding of the
spacecraft in such way that it leaves
the range of to .
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0.
The return trip would be done in
similar way. That is to say, the
spacecraft would transit in the
imaginary Universe back to the
departure place where would
reappear in our Universe. Thus, trips
through our Universe that would delay
millions of years, at speeds close to the
speed of light, could be done in just a
few months in the imaginary Universe.
In order to produce the
acceleration of upon the
spacecraft we propose a Gravitational
Thruster with 10 GCCs (10
Gravitational Shieldings) of the type
with several semi-spheres stamped on
the metallic surface, as previously
shown, or with the semi-cylindrical
form shown in Figs. A11 (b) and (c).
The 10 GCCs are filled with air at 1
atm and 300K. If the insulation layer is
made with Mica
2 9
. 10

s m a
( 4 . 5
r
and has
thickness , and the semi-
spheres stamped on the metallic
surface have (See Fig.A7)
then
mm 1 . 0 =
mm r 4 . 0
0
=
mm r a 5 . 0
0
= + = . Thus, we get
m r b
r
4
0
10 295 . 9

= =
and
m a b d
4
10 295 . 4

= =
Then, from Eq. A42 we obtain
( )
( )

+ =
=

+ = =

1 10 0 . 1 1 2 1
1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
3
5 . 5
0 18
3 2
4 3
27
0
f
V
f
E
m
m
air
air air
air i
air g
air

For and kV V V 6 . 15
max
0 0
= = Hz f 12 . 0 = , the
result is

( )
( )
4
0
10 6 . 1 =
air i
air g
air
m
m

Since
0
max
0
max
0
r V E = is now given by
mm kV mm kV E / 3 . 17 9 . 0 6 . 15
max
0
= = and
then the dielectric strength of the
insulation must be . As
mm 1 . 0 =
mm kV / 173
38
shown in the table below

, 0.1mm -
thickness of Mica can withstand 17.6
kV (that is greater than ), in
such way that the dielectric strength is
176 kV/mm.
kV V 6 . 15
max
0
=
The Gravitational Thrusters are
positioned at the spacecraft, as shown
in Fig. A13 (b). Then, when the
spacecraft is in the intergalactic space,
the gravity acceleration upon the
gravitational mass of the bottom
of the thruster (See Fig.A13 (c)), is
given by [
gt
m
2]
( ) ( )
2
10 10
r
M
G g a
g
air M air

r r
)

where is the gravitational mass in
front of the spacecraft.
g
M
For simplicity, let us consider
just the effect of a hypothetical volume
of intergalactic
matter in front of the spacecraft
. The average density of
matter in the intergalactic medium
(IGM) is )
3 7 3 3
10 10 10 10 m V = =
( m r 30
3 26
. 10

m kg
ig

****
. Thus,
for we get
4
10 6 . 1
air

The dielectric strength of some dielectrics can have

different values in lower thicknesses. This is, for
example, the case of the Mica.
Dielectric Thickness (mm) Dielectric Strength (kV/mm)
Mica 0.01 mm 200
Mica 0.1 mm 176
Mica 1 mm 61

****
Some theories put the average density of the
Universe as the equivalent of one hydrogen atom per
cubic meter [13,14]. The density of the universe,
however, is clearly not uniform. Surrounding and
stretching between galaxies, there is rarefied plasma
[15] that is thought to possess a cosmic filamentary
structure [16] and that is slightly denser than the
average density in the universe. This material is called
the intergalactic medium (IGM) and is mostly ionized
hydrogen; i.e. a plasma consisting of equal numbers of
electrons and protons. The IGM is thought to exist at a
density of 10 to 100 times the average density of the
Universe (10 to 100 hydrogen atoms per cubic meter,
i.e., ).
3 26
. 10

m kg
( ) ( )
2 9
2
19
11
10
4
. 10
30
10
10 67 . 6 10 6 . 1

=
=

=
s m
a

In spite of this gigantic acceleration,
the inertial effects for the crew of the
spacecraft can be strongly reduced if,
for example, the gravitational mass of
the Gravitational Shielding is reduced
down to and its inertial
mass is
kg m
g
6
10

kg m
i
100
0
. Then, we get
8
0
10

=
i g
m m . Therefore, the
inertial effects on the spacecraft will
be reduced by , and
consequently, the inertial effects on
the crew of the spacecraft would be
equivalent to an acceleration a of only
8
10

( )( )
2 9 8
0
. 10 10 10

= = s m a
m
m
a
i
g
Note that the Gravitational Thrusters
in the spacecraft must have a very
small diameter (of the order of
millimeters) since, obviously, the hole
through the Gravitational Shielding
cannot be large. Thus, these thrusters
are in fact, Micro-Gravitational
Thrusters. As shown in Fig. A13 (b),
it is possible to place several micro-
gravitational thrusters in the
spacecraft. This gives to the
Gravitational Spacecraft, several
degrees of freedom and shows the
enormous superiority of this spacecraft
in relation to the contemporaries
spacecrafts.
The density of matter in the
intergalactic medium (IGM) is about
10
-26
kg.m
-3
, which is very less than
the density of matter in the interstellar
medium (~10
-21
kg.m
-3
) that is less than
the density of matter in the
interplanetary medium (~10
-20
kg.m
-3
).
The density of matter is enormously
39
increased inside the Earths
atmosphere (1.2kg.m
-3
near to Earths
surface). Figure A14 shows the
gravitational acceleration acquired by
a Gravitational Spacecraft, in these
media, using Micro-Gravitational
thrusters.
In relation to the Interstellar and
Interplanetary medium, the
Intergalactic medium requires the
greatest value of
air
( inside the
Micro-Gravitational Thrusters), i.e.,
. This value strongly
decreases when the spacecraft is
within the Earths atmosphere. In this
case, it is sufficient only
4
10 6 . 1
air

10
air
in
order to obtain:
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( )
2 4
2
7
11 10
2
10
. 10
20
10 2 . 1
10 67 . 6 10


=
s m
r
V
G a
atm
air

With this acceleration the

Gravitational Spacecraft can reach
about 50000 km/h in a few seconds.
Obviously, the Gravitational Shielding
of the spacecraft will reduce strongly
the inertial effects upon the crew of the
spacecraft, in such way that the inertial
effects of this strong acceleration will
not be felt. In addition, the artificial
atmosphere, which is possible to build
around the spacecraft, by means of
gravity control technologies shown in
this article (See Fig.6) and [2], will
protect it from the heating produced
by the friction with the Earths

This value is within the range of values of

( ) 15 . . 10
3
A Eq See < , which can be produced by
means of ELF electric currents through metals as
Aluminum, etc. This means that, in this case, if
convenient, we can replace air inside the GCCs of the
Gravitational Micro-thrusters by metal laminas with
ELF electric currents through them.
atmosphere. Also, the gravity can be
controlled inside of the Gravitational
Spacecraft in order to maintain a value
close to the Earths gravity as shown
in Fig.3.
Finally, it is important to note
that a Micro-Gravitational Thruster
does not work outside a Gravitational
Shielding, because, in this case, the
resultant upon the thruster is null due
to the symmetry (See Fig. A15 (a)).
Figure A15 (b) shows a micro-
gravitational thruster inside a
Gravitational Shielding. This thruster
has 10 Gravitational Shieldings, in
such way that the gravitational
acceleration upon the bottom of the
thruster, due to a gravitational mass
in front of the thruster, is
where
g
M
0
10
10
a a
air
=
2
0
r M G a
g
= is the
gravitational acceleration acting on
the front of the micro-gravitational
thruster. In the opposite direction, the
gravitational acceleration upon the
bottom of the thruster, produced by a
gravitational mass , is
g
M
( ) 0
2
0
= r GM a
g s

since 0
s
due to the Gravitational
Shielding around the micro-thruster
(See Fig. A15 (b)). Similarly, the
acceleration in front of the thruster is
( ) [ ]
s g air air
r GM a a
2 10
0
10
10
= =
where ( ) [ ]
10
2 10
a r GM
g air
< , since r r > .
Thus, for and we
conclude that . This means
that . Therefore, we can write
that the resultant on the micro-thruster
can be expressed by means of the
following relation
2 9
10
. 10

s m a
8
10

2
10
. 10

< s m a
10 10
a a <<

0
10
10
F F R
air
=

40
Figure A15 (c) shows a Micro-
Gravitational Thruster with 10 Air
Gravitational Shieldings (10 GCCs).
Thin Metallic laminas are placed after
each Air Gravitational Shielding in
order to retain the electric
field x V E
b 0
= , produced by metallic
surface behind the semi-spheres. The
laminas with semi-spheres stamped on
its surfaces are connected to the ELF
voltage source and the thin laminas
in front of the Air Gravitational
Shieldings are grounded. The air
inside this Micro-Gravitational
Thruster is at 300K, 1atm.
0
V
We have seen that the insulation
layer of a GCC can be made up of
Acrylic, Mica, etc. Now, we will
design a GCC using Water (distilled
water,
( )
80
2
=
O H r
) and Aluminum semi-
cylinders with radius . Thus,
for , the new value of
is . Then, we get
mm r 3 . 1
0
=
mm 6 . 0 = a
mm a 9 . 1 =
( )
( ) 43 10 63 . 11
3
0
2
A m r b
O H r

= =
( ) 44 10 73 . 9
3
A m a b d

= =
and
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 45 1 . 1111
4
1
0
0
0 0 0
2
0 0
2
0
2
A V
r
V r V
b
r V
b
q
E
air r
air r
r
air r
air
O
H
= =
= =
= =

Note that
( )
( ) O H r
O H
r V
E
2
2
0 0

=
and
( )
( ) acrylic r
acrylic
r V
E

0 0
=
Therefore, and are much
smaller than . Note that for
the intensities of and
are not sufficient to produce
the ionization effect, which increases
the electrical conductivity.
Consequently, the conductivities of the
water and the acrylic remain .
In this way, with and
much smaller than , and
( O H
E
2
) )
)
)
)
(acrylic
E
air
E
kV V 9
0

( O H
E
2
(acrylic
E
1
. 1

<< m S
( O H
E
2
( ) acrylic
E
air
E
( )
1
2
<<
O H
,
( )
1 <<
acrylic
, the decrease in both the
gravitational mass of the acrylic and
the gravitational mass of water,
according to Eq.A14, is negligible.
This means that only in the air layer
the decrease in the gravitational mass
will be relevant.
Equation A39 gives the electrical
conductivity of the air layer, i.e.,
( ) 46 029 . 0 2
2
1
2
3
2
1
0
A V
a
b
d
E
air
air
=

=
Note that
( ) O H r
r b
2
0
= . Therefore, here
the value of b is larger than in the case
of the acrylic. Consequently, the
electrical conductivity of the air layer
will be larger here than in the case of
acrylic.
Substitution of
( ) air
, (rms)
and into Eq. A14, gives
air
E
3
. 2 . 1

= m kg
air

( )
( )
( ) 47 1 10 54 . 4 1 2 1
3
5 . 5
0 20
0
A
f
V
m
m
air i
air g

+ =

For and , the
result is
kV V V 9
max
0 0
= = Hz f 2 =
( )
( )
4 . 8
0

air i
air g
m
m
This shows that, by using water
instead of acrylic, the result is much
better.
In order to build the GCC based
on the calculations above (See Fig.
A16), take an Acrylic plate with
885mm X 885m and 2mm thickness,
then paste on it an Aluminum sheet
41
with 895.2mm X 885mm and 0.5mm
thickness(note that two edges of the
Aluminum sheet are bent as shown in
Figure A16 (b)). Next, take 342
Aluminum yarns with 884mm length
and 2.588mm diameter (wire # 10
AWG) and insert them side by side on
the Aluminum sheet. See in Fig. A16
(b) the detail of fixing of the yarns on
the Aluminum sheet. Now, paste
acrylic strips (with 13.43mm height
and 2mm thickness) around the
Aluminum/Acrylic, making a box. Put
distilled water (approximately 1 litter)
inside this box, up to a height of
exactly 3.7mm from the edge of the
acrylic base. Afterwards, paste an
Acrylic lid (889mm X 889mm and 2mm
thickness) on the box. Note that above
the water there is an air layer with
885mm X 885mm and 7.73mm
thickness (See Fig. A16). This
thickness plus the acrylic lid thickness
(2mm) is equal to
where
mm a b d 73 . 9 = =
( )
mm r b
O H r
63 . 11
2
0
= = and
, since , mm r a 99 . 1
0
= + = mm r 3 . 1
0
=
( )
80
2
=
O H r
and . mm 6 . 0 =
Note that the gravitational action
of the electric field , extends itself
only up to the distance , which, in
this GCC, is given by the sum of the
Air layer thickness (7.73mm) plus the
thickness of the Acrylic lid (2mm).
air
E
d
Thus, it is ensured the
gravitational effect on the air layer
while it is practically nullified in the
acrylic sheet above the air layer, since
and
( ) air acrylic
E E <<
( )
1 <<
acrylic
.
With this GCC, we can carry out
an experiment where the gravitational
mass of the air layer is progressively
reduced when the voltage applied to
the GCC is increased (or when the
frequency is decreased). A precision
balance is placed below the GCC in
order to measure the mentioned mass
decrease for comparison with the
values predicted by Eq. A(47). In total,
this GCC weighs about 6kg; the air
layer 7.3grams. The balance has the
following characteristics: range 0-6kg;
readability 0.1g. Also, in order to
prove the Gravitational Shielding
Effect, we can put a sample (connected
to a dynamometer) above the GCC in
order to check the gravity acceleration
in this region.
In order to prove the exponential
effect produced by the superposition of
the Gravitational Shieldings, we can
take three similar GCCs and put them
one above the other, in such way that
above the GCC 1 the gravity
acceleration will be ; above the
GCC2 , and above the GCC3
. Where
g g =
g g
2
=
g g
3
= is given by Eq.
(A47).
It is important to note that the
intensity of the electric field through
the air below the GCC is much smaller
than the intensity of the electric field
through the air layer inside the GCC.
In addition, the electrical conductivity
of the air below the GCC is much
smaller than the conductivity of the air
layer inside the GCC. Consequently,
the decrease of the gravitational mass
of the air below the GCC, according to
Eq.A14, is negligible. This means that
the GCC1, GCC2 and GCC3 can be
simply overlaid, on the experiment
proposed above. However, since it is
necessary to put samples among them
in order to measure the gravity above
each GCC, we suggest a spacing of
30cm or more among them.
42
Fig. A2 Experimental Set-up 1.






50 mm
R
Foam Board Aluminum foil

2
R

1
R
Rheostat
10 - 90W
Battery 12V
Function Generation
HP3325A

1


2

Pan balance
Dynamometer
Flexible Copper wire
# 12 AWG
g g
g g =
Sample
GCC
4
Coupling
Transformer
- 40W
500 - 2W
Flexible Copper wire
# 12 AWG

43










Fig. A3 The Simplest Gravity Control Cell (GCC).






















15 cm square Aluminum foil
(10.5 microns thickness)
Gum
(Loctite Super Bonder)
17 cm square Foam Board plate
(6mm thickness)
Foam Board
Aluminum foil
Flexible Copper Wire
# 12 AWG
44
C
(a)

C
(b)



Fig. A4 Equivalent Electric Circuits



GC




GC

P
+
r
r
1 i
2 i

p
R

1
R

2
R
R

1


2

1
I
2
I
2 1 3
I I I

+ =

( )
( ) ( )
mm l N
Generator Function r Transforme Coupling
rms A I A I rms mA I
W R Reostat R W R
Battery r DC V W R r
Option
p
i i
42 ; 20 N AWG; 12 # wire diameter; mm - 10 core Air
Battery the from the isolate to
3 ; 3 ; 56
90 10 0 ; 10 5 . 2 ; 40 4
; 1 . 0 ; 12 ; 2 500 ; 2
Output) Voltage High 002 HP3325A( Generator Function
2 1
max
3
max
2
max
1
3
2
2 2 1 1
1
= = =
= =
= = =
< = = <
=

Hz f 2 =
~
Wire # 12 AWG

Gravitational
Shielding
+

1 i
r
2 i
=
5
10 23 . 5

R

1
R

r
R
1


2

1
I
2
I
2 1 3
I I I + =
Hz f 2 =
~
Wire # 12 AWG
V V R
V V R
p
p
5 min
4 max
10 0 . 4 10
10 1 . 1 0

= =
= =

2
R
cm l 1 =
0.5 2 h =3mm
200 mm
Gravitational
Shielding
Al
# 12 AWG
T
l
d
i
e
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

45



































0
3 2
4
27
1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
i
r
g
m
f
j
m

+ =

Fig. A5 An ELF electric current through a wire, that makes a spherical form as shown above,
reduces the gravitational mass of the wire and the gravity inside sphere at the same proportio


n
0 i g
m m = (Gravitational Shielding Effect). Note that this spherical form can be transformed into
n ellipsoidal form or a disc in order to coat, for example, a Gravitational Spacecraft. It is also
ossible to coat with a wire several forms, such as cylinders, cones, cubes, etc. The characteristics
of the wire are expressed by:
r
,
a
p
, ; j is the electric current density and f is the frequency.

Wire
j
j
ELF electric current






46
Fig. A6 Experimental set-up 2.



50 mm
Dynamometer
Flexible Copper wire
# 12 AWG
R

1
R
Rheostat
Battery 12V
Function Generation
HP3325A

1


2

Coupling
Transformer




























Rigid Aluminum wire
# 14 AWG
Length = 28.6 m
R
S
= 0.36

2
R
4 - 40W
Flexible Copper wire
# 12 AWG

47
i


Fig A7 Gravitational shielding produced by semi-spheres stamped on the Aluminum foil
- By simply changing the geometry of the surface of the Aluminum foil it is possible to
ncrease the working frequency f up to more than 1Hz.

~
d
b
a
r
0

V
0
, f
E
air
,
air
Insulation
Gravitational Shielding

r
Aluminum Foil
Air

48


(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)
Fig A8 Method to coat the Aluminum semi-spheres with acrylic ( ) mm r a 6 . 0
0
= = .
(a)Acrylic sheet (A4 format) with 1.5mm thickness and an Aluminum plate (A4) with several
semi-spheres (radius mm r 9 . 0
0
= ) stamped on its surface. (b)A heater is placed below the
Aluminum plate in order to heat the Aluminum. (c)When the Aluminum is sufficiently heated
up, the acrylic sheet and the Aluminum plate are pressed, one against the other (The two D
devices shown in this figure are used in order to impede that the press compresses the acrylic
and the aluminum besides distance a y + ). (d)After some seconds, the press and the heater are
removed, and the device is ready to be used.
y
Heater
Aluminum Plate
Acrylic sheet
Press
=0.6 mm
a = 1.5 mm
r
0
=0.9 mm
a =1.5 mm
r
0
=0.9 mm
D D
y + a
49

Fig. A9 Experimental Set-up using a GCC subjected to high-voltage
0
V with frequency Hz f 1 > .


Note that in this case, the pan balance is not necessary because the substance of the Gravitational
Shielding is an air layer with thickness d above the acrylic sheet. This is therefore, more a type of
Gravity Control Cell (GCC) with external gravitational shielding.
50 mm
GCC
Acrylic/Aluminum
Dynamometer
Flexible Copper wire
# 12 AWG
g g
g g =
Sample
Rheostat
Oscillator
f > 1Hz
Transformer
High-voltage V
0
50
(b)



Fig. A10 (a) Equivalent Electric Circuit. (b) Details of the electrical connection with the


Gravitational Shielding




(a)
Aluminum plate. Note that others connection modes (by the top of the device) can produce
destructible interference on the electric lines of the
air
E field.


0
V

d
R
GCC
crylic /Aluminum A

kV V 9
max
0
=
kV V 7 . 2
min
0
=
~
Oscillator
Hz f 1 >
Acrylic
Aluminum
Pin
Connector
(High-voltage)
10kV
wire


51







(a) (b)







(c)






(d)


Fig. A11 Geometrical forms with similar effects as those produced by the semi-spherical form (a)
shows the semi-spherical form stamped on the metallic surface; (b) shows the semi-cylindrical form (an
obvious evolution from the semi-spherical form); (c) shows concentric metallic rings stamped on
the metallic surface, an evolution from semi-cylindrical form. These geometrical forms produce
the same effect as that of the semi-spherical form, shown in Fig.A11 (a). By using concentric
metallic rings, it is possible to build Gravitational Shieldings around bodies or spacecrafts with
several formats (spheres, ellipsoids, etc); (d) shows a Gravitational Shielding around a Spacecraft
with ellipsoidal form.
Dielectric layer
Gravitational Shielding
Metallic Rings

r
Ellipsoidal metallic base
Oscillator

Transformer
f
V
0

Metallic Rings
Metallic base
E
air
Ionized air

52
F



(a) (b)
ig. A12 Non-solid and Solid Gravitational Shieldings - In the case of the Gravitational
Shielding produced on a solid substance (b), when its molecules go to the imaginary space-time,
the electric field that produces the effect also goes to the imaginary space-time together with
them, because in this case, the substance of the Gravitational Shielding is rigidly connected (by
means of the dielectric) to the metal that produces the electric field. This does not occur in the
case of Air Gravitational Shielding.
E
Metal Dielectric
Solid Gravitational Shielding
(rigidly connected to the dielectric)
Non-solid Gravitational Shielding
Metal
Spacecraft Spacecraft
Dielectric
(rigidly connected to the spacecraft)
E






53



























(a)


(b)



2
10
2
10
r
V
G
r
M
G a
igm g

= =

(c)
Fig. A13 Double Gravitational Shielding and Micro-thrusters (a) Shows a double
gravitational shielding that makes possible to decrease the inertial effects upon the spacecraf


t
when it is traveling both in the imaginary space-time and in the real space-time. The solid
Gravitational Shielding also can be obtained by means of an ELF electric current through a metallic
lamina placed between the semi-spheres and the Gravitational Shielding of Air as shown above. (b)
Shows 6 micro-thrusters placed inside a Gravitational Spacecraft, in order to propel the
spacecraft in the directions x, y and z. Note that the Gravitational Thrusters in the spacecraft
must have a very small diameter (of the order of millimeters) because the hole through the
Gravitational Shielding of the spacecraft cannot be large. Thus, these thrusters are in fact Micro-
thrusters. (c) Shows a micro-thruster inside a spacecraft, and in front of a volume V of the
intergalactic medium (IGM). Under these conditions, the spacecraft acquires an acceleration a in
the direction of the volume V.
E
air
Metal Dielectric
Solid Gravitational Shielding
i ELF electric current
Spacecraft Spacecraft
E
rs
Air Gravitational Shielding
Metal Dielectric
A
l
u
m
i
n
u
m
Micro-Gravitational Thruster
r
a
Micro-Gravitational Thruster with 10 gravitational shieldings
Gravitational Spacecraft
Volume V
of the
Intergallactic
medium
(IGM)
M
g

igm
10
-26
kg.m
-3
Gravitational Shielding
gt
m

54



2
10
2
10
r
V
G
r
M
G a
ism
g

= =
(a)



2
10
2
10
r
V
G
r
M
G a
ipm g

= =
(b)



2
10
2
10
r
V
G
r
M
G a
atm
g

= =

(c)
Fig. A14 Gravitational Propulsion using Micro-Gravitational Thruster (a) Gravitational
acceleration produced by a gravitational mass M
g
of the Interstellar Medium. The density of the
nterstellar Medium is about 10
5
times greater than the density of the Intergalactic Medium (b)
Gravitational acceleration produced in the Interplanetary Medium. (c) Gravitational acceleration
I
produced in the Earths atmosphere. Note that, in this case,
atm
(near to the Earths surface)is about
10
26
times greater than the density of the Intergalactic Medium.
r
a
Micro-Gravitational Thruster with 10 gravitational shieldings
Gravitational Spacecraft
Volume V
of the
Interstellar
medium
(ISM)
M
g

ism
10
-21
kg.m
-3

r
a
Gravitational Spacecraft
Volume V
of the
Interplanetary
medium
(IPM)
M
g

ipm
10
-20
kg.m
-3

r
a
Gravitational Spacecraft
Volume V
of the
Earths
atmospheric

M
g

atm
1.2kg.m
-3

Gravitational Shielding
Gravitational Shielding
Gravitational Shielding
Micro-Gravitational Thruster with 10 gravitational shieldings
Micro-Gravitational Thruster with 10 gravitational shieldings


55





(a)

(b)


(c)
Fig. A15 Dynamics and Structure of the Micro-Gravitational Thrusters - (a) The Micro-
Gravitational Thrusters do not work outside the Gravitational Shielding, because, in this case, the resultant
upon the thruster is null due to the symmetry. (b) The Gravitational Shielding ( )
8
10

s
reduces strongly
the intensities of the gravitational forces acting on the micro-gravitational thruster, except obviously, through
the hole in the gravitational shielding. (c) Micro-Gravitational Thruster with 10 Air Gravitational Shieldings
(10GCCs). The grounded metallic laminas are placed so as to retain the electric field produced by metallic
surface behind the semi-spheres.
Mica
Metal
1 GCC

Air Gravitational Shielding
10mm
~ 400 mm
Gravitational Shielding
Micro-Gravitational Thruster
with 10 gravitational shieldings
F
1
=
air
F
0
S
1
a
0
=
s
(-GM
g
/r
2
)
F
0
= F
0
=> R = (F
0
F
2
) + (F
1
F
1
) + (F
2
F
0
) = 0
ELF
~
V
0
Hole in the Gravitational Shielding

Grounded Metallic laminas
M
g
M
g
r r
S
2
F
0
F
0
F
1
=
air
F
0
F
2
=
air
2
F
0
8
10

a
0
= - GM
g
/r
2

0
10
10
F F R
air
=
M
g
r r
M
g
x
F
2
=
air
2
F
0
a
10
=
air
10
a
0
a
0
56



GCC Cross-section Front view
(a)


GCC Cross-section Side View
(b)
Fig. A16 A GCC using distilled Water.
In total this GCC weighs about 6kg; the air layer 7.3 grams. The balance has the
following characteristics: Range 0 6kg; readability 0.1g. The yarns are inserted
side by side on the Aluminum sheet. Note the detail of fixing of the yarns on the
Aluminum sheet.
Air layer
Distilled Water
0.885 m
Balance
Transformer
g= g
g
Sample
Any type of material; any mass
m
g (air)
= m
i (air)
~
2 Hz
V
0
max
= 9 kV
Acrylic Box
(2mm thickness)
Aluminum sheet
(0.5 mm thickness)
342 Aluminum yarns (# 10 AWG)
(2.558 mm diameter; 0.884 mm length)
2 mm
2 mm
7.73 mm
a = 1.9 mm
1.8 mm
d = 9.73 mm
3.2 mm
Balance
0.885 m
0.884 m
Aluminum sheet
(0.5 mm thickness)
342 Aluminum yarns (# 10 AWG)
(2.558 mm diameter; 0.884 mm length)
1mm 1mm

0.5 mm
3.6mm
1.5mm
0.885 m

57





Fig. A17 Experimental set-up. In order to prove the exponential effect produced by the
superposition of the Gravitational Shieldings, we can take three similar GCCs and put them one above
the other, in such way that above the GCC 1 the gravity acceleration will be g g = ; above the
GCC2 g g
2
= , and above the GCC3 g g
3
= . Where is given by Eq. (A47). The arrangement
above has been designed for values of g m
g
13 < and up to -9 or kg m
g
1 < and up to -2 .
Balance
140 cm
5Kg
70
cm
Balance
5Kg
70
cm
Balance
5Kg
70
cm
m
g
m
g
m
g
Sample
Any type of material; any mass
GCC 3

GCC 2

GCC 1

g g =
g g
2
=
g g
3
=
g


58
APPENDIX B: Gravity Control Cells (GCCs) made from
Semiconductor Compounds.

There are some semiconductors
compounds with electrical conductivity
between 10
4
S/m to 1 S/m, which can
have their gravitational mass strongly
decreased when subjected to ELF
electromagnetic fields.
For instance, the polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) compound, called
Duracap
TM
86103.
It has the following characteristics:

1 =
r
; 3 =
r

m S / 3 . 3333 =

3
1400

= m . kg
mm KV strength dieletric / 98 =

Then, according to the following
equation below (derived from Eq.A14)
( ) 1 1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
0
4
3 2
3
27
B m E
f
m
i rms
r
g

+ =

the gravitational mass, , of the
Duracap
g
m
TM
86103, when subjected to an
electromagnetic field of frequency , is
given by
f
( ) 2 1 10 3 . 3 1 2 1
0
3
4
23
B m
f
E
m
i
rms
g

+ =

Note that, if the electromagnetic field
through the Duracap has extremely-low
frequency, for example, if , and Hz f 2 =

( ) mm kV m V E
rms
/ 94 . 0 / 10 4 . 9
5
=

Then, its gravitational mass will be
reduced down to , reducing
in this way, the initial weight
0
1 . 1
i g
m m
( ) g m g m P
i g 0 0
= = of the Duracap down to
.
0
1 . 1 P
BACKGROUND FOR EXPERIMENTAL

The Duracap
TM
86103 is sold
under the form of small cubes. Its
melting temperature varies from 177C
to 188C. Thus, a 15cm square Duracap
plate with 1 mm thickness can be shaped
by using a suitable mold, as the shown
in Fig.B1.
Figure B2(a) shows the Duracap
plate between the Aluminum plates of a
parallel plate capacitor. The plates have
the following dimensions: 19cm X 15cm
X 1mm. They are painted with an
insulating varnish spray of high
dielectric strength (ISOFILM). They are
connected to the secondary of a
transformer, which is connected to a
Function Generator. The distance
between the Aluminum plates is mm d 1 = .
Thus, the electric field through the
Duracap is given by
( ) 3
2 2
0
B
d
V E
E
r
m
rms

= =
where
r
is the relative permittivity of
the dielectric (Duracap), and is the
amplitude of the wave voltage applied
on the capacitor.
0
V
In order to generate ELF wave
voltage of Hz f 2 = , we can use the
widely-known Function Generator
HP3325A (Op.002 High Voltage
Output) that can generate sinusoidal
voltages with extremely-low frequencies
and amplitude up to 20V (40V
pp
into
500 load). The maximum output
current is ; output impedance
<2 at ELF.
pp
A .08 0
The turns ratio of the transformer
(Bosch red coil) is . Thus, since the 1 : 200
59
maximum value of the amplitude of the
voltage produced by the Function
Generator is , then the
maximum secondary voltage will
be .Consequently, Eq.
(B3) gives
V V
p
20
max
=
kV V V
s
4
max
0
max
= =
m V E
rms
/ 10 8 . 2
6 max
=
Thus, for , Eq. (B2) gives Hz f 2 =
0
5 . 29
i g
m m =
The variations on the
gravitational mass of the Duracap plate
can be measured by a pan balance with
the following characteristics: range 0
1.5kg ; readability 0.01g, using the set-
up shown in Fig. B2(a).
Figure B2(b) shows the set-up to
measure the gravity acceleration
variations above the Duracap plate
(Gravitational Shielding effect). The
samples used in this case, can be of
several types of material.
Since voltage waves with
frequencies very below 1Hz have a very
long period, we cannot consider, in
practice, their rms values. However, we
can add a sinusoidal voltage
t V V
osc
sin
0
= with a DC voltage , by
means of the circuit shown in Fig.B3.
Thus, we obtain
DC
V
t V V V
DC
sin
0
+ = ; f 2 = .
If then . Thus, the
voltage varies with the frequency ,
but its intensity is approximately equal
to , i.e., V will be practically
constant. This is of fundamental
importance for maintaining the value of
the gravitational mass of the body, ,
sufficiently stable during all the time, in
the case of .
DC
V V <<
0 DC
V V
V f
DC
V
g
m
Hz f <<
We have shown in this paper that
it is possible to control the gravitational
mass of a spacecraft, simply by
controlling the gravitational mass of a
body inside the spacecraft (Eq.(10)).
This body can be, for example, the
dielectric between the plates of a
capacitor, whose gravitational mass can
be easily controlled by means of an ELF
electromagnetic field produced between
the plates of the capacitor. We will call
this type of capacitor of Capacitor of
Gravitational Mass Control (CGMC).
Figure B 4(a) shows a CGMC
placed in the center of the spacecraft.
Thus, the gravitational mass of the
spacecraft can be controlled simply by
varying the gravitational mass of the
dielectric of the capacitor by means of
an ELF electromagnetic field produced
between the plates of the capacitor. Note
that the Capacitor of Gravitational Mass
Control can have the spacecraft's own
form as shown in Fig. B 4(b). The
dielectric can be, for example, a
Duracap plate, as shown in this
appendix. In this case, the gravitational
mass of the dielectric is expressed by
Eq. (B2). Under these circumstances,
the total gravitational mass of the
spacecraft will be given by Eq.(10):

( ) 0 0 i dielectric i spacecraf g
m M M + =

where is the rest inertial mass of
the spacecraft(without the dielectric) and
is the rest inertial mass of the
dielectric;
0 i
M
0 i
m
0 i g dielectric
m m = , where is
the gravitational mass of the dielectric.
By decreasing the value of
g
m
dielectric
, the
gravitational mass of the spacecraft
decreases. It was shown, that the value
of can be negative. Thus, for example,
when
0 0 i i dielectric
m M , the gravitational
mass of the spacecraft gets very close to
zero. When
0 0 i i dielectric
m M < , the
60
gravitational mass of the spacecraft
becomes negative.
Therefore, for an observer out of
the spacecraft the gravitational mass of
the spacecraft is
( ) 0 0 i dielectric i spacecraf g
m M M + = ,
and not .
0 0 i i
m M +
Since the dielectric strength of the
Duracap is , a Duracap plate
with 1mm thickness can withstand up to
. In this case, the value of
mm kV / 98
kV 98
dielectric

for , according to Eq. (B2), is Hz f 2 =
4
0
10 =
i g dielectric
m m
Thus, for example, if the inertial mass of
the spacecraft is and,
the inertial mass of the dielectric of the
Capacitor of Gravitational Mass Control is
, then the gravitational
mass of the spacecraft becomes
kg M
i
0014 . 10021
0

kg m
i
0021 . 1
0

( )
kg m M M
i dielectric i spacecraf g
3
0 0
10

+ =
This value is much smaller than
.
0
159 . 0
i
M +
It was shown [1] that, when the
gravitational mass of a particle is
reduced to values between
and , it becomes imaginary, i.e.,
the gravitational and the inertial masses
of the particle become imaginary.
Consequently, the particle disappears
from our ordinary space-time.
i
M 159 0. +
i
M 159 0.
This means that we cannot reduce
the gravitational mass of the spacecraft
below , unless we want to
make it imaginary.
i
M 159 0. +
Obviously this limits the
minimum value of
dielectric
, i.e.
. Consequently, if the
gravity acceleration out of the spacecraft
(in a given direction) is
159 . 0
min
=
dielctric

g , then,
according to the Gravitational Shielding
Principle, the corresponding gravity
acceleration upon the crew of the
spacecraft can be reduced just down
to . In addition, since the Machs
principle says that the local inertial
forces are produced by the gravitational
interaction of the local system with the
distribution of cosmic masses then the
inertial effects upon the crew would be
reduced just by
g 159 . 0
159 . 0 =
dielectric
.
However, there is a way to
strongly reduce the inertial effects upon
the crew of the spacecraft without
making it imaginary. As shown in Fig.
B4 (c), we can build an inertial
shielding, with superimposed
CGMCs. In this case, according to the
Gravitational Shielding Principle, the
gravity upon the crew will be given by
, where
n
g g
n
dielectric n
= g is the gravity
acceleration out of the spacecraft (in a
given direction) and
0 i g dielectric
m m = ;
and are, respectively, the
gravitational mass and the inertial mass
of the dielectric. Under these conditions
the inertial effects upon the crew will be
reduced by .
g
m
0 i
m
n
dielectric

Thus, for (ten superimposed

CGMCs), and
10 = n
2 . 0
dielectric
, the inertial
effects upon the crew will be reduced
by . Therefore, if the
maximum thrust produced by the
thrusters of the spacecraft is ,
then the intensities of the inertial forces
upon the crew will not exceed ,
i.e. they will be practically negligible.
7 10
10 1


dielectric

N F
5
10 =
N 01 . 0
Under these circumstances, the
gravitational mass of the spacecraft, for
an observer out of the spacecraft, will be
just approximately equal to the
gravitational mass of the inertial
shielding, i.e. .
( ) ( shield inertial g spacecraft g
M M
.

)
If , and the
thrusters of the spacecraft are able to
( )
kg M
shield inertial g
3
.
10
61
produces up to , the
spacecraft will acquires an acceleration
given by
N F
5
10 3 =
( )
2 2
. 10 3

= s m
M
F
a
spacecraft g
spacecraft
With this acceleration it can reach
velocities close to Mach 10 in some
seconds.
The velocity that the spacecraft
can reach in the imaginary spacetime is
much greater than this value, since
, as we have seen, can be
reduced down to or less.
(spacecraft g
M
)
kg
3
10

Thus, if the thrusters of the

spacecraft are able to produces up
to , and ,
the spacecraft will acquires an
acceleration given by
N F
5
10 3 =
( )
kg M
spacecraft g
3
10

( )
2 8
. 10 3

= s m
M
F
a
spacecraft g
spacecraft
With this acceleration it can reach
velocities close to the light speed in less
than 1 second. After 1 month, the
velocity of the spacecraft would be
about (remember that in the
imaginary spacetime the maximum
velocity of propagation of the
interactions is infinity [
s m/ 10
15
1]).

OTHER SEMICONDUCTOR COMPOUNDS

A semiconductor compound,
which can have its gravitational mass
strongly decreased when subjected to
ELF electromagnetic fields is the
CoorsTek Pure SiC
TM
LR CVD Silicon
Carbide, 99.9995%

. This Low-
resistivity (LR) pure Silicon Carbide has
electrical conductivity of 5000S/m at
room temperature; 8 . 10 =
r
;
; dielectric strength >10
3
. 3210

= m kg

www.coorstek.com
KV/mm; maximum working
temperature of 1600C.
Another material is the Alumina-
CNT, recently discovered

. It has
electrical conductivity of 3375 S/m at
77C in samples that were 15%
nanotubes by volume [17]; 8 . 9 =
r
;
; dielectric strength 10-
20KV/mm; maximum working
temperature of 1750C.
3
. 3980

= m kg

The novel Carbon Nanotubes
Aerogels
*****
, called CNT Aerogels are
also suitable to produce Gravitational
Shieldings, mainly due to their very
small densities. The electrical
conductivity of the CNT Aerogels is
70.4S/m for a density of [
3
. 5 . 7

= m kg 18];
10
r
. Recently (2010), it was announced
the discovered of Graphene Aerogel
with and [ m S / 10 1 ~
2
=
3
. 10

= m kg 19]
(Aerogels exhibit higher dielectric
strength than expected for porous
materials).

Recently, it was discovered that Carbon nanotubes

(CNTs) can be added to Alumina (Al
2
O
3
) to convert it
into a good electrical conductor.
*****
In 2007, Mateusz Brying et al. working with Prof.
Arjun Yodh at the University of Pennsylvania produced
the first aerogels made entirely of carbon nanotubes
(CNT Aerogels) [20] that, depending on the processing
conditions, can have their electrical conductivity ranging
as high as 100 S/m.




62






Fig.B1 Mold design
5mm
150mm
150mm
150mm
150mm
2mm
3mm
3mm
Aluminum
Aluminum
200mm
200mm

63


(a)
(b)
Fig.B2 Schematic diagram of the experimental set-up
Duracap
150mmX150mmX1mm
Acrylic
150mmX40mmX1mm
Wood
Balance
Aluminum
190mmX150mmX1mm
1kg
20 mm
20 mm
20 mm
Balance
1kg
Sample
ELF Wave Voltage
Generator
Bosch
red
coil
Bosch
red
coil
ELF Wave Voltage
Generator
64





Fig. B3 Equivalent Electric Circuit







+
R

osc
V
DC
V
Coupling
Transformer
f
osc DC
V V +
ELF voltage
waves
Generato
~
t V V
osc
sin
0
=
200:1

osc
V

0
V
DC
>>
Bosch red coil
V
r



65























(a)
(b)









(c)
Fig.B4 Gravitational Propulsion System and Inertial Shielding of the Gravitational Spacecraft
(a) eight gravitational thrusters are placed inside a Gravitational Spacecraft, in order to propel the
spacecraft along the directions x, y and z. Two gravitational thrusters are inside the columns 1 and 2, in
order to rotate the spacecraft around the y-axis. The functioning of the Gravitational Thrusters is shown
in Fig.A14. The gravitational mass of the spacecraft is controlled by the Capacitor of Gravitational
Mass Control (CGMC). Note that the CGMC can have the spacecraft's own form, as shown in (b). In
order to strongly reduce the inertial effects upon the crew of the spacecraft, we can build an inertial
shielding, with several CGMCs, as shown above (c). In this case, the gravity upon the crew will be
given by g g
n
dielectric n
= , where g is the gravity acceleration out of the spacecraft (in a given direction)
and
0 i g dielectric
m m = ;
g
m and
0 i
m are, respectively, the gravitational mass and the inertial mass of
the dielectric. Under these conditions the inertial effects upon the crew will be reduced by
n
dielectric
.
Thus, for example, if 10 = n and 2 . 0
dielectric
, the inertial effects will be reduced
by
7 10
10 1


dielectric
. If the maximum thrust produced by the thrusters is N F
5
10 = , then the intensities
of the inertial forces upon the crew will not exceed N 01 . 0 .
Gravitational Thrusters
Capacitor of Gravitational Mass Control
col 1 col 2
x
y
z
n 3 2 1
n dielectrics
Capacitor of Gravitational Mass Control
(CGMC)
dielectric
Inertial Shielding
g
g g
n
dielectric n
=


66
APPENDIX C: Longer-Duration Microgravity Environment
Produced by Gravity Control Cells (GCCs).

The acceleration experienced by
an object in a microgravity
environment, by definition, is one-
millionth (10
-6
) of that experienced at
Earths surface (1g). Consequently, a
microgravity environment is one
where the acceleration induced by
gravity has little or no measurable
effect. The term zero-gravity is,
obviously inappropriate since the
quantization of gravity [1] shows that
the gravity can have only discrete
values different of zero [1, Appendix B].
Only three methods of creating a
microgravity environment are
currently known: to travel far enough
into deep space so as to reduce the
effect of gravity by attenuation, by
falling, and by orbiting a planet.
The first method is the simplest
in conception, but requires traveling an
enormous distance, rendering it most
impractical with the conventional
spacecrafts. The second method,
falling, is very common but
approaches microgravity only when
the fall is in a vacuum, as air resistance
will provide some resistance to free
fall acceleration. Also it is difficult to
fall for long enough periods of time.
There are also problems which involve
avoiding too sudden of a stop at the
end. The NASA Lewis Research
Center has several drop facilities. One
provides a 132 meter drop into a hole
in the ground similar to a mine shaft.
This drop creates a reduced gravity
environment for 5.2 seconds. The
longest drop time currently available
(about 10 seconds) is at a 490 meter


deep vertical mine shaft in Japan that
has been converted to a drop facility.
Drop towers are used for
experiments that only need a short
duration of microgravity, or for an
initial validation for experiments that
will be carried out in longer duration
of microgravity.

Aircraft can fly in parabolic arcs
to achieve period of microgravity of
20 to 25 seconds with g-level of
approximately 0.02 g. The airplane
climbs rapidly until its nose is about
45-degree angle to the horizon then the
engines are cut back. The airplane
slows; the plane remains in free fall
over the top of the parabola, then it
nose-dives to complete the parabola,
creating microgravity conditions.
Aircraft parabolic flights give
the opportunity to perform medical
experiments on human subjects in real
microgravity environment. They also
offer the possibility of direct
intervention by investigators on board
the aircraft during and between
parabolas. In the mid-1980s, NASA
KC-135, a modified Boeing 707,
67
provided access to microgravity
environment. A parabolic flight
provided 15 to 20 seconds of 0.01 g or
less, followed by a 2-g pull out. On a
typical flight, up to 40 parabolic
trajectories can be performed. The
KC-135 can accommodate up to 21
passengers performing 12 different
experiments. In 1993, the Falcon-20
performed its first parabolic flight with
microgravity experiment on board.
This jet can carry two experimenters
and perform up to 3 experiments. Each
flight can make up to 4 parabolic
trajectories, with each parabola lasting
75 seconds, with 15 to 20 seconds of
microgravity at 0.01g or less.

The third method of creating a
microgravity environment is orbiting a
planet. This is the environment
commonly experienced in the space
shuttle, International Space Station,
Mir (no longer in orbit), etc. While this
scenario is the most suitable for
scientific experimentation and
commercial exploitation, it is still
quite expensive to operate in, mostly
due to launch costs.
A space shuttle provides an ideal
laboratory environment to conduct
microgravity research. A large panoply
of experiments can be carried out in
microgravity conditions for up to 17
days, and scientists can make
adjustment to avoid experiment failure
and potential loss of data.
Unmanned capsules, platforms or
satellites, such as the European
retrievable carrier Eureka, DLR's
retrievable carrier SPAS, or the
Russian Photon capsules, the US
Space Shuttle (in connection with the
European Spacelab laboratory or the
US Spacelab module), provide weeks
or months of microgravity.
A space station, maintaining a
low earth orbit for several decades,
greatly improves access to
microgravity environment for up to
several months.
Thus, microgravity environment
can be obtained via different means,
providing different duration of
microgravity. While short-duration
microgravity environments can be
achieved on Earth with relative
easiness, longer-duration microgravity
environments are too expensive to be
obtained.
Here, we propose to use the Gravity
Control Cells (GCCs), shown in this
work, in order to create longer-
duration microgravity environments.
As we have seen, just above a GCC
the gravity can be strongly reduced
(down to 1g or less). In this way, the
gravity above a GCC can remain at the


















~1 g
1 g
GCC
longer-duration
microgravity
environment
up to 3m
>>1m
>>1m

68

microgravity ranging during a very
long time (several years). Thus, GCCs
can be used in order to create longer-
duration microgravity environments on
Earth. In addition, due to the cost of
the GCCs to be relatively low, also the
longer-duration microgravity
environments will be produced with
low costs.
This possibility appears to be
absolutely new and unprecedented in
the literature since longer-duration
microgravity environments are usually
obtained via airplanes, sounding
rockets, spacecraft and space station.
It is easy to see that the GCCs
can be built with width and length of
until some meters. On the other hand,
as the effect of gravity reduction above
the GCC can reach up to 3m, we can
then conclude that the longer-duration
microgravity environments produced
above the GCCs can have sufficiently
large volumes to perform any
microgravity experiment on Earth.
The longer-duration microgravity
environment produced by a GCC will
be a special tool for microgravity
research. It will allow to improve and
to optimize physical, chemical and
biological processes on Earth that are
important in science, engineering and
also medicine. The reduction of
gravitational effects in a microgravity
environment shows, for example, that
temperature differences in a fluid do
not produce convection, buoyancy or
sedimentation. The changes in fluid
behavior in microgravity lie at the
heart of the studies in materials
science, combustion and many aspects
of space biology and life sciences.
Microgravity research holds the
promise to develop new materials
which can not be made on Earth due to
gravity. These new materials shall
have properties that are superior to
those made on Earth and may be used
to:
-increase the speed of future
computers,
-improve fiber optics,
-make feasible Room Temperature
Superconductors,
-enable medical breakthroughs to cure
several diseases (e.g., diabetes).
In a microgravity environment
protein crystals can be grown larger
and with a purity that is impossible to
obtain under gravity of 1g. By
analyzing the space-grown crystals it
is possible to determine the structure
and function of the thousands of
proteins used in the human body and
in valuable plants and animals. The
determination of protein structure
represents a huge opportunity for
pharmaceutical companies to develop
new drugs to fight diseases.
Crystal of HIV protease
inhibitor grown in microgravity are
significantly larger and of higher
quality than any specimens grown
under gravity of 1g. This will help in
defining the structure of the protein
crucial in fighting the AIDS virus.
Protein Crystal Isocitrate Lysase
is an enzyme for fungicides. The
isocitrate lysase crystals grown in
microgravity environments are of
larger sizes and fewer structural
defects than crystals grown under
gravity of 1g. They will lead to more
powerful fungicides to treat serious
crop diseases such as rice blast, and
increase crop output.
69
Improved crystals of human
insulin will help improve treatment for
diabetes and potentially create a cure.
Anchorage dependent cells
attached to a polymer and grown in a
bioreactor in microgravity will lead to
the production of a protein that is
closer in structure and function to the
three-dimensional protein living in the
body.
This should help reduce or
eliminate transplant rejection and is
therefore critical for organ transplant
and for the replacement of damaged
bone and tissues. Cells grown on Earth
are far from being three-dimensional
due to the effect of 1g gravity.
The ZBLAN is a new substance
with the potential to revolutionize fiber
optics communications. A member of
the heavy metal fluoride family of
glasses, ZBLAN has promising
applications in fiber optics. It can be
used in a large array of industries,
including manufacture of ultra high
purity fiber optics, optical switches
for computing, telecommunications,
medical surgery and cauterization,
temperature monitoring, infrared
imaging, fiber-optic lasers, and optical
power transmission. A ZBLAN fiber
optic cable manufactured in a
microgravity environment has the
potential to carry 100 times the
amount of data conveyed by
conventional silica-based fibers.
In microgravity environment
where complications of gravity-driven
convection flows are eliminated, we
can explore the fundamental processes
in fluids of several types more easily
and test fundamental theories of three-
dimensional laminar, oscillatory and
turbulent flow generated by various
other forces.
By improving the basics for
predicting and controlling the behavior
of fluids, we open up possibilities for
improving a whole range of industrial
processes:

-aCivil engineers can design safe
buildings in earthquake-prone areas
thanks to a better understanding of the
fluid-like behavior of soils under
stress.

- Materials engineers can benefit from
a deeper knowledge of the
determination of the structure and
properties of a solid metal during its
formation and can improve product
quality and yield, and, in some cases,
lead to the introduction of new
products.

- Architects and engineers can design
more stable and performing power
70
plants with the knowledge of the flow
characteristics of vapor-liquid mixture.

- Combustion scientists can improve
fire safety and fuel efficiency with the
knowledge of fluid flow in
microgravity.
In microgravity environment,
medical researchers can observe the
functional changes in cells when the
effect of gravity is practically
removed. It becomes possible to study
fundamental life processes down to the
cellular level.
Access to microgravity will
provide better opportunities for
research, offer repeated testing
procedures, and enormously improve
the test facilities available for life
sciences investigations. This will
provide valuable information for
medical research and lead to
improvements in the health and
welfare of the six billion people, which
live under the influence of 1g gravity
on the Earth's surface.
The utilization of microgravity
to develop new and innovative
materials, pharmaceuticals and other
products is waiting to be explored.
Access to microgravity environments
currently is limited. Better access, as
the produced by GCCs, will help
researchers accelerate the
experimentation into these new
products.
Terrafoam is a rigid, silicate
based inorganic foam. It is
nonflammable and does not five off
noxious fumes when in the presence of
fire. It does not conduct heat to any
measurable degree and thus is an
outstanding and possible unsurpassed
thermal insulator. In addition, it
appears to have unique radiation
shielding capabilities, including an
ability to block alpha, beta, gamma
rays). Terrafoam can be constructed to
be extremely lightweight. Altering the
manufacturing process and the
inclusion of other materials can vary
the properties of Terrafoam. Properties
such as cell structure, tensile strength,
bulk density and temperature
resistance can be varied to suit specific
applications. It self-welds to concrete,
aluminum and other metals. The useful
variations on the base product are
potentially in the thousands. Perhaps
the most exciting potential
applications for Terrafoam stem from
its extraordinary capability as an ultra-
lightweight thermal and radioactive
shield.
Also, the formation of
nanoscale carbon structures by
electrical arc discharge plasma
synthesis has already been investigated
in microgravity experiments by
NASA. Furthermore, complex
plasmas are relevant for processes in
which a particle formation is to be
prevented, if possible, as, for example,
within plasma etching processes for
microchip production.

People will benefit from
numerous microgravity experiments
that can be conducted in Longer-
Duration Microgravity Environment
Produced by Gravity Control Cells
(GCCs) on Earth.
71

APPENDIX D: Antenna with Gravitational Transducer for
Instantaneous Communications at any distance

It was previously shown in this
article that Quantum Gravitational
Antennas (GCC antennas, Fig.8) can
emit and detect virtual gravitational
radiation. The velocity of this radiation
is infinite, as we have seen. This means
that these quantum antennas can
transmit and receive communications
instantaneously to and from anywhere
in the Universe. Here, it is shown how
to transmit and receive
communications instantaneously from
any distance in the Universe by
utilizing virtual electromagnetic (EM)
radiation instead of virtual
gravitational radiation. Starting from
the principle that the antennas of usual
transceivers (real antennas) radiate real
EM radiation, then we can expect that
imaginary antennas radiate imaginary
EM radiation or virtual EM radiation.
The velocity of this radiation is also
infinite, in such a way that
it can transmit communications
instantaneously from any distance in
the Universe.


It was shown [1] that when the
gravitational mass of a body is
decreased down to the range of
to ( is its inertial
mass), the body becomes imaginary
and goes to an imaginary Universe
which contains our real Universe.
Thus, we have the method to convert
real antennas to imaginary antennas.
i
m 159 . 0 +
i
m 159 . 0
i
m
Now, consider a Gravitational
Shielding , whose gravitational mass S

is decreased down to the range of
iS
m 159 . 0 + to
iS
m 159 . 0 . By analogy, it
becomes imaginary and goes to the
imaginary Universe. It is easy to show
that, in these circumstances, also a
body inside the shielding becomes
imaginary and goes to the imaginary
Universe together with the gravitational
shielding . In order to prove it,
consider, for example, Fig.D1 where
we clearly see that the Gravitational
Shielding Effect is equivalent to a
decrease of
S
S
iS gS
m m = in the
gravitational masses of the bodies A
and B , since the initial gravitational
masses:
iA gA
m m and become
respectively
iB gB
m m
iA gA
m m = and
iB gB
m m = ,
when the gravitational shielding is
activated. Thus, when becomes less
than 159 . 0 + , both the gravitational
masses of and S A become
respectively:

iS gS
m m 159 . 0 + <
and
iA gA
m m 159 . 0 + <

This proves, therefore, that when a
Gravitational Shielding becomes
imaginary, any particle (including
photons
S

) inside , also becomes

imaginary and goes to the imaginary
S

As shown in the article Mathematical

Foundations of the Relativistic Theory of Quantum
Gravity, real photons become imaginary photons or
virtual photons.
72

A



B


(a)





S




(b)


S



A


(c)

Fig.D1 (a) (b) The Gravitational Shielding
Effect is equivalent to a decrease of
iS gS
m m =
in the gravitational masses of the bodies A
and B. (c) When a Gravitational Shielding S
becomes imaginary, any particle (including
photons) inside S , also becomes imaginary.
2 2
r
m
G
r
m
G g
iB
gB
BA
=
r
2 2
r
m
G
r
m
G g
iA
gA
AB
=
1 , < =
iS gS
m m
2 2
r
m
G
r
m
G g
iB
gB
BA

= =

2 2
r
m
G
r
m
G g
iA
gA
AB

= =
iS gS
m m 159 . 0 + <
Virtual photon
iA gA
m m 159 . 0 + <
Universe together with the
Gravitational Shielding

S .
Now, consider a transceiver
antenna inside a Gravitational
Shielding . When the gravitational
mass of , , is reduced down to the
range of to , the
S
S
gS
m
iS
m 159 . 0 +
iS
m 159 . 0

Similarly, the bodies inside a Gravitational

Spacecraft become also imaginaries when the
Gravitational Spacecraft becomes imaginary.
antenna becomes imaginary, and,
together with , it goes to the
imaginary Universe. In these
circumstances, the real photons
radiated from the antenna also become
imaginary photons or virtual photons.
Since the velocity of these photons is
infinite, they can reach instantaneously
the receiving antenna, if it is also an
imaginary antenna in the imaginary
Universe.
S
Therefore, we can say that the
Gravitational Shielding around the
antenna works as a Gravitational
Transducer
******
converting real EM
energy into virtual EM energy.
In practice, we can encapsulate
antennas of transceivers with
Aluminum cylinders, as shown in
Fig.D2(a). By applying an appropriate
ELF electric current through the Al
cylinders, in order to put the
gravitational masses of the cylinders
within the range of
to
iCyl
m 159 . 0 +
iCyl
m 159 . 0 , we can transform real
antennas into imaginary antennas,
making possible instantaneously
communications at any distance,
including astronomical distances.
Figure D2 (b) shows usual
transceivers operating with imaginary
antennas, i.e., real antennas turned into
imaginary antennas. It is important to
note that the communications between
them occur through the imaginary
space-time. At the end of
transmissions, when the Gravitational
Transducers are turned off, the
antennas reappear in the real space-
time, i.e., they become real antennas
again.

******
A Transducer is substance or device that converts
input energy of one form into output energy of another.
73
Imagine now cell phones using
antennas with gravitational transducers.
There will not be any more need of cell
phone signal transmission stations
because the reach of the virtual EM
radiation is infinite (without
scattering). The new cell phones will
transmit and receive communications
directly to and from one another. In
addition, since the virtual EM radiation
does not interact with matter, then there
will not be any biological effects, as it
happens in the case of usual cell
phones.








(a)













(b)
Fig. D2 (a) Antenna with Gravitational
Transducer. (b) Transceivers operating with
imaginary antennas (instantaneous
communications at any distance, including
astronomical distances).
Virtual photons
v
Imaginary Space-time
Real Space-time
Real Transceiver 2
Real Transceiver 1
Imaginary antennas +
Imaginary transducers
~
ELF electric current
Aluminum cylinder Antenna
Let us now consider the case
where a transceiver is totally turned
into imaginary (Fig.D3). In order to
convert real antennas into imaginary
antennas, we have used the
gravitational shielding effect, as we
have already seen. Now, it is necessary
to put the transceiver totally inside a
Gravitational Shielding. Then, consider
a transceiver X inside the gravitational
shielding of a Gravitational Spacecraft.
When the spacecraft becomes
imaginary, so does the transceiver X .
Imagine then, another real transceiver
with imaginary antenna. With their
antennas in the imaginary space-time,
both transceivers
Y
X and Y are able to
transmit and receive communications
instantaneously between them, by
means of virtual EM radiation (See
Fig. D3(a)). Figure D3(b) shows
another possibility: instantaneous
communications between two
transceivers at virtual state.











(a)










(b)

Fig. D3 (a) Instantaneous communications
between the real Universe and the imaginary
Universe.(b) Instantaneous communications
between two Virtual Transceivers in the
imaginary Universe.
Virtual photons
v
Imaginary Space-time
Real Transceiver
Virtual Transceiver X
Y
Virtual photo
v
Imaginary Space-time
Virtual Transceivers
ns


74
References

[1] De Aquino, F.(2010) Mathematical Foundations
of the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity,
Pacific Journal of Science and Technology,
11(1), June 2010, pp.173-232. Physics/0212033.
[2] De Aquino, F. (2010) Gravity Control by means
of Electromagnetic Field through Gas at Ultra-
Low Pressure, Pacific Journal of Science and
Technology, 11(2) November 2010, pp.178-
247, Physics/0701091.
. [3] Isham, C. J. (1975) Quantum Gravity, in
Oxford Symposium, OUP.
[4] Isham, C.J., (1997) Structural Problems
Facing Quantum Gravity Theory, in
M, Francaviglia, G, Longhi, L, Lusanna,
and E, Sorace, eds., Proceedings of the
14 International Conference on
th
General Relativity and Gravitation,
167-209,(World Scientific, Singapore, 1997).
[5] Mach, E., (1893) The Science of Mechanics,
London, p.229-38.
[6] Bohm, D. (1951) Quantum Theory,
Prentice-Hall, N.Y, p.415.
[7] DEspagnat, B. The Question of Quantum
Reality, Scientific American, 241,128.
[8] Teller, P. Relational Holism and
Quantum Mechanics, British Journal for
the Philosophy of Science, 37, 71-81.
[9] De Aquino, F. (2008) Physical
Foundations of Quantum Psychology,
http://htpprints.yorku.ca/archive/00000297
[10] Landau, L. and Lifchitz, E. (1969)
Theorie du Champ, Ed.MIR, Moscow,
Portuguese version (1974) Ed. Hemus,
S.Paulo, pp.396-397.
[11] Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968)
Physics, J. Willey & Sons,
Portuguese Version, Ed. USP, p.1118.
[12] Zhan, G.D et al. (2003) Appl. Phys. Lett.
83, 1228.
[13] Davidson, K. & Smoot, G. (2008)
Wrinkles in Time. N. Y: Avon, 158-163.
[14] Silk, Joseph.(1977) Big Bang. N.Y,
Freeman,299.
[15] Jafelice, L.C. and Opher, R. (1992). The
origin of intergalactic magnetic fields
due to extragalactic jets. RAS.
http://adsabs.harvard.edu/cgi-bin/nph-
bib query? Bib code = 1992 MNRAS.
257. 135J. Retrieved 2009-06-19.



[16] Wadsley, J., et al. (2002). The Universe
in Hot Gas. NASA.
http://antwrp.gsfc.nasa.gov/apod/ap
020820.html. Retrieved 2009-06-19.
[17] Zhan, G.D et al. (2003) Appl Phys. Lett.
83, 1228.
[18] Xianping Lu, Ove Nilsson, Jochen.
Fricke, Richard W. Pekala, Thermal and
electrical conductivity of monolithic
carbon aerogels, Journal of Applied
Physics, 73, 2, 581-584 (Jan 1993).
[19] Worsley, M.A et al., (2010) Synthesis of
Graphene Aerogel with High Electrical
Conductivity , J. Am. Chem. Soc., 132
(40), pp 1406714069.
[20] Bryning, M., Milkie, D., Islam, M.,
Hough, L., Kikkawa, J. and Yodh, A.
(2007), Carbon Nanotube Aerogels.
AdvancedMaterials,19: 661664.
doi: 10.1002/adma.200601748.

























1
Possibility of controlled nuclear fusion by means of
Gravity Control

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2011 by Fran De Aquino
All Rights Reserved

The gravity control process
described in the articles Mathematical
Foundations of the Relativistic Theory of
Quantum Gravity [1] and Gravity Control
by means of Electromagnetic Field
through Gas at Ultra-Low Pressure, [2]
points to the possibility of obtaining
Controlled Nuclear Fusion by means of
increasing of the intensity of the
gravitational interaction between the
nuclei. When the gravitational forces
2
r m Gm F
g g G
= become greater than the
electrical forces
2
0
4 r q q F
E
=
between the nuclei, then nuclear fusion
reactions can occur.
The equation of correlation
between gravitational mass and inertial
mass [1]

( ) 1 1
4
4
1 2 1
2
4
3
2

+ = =

E
f
c
m
m
i
g

tells us that the gravitational mass can be
strongly increased. Thus, if
t E E
m
sin = , then the average value for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E , because E varies
sinusoidaly ( is the maximum value
for
m
E
E ). On the other hand, 2
m rms
E E = .
Consequently, we can replace
4
E for
. In addition, as
4
rms
E E j = (Ohm's
vectorial Law), then Eq. (1) can be
rewritten as follows

( ) 2 1 1 2 1
3 2
4
0

+ = =
f
j
K
m
m
rms r
i
g

where and
27
10 758 . 1

= K 2 j j
rms
= .
Thus, the gravitational force equation
can be expressed by

( ) 3 1 1 2 1
2
0 0
2
3 2
4
2
0 0
2 2
r m Gm
f
j
K
r m Gm r m Gm F
i i
rms r
i i g g G

+ =
= = =

In order to obtain we must have
E G
F F >

( ) 4
4
1 1 2 1
0 0
0
3 2
4
i i
rms r
m Gm
q q
f
j
K

>

The carbon fusion is a set of
nuclear fusion reactions that take place in
massive stars (at least at birth). It
requires high temperatures ( ) and
densities ( ). The principal
reactions are:
sun
M 8
K
8
10 5 >
3 9
. 10 3

> m kg


23
Na +p +2.24 MeV

12
C +
12
C
20
Ne + +4.62 MeV


24
Mg + +13.93 MeV

In the case of Carbon nuclei (
12
C) of a
thin carbon wire (carbon fiber)
( ; ) Eq. (4)
becomes
1 4
. 10 4

m S
1 3
. 10 2 . 2

= m S

2
0
2
3
4
39
16
1 10 08 . 9 1 2 1
p
rms
Gm
e
f
j

>

+


2
whence we conclude that the condition
for the
12
C +
12
C fusion reactions occur
is
( ) 5 10 7 . 1
4
3
18
f j
rms
>

If the electric current through the carbon
wire has Extremely-Low Frequency
(ELF), for example, if Hz f 1 = , then the
current density, , must have the
following value:
rms
j

( ) 6 . 10 4 . 5
2 13
> m A j
rms


Since S i j
rms rms
= where 4
2
= S is
the area of the cross section of the wire,
we can conclude that, for an ultra-thin
carbon wire with m 10 -diameter, it is
necessary that the current through the
wire, , have the following intensity
rms
i
A k i
rms
24 . 4 >
Obviously, this current will explode the
carbon wire. However, this explosion
becomes negligible in comparison with
the very strong gravitational implosion,
which occurs simultaneously due to the
enormous increase in intensities of the
gravitational forces among the carbon
nuclei produced by means of the ELF
current through the carbon wire as
predicted by Eq. (3). Since, in this case,
the gravitational forces among the carbon
nuclei become greater than the repulsive
electric forces among them the result is
the production of
12
C +
12
C fusion
reactions.
Similar reactions can occur by
using a lithium wire. In addition, it is
important to note that is directly
proportional to
rms
j
4
3
f (Eq.5). Thus, for
example, if , the current
necessary to produce the fusion reactions
will be . However, it seems
that in practice is better to reduce the
diameter of the wire. For a diameter of
, the intensity of the current
must have the following value
Hz f
8
10

=
A i
rms
130 =
) 10 ( 1
6
m m

A i
rms
4 . 42 >

In order to obtain an ELF current
with these characteristics
( ) A i Hz f
rms
4 . 42 ; 10
6
= =

we can start
from the following background:
Consider an electric currentI , which is
the sum of a sinusoidal current
t i i
osc
sin
0
=
1
and the DC current ,
i.e.,
DC
I
t i I I
DC
sin
0
+ = ; f 2 = . If
DC
I i <<
0
then
DC
I I . Thus, the current
I varies with the frequency , but the
variation of its intensity is quite small in
comparison with , i.e.,
f
DC
I I will be
practically constant (Fig. 1). Thus, we
obtain
DC rms
I i ( See Fig.2).




















Fig. 1 - The electric current I varies with
frequency f . But the variation of I is quite small
in comparison with
DC
I due to
DC o
I i << . In this
way, we can consider
DC
I I .
t
I
DC
I =I
DC
+i
osc
i
0


1
In order to generate the ELF electric current
with , we can use the widely-
known Function Generator HP3325A (Op.002
High Voltage Output) that can generate sinusoidal
voltages with extremely-low frequencies down to
and amplitude up to 20V
(40V
osc
i Hz f
6
10

=
Hz f
6
10 1

=
pp
into 500 load). The maximum output
current is ; output impedance <2 at
ELF .
pp
A .08 0

3







Fig. 2 Electrical Circuit
+
Ultra thin wire


DC rms
I i
R

2

osc
i
DC
I
osc DC
i I I + =
Hz f 1 =
~







REFERENCES

[1] DeAquino, F. (2002). Mathematical
Foundations of the Relativistic Theory of
Quantum Gravity. Physics/0212033.

[2] De Aquino, F. (2007) Gravity Control
by means of Electromagnetic Field
through Gas at Ultra-Low Pressure.
Physics/0701091.
High-power ELF radiation generated by modulated HF heating of the
ionosphere can cause Earthquakes, Cyclones and localized heating

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2011 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved

The High Frequency Active Auroral Research Program (HAARP) is currently the most important
facility used to generate extremely low frequency (ELF) electromagnetic radiation in the ionosphere.
In order to produce this ELF radiation the HAARP transmitter radiates a strong beam of high-
frequency (HF) waves modulated at ELF. This HF heating modulates the electrons temperature in the
D region ionosphere and leads to modulated conductivity and a time-varying current which then
radiates at the modulation frequency. Recently, the HAARP HF transmitter operated with 3.6GW of
effective radiated power modulated at frequency of 2.5Hz. It is shown that high-power ELF radiation
generated by HF ionospheric heaters, such as the current HAARP heater, can cause Earthquakes,
Cyclones and strong localized heating.
.

Key words: Physics of the ionosphere, radiation processes, Earthquakes, Tsunamis, Storms.
PACS: 94.20.-y ; 94.05.Dd ; 91.30.Px ; 91.30.Nw; 92.60.Qx


1. Introduction

Generating electromagnetic radiation
at extremely-low frequencies is difficult
because the long wavelengths require long
antennas, extending for hundreds of
kilometers. Natural ionospheric currents
provide such an antenna if they can be
modulated at the desired frequency [1-6]. The
generation of ELF electromagnetic radiation
by modulated heating of the ionosphere has
been the subject matter of numerous papers
[7-13].
In 1974, it was shown that ionospheric
heater can generate ELF waves by heating
the ionosphere with high-frequency (HF)
radiation in the megahertz range [7]. This
heating modulates the electrons temperature
in the D region ionosphere, leading to
modulated conductivity and a time-varying
current, which then radiates at the
modulation frequency.
Several HF ionospheric heaters have
been built in the course of the latest decades
in order to study the ELF waves produced by
the heating of the ionosphere with HF
radiation. Currently, the HAARP heater is
the most powerful ionospheric heater, with
3.6GW of effective power using HF heating
beam, modulated at ELF (2.5Hz) [14, 15].
This paper shows that high-power ELF
radiation generated by modulated HF heating
of the lower ionosphere, such as that
produced by the current HAARP heater, can
cause Earthquakes, Cyclones and strong
localized heating.

2. Gravitational Shielding

The contemporary greatest challenge of
the Theoretical Physics was to prove that,
Gravity is a quantum phenomenon. Since
General Relativity describes gravity as
related to the curvature of space-time then,
the quantization of the gravity implies the
quantization of the proper space-time. Until
the end of the century XX, several attempts
to quantize gravity were made. However, all
of them resulted fruitless [16, 17].
In the beginning of this century, it was
clearly noticed that there was something
unsatisfactory about the whole notion of
quantization and that the quantization
process had many ambiguities. Then, a new
approach has been proposed starting from the
generalization of the action function
*
. The
result has been the derivation of a theoretical
background, which finally led to the so-
sought quantization of the gravity and of the

*
The formulation of the action in Classical Mechanics
extends to Quantum Mechanics and has been the basis
for the development of the Strings Theory.
2
space-time. Published with the title
Mathematical Foundations of the
Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity[18],
this theory predicts a consistent unification of
Gravity with Electromagnetism. It shows
that the strong equivalence principle is
reaffirmed and, consequently, Einsteins
equations are preserved. In fact, Einsteins
equations can be deduced directly from the
mentioned theory. This shows, therefore, that
the General Relativity is a particularization
of this new theory, just as Newtons theory is
a particular case of the General Relativity.
Besides, it was deduced from the new theory
an important correlation between the
gravitational mass and the inertial mass,
which shows that the gravitational mass of a
particle can be decreased and even made
negative, independently of its inertial mass,
i.e., while the gravitational mass is
progressively reduced, the inertial mass does
not vary. This is highly relevant because it
means that the weight of a body can also be
reduced and even inverted in certain
circumstances, since Newtons gravity law
defines the weight P of a body as the
product of its gravitational mass by the
local gravity acceleration , i.e.,
g
m
g

( ) 1 g m P
g
=

It arises from the mentioned law that the
gravity acceleration (or simply the gravity)
produced by a body with gravitational mass
is given by
g
M

( ) 2
2
r
GM
g
g
=

The physical property of mass has two
distinct aspects: gravitational mass m
g
and
inertial mass m
i
. The gravitational mass
produces and responds to gravitational fields;
it supplies the mass factor in Newton's
famous inverse-square law of
gravity( )
2
r m GM F
g g
= . The inertial mass
is the mass factor in Newton's 2nd Law of
Motion . These two masses are not
equivalent but correlated by means of the
following factor [
( a m F
i
= )
18]:

( ) 3 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ =
c m
p
m
m
i i
g

Where is the rest inertial mass and
0 i
m p is
the variation in the particles kinetic
momentum; c is the speed of light.
This equation shows that only for
0 = p the gravitational mass is equal to the
inertial mass. Instances in which p is
produced by electromagnetic radiation, Eq.
(3) can be rewritten as follows [18]:

( ) 4 1 1 2 1
2
3
2
0

+ =
c
D n
m
m
r
i
g

Where is the refraction index of the
particle; is the power density of the
electromagnetic radiation absorbed by the
particle; and
r
n
D
, its density of inertial mass.
From electrodynamics we know that

( )
( ) 5
1 1
2
2

+ +
= = =

r r
r
c
dt
dz
v

where is the real part of the
propagation vector
r
k
k
r
(also called phase
constant );
i r
ik k k k + = =
r
; , and , are
the electromagnetic characteristics of the
medium in which the incident radiation is
propagating (
0

r
= ; ; m F/ 10 854 . 8
12
0

=
0

r
= , where ). m / H
7
0
10 4

=
From (5), we see that the index of
refraction v c n
r
= , for >> , is given
by
( ) 6
4
0


f
n
r
r
=

Substitution of Eq. (6) into Eq. (4) yields

3
( ) 7 1
4
1 2 1
2
0

+ = =
cf
D
m
m
i
g

It was shown that there is an additional
effect - Gravitational Shielding effect -
produced by a substance whose gravitational
mass was reduced or made negative [18].
This effect shows that just beyond the
substance the gravity acceleration will be
reduced at the same proportion
1
g
0
1
i g
m m = ,
i.e., g g
1
1
= , ( is the gravity acceleration
before the substance). Consequently, after a
second gravitational shielding, the gravity
will be given by
g
g g g
2 1 1 2
2
= = , where
2
is the value of the ratio
0 i g
m m for the
second gravitational shielding. In a
generalized way, we can write that after the
nth gravitational shielding the gravity, ,
will be given by
n
g

g g
n
n
...
3 2 1
=

The dependence of the shielding
effect on the height, at which the samples are
placed above a superconducting disk with
radius , has been recently
measured up to a height of about 3m [
m r
D
1375 . 0 =
19].
This means that the gravitational shielding
effect extends, beyond the disk, for
approximately 20 times the disk radius.

3. Gravitational Shieldings in the Van Allen
belts

The Van Allen belts are torus of
plasma around Earth, which are held in place
by Earth's magnetic field (See Fig.1). The
existence of the belts was confirmed by the
Explorer 1 and Explorer 3 missions in early
1958, under Dr J ames Van Allen at the
University of Iowa. The term Van Allen belts
refers specifically to the radiation belts
surrounding Earth; however, similar
radiation belts have been discovered around
other planets.
Now consider the ionospheric heating
with HF beam, modulated at ELF (See Fig.
2). The amplitude-modulated HF heating
















Fig.1 Van Allen belts
Inner
belt
Outer
belt
Magnetic
axis
Earth
Van Allen belts

0 3600km 6600km
wave is absorbed by the ionospheric plasma,
modulating the local conductivity . The
current density
0
E j = radiates ELF
electromagnetic waves that pass through the
Van Allen belts producing two Gravitational
Shieldings where the densities are minima,
i.e., where they are approximately equal to
density of the interplanetary medium near
Earth. The quasi-vacuum of the
interplanetary space might be thought of as
beginning at an altitude of about 1000km
above the Earths surface [20]. Thus, we can
assume that the densities
i
and
o

respectively, at the first gravitational
shielding S
i
(at the inner Van Allen belt) and
at S
o
(at the outer Van Allen belt)

are
(density of the
interplanetary medium near the Earth [
3 20
. 10 8 . 0

m kg
i o

21]).
The parallel conductivities,

i 0

and
o 0
, respectively at S
i
and S
o
, present
values which lie between those for metallic
conductors and those for semiconductors
[20], i.e., m S
o i
/ 1 ~
0 0
. Thus, in these
two Gravitational Shielding, according to Eq.
(7), we have, respectively:

( ) 8 1 10 1 . 4 1 2 1
2
4

+ =
f
D
i
i

Conductivity in presence of the Earths magnetic field

4











































Fig. 2 Ionospheric Gravitational Shieldings - The amplitude-modulated HF heating wave is absorbed by the
ionospheric plasma, modulating the local conductivity
0
. The current density
0 0
E j = (E
0
is the Electrojet
Electric Field), radiates ELF electromagnetic waves (d is the length of the ELF dipole). Two gravitational shieldings
(S
o
and S
i
) are formed at the Van Allen belts. Then, the gravity due to the Sun, after the shielding S
i,
becomes g
sun
=
o

i
g
sun
. The effect of the gravitational shielding reaches km d r
D
000 , 1 10 ~ 20 ~ = .
100km
60km
D

E

S
o
ELF modulated
HF heating radiation
d ~100km
m
air
g
sun
~10 d ~1,000km

6,600 km
Outer Van Allen belt

Inner Van Allen belt

3,600 km
S
i
ELF radiation
g
30km
3
. 7 . 0 ~

m kg
air

3
. 01 . 0

< m kg
air

Electrojet Electric Field, E0

5


and
( ) 9 1 10 1 . 4 1 2 1
2
4

+ =
f
D
o
o

where
( ) 10
a
ELF
o i
S
P
D D
ELF
P is the ELF radiation power, radiated
from the ELF ionospheric antenna; is the
area of the antenna.
a
S
Substitution of (10) into (8) and (9)
leads to
( ) 11 1 10 1 . 4 1 2 1
2
2
4

+ =
f S
P
a
ELF
i o


4. Effect of the gravitational shieldings S
i

and S
o
on the Earth and its environment.

Based on the Podkletnov experiment,
previously mentioned, in which the effect of
the Gravitational Shielding extends for
approximately 20 times the disk radius ( )
D
r ,
we can assume that the effect of the
gravitational shielding S
i
extends for
approximately 10 times the dipole length
( ). For a dipole length of about 100km, we
can conclude that the effect of the
gravitational shielding reaches about
1,000Km below S
d
i
(See Fig.2), affecting
therefore an air mass, , given by
air
m

( )( ) ( )
( ) 12 10 ~
000 , 30 000 , 100 . 7 . 0 ~
14
2 3
kg
m m m kg
V m
air air air
= =
= =

The gravitational potential energy

related to , with respect to the Suns
center, without the effects produced by the
gravitational shieldings S
air
m
o
andS
i
is
( ) ( ) 13
0 sun se air p
g g r m E =
where, (distance from the m r
se
11
10 49 . 1 =

The mass of the air column above 30km height is

negligible in comparison with the mass of the air
column below 30km height, whose average density is
~0.7kg./m
3
.
Sun to Earth, 1 AU), and
2
/ 8 . 9 s m g =
2 3 2
/ 10 92 . 5 s m r GM g
se sun sun

= = , is the
gravity due to the Sun at the Earth.
The gravitational potential energy
related to , with respect to the Suns
center, considering the effects produced by
the gravitational shieldings S
air
m
o
andS
i
, is

( ) ( ) 14
sun i o se air p
g g r m E =

Thus, the decrease in the gravitational
potential energy is

( ) ( ) 15 1
0 sun se air p p p
g r m E E E
i o
= =

Substitution of (11) into (15) gives
( ) 16 1 10 1 . 4 1 2 1 1
2
2
4
sun se air
a
ELF
p
g r m
f S
P
E

+ =
The HF power produced by the
HAARP transmitter is GW P
HF
6 . 3 =
modulated at Hz f 5 . 2 = . The ELF conversion
efficiency at HAARP is estimated to be
for wave generated using sinusoidal
amplitude modulation. This means that
% 10 ~
4
kW P
ELF
4 ~
Substitution of , and kW P
ELF
4 ~ Hz f 5 . 2 =
( )
2 10 2
10 1 000 , 100 m S
a
= = into (16) yields
( ) 17 10 ~ 10 ~
19 4
joules g r m E
sun se air p

This decrease in the gravitational potential

energy of the air column, , produces a
decrease
p
E
p in the local pressure p ( Bernoulli
principle). Then the pressure equilibrium
between the Earths mantle and the Earths
atmosphere, in the region corresponding to the air
column, is broken. This is equivalent to an
increase of pressure p in the region of the
mantle corresponding to the air column. This
phenomenon is similar to an Earthquake, which
liberates an energy equal to (see Fig.3).
p
E
6















Fig. 3 - The decrease in the gravitational potential energy
of the air column,
p
E , produces a decrease p in the
local pressure p (Principle of Bernoulli). Then the
pressure equilibrium between the Earths mantle and the
Earths atmosphere, in the region corresponding to the air
column, is broken. This is equivalent to an increase of
pressure p in the region of the mantle corresponding to
the air column. This phenomenon is similar to an
Earthquake, which liberates an amount of energyequal to
p
E .
Sun
Earth
Earths
atmosphere
Air column
Core
Mantle
p
p p
Curst
The magnitude in the Richter
scales, corresponding to liberation of an
amount of energy,
s
M
joules E
p
19
10 ~ , is obtained
by means of the well-known equation:
( )
( ) 18 10 10
44 . 1 5 19
s
M +
=
which gives . That is, an Earthquake
with magnitude of about 9.1 in the Richter
scales.
1 . 9 =
s
M
The decrease in the gravitational
potential energy in the air column whose
mass is gives to the air column an initial
kinetic energy
air
m
p air air k
E V m E = =
2
0
2
1
, where
is given by (15).
p
E
In the previously mentioned HAARP
conditions, Eq.(11) gives .
Thus, from (15), we obtain
( )
4
10 ~ 1

i o

( ) 19 10 ~
4
sun se air p
g r m E

Thus, the initial air speed is

air
V
0
( ) 20 / 400 ~ / 10 ~ 10
2 4
0
h km s m r g V
se sun air

This velocity will strongly reduce the

pressure in the air column (Bernoulli
principle) and it is sufficient to produce a
powerful Cyclone around the air column
(Coriolis Effect).
Note that, by reducing the diameter
of the HF beam radiation, it is possible to
reduce dipole length (d) and consequently to
reduce the reach of the Gravitational
Shielding, since the effect of the gravitational
shielding reaches approximately18 times the
dipole length. By reducing d, we also reduce
the area , increasing consequently the
value of
a
S
i o
(See Eq. (18)). This can cause
an increase in the velocity (See Eq. (22)).
air
V
0
On the other hand, if the dipole length
(d) is increased, the reach of the
Gravitational Shielding will also be
increased. For example, by increasing the
value of for d km d 101 = , the effect of the
Gravitational Shielding reaches
approximately , and can surpass the
surface of the Earth or the Oceans (See
Fig.2). In this case, the decrease in the
gravitational potential energy at the local, by
analogy to Eq.(15), is
km 1010
( ) ( ) 21 1
sun se p
g r m E
i o
=
where is the mass of the soil, or the mass
of the ocean water, according to the case.
m
The decrease,
p
E , in the gravitational
potential energy increases the kinetic energy
of the local at the same ratio, in such way
that the mass acquires a kinetic
energy
m
p k
E E = . If this energy is not enough
to pluck the mass from the soil or the
ocean, and launch it into space, then is
converted into heat, raising the local
temperature by
m
k
E
T , the value of which can
be obtained from the following expression:
( ) 22 T k
N
E
k

where is the number of atoms in the
volume of the substance considered;
is the Boltzmann
constant. Thus, we get
N
V
K J k / 10 38 . 1
23
=
( )
( )
( )
( ) 23
1
1
nk
g r
k nV
g r m
Nk
E
T
sun se
sun se
k
i o
i o

=
=

=
where is the number of atoms/m n
3
in the
substance considered.
7
In the previously mentioned HAARP
conditions, Eq. (11) gives( )
4
10 ~ 1

i o
.
Thus, from (23), we obtain
( ) 24
10 4 . 6
27

n
T


For most liquid and solid substances
the value of is about , and
. Therefore, in this case, Eq.
(24) gives
n
3 28
/ 10 m atoms
3 3
/ 10 ~ m kg
C K T 400 640
This means that, the region in the soil or in
the ocean will have its temperature increased
by approximately 400C.
By increasing or decreasing the
frequency, , of the ELF radiation, it is
possible to increase
ELF
P
f
T (See Eq.(16)). In this
way, it is possible to produce strong
localized heating on Land or on the Oceans.
This process suggests that, by means
of two small Gravitational Shieldings built
with Gas or Plasma at ultra-low pressure, as
shown in the processes of gravity control
[22], it is possible to produce the same
heating effects. Thus, for example, the water
inside a container can be strongly heated
when the container is placed below the
mentioned Gravitational Shieldings.
Let us now consider another source of
ELF radiation, which can activate the
Gravitational Shieldings S
o
and S
i.

It is known that the Schumann
resonances [23] are global electromagnetic
resonances (a set of spectrum peaks in the
extremely low frequency ELF), excited by
lightning discharges in the spherical
resonant cavity formed by the Earths surface
and the inner edge of the ionosphere (60km
from the Earths surface). The Earth
ionosphere waveguide behaves like a
resonator at ELF frequencies and amplifies
the spectral signals from lightning at the
resonance frequencies. In the normal mode
descriptions of Schumann resonances, the
fundamental mode ( is a standing wave
in the Earthionosphere cavity with a
wavelength equal to the circumference of the
Earth. This lowest-frequency (and highest-
intensity) mode of the Schumann resonance
occurs at a frequency
It was experimentally observed that
ELF radiation escapes from the Earth
ionosphere waveguide and reaches the Van
Allen belts [25-28]. In the ionospheric
spherical cavity, the ELF radiation power
density, D, is related to the energy density
inside the cavity,W , by means of the well-
known expression:
( ) 25
4
W
c
D =
where is the speed of light, and c
2
0
2
1
E W = . The electric field E , is given by
2
0
4

=
r
q
E

where C q 000 , 500 = [24] and .

Therefore, we get
m r
6
10 371 . 6 =

( ) 26 / 1 . 4
, / 10 4 . 5
, / 7 . 110
2
3 8
m W D
m J W
m V E

=
=

The area, , of the cross-section of the cavity

is . Thus, the ELF
radiation power is . The
total power escaping from the Earth-
ionosphere waveguide, , is only a fraction of
this value and need to be determined.
S
2
12
10 4 . 2 2 m d r S = =

W DS P
12
10 8 . 9 =
esc
P
When this ELF radiation crosses the
Van Allen belts the Gravitational Shieldings
S
o
and S
i
can be produced (See Fig.4).

















Fig.4 ELF radiation escaping from the Earth
ionosphere waveguide can produce the Gravitational
Shieldings S
o
and S
i
in the Van Allen belts.
km d 000 , 126 10 ~ =


Inner
core
Outer
core
Crust
Mantle
Earth
S
o
S
i

d
ELF
radiation
Reach of the Gravitational Shielding

) 1 = n
Hz f 83 . 7
1
= [24].
The ELF radiation power densities and
, respectively in S
i
D
o
D
i
and S
o
,

are given by
8
( ) 27
4
2
i
esc
i
r
P
D

=
and
( ) 28
4
2
o
esc
o
r
P
D

=
where and are respectively, the
distances from the Earths center up to the
Gravitational Shieldings S
i
r
o
r
i
and S
o
.
Under these circumstances, the kinetic
energy related to the mass, , of the
Earths outer core
oc
m

, with respect to the Suns

center, considering the effects produced by
the Gravitational Shieldings S
o
andS
i

**
is
( ) ( ) 29 1
2
2
1
oc oc sun se oc k
V m g r m E
i o
= =
Thus, we get
( ) ( ) 30 1
sun se oc
g r V
i o
=
The average radius of the outer core
is m r
oc
6
10 3 . 2 = . Then, assuming that the
average angular speed of the outer core,
oc
,
has the same order of magnitude of the
average angular speed of the Earths
crust,

, i.e., ,
then we get
s rad
oc
/ 10 29 . 7 ~
5

=
s m r V
oc oc oc
/ 10 ~
2
= . Thus, Eq.
(30) gives
( ) ( ) 31 10 ~ 1
5

i o

This relationship shows that, if the
power of the ELF radiation escaping from
the Earth-ionosphere waveguide is
progressively increasing (for example, by the
increasing of the dimensions of the holes in
the Earth-ionosphere waveguide

), then as
soon as the value of
i o
equals 1, and the

The Earth is an oblate spheroid. It is composed of a

number of different layers. An outer silicate solid
crust, a highly viscous mantle, a liquid outer core that
is much less viscous than the mantle, and a solid inner
core. The outer core is made of liquid iron and nickel.

**
Note that thereach of the Gravitational Shielding
is . km d 000 , 126 10 ~ =

The amount of ELF radiation that escapes from the

Earth-ionosphere waveguide is directly proportional to
the number of holes in inner edge of the ionosphere
and the dimensions of these holes. Thus, if the amount
of holes or its dimensions are increasing, then the
power of the ELF radiation escaping from the Earth-
ionosphere waveguide will also be increased.

speed
oc
V will be null. After a time
interval, the progressive increasing of the
power density of the ELF radiation makes
i o
greater than 1. Equation (29) shows
that, at this moment, the velocity
resurges, but now in the opposite direction.
oc
V
The Earth's magnetic field is generated
by the outer core motion, i.e., the molten iron
in the outer core is spinning with angular
speed,
oc
, and it's spinning inside the Suns
magnetic field, so a magnetic field is
generated in the molten core. This process is
called dynamo effect.
Since Eq. (31) tells us that the
factor( )
i o
1 is currently very close to zero,
we can conclude that the moment of the
reversion of the Earths magnetic field is
very close.

5. Device for moving very heavy loads.

Based on the phenomenon of reduction
of local gravity related to the Gravitational
Shieldings S
o
andS
i
, it is possible to create a
device for moving very heavy loads such as
large monoliths, for example.
Imagine a large monolith on the
Earths surface. At noon the gravity
acceleration upon the monolith is basically
given by
sun R
g g g =
where
2 3 2
/ 10 92 . 5 s m r GM g
se sun sun

= = is the
gravity due to the Sun at the monolith and
.
2
/ 8 . 9 s m g=
If we place upon the monolith a mantle
with a set of Gravitational Shieldings
inside, the value of becomes
n
R
g
sun
n
R
g g g =
This shows that, it is possible to reduce
down to values very close to zero, and thus to
transport very heavy loads (See Fig.5). We
will call the mentioned mantle of
Gravitational Shielding Mantle. Figure 5
shows one of these mantles with a set of 8
Gravitational Shieldings. Since the mantle
thickness must be thin, the option is to use
Gravitational Shieldings produced by layers of
high-dielectric strength semiconductor [
R
g
22].
When the Gravitational Shieldings are active the
9



















(a) (b)















Cross-section of the Mantle
(c)





Fig. 5 Device for transporting very heavy loads. It is possible to transport very heavy loads by
using a Gravitational Shielding Mantle - A Mantle with a set of 8 semiconductor layers or more (each
layer with 10m thickness, sandwiched by two metallic foils with 10m thickness). The total thickness of the
mantle (including the insulation layers) is ~1mm. The metallic foils are connected to the ends of an ELF
voltage source in order to generate ELF electromagnetic fields through the semiconductor layers. The
objective is to create 8 Gravitational Shieldings as shown in (c). When the Gravitational Shieldings are active
the gravity due to the Sun is multiplied by the factor
8
, in such way that the gravity resultant upon the
monoliths (a) and (b) becomes
Sun R
g g g
8
= . Thus, for example, if 525 . 2 = results
2
/ 028 . 0 s m g
R
= .
Under these circumstances, the weight of the monolith becomes
3
10 9 . 2

of the initial weight.
~
~1 mm
g
Sun
g
8

g
Sun
g
8

Set of 8 Gravitational Shieldings inside the Mantle
ELF
f
V
m 10
m 100
dielectric
metallic
foils
High-dielectric strength
semiconductor
Mantle

10

gravity due to the Sun is multiplied by the
factor , in such way that the gravity resultant
upon the monolith becomes .
Thus, for example, if
8

Sun R
g g g
8
=
525 . 2 = the result is
. Under these circumstances,
the weight of the monolith becomes of
the initial weight.
2
/ 028 . 0 s m g
R
=
3
10 9 . 2

6. Gates to the imaginary spacetime in the
Earth-ionosphere waveguide.

It is known that strong densities of
electric charges can occur in some regions of
the upper boundary of the Earth-ionosphere
waveguide, for example, as a result of the
lightning discharges [29]. These anomalies
increase strongly the electric field in the
mentioned regions, and possibly can produce
a tunneling effect to the imaginary
spacetime.
w
E
The electric field will produce an
electrons flux in a direction and an ions flux
in an opposite direction. From the viewpoint
of electric current, the ions flux can be
considered as an electrons flux at the same
direction of the real electrons flux. Thus, the
current density through the air, , will be
the double of the current density expressed
by the well-known equation of Langmuir-
Child
w
E
w
j
( ) 32 10 33 . 2
2
9
4
2
6
2 2
0
2
3
2
3
2
3
r
V
r
V
r
V
m
e
j
e
r

= = =
where 1
r
for the air; is
the called Childs constant;
6
10 33 . 2

=
r , in this case, is
the distance between the center of the charges
and the Gravitational Shieldings and
(see Fig.6) (
1 w
S
2 w
S
( ) m m r
16 15
2
1
10 7 10 4 . 1

= = ); V is the
voltage drop given by
( ) 33
2 2
0 0
A
Qr
r r E V
Q
w

= = =
where is the anomalous amount of charge
in the region with area , i.e.,
Q
A
q
A Q
Q
= = , is the ratio of
proportionality, and
2 10 2
/ 10 8 . 9 4 m C R q
q

=
is the normal charge density ; is
the total charge[
C q 000 , 500 =
24], then
n q
q A Q = =
(
q n
A q = is the normal amount of charge in
the area ). A
By substituting (33) into (32), we get

( ) 34
2
2
2
2 2 2
2
3
2
3
2
3
0
2
0
2

= = =
A
Q
r r
A
Qr
r
V
j j
w

Since
0
2
Q w
E = and
w w w
E j = , we can
write that
( )
( ) 35 10 14 . 2
18 . 0 18 . 0
18 . 0
2 2
2
5 . 5 16
5 . 5
0
5 . 1
5 . 5 3
5 . 5
0
5 . 1
5 . 5 3
5 . 5 5 . 5
0
5 . 1
5 . 5 3
0
3
0
3 4 3
2
3

=
= = = =
=

= =
r r A r
Q
A
Q
A
Q
r
E j E
q Q
w w w w

The electric field has an oscillating
component, , with frequency, , equal to
the lowest Schumann resonance frequency
w
E
1 w
E f
Hz f 83 . 7
1
= . Then, by using Eq. (7), that can
be rewritten in the following form [18]:
( ) 36 1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
3 2
4 3
27

+ = =

f
E
m
m
r
i
g

we can write that

( ) 37 1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
3
1
2
4
1
3
27

+ = =

f
E
m
m
w
w w rw
i
g
w

By substitution of Eq. (35), 1 =

rw
,
and into the
expression above, we obtain
3 2
/ 10 1 m kg
w

= Hz f 83 . 7
1
=
( ) 38 1 10 84 . 7 1 2 1
5 . 5 10

+ =


w
The gravity below will be
decreased by the effect of the Gravitational
Shieldings and , according to the
following expression
2 w
S
1 w
S
2 w
S

( )
sun w w
g g
2 1


where
w w w
= =
2 1
. Thus, we get

11













































Fig. 6 - Gravitational Shieldings
1 w
S and
2 w
S produced by strong densities of electric charge in the
upper boundary of the Earth-Ionosphere.
ground
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
R
Region with much greater
concentration of electric charges Ionosphere
Upper boundary
of the
Earth-Ionosphere waveguide
r 1 w
S
2 w
S
d
Reach of the Gravitational Shielding
~10 X d
60 km
Earth-Ionosphere waveguide
sun w w
g g
2 1
g g
w
E
Q

A
q

12

g g
g
g
sun
=

+

2
5 . 5 10
1 10 84 . 7 1 2 1 1
where
( ) 39 1 10 84 . 7 1 2 1 1
2
5 . 5 10

+ =

g
g
sun

In a previous article [18], it was shown
that, when the gravitational mass of a body is
reduced to a value in the range of
to or the local gravity
i
m 159 . 0 +
i
m 159 . 0 ( ) g is
reduced to a value in the range of
to , the body performs a transition
to the imaginary spacetime. This means that,
if the value of
g 159 . 0 +
g 159 . 0
given by Eq.(39) is in the
range 159 . 0 159 . 0 < < , then any body
(aircrafts, ships, etc) that enters the region -
defined by the volume ( ) d A 10 ~ below the
Gravitational Shielding , will perform a
transition to the imaginary spacetime.
Consequently, it will disappear from our
Real Universe and will appear in the
Imaginary Universe. However, the electric
field , which reduces the gravitational
mass of the body (or the gravitational
shieldings, which reduce the local gravity)
does not
2 w
S
1 w
E
accompany the body; they stay at
the Real Universe. Consequently, the body
returns immediately from the Imaginary
Universe. Meanwhile, it is important to note
that, in the case of collapse of the
wavefunction of the body, it will never
more come back to the Real Universe.

Equation (39) shows that, in order to

obtain in the range of 159 . 0 159 . 0 < < the
value of must be in the following range:
4 . 135 1 . 127 < <
Since the normal charge density is
then it must be increased
by about 130 times in order to transform the
region , below the Gravitational
Shielding , in a gate to the imaginary
spacetime.
2 10
/ 10 8 . 9 m C
q

( d A 10 ~ )
2 w
S
It is known that in the Earth's
atmosphere occur transitorily large densities
of electromagnetic energy across extensive
areas. We have already seen how the density
of electromagnetic energy affects the
gravitational mass (Eq. (4)). Now, it will be
shown that it also affects the length of an
object. Length contraction or Lorentz
contraction is the physical phenomenon of a
decrease in length detected by an observer of
objects that travel at any non-zero velocity
relative to that observer. If is the length of
the object in its rest frame, then the length
, observed by an observer in relative
motion with respect to the object, is given by
0
L
L
( )
( ) 40 1
2 2
0
0
c V L
V
L
L = =

where is the relative velocity between the

observer and the moving object and the
speed of light. The function
V
c
( ) V is known as
the Lorentz factor.
It was shown that Eq. (3) can be
written in the following form [18]:

+ = 1
1
1
2 1 1 1 2 1
2 2
2
0 0
c V
c m
p
m
m
i i
g
This expression shows that
( ) ( ) 41
1
1
1
2 2
2
0
V
c V
c m
p
i
=

+
By substitution of Eq. (41) into Eq.(40) we
get
( )
( ) 42
1
2
0
0 0

+
= =
c m
p
L
V
L
L
i

It was shown that, the term, c m p

i0
, in the
equation above is equal to
2
c Wn
r
, where
is the density of electromagnetic energy
absorbed by the body and the index of
refraction, given by
W
r
n
( )

+ + = = 1 1
2
2


r r
r
v
c
n
In the case of f 2 >> , ( )
2
8 E f W = and
f c v c n
r
4
2
= = [30]. Thus, in this case,
Eq. (42) can be written as follows
( ) 43
10 758 . 1 1
4
3 2
3
27
0
E
f
L
L
r

+
=

13
Note that t E E
m
sin = .The average value
for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E because E varies
sinusoidaly ( is the maximum value
for
m
E
E ). On the other hand, 2
m rms
E E = .
Consequently we can change
4
E by ,
and the equation above can be rewritten as
follows
4
rms
E
( ) 44
10 758 . 1 1
4
3 2
3
27
0
rms
r
E
f
L
L

+
=

Now, consider an airplane traveling in a
region of the atmosphere. Suddenly, along a
distance of the trajectory of the airplane
arises an ELF electric field with intensity
and frequency . The
Aluminum density is and
its conductivity is .
According to Eq. (44), for the airplane the
distance is shortened by . Under
these conditions, a distance of about
3000km will become just 0.08km.
0
L
1 5
. 10 ~

m V E
rms
Hz f 1 ~
3 3
. 10 7 . 2

= m kg
1 7
. 10 82 . 3

= m S
0
L
5
10 7 . 2

0
L
Time dilation is an observed
difference of elapsed time between two
observers which are moving relative to each
other, or being differently situated from
nearby gravitational masses. This effect
arises from the nature of space-time
described by the theory of relativity. The
expression for determining time dilation in
special relativity is:
( )
2 2
0
0
1 c V
T
V T T

= =
where is the interval time measured at the
object in its rest frame (known as the proper
time);
0
T
T is the time interval observed by an
observer in relative motion with respect to
the object.
Based on Eq. (41), we can write the
expression of T in the following form:
2
0
0
2 2
0
1
1

+ =

=
c m
p
T
c V
T
T
i
For , we can write that and c V << V m p
i0
=
2
2
0 0
2
0
2
1
= = = V m gr m V m
i i i
where is the gravitational potential.
Then, it follows that
2 2
2
2
0
2
2
0
2
2
c c
V
c m
p
and V
m
p
i i

= =

= =

Consequently, the expression of T becomes

2
0
2 2
0
2
1
1
c
T
c V
T
T

+ =

=

which is the well-known expression obtained
in the General Relativity.
Based on Eq. (41) we can also write
the expression of T in the following form:

( ) 45 10 758 . 1 1 1
4
3 2
3
27
0
2
0
0 rms
r
i
E
f
T
c m
p
T T

+ =

+ =

Now, consider a ship in the ocean. It is
made of steel ( 300 =
r
; ;
). When subjected to a
uniform ELF electromagnetic field, with
intensity and
frequency
1 6
. 10 1 . 1

= m S
3 3
. 10 8 . 7

= m kg
1 3
. 10 36 . 1

= m V E
rms
Hz f 1 = , the ship will perform a
transition in time to a time T given by

( ) 46 0195574 . 1
10 758 . 1 1
0
4
3 2
3
27
0
T
E
f
T T
rms
r
=
=

+ =

( )

If s h January T 0 min 0 0 , 1943 1 ,
0
= then
the ship performs a transition in time
to s h January T 0 min 0 0 , 1981 1 , = . Note
that the use of ELF ( ) Hz f 1 = is fundamental.
It is important to note that the
electromagnetic field , besides being
uniform, must remain with the ship during
the transition to the time
rms
E
T . If it is not
uniform, each part of the ship will perform
transitions for different times in the future.
On the other hand, the field must remain with
the ship, because, if it stays at the time ,
the transition is interrupted. In order to the
electromagnetic field remains at the ship, it is
necessary that all the parts, which are
involved with the generation of the field, stay
0
T
14
inside the ship. If persons are inside the ship
they will perform transitions for different
times in the future because their
conductivities and densities are different.
Since the conductivity and density of the ship
and of the persons are different, they will
perform transitions to different times. This
means that the ship and the persons must
have the same characteristics, in order to
perform transitions to the same time. Thus, in
this way is unsuitable and highly dangerous
to make transitions to the future with
persons. However, there is a way to solve
this problem. If we can control the
gravitational mass of a body, in such way
that
0 i g
m m = , and we put this body inside
a ship with gravitational mass
0 i g
M M ,
then the total gravitational mass of the ship
will be given by

( ) 0 0 i i g g total g
m M m M M + = + =
or
( )
( ) 47 1
0
0
0 i
i
i
total g
ship
M
m
M
M
+ = =
Since

+ = = 1 1 2 1
2
0 0
c M
p
M
M
i i
g
ship

we can write that

( ) 48
2
3
1
2
0
ship
i
c M
p

=

+
Then it follows that
( ) 49
2
3
1
0
2
0
0

+ =
ship
i
T
c M
p
T T

Substitution of Eq. (47) into Eq. (49) gives
( ) 50
2
1
0
0
0

=
i
i
M
m
T T

Note that, if ( )
0 0
0391148 . 0
i i
m M = , Eq.
(50) gives
( ) 0195574 . 1
0
T T =
which is the same value given by Eq.(46).

This idea was originally presented by the author in

the paper: The Gravitational Spacecraft [30].

Other safe way to make transitions
in the time is by means of flights with
relativistic speeds, according to predicted by
the equation:
( ) 51
1
2 2
0
c V
T
T

=
With the advent of the Gravitational
Spacecrafts [30], which could reach velocities
close to the light speed, this possibility will
become very promising.
It was shown in a previous paper [18]
that by varying the gravitational mass of the
spacecraft for negative or positive we can go
respectively to the past or future.
If the gravitational mass of a particle is
positive, then t is always positive and given
by
( ) 52 1
2 2
0
c V t t + =
This leads to the well-known relativistic
prediction that the particle goes to the future
if . However, if the gravitational
mass of the particle is negative, then t is also
negative and, therefore, given by
c V
( ) 53 1
2 2
0
c V t t =
In this case, the prevision is that the particle
goes to the past if . In this way,
negative gravitational mass is the necessary
condition to the particle to go to the past.
c V
Now, consider a parallel plate
capacitor, which has a high-dielectric strength
semiconductor between its plates, with the
following characteristics 1 =
r
; ;
. According to Eq.(45), when
the semiconductor is subjected to a uniform
ELF electromagnetic field, with intensity
1 4
. 10

= m S
3 3
. 10

= m kg
( ) mm KV m V E
rms
/ 1 . 0 . 10
1 5
= and frequency
Hz f 1 = , it should perform a transition in
time to a time T given by
( ) (54 08434 . 1
10 758 . 1 1
0
4
3 2
3
27
0
T
E
f
T T
rms
r
=
=

+ =

)
However, the transition is not performed,
because the electromagnetic field is external
to the semiconductor, and obviously would
not accompany the semiconductor during the
transition. In other words, the field stays at
15
the time , and the transition is not
performed.
0
T

7. Detection of Earthquakes at the Very
Early Stage

When an earthquake occurs, energy
radiates outwards in all directions. The
energy travels through and around the earth
as three types of seismic waves called
primary, secondary, and surface waves (P-
wave, S-wave and Surface-waves). All
various types of earthquakes follow this
pattern. At a given distance from the
epicenter, first the P-waves arrive, then the
S-waves, both of which have such small
energies that they are mostly not threatening.
Finally, the surface waves arrive with all of
their damaging energies. It is predominantly
the surface waves that we would notice as the
earthquake. This knowledge, that, preceding
any destructive earthquake, there are telltales
P-waves, are used by the earthquake warning
systems to reliably initiate an alarm before
the arrival of the destructive waves.
Unfortunately, the warning time of these
earthquake warning systems is less than 60
seconds.
Earthquakes are caused by the
movement of tectonic plates. There are three
types of motion: plates moving away from
each other (at divergent boundaries); moving
towards each other (at convergent
boundaries) or sliding past one another (at
transform boundaries). When these
movements are interrupted by an obstacle
(rocks, for example), an Earthquake occurs
when the obstacle breaks (due to the sudden
release of stored energy).
The pressure P acting on the obstacle
and the corresponding reaction modifies the
gravitational mass of the matter along the
pressing surfaces, according to the following
expression [18]:
( ) 55 1
2
1 2 1
0
2
3 2
2
i g
m
cv
P
m

+ =

where and are respectively, the density

of matter and the speed of the pressure waves
in the mentioned region.
v
Hookes law tells us that ,
thus Eq. (55) can be rewritten as follows
2
v P =
( ) 56 1
4
1 2 1
0
2
i g
m
c
P
m

+ =

or
( ) 57 1
4
1 2 1
2
0

+ = =

c
P
m
m
i
g
Thus, the matter subjected to the
pressureP works as a Gravitational
Shielding. Consequently, if the gravity below
it is , then the gravity above it is

g , in
such way that a gravimeter on the Earth
surface (See Fig.7) shall detect a gravity
anomaly g given by

( ) ( ) 58 1

= = g g g g

Substitution of Eq. (57) into this Eq. (58)
yields
( ) 59 1
4
1 2
2

+ = g
c
P
g

Thus, when a gravity anomaly is detected,
we can evaluate, by means of Eq. (59), the
magnitude of the ratio P in the
compressing region. On the other hand,
several experimental observations of the time
interval between the appearing of gravity
anomaly g and the breaking of the obstacle
(beginning of the Earthquake) will give us a
statistical value for the mentioned time
interval, which will warn us (earthquake
warning system) when to initiate an alarm.
Obviously, the earthquake warning time, in
this case becomes much greater than 60
seconds.











16












(a)
















(b)














(c)

Fig. 7 Three main types of movements: (a) Divergent (tectonic plates diverge). (b) Convergent
(plates converge). (c) Transform (platesslide past each other). Earthquakes occur when the obstacle
breaks (due to the sudden release of stored energy).

g
( )

= g g 1
( )

= g g 1

g

( )

= g g 1

g


17
References

[1] Rietveld, M. T. , Stubbe, P. and Kopka, H., (1987), On
the frequency dependence of ELF/VLF waves produced
by modulated ionospheric heating, Radio, Sci., J., 24, 270.

[2] Papadopoulos, K., Sharma, A., and Chang, C. L.,(1989),
On the efficient operation of the plasma antenna driven
by modulation of ionospheric currents, Comments
Plasma Phys. Control Fusion, 13, 1.

[3] Ferraro et al., (1989) Measurements of extremely low
frequency signals from modulation of the polar
electrojet above Fairbanks, Alaska, IEEE Trans.
Antennas Propag., 37, 802.

[4] Papadopoulos, K., at al., (1990), On the efficiency of
ionospheric ELF generation, Radio Sci., 25, 1311.

[5] Mc Carrick, M. D. et al., (1990) Excitation of ELF
waves in the Schuman resonance range by modulated
HF heating of the polar electrojet, Radio Sci., 25, 1291.

[6] Stubbe, P., and Kopka, H., (1977) Modulation of the
polar electrojet by powerful HF waves, J . Geophys.
Res., 82, 2319-2325.

[7] Getmantsev, G.G., et al. (1974), Combination frequencies
in the interaction between high-power short-wave
radiation and ionospheric plasma, Sov. Phys. J ETP,
Engl. Trans., 20 , 229-232.

[8] Tripathi, V. K., Chang. C. L., and Papadopoulos, K.,
(1982), Excitation of the Earth ionosphere waveguide
by an ELF source in the ionosphere, Radio Sci, 17, 1321.

[9] Barr, R., and Stubbe, P. (1984), ELF and VLF radiation
from the polar electrojet antenna, Radio Sci.,19,1111.

[10] Rietveld, M. T. , Koptka, H., and Stubbe, P. (1986), D-
Region characteristics deduced from pulsed ionospheric
heating under auroral electrojet conditions, J . Atmos.
Terr. Phys., 48, 311.

[11] Barr, R., and Stubbe, P. (1991), ELF radiation from the
Tromso super heater facility, Geophys. Res. Lett., 18,1035.

[12] Milikh, G.M., et al., (1999), ELF emission generated by
the HAAARP HF heater using varying frequency and
polarization, Radiophys. Quantum Electr., 42, 728-735.

[13] Moore, R. C., et al., (2007) ELF waves generated by
modulated HF heating of the auroral electrojet and
observed at a ground distance of ~4400km, J . Geophys.
Research, 112, A05309.

[14] J in, G., Spasojevic, and Inan, U. S., (2009),
Relationship between electrojet current strength and
ELF signal intensity in modulated heating experiments,
J . Geophys, Res., 114, A08301, doi: 10.1029/2009J A014122.

[15] Cohen, M. B., M. Golkowski, and U. S. Inan (2008),
Orientation of the HAARP ELF ionospheric dipole
and the auroral electrojet, Geophys. Res. Lett., 35,
L02806, doi.10.1029/2007GL032424.

[16] Isham, C. J . (1975) Quantum Gravity, in Oxford
Symposium, OUP.


[17] Isham, C.J ., (1997) Structural Problems Facing
Quantum Gravity Theory, in M, Francaviglia, G,
Longhi, L, Lusanna, and E, Sorace, eds., Proceedings
of the 14 International Conference on General
th
Relativity and Gravitation, 167-209,(World
Scientific, Singapore, 1997).

[18] De Aquino, F.(2010) Mathematical Foundations
of the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity,
Pacific J ournal of Science and Technology,
11(1), J une 2010, pp.173-232.

[19] Modanese, G., (1996), Updating the Theoretical
Analysis of the Weak Gravitational Shielding
Experiment, supr-con/9601001v2.

[20] Van Allen, J . A., (1961), The Earth and Near Space,
Bulletin of Atomic Scientists, Vol. 17, N5, p.218.

[21] Martin, M., and Turychev, S.G., (2004), Measuring the
Interplanetary Medium with a Solar Sail, Int. J . Mod.
Phys.D13, 899-906. astro-ph/0308108v2.

[22] De Aquino, F. (2010) Gravity Control by means of
Electromagnetic Field through Gas at Ultra-Low
Pressure, Pacific J ournal of Science and Technology,
11(2) November 2010, pp.178-247, Physics/0701091.

[23] Schumann W. O. (1952). "ber die strahlungslosen
Eigenschwingungen einer leitenden Kugel, die von
einer Luftschicht und einer Ionosphrenhlle umgeben
ist". Zeitschrift und Naturfirschung 7a: 149154

[24] Volland, H. (1995), Handbook of Atmospheric
Electrodynamics, CRC Press, vol.I, Chapter11.


[25] Carpenter, D. L., and T. R. Miller (1976), Ducted
magnetospheric propagation of signals from the Siple,
Antarctica, VLF transmitter, J . Geophys. Res., 81(16),
2692 2700.

[26] Helliwell, R. A., D. L. Carpenter, and T. R. Miller
(1980), Power threshold for growth of coherent VLF
signals in the magnetosphere, J . Geophys. Res.,
85(A7), 3360 3366.

[27] Cohen, M. B., (2009), ELF/VLF Phased array generation
via frequency-matched steering of a continuous HF
ionospheric heating beam, PHD thesis, p.13.

[28] Golkowski, M. et al., (2008), Magnetospheric
amplification and emission triggering by ELF/VLF
waves injected by the 3.6 MW HAARP ionospheric
heater, J . Geophys. Res., 113 (A10201),
doi:10.1029/2008J A013, 157.

[29] Cummer, S.A., (2000) Modeling Electromagnetic
Propagation in the Earth-ionosphere Waveguide,
IEEE Trans. Antennas Propag., Vol. 48, 9, p.1427.

[30] De Aquino, F. (1998),The Gravitational Spacecraft,
E. Spacecraft Journal, 27,pp.6-13.
http://arxiv.org/abs/physics/9904018.

The Universal Quantum Fluid

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2011 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved

The quantization of gravity showed that the matter is also quantized, and that there is an elementary quantum of
matter, indivisible, whose mass is kg
73
10 9 . 3

. This means that any body is formed by a whole number of these
particles (quantization). It is shown here that these elementary quanta of matter should fill all the space in the
Universe forming a Quantum Fluid continuous and stationary. In addition, it is also explained why the
Michelson-Morley experiment was not able to detect this Universal Quantum Fluid.

Key words: Quantum Fluids, Quantum Gravity, Quantum Cosmology
PACS: 67.10.-j; 04.60.-m; 98.80.Qc

1. Introduction
Until the end of the century XX,
several attempts to quantize gravity were
made. However, all of them resulted fruitless
[1, 2]. In the beginning of this century, it was
clearly noticed that there was something
unsatisfactory about the whole notion of
quantization and that the quantization
process had many ambiguities. Then, a new
approach has been proposed starting from the
generalization of the action function
*
. The
result has been the derivation of a theoretical
background, which finally led to the so-
sought quantization of gravity and of matter
[3]. The quantization of matter shows that
there is an elementary quantum of matter
whose mass is kg
73
10 9 . 3

. This means that
there are no particles in the Universe with
masses smaller than this, and that any body is
formed by a whole number of these particles.
Here, it will be shown that these elementary
quanta of matter should fill all the space in
the Universe, forming a quantum fluid
continuous and stationary. In addition, it is
also explained why the Michelson-Morley
experiment found no evidence of the existence
of the universal fluid [4]. A modified
Michelson-Morley experiment is proposed in
order to observe the displacement of the
interference bands.
2. The Universal Quantum Fluid
The quantization of gravity showed
that the matter is also quantized, and that

*
The formulation of the action in Classical Mechanics
extends to Quantum Mechanics and has been the basis
for the development of the Strings Theory.
there is an elementary quantum of matter,
indivisible, whose mass is kg
73
10 9 . 3

[3].
Considering that the inertial mass of
the Observable Universe is kg G H c M
U
53
0
3
10 2 = ,
and that its volume is
( )
3 79 3
0
3
4
3
3
4
10 m H c R V
U U
= = , where
is the Hubble constant,
we can conclude that the number of these
particles in the Observable Universe is
1 18
0
10 75 . 1

= s H
( )
( ) 1 10
125
min 0
particles
m
M
n
i
U
U
=
By dividing this number by , we get
U
V
( ) 2 / 10
3 46
m particles
V
n
U
U

Obviously, the dimensions of the

elementary quantum of matter depend on its
state of compression. In free space, for
example, its volume is
U U
n V .
Consequently, its radius is m n R
U U
15
3
10

.
If particles with diameter N fill all
space of then . Thus, if
then the number of particles, with
this diameter, necessary to fill all is
. Since the number of
3
1m 1
3
= N
m
15
10

3
1m
particles N
45
10
elementary quantum of matter in the
Universe is
3 46
/ 10 m particles V n
U U
we can
conclude that these particles fill all space in
the Universe, forming a Quantum Fluid
continuous and stationary, the density of
which is
( )
( ) 3 / 10
3 27
min 0
m kg
V
m n
U
i U
CUF

=
Note that this density is smaller than the
2
density of the Intergalactic Medium
( )
3 26
/ 10 m kg
IGM

.
The density of the Universal Quantum
Fluid is clearly not uniform along the
Universe, since it can be strongly
compressed in several regions (galaxies,
stars, blackholes, planets, etc). At the normal
state (free space), the mentioned fluid is
invisible. However, at supercompressed
state, it can become visible by giving origin
to the known matter, since matter, as we have
seen, is quantized and consequently, formed
by an integer number of elementary quantum
of matter with mass . Inside the
proton, for example, there are
(min 0 i
m
)
( )
45
min 0
10 =
i p p
m m n elementary quanta of matter
at supercompressed state, with volume
p proton
n V and radius m n R
p p
30
3
10

.
Therefore, the solidification of the
matter is just a transitory state of this
Universal Quantum Fluid, which can turn
back into the primitive state when the
cohesion conditions disappear.
Due to the cohesion state of the
elementary quanta of matter in the Universal
Quantum Fluid, any amount of linear
momentum transferred to any elementary
quantum of matter propagates totally to the
neighboring and so on, in such way that,
during the propagation of the momentum, the
elementary quanta of matter do not move, in
the same way as the intermediate spheres in
Newtons pendulum (the well-known device
that demonstrates conservation of momentum
and energy) [5, 6]. Thus, whether it is a
photon that transfers its momentum to the
elementary quanta of matter, then the
momentum variation due to the incident
photon is h p = , where is its
wavelength. As we have seen, the diameter
of the elementary quantum of matter is
. According to the Uncertainty
Principle the variation can only be
detected if . In order to satisfy this
condition we must have .
This means that momentum variations, in the
elementary quanta of matter, caused by
photons with wavelength cannot
be detected. That is to say that the
propagation of these photons through the
Universal Quantum Fluid is equivalent to its
propagation in the free space. In practice, it
works as if there was not the Universal
Quantum Fluid. This conclusion is highly
important, because it can easily explain why
in the historical Michelson-Morley
experiment there was no displacement of the
interference bands namely because the
wavelength of the light used in the Michelson-
Morley experiment was fact that led
Michelson to conclude that the hypothesis of
a stationary ether was incorrect. Posteriorly,
several experiments [
m x
15
10

p
h x p
m x
14
10 2


m
14
10

>
m
7
10 5

=
7-13] have been carried
out in order to check the Michelson-Morley
experiment, but the results basically were the
same obtained by Michelson.
Thus, actually there was no
displacement of the interference bands in the
Michelson-Morley experiment because the
wavelength used in the experiment
was , which is a value clearly
much greater than , and therefore,
does not satisfy the condition
derived from the Uncertainty
Principle. The substitution of light used in
the Michelson-Morley experiment by
radiation with is clearly
impracticable. However, the Michelson-
Morley experiment can be partially modified
so as to yield the displacement of the
interference bands. The idea is based on the
generalized expression for the momentum
obtained recently[
m
7
10 5

=
m
14
10

m x
14
10 2


m
14
10

3], which is given by
( ) 4 V M p
g
=
where
2 2
1 c V m M
g g
= is the relativistic
gravitational mass of the particle and V its
velocity; the general expression
of the correlation between the gravitational
and inertial mass;
0 i g
m m =
is the correlation
factor[3].Thus, we can write
( ) 5
1 1
2 2
0
2 2
c V
m
c V
m
i
g

Therefore, we get
3
( ) 6
i g
M M =
The Relativistic Mechanics tells us that
( ) 7
2
c
UV
p =
where is the total energy of the particle.
This expression is valid for any velocity V of
the particle, including
U
c V = .
By comparing Eq. (7) with Eq. (4) we
obtain
( ) 8
2
c M U
g
=
It is a well-known experimental fact that
( ) 9
2
hf c M
i
=
Therefore, by substituting Eq. (9) and Eq. (6)
into Eq. (4), gives
( ) 10

h
c
V
p =
Note that this expression is valid for any
velocity of the particle. In the particular
case of , it reduces to
V
c V =
( ) 11

h
p =
By comparing Eq. (10) with Eq. (7), we
obtain
( ) 12 hf U =
Note that only for 1 = Eq. (11) and Eq.
(12) are reduced to the well=known
expressions of DeBroglie ( ) h q = and
Einstein( ) . hf U =
Equations (10) and (12) show, for
example, that any real particle (material
particles, real photons, etc) that penetrates a
region (with density , conductivity and
relative permeability
r
), where there is an
electromagnetic field( , will have its
momentum
) B E,
p and its energy U reduced by
the factor , where is given by[3]:
( ) 13 1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
4 4
3 2
3
27
2
0 0

+ =
=

+ = =

rms
r
i i
g
B c
f
c m
p
m
m

where is the rms value of the magnetic

field
rms
B
B .
The remaining amount of momentum
and energy, respectively given by
( )

h
c
V

1 and ( ) hf 1 , are
transferred to the imaginary particle
associated to the real particle

(material
particles or real photons) that penetrated the
mentioned region.
It was previously shown that, when the
gravitational mass of a particle is reduced to
a range between
i
M 159 0. + to ,
i.e., when
i
M 159 0.
159 . 0 < , it becomes
imaginary[3], i.e., the gravitational and the
inertial masses of the particle becomes
imaginary. Consequently, the particle disappears
from our ordinary space-time. It goes to the
Imaginary Universe. On the other hand, when the
gravitational mass of the particle becomes greater
than
i
M 159 0. + , or less than , i.e.,
when
i
M 159 0.
159 . 0 > , the particle return to our
Universe.
Figure 1 (a) clarifies the phenomenon of
reduction of the momentum for 159 . 0 > , and
Figure 1 (b) shows the effect in the case of
159 . 0 < . In this case, the particles become
imaginary and, consequently, they go to the
imaginary space-time when they penetrate the
electric fieldE . However, the electric field E
stays in the real space-time. Consequently, the
particles return immediately to the real space-
time in order to return soon after to the imaginary
space-time, due to the action of the electric
fieldE . Since the particles are moving at a
direction, they appear and disappear while they
are crossing the region, up to collide with the
plate (See Fig.1) with a momentum,

h
c
V
p
m

=
, in the case of a material
particle, and

h
p
r
= in the case of a photon.
If this photon transfers its momentum
to elementary quanta of matter ( ) m x
15
10

,
then the momentum variation due to the
incident photon is h p = . According to
the Uncertainty Principle the variation p
can only be detected if , i.e., if h x p
( ) 14 2 x
We conclude, then, that the interaction
between the light used in the Michelson-

As previously shown, there are imaginary particles

associated to each real particle[3].
4
Morley experiment( ) m
7
10 5

= and the
Universal Quantum Fluid just can be
detected, and to produce of the displacement
of the interference bands, if
( ) 15 10 8
7

In order to satisfy this condition in the
Michelson-Morley experiment, we must modify
the medium where the experiment is performed
(for example substituting the air by low-pressure
Mercury plasma), and apply through it an
electromagnetic field with frequency . Under
these conditions, according to Eq. (13), the value
of
f
will be given by
( ) 16 1 10 758 . 1 1 2 1
4 4
3 2
3
27

+ =

rms
r
B c
f

If the low-pressure Mercury plasma is

at and
[
2 3
8 0 10 6

= = m N Torr P . . K T 15 . 318
14], then the mass density, according to the
well-known Equation of State, is
( ) 17 . 10 067 . 6
3 5 0
= m kg
ZRT
PM

where is the molecular

mass of the Hg;
1
0
2006 0

= mol kg M . .
1 Z is the compressibility
factor for the Hg plasma;
is the gases
universal constant.
1 0 1
314 8

= K mol joule R . . .
The electrical conductivity of the Hg
plasma, under the mentioned conditions, has
already been calculated [15], and is given by
( ) 18 . 419 . 3
1
m S
By substitution of the values of and into
Eq. (16) yields
( ) 19 1 10 5471 . 1 1 2 1
3
4
17

+ =
f
B
rms

By comparing with (15), we get

( ) 20 01037 . 0
3
4

f
B
rms
Thus, for , the ELF magnetic field
must have the following intensity:
Hz f 1 =

( ) 21 32 . 0 T B
rms


This means that, if in the Michelson-Morley
experiment the air is substituted by Hg
plasma at and , and an
ELF magnetic field with frequency
Torr
3
10 6

K 15 . 318
Hz f 1 =
and intensity is applied through
this plasma (Fig. 2), then the displacement of
the interference bands should appear.
T B
rms
32 . 0
It is important to note that due to the
Gravitational Shielding effect [3], the gravity
above the magnetic field is given by
. This value, extends
above the vacuum chamber for
approximately 10 times its length. In order to
eliminate this problem we can replace the
ELF magnetic field,
2 8
. 10 8 . 7

s m g
B , shown in Fig. 2, by
two ELF magnetic fields, and , sharing
the same frequency, . The field, , is
placed vertically through the region of the
experimental set-up. The field, , is also
placed vertically, just above (See Fig. 3).
Thus, the gravity above is given by
1
B
2
B
Hz f 1 =
1
B
2
B
1
B
2
B
g
2 1
where
1 1 1 i g
m m = and
2 2 2 i g
m m = are respectively, the
correlation factors in the Gravitational
Shieldings 1 and 2, produced by the ELF
magnetic fields and , respectively. In
order to become
1
B
2
B
g g =
2 1
we must make
7
1 2
10 8 1 1 = = . According to Eq.
(19), this value can be obtained if
and .
Note that the value of is less than the
value of the Earths magnetic field
( ). However, this is not a
problem because the steel of the vacuum
chamber works as a magnetic shielding,
isolating the magnetic fields inside the
vacuum chamber.
( )
T B
rms
5
2
10 331481522 . 5

=
( )
T B
rms
32 . 0
1
=
( ) 2 rms
B
T B
5
10 6

5






















(a)
* There are a type of neutrino, called "ghost neutrino, predicted by General Relativity, with zero mass
and zero momentum. In spite its momentum be zero, it is known that there are wave functions that
describe these neutrinos and that prove that really they exist.



















(b)
Fig. 1 The correlation factor in the expression of the Momentum. (a) Shows the
momentum for 159 . 0 > . (b) Shows the effect when 159 . 0 < . Note that in both cases,
the material particles collide with the cowl with the momentum ( )

h
m
c V p = , and
the photons with

h
p
r
= .
material particle
imaginary particle
associated to the
material particle
real photon
imaginary photon
associated to the
real photon
, , f E
159 . 0 >

h
c
V
p
m

=
[ ]

h
p
i
= 1

h
p
r
=
[ ]

h
c
V
p
i

= 1

h
c
V
p
m

*
0 =
i
p

h
p
r

0 =
i
p
material particle
imaginary particle
associated to the
material particle
real photon
imaginary photon
associated to the
real photon
, , f E
159 . 0 <

h
c
V
p
m

=
[ ]

h
p
i
= 1

h
p
r
=
[ ]

h
c
V
p
i

= 1
0 =
i
p
0 =
i
p

h
p
r

0 =
i
p

6










































Fig. 2 - The modified Michelson-Morley experiment. The air is substituted by Hg plasma at
Torr
3
10 6

and K 15 . 318 , and an ELF magnetic field with frequency Hz f 1 = and intensity
T B
rms
32 . 0 is applied through this plasma, then the displacement of the interference bands should
appear.


Hg Plasma ( Torr
3
10 6

, K 15 . 318 )
Vacuum
Pump
Movable
Mirror
Fixed
Mirror
Beam splitter Compensator
Detector
Coherent
Light source
Hg
Plasma
Manometer
ELF magnetic Field
Vacuum
Chamber
Hz f 1 =
T B
rms
32 . 0
B

7









































Fig. 3 Cross-section of the vacuum chamber showing the magnetic fields
1
B and
2
B .
1
1
1
0 1
i
L
N
B

= ;
2
2
2
0 2
i
L
N
B

=


Steel
Vacuum
Chamber

2
g g =
2 1

g
Wire
Region of the experimental set-up
B
2
B
1
N
2
N
1
L
2
L
1

8

References

[1] Isham, C. J . (1975) Quantum Gravity, in Oxford
Symposium, OUP.

[2] Isham, C.J ., (1997) Structural Problems Facing
Quantum Gravity Theory, in M, Francaviglia, G,
Longhi, L, Lusanna, and E, Sorace, eds., Proceedings
of the 14 International Conference on General
th
Relativity and Gravitation, 167-209,(World
Scientific, Singapore, 1997).

[3] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations
of the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity,
Pacific J ournal of Science and Technology,
11(1), pp.173-232.

[4] Michelson, A. A., (1881) Am. J. Sci, 122, 120.

[5] Hermann, F. and Schmlzle, P. (1981), Am. J .
Phys.,49,761.

[6] Lovett, D. R. et al (1988) Eur. J . Phys., 9, 323-328.

[7] Morley. E. W. and Miller, D.C. (1905), Proceedings of
the American Academy of Arts and Sciences XLI
(12):3218.

[8] Tomaschek, R. (1924). "ber das Verhalten des Lichtes
auerirdischer Lichtquellen". Annalen der Physik 378
(1): 105126. doi:10.1002/and p.19243780107.
http://gallica.bnf.fr/ark:/12148/bpt6k153753/f115.

[9] Miller, Dayton C. (1925). "Ether-Drift Experiments at
Mount Wilson". Proceedings of the National Academy
of Sciences 11 (6): 306314. doi:10.1073/pnas.11.6.306.
http://www.pnas.org/content/11/6/306.full.pdf+html.

[10] Kennedy, Roy J . (1926). "A Refinement of the
Michelson-Morley Experiment". Proceedings of the
National Academy of Sciences 12 (11): 621629.

[11] Illingworth, K. K. (1927). "A Repetition of the
Michelson-Morley Experiment Using Kennedy's
Refinement". Physical Review 30 (5): 692696.
doi:10.1103/PhysRev.30.692.

[12] J oos, G. (1930). "Die J enaer Wiederholung des
Michelsonversuchs". Annalen der Physik 399 (4): 385
407. doi:10.1002/andp.19303990402.

[13] Miller, Dayton C. (1933). "The Ether-Drift Experiment
and the Determination of the Absolute Motion of the
Earth". Reviews of Modern Physics 5 (3): 203242.

[14] GE Technical Publications (2007), 80044 F20T12/
C50/ECO, GE Ecolux T12.

[15] De Aquino, F. (2010) Gravity Control by means
of Electromagnetic Field through Gas at Ultra-
Low Pressure, Pacific J ournal of Science and
Technology, 11(2) November 2010, pp.178-247,
Physics/0701091.

The Gravitational Mass of a Charged Supercapacitor

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2011 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved


Electric double-layer capacitors (EDLCs), also known as supercapacitors, electrochemical double layer
capacitors, or ultracapacitors, are electrochemical capacitors that have an unusually high energy density when
compared to common capacitors, typically on the order of thousands of times greater than a high capacity
electrolytic capacitor. It is shown here that when an EDLC is fully charged its gravitational mass is considerably
eater than when it is discharged. gr

Key words: Supercapacitors, Energy storage systems, Experimental tests of gravitational theories
PACS: 88.80.fh; 84.60.Ve , 04.80.Cc

1. Introduction

The electric double-layer capacitor
effect was first noticed in 1957 by General
Electric engineers experimenting with
devices using porous carbon electrode [1]. It
was believed that the energy was stored in
the carbon pores and it exhibited
"exceptionally high capacitance", although
the mechanism was unknown at that time.
General Electric did not immediately
follow up on this work, and the modern
version of the devices were eventually
developed by researchers at Standard Oil of
Ohio in 1966, after they accidentally re-
discovered the effect while working on
experimental fuel cell designs [2]. Their cell
design used two layers of activated carbon
separated by a thin porous insulator, and this
basic mechanical design remains the basis of
most electric double-layer capacitors to this
day.
An electric double-layer capacitor
(EDLC), is known as supercapacitor, or
ultracapacitor. Their energy density is
typically hundreds of times greater than
conventional electrolytic capacitors. They
also have a much higher power density than
batteries or fuel cells. As of 2011 EDLCs had
a maximum working voltage of 5 volts and
capacities of up to 5,000 farads [3].
Currently, the EDLCs are used for
energy storage rather than as general-purpose
circuit components. The EDLCs also have
two metal plates, but they are coated with
activated carbon immersed in an electrolyte,
and separated by an intervening insulator,
forming in this manner, the double-layer of
activated carbon inside the capacitor. During
the charging process, ions from the
electrolyte accumulate on the surface of each
carbon-coated plate.
Here it is shown that when an EDLC is
fully charged its gravitational mass is
considerably greater than when it is
discharged.

2. Theory

Consider the cross-section of an
EDLC as shown in Fig. 1. The double-layer
in the EDLCs is generally made of activated
carbon immersed in an electrolyte whose
conductivity is much less than carbon
conductivity [4]. The result is that the
conductivity of the double-layer becomes
much less than the conductivity of the
activated carbon and, in this way, the double-
layer can withstand a low voltage, and no
significant current flows through the
activated carbon layers of an ELDC [3]. This
means that they are similar to dielectrics with
very low dielectric strength. Thus, due to the
electrical charge stored in the activated
carbon layers, each layer can be considered
as a non-conducting plane of charge, with
density of charge, S q = , where is the
area of the plates of the capacitor, and
S
CV q = is the amount of electrical charge
stored in the activated carbon layers; is the
capacity of the EDLC. Thus, according to the
well-known expression of the electric field
produced by a non-conducting plane of
charge [
C
5], we can conclude that the electric
field through the layers of activated carbon
(See Fig.1) is given by
2
( )
( ) ( )
( ) 1
2 2
0 0
S
CV
E E E
layer r layer r
layer


= = = =
+

Consequently, the density of electromagnetic
energy in the carbon layers is

( )
( )
( ) 2
8
1
2
0
2
0
2
1

= =
S
CV
E W
layer r
layer layer r layer



It was shown that the relativistic
gravitational mass is correlated with the
relativistic inertial mass by means of the
following factor [
g
M
i
M
6]:

( ) 3
i g
M M =

where can be expressed by

( ) 4 1 1 2 1
2
2

+ =
c
W n
r

where is the refraction index and
r
n the
density of the material.
Substitution of Eq. (2) into Eq. (4),
yields

( )
( )
( ) 5 1
8
1 2 1
2
2
0

+ =
S
CV
n
layer layer r
layer r

In the case of activated carbon layer:
;
( )
1
layer r
n
( )
12
layer r
and .
Thus, if the supercapacitor has ;
and is subjected to
then Eq. (5) gives
3
. 800

m kg
layer

F C 000 , 3 =
2
036 . 0 45 . 0 08 . 0 m S = =
Volts V 4 =

( ) 6 14 . 1 =

Substitution of Eq.(6) into Eq. (3) yields

( ) ( ) ( )
( ) 7 14 . 1 14 . 1
layer i layer i layer g
M M M = =

This means an increase of 14% in the
gravitational mass of the double-layer when
the supercapacitor is fully charged. Since
the mass of the double-layer is a significant
part of the total mass of the supercapacitor,
we can conclude that, when fully charged the
supercapacitor will display considerably
more mass than when it is discharged.
It is important to note that the
gravitational mass of the double-layer can
also be reduced, decreasing the total mass of
the supercapacitor. This can occur, for
example, when . Volts V Volts 1 . 3 5 . 1 < <

Conclusion

The theoretical results here obtained
for the gravitational mass of an EDLC are
general for energy accumulator cells which
contain non-conducting planes of charges
similar to the activated carbon + electrolyte
layers of the EDLCs.































3












































Fig. 1 Cross-section of an Electric Double-Layer Capacitor (Supercapacitor) - Each activated
carbon + electrolyte layer works as a non-conducting plane of charge, with density of charge
S q

= and S q
+ +
= respectively. The electric fields through the layers, due to these
densities of charges( )
+
E E , , are shown in the figure above.
Electrode
+

d

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ +
+
+ +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
E

E
+
E

E
Activated Carbon layer
+
Electrolyte
Insulator


4



References

[1] Becker, H.I., (1957) Low voltage electrolytic capacitor,
US Patent 2800616 (A), 1957-07-23.

[2] Schindall, J . (2007) The Charge of the Ultra-Capacitors,
IEEE Spectrum, November 2007.

[3] Electric Double-Layer Capacitor http://en.wikipedia.org/
wiki / Electric_double-layer_capacitor

[4] Miller, J . and Simon, P. (2008) Fundamentals of
Electrochemical Capacitor Design and Operation, The
Electrochemical Society Interface, Spring 2008.

[5] Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1966) Physics, vol.2, J ohn
Wiley & Sons, NY. Portuguese version (1968) Fsica,
Vol. 2, Ao Livro Tcnico SA, Rio de J aneiro, Brasil,
pp. 768-769.

[6] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of the
Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific J ournal
of Science and Technology, 11(1), pp. 173-232.









Beyond the Material Universe

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2011 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved


Science and Religion have always observed the events from their exclusive viewpoint. It was necessary
the arising of a bond that would make possible the unification of them. This bond was revealed in the last
decades by Quantum Physics, which has shown us that some physical laws extend beyond the material
world, pointing to the existence of the spiritual world. Thus, the spiritual world exists now no longer as
supernatural one, but as world as real as our material world. This discovery marked the beginning of the
understanding of the spiritual world nature and its relationship with the material world. Starting from this
knowledge, here widely detailed, it is now possible to understand the eternal puzzles: where have we
come from, because here we are, and where do we go.

Key words: Science, Religion, Spiritual World, Quantum Gravity, Quantum Cosmology, Quantum
Consciousness.

1. Introduction

The Spiritual World has always been considered something supernatural. Only recently,
with the advent of Quantum Physics, the first evidences of its existence arose. However, it was
the theoretical background derived from Quantum Gravity [1] that has shown that our Real
Universe is contained in an Imaginary Universe. Here, the terms real and imaginary are
borrowed from mathematics (real and imaginary numbers). In addition, it has been possible to
show that the Imaginary Energy has the same characteristics of the Psychic Energy, that is, both
are equivalent. This means that the Imaginary Universe is in fact the Psychic Universe. This
discovery was the starting point for understanding the nature of the Spiritual World and beings
it contains. It also made possible the acquisition of a strong knowledge about the relationship of
the beings of the Spiritual World with us, and with our Material World. This knowledge, which
leads us beyond the Material Universe, is widely detailed in this work.

2. The Psychic Energy

It is known that the De Broglie waves are characterized by a variable quantity called the
wave function, denoted by the symbol. While the frequencies of the De Broglie waves are
determined by a simple form, the value of is usually very complicated. The value of
2
(or
*
) calculated for a particular point x, y, z, t is proportional to the probability of finding the
particle experimentally in that place and time
1
.
Thus, each particle has a particular wave function, which describes the particle fully.
Roughly, it is similar to the "identity card" of the particle, containing all information about the
particle or the body.
Since is proportional to the probability of finding the particle described by , the
integral of on the whole space must be finite inasmuch as the particle is someplace.
Therefore, if
2
P
2

( ) 01 0 V
2
=

+

d
The interpretation is that the particle does not exist. However, if

1
Interpretation by Max Born in 1926.

2
( ) 02 V
2
=

+

d
the particle will be everywhere simultaneously.
Despite the fact that the De Broglie waves are normally associated to material particles
and, in general associated to material bodies, it is known that they are also associated to exotic
particles that cannot even be detected, such as a type of neutrinos called "ghost neutrinos,
predicted by General Relativity. These are called "ghost neutrinos, because they have zero
mass and zero momentum, and cannot be detected. But even so, it is known that there are wave
functions that describe them, which means that they exist and can be present in any place. As a
rough analogy, it is like a person who, despite of existing and possessing an identity card, is
never seen by anyone. The existence of a wave function associated with the "ghost neutrino is
very important, because, in this context, we can conclude that even a thought may have a wave
function associated with it.
It is a proven quantum fact that the wave function may "collapse" and, in that instant,
the possibilities that it describes, suddenly express themselves in reality. The moment of the
"collapse" of the wave function is then a decision point where the pressing need of realization
of the possibilities described by the wave function occurs.
For an observer in our universe something is real when it is in the form of matter or
radiation. Therefore, it can occur that the possibilities described by the wave function realize
themselves in the form of radiation, i.e., they did not materialize. This obviously must occur
when the energy that forms the content described by the wave function is not equal to the
amount of energy needed for its materialization.
Then consider any thought. A thought is a psychic body, with a well-defined psychic
energy, and, as such, with a wave function of its own as any other psychic body. When its wave
function collapses, two possibilities may occur: (a) the psychic energy contained in the thought
is not sufficient to materialize its content - in this case, the collapse of the wave function is
realized in the form of radiation: (b) the psychic energy is sufficient for its materialization - in
this case, the collapse of the wave function content will be fully materialized.
However, in both cases, there must always be production of "virtual" photons to
communicate the psychic interaction to other bodies of the universe, because, according to the
quantum theory, only through this type of quanta, can the interaction be communicated, since it
has infinite range just in the same way as the electromagnetic interaction has, which we know is
communicated by exchanging "virtual" photons. The term "virtual" derives from the principle of
uncertainty due to the impossibility to detect these photons. This is a limitation imposed by
Nature proper.
It can be easily seen that this materialization process, although theoretically possible,
requires enormous amounts of psychic energy, because, according to Einstein's famous equation
E = mc , even a tiny object contains an enormous amount of energy. Moreover, one can
2
conclude that materializations of this type could only be produced by great consciousness with
large psychic energy. In addition, it is evident, in this context, that the larger the amount of
psychic energy of a consciousness the greater its chances of realization.
This is a materialization process that can explain the materialization of the Primordial
Universe. In addition, it becomes evident that the Psychic Energy is a type of mother-energy or
Universal Fluid, which can produce anything.
Since it is in the continuum 4-dimensional (space-time) that the realization of the wave
functions which describe the psychic bodies occurs, then we can assume that they are generated
in a continuum that, despite of containing all psychic forms, also interpenetrates the space-time
continuum. Let us call it, hereafter, Psychic Continuum. By definition this continuum should
also contain the Supreme Consciousness. Therefore, it should be infinite.
3
Then, from the above we can see that an accurate description of the universe cannot
exclude the psychic energy, psychic particles and psychic bodies. That is, the situation calls for
a cosmology that includes the psyche in the description of the Universe, thus complementing the
traditional cosmology that is only a matter of cosmology. This idea is not new; it has existed for
some time and seems to have arisen mainly in Princeton and Pasadena in the USA in the 70s [2]
as a result of the joint effort of eminent physicists, biologists, psychologists and theologians as
well. [3].
In traditional cosmology, the universe comes from a big bang where everything that
exists would be concentrated in a tiny particle with the size of a proton and an enormous mass
equal to the mass of the Universe at the instant before the Big Bang,. But its origin is not
explained, nor thewhy of its critical volume.
The critical volume, in our opinion denotes knowledge of what would happen from these
initial conditions, a fact which points to the existence of a Creator. In this case, the
materialization process described above would explain the materialization of the Primordial
Universe. That is, the Primordial Universe arose at the exact moment that the primordial wave
function collapsed (initial instant) realizating the contents of the psychic form generated in the
consciousness of the Creator when He thought of creating the universe.
The psychic form described by this primordial wave function must then have been
generated in a consciousness with psychic energy much larger than that needed to materialize
the Universe. This enormous consciousness in turn, not only would be the biggest of all
consciences, but also would be the substratum of everything that exists, and obviously
everything that exists would be wholly contained therein, including all space-time.
Based on the General Theory of Relativity and the recent cosmological observations, it is
known that the Universe occupies a space of positive curvature. This space, as we know, is
"closed in itself", its volume is finite, but rest well understood, the space has no boundaries, it is
unlimited. Thus, if the consciousness which we refer to contains all the space, its volume is
necessarily infinite, and therefore contains an infinite psychic energy.
This means that it contains all the psychic energy that exists and therefore, any other
consciousness will be contained in it. Thus, we can conclude that it is the Supreme
Consciousness, and there is no other like it: it is unique. In addition, since it contains all the
psychic energy, it can accomplish everything that it wants, and therefore is omnipotent.
Previously, we showed in the article "Physical Foundations of Quantum Psychology" the
manifestation of knowledge, or auto-accessible knowledge in a consciousness, should be related
to its quantity of psychic energy. In the Supreme Consciousness, whose psychic energy is
infinite, the manifestation of the knowledge is total, thus, necessarily, it must be omniscient.
Being omniscient, we cannot doubt its justice or goodness. Thus, God is supremely just and
good. Moreover, as it also contains all the time, with past, present and future merging into it in
an eternal present, so that the time will not flow as it does for us, in the four-dimensional
continuum called space-time, as "we see" the future changing continuously into present and the
present into past. Similarly, an observer in five-dimensional continuum would not have access
to all time as the Supreme Consciousness, but his dimensional "vision" of the time would
certainly be wider than that of the observer positioned in the four-dimensional continuum [3]. In
this context, only the Supreme Consciousness would have a perfect "vision" of all dimensional
levels.
When we speak of creation of the universe, the use of the verb to create means that
anything that was not came to be; assuming therefore, the concept of time flow. For the
Supreme Consciousness however, the instant of the creation coincides with all the other times,
not existing neither before nor after the creation, and in this way, questions like "What did the
Supreme Consciousness do before creation? are not justified.
4
We can also infer from the above that the existence of the Supreme Consciousness has
no defined limit (beginning and end), which gives It the peculiar qualities of uncreated and
eternal.
Being eternal, its wave function never collapses. Moreover, as it has infinite psychic
energy, the value of will also be infinite. In this way, according to Quantum Mechanics, it
means that the Supreme Consciousness is simultaneously everywhere, or omnipresent.
All conclusions presented here about the Supreme Consciousness were mathematically
demonstrated in the article "Mathematical Foundations of the Relativistic Theory of Quantum
Gravity" [1], and represent nothing more than a formal finding of what was already accepted by
most religions.
It is then justified the intuitive feeling that people have about the existence of God, and
reveals that God is the Supreme Consciousness, the first cause of all things.
Although we can understand this and, thus, learn that God is psychic energy, we can say
nothing about the nature of psychic energy. Likewise, we do not know the nature of electric
charge, etc. This is a limitation imposed by the Creator Himself.
The option of the Supreme Consciousness in materializing the Primordial Universe into a
critical volume, as we have seen, means that It knew what would happen from that initial
condition. Therefore It also knew how the universe would behave under existing laws. Thus, the
laws were not created for the Universe, and therefore are not "laws of Nature" or "laws that have
been placed in Nature" as Descartes wrote. They already existed as an intrinsic part of the
Supreme Consciousness; Thomas Aquinas had a very clear understanding about this. He speaks
of the Eternal Law, "... those exist in the mind of God and rules the entire Universe."
The Supreme Consciousness had then complete freedom to choose the initial conditions
of the Universe. But opted for the concentration of the early Universe in the critical volume in
order that its development should be performed in the most convenient way for the purposes It
had in mind, according to laws inherent in its very nature. This responds to Einstein's famous
question: "What level of choice would God have had to build the universe?"
It seems that Newton was the first to realize the divine option. In his book Opticks, he
gives us a perfect view of how he imagined the creation of the Universe:

"It seems to me that God, at the beginning, first gave way to matter in solid particles, compacted
[...] in such way that best contribute to the purpose He had in mind ..."

For what purpose the Supreme Consciousness created the universe? This is a question that
seems difficult to answer. However, if we assume the natural desire of the Supreme
Consciousness of procreating, that is, of generating individual consciousness from itself so that
they could evolve and express themselves creating attributes to Her, then, we can infer that in
order to evolve, such consciousness would need a Universe, and this may have been the main
reason for its creation. Thus, the origin of the Universe would be related to the generation of
said consciousness and, consequently, the materialization of the Primordial Universe must have
occurred at the same time at which the Supreme Consciousness decided to individualize the
Primordial Consciousnesses.
As the Supreme Consciousness occupies all the space, it follows that it cannot be
displaced by another consciousness, and not for himself. Therefore, the Supreme Consciousness
is immovable.
As Augustine says (Gen. Ad lit vii, 20), "The Creator does not move either in time or
space."
The immobility of God had been deemed necessary also by Thomas Aquinas, "we can
infer be necessary that the God who puts into motion all the objects, it is immovable." (Summa
Theologica).
5
Due to fact that they were individualized directly from the Supreme Consciousness, the
primordial consciousnesses certainly contained in themselves - albeit in a latent state, all the
possibilities of the Supreme Consciousness, including the germ of independent will that allows
the establishment of original points of departure. However, although similar to the Supreme
Consciousness, the primordial consciousnesses could have no understanding of themselves.
This understanding comes only with the creative mental state that the consciousnesses can only
achieve by evolution.
Thus, in the first evolutionary period, the primordial consciousnesses must have
remained in complete unconsciousness. It was then, the beginning of a pilgrimage from
unconsciousness to the superconsciousness.

3. The Good and the Evil

Basically, in the Universe there are two types of radiation: the real radiation constituted
by of real photon, and the virtual radiation constituted by "virtual" photons. Previously, we
talked about the "virtual" quanta, which are responsible for the interaction among the psychic
particles. According to the Uncertainty Principle, virtual quanta cannot be observed
experimentally. However, since they are interaction quanta, their effects may be verified in the
very particles or bodies subjected to the interactions.
Obviously, only one specific type of interaction occurs between two particles if each one
absorbs the quanta of said interaction emitted by the other; otherwise, the interaction will be
null. Thus, the null interaction between psychic bodies particularly means that there is no
mutual absorption of the virtual psychic photons (psychic interaction quanta) emitted by
them. That is, the emission spectrum of each one of them does not coincide with the absorption
spectrum of the other.
It was shown that, in all interactions (gravitational, electromagnetic, strong nuclear and
weak nuclear), the "virtual" quanta are "virtual" photons [1].
It is obvious, then, that an interaction between two particles only occurs if each of them
absorbs the "virtual" photons emitted by the other, otherwise the interaction will be zero. Thus,
the null interaction means specifically that the emission spectrum of each particle does not
coincide with the absorption spectrum of the other.
By analogy with material bodies, the emission spectra of which are, as we know, identical
to the absorption spectra, also the psychic bodies must absorb radiation within the spectrum they
emit. Specifically, in the case of human consciousness, their thoughts cause them to become
emitters of psychic radiation in certain frequency spectra and, consequently, receivers in the
same spectra. Thus, when a human consciousness, by its thoughts, is receptive to a radiation
coming from a certain thought, said radiation will be absorbed by the consciousness (resonance
absorption). Under these circumstances, the radiation absorbed must stimulate through the
Resonance Principle said consciousness to emit in the same spectrum, just as it happens with
matter.
Nevertheless, in order for that emission to occur in a human consciousness, it must be
preceded by the individualization of thoughts identical with that which originated the radiation
absorbed, because obviously only identical thoughts will be able to reproduce - when they
collapse - the spectrum of virtual psychic radiations absorbed.
These induced thoughts such as the thoughts of consciousnesses themselves must
remain individualized for a period of time t (lifetime of the thought) after which its wave
functions collapse, thus producing the virtual psychic radiation in the same spectrum of
frequencies absorbed.
The Supreme Consciousness, just as other consciousnesses, has Its own spectrum of
absorption determined by Its thoughts which make up the standard of a good-quality thought.
6
Thus, the concept of good-quality thoughts is immediately established. That is, they are
resonant thoughts in the Supreme Consciousness. Thus, only thoughts of this kind, produced in
human consciousnesses, may induce the individualization of similar thoughts in the Supreme
Consciousness.
In this context, a system of judgment is established in which the good and the evil are
psychic values, with their origin in free thought. The good is related to the good-quality
thoughts, which are thoughts resonant in the Supreme Consciousness. The evil, in turn, is
related to the bad-quality thoughts, non-resonant in the Supreme Consciousness.
Consequently, the moral derived thereof results from the Law itself, inherent in the
Supreme Consciousness and, therefore, this psychic moral must be the fundamental moral.
Thus, fundamental ethics is neither biological nor located in the aggressive action, as thought by
Nietzsche. It is psychic and located in the good-quality thoughts. It has a theological basis and,
in it, the creation of the Universe by a pre-existing God is of an essential nature, opposed, for
instance, to Spinozas geometrical ethics, which eliminated the ideas of Creation of the
Universe by a pre-existing God, the main underpinning of Christian theology and philosophy.
However, it is very close to Aristotles ethics, to the extent that, from it, we understand that we
are what we repeatedly do (think) and that excellence is not an act, but a habit (Ethics, II, 4).
According to Aristotle: the goodness of a man is a work of the soul towards excellence in a
complete lifetime: it is not a day or a short period that makes a man fortunate and happy.
(Ibid, I, 7).
The virtual psychic radiation coming from a thought may induce several similar
thoughts in the consciousness absorbing it, because each photon of radiation absorbed carries in
itself the electromagnetic expression of the thought which produced it and, consequently, each
one of them stimulates the individualization of a similar thought. However, the amount of
thoughts induced is, of course, limited by the amount of psychic mass of the consciousness
proper.
In the specific case of the Supreme Consciousness, the virtual psychic radiation coming
from a good-quality thought must induce many similar thoughts. On the other hand, since
Supreme Consciousness involves human consciousness, the induced thoughts appear in the
surroundings of the very consciousness which induced them. These thoughts are then strongly
attracted by said consciousness and fuse therewith, for, just as the thoughts generated in a
consciousness have a high degree of positive mutual affinity [4] with it, they will also have the
thoughts induced by it.
The fusion of these thoughts in the consciousness obviously determines an increase in its
psychic mass. We then conclude that the cultivation of good-quality thoughts is highly
beneficial to the individual. Reversally, the cultivation of bad-quality thoughts makes
consciousness lose psychic mass.
When bad-quality thoughts are generated in a consciousness, they do not induce identical
thoughts in Supreme Consciousness, because the absorption spectrum of Supreme
Consciousness excludes psychic radiations coming from bad-quality thoughts. Thus, such
radiation directs itself to other consciousnesses; however, it will only induce identical thoughts
in those that are receptive in the same frequency spectrum. When this happens and right after
the wave functions corresponding to these induced thoughts collapse and materialize said
thoughts or change them into radiation, the receptive consciousness will lose psychic mass,
similarly to what happens in the consciousness which first produced the thought. Consequently,
both the consciousness which gave rise to the bad-quality thought and those receptive to the
psychic radiations coming from this type of thoughts will lose psychic mass.
We must observe, however, that our thoughts are not limited only to harming or
benefiting ourselves, since they also can, as we have already seen, induce similar thoughts in
other consciousnesses, thus affecting them. In this case, it is important to observe that the
7
psychic radiation produced by the induced thoughts may return to the consciousness which
initially produced the bad-quality thought, inducing other similar thoughts in it, which evidently
cause more loss of psychic mass in said consciousness.
The fact that our thoughts are not restricted to influencing ourselves is highly relevant,
because it leads us to understand we have a great responsibility towards other persons as regards
what we think.

4. The Psychic Universe

When we studied elementary Mathematics, we learned the called Imaginary Numbers.
J ust as there are the real numbers and imaginary numbers, there are also the real space-time and
imaginary time. In the article "Mathematical Foundations of the Relativistic Theory of Quantum
Gravity", we showed that the former contains our Real Universe, and the latter contains the
Imaginary Universe. We also saw how a material body can make a transition to the Imaginary
Universe. Simply reducing its gravitational mass to the range
i
M 159 0. + to .
Under these circumstances, its gravitational and inertial masses become imaginaries, and
therefore, the body becomes imaginary. Consequently, the body disappears from our ordinary
space-time and resurges in the imaginary space-time like an imaginary body. In other words, it
becomes invisible for persons in the Real Universe.
i
M 159 0.
What will an observer see when in the imaginary space-time? It will see light, bodies,
planets, stars, etc., everything formed by imaginary photons, imaginary atoms, imaginary
protons, imaginary neutrons and imaginary electrons. That is to say, the observer will find an
Universe similar to ours, just formed by particles with imaginary masses. The term imaginary
adopted from the Mathematics, as we already saw, gives the false impression that these masses
do not exist. In order to avoid this misunderstanding we researched the true nature of that new
mass type and matter.
The existence of imaginary mass associated to the neutrino is well-known. Although its
imaginary mass is not physically observable, its square is. This amount is found experimentally
to be negative. Recently, it was shown [1] that quanta of imaginary mass exist associated to the
photons, electrons, neutrons, and protons, and that these imaginary masses would have psychic
properties (elementary capability of choice). Thus, the true nature of this new kind of mass
and matter shall be psychic and, therefore we should not use the term imaginary any longer.
Consequently, from the previously described, we can conclude that the gravitational spacecraft
penetrates in the Psychic Universe and not in an imaginary Universe.
In this Universe, the matter would be, obviously composed by psychic molecules and
psychic atoms formed by psychic neutrons, psychic protons and psychic electrons. i.e., the
matter would have psychic mass and consequently it would be subtle, much less dense than the
matter of our real Universe.
From the quantum viewpoint, the psychic particles are similar to the material particles, so
that we can use the Quantum Mechanics to describe the psychic particles. In this case, by
analogy to the material particles, a particle with psychic mass will be described by the
following expressions:

m
( )
( ) 03
02


h
r
h
r
=
=
E
k p
where is the momentum carried by the wave and its energy; V m p
r
r

=

E

2 = k
r
is
the propagation number and V m h

=

the wavelength and

f 2 = its cyclic
frequency.
As we already have seen, the variable quantity that characterizes DeBroglies waves is
called Wave Function, usually indicated by .
8
The wave function corresponds, as we know, to the displacement of the undulatory
motion of a rope. However, as opposed to , is not a measurable quantity and can, hence, be
a complex quantity. For this reason, it is admitted that
y
y
is described in the x -direction by
( )( )
( ) 04
2 px Et h i
Be

=

This equation is the mathematical description of the wave associated with a free material
particle, with total energy E and momentum p , moving in the direction x + .
As concerns the psychic particle, the variable quantity characterizing psyche waves will
also be called wave function, denoted by

( to differentiate it from the material particle wave

function), and, by analogy with equation Eq. (04), expressed by:
( )( )
( ) 05
2
0
x p t E h i
e

=

If an experiment involves a large number of identical particles, all described by the same
wave function , real density of mass of these particles in x, y, z, t is proportional to the
corresponding value ( is known as density of probability. If
2

2
is complex then
. Thus, ). Similarly, in the case of psychic particles, the density
of psychic mass,
*
=
2 *
. =
2

, in x, y, z, will be expressed by . It is known that

is always real and positive while
*

=
2

V m

= is an imaginary quantity. Thus, as the
modulus of an imaginary number is always real and positive, we can transform the proportion
, in equality in the following form:
2


( ) 06
2

= k
Where k is a proportionality constant (real and positive) to be determined.
In Quantum Mechanics we have studied the Superposition Principle, which affirms that,
if a particle (or system of particles) is in a dynamic state represented by a wave function and
may also be in another dynamic state described by
1

2
then, the general dynamic state of the
particle may be described by , where is a linear combination (superposition) of and
, i.e.,
1

( ) 07
2 2 1 1
+ = c c
Complex constants e respectively indicate the percentage of dynamic state, represented
by e in the formation of the general dynamic state described by
1
c
2
c
1

2
.
In the case of psychic particles (psychic bodies, consciousness, etc.), by analogy, if ,
,..., refer to the different dynamic states the psychic particle assume, then its general
dynamic state may be described by the wave function
1

, given by:
( ) 08 ...
2 2 1 1 n n
c c c

+ + + =
The state of superposition of wave functions is, therefore, common for both psychic and
material particles. In the case of material particles, it can be verified, for instance, when an
electron changes from one orbit to another. Before effecting the transition to another energy
level, the electron carries out virtual transitions [5]. A kind of relationship with other
electrons before performing the real transition. During this relationship period, its wave function
remains scattered by a wide region of the space [6] thus superposing the wave functions of
the other electrons. In this relationship the electrons mutually influence each other, with the
9
possibility of intertwining their wave functions
2
. When this happens, there occurs the so-called
Phase Relationship according to quantum-mechanics concept.
In the electrons virtual transition mentioned before, the listing of all the possibilities
of the electrons is described, as we know, by Schrdingers wave equation. Otherwise, it is
general for material particles. By analogy, in the case of psychic particles, we may say that the
listing of all the possibilities of the psyches involved in the relationship will be described by
Schrdingers equation for psychic case, i.e.,
( ) 09 0
2
2
2
= +

h
p
Because the wave functions are capable of intertwining themselves, the quantum systems
may penetrate each other, thus establishing an internal relationship where all of them are
affected by the relationship, no longer being isolated systems but becoming an integrated part of
a larger system. This type of internal relationship, which exists only in quantum systems, was
called Relational Holism [7].
The idea of psyche associated with matter dates back to the pre-Socratic period and is
usually called panpsychism. Remnants of organized panpsychism may be found in the Uno of
Parmenides or in Heracleituss Divine Flux. Scholars of Miletuss school were called hylozoists,
that is, those who believe that matter is alive. More recently, we will find the panpsychistic
thought in Spinoza, Whitehead and Teilhard de Chardin, among others. The latter one admitted
the existence of proto-conscious properties at level of elementary particles.
Generally, the people believe that there is some type of psyche associated to the animals,
and some biologists agree that even very simple animals like the ameba and the sea anemone are
endowed with psychism. This led several authors to consider the possibility of the psychic
phenomena to be described in a theory based on Physics [8-11].
The fact that an electron carries out virtual transitions to several energetic levels before
performing thereal transition [5] clearly shows a choice made by the electron. Where there is
choice isnt there also psyche, by definition?
An elementary psyche associated to the electron would be an entity very similar to the
elementary electric charge associated to the electron, whose existence was necessary to
postulate for the establishment of electromagnetic theory. However, the elementary psyche has
unique characteristics. Being a discrete quantity (quantum) of the Supreme Consciousness,
which is omniscient, it must also contain within it all knowledge. In the Supreme
Consciousness, whose psychic energy is infinite, the manifestation of this knowledge is total. In
the case of the elementary psyche, would be minimal by definition, remaining the rest of the
knowledge in a latent state.
But still this knowledge would be sufficient, for example, for electrons to define their
orbital position (energy level) around the nuclei when they were electromagnetically attracted
by the such nuclei.
How else could they have the knowledge of the exact orbit to stay? The electrosphere of
atoms is a complex and accurate structure, and in no way could have been created randomly. Its
construction undoubtedly involves knowledge.
Due to the fact that the formation of the electrosphere of the atoms is an organized
process, the psyches of the electrons is also grouped in an organized manner, specifically in
phase condensates, forming, what we can define as the Individual Consciousnesses of the
atoms. Ice and NaCl crystals are common examples of imprecisely-structured phase
condensates. Lasers, superfluids, superconductors, and magnets are examples of better-
structured phase condensates.

2
Since the electrons are simultaneously waves and particles, their wave aspects will interfere with each
other. Besides superposition, there is also the possibility of occurrence of intertwining of their wave
functions.
10
If electrons, protons and neutrons have psychic mass, then we can infer that the psychic
mass of the atoms are Phase Condensates. In the case of the molecules the situation is similar.
More molecular mass means more atoms and consequently, more psychic mass. In this case the
phase condensate also becomes more structured because the great amount of elementary
psyches inside the condensate requires, by stability reasons, a better distribution of them. Thus,
in the case of molecules with very large molecular masses (macromolecules) it is possible that
their psychic masses already constitute the most organized shape of a Phase Condensate, called
Bose-Einstein Condensate
3
.
The fundamental characteristic of a Bose-Einstein condensate is, as we know, that the
various parts making up the condensed system not only behave as a whole but also become a
whole, i.e., in the psychic case, the various consciousnesses of the system become a single
consciousness with psychic mass equal to the sum of the psychic masses of all the
consciousness of the condensate. This obviously, increases the available knowledge in the
system since it is proportional to the psychic mass of the consciousness. This unity confers an
individual character to this type of consciousness. For this reason, from now on they will be
called Individual Material Consciousness.
It derives from the above that most bodies do not possess individual material
consciousness. In an iron rod, for instance, the cluster of elementary psyches in the iron
molecules does not constitute Bose-Einstein condensate; therefore, the iron rod does not have an
individual consciousness. Its consciousness is consequently, much more simple and constitutes
just a phase condensate imprecisely structured made by the consciousness of the iron atoms.
The existence of consciousnesses in the atoms is revealed in the molecular formation,
where atoms with strong mutual affinity (their consciousnesses) combine to form molecules. It
is the case, for instance of the water molecules, in which two Hydrogen atoms join an Oxygen
atom. Well, how come the combination between these atoms is always the same: the same
grouping and the same invariable proportion? In the case of molecular combinations the
phenomenon repeats itself. Thus, the chemical substances either mutually attract or repel
themselves, carrying out specific motions for this reason. It is the so-called Chemical Affinity.
This phenomenon certainly results from a specific interaction between the consciousnesses.
From now on, it will be called Psychic Interaction.
After the formation of the first planets, some of them came to develop favorable conditions for the
appearance of macromolecules. These macromolecules, as we have shown, may have a special type of
consciousness formed by a Bose-Einstein condensate (Individual Material Consciousness). In this case,
since the molecular masses of the macromolecules are very large, they will have individual material
consciousness of large psychic mass and, therefore, have access to a considerable amount of information
in its own consciousness. Consequently, macromolecules with individual material consciousness are
potentially very capable of, and some certainly already can carry out, autonomous motions, thus being
considered as living entities.
However, if we decompose one of these molecules so as to destroy its individual
consciousness, its parts will no longer have access to the information which instructed said
molecule and, hence, will not be able to carry out the autonomous motions it previously did.
Thus, the life of the molecule disappears as we can see, Delbrcks Paradox is then solved
4
.

3
Several authors have suggested the possibility of the Bose-Einstein condensate occur in the brain, and
that it might be the physical base of memory, although they have not been able to find a suitable
mechanism to underpin such a hypothesis. Evidences of the existence of Bose-Einstein condensates in
living tissues abound (Popp, F.A Experientia, Vol. 44, p.576-585; Inaba, H., New Scientist, May89, p.41;
Rattermeyer, M and Popp, F. A. Naturwissenschaften, Vol.68, N5, p.577.)

4
This paradox ascribed to Max Delbrck (Delbrck, Max., (1978) Mind from Matter? American Scholar,
47. pp.339-53.) remained unsolved and was posed as follows: How come the same matter studied by
Physics, when incorporated into a living organism, assumes an unexpected behavior, although not
contradicting physical laws?
11
The appearance of living molecules in a planet marks the beginning of the most
important evolutionary stage for the psyche of matter, for it is from the combination of these
molecules that there appear living beings with individual material consciousness with even
larger psychic masses.
Biologists have shown that all living organisms existing on Earth come from two types of
molecules aminoacids and nucleotides which make up the fundamental building blocks of
living beings. That is, the nucleotides and aminoacids are identical in all living beings, whether
they are bacteria, mollusks or men. There are twenty different species of aminoacids and five of
nucleotides.
In 1952, Stanley Miller and Harold Urey proved that aminoacids could be produced from
inert chemical products present in the atmosphere and oceans in the first years of existence of
the Earth. Later, in 1962, nucleotides were created in laboratory under similar conditions. Thus,
it was proved that the molecular units making up the living beings could have formed during the
Earths primitive history.
Therefore, we can imagine what happened from the moment said molecules appeared.
The concentration of aminoacids and nucleotides in the oceans gradually increased. After a long
period of time, when the amount of nucleotides was already large enough, they began to group
themselves by mutual psychic attraction, forming the molecules that in the future will become
DNA molecules.
When the molecular masses of these molecules became large enough, the distribution of
elementary psyches in their consciousnesses took the most orderly possible form of phase
condensate (Bose-Einstein condensate) and such consciousnesses became the individual
material consciousness.
Since the psychic mass of the consciousnesses of these molecules is very large (as
compared with the psychic mass of the atoms), the amount of self-accessible knowledge in such
consciousnesses became considerable and, thus, they became apt to instruct the joining of
aminoacids in the formation of the first proteins (origin of the Genetic Code). Consequently, the
DNAs capability to serve as guide for the joining of aminoacids in the formation of proteins is
fundamentally a result of their psychism.
In the psychic of DNA molecules, the formation of proteins certainly had a definite
objective: the construction of cells.
During the cellular construction, the most important function played by the
consciousnesses of the DNA molecules may have been that of organizing the distribution of the
new molecules incorporated to the system so that the consciousnesses of these molecules jointly
formed with the consciousness of the system a Bose-Einstein condensate. In this manner, more
knowledge would be available to the system and, after the cell is completed, the latter would
also have an individual material consciousness.
Afterwards, under the action of psychic interaction, the cells began to group themselves
according to different degrees of positive mutual affinity, in an organized manner so that the
distribution of their consciousnesses would also form Bose-Einstein condensates. Hence,
collective cell units began to appear with individual consciousnesses of larger psychic masses
and, therefore, with access to more knowledge. With greater knowledge available, these groups
of cells began to perform specialized functions to obtain food, assimilation, etc. That is when
the first multi-celled beings appeared.
Upon forming the tissues, the cells gather structurally together in an organized manner.
Thus, the tissues and, hence, the organs and the organisms themselves also possess individual
material consciousnesses.
The existence of the material consciousness of the organisms is proved in a well-known
experiment by Karl Lashley, a pioneer in neurophysiology.
12
Lashley initially taught guinea pigs to run through a maze, an ability they remember and
keep in their memories in the same way as we acquire new skills. He then systematically
removed small portions of the brain tissue of said guinea pigs. He thought that, if the guinea
pigs still remembered how to run through the maze, the memory centers would still be intact.
Little by little he removed the brain mass; the guinea pigs, curiously enough, kept
remembering how to run through the maze. Finally, with more than90% of their cortex
removed, the guinea pigs still kept remembering how to run through the maze. Well, as we have
seen, the consciousness of an organism is formed by the concretion of all its cellular
consciousnesses. Therefore, the removal of a portion of the organism cells does not make it
disappear. Their cells, or better saying, the consciousnesses of their cells contribute to the
formation of the consciousness of the organism just as the others, and it is exactly due to this
fact that, even when we remove almost all of the guinea pigs cortex, they were still able to
remember from the memories of their individual material consciousnesses. In this manner, what
Lashleys experiment proved was precisely the existence of individual material consciousnesses
in the guinea pigs.
Another proof of the existence of the individual material consciousnesses in organisms is
given by the regeneration phenomenon, so frequent in animals of simple structure: sponges,
isolated coelenterates, worms of various groups, mollusks, echinoderms and tunicates. The
arthropods regenerate their pods. Lizards may regenerate only their tail after autotomy. Some
starfish may regenerate so easily that a simple detached arm may, for example, give origin to a
wholly new animal.
The organization of the psychic parts in the composition of an organisms individual
material consciousness is directly related to the organization of the material parts of the
organism, as we have already seen. Thus, due to this interrelationship between body and
consciousness, any disturbance of a material (physiological) nature in the body of the being will
affect its individual material consciousness, and any psychic disturbance imposed upon its
consciousness affects the physiology of its body.
When a consciousness is strongly affected to the extent of unmaking the Bose-
Einsteins condensate, which gives it the status of individual consciousness, there also occurs
the simultaneous disappearance of the knowledge made accessible by said condensation.
Therefore, when a cells consciousness no longer constitutes a Bose-Einstein condensate, there
is also the simultaneous disappearance of the knowledge that instructs and maintains the
cellular metabolism. Consequently, the cell no longer functions thus initiating its decomposition
(molecular desegregation).
Similarly, when the consciousness of an animal (or vegetables) no longer constitutes a
Bose-Einstein condensate, the knowledge that instructs and maintains its body functioning also
disappears, and it dies. In this process, after the unmaking of the beings individual
consciousness, there follows the unmaking of the individual consciousnesses of the organs; next
will be the consciousnesses of their own cells which no longer exist. At the end there will
remain the isolated psyches of the molecules and atoms. Death, indeed, destroys nothing,
neither what makes up matter nor what makes up psyche.
As we have seen, all the information available in the consciousnesses of the beings is
also accessible by the consciousnesses of their organs up to their molecules. Thus, when an
individual undergoes a certain experience, the information concerning it not only is recorded
somewhere in this consciousness but also pervades all the individual consciousnesses that make
up its total consciousness. Consequently, psychic disturbances imposed to a being reflect up to
the level of their individual molecular consciousnesses, perhaps even structurally affecting said
molecules, due to the interrelationship between body and consciousness already mentioned here.
13
Therefore, some modifications in the sequences of nucleotides of the DNA
molecules can occur when the psychism of the organism in which the molecules are
incorporated is sufficiently affected.
It is known that such modifications in the structure of DNA molecules may also occur as
consequence of chemical products in the blood stream (as in the case of the mustard gas used in
chemical warfare) or exposition to high-energy radiation.
Modifications in the sequences of nucleotides in DNA molecules are called mutations.
Mutations, as we know, determine hereditary variations, which are the basis of Darwins theory
of evolution.
It is known that mutations of two types, favorable or unfavorable, can occur. The
former type enhances the individuals possibility of survival, whereas the second reduces such
possibility.
The theory of evolution is established as a consequence of individuals efforts to survive
in the environment where they live. This means that their descendants may become different
from their ancestors. This is the mechanism that leads to frequent appearance of new species.
Darwin believed that the mutation process was slow and gradual. Nevertheless, it is known
today that this is not the general rule, for there are evidences of the appearance of new species in
a relatively short period of time [12]. We also know that individuals characteristics are
transmitted from parents to offsprings by means of genes and that the recombination of the
parents genes, when genetic instructions are transmitted, by such genes.
However, it was shown that the genetic instructions are basically associated with the
psychism of DNA molecules. Consequently, the genes transmit not only physiological but also
psychic differences.
Thus, as a consequence of genetic transmission, besides the great physiological difference
between individuals of the same species, there is also a great psychic dissimilarity.
Such psychic dissimilarity associated with the progressive enhancement of the
individuals psychic quantities may have given rise, in immemorial time, to a variety of
individuals (most probably among anthropoid primates) which unconsciously established a
positive mutual affinity with primordial consciousnesses that must have been attracted to Earth.
Thus, the relationship established among them and the consciousnesses of said individuals is
enhanced.
In the course of evolutionary transformation, there must have been a time when the
fetuses of said variety already presented such a high degree of mutual affinity with the
primordial consciousnesses attracted to Earth that, during pregnancy, the incorporation of
primordial consciousnesses may have occurred in said fetuses.
In spite of absolute psychic mass of the fetuss material consciousness be much smaller
than that of the mothers consciousness, the degree of positive mutual affinity between the
fetuss consciousness and the primordial consciousness that is going to be incorporated is much
greater than that between the latter and the mothers, which makes the psychic attraction
between the fetuss consciousness and primordial consciousness much stronger than the
attraction between the latter and the mothers. That is the reason why primordial consciousness
incorporates the fetus. Thus, when these new individuals are born, they bring with them their
individual material consciousness, an individualized consciousness of the Supreme
Consciousness. In this way were the first hominids born.
Having been directly individualized from Supreme Consciousness, the primordial
consciousnesses are perfect individualities and not phase condensates as the consciousnesses of
the matter. In this manner, they do not dissociate after the death of those that incorporated them.
Afterwards, upon the action of psychic attraction, they are again able to incorporate into other
fetuses to proceed on their evolution.

14
These consciousnesses (hereinafter called human consciousness) constitutes
individualities and, therefore, the larger their psychic mass the more available knowledge they
will have and, consequently, greater ability to evolve.
J ust as the human race evolves biologically, human consciousnesses have also been
evolving. When they are incorporated, the difficulties of the material world provide them with
more and better opportunities to acquire psychic mass (later on we will see how said
consciousnesses may gain or lose psychic mass). That is why they need to perform successive
reincorporations. Each reincorporation arises as a new opportunity for said consciousnesses to
increase their psychic mass and thus evolve.
The belief in the reincarnation is millenary and well known, although it has not yet been
scientifically recognized, due to its antecedent probability being very small. In other words,
there is small amount of data contributing to its confirmation. This, however, does not mean that
the phenomenon is not true, but only that there is the need for a considerable amount of
experiments to establish a significant degree of antecedent probability.
The rational acceptance of reincarnation entails deep modifications in the general
philosophy of the human being. For instance, it frees him from negative feelings, such as
nationalistic or racial prejudices and other response patterns based on the naive conception that
we are simply what we appear to be.
Darwins lucid perception upon affirming that not only the individuals corporeal
qualities but also his psychic qualities tend to improve made implicit in his natural selection
one of the most important rules of evolution: the psychic selection, which basically consists in
the survival of the most apt consciousnesses. Psychic aptitude means, in the case of human
consciousnesses, mental quality, i.e., quality of thinking.
In this context, the human consciousnesses are equivalent to the called Spirits,
mentioned in the Kardecist literature [13], where the reincarnation was strongly considered.

5. The Spirits

Origin and Nature of the Spirits

As we have already seen, the origin of the spirits is related to the natural desire of the Supreme
Consciousness to procreate, that is, of generating individual consciousnesses in itself so that
they could evolve and express the same creative attributes pertinent to Her. In this way, the
nature of Spirits is the same of the Supreme Consciousness.

Form and Ubiquity of the Spirits

By definition the consciousnesses, the thought, etc., are psychic bodies, i.e., psychic
energy locally concentrated. In the material world, we can not distinguish the form of thoughts
probably because the density of concentrated psychic energy is so low that would be equivalent
to a fluid with a density much lower than the densities of gases. We know that we can only see a
body if the light emitted by it can be detected by our eyes. The solids and liquids generally
reflect light well and this makes them visible. The gases, on the contrary, are only visible in a
state of high density, as in the case of the clouds. In a state of low density, like the wind,
become invisible, because, practically, do not reflect the rays of light. In the case of thoughts,
whose density would be much lower than the density of the gases, we also cannot distinguish its
shape. The same is true in the case of Spirits. Thus, it becomes very difficult for us to see the
Spirits. However, as the concentration of energy in spirits is greater than the thoughts it is
possible that we can see traces of its forms in certain circumstances. This would then
15
correspond to the vision of figures, flashes, etc. Thus, the perfect vision of the forms of the
spirits will probably only be possible for an observer in the Spiritual World.
As concerns the ubiquity of the Spirits, it is necessary to use the Quantum Physics in
order to understand it. We start from the Uncertainty Principle, under the form obtained in 1927
by Werner Heisenberg, i.e.,
( ) 10 h p x
This expression shows that the product of the uncertainty x in the position of a particle in a
certain instant by the uncertainty p in its momentum is equal or greater than the Plancks
constant h. We cannot measure simultaneously both, position and momentum, with perfect
accuracy. If we reduce p , then x will be increased and vice-versa. Such uncertainties are not
in our appliances, but in Nature.
A mathematical approach more accurate than the one proposed by Heisenberg presents
to the uncertainty principle the following relationship:
( ) 11
2
h
p x
When we want to correlate the uncertainty E in the energy with the uncertainty t in the time
interval it is customary to write the Uncertainty Principle in the following form:
( ) 12 h t E
where 2 h = h .
According to this expression, an event in which an amount of energy E is not
conserved is not prohibited, provided that the duration of the event does not exceed t . This
means that it can occur variations of energy in a system, that even in principle are impossible to
determine them. The emission of a meson by a nucleus that does not change its mass - clear
violation of the principle of conservation of energy - can occur if the nucleon reabsorb the
meson (or similar) in a time interval less than
2
c m E

h h = , ( is the mass of the meson).

m
Therefore, it can also occur that a material particle moves temporarily to a certain position
without actually leaving your starting position. In this case, it is said that the particle made a
Virtual Transition to a certain position.
The designation virtual must not lead the reader to imagine that the transition was not
made. It is effectively carried out: it is real. But, according to the uncertainty principle, it is
impossible to be observed. This is a limitation imposed by Nature.
However, although we cannot observe the virtual transitions, their occurrence can often
be detected by the produced effects.
The psychic particles can also perform virtual transitions, since the uncertainty principle
also applies to them.
This means, therefore, that quanta of human consciousnesses (from the minds conscious,
subconscious and unconscious) can perform "temporary exits" but without leaving them
effectively.
These transitions correspond to virtual transitions of the own minds where the quanta are
originated, since these, when individualized, form Bose-Einstein condensates with the mind
where they are originated, and therefore, share all the knowledge and attributes relevant to it.
During pseudo-medical deaths, projections, etc., people report later that they "saw"
themselves out of the body, a clear indication of virtual transitions originating from the
conscious and subconscious. In dreams, besides such transitions, there are also indications of
transitions from the unconscious.
According to Feynmans Quantum Theory of Electromagnetic Interaction [14], no energy
is spent in virtual transitions, which can occur around at any distance. Moreover, as is easily
concluded from the uncertainty principle, one single quantum can perform several virtual
16
transitions simultaneously. It all depends on how quickly it makes the transitions. Therefore,
through this process, the quanta of human consciousnesses or it all may go to several places
simultaneously. We conclude, therefore, that a spirit can be in several places at a time. But of
course this is not a division of Spirit, but himself present simultaneously in several places.

Incarnation of Spirits

The great dissimilarity associated with the progressive enhancement of the individuals
psychic quantities may have given rise, in immemorial time, to a variety of individuals (most
probably among anthropoid primates) which unconsciously established a positive mutual
affinity with Primordial Spirits, previously mentioned.
As this affinity was developed with the psychic enhancement, it is expected that natural
selection has made it much higher in the offspring of this variety. Thus, due to the psychic
interaction, several Primordial Spirits must have been attracted to the Earth. With this, the
relationship established among them and the material consciousnesses of said individuals was
intensified.
In the course of evolutionary transformation, there was a time when the fetuses of said
variety already presented such a high degree of mutual affinity with the primordial
consciousnesses attracted to the Earth that, during pregnancy, the incorporation of Primordial
Spirits may have occurred in said fetuses
5
.
This phenomenon should not have occurred only on Earth, may also have occurred in the
same way on other planets with evolutionary conditions similar to Earth's. The belief that this
phenomenon occurred only in the incarnation of Spirits on Earth would question the wisdom of
God, favoring only the Earth and excluding thousands of other worlds.
As we have already seen, these Spirits constitute perfect individualities and, therefore, as
greater their psychic energy greater auto-knowledge accessible and, consequently, they will
have greater opportunities to evolve.
Thus, also the Spirits evolve as the human race evolved biologically.

Return to Corporal Life

J ust as the consciousnesses of the children have a high degree of positive mutual affinity
with the consciousnesses of their parents, and among themselves (principle of familiar
formation), the embryo cells, by having originated from cellular duplication, have a high degree
of positive mutual affinity. The embryo cells result, as we know, from the cellular duplication of
a single cell containing the paternal and maternal genes and, hence, have a high degree of
positive mutual affinity.
Thus, under the action of psychic interaction the cells of the internal cellular mass start
gathering into small groups, according to the different degrees of mutual affinity.
When there is a positive mutual affinity between two consciousnesses there occurs the
intertwining between their wave functions, and a Phase Relationship is established among them.
Consequently, since the degree of positive mutual affinity among the embryo cells is high, also
the relationship among them will be intense, and it is exactly this what enables the construction
of the organs of the future child. In other words, when a cell is attracted by certain group in the
embryo, it is through the cell-group relationship that determines where the cell is to aggregate to

5
When incarnated, the Spirit is commonly called of Soul. However, considering that while incarnated the
Spirit form a Bose-Einstein condensate with the material consciousness of the body, we can define the
Soul as the individual consciousness of being, i.e., a Bose-Einstein condensate containing the incarnated
Spirit and material consciousness of the body.
17
the group. In this manner, each cell finds its correct place in the embryo; that is why observers
frequently say that, the cells appear to know where to go, when experimentally observed.
The cells of the internal cellular mass are capable of originating any organ, and are hence
called totipotents; thus, the organs begin to appear. In the endoderm, there appear the urinary
organs, the respiratory system, and part of the digestive system; in the mesoderm are formed the
muscles, bones, cartilages, blood, vessels, heart, kidneys; in the ectoderm there appear the skin,
the nervous system, etc.
Thus, it is the mutual affinity among the consciousnesses of the cells that determines the
formation of the body organs and keeps their own physical integrity. For this reason, every body
rejects cells from other bodies, unless the latter have positive mutual affinity with their own
cells. The higher the degree of cellular positive mutual affinity, the faster the integration of the
transplanted cells and, therefore, the less problematic the transplant. In the case of cells from
identical twins, this integration takes place practically with no problems, since said degree of
mutual affinity is very high.
In eight weeks of life, all organs are practically formed in the embryo. From there on, it
begins to be called fetus.
The embryos material individual consciousness is formed by the consciousnesses of its
cells united in a Bose-Einstein condensate. As more cells become incorporated into the embryo,
its material consciousness acquires more psychic mass. This means that this type of
consciousness will be greater in the fetus than in the embryo and even greater in the child.
Thus, the psychic mass of the mother-fetus consciousness progressively increases during
pregnancy, consequently increasing the psychic attraction between this consciousness and that
new one about to incorporate. In normal pregnancies, this psychic attraction also increases due
to the habitual increase in the degree of positive mutual affinity between said consciousnesses.
Since the embryo's consciousness has greater degree of positive mutual affinity with the
consciousness that is going to incorporate, then the embryo's consciousness becomes the center
of psychic attraction to where the human consciousness (Spirit) destined to the fetus will go.
When the psychic attraction becomes intense enough, human consciousness penetrates the
mother consciousness, forming with it a new BoseEinstein condensate. From that instant on,
the fetus begins to have two consciousnesses: the individual material one and the human
consciousness attracted to it.
However, this should only occur after eight weeks, when all organs are practically formed
in the embryo, and it is called fetus. This is a critical period in which the imperfections of matter
can cause fetal death. Thus, the Spirit waits to complete formation of the fetus. If the fetus can
not be structured conveniently, it will naturally be aborted and the Spirit will look for another
body to reincarnate.
We conclude, therefore, that the initial eight weeks are a period imposed by Nature
herself to finish the building of the fetus and test whether it will be able to be used by the Spirit
that want to incarnate. Thus, in this period of "construction" of the fetus, both the Spirit and the
mother, based on free will, also have the freedom to give up the process. In this case, breaks
easily the Bose-Einstein condensate, and the Spirit and both the mother can restart on other
basis, making sure they have fully exercised their rights and have not harmed or caused harm to
either party involved in the process.
However, if the fetus is able, the process to continue the psychic attraction between
material consciousness of the fetus and the Spirit that want to incarnate, accepted by the mother
and by said Spirit, will progressively increase. In this way, with the psychic attraction, this
human consciousness tends to continue, being progressively compressed until effectively
incorporating the fetus. When this takes place, it will be ready to be born.
18
It is probably due to this psychic compression process that the incorporated consciousness
suffers amnesia of its preceding history. Upon death, after the psychic decompression that arises
from the definitive disincorporation of the consciousness, the preceding memory must return.

Evolutionary Degree and Fate of the Spirit

We have already seen that, when the gravitational mass, M
g
, of a body is smaller than
0.159M
i
or larger than +0.159 M
i
it is in the Material World. However, if its gravitational mass
is reduced to the range between 0.159M
i
<M
g
<+0.159 M
i
, it performs a transition to the
Psychic World or Spiritual World. [1] When this occurs, its real gravitational mass,
)
, is
totally converted into imaginary gravitational mass, , due to the Principle of
Conservation of Energy.
(real g
m
) (imaginaria g
m
On the other hand, it was shown that the psychic mass, , is equal to the imaginary
gravitational mass[

m
1] , i.e.,
(
( )
) 13
imaginaria g
m m =

real g
m
Thus, when a body perform a transition to the Psychic World, its real gravitational mass
)
, is totally converted into psychic mass.
(
( ) ( ) real g imaginaria g
m m m =

Since the mass is quantized, the body performs a transition to a quantum level
correspondent to its psychic mass (See Fig.1). Thus, the body goes to a region corresponding to
the gravitational mass that it acquired in the Material World.
According to the new concepts of spacecraft and aerospatial flight shown in the book
Fsica dos UFOs
6
, the called Gravitational Spacecrafts must use the Psychic Universe in order
to viabilize trips that would require much time in the Material Universe.
As the mentioned spacecrafts just perform transition to the Psychic Universe if and only if
its gravitational masses are reduced to the range 0.159M
i
<M
g
<+0.159 M
i
, then, with
negative gravitational mass in the range 0.159M
i
<M
g
, they perform the transition, and their
gravitational masses would be transformed into negative gravitational mass. Thus, they will
enter the Psychic Universe by the zone energetically located in the range <M

<0 (See Fig.

1). In the case of the gravitational mass of the spacecraft be reduced to the positive range, i.e.,
0<M
g
<+0.159 M
i
, the spacecraft will enter the Psychic Universe by zone of positive energy of
the psychic spectrum.
Only after the discovery of the correlation between the gravitational mass and the
inertial mass could the finding of negative gravitational mass be achieved, making it possible to
find ways to obtain it. It is clear, then, that the common material in the Material Universe is the
existence of bodies with positive gravitational mass. Similarly, in the Psychic Universe, the
common is to find psychic bodies with positive psychic mass. Thus, to find the World of Spirits,
a Gravitational Spacecraft must enter the Psychic Universe with positive psychic mass.
When a spirit disincarnates, he does not makes a transition to the Spiritual Universe
because, due to its own nature, the Spirit is already in the Spiritual Universe. Thus, the Spirit
just turn off the material body which they lived. As it leaves the Material World with a given
positive psychic mass
7
,

m acquired during its evolution, and during its recent reincarnation

in the Material World it should proceed to the region of the World of Spirits corresponding to
its psychic mass. Thus, as the evolutionary degree of each Spirit is defined by the amount of

6
See at www.frandeaquino.org
7
It is fact that the presence of negative psychic energy in the Spirits would cause a decrease in its total psychic
energy, which would imply involution (since the addition of positive psychic energy implies in evolution) and, as we
have seen, the Spirits do not involute.

19
psychic mass contained in the Spirit
8
, then the Spirits proceed precisely to the regions that
correspond to their evolutionary degrees, and there, brought together by mutual affinity, they
continue the evolutionary process and wait for the time of new reincarnation. Driven by the
need for progress, this is therefore the destiny of Spirits.
Thus, in the World of Spirit there is a natural selection that brings together Spirits with
the same level of evolution, and that does not allow the less evolved access to more evolved
regions. The most evolved Spirits, however, can transit through the lower regions, making the
already mentioned "virtual" transitions. In this way, they may intervene with less evolved
regions.




























Fig. 1 When the gravitational mass, Mg, of a body is in
the range 0.159M
i
>M
g
>+0.159 M
i
it is in the Material
Universe. However, If Mg is reduced to the range 0.159Mi
<Mg <+0.159 Mi, then it makes a transition to the Psychic
Universe (or Spiritual) with its gravitational mass converted
to in psychic mass. Since the mass is quantized, the body
performs a transitionto a quantum level correspondent to its
psychic mass. Thus, it follows to a region correspondent to
the gravitational mass, which it acquired in the Material
Universe.















UNIVERSO



MATERIAL























UNIVERSO



ESPRITUAL








g
M

M
0 0
+

+
Transio


Life in the World of Spirits

By doing the good, spirits acquire more psychic mass, and thus, more latent powers are
awaken, which facilitates their achievements, and makes them happier
9
. But they should not
occupy themselves only with their personal improvement, since life in the Spirit World, such as
life in the Material World, is a continuous occupation. We can also conclude from the above

8
As already seen, the Spirits were individualized in the Supreme Consciousness, and therefore brought with them, in
a latent state, the same attributes pertinent to Her. With the progressive evolution of the Spirit, these attributes are
being awakened, so that the degree of evolution of a Spirit is directly related to the quantity of attributes it aroused.
On the other hand, the number of attributes in a Spirit is directly correlated to the amount of mass psychic of the
Spirit. Thus, more psychic mass the Spirit has greater the amount of attributes awakened and, therefore, more
evoluted is the Spirit.
9
The happiness of the good Spirits certainly consists in knowing more and more; not having hate,
jealousy, envy, or any of the passions that make the misery of men. They don't experience needs or
suffering, or the anxieties of material life, and this in itself is synonymous of great happiness.
20
that even the spirits of the highest order, in having nothing more to improve, do not cease their
activities, once the eternal idleness would also be an eternal punishment.
We have seen that the realization of what we want requires an expenditure of psychic
energy proportional to the nature of desire. In other words, in order to have what we want
realized through the collapse of its wave function, it is necessary an expenditure of psychic
energy sufficient for its accomplishment. As the density of material bodies is much greater than
the density of psychic bodies, the realization of our desires in the Material Universe usually
requires much more the psychic energy than in the Psychic Universe. Thus, life in the World of
Spirit becomes much easier and more enjoyable than in the Material World. But the difficulties
of the Material World are what allow the Spirits to progress in their evolution, and that might
have been the main reason for the creation of the Material Universe.
The possibility of transition to the Psychic Universe increased the likelihood of close
encounters with beings from other planets in our ordinary Universe, and also with the people
who live in planets of the Psychic Universe, since Gravitational Spacecraft trips can also be
carried over in this Universe, as already shown. The characteristics associated to the subtle
psychic mass indicate that the life of these beings should not be finite as the lives of the humans.
This makes us think that maybe life in the Psychic Universe be the real life while our brief life
in this Universe has only specific goals such as, for example, a learning period.
The Psychic Universe, by its very nature, it is constituted of photons, atoms and
molecules psychics. This means that all types of photons, atoms and molecules that exist here
may have its corresponding counterparts in the Psychic Universe. Therefore, all we have here
can exist there with a similar form. However, considering the characteristics associated to the
subtle psychic mass, we can conclude that life here may be an imperfect copy of the life there.

Time in the World of Spirits

We have already seen that the Real Universe, where we live, is contained in the Psychic
Universe (Imaginary Universe), so the real space-time that corresponds to the Real Universe is
within the Imaginary space-time, which forms the Psychic Universe, where the Spirits live. By
definition, in the imaginary space-time both the space coordinates and the time coordinate are,
obviously, imaginary. This means that the time in the Universe of the Spirits (imaginary time) is
different from the real time of our Universe.
Only recently the concept of imaginary time was considered by physicists. Difficult to
understand, but deemed essential to connect the Statistical Mechanics to Quantum Mechanics,
the concept of imaginary time also became instrumental in Quantum Cosmology, where it was
introduced in order to eliminate singularities (points where the curvature of space-time becomes
infinite), which occur in the real time (See Hartle-Hawking state [15]). Twenty-two years ago,
Hawking popularized the concept of imaginary time in his book: A Brief History of Time [16].
The imaginary time is not imaginary in the sense that it does not exist. Nor is it a
mathematical artifice. No, it really exists, however, it has different characteristics of the time
which we are used to.
The existence of the imaginary time is mathematically sustained by a mechanism called
Wick Rotation
10
, which transform the metrics of the Minkowski space-time
( ) ( ) 14
2 2 2 2 2
dz dy dx dt ds + + + =
into the metrics of the Euclidean space-time
( ) 15
2 2 2 2 2
dz dy dx d ds + + + =
where it = ; 1 = i is called imaginary unit, which defines the imaginary numbers in the
form , where and b are real numbers, called respectively, the real part of z and
the imaginary part of z.
bi a z + = a

10
It is the called rotation because when we multiply an imaginary number by i the result, on the Cartesian plane, is
equivalent to a rotation of 90
0
of the vector that represents the number. Assim, dt
2
= dt. dt =i
2
dt. dt =i(i
dt). dt =d
2
.
21
From the definition of complex numbers follows that they can interpreted as points in the
Cartesian plane (where conventionally we mark on the x-axis the real part and on the y-axis the
imaginary part of a imaginary number z) or, as vectors whose origin O is at the origin
of the Cartesian grid, and the point Z with the coordinates (a, b). (See Fig. 2).

OZ
Thus, imaginary numbers can be conceived as a new type of number perpendicular to the
real numbers. This leads to the possibility of expressing mathematically imaginary time in a
direction perpendicular to the common real time. In this model, the imaginary time is a function
of real time and vice versa (See Fig.3). Thus, the imaginary time appears as a new dimension
that makes a right angles to real time, and thereby, as Hawking showed [17], it has much more
possibilities than the real time, which always flows from past to future, and only may have a
beginning and an end.



Im


b Z






0 a Re
(a)

Im


b Z

Z a




- b 0 a Re
(b)

Fig. 2 (a) The Imaginary Plane (or Argand-
Gauss Plane) is a way to visualize the space of
imaginary numbers. Can be understood as a
modified Cartesian plane, where thereal part is
represented on the x-axis and the imaginary part
on the y-axis. The x-axis is called real axis while
the y-axis is called imaginary axis. (b) When we
multiply a imaginary number z =a+bi by i (iz
=ai - b =z) the result on the Cartesian plane is
equivalent to a rotation of 90 of the vector OZ
that represents the number.


22





















Fig.3 Mathematically, it is possible to express the
imaginary time in a direction perpendicular to the
common real time. In this model, the imaginary time is a
function of real time and vice versa.

-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
1
2
3
4
5
t Im
t Re

























Fig. 4 The Model of the Imaginary Universe (or
Psychic Universe) containing the Real Universe. In the
Imaginary Universe the space-time is flat (Euclidean
metric), whereas in the Real Universe space-time is
curved due to the presence of matter. In this model, the
boundaries of the Real Universe confuse itself with the
Imaginary Universe that is unlimited.

Universo Real
espao-tempo curvo
Universo Imaginrio
espao-tempoplano





23
Imaginary time is measured in imaginary units (e.g., 2i seconds instead of 2 seconds).
This imaginary unit of time may seem strange to us, such as our unit of real time measurement
seems to the spirits, accustomed in their world measuring time in imaginary units. It all
depends, of course, on the Universe where we are.
Based on the very definition of imaginary time, it is easy to see that we can interpret it as a
vector

OZ . Thus, being a vector, the imaginary time need not necessarily be always oriented in
the same direction as the real time. It can freely change direction and intensity. This means that
an observer in imaginary time can move in any direction for the future or past, such as we can
move in any direction in space. This unique feature creates for us accustomed to the flow of
time always in the same direction a horizon of events full of possibilities, hard to imagine
because of the limitations imposed upon our consciousnesses by the Material Universe.
The existence of imaginary time derives from the very existence of the imaginary space-
time contained in the Psychic Universe. As already shown, the speed of propagation of
interactions in the Psychic Universe is infinite, which means that the metrics of space-imaginary
time is Euclidean (or flat), while the metrics of the real universe is non-Euclidean (or curve).
Since the Psychic Universe contains the Real Universe, we can conclude that the limits of the
Real Universe mix itself up with the Psychic Universe that is unlimited (See Fig. 4).
The fact that the Psychic Universe have no limits implies that it has no singularities or
boundaries in the imaginary time direction. With this condition, there is no beginning or end of
the imaginary time.

Conclusion

Both the traditional physicists and most people recognize that there are phenomena where
matter does not act alone, i.e., which involves also what we call psychism (consciousness,
thought). These phenomena had hitherto been relegated to the professional affair of experts
other than the traditional physicists. However, in recent decades, Quantum Physics has shown
us that some physical laws are stretched beyond the Material World, revealing the existence of
the Spiritual World. Thus, the Spiritual World arises not as a supernatural world
11
, but as
something as real as our Material World. On the other hand, this knowledge paved the way for
Physics to study psychic phenomena using the same criteria adopted for the study of physical
phenomena. In other words, it was evident that psychic phenomena could also be described by
the laws of Physics. This unification is the basis for the Grand Unification of Science and
Religion. Thereafter, both could no longer follow on separately. It was clear that Science could
more accurately describe the truth postulated by Religion.
In this context, the Religion - absorbed by Science, must leave the scene just as the purely
philosophical Cosmology gave way, in the past century, to Quantum Cosmology, when
Quantum Physics discovered the laws that accurately describe the structures of the Universe.
The unification of Science and Religion is highly relevant because it will eliminate the
spread of religious beliefs that have caused so much harm to Humanity in recent millennia.
Now, the truth postulated by Religion will be transmitted by Science in schools and universities,
and the human beings will understand it and use it, such as they use and understand, for
example, the electric current, knowing that it can cause harm and also benefits for its users.
It would be too much presumptuous to believe that, due to the simple revelation of this
new knowledge, the human nature could change suddenly. It will certainly take several decades
for a complete assimilation of such truth.
It will then be taught to people from early stages of learning, the fundamental importance
of the quality of our thoughts, since it is from them that the psychic interaction is defined and,

11
In the eyes of the general public, all phenomena of unknown cause become readily supernatural,
wonderful and miraculous: the cause, once known, shows that the phenomenon, for more extraordinary it
may seems, is nothing but a consequence of one or more natural laws. It is in this way that the set of
supernatural facts is reduced with the Science progress.

24
consequently, the extraordinary relationship that is established among the human
consciousnesses, the Universe and God.
Mankind then will begin to develop its psychic possibilities starting from the regular
training at school.
There will come a time when, on Earth, the good will prevail over evil. The good spirits
incarnated on Earth will become more numerous and, by the law of Psychic Interaction and
Mutual Affinity, they will attract more and more the good spirits to Earth, warding off evil
Spirits. The great transformation of Humanity then will be made by the progressive incarnation
of better Spirits, which will give origin, on Earth, to a generation much more evolved than the
current one.









































25
References

[1] DeAquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of the Relativistic Theory
of Quantum Gravity, Pacific J ournal of Science and Technology, 11(1), pp.173-232.
[2] Ruyer, R. (1976) La Gnose de Princeton, Fayard.
[3] Dunne, J . W (1934) An Experiment with Time, 3 Ed. Faber, London
[4] De Aquino, F. (2010) Physical Foundations of Quantum Psychology, Bulletin of Pure and
Applied Science, Vol.29D, Number 2, Section D, pp.105-130.
[5] Bohm, D. (1951) Quantum Theory, Prentice-Hall, N.Y, p.415.
[6] DEspagnat, B. The Question of Quantum Reality, Scientific American,
241,128.
[7] Teller, P. Relational Holism and Quantum Mechanics, British J ournal for the
Philosophy of Science, 37, 71-81.
[8] Winger, K. (1967) Symmetries And Reflections, Blooming, Ind., Indiana
University Press.
[9] Young, A.M. (1976) The Geometry of Meaning, Delacorte Press, N.Y;
Young, A.M. The Reflexive Universe: Evolution of Consciousness, Delacorte
Press, N.Y.
[10] Herbert, N. (1979) Mind Science: A Physics of Consciousness Primer,
Boulder Creek, Cal: C -Life Institute.
[11] Bohm, D. (1980) A New Theory of Relation of Mind and Matter, The J ournal
of the American Society of Psychical Research, Vol. 80, N 2, p.129.
[12] Grant, P.R., and Grant, B.R. (1995). Predicting microevolutionary responses
to directional selection on heritable variation. Evolution 49:241-251.
[13] Kardec, A. (1954) Le Livre des Esprits, dition de LU.S.K.B, Paris.
[14] Feynman, R. (1950) Mathematical Formulation of the Quantum Theory of
Electromagnetic Interaction, Phys. Rev. 80, 440.
[15] Hartle, J . and Hawking, S. (1983). "Wave function of the Universe". Physical Review D 28:
2960
[16] Hawking, S. (1988) A Brief History of Time, Bantam Books, ISBN 0-553-380016.8.
[17] Hawking, S. (2001) The Universe in a Nutshell, United States & Canada: Bantam Books.
pp. 5861, 63, 8285, 9094, 99, 196. ISBN 055380202X.





On the Cosmological Variation of the Fine Structure Constant

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2011 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved

Recently, evidence indicating cosmological variations of the fine structure constant, , has been
reported. This result led to the conclusion that possibly the physical constants and the laws of
physics vary throughout the universe. However, it will be shown here that variations in the value of
the elementary electric charge, e, can occur under specific conditions, consequently producing
variations in the value of .

Key words: Fine Structure Constant, Elementary Electric Charge, Cosmology, Physics of Black-Holes.
PACS: 06.20. J r, 98.80.-k, 98.80.J k, 04.70.-s.

The well-known Fine Structure
Constant determines the strength of the
electromagnetic field and is expressed by the
following equation (in SI units) [1]:

( ) 1
58(52) 137.035999
1
4
0
2
= =
c
e
h

However, recently, Webb, J .K et al., [2]
using data of the Very Large Telescope
(VLT) and of the ESO Science archive,
noticed small variation in the value of in
several distant galaxies. This led to the
conclusion that is not a constant [2- 4].
It will be shown here, that variations in
the value of the elementary electric charge, e,
can occur under specific conditions,
consequently producing variations in the
value of . This effect may be explained
starting from the expression recently
obtained for the electric charge [5], i.e.,
( )
( ) 2 4
0
i m G q
im g
=
where are the imaginary gravitational
mass of the elementary particle;
is the permittivity of the
free space and is
the universal constant of gravitation.
( ) im g
m
m F/ 10 854 . 8
12
0

=
1 2 11
. . 10 67 . 6

= kg m N G
For example, in the case of the
electron, it was shown [5] that

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 3
1 1 2 1
0
0
2
2
0
im e i e
im e i
im e i
im e
im ge
m
m
c m
U
m
=
=

+ =

where
( ) ( )
i m m
real e i im e i 0
3
2
0
= ,
( )
kg m
real e i
31
0
10 11 . 9

=
and
( )
i kT U
e e im e
= . In this expression
1 . 0
e
is the absorption factor for the
electron and is its internal
temperature (temperature of the Universe
when the electron was created);
is the Boltzmann constant.
K T
e
31
10 2 . 6
K J k / 10 38 . 1
23
=
Thus, according to Eq. (3), the value of
e
is given by . Then,
according to Eq. (2), the electric charge of
the electron is
21
10 8 . 1 =
e

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) C m G
i m G
i m G
i m G q
real e i e
real e i e
im e i e
im ge e
19
0
3
2
0
2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
10 6 . 1 4
4
4
4

= =
= =
= =
= =

As we know, the absolute value of this
charge is called the elementary electric
charge, . e
Since the internal temperature of the
particle can vary, we then conclude that is
not a constant, and consequently the value of
also cannot be a constant in the Universe.
Its value will depend on the local conditions
that can vary the internal temperature of the
particle. The gravitational compression, for
example, can reduce the volume V of the
particles, diminishing their internal
temperature
e
T to a temperature
T according to the well-known equation:
( )T V V T = [6]. This decreases the value of
, decreasing consequently the value of
( ) im
U
2
. Equation (2) shows that e is proportional
to , i.e.,

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
)
real
=
=
(
real i
i
im i
im g
m G
i m G
i m G
i m G e
0
3
2
0
2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
4
4
4
4

=
= =
=
=

Therefore, when the volume of the particle
decreases, the value of e will be less
than . Similarly, if the volume
is increased, the temperature
C
19
10 6 . 1

V T will be
increased at the same ratio, increasing the
value of , and also the value of . The
gravitational traction, for example, can
increase the volume V of the particles,
increasing their internal temperature
e
T , and
consequently increasing their electric charges
(See Fig.1).
Conclusions Our theoretical results
show that variations in the value of the
elementary electric charge, e, can occur
under specific conditions, consequently
producing variations of the fine structure
constant, , as shown in Fig.1. This excludes
totally the erroneous hypothesis that the laws
of physics vary throughout the universe.








































































3












































Fig. 1 A spatial dipole that can explain the dipole variation of reported by Webb. J.K. et
al.
Extremely large
Black-hole
(QUASAR)

Extremely large
White-hole
The strong traction upon
the particles increases
their volumes, increasing
the value of .
The strong gravitational
compression in this region
decreases the volumes of
the particles, decreasing
the values of .


4

References

[1] P. J . Mohr, and B. N. Taylor, (2000) Rev. Mod. Phys.,
72, 351

[2] Webb, J .K. et al., (2011) Phys. Rev. Lett., 107, 191101.

[3] King, J .A. et al., Spatial variation in the fine structure
constant- new results from VLT/UVES to be published.

[4] Koch, F. E. et al., Spatial variation in the fine structure
constant- a search for systematic effects to be published.

[5] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations
of the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity,
Pacific J ournal of Science and Technology,
11(1), pp. 173-232.

[6] M.J . Moran and H.N. Shapiro (2000), Fundamentals of
Engineering Thermodynamics, Wiley, 4th Ed.
The velocity of neutrinos

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2011 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved
Recently, the OPERA neutrino experiment at the underground Gran Sasso Laboratory has
measured the velocity of neutrinos from the CERN CNGS beam over a baseline of about 730
km. The experiment shows that neutrinos can have superluminal velocities. This result could, in
principle, be taken as a clear violation of the Special Relativity. However, it will be show here
that neutrinos can actually travel at velocities faster than light speed, without violating Special
Relativity.
Key words: Neutrino mass, Neutrino interactions, Special relativity.
PACS: 14.60.Pq, 13.15.
+
g, 03.30.
+
p.

The mass of the electron neutrino ( )
e

is usually measured using the beta decay.
The continuous spectrum of beta decay
electrons terminates at a maximal energy,
which depends on the neutrino mass and on
the emitting nucleus type. Because of the
way that the neutrino mass affects the
electron energy spectrum, the measured
quantity is the square of the neutrino mass.
All recent measurements show that the
neutrino mass squared is negative [1].
However, the square root of a negative
number is an imaginary number. Thus, the
measurements suggest that the electron
neutrino has an imaginary mass. Assuming
that the neutrino has no real mass, and
considering that the imaginary momentum
has a real value, i.e.,
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) real im im im
S I L =
and , we can infer that
the neutrino is an imaginary particle with a
measurable property; the square of its
imaginary mass.
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) real im im g im
p V M p =
The OPERA neutrino experiment [2]
at the underground Gran Sasso Laboratory
(LNGS) was designed to perform the first
detection of neutrino oscillations. Recently, it
was reported that the OPERA neutrino
experiment had discovered neutrinos with
velocities greater than the light speed [3].
The neutrinos in question appear to be
reaching the detector 60 nanoseconds faster
than light would take to cover the same
distance. That translates to a speed 0.002%
higher than (the speed
upper limit for real particles in the real
spacetime).
-1
m.s 8 299,792,45 = c
The quantization of velocity shows
that there is a speed upper limit, , for
imaginary particles in the real spacetime
(real Universe)
c c
i
>
*
. This means that Einstein's
speed limit ( ) c not applies to imaginary
particles propagating in the real spacetime.
Theoretical predictions show that
[
1 12
. 10

s m c
i
4]. Consequently, the
imaginary particles, such as the neutrinos,
can reaches velocities faster than light speed.
Therefore, in the case of imaginary particles,
we must replace c in the Lorentz
transformation by in order to
generalize the equations of Special relativity.
Thus, the imaginary kinetic energy of
imaginary particles, for example, is written
in the following form:
( )
i c C
i im
=
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( )
( ) ( )
2
0
2
2
2
0
2
2
2
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
im im i
i
im im i
im
im
im im i im i im
C m
c
V
C m
C
V
C m m K

=
=

= =

where is the imaginary mass of the
particle at rest. The expression above shows
( ) im i
m
0

*
The speed upper limit for real particles in the imaginary
spacetime is , because the relativistic expression of the
mass shows that the velocity of real particles cannot be
larger than c in any space-time.
c
2
that the imaginary particle has a real velocity
. This means that imaginary particles
propagating in the real spacetime can be
detected. This is the case, for example, of the
neutrinos with observed in the OPERA
neutrino experiment.
V
c V >
Note that the imaginary kinetic energy
of the particle is what gives to the neutrino
its real velocity
( )
( ) V K
im
. This solves
therefore, the problem of how the neutrino
propagates in the space.
In addition, we can conclude that in the
neutrino-electron reactions, mediated by the
Z particle, the neutrino does not enter as a
real mass but as a real angular momentum
(spin ). The real mass of the neutrino is
null, but the real angular momentum and the
imaginary angular momentum of the neutrino
are not null. The real angular momentum of
the neutrino, , derives from its imaginary
(real
S
)
angular momentum, according to the
following relation:
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( )h 1 + = = s s S I L
real im im im
.















































































3


References

[1] Eidelman, S. et al. (Particle Data Group), Phys. Lett. B
592, 1 (2004) and (2005) partial update for edition 2006
(URL: http://pdg.lbl.gov).

[2] OPERA Collaboration, R. Acquafredda et al., J INST 4
(2009) P04018.

[3] Measurement of the neutrino velocity with the OPERA
detector in the CNGS beam (2011) [arXiv:1109.4897v1]

[4] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of the
Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific J ournal
of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-232.

Proca Equations and the Photon Imaginary Mass

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2011 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved

It has been recently proposed that the photon has imaginary mass and null real mass. Proca equations are
the unique simplest relativistic generalization of Maxwell equations. They are the theoretical expressions
of possible nonzero photon rest mass. The fact that the photon has imaginary mass introduces relevant
modifications in Proca equations which point to a deviation from the Coulombs inverse square law.

Key words: Quantum electrodynamics, Specific calculations, Photons
PACS: 12.20.-m, 12.20.Ds, 14.70.Bh.

For quite a long time it has been
known that the effects of a nonzero photon
rest mass can be incorporated into
electromagnetism through the Proca
equations [1-2]. It is also known that
particles with imaginary mass can be
described by a real Proca field with a
negative mass square [3-5]. They could be
generated in storage rings, jovian
magnetosphere, and supernova remnants.
The existence of imaginary mass associated
to the neutrino is already well-known. It has
been reported by different groups of
experimentalists that the mass square of the
neutrino is negative [6]. Although the
imaginary mass is not a measurable amount,
its square is [7]. Recently, it was shown that
an imaginary mass exist associated to the
electron and the photon too [8]. The photon
imaginary mass is given by
( ) ( ) 1
2
3
2
i c hf m =

This means that the photon has null real

mass and an imaginary mass, , expressed
by the previous equation.

m
Proca equations may be found in many
textbooks [9-11]. They provide a complete
and self-consistent description of
electromagnetic phenomena [12]. In the
presence of sources and j
r
, these
equations may be written as (in SI units)
( )
( )
( )
( ) 5
4
3 0
2
2
0 0 0
2
0
A
t
E
j B
t
B
E
B
E
r
r
r r
r
r
r
r

+ =

=
=
=

where h c m

= , with the real variables

and . However, according to Eq. (1)

is an imaginary mass. Then,

m

must be
also an imaginary variable. Thus, is a
negative real number similarly to .
Consequently, we can write that
2

m
( ) 6
3
4 2
3
4
2
2
2
2 2
2
r
k
c m
=

= =

h
whence we recognize 2 =
r
k as the real
part of the propagation vector k
r
;
( ) 7
2 2
i r i r
k k ik k k k + = + = =
r
Substitution of Eq. (6) into Proca
equations, gives
( )
( )
( )
( ) 11
3
4
10
9 0
8
3
4
2
0 0 0
2
0
A k
t
E
j B
t
B
E
B
k E
r
r
r
r
r r
r
r
r
r

+ =

=
=
=

In four-dimensional space these
equations can be rewritten as
( ) 12
3
4 1
0
2
2
2
2
2

j A k
t c
r
r
=

where and

A

j
r
are the 4-vector of
potential ( ) c i A , and the current density
( ) ic j ,
r
, respectively. In free space the above
equation reduces to

( ) 13 0
3
4 1
2
2
2
2
2
=

A k
t c
r
2
which is essentially the Klein-Gordon
equation for the photon.
Therefore, the presence of a photon in
a static electric field modifies the wave
equation for all potentials (including the
Coulomb potential) in the form
( ) 14
3
4 1
0
2
2
2
2
2

r
k
t c
For a point charge, we obtain
( )
( )
( ) 15
4
1
3
2
0
r k
e
r
q
r
r

and the electric field

( ) ( )
( )
( ) 16
3
2
1
4
3
2
2
0
r k
e r k
r
q
r E
r
r

+ =

Note that only in the absence of the photon
the expression of reduces to
the well-known expression:
( 0 =
r
k ) ( ) r E
( )
2
0
4 r q r E = .
Thus, these results point to an exponential
deviation from Coulombs inverse square
law, which, as we know, is expressed by the
following equation (in SI units):
( ) 17
4
1
3
12
12 2 1
0
21 12
r
r q q
F F
r
r
r r

= =
As seen in Eq. (16), the term
( ) r k
r
3
2
only becomes significant if
( ) 18 10 ~
4

> r
This means that the Coulombs law is a good
approximation when . However, if
, the expression of the force
departs from the prediction of Maxwells
equations.

4
10 ~

< r

4
10 ~

> r
The lowest-frequency photons of the
primordial radiation of 2.7K is about
[ Hz
8
10 13]. Therefore, the wavelength of
these photons is m 1 . Consider the
presence of these photons in a terrestrial
experiment designed to measure the force
between two electric charges separated by a
distance r . According to Eq. (18), the
deviation from the Coulombs law only
becomes relevant if . Then, if we
take
m r
4
10

>
m r 1 . 0 = , the result is

( ) 73 . 0
3
4
3
2
=

r
r k
r
and
( )
( )
83 . 0
3
2
1
3
2
=

+
r k
e r k
r
r


Therefore, a deviation of 17% in respect to
the value predicted by the Coulombs law.
Then, why the above deviation is not
experimentally observed? Theoretically
because of the presence of Schumann
radiation ( ) m Hz f
7
1 1
10 8 . 3 , 83 . 7 = =
[14-15]. According to Eq. (18),
for , the deviation only
becomes significant if
m
7
1
10 8 . 3 =
Km r 8 . 3 10 ~
1
4
= >

Since the values of r in usual experiments

are much smaller than the result is
that the deviation is negligible. In fact, this is
easy to verify. For example, if , we
get
Km 8 . 3
m r 1 . 0 =

( )
8
7
1
10 9 . 1
10 8 . 3
1 . 0
3
4
3
4
3
2

=

r
r k
r

and
( )
( )
999999999 . 0
3
2
1
3
2
=

+
r k
e r k
r
r
Now, if we put the experiment inside an
aluminum box whose thickness of the walls
are equal to 21cm
*
the experiment will be
shielded for the Schumann radiation. By
putting inside the box a photons source of
m 1 , and making , then it will be
possible to observe the deviation previously
computed of 17% in respect to the value
predicted by the Coulombs law.
m r 1 . 0 =

*
The thickness necessary to shield the experiment
for Schumann radiation can be calculated by means of
the well-known expression [16]:
f z 2 10 5 = =

where

and are, respectively, the permeability

and the electric conductivity of the material; is the
frequency of the radiation to be shielded.
f
3

References

[1] Proca A 1936 J. Phys. Radium Ser. VII 7 34753

[2] Proca A 1937 J. Phys. Radium Ser. VII 8 238

[3] Tomaschitz, R. (2001) Physica A 293, 247.

[4] Tomaschitz, R. (2004) Physica A 335, 577.

[5] Tomaschitz, R. (2005) Eur. Phys. J. D. 32, 241.

[6] S. Eidelman et al. (Particle Data Group), Phys. Lett. B
592, 1 (2004) and 2005 partial update for edition 2006
(URL: http://pdg.lbl.gov).

[7] Pecina-Cruz, J . N., (2006) arXiv: physics/0604003v2

[8] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of the
Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific J ournal
of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-232.

[9] Greiner, W. (2000) Relativistic Quantum Mechanics,
Springer, Berlin, 3
rd
edition.

[10] Itzykson, C., and Zuber, J .B., (1980) Quantum Field
Theory, McGraw-Hill, N.Y.).

[11] Morse. P.M., Feshbach, H., (1953) Methods of
Theoretical Physics (McGraw-Hill, N.Y.).

[12] Byrne J C 1977 Astrophys. Space Sci. 46 11532

[13] Audouze, J . (1980) An introduction to Nuclear
Astrophysics, D. Reidel Publishing Company-Holland,
p. 22.

[14] Schumann W. O. (1952). "ber die strahlungslosen
Eigenschwingungen einer leitenden Kugel, die von
einer Luftschicht und einer Ionosphrenhlle umgeben
ist". Zeitschrift und Naturfirschung 7a: 149154

[15] Volland, H. (1995), Handbook of Atmospheric
Electrodynamics, CRC Press, vol.I, Chapter11.

[16] Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo, McGraw-
Hill, p.270.









Gravity Control by means of Modified Electromagnetic Radiation

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2011 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.

Here a new way for gravity control is proposed that uses electromagnetic radiation modified to have a smaller
wavelength. It is known that when the velocity of a radiation is reduced its wavelength is also reduced. There are
several ways to strongly reduce the velocity of an electromagnetic radiation. Here, it is shown that such a reduction
can be done simply by making the radiation cross a conductive foil.

Key words: Modified theories of gravity, Experimental studies of gravity, Electromagnetic wave propagation.
PACS: 04.50.Kd , 04.80.-y, 41.20.Jb, 75.70.-i.

It was shown that the gravitational
mass m
g
and inertial mass m
i
are correlated
by means of the following factor [1]:
( ) 1 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ =
c m
p
m
m
i i
g
where is the rest inertial mass of the
particle and is the variation in the
particles kinetic momentum; is the speed
of light.
0 i
m
p
c
When is produced by the
absorption of a photon with wavelength
p
, it
is expressed by h p = . In this case, Eq.
(1) becomes
( ) 2 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
0

+ =

+ =

c m h
m
m
i
i
g
where c m h
i0 0
= is the De Broglie
wavelength for the particle with rest inertial
mass .
0 i
m
It is easily seen that cannot be
strongly reduced simply by using
electromagnetic waves with wavelength
g
m

because
0
is very smaller than .
However, it is known that the wavelength of
a radiation can be strongly reduced simply by
strongly reducing its velocity.
m
10
10

There are several ways to reduce the

velocity of an electromagnetic radiation. For
example, by making light cross an ultra cold
atomic gas, it is possible to reduce its velocity
down to 17m/s [2-7]. Here, it is shown that the
velocity of an electromagnetic radiation can
be strongly reduced simply by making the
radiation cross a conductive foil.
From Electrodynamics we know that
when an electromagnetic wave with
frequency and velocity incides on a
material with relative permittivity
f c
r
,
relative magnetic permeability
r
and
electrical conductivity , its velocity is
reduced to
r
n c v = where is the index of
refraction of the material, given by [
r
n
8]
( ) ( ) 3 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n
If >> f , 2 = , the Eq. (3) reduces to
( ) 4
4
0
f
n
r
r

=
Thus, the wavelength of the incident
radiation becomes
( ) 5
4
mod

f n n
f c
f
v
r r
= = = =










Fig. 1 Modified Electromagnetic Wave. The
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave can be
strongly reduced, but its frequency remains the same.
v =c v =c/n
r
=c/f

mod
=v/f =c/n
r
f
n
r

Now consider a ( GHz 1 m 3 . 0 )
radiation incident on Aluminum foil with
and thickness m S/ 10 82 . 3
7
= m 5 . 10 = .
According to Eq. (5), the modified
wavelength is
2
( ) 6 10 6 . 1
4
5
mod
m
f

= =

Consequently, the wavelength of the

radiation inside the foil will be
and not
GHz 1
m
5
mod
10 6 . 1

= m 3 . 0 .
It is known that a radiation with
frequency f, propagating through a material
with electromagnetic characteristics , and
, has the amplitudes of its waves decreased
in e
1
=0.37 (37%), when it passes through a
distance z, given by
( )
) 7 (
1 1
1
2
2
1

+
=

z
The radiation is totally absorbed at a
distance 5z [8].
In the case of the radiation
propagating through the Aluminum foil Eq.
(7), gives
GHz 1
) 8 ( 57 . 2 10 57 . 2
1
6
m
f
z

= = =

Since the thickness of the Aluminum foil is
m 5 . 10 = then, we can conclude that,
practically all the incident radiation is
absorbed by the foil.
GHz 1
If the foil contains atoms/m n
3
,

then
the number of atoms per area unit is n .
Thus, if the electromagnetic radiation with
frequency incides on an area of the foil
it reaches
f S
nS atoms. If it incides on the total
area of the foil, , then the total number of
atoms reached by the radiation is
f
S

f
nS N = .
The number of atoms per unit of volume, ,
is given by
n
( ) 9
0
A
N
n

=
where is the
Avogadros number ;
kmole atoms N / 10 02 . 6
26
0
=
is the matter density
of the foil (in kg/m
3
) and A is the atomic
mass. In the case of the Aluminum
( ) kmole A m kg 98 . 26 , / 2700
3
= = the result is
( ) 10 / 10 02 . 6
3 28
m atoms n
Al
=
The total number of photons inciding on the
foil is
2
hf P n
photons total
= , where is the
power of the radiation flux incident on the
foil.
P
When an electromagnetic wave incides
on the Aluminum foil, it strikes on front
atoms, where
f
N
( )
atom f f
nS N . Thus, the
wave incides effectively on an area
a f
S N S = , where
2
4
1
atom a
S = is the cross
section area of one Aluminum atom. After these
collisions, it carries out with the
other atoms of the foil (See Fig.2).
collisions
n









Fig. 2 Collisions inside the foil.
foil
atom
S
a
Wave
Thus, the total number of collisions in the
volume S is
( )
( ) 11

nS
nS nS nS n N N
atom atom collisions f collisions
=
= + = + =
The power density, , of the radiation on
the foil can be expressed by
D
( ) 12
a f
S N
P
S
P
D = =
The same power density as a function of the
power radiated from the antenna, is given by
0
P
( ) 13
4
2
0
r
P
D

=
where r is the distance between the antenna
and the foil. Comparing equations (12) and
(13), we get
( ) 14
4
0
2
P
r
S N
P
a f

We can express the total mean number

of collisions in each atom, , by means of
the following equation
1
n
( ) 15
1
N
N n
n
collisions photons total
=
Since in each collision is transferred a
momentum h to the atom, then the total
momentum transferred to the foil will be
( ) h N n p
1
= . Therefore, in accordance
with Eq. (1), we can write that
3
( )
( ) 16 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
1
0

+ =
=

+ =

collisions photons total

i
g
N n
N n
m
m
Since Eq. (11) gives nS N
collisions
= , we get
( ) (17
2
nS
hf
P
N n
collisions photons total

= )
Substitution of Eq. (17) into Eq. (16) yields
( ) ( ) 18 1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

nS
hf
P
m
m
i
g
Substitution of Eq. (14) into Eq. (18) gives
( ) 19 1
1
4
1 2 1
2
0
2 2
0
0

+ =

c m
nS
f r
P S N
m
m
i
a f
i
g
Substitution of ( )
atom f f
nS N and
a f
S N S =
into Eq. (19) it reduces to
( ) 20 1
1
4
1 2 1
2
2
0
2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

cf m r
P S S n
m
m
i
atom a f
i
g
In the case of a 20cm square Aluminum foil,
with thickness m 5 . 10 = , we get
kg m
i
3
0
10 1 . 1

= , ,
, ,
2 2
10 4 m S
f

=
2 10
10 m
atom

2 20
10 m S
a

3 28
/ 10 02 . 6 m atoms n n
Al
= =
Substitution of these values into Eq. (20),
gives
( )
( )
( ) 21 1
1
10 84 . 8 1 2 1
2
2 2
0 11
0

+ =

f r
P
m
m
Al i
Al g
Thus, if the Aluminum foil is at a distance
m r 1 = from the antenna, and the power
radiated from the antenna is W P 32
0
= , and
the frequency of the radiation is GHz f 1 =
then Eq.(21) gives
( )
( )
( ) 22 1
10 8 . 2
1 2 1
2
5
0

+ =

Al i
Al g
m
m
In the case of the Aluminum foil and Ghz 1
radiation, Eq. (6) shows that
m
5
mod
10 6 . 1

= . Thus, by substitution of
by
mod
into Eq. (22), we get the
following expression
( )
( )
( ) 23 1
0

Al i
Al g
m
m
Since g m P
g
r
r
= then the result is
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) 24
0
g m g m P
Al i Al g Al
r r
r
=
This means that, in the mentioned conditions,
the weight force of the Aluminum foil is
inverted.
It was shown [1] that there is an
additional effect of Gravitational Shielding
produced by a substance whose gravitational
mass was reduced or made negative. This
effect shows that just above the substance the
gravity acceleration will be reduced at the
same ratio
1
g
0 1 i g
m m = , i.e., g g
1 1
= , ( g
is the gravity acceleration bellow the
substance). This means that above the
Aluminum foil the gravity acceleration will
be modified according to the following
expression
( )
( )
( ) 25
0
1 1
g
m
m
g g
Al i
Al g

= =
where the factor
( ) ( ) Al i Al g
m m
0 1
= will be
given Eq. (21).
In order to check the theory presented
here, we propose the experimental set-up
shown in Fig. 3. The distance between the
Aluminum foil and the antenna is m r 1 = .
The maximum output power of the
transmitter is 32W CW. A 10g body is
placed above Aluminum foil , in order to
check the Gravitational Shielding Effect. The
distance between the Aluminum foil and the
10g body is approximately 10 cm. The
alternative device to measure the weight
variations of the foil and the body (including
the negative values) uses two balances (200g
/ 0.01g) as shown in Fig .3.
GHz 1
In order to check the effect of a second
Gravitational Shielding above the first
one(Aluminum foil), we can remove the 10g
body, putting in its place a second Aluminum
foil, with the same characteristics of the first
one. The 10g body can be then placed at a
4
distance of 10cm above of the second
Aluminum foil. Obviously, it must be
connected to a third balance.
As shown in a previous paper [9] the
gravity above the second Gravitational
Shielding, in the case of
1 2
= , is given by
( ) 26
2
1 1 2 2
g g g = =
If a third Aluminum foil is placed above the
second one, then the gravity above this foil is
, and so on. g g g g
3
1 1 2 3 2 3 3
= = =
In practice, Multiple Gravitational
Shieldings can be constructed by inserting N
several parallel Aluminum foils inside the
dielectric of a parallel plate capacitor (See
Fig. 4). In this case, the resultant capacity of
the capacitor becomes Nd S N C C
f r r 0
= = ,
where is the area of the Aluminum foils
and the distance between them;
f
S
d
r
is the
relative permeability of the dielectric. By
applying a voltage on the plates of the
capacitor a current is produced through
the Aluminum foils. It is expressed by
rms
V
rms
i
rms r C rms rms
V fC X V i 2 = = .
Since
rms rms
E j = and
f rms rms
S i j = we
get
f rms rms
S i E = , which is the oscillating
electric field through the Aluminum foils. By
substituting this expression into Eq. (20), and
considering that ( )
2
1
4
mod
f = = (Eq.6)
and c E n r P D
r rms r 0
2 2
0
2 4 = = , where
( )
2
1
0
4 f n
r r
= (Eq. 4), we obtain:
( ) 27 1
64
1 2 1
4 2 2 2 2 2
4 4 4 6

+ =
f S c
i S n
Al f Al
rms atom a Al

Since
( )
rms f r rms r C rms rms
V Nd S f V fC X V i
0
2 2 = = =
Then
( ) ( ) 28 2
0 rms f r
rms
V Nd S
f
i
=
Substitution of this equation into Eq. (27) gives
( ) 29 1
4
1 2 1
4 4 2 2 2
4 2 4
0
4 4 4 6 2

+ =
d N c
V S S n
Al Al
rms f r atom a Al

Substitution of the known value of

, ,
3 28
/ 10 02 . 6 m atoms n
Al
= m
atom
10
10 1


( ) [ ]
2 20 2
2
1
2
2
1
10 1 2 4 m S
atom atom a

= = ,
1 . 2 =
r
(Teflon mm KV/ 24 , Short Time, 1.6
mm [10]), , we get
3
. 2700

= m kg
Al

( ) 30 1 10 4 . 1 1 2 1
4
4
2
29

+ =

d
V
N
S
rms
f

Note that, based on the equation above,

it is possible to create a device for moving
very heavy loads such as large monoliths, for
example.
Imagine a large monolith on the
Earths surface. If we place below the
monolith some sets with Multiple
Gravitational Shieldings (See Fig.4), the
value of the gravity acceleration above each
set of Gravitational Shieldings becomes
( ) 31 g g
R

=
where is the number of Gravitational
Shieldings in each set.
Since we must have mm KV d V
rms
/ 24 <
(dielectric strength of Teflon) [10] then, for
KV V mm d
rms
4 . 38 6 . 1 < = . For KV
rms
37 V = ,
mm d 6 . 1 = , , and
2
7 . 2 m S
f
= 2 = N 3 = Eq.
(30) gives 36 . 0 = and Eq. (31) shows
that . The sign (-)
shows that the gravity acceleration above the
six sets of Gravitational Shieldings becomes
repulsive in respect to the Earth. Thus, by
controlling the value of
2 3
/ 46 . 0 s m g g
R
=
it is possible to
make the total mass of the monolith slightly
negative in order to the monolith can float
and, in this way, it can be displaced and
carried to anywhere with ease.
Considering the dielectric strength of
known dielectrics, we can write that
( ) mm KV d V
rms
/ 200
max
< . Thus, for a single
capacitor( ) 1 = N Eq. (30) gives
( ) [ ] { } ( ) 31 1 10 2 . 2 1 2 1
2 4
<< + =
f
S
The Gravitational Shielding effect becomes
negligible for 01 . 0 < (variation smaller
than 1% in the gravitational mass). Thus,
considering Eq. (31), we can conclude that
the Gravitational Shielding effect becomes
significant only for
2 2
10 m S
f

>> . Possibly
this is why it was not yet detected.
5





































Fig. 3 Experimental Set-up

Coaxial
50
10g
Balances
200g / 0.01g
Aluminum foil
Nylon thread
100g 100g
Transmitter
1GHz
32W CW
1 m
1 m
Antenna
10 cm
1.0 m 2.0 m 1.0 m
PVC tube

6



















(a)















(b)


Fig. 4 System with six sets of Gravitational Shieldings for moving very heavy loads.
For KV V
rms
37 = , mm d 6 . 1 = ,
2
7 . 2 m S
f
= , 2 = N and 3 = Eq. (30) gives 36 . 0 = and Eq. (31)
shows that
2 3
/ 46 . 0 s m g g
R
= . The sign (-) shows that the gravity acceleration above the six
sets of Gravitational Shieldings becomes repulsive in respect to the Earth. Thus, by controlling the
value of it is possible to make the total mass of the monolith slightly negative in order to the
monolith can float and, in this way, it can be displaced and carried to anywhere with ease.

Monolith
Six sets of Gravitational Shieldings
Each one with three (N = 3) Gravitational Shieldings
g
f
S

Aluminumfoil
Capacitor Plates
(Aluminum)
Dielectric
1
2
3

3
g
3
g
3
g
3
g
3
g
3
g
Monolith

3
g
3
g
3
g
3
g
3
g
3
g
g g g g g g g

7


References

[1] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of the
Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific J ournal
of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-232.

[2] Hau, L.V., et al., (1999) Nature, 397, 594-598.

[3] Kash, M. M. et al., (1999) Phys. Rev. Lett. 82, 5229.

[4] Budiker, D. et al., (1999) Phys. Rev. Lett. 83, 1767.

[5] Liu, Ch. et al., (2001) Nature 409, 490.

[6] Dutton, Z., et al., (2001) Science 293, 663.

[7] Turukhin, A. V., et al., (2002) Phys. Rev. Lett. 88,
023602

[8] Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo, McGraw-
Hill, p. 270.

[9] De Aquino, F. (2010) Gravity Control by means
of Electromagnetic Field through Gas at Ultra-
Low Pressure, Pacific J ournal of Science and
Technology, 11(2) November 2010, pp.178-
247.

[10] Teflon

PTFE, Properties Handbook, Du Pont, (7/96)

220313D, USA.










Transmission of DNA Genetic Information into Water by means
of Electromagnetic Fields of Extremely-low Frequencies

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2012 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.

Recently it was experimentally shown that the DNA genetic information can be transmitted into water when
the DNA and the water are subjected jointly to an electromagnetic field with 7Hz frequency. As announced,
the reported phenomenon could allow developing highly sensitive detection systems for chronic bacterial and
viral infections. Here, it is shown a possible explanation for the phenomenon based on the recent framework
of Quantum Gravity. It is shown that, if volume of water with a DNA molecule is placed near another
volume of pure water, and the gravitational masses of the two water volumes are simultaneously reduced to
values in the range +0.159m
i0
to 0.159m
i0
, by means of electromagnetic fields of extremely-low frequency
(ELF), then the DNA genetic information are transmitted to pure water, imprinting onto it the structure of the
DNA molecule. After several hours, as final result, a replication of the DNA can arise in the pure water.

Key words: DNA, Modified theories of gravity, Experimental studies of gravity, Memory of Water.
PACS: 87.14.gk , 04.50.Kd , 04.80.-y, 41.20.J b.

1. Introduction

A recent experiment showed that the
DNA genetic information can be transmitted
into water when the DNA and the water are
subjected jointly to an electromagnetic field
with 7Hz frequency. The main researcher
behind the new DNA experiment is a recent
Nobel prizewinner, Luc Montagnier. He and
his research partners have made a summary of
his findings [1]. Montagniers experiment
basically consists in two test tubes, one of
which contained a tiny piece of bacterial
DNA, the other pure water. The tubes were
then placed close to one another inside a
horizontally oriented solenoid. Both tubes
were jointly subjected to a weak
electromagnetic field with 7Hz frequency.
Eighteen hours later, after DNA amplification
using a polymerase chain reaction, as if by
magic, the DNA was detectable in the test tube
containing pure water, showing that, under
certain conditions, DNA can project copies of
itself in another place.
As mentioned in a recently published
article in the New Scientist [2], physicists in
Montagnier's team suggest that DNA emits
low-frequency electromagnetic waves which
imprint the structure of the molecule onto the
water. This structure, they claim, is preserved
and amplified through quantum coherence
effects, and because it mimics the shape of the
original DNA, the enzymes in the PCR
process mistake it for DNA itself, and
somehow use it as a template to make DNA
match that which "sent" the signal.
Here, based on the framework of a
recently proposed theory of Quantum Gravity
[3], is presented a consistent explanation
showing how an exact copy of the structure of
the DNA molecule is imprinted onto the pure
water.

2. Theory

The quantization of gravity showed
that the gravitational mass m
g
and inertial
mass m
i
are correlated by means of the
following factor [3]:
( ) 1 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ =
c m
p
m
m
i i
g
where is the rest inertial mass of the
particle and
0 i
m
p is the variation in the
particles kinetic momentum; is the speed of
light.
c
When p is produced by the absorption
of a photon with wavelength , it is expressed
by h p = . In this case, Eq. (1) becomes
( ) 2 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
0

+ =

+ =

c m h
m
m
i
i
g
where c m h
i0 0
= is the De Broglie
wavelength for the particle with rest inertial
mass .
0 i
m
2
It is easily seen that cannot be
strongly reduced simply by using
electromagnetic waves with wavelength
g
m

because
0
is much smaller than .
However, it is known that the wavelength of a
radiation can be strongly reduced simply by
strongly reducing its velocity.
m
10
10

From Electrodynamics we know that

when an electromagnetic wave with frequency
and velocity incides on a material with
relative permittivity
f c
r
, relative magnetic
permeability
r
and electrical conductivity
, its velocity is reduced to
r
n c v = where
is the index of refraction of the material,
given by [
r
n
3]
( ) ( ) 3 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n
If >> , f 2 = , the Eq. (3) reduces to
( ) 4
4
0
f
n
r
r

=
Thus, the wavelength of the incident radiation
becomes
( ) 5
4
mod

f n n
f c
f
v
r r
= = = =








Fig. 1 Modified Electromagnetic Wave. The
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave can be
strongly reduced, but its frequency remains the same.
v =c v =c/n
r
=c/f

mod
=v/f =c/n
r
f
n
r

Now consider a ( )
radiation incident on pure water
( ). According to Eq. (5), the
modified wavelength is
Hz 7 m
7
10 3 . 4
m S / 10 2
4
=
( ) 6 10 4 . 8
4
4
mod
m
f
= =

Consequently, the wavelength of the

radiation inside the water will be
and not .
Hz 7
m
4
mod
10 4 . 8 = m
7
10 3 . 4
If a water lamina with thickness equal
to contains n molecules/m
3
,

then the number of
molecules per unit area is n . Thus, if the
electromagnetic radiation with frequency
incides on an area of the lamina it
reaches
f S
nS molecules. If it incides on the total
area of the lamina, , then the total number of
molecules reached by the radiation is
f
S

f
nS N = .
The number of molecules per unit volume, n, is
given by
( ) 7
0
A
N
n

=
where is the
Avogadros number;
kmole molecules N / 10 02 . 6
26
0
=
is the matter density of the
lamina(kg/m
3
)and A is the Molar Mass. In the case
of pure Water ( )
1 3 3
. 01 . 18 , / 10

= = kmole kg A m kg
the result is
( ) 8 / 10 34 . 3
3 28
m molecules n
water
=
The total number of photons inciding on
the water is
2
hf P n
photons total
= , where P is the
power of the radiation flux incident on the water.
When an electromagnetic wave incides
on the water, it strikes on front molecules,
where
f
N
( )
m f f
nS N . Thus, the wave incides
effectively on an area , where
m f
S N S =
2 21 2
4
1
10 7 m S
m m

= is the cross
section area of one molecule of the water
molecule. After these collisions, it carries out
with the other atoms of the foil (See
Fig.2).
collisions
n










Fig. 2 Collisions inside the water.
water
molecule
S
m
Wave

Thus, the total number of collisions in the
volume S is
3
( )
( ) 9

nS
nS nS nS n N N
f f collisions f collisions
=
= + = + =

The power density, , of the radiation on the
water can be expressed by
D
( ) 10
m f
S N
P
S
P
D = =
We can express the total mean number
of collisions in each molecule, , by means of
the following equation
1
n
( ) 11
1
N
N n
n
collisions photons total
=
Since in each collision a momentum h is
transferred to the molecule, then the total
momentum transferred to the water will be
( ) h N n p
1
= . Therefore, in accordance
with Eq. (1), we can write that
( )
( ) 12 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
1
0

+ =
=

+ =

collisions photons total

i
g
N n
N n
m
m

Since Eq. (9) gives nS N
collisions
= , we get
( ) (13
2
nS
hf
P
N n
collisions photons total

= )
Substitution of Eq. (13) into Eq. (12) yields
( ) ( ) 14 1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

nS
hf
P
m
m
i
g
Substitution of P given by Eq. (10) into Eq.
(14) gives

( ) 15 1
1
1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

c m
nS
f
D S N
m
m
i
m f
i
g


Substitution of ( )
m f f
nS N and
m f
S N S =
into Eq. (15) the result is
( ) 16 1
1
1 2 1
1
1
1 2 1
2
2
2 2 3
2
2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

+ =

cf
D S S n
cf m
D S S n
m
m
f m m
i
m m f
i
g

In the case of the water, we can take the
following values: ;
(
f
S is the area of the
horizontal cross-section of the test tube);
; ;
3 28
/ 10 34 . 3 m molecules n =
2 5
10 9 . 1 m S
f

2 21
10 7 m S
m

m
m
1
10
10

(height of
water inside the test tube). Substitution of
these values into Eq. (16), gives
( )
( )
( ) 17 1
1
10 1 . 1 1 2 1
2
2
9
0

+ =

f
D
m
m
water i
water g
In the case of a 7Hz radiation, Eq. (6)
shows that . Thus, by
substitution of
m
4
mod
10 4 . 8 =
by
mod
into Eqs. (17) , we
get the following expression
( )
( )
[ ] { } ( ) 18 1 10 1 . 7 1 2 1
2 4
0
+ D
m
m
water i
water g
Now, considering that the water is inside a
solenoid, which produces a weak ELF
electromagnetic field with and , then
we can write that [
m
E
m
B
4]
( )
( ) 19
2 2 2
0
2
0
2 2
0
2
water
m
water
m water
water
m
n
cB
v
B v
v
E
D

= = =
Equation (4) shows that for Hz f 7 = ,
( )
7 . 506 =
water r
n .Substitution of this value
into Eq.(19) gives
2 11
10 3 . 2
m
B D =
Substitution of this value into Eq. (19) gives

( )
( )
[ ] { } ( ) 20 1 10 7 . 3 1 2 1
4 27
0
+
m
water i
water g
B
m
m

4














Fig. 3 The vector of Pointing B E S
r r r
= at
the test tube. The electromagnetic radiation
propagates in the direction of the vector of
Pointing
E
r

B
r


S
r

f
S
Coil
Test tube

In Montagniers experiment, the set-up
was placed in a container shielded by 1 mm
thick layer of mumetal in order to avoid
interference from the earth's natural magnetic
field, whose intensity is . This
is because the intensity of magnetic field in
Montagniers experiment was much smaller
than . Note that, if the intensity of the
magnetic field is in the range
, then, according
to Eq. (20), the gravitational masses of the
water with DNA and thewater inside the other
test tube are reduced to values in the range
to . It was shown in a
previous paper [
T B
5
10 6

B
T B T
m
7 7
10 4 . 1 10 2 . 1

< <
0
159 . 0
i
m +
0
159 . 0
i
m
3] that, when this occurs the
gravitational masses becomes imaginaries and
the bodies leave our Real Universe, i.e., they
perform transitions to the Imaginary Universe,
which contains our Real Universe. The terms
real and imaginary are borrowed from
mathematics (real and imaginary numbers). It
was also shown that in the Imaginary
Universe the imaginary bodies are subjected
to the Imaginary Interaction that is similar to
the Gravitational Interaction. If the masses of
the bodies have the same sign, then the
interaction among them will be attractive.
The masses of the water with DNA and
the pure water are decreased at the same ratio,









(a)











(b)











(c)






(d)



Fig. 4 (a) Transition to the Imaginary Universe and
attraction. (b) Fusion of the two waters. (c) Return to
Real Universe. (d) After several comings and goings to
the Imaginary Universe a real copy of the DNA can be
detected in the tube with pure water.
F
ImaginaryUniverse
Real Universe
ImaginaryUniverse
Real Universe
ImaginaryUniverse
Real Universe
1
F
ImaginaryUniverse
Real Universe
DNA
First impression of
DNA into water. It is a
tenuous copy that
cannot yet be detected.
water Water with DNA
Test tube
with water
Test tube
with water
and DNA
Fusion of the two waters.
TheDNA prints a tenuous
copy of itself in the water
of thesecond tube.
2
After several hours
thecopy of the
DNA is sufficiently
intensified in order
to be detected

5
in such way that they remain with the same
sign. Thus, when they arrive the Imaginary
Universe the attractive imaginary interaction
approaches each other. Due to the small
distance between them
*
, they are subjected to
a significative attraction. Consequently, they
entered one another (fusion). This imprints in
the pure water an exactly copy of the DNA
molecule. However, the water with DNA and
the pure water return immediately to the real
universe because the ELF electromagnetic
field does not accompany them during the
transition. When they get back to the real
universe, the effect previously produced by
the ELF electromagnetic field sends again the
water with DNA and pure water to Imaginary
Universe, and again a new imprint of the
DNA is produced at the same place of the first
one, strengthening the copy of DNA onto the
water.
Thus, during the time interval in what
the ELF electromagnetic field remains on, the
process continue. After some hours (16 to 18
hours in the case of Montagniers experiment)
the copy of the DNA can become sufficiently
strong to be detected. Thus, when the ELF
electromagnetic field is turned off, the water
can contain a real DNA molecule, which is an
exactly equal to that one that exists in the
other tube.
The physicists in Montagnier's team
suggest that the imprints of the DNA are
preserved through quantum coherence effects
[1]. This conclusion is based on the
framework of a recently proposed theory of
liquid water based on Quantum Field Theory
(QFT) [5-10]. J acques Benveniste [11] has
been the first to propose (1988) that water has
memory. The fact that the water contains
electric dipoles, which can give to it a
significant memory capacity, has been also
considered by Brian J osephson [12] and, more
recently by J . Dunning-Davies [13].






*
Due to the small distance between the two test tubes. The
tubes were then placed near to one another inside a
horizontally oriented solenoid.



















































6

References

[1] L. Montagnier, J. Aissa, E. Del Giudice, C. Lavalee,
A. Tedeschi, and G. Vitiello, DNA Waves and
Water, (2010) http://arxiv.org/pdf/1012.5166

[2] Coghlan, A. (2011) Scorn over claim of teleported DNA,
New Scientist, 12 J anuary.

[3] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of the
Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific J ournal
of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-232.

[4] Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968)
Physics, J . Willey & Sons,
Portuguese Version, Ed. USP, p.1124.

[5] Preparata G 1995 QED Coherence in matter (Singapore:
World Scientific)

[6] Arani R, Bono I, Del Giudice E, Preparata G 1995 Int. J .
Mod. Phys. B 9 18131841

[7] Del Giudice E, Preparata G and Vitiello G 1988 Phys.
Rev. Lett. 61 10851088

[8] Del Giudice E and Vitiello G 2006 Phys. Rev. A 74
022105

[9] Del Giudice E and Tedeschi A 2009 Electr. Biol. Med.
26 4854

[10] Del Giudice E, Spinetti P R and Tedeschi A 2010
Water 2 566586 (online J ournal).

[11] Benveniste, J acques (2005) Ma vrit sur la 'mmoire
de l'eau', Albin Michel. ISBN 2-226-15877-4.

[12] Brian J osephson (1997) Molecule Memories, New
Scientist letters, 1 November.

[13] J . Dunning-Davies (2011) Structure and Memory in
Water, General Science and Philosophy,
vixra.org/abs/1101.0081













A Possible Explanation for Anomalous Heat Production in
Ni-H Systems

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2012 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.

Anomalous heat production has been detected in Ni-H Systems. Several evidences point to the occurrence of
nuclear fusion reactions. A possible explanation for this phenomenon is shown here based on the recent
discovery that electromagnetic fields of extremely-low frequencies (ELF) can increase the intensities of
gravitational forces. Under certain circumstances, the intensities of gravitational forces can even overcome
the intensity of the electrostatic repulsion forces, and, in this way, produce nuclear fusion reactions, without
need high temperatures for these reactions occur.

Key words: Modified theories of gravity, Nuclear Fusion, Fusion Reactors.
PACS: 04.50.Kd , 89.30.J j , 28.52.-s.


1. Introduction

Since the experiment of Fleischmann,
Hawkins and Pons [1] the anomalous
production of heat has been searched for in
various systems. Recently, a large anomalous
production of heat has been reported by
Focardi et al., [2] in a nickel rod filled with
hydrogen. This phenomenon was posteriorly
confirmed by Cerron-Zeballos et al., [3].
The called cold fusion was a process
of nuclear fusion that was first conceived of
by Fleischmann, Hawkins and Pons during
their experiment that involved heavy water
electrolysis through hydrogen on a palladium
electrode surface [1]. They made claims
originally that there was heat and energy
being created from the reaction taking place
at room temperature. This is why it is
referred to as cold fusion, because it occurred
in an environment that was previously
considered too cool for nuclear fusion to
occur.
Here it is shown that nuclear fusion
can be produced at room temperature by
increasing the gravitational forces in order
to overcome the electrostatic repulsion
forces between the nuclei. This process
became feasible after the Quantization of
Gravity [4], with the discovery that the
gravitational mass m
g
can be made negative
and strongly intensified by means of
electromagnetic fields of extremely-low
frequencies.
This effect can provide a consistent and
coherent explanation for anomalous heat
production detected in Ni-H Systems.


2. Theory

The quantization of gravity shown that
the gravitational mass m
g
and inertial mass
m
i
are correlated by means of the following
factor [4]:
( ) 1 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ =
c m
p
m
m
i i
g
where is the rest inertial mass of the
particle and
0 i
m
p is the variation in the
particles kinetic momentum; is the speed
of light.
c
When p is produced by the
absorption of a photon with wavelength , it
is expressed by h p = . In this case, Eq.
(1) becomes
( ) 2 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
0

+ =

+ =

c m h
m
m
i
i
g
where c m h
i0 0
= is the De Broglie
wavelength for the particle with rest inertial
mass
0 i
m .
From Electrodynamics we know that
when an electromagnetic wave with
frequency and velocity incides on a
material with relative permittivity
f c
r
,
relative magnetic permeability
r
and
electrical conductivity , its velocity is
2
reduced to
r
n c v = where is the index of
refraction of the material, given by [
r
n
5]
( ) ( ) 3 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n

If >> , f 2 = , Eq. (3) reduces to

( ) 4
4
0
f
n
r
r

=

Thus, the wavelength of the incident
radiation (See Fig . 1) becomes

( ) 5
4
mod

f n n
f c
f
v
r r
= = = =












Fig. 1 Modified Electromagnetic Wave. The
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave can be
strongly reduced, but its frequency remains the same.
v =c v =c/n
r
=c/f

mod
=v/f =c/n
r
f
n
r



It is known that the Schumann
resonances [6] are global electromagnetic
resonances (a set of spectrum peaks in the
extremely low frequency ELF), excited by
lightning discharges in the spherical
resonant cavity formed by the Earths surface
and the inner edge of the ionosphere (60km
from the Earths surface). The Earth
ionosphere waveguide behaves like a
resonator at ELF frequencies and amplifies
the spectral signals from lightning at the
resonance frequencies. In the normal mode
descriptions of Schumann resonances, the
fundamental mode ( is a standing wave
in the Earthionosphere cavity with a
wavelength equal to the circumference of the
Earth. This lowest-frequency (and highest-
intensity) mode of the Schumann resonance
occurs at a frequency [
) 1 = n
Hz f 83 . 7
1
= 7].
Now consider a
( ) radiation passing through a
Nickel powder cylinder ( ;
Hz 83 . 7
m
7
10 8 . 3
m S/ 10 6 . 1
7
=
17 . 2 =
r
[8,9]) as shown in Fig.2.
According to Eq. (5), the modified
wavelength is
( ) 6 19 . 0
4
mod
m
f
= =

Consequently, the wavelength of the
radiation inside the Nickel powder will be
Hz 83 . 7
m 19 . 0
mod
= and not . m
7
10 8 . 3
If a Nickel powder
*
lamina with
thickness equal to contains
molecules/m
n
3
,

then the number of molecules
per area unit is n . Thus, if the
electromagnetic radiation with frequency
incides on an area of the lamina it
reaches
f S
nS molecules. If it incides on the
total area of the lamina, , then the total
number of molecules reached by the
radiation is
f
S

f
nS N = . The number of
molecules per unit of volume, , is given by n

( ) 7
0
A
N
n

=

where is
the Avogadros number;
kmole molecules N / 10 02 . 6
26
0
=
is the matter
density of the lamina (in kg/m
3
) and A is the
molar mass. In the case of Nickel powder
( )
1 3
. 71 . 58 , / 8800

= = kmole kg A m kg the result is

( )
( ) 8 / 10 02 . 9
3 28
m molecules n
Ni
=

The total number of photons inciding
on the Nickel powder is
2
hf P n
photons total
= ,
where P is the power of the radiation flux
incident on the Nickel powder.

*
Ultra fine nickel powder (e.g. Inco type 210) with
particle size of 0.5-1.0m.
3






















Fig.2 Experimental set-up. The
electromagnetic radiation propagates in the direction of
the vector of Pointing B E S
r r r
= . The set-up is
placed in a container shielded by 1 mm thick layer of
mumetal in order to avoid interference from external
electromagnetic fields. In practice, the solenoid is not
necessary, since the 7.83 Hz electromagnetic field
naturally exists inside the spherical resonant cavity
formed by the Earths surfaceand the inner edge of the
ionosphere. (Schumann resonance).
7.83 Hz current
Nickel powder

Metal tube
Mumetal

Solenoid
S=E
m
XB
m

When an electromagnetic wave incides
on a solid lamina of Nickel, it strikes on
front molecules, where
f
N
( )
( )
( ) Ni f Ni f
S n N .
Thus, the electromagnetic wave incides
effectively on an area , where
( ) Ni f
S N S =
( ) ( )
2 20 2
4
1
10 2 . 1 m S
Ni Ni

= is the cross
section area of one Ni atom. After these
collisions, it carries out with the
other atoms of the Nickel powder (See Fig.3).
collisions
n











Fig. 3 Collisions inside the Nickel powder.
Nickel powder
molecule
S
(Ni)
Wave


Thus, the total number of collisions in the
volume S is

( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( )
( )
( ) 9

S n
S n S n S n n N N
Ni
Ni Ni Ni Ni Ni collisions f collisions
=
= + = + =

The power density, , of the radiation on the
Nickel powder can be expressed by
D
( )
( ) 10
Ni f
S N
P
S
P
D = =
We can express the total mean number
of collisions in each Ni molecule, , by
means of the following equation
1
n
( ) 11
1
N
N n
n
collisions photons total
=
Since in each collision a momentum h is
transferred to the molecule, then the total
momentum transferred to the Nickel will be
( ) h N n p
1
= . Therefore, in accordance
with Eq. (1), we can write that
( )
( )
( )
( ) 12 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
1
0

+ =
=

+ =

collisions photons total

w i
w g
N n
N n
m
m
Since Eq. (9) gives
( )
S n N
Ni collisions
= , we
get
( )
( ) ( ) 13
2
S n
hf
P
N n
Ni collisions photons total

=
Substitution of Eq. (13) into Eq. (12) yields
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( ) 14 1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

S n
hf
P
m
m
Ni
Ni i
Ni g
Substitution of P given by Eq. (10) into Eq.
(14) gives
( )
( )
( ) ( )
( )
( ) 15 1
1
1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

c m
S n
f
D S N
m
m
Ni i
Ni Ni f
Ni i
Ni g
Substitution of
( )
( )
( ) Ni f Ni f
S n N and
( ) Ni f
S N S =
into Eq. (15) results
4
( )
( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
( ) 16 1
1
1 2 1
2
2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

cf m
D S S n
m
m
Ni i
Ni Ni f Ni
Ni i
Ni g
where
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) 4
2
0 Ni cyl Ni Ni i
V m = = .
Thus, Eq. (16) reduces to
( )
( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( )
( )
( ) 17 1
1
4
1 2 1
2
2 2
2 2 2 3
0

+ =


cf
D S S n
m
m
Ni
Ni Ni f Ni
Ni i
Ni g
For cm 5 = we get
2 3 2
10 9 . 1 4 m S

= =

.
Note that is not equal to because the
area is not continuous, but expressed by
, where is the area of the cross-
section of one Ni particle, and is the
number of particles in the front area, which
is expressed by
f
S

S
p f
nS S =
p
S
n
( )

S n x n
p p
= , 1 << x ,
where

S n
p p
is the number of particles
inside area ; is the number of Ni
particles/m

S
p
n
3
, given by

S N n
p p
= where
v p p
V V S N + =

; is the mean volume of

one Ni particle and is the void volume,
corresponding to that particle. This volume
can be calculated considering one sphere
with
p
V
V
V
p
- diameter inside a cube whose edge
is
p
. The result is . The mean
size of the particles is
3
48 . 0
p V
V
m
p
75 . 0 = . Thus,
and .
Consequently, . Then,
we get . Now, we
can calculate the value of :
3 19
10 2 . 2 m V
p

2 13
10 4 . 4 m S
p

2 19
10 2 . 4 m V V
V p

+
3 18
/ 10 4 . 2 m particles n
p
=
f
S

( ) ( )
2 3
10 5 . 1 m x S S n x S
p p p f

Substitution of this value jointly with
; ;
( )
3 28
/ 10 02 . 9 m molec n
Ni
=
( )
m
Ni
10
10 24 . 1

=
2 3 2
10 9 . 1 4 m S

= =

; ;
; (Note
that, this is lowest-frequency mode of the
Schumann resonance. Therefore, in practice,
is not necessary to provide the 7.83 Hz
electromagnetic field) and
( )
2 20
10 2 . 1 m S
Ni

( )
3
. 8800

= m kg
Ni
Hz f 83 . 7 =
m 19 . 0
mod
= =
into Eq.(17), gives
( )
( )
[ ] { } ( ) 18 1 10 9 . 3 1 2 1
2 4 21
0
+ = D x
m
m
Ni i
Ni g
Now, considering that the Nickel
powder is inside a solenoid, which produces
a weak ELF electromagnetic field with
and , then we can write that [
m
E
m
B 10]
( )
( ) 19
2 2 2
0
2
0
2 2
0
2
Ni r
m
Ni
m Ni
Ni
m
n
cB
v
B v
v
E
D

= = =
Equation (4) shows that, for ,
.Substitution of this value into
Eq.(19) gives
Hz f 83 . 7 =
( )
8
10 2 =
Ni r
n
( ) 21 10 9 . 5
2 5
m
B D =
Substitution of this value into Eq. (18) gives
( )
( )
[ ] { } ( ) 22 1 10 3 . 1 1 2 1
4 4 33
0
+ =
m
Ni i
Ni g
B x
m
m

The value of is limited by the

ionization energy of the atoms, which is, as
we known, the energy required to remove
electrons from atoms. Since the minimum
energy required for the electron to leave the
atom is:
m
B
joules e U
19
max 0
2
min
10 7 . 7 4

= =
then, for the ionization does not occur, the
energy of the wave ( ) hf must be smaller than
. Thus, it follows that
min
U
f S f U D S f U S hf
a a a
< <
min min
2
According to Eq. (19),
0
2
max max
2 cB D = .
Then, the result is
f B
8
max
10 9

<
In the case of Hz f 83 . 7 = , we conclude that
( ) 23 10 2
7
max
T B

<
Assuming that then Eq. (22)
yields
T B
7
max
10 2


( )
( )
[ ] { } ( ) 24 1 10 1 . 2 1 2 1
4 6
0
+ = x
m
m
Ni i
Ni g

Since 1 << x , we can conclude that there is

no significant variation in the gravitational
mass of the Nickel powder.
However, if the air inside the Nickel
powder is evacuated by means of a vacuum
pump, and after Hydrogen (or Deuterium,
5
Tritium, Helium, etc) is injected into the
Nickel powder (See Fig.4) then, the area
to be considered, in order to calculate the
gravitational mass of the Hydrogen, is the
surface area of the Nickel powder, which
can be obtained by multiplying the specific
surface area of the Nickel powder
f
S

( ) by the total mass of the
Nickel powder (
Kg m / 10 4 ~
2 3

( ) ( )
( ) 4
2
0 Ni Ni i
m = ).
Thus, we get .
( )


S S
Ni f
3
10 4
The characteristics of the Nickel prevail
on those of the Hydrogen, in the Ni-H
systems, because the Nickel amount is much
larger than the Hydrogen amount. Thus, we
must take the values of ,
r
, and equal
to
( ) Ni
,
( ) Ni r
and
( ) Ni
respectively, in
order to calculate , in Ni-H systems. In
addition, since
( ) H g
m
A N n
0
= and
f 4
mod
= we can conclude that also
and
( ) Ni
n n
( )
m
Ni
19 . 0
mod mod
= = .
Therefore, in order to obtain the expression
( ) ( ) H i H g
m m
0
we can take Eq. (17) only
substituting for the expression above
obtained
f
S
( )
( )

S S
Ni f
3
10 4 . Thus we
get
( )
( )
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ) 25 1
1
7 . 18
1 2 1
2
2
2 2 2 3
0

+
=

f
D S S n
m
m
Ni Ni Ni Ni
H i
H g
For m 1 . 0 = (length of the Ni-H cylinder in
Focardi experiment) Eq.(25) gives
( )
( )
[ ] { } ( ) 26 1 10 5 . 1 1 2 1
2 48
0
+ = = D
m
m
H i
H g

Based on Eq. (19), we can write that

Ultra fine nickel powder (e.g. Inco type 210) with

particle size of 0.5-1.0m has specific surface areas
range from 1.5 to 6m
2
/g [11]. Hydrogen production
with nickel powder cathode points to a value of
4.31m
2
/g in the case of new cathodes, and 3.84 m
2
/g
in the case of used cathodes [12].


( ) H r m
n cB D
0
2
2 = , where . Thus,
we get . Substitution of this
expression into Eq. (26) yields
( )
1
H r
n
2 14
10 2 . 1
m
B D =
( )
( )
[ ] { } ( ) 27 1 10 1 . 2 1 2 1
4 76
0
+ = =
m
H i
H g
B
m
m

It is known that, at any time in the

spherical resonant cavity formed by the
Earths surface and the inner edge of the
ionosphere (60km from the Earths surface)
there is a drop voltage of 200KV. This,
produces an electric field with intensity
m V E
m
/ 3 , which gives .
Substitution of this value into Eq. (27), yields
T B
m
8
10 1


( ) 28 10 2
22

Thus, the gravitational forces between two
protons (hydrogen nuclei) becomes
2 20 2 2 2 2 2
10 7 r r Gm r Gm F
ip gp

= =
Comparing with the electrostatic repulsion
forces between the nuclei, which is given by
2 28 2
0
2
10 3 . 2 4 r r e F
e

= =
We conclude that the intensities of the
gravitational forces overcome the intensities
of the electrostatic repulsion forces between
the nuclei. This is sufficient to produce their
fusion.

















Fig.4 Cold Fusion Reactor on Earth. Note
that here the 7.83 Hz electromagnetic field is what
naturally exists inside the spherical resonant cavity
formed by theEarths surface and the inner edge of the
ionosphere. (Schumann resonance).
H
2
Nickel powder
+
Hydrogen

Metal tube
S=E
m
XB
m


6
The enormous value of (Eq. 28)
strongly increases the gravitational masses of the
Hydrogen nuclei (
p i gp
m m
0
= ) and their
respective electrons (
e i ge
m m
0
= ). Thus, the
gravitational force between a nucleus (proton)
and the corresponding electron is given by
2
0 0
2
r m Gm F
e i p i pe
= and the gravitational
force between two Hydrogen nuclei is
2
0 0
2
r m Gm F
p i p i pp
= . Therefore, two
well-known types of fusions can occur, i.e.,
( ) 29
e
n e p + +



( ) 30 42 . 0 MeV e d p p
e
+ + + +
+

Due to the strong gravitational attraction, the
following fusions occur instantaneously:
e e
p n d + + +
and
e
p e n + +
+
These reactions are widely known because
they have been studied extensively due to
their importance in astrophysics and neutrino
physics [1316]. Thus, the term in
Eq. (30) reduces instantaneously to
+
+ + e p
e

e e
p p + + + .
In these fusion reactions, neutrons (Eq.
(29)), neutrinos and antineutrinos, and
energy (0.42MeV at each fusion of two
Hydrogen nuclei) are produced. Note that
there is no gamma ray emission during the
process. The evidence of neutron emission
during energy production in Ni-H systems
has been reported by Battaglia, A. et al., [17].
In order to calculate the number of
Hydrogen atoms/m
3
inside the Nickel
powder we will calculate the density of the
Hydrogen. According to Focardis
experiments, the pressure of the Hydrogen is
at temperature
. Thus, according to the well-kwon
Equation of State
2 3
/ 10 166 . 5 051 . 0 m N atm P = =
K T 400 =
ZRT PM
0
= , we get
( )( )
( )( )( )
3 3
1 1
1 3 2 3
/ 10 1 . 3
400 . . 314 . 8 1 ~
. 10 2 / 10 166 . 5
m kg
K K mol joule
mol kg m N
H

=
=

=
Thus, the number of Hydrogen atoms/m
3
inside
the Nickel powder is

3 26
2 0
/ 10 01 . 3 m atoms A N n
H H H H
= =
Then, the number of H atoms inside the
Nickel powder is given by


2 24
10 3 . 8
H H f H H H
S n V n =

where nm
Ni Ni H
1 = ;
Ni
is the
diameter of Ni atom; is the average
molecular separation in the Ni. Then, we get
. Thus,
the total energy realized in the p-p fusions is
Ni

atoms S n V n
H f H H H
18
10 4 . 6 =

( )
( )
Kwh J
eV MeV
MeV
V n
E
H H
05 . 0 10 1 . 2
10 3 . 1 42 . 0
2
10 4 . 6
42 . 0
2
5
24
18

=

=
= =

This energy correspond to a power of
W h Kwh 50 05 . 0 = , which is the same value
detected in the Focardis experiments.
This explains the anomalous heat
production in Ni-H Systems detected in the
Focardis experiments.
Since the 7.83 Hz electromagnetic
field (Schumann resonances) does not
disappear when the device is switched off,
the energy conversion can remain running
for long period after it is switched off
because, when the device is switched off, the
value of the electrical conductivity of the Ni-
H system, which was approximately equal to
Ni
, slowly decreases, tending to
H
, which
is much smaller than 1. When the electrical
conductivity becomes smaller than the
value of becomes approximately equal to
1. Consequently,
r
n
mod
becomes equal to
m f c
7
10 8 . 3 = and, according to Eq.(17),
the result is 1 .
This explain why in the Focardis
experiment the device remained running for
twenty four days after being switched off.
It is evident that the discovery of this
energy conversion device is highly relevant.
However, this system is not an efficient
energy source if compared to the
Gravitational Motor [18], which can provide
7
219KW/m
3
while the Ni-H system only
20Kw/m
3
(by increasing from 5cm up to
100cm). Furthermore, the Gravitational
Motor converts gravitational energy into
rotational mechanical energy directly from
the gravitational field, while the Ni-H system
needs to produce vapor in order to convert
the energy into rotational mechanical energy.

3. Transforming a Ni-H system into a
Hydrogen Bomb.

It is easy to see that a Ni-H System can
be transformed into a Hydrogen bomb,
simply increasing the volume of the Ni-H
cylinder and substituting the Hydrogen by a
liquid deuterium LD (12.5 MeV of energy is
produced at each fusion of two deuterium
nuclei

). For example, if =0.27m, =2

m, and, if a liquid deuterium
( [
3
. 8 . 67

= m kg
H
19]) is injected into the Ni
powder, then the total energy realized in the
fusions becomes

( )
( )
kilotons J eV
MeV
MeV
V n
E
H
H
H H
20 10 2 . 8 10 2 . 5
2 5 . 12
2
10 4 . 8
5 . 12
2
13 2 31
2 24

=
= =


( )


The Hiroshimas atomic bomb had 20
kilotons.
It is important to note that this bomb
type is much easier to build than the
conventional nuclear bombs. Basically, these
bombs are made of Nickel powder (99%),
liquid deuterium-tritium mixture and
Mumetal. These materials can be easily
obtained. Due to the simplicity of its
construction these bombs can be built at the

The d +d fusion reaction has two branches that occur with

nearly equal probability: (T +p +4.03MeV and
3
He +n +
3.27MeV ). Then, a deuteron d is produced by the fusion of
the proton p (produced in the first branch) with the neutron
(produced in the second branch). Next, occurs the fusion of
this deuteron with the tritium T produced in the first branch,
i.e., (d +T +n +17.6 MeV). Thus, we count He
3
2
the d +
d fusion energy as E
fus
=(4.03+17.6+3.27)/2 =12.5 MeV.


very place of the target (For example,
inside a house or apartment at the target
city.). This means that, in the most of cases
missiles are not necessary to launch them. In
addition, they cannot be easily detected
during their building because the necessary
materials are trivial, and there is no
radioactive material.






































8
References

[1] Fleischmann M., Hawkins, M. and Pons S., (1989) J .
Electroanal. Chem., 261, 301.

[2] Focardi, S., Habel, R. and Piantelli, F., (1994) Nuovo
Cimento A, 107, 163.

[3] Cerron-Zeballos et al., (1996) Nuovo Cimento A, 109, 1645.

[4] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of the
Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific J ournal
of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-232.

[5] Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo, McGraw-
Hill, p. 270.

[6] Schumann W. O. (1952). "ber die strahlungslosen
Eigenschwingungen einer leitenden Kugel, die von
einer Luftschicht und einer Ionosphrenhlle
umgebenist". Zeitschrift und Naturfirschung 7a: 149154

[7] Volland, H. (1995), Handbook of Atmospheric
Electrodynamics, CRC Press, vol.I, Chapter11.

[8] Lin Li and Chung D.,(1991) Composites, 22, 3, p.212.

[9] Gktrk, H., et al., (1993) J . App. Polymer Science, 50,
p.1900.

[10] Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968) Physics, J . Willey &
Sons, Portuguese Version, Ed. USP, p.1124.

[11] Neikov, O.D, et al., (2009) Handbook of Non-Ferrous
Metal Powders: Technologies and Applications, Elsevier
Ltd., p.374.

[12]Selembo, P. A, et al., (2010) Hydrogen production with
nickel powder cathode catalysts in microbial electrolysis cells,
International J ournal of Hydrogen Energy, 35, p. 431, p.433.

[13] Park T. S. et al., (1998) Astrophys. J . 507 443.

[14] Kong X and Ravndal, F. (1999) Nucl. Phys. A 656
421; Kong X and Ravndal, F. (1999) Phys. Lett. B 470, 1;
Kong X and Ravndal (2001) F. Phys. Rev. C 64 , 044002.

[15] Butler. M. and Chen, J . W., (2001) Phys. Lett. B 520 , 87.

[16] Park T. S. et al., (2003) Phys. Rev. C 67 055206
(nucl-th/0208055); Park T. S. et al., nucl-th/0106025
and nucl-th/0107012.

[17] Battaglia, A. et al., (1999) NuovoCimento A, 112, 921.

[18] De Aquino, F. (2010) Gravity Control by means of
Electromagnetic Field through Gas at Ultra-Low
Pressure, Pacific J ournal of Science and Technology,
11(2) November 2010, pp. 178-247, Physics /0701091.

[19] Rossini, F.D. (1968) IPTS-1968, Butterworths, London.




Engineering the Ni-H Bomb

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2012 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.

The anomalous heat production detected in Ni-H systems was recently explained based on the fact that
electromagnetic fields of extremely-low frequencies (ELF) can increase the intensities of gravitational forces
and overcome the intensity of the electrostatic repulsion forces, producing nuclear fusion reactions. This
effect can provide a consistent and coherent explanation for anomalous heat production detected in Ni-H
Systems, and shows that a Ni-H System can be easily transformed into a Hydrogen bomb. Here, a Ni-H bomb
of 20 kilotons is engineered.

Key words: Modified theories of gravity, Nuclear Fusion, Fusion Reactors.
PACS: 04.50.Kd , 89.30.J j , 28.52.-s.

1. Introduction

Recently, a large anomalous production
of heat in a nickel rod filled with hydrogen
has been reported by Focardi et al., [1]. This
phenomenon was posteriorly confirmed by
Cerron-Zeballos et al., [2].
Nuclear fusion can be produced by
increasing the gravitational forces in order
to overcome the electrostatic repulsion
forces between the nuclei. This process
became feasible after the Quantization of
Gravity [3], with the discovery that the
gravitational mass m
g
can be made negative
and strongly intensified by means of
electromagnetic fields of extremely-low
frequencies. This effect can provide a
consistent and coherent explanation for
anomalous heat production detected in Ni-H
Systems, and shows that a Ni-H System can
be easily transformed into a Hydrogen bomb
[4]. Here, a Ni-H bomb of 20 kilotons is
engineered.

2. Theory

Consider the Ni-H system showed in
Fig. 1. In a previous paper [4] it was showed
that, if the air inside the Nickel powder is
evacuated by means of a vacuum pump
(down to at
temperature ) and after Hydrogen
is injected into the Nickel powder, then, the
number of Hydrogen atoms/m
2 3
/ 10 166 . 5 051 . 0 m N atm P = =
K T 400 =
3
inside the Nickel
powder is

3 29
2 0
/ 10 94 . 1 m atoms A N n
H H H H
= =





where
H
is the Hydrogen density;
is the
Avogadros number and A is the molar mass.
kmole molecules N / 10 02 . 6
26
0
=
Then, the number of atoms inside the Nickel
powder is given by


2 24
10 3 . 8
H H f H H H
S n V n =

where ; ;
( )


S S
Ni f
3
10 4
( )
3
. 8800

= m kg
Ni

4
2

= S and nm
Ni Ni H
1 = ;
Ni
is
the diameter of Ni atom; is the average
molecular separation in the Ni.
Ni

Fig.1 Ni-H system. Note that, on Earth, the system
is subjected to a 7.83 Hz electromagnetic field. This
field is what naturally exists inside the spherical
resonant cavity formed by the Earths surface and the
inner edge of the ionosphere. (Schumann resonance).

Nickel powder
+
Hydrogen

Metal tube

2
Thus, the total energy realized in the protons
fusions is
*

( )
Joules eV
MeV
V n
E
H H
H H H


2 11 2 30
2 24
10 7 . 2 10 7 . 1
1 42 . 0
2
10 3 . 8
2

= = ( )
It is easy to see that a Ni-H System can
be transformed into a Hydrogen bomb,
simply increasing the volume of the Ni-H
cylinder and substituting the Hydrogen by a
liquid deuterium LD (12.5 MeV of energy is
produced at each fusion of two deuterium
nuclei

). For example, if =0.27m, =2

m (See Fig.2), and, if a liquid deuterium
( [
3
. 8 . 67

= m kg
H
5]) is injected into the Ni
powder, then the total energy realized in the
fusions becomes

( )
kilotons J eV
MeV E
H
H
20 10 3 . 8 10 2 . 5
2 5 . 12
2
10 4 . 8
13 2 31
2 24

=


( )

The Hiroshimas atomic bomb had 20
kilotons.












Fig.2 The core of the Ni-H bomb of 20
kilotons.
Nickel powder
+
LD
=0.27 m
Metal tube
=2 m

It is important to note that this bomb
type is much easier to build than the

*
0.42MeV are realized at each fusion of two Hydrogen
nuclei.

The d +d fusion reaction has two branches that occur with

nearly equal probability: (T +p +4.03MeV and
3
He +n +
3.27MeV ). Then, a deuteron d is produced by the fusion of
the proton p (produced in the first branch) with the neutron
(produced in the second branch). Next, occurs the fusion of
this deuteron with the tritium T produced in the first branch,
i.e., (d +T +n +17.6 MeV). Thus, we count He
3
2
the d +
d fusion energy as E
fus
=(4.03+17.6+3.27)/2 =12.5 MeV.


conventional nuclear bombs. Basically,
these bombs are made of Nickel powder
(99%), liquid deuterium and Mumetal. These
materials can be easily obtained. Due to the
simplicity of its construction, these bombs
can be built at the very location of the target
(For example, inside a house or apartment at
the target city.). This means that, in most of
cases missiles are not necessary to deliver
them, except for launching the Ni-H bomb at
the height of explosion (<1Km

) when
necessary.
Thus, the Ni-H bomb so far seems to be
the simplest atomic bomb ever to be built. It
can be made by every nation, in such a way
that, peace in the World will be reached in
the future due to the equilibrium of forces
among nations.
Figure 3 shows the Ni-H bomb. It is
enveloped by a Mumetal box in order to
avoid the action of the 7.83Hz
electromagnetic field that naturally exists
inside the spherical resonant cavity formed
by the Earths surface and the inner edge of
the ionosphere. (Schumann resonance [6, 7]).
When the mumetal shielding is exploded the
7.83Hz electromagnetic field acts on the core
of the Ni-H bomb and it explodes.





















Fig.3 The Ni-H bomb of 20 kilotons.
Mumetal
Shielding
LD

Nickel
powder
Explosives
in order to
explode the
Mumetal
shielding
Mumetal boxes
Antenna
Detonator
Control

Hiroshima 600m above. Nagasaki 500m above.

3

References


[1] Focardi, S., Habel, R. and Piantelli, F., (1994) Nuovo
Cimento A, 107, 163.

[2] Cerron-Zeballos et al., (1996) Nuovo Cimento A, 109, 1645.

[3] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of the
Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific J ournal
of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-232.

[4] De Aquino, F. (2012), A Possible Explanation for
Anomalous Heat Production in Ni-H Systems,
http://vixra.org/pdf/1202.0039v3.pdf

[5] Rossini, F.D. (1968) IPTS-1968, Butterworths, London.

[6] Schumann W. O. (1952). "ber die strahlungslosen
Eigenschwingungen einer leitenden Kugel, die von
einer Luftschicht und einer Ionosphrenhlle
umgebenist". Zeitschrift und Naturfirschung 7a: 149154

[7] Volland, H. (1995), Handbook of Atmospheric
Electrodynamics, CRC Press, vol.I, Chapter11.




Gravitational Shockwave Weapons
Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2012 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.

Detonation velocities, greater than that generated by high explosives (~10
4
m/s), can be achieved by using the
gravitational technology recently discovered. This possibility leads to the conception of powerful shockwave
weapons. Here, we show the design of a portable gravitational shockwave weapon, which can produce
detonation velocities greater than 10
5
m/s, and detonation pressures greater than 10
10
N/m
2
.

Key words: Modified theories of gravity, Detonation waves, Shockwaves, Nozzle flow.
PACS: 04.50.Kd, 47.40.Rs, 47.40.-x, 47.60.Kz.

1. Introduction

The most important single property of
an explosive is the detonation velocity. It is
the speed at which the detonation wave
travels through the explosive. Typical
detonation velocities in solid explosives often
range beyond 3,000 m/s to 10,300 m/s [1].
At the front of the detonation zone, an
energy pulse or shockwave is generated
and transmitted to the adjacent region.
The shockwave travels outward as a
compression wave, moving at or near
detonation velocity. When the intensity of the
shockwave exceeds the compression strength
of the materials they are destroyed. If the
mass of the body is too large the wave energy
is simply absorbed by the body [2].
The pressure produced in the explosion
zone is called Detonation Pressure. It
expresses the intensity of the generated
shockwave. A high detonation pressure is
necessary when blasting hard, dense bodies.
Detonation pressures of high explosives are in
the range from 10
6
N/m
2
to over 10
7
N/m
2
[3].
Here, we show the design of a portable
shockwave weapon, which uses the
Gravitational Shielding Effect (BR Patent
Number: PI0805046-5, J uly 31, 2008) in
order to produce detonations velocities
greater than 100,000m/s, and detonation
pressures greater than 10
10
N/m
2
. It is
important to remember that an aluminum-
nitrate truck bomb has a relatively low
detonation velocity of 3,500 m/s (sound
speed is 343.2m/s)
*
. High explosives such as


*
When a shockwave is created by high explosives it
will always travel at high supersonic velocity from its
point of origin.




TNT has a detonation velocity of 6,900m/s;
Military explosives used to destroy strong
concrete and steel structures have a
detonation velocity of 7,000 to 8,000 m/s [3].

2. Theory

The contemporary greatest challenge
of the Theoretical Physics was to prove that,
Gravity is a quantum phenomenon. The
quantization of gravity showed that the
gravitational mass m
g
and inertial mass m
i

are correlated by means of the following
factor [4]:

( ) 1 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ = =
c m
p
m
m
i i
g

where is the rest inertial mass of the
particle and
0 i
m
p is the variation in the
particles kinetic momentum; is the speed
of light.
c
When p is produced by the
absorption of a photon with wavelength , it
is expressed by h p = . In this case, Eq.
(1) becomes

( ) 2 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
0

+ =

+ =

c m h
m
m
i
i
g

2
where c m h
i0 0
= is the De Broglie
wavelength for the particle with rest inertial
mass .
0 i
m
It was shown that there is an
additional effect - Gravitational Shielding
effect - produced by a substance whose
gravitational mass was reduced or made
negative [5]. The effect extends beyond
substance (gravitational shielding) , up to a
certain distance from it (along the central
axis of gravitational shielding). This effect
shows that in this region the gravity
acceleration, , is reduced at the same
proportion, i.e.,
1
g
g g
1
1
= where
0
1
i g
m m = and is the gravity
acceleration before the gravitational
shielding). Consequently, after a second
gravitational shielding, the gravity will be
given by
g
g g g
2 1 1 2
2
= = , where
2
is
the value of the ratio
0 i g
m m for the second
gravitational shielding. In a generalized way,
we can write that after the nth gravitational
shielding the gravity, , will be given by
n
g

( ) 3 ...
3 2 1
g g
n
n
=

This possibility shows that, by means
of a battery of gravitational shieldings, we
can make particles acquire enormous
accelerations. In practice, this can lead to the
conception of powerful particles accelerators,
kinetic weapons or weapons of shockwaves.
From Electrodynamics we know that
when an electromagnetic wave with
frequency and velocity incides on a
material with relative permittivity
f c
r
,
relative magnetic permeability
r
and
electrical conductivity , its velocity is
reduced to
r
n c v = where is the index of
refraction of the material, given by [
r
n
6]

( ) ( ) 4 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n

If >> , f 2 = , Eq. (4) reduces to

( ) 5
4
0
f
n
r
r

=
Thus, the wavelength of the incident
radiation (See Fig. 1) becomes

( ) 6
4
mod

f n n
f c
f
v
r r
= = = =










Fig. 1 Modified Electromagnetic Wave. The
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave can be
strongly reduced, but its frequency remains the same.
v =c v =c/n
r
=c/f

mod
=v/f =c/n
r
f
n
r

If a lamina with thickness equal to
contains molecules/m n
3
,

then the number of
molecules per area unit is n . Thus, if the
electromagnetic radiation with frequency
incides on an area of the lamina it
reaches
f S
nS molecules. If it incides on the
total area of the lamina, , then the total
number of molecules reached by the
radiation is
f
S

f
nS N = . The number of
molecules per unit of volume, , is given by n
( ) 7
0
A
N
n

=
where is
the Avogadros number;
kmole molecules N / 10 02 . 6
26
0
=
is the matter
density of the lamina (in kg/m
3
) and A is the
molar mass.
When an electromagnetic wave incides
on the lamina, it strikes on front
molecules, where
f
N
( )
m f f
S n N ,
m
is the
diameter of the molecule. Thus, the
electromagnetic wave incides effectively on an
area
m f
S N S= , where
2
4
1
m m
S = is the cross
section area of one molecule. After these
collisions, it carries out with the
other molecules (See Fig.2).
collisions
n

3









Fig. 2 Collisions inside the lamina.
molecule
S
m
Wave


Thus, the total number of collisions in the
volume S is

( )
( ) 8

S n
S n S n S n n N N
m
m m m collisions f collisions
=
= + = + =


The power density, , of the radiation on the
lamina can be expressed by
D

( ) 9
m f
S N
P
S
P
D = =

We can express the total mean number
of collisions in each molecule, , by means
of the following equation
1
n

( ) 10
1
N
N n
n
collisions photons total
=

Since in each collision a momentum h is
transferred to the molecule, then the total
momentum transferred to the lamina will be
( ) h N n p
1
= . Therefore, in accordance
with Eq. (1), we can write that

( )
( )
( )
( ) 11 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
1
0

+ =
=

+ =

collisions photons total

l i
l g
N n
N n
m
m

Since Eq. (8) gives S n N
collisions
= , we get
( ) ( ) 12
2
S n
hf
P
N n
collisions photons total

=

Substitution of Eq. (12) into Eq. (11) yields

( )
( )
( ) ( ) 13 1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

S n
hf
P
m
m
l i
l g

Substitution of given by Eq. (9) into Eq.
(13) gives
P

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 14 1
1
1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

c m
S n
f
D S N
m
m
l i
m f
l i
l g

Substitution of ( )
m f f
S n N and
m f
S N S =
into Eq. (14) results

( )
( )
( )
( ) 15 1
1
1 2 1
2
2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

cf m
D S S n
m
m
l i
m m f
l i
l g

where
( ) ( ) ( ) l l l i
V m =
0
.
Now, considering that the lamina is
inside a ELF electromagnetic field with
E andB , then we can write that [7]

( )
( ) 16
2
0
2
c
E n
D
l r

=

Substitution of Eq. (16) into Eq. (15) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 17 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
2 2
0 0
2 2 2 2 3
0

+ =

f c m
E S S n n
m
m
l i
m m
f
l r
l i
l g

Now assuming that the lamina is a
cylindrical air lamina (diameter = ;
thickness = ) where
( )
3 25
0
/ 10 6 . 2 m molecules A N n
l
= = ;
m
m
10
10 55 . 1

= ;
2 20 2
10 88 . 1 4 m S
m m

= = ,
then, Eq. (17) reduces to

4
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 18 1 10 6 6 1 2 1
2
2
2
0
2
5
0

+ =

E
f m
S n
m
m
l i
f
l r
l i
l g
.
An atomized water spray is created by
forcing the water through an orifice. The
energy required to overcome the pressure
drop is supplied by the spraying pressure at
each detonation. Spraying pressure depends
on feed characteristics and desired particle
size. If atomizing water is injected into the air
lamina, then the area to be considered is
the surface area of the atomizing water,
which can be obtained by multiplying the
specific surface area(SSA) of the atomizing
water (which is given by
f
S
d w w
r V A SSA 3 = = ) by the total mass of the
atomizing water (
( ) d
droplets water
w w i
N V m =
0
).
Assuming that the atomizing water is
composed of monodisperse particles with
m 10 radius( ) m r
d
5
10 1

= , and that the
atomizing water has [
3 8
/ 10 m droplets N
p
8]
then we obtain kg m r SSA
d w
2
300 3 = = and
. Thus, we
get
( )
kg N V m
d
droplets water
w w i
5
0
10

=

( )
( )
( ) 18 10
2 3
0
m m SSA S
w i f

=

Substitution of and
2 3
10 m S
f

( )


S S m
air l i
2 . 1
0
= = into Eq. (18)
gives

( )
( )
( )
( ) 19 1 1 2 1
2 4 2
4 2
0

+ =

f S
E n
m
m
l r
l i
l g
~
The injection of atomized water increases the
electrical conductivity of the mean, making it
greater than the conductivity of water
( m S / 005 . 0 >>

( ) 20
4
0
mod



f
= =

where is the frequency of the ELF
electromagnetic field.
f
Substitution of Eq. (20) into Eq. (19)
yields

( )
( )
( )
( ) 21 1 10 1 2 1
3 2
4 2
7
0

+ = =

f S
E n
m
m
l r
l i
l g

~
where
( )
f n
r
l r
0
2
4 =
Note that t E E
m
sin = .The average value
for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E because E varies
sinusoidaly ( is the maximum value
for
m
E
E ). On the other hand, 2
m rms
E E = .
Consequently we can change
4
E by ,
and the equation above can be rewritten as
follows
4
rms
E

( )
( )
( )
( ) 22 1 10 1 2 1
3 2
4
7
0

+ = =

f S
E n
m
m
rms l r
l i
l g

~

Now consider the weapon showed in Fig. 3
( ) mm 7 . 12 = . When an ELF
electromagnetic field with frequency
Hz f 10 = is activated, an electric field
passes through the 7 cylindrical air laminas.
Then, according to Eq. (22) the value of
rms
E

(for m S / 005 . 0 >> ) at each lamina is
( ) 23 1 10 1 2 1
4 3

+ >>

rms
E ~

For example, if we
get
m V E
rms
/ .93 125

) . Under these conditions,
the value of , given by Eq. (6), becomes
( ) 24 10
3
>>

Therefore, according to Eq. (3) the
gravitational acceleration produced by the
gravitational mass , just after kg M
g
23 . 4 =
5
the 7
th
cylindrical air lamina ( ) ,
will be given by
mm r 150
7
=

( ) 25 / 10
2 13
2
7
7 7
7
s m
r
GM
g g
g
+ >> = =

This is the acceleration acquired by the air
molecules that are just after the 7
th

cylindrical air lamina. Obviously, this
produces enormous pressure in the air after
the 7
th
cylindrical air lamina, in a similar way
that pressure produced by a detonation. The
detonation velocity after the 7
th
cylindrical
air lamina is

( ) ( ) 26 / 10 2
5
7
s m r g v
d
>> =

Consequently, the detonation pressure is

( ) 27 / 10 2
2 10 2
m N v p
d air
>> =

These values show how powerful can be the
gravitational shockwaves weapons. The
maxima resistance of the most resistant steels
is of the order of 10
11
N/m
2
(Graphene
~10
12
N/m
2
). Since the gravitational
shockwave weapons can be designed to
produce detonation pressures of these
magnitudes, we can conclude that it can
destroy anything.






































































6








































Fig. 3 Portable Weapon of Gravitational Shockwaves. Note that there are two sets of
Gravitational Shieldings (GS): the set A (accelerator) with 7 GS and the set D (decelerator) with 12
GS. The objective of the set D, with 12 GCC, is to reduce strongly the value of theexternal gravity
along the axis of the tube (in the opposite direction of the acceleration
7
g ). In this case, the value
of the external gravity,
ext
g , is reduced by the factor
ext d
g
12
, where
2
10

=
d
. For example, if the
opening of the tube ( ) of the weapon is positioned on the Earth surface then
2
/ 81 . 9 s m g
ext
= is
reduced to
ext d
g
12
and, after in the set A, it is increased by
7
. Without the set D, the back of the
weapon can explode.

1 2 12 7

Battery

ELF
Oscillator
Water


Filter
Nozzle
Ruby-orifice
(0.38 mm diameter)
Tungsten Carbide

WC
=15,800 kg.m
-3
M
g
=4.23 kg
40 mm radius
M
g
E
Capacitor plates

r
7
=150 mm
HV Transformer
Spherical
detonation
2
1
D A
g
7

7


References

[1] Cooper, P. W.(1996) Explosives Engineering, New
York: Wiley-VCH.

[2] Lee, J .H.(1984)"Dynamic parameters of gaseous
detonations" ,Ann. Rev. Fluid Mech., 16

[3] Fickett, W. and Davis, W.C. (1979)"Detonation",
University of California Press, Berkeley.

[4] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of the
Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific J ournal
of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-232.

[5] De Aquino, F. (2010) Gravity Control by means of
Electromagnetic Field through Gas at Ultra-Low
Pressure, Pacific J ournal of Science and Technology,
11(2) November 2010, pp.178-247, Physics/0701091.

[6] Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo, McGraw-
Hill, p. 270.

[7] Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968) Physics, J. Willey &
Sons, Portuguese Version, Ed. USP, p.1124.

[8] Yashiro, H., et al., (2010) Measurement of Number
Density of Water Droplets in Aerosol by Laser-Induced
Breakdown, Applied Physics Express 3, 036601.































































































A System to convert Gravitational Energy
directly into Electrical Energy

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2012 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.

We show that it is possible to produce strong gravitational accelerations on the free electrons of a
conductor in order to obtain electrical current. This allows the conversion of gravitational energy directly
into electrical energy. Here, we propose a system that can produce several tens of kilowatts of electrical
energy converted from the gravitational energy.

Key words: Modified theories of gravity, Electric fields effects on material flows, Electron tubes, Electrical instruments.
PACS: 04.50.Kd, 83.60.Np , 84.47.+w, 07.50.-e.


1. Introduction

In a previous paper [1], we have
proposed a system to convert gravitational
energy into rotational kinetic energy
(Gravitational Motor), which can be
converted into electrical energy by means of
a conventional electrical generator. Now, we
propose a novel system to convert
gravitational energy directly into electrical
energy.
It is known that, in some materials,
called conductors, the free electrons are so
loosely held by the atom and so close to the
neighboring atoms that they tend to drift
randomly from one atom to its neighboring
atoms. This means that the electrons move in
all directions by the same amount. However,
if some outside force acts upon the free
electrons their movement becomes not
random, and they move from atom to atom at
the same direction of the applied force. This
flow of electrons (their electric charge)
through the conductor produces the electrical
current, which is defined as a flow of electric
charge through a medium [2]. This charge is
typically carried by moving electrons in a
conductor, but it can also be carried by ions
in an electrolyte, or by both ions and
electrons in a plasma [3].
Thus, the electrical current arises in a
conductor when an outside force acts upon
the free electrons. This force is called, in a
generic way, of electromotive force (EMF).
Usually, it is of electrical nature ( ) . eE F =



Here, it is shown that the electrical flow can
also be achieved by means of gravitational
forces ( ) g m F
e
= . The Gravitational
Shielding Effect (BR Patent Number:
PI0805046-5, July 31, 2008 [4]), shows that
a battery of Gravitational Shieldings can
strongly intensify the gravitational
acceleration in any direction and, in this way,
it is possible to produce strong gravitational
accelerations on the free electrons of a
conductor in order to obtain electrical
current.

2. Theory

From the quantization of gravity it
follows that the gravitational mass m
g
and
the inertial mass m
i
are correlated by means
of the following factor [1]:
( ) 1 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ = =
c m
p
m
m
i i
g

where is the rest inertial mass of the

particle and
0 i
m
p is the variation in the
particles kinetic momentum; is the speed
of light.
c
When p is produced by the
absorption of a photon with wavelength , it
is expressed by h p = . In this case, Eq.
(1) becomes
2
( ) 2 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
0

+ =

+ =

c m h
m
m
i
i
g
where c m h
i0 0
= is the De Broglie
wavelength for the particle with rest inertial
mass .
0 i
m
It has been shown that there is an
additional effect - Gravitational Shielding
effect - produced by a substance whose
gravitational mass was reduced or made
negative [5]. The effect extends beyond
substance (gravitational shielding) , up to a
certain distance from it (along the central
axis of gravitational shielding). This effect
shows that in this region the gravity
acceleration, , is reduced at the same
proportion, i.e.,
1
g
g g
1
1
= where
0
1
i g
m m = and is the gravity
acceleration before the gravitational
shielding). Consequently, after a second
gravitational shielding, the gravity will be
given by
g
g g g
2 1 1 2
2
= = , where
2
is
the value of the ratio
0 i g
m m for the second
gravitational shielding. In a generalized way,
we can write that after the nth gravitational
shielding the gravity, , will be given by
n
g

( ) 3 ...
3 2 1
g g
n
n
=

This possibility shows that, by means
of a battery of gravitational shieldings, we
can make particles acquire enormous
accelerations. In practice, this can lead to the
conception of powerful particles accelerators,
kinetic weapons or weapons of shockwaves.
From Electrodynamics we know that
when an electromagnetic wave with
frequency and velocity incides on a
material with relative permittivity
f c
r
,
relative magnetic permeability
r
and
electrical conductivity , its velocity is
reduced to
r
n c v = where is the index of
refraction of the material, given by [
r
n
6]
( ) ( ) 4 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n
If >> , f 2 = , Eq. (4) reduces to
( ) 5
4
0
f
n
r
r

=
Thus, the wavelength of the incident
radiation (See Fig. 1) becomes
( ) 6
4
mod

f n n
f c
f
v
r r
= = = =










Fig. 1 Modified Electromagnetic Wave. The
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave can be
strongly reduced, but its frequency remains the same.
v = c v = c/n
r
= c/f

mod
= v/f = c/n
r
f
n
r

If a lamina with thickness equal to
contains atoms/m n
3
,

then the number of
atoms per area unit is n . Thus, if the
electromagnetic radiation with frequency
incides on an area of the lamina it
reaches
f S
nS atoms. If it incides on the total
area of the lamina, , then the total number
of atoms reached by the radiation is
f
S

f
nS N = . The number of atoms per unit of
volume, , is given by n

( ) 7
0
A
N
n

=
where is the
Avogadros number;
kmole atoms N / 10 02 . 6
26
0
=
is the matter density
of the lamina (in kg/m
3
) and A is the molar
mass(kg/kmole).
When an electromagnetic wave incides
on the lamina, it strikes front atoms,
where
f
N
( )
m f f
S n N ,
m
is the diameter of
the atom. Thus, the electromagnetic wave
incides effectively on an area , where
m f
S N S=
2
4
1
m m
S = is the cross section area of one atom.
3
After these collisions, it carries out
with the other atoms (See Fig.2).
collisions
n










Fig. 2 Collisions inside the lamina.
atom
S
m
Wave


Thus, the total number of collisions in the
volume S is

( )
( ) 8

S n
S n S n S n n N N
l
m m l m l collisions f collisions
=
= + = + =

The power density, , of the radiation on the
lamina can be expressed by
D

( ) 9
m f
S N
P
S
P
D = =

We can express the total mean number
of collisions in each atom, , by means of
the following equation
1
n

( ) 10
1
N
N n
n
collisions photons total
=

Since in each collision a momentum h is
transferred to the atom, then the total
momentum transferred to the lamina will be
( ) h N n p
1
= . Therefore, in accordance
with Eq. (1), we can write that

( )
( )
( )
( ) 11 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
1
0

+ =
=

+ =

collisions photons total

l i
l g
N n
N n
m
m

Since Eq. (8) gives S n N
l collisions
= , we get
( ) (12
2
S n
hf
P
N n
l collisions photons total

= )

Substitution of Eq. (12) into Eq. (11) yields

( )
( )
( ) ( ) 13 1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

S n
hf
P
m
m
l
l i
l g

Substitution of P given by Eq. (9) into Eq.
(13) gives

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 14 1
1
1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

c m
S n
f
D S N
m
m
l i
l
m f
l i
l g

Substitution of ( )
m f l f
S n N and
m f
S N S =
into Eq. (14) results

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 15 1
1
1 2 1
2
2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

cf m
D S S n
m
m
l i
m m f l
l i
l g

where
( ) ( ) ( ) l l l i
V m =
0
.
Now, considering that the lamina is
inside an ELF electromagnetic field with
E and B , then we can write that [7]

( )
( ) 16
2
0
2
c
E n
D
l r

=

Substitution of Eq. (16) into Eq. (15) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 17 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
2 2
0 0
2 2 2 2 3
0

+ =


f c m
E S S n n
m
m
l i
m m f l l r
l i
l g

In the case in which the area is just the
area of the cross-section of the lamina
f
S
( )

S ,
we obtain from Eq. (17), considering that
( ) ( )


S m
l l i
=
0
, the following expression

4
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 18 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
2 2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
m m l l r
l i
l g
According to Eq. (6) we have
( )
( ) 19
f n
c
f
v
l r
= = =
mod

Substitution of Eq. (19) into Eq. (18) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 20 1
4
1 2 1
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4
0

+ =
f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
m m
l l r
l i
l g

Note that t E E
m
sin = .The average value
for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E because E varies
sinusoidaly ( is the maximum value
for
m
E
E ). On the other hand, 2
m rms
E E = .
Consequently we can change
4
E by ,
and the equation above can be rewritten as
follows
4
rms
E
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 21 1
4
1 2 1
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4
0

+ =
= =
f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
rms m m
l l r
l i
l g

Now consider the system shown in

Fig.3. It was designed to convert
Gravitational Energy directly into Electrical
Energy. Thus, we can say that it is a
Gravitational EMF Source.
Inside the system there is a dielectric
tube ( 1
r
) with the following characteristics:
mm 8 = (diameter),
2 5 2
10 03 . 5 4 m S

= =

.
Inside the tube there is a Lead sphere
( ) with 4mm radius and
mass
3
/ 11340 m Kg
s
=
kg M
gs
3
10 04 . 3

= . The tube is filled
with air at ambient temperature and 1atm.
Thus, inside the tube, the air density is
( ) 22 . 2 . 1
3
= m kg
air

The number of atoms of air (Nitrogen) per

unit of volume, , according to Eq.(7), is
given by
air
n

( ) 23 / 10 16 . 5
3 25 0
m atoms
A
N
n
N
air
air
= =

The parallel metallic plates (p), shown
in Fig.3 are subjected to different drop
voltages. The two sets of plates (D), placed
on the extremes of the tube, are subjected to
( )
V V
rms D
72 134. = at Hz f 60 = , while the
central set of plates (A) is subjected to
( )
V V
rms A
98 273. = at Hz f 60 = . Since
mm d 14 = , then the intensity of the electric
field, which passes through the 36 cylindrical
air laminas (each one with 5mm thickness)
of the two sets (D), is
( ) ( )
m V d V E
rms D rms D
/ .
3
10 623 9 = =
and the intensity of the electric field, which
passes through the 19 cylindrical air laminas
of the central set (A), is given by
( ) ( )
m V d V E
rms A rms A
/ .
4
10 957 1 = =
Note that the metallic rings (5mm
thickness) are positioned in such way to
block the electric field out of the cylindrical
air laminas. The objective is to turn each one
of these laminas into a Gravity Control Cells
(GCC) [5]. Thus, the system shown in Fig. 3
has 3 sets of GCC. Two with 18 GCC each,
and one with 19 GCC. The two sets with 18
GCC each are positioned at the extremes of
the tube (D). They work as gravitational
decelerator while the other set with 19 GCC
(A) works as a gravitational accelerator,
intensifying the gravity acceleration
produced by the mass of the Lead
sphere. According to Eq. (3), this gravity,
after the GCC becomes
gs
M
th
19
2
0
19
19
r GM g
gs
= ,
where
( ) ( ) l i l g
m m = given by Eq. (21) and
mm r 9
0
= is the distance between the center
of the Lead sphere and the surface of the first
GCC of the set (A).
The objective of the sets (D), with 18
GCC each, is to reduce strongly the value of
the external gravity along the axis of the
tube. In this case, the value of the external
gravity, , is reduced by the factor ,
where
ext
g
ext d
g
18

2
10

=
d
. For example, if the base
BS of the system is positioned on the Earth

5



















































Fig. 3 A Gravitational EMF Source (Developed from a process patented in July, 31 2008, PI0805046-5)
E
= 5 mm
Parallel plate
capacitor (p)
1
2
17
18
1
2
18
19
1
2
17
18
=8mm
d = 14 mm
M
g
Metallic ring
(5 mm thickness)
Electric field of
capacitor
Lead sphere
(8 mm diameter)
Iron rod
(8 mm diameter,
100 mm height)
F
e
+F
p
+F
n
= 0
F = 0
Dielectric tube

r
1
BS
A
D
D
E
D(rms)
E
A(rms)
Air
Air
Air
Air
Air
1 atm 300K

Air
r
0
=9mm
Air
Air
Air
134.72V
60Hz
273.98V
60Hz
Transformer
B
2.5m T
220V 60Hz
128.9 kW
Converter
60Hz / 1Hz
20V
1Hz
x
B
= 100 mm
5
80W
Inductor
1 turn (inner radius: r =5mm)
100 mm
+ r
Aluminum
i
s
= 58.6A, # 1 AWG
Cable
500AWG
2.2kV
60Hz
T
N
p
=100 turns
N
s
=10 turns
Nucleus

r
= 60
(iron cast)

Relay
Initialization
source ~
i = 4 A
# 14 AWG

6
surface, then is reduced
to and, after the set A, it is increased
by . Since the system is designed for
2
/ 81 . 9 s m g
ext
=
ext d
g
18

19

4138 . 6 = , then the gravity acceleration

on the sphere becomes
, this value is much
smaller than
2 20 18 19
/ 10 1 . 2 s m g
ext d

=
2 8 2
/ 10 27 . 1 s m r GM g
s gs sphere

= = .
The values of and
d
, according to
Eq. (21) are given by

( ) ( )
( )
( ) 24 1 10 44 1 1 2 1
1
4
1 2 1
4 16
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4

+ =
=

+ =

rms A
air
rms A
m m
air air r
E
f c
E S S n n
.

( ) ( )
( )
( ) 25 1 10 44 1 1 2 1
1
4
1 2 1
4 16
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4

+ =
=

+ =

rms D
air
rms D
m m
air air r
d
E
f c
E S S n n
.

where
( )
1 =
r r air r
n , since ( ) <<
*
;
, ,
3 25
/ 10 16 . 5 m atoms n
air
= m
m
10
10 55 . 1

=
2 20 2
10 88 . 1 4 m S
m m

= = and Hz f 60 = .
Since and
, we get
( )
m V E
rms A
/ .
4
10 957 1 =
( )
m V E
rms D
/ .
3
10 623 9 =
( ) 26 4138 . 6 =

and

( ) 27 10
2

d

Note that there is a uniform magnetic
field, B , through the Iron rod. Then, the
gravitational forces due to the gravitational
mass of the sphere ( )
gs
M acting on electrons

*
The electrical conductivity of air, inside the
dielectric tube, is equal to the electrical conductivity
of Earths atmosphere near the land, whose average
value is m S
air
/ 10 1
14
[8].
( )
e
F , protons ( )
p
F and neutrons ( )
p
F of
the Iron rod, are respectively expressed by
the following relations
( ) 28
2
0
7

= =
r
M
G m a m F
gs
e Be e ge e


( ) 29
2
0
7

= =
r
M
G m a m F
gs
p Bp p gp p


( ) 30
2
0
7

= =
r
M
G m a m F
gs
n Bn n gn n

The factors
B
are due to the electrons,
protons and neutrons are inside the magnetic
field B.
In order to make null the resultant of
these forces in the Iron (and also in the
sphere) we must have , i.e.,
n p e
F F F + =
( ) 31
Bn n Bp p Be e
m m m + =
It is important to note that the set with
19 GCC (A) cannot be turned on before the
magnetic field B is on. Because the
gravitational accelerations on the Iron rod
and Lead sphere will be enormous
( )
2 6 2
0
19
/ 10 4 . 5 s m r GM
gs
, and will
explode the device.
The force is the electromotive force
(EMF), which produces the electrical current.
Here, this force has gravitational nature. The
corresponding force of electrical nature
is
e
F
eE F
e
= . Thus, we can write that
( ) 32 eE a m
e ge
=
The electrons inside the Iron rod (See Fig. 3)
are subjected to the gravity acceleration
produced by the sphere, and increased by the
19 GCC in the region (A). The result is
( ) 33
2
0
19 19
r
M
G g a
gs
s e
= =
Comparing Eq. (32) with Eq.(33), we obtain
( ) 34
2
0
19
r
M
G
e
m
E
gs ge

=
The electron mobility,
e
, considering
various scattering mechanisms can be
obtained by solving the Boltzmann equation
7
in the relaxation time approximation. The
result is [9]
( ) 35
ge
e
m
e
=
where is the average relaxation time over
the electron energies and is the
gravitational mass of electron, which is the
effective mass of electron.
ge
m
Since can be expressed by
2
ne m
ge
= [10], then Eq. (35) can be
written as follows
( ) 36
ne
e

=
Thus, the drift velocity will be expressed by
( ) 37
2
0
19
r
M
G
e
m
ne
E v
gs ge
e d

= =
and the electrical current density expressed
by
( ) 38
2
0
19
r
M
G
e
m
v j
gs ge
iron d qe e

= =
where ne
qe
= , and
e Be ge
m m = .
Therefore, Eq. (38) reduces to
( ) 39
2
0
19
r
M
G
e
m
j
gs
Be
e
iron e

=
In order to calculate the expressions of
Be
,
Bp
and
Bn
we start from Eq. (17), for
the particular case of single electron in the region
subjected to the magnetic field B (Iron rod). In
this case, we must substitute by
( ) l r
n
( )
( )
2
1
0
4 f n
iron iron r riron
=
l
n ; by
3
3
4
1 1
e e
r V = ( is the electrons radius),
by
e
r
f
S
( )
e e e
V SSA ( is the specific surface
area for electrons in this case:
e
SSA
e e e e e e e e e
V r V A m A SSA
2
2
1
2
1
2 = = = ),
by ,
m
S
2
e e
r S = by
e m
r 2 = and
by . The result is
( ) l i
m
0
e
m
( ) 40 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 4 4 2 2
0
4 2 4 2

+ =

f c m
E n r
e
riron e
Be
Electrodynamics tells us that
( )
( )
rms iron r rms rms
B n c vB E = = , and Eq. (19)
gives ( ) f
iron iron
4
mod
= = . Substitution
of these expressions into Eq. (40) yields
( ) 41 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 2 2 2
0
4 4 2

+ =
f c m
B r
e
rms e
Be

Similarly, in the case of proton and neutron

we can write that
( ) 42 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 2 2 2
0
4 4 2

+ =
f c m
B r
p
rms p
Bp

( ) 43 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 2 2 2
0
4 4 2

+ =
f c m
B r
n
rms n
Bn

The radius of free electron is m r

e
14
10 87 . 6

=
(See Appendix A) and the radius of protons
inside the atoms (nuclei) is m r
p
15
10 2 . 1

= ,
p n
r r , then we obtain from Eqs. (41) (42)
and (43) the following expressions:
( ) 44 1 10 49 . 8 1 2 1
2
4
4

+ =
f
B
rms
Be

( ) 45 1 10 35 . 2 1 2 1
2
4
9

+ =

f
B
rms
Bp Bn

Then, from Eq. (31) it follows that
( ) 46 2
Bp p Be e
m m
Substitution of Eqs. (44) and (45) into Eq.
(46) gives
( ) 47 3 . 3666
1 10 35 . 2 1 2 1
1 10 49 . 8 1 2 1
2
4
9
2
4
4
=

f
B
f
B
rms
rms
For Hz f 1 = , we get
[ ] { }
[ ] { }
( ) 48 3 . 3666
1 10 35 . 2 1 2 1
1 10 49 . 8 1 2 1
4 7
4 6
=
+
+

rms
rms
B
B
whence we obtain
( ) 49 5 . 2 T m B
rms
=
Consequently, Eq. (44) and (45) yields
( ) 50 3 . 3666 =
Be

and
8
( ) 51 999 . 0
Bp Bn

In order to the forces and have
contrary direction (such as occurs in the
case, in which the nature of the electromotive
force is electrical) we must have
e
F
p
F
0 <
Be

and 0 >
Bp Bn
(See equations (28) (29)
and (30)), i.e.,
( ) 52 0 1 10 49 . 8 1 2 1
2
4
4
<

+
f
B
rms
and
( ) 53 0 1 10 35 . 2 1 2 1
2
4
9
>

+

f
B
rms
This means that we must have
( ) 54 86 . 151 06 . 0 f B f
rms
< <
In the case of Hz Hz f
6
10 1

= = the result is
( ) 55 151 . 0 10 5 . 6
5
T B T
rms
< <

Note the cylindrical format (1turn,
) of the inductor (Figs. 3 and 6). By
using only 1 turn it is possible to eliminate
the capacitive effect between the turns. This
is highly relevant in this case because the
extremely-low frequency
mm r 5 =
Hz f 1 = would
strongly increase the capacitive reactance
( ) associated to the inductor. When a
current passes through this inductor, the
value of
C
X
i
B inside the Iron rod is given by
B r
x i B
0
= where is
inductors length and
mm x
B
100 =
4000 =
r
(very pure
Iron). However, the effective permeability is
defined as
( )
( )
m r r eff r
N 1 1 + = , where is
the average demagnetizing factor [
m
N
11]. Since
the iron rod has 5mm diameter and 100mm
height, then we obtain the factor
20 5 / 100 = = mm mm which gives 02 . 0 =
m
N
(See table V[12]). Therefore, we obtain
( )
4 . 49 =
eff r
. Thus, for mT B
rms
5 . 2 = (See Eq.
(49)) ,i.e.,
( )
mT x i B
B eff r
5 . 2
0
= = , the value
of must be i A i 4 = . Then, the resistor in
Fig.3. must have = 5 4 20 A V . The
dissipated power is 80W.
Let us now calculate the current
density through the Iron rod (Fig. 3).
According to Eq. (39) we have

2
0
19
r
M
G
e
m
j
gs
Be
e
iron e

=

Since , m S
iron
/ 10 03 . 1
7
= 4138 . 6 = ,
3 . 3666 =
Be
, kg M
gs
3
10 04 . 3

= and
mm r 9
0
= , we obtain
2 6
/ 10 164 . 1 m A j
e
=
Given that
2 5 2
10 03 . 5 4 m S

= =

we get

A S j i
e source
6 . 58 =


The resistance of the Iron rod is
=

=
4
10 93 . 1

S
x
R
iron
B
source
Thus, the dissipated power by the Iron rod is
( ) 56 66 . 0
2
W i R P
source source d
=
Note that this Gravitational EMF
source is a Current Source. As we known, a
Current Source is a device that keeps
invariable the electric current between its
terminals. So, if the source is connected to an
external load, and the resistance of the load
varies, then the own source will increase or
decrease its output voltage in order to
maintain invariable the value of the current in
the circuit.










Fig. 4 Current Source
V
source
~ i
source
R
source
R
Load

V


Based on Kirchhoffs laws we can
express the electric voltage between the
terminals of the Current Source, , by means
of the following relation (See Fig.4):
s
V
V i R V
source source source
+ =
where is the voltage applied on the
charge.
V
The transformer connected to
Gravitational EMF Source (See Fig. 3) is
T
9
designed

to make the voltage

. Since , then
we can write that . Thus, in the
primary circuit, the voltage is
and the current is
; the winding turns ratio
is
Hz kV V 60 @ 2 . 2 = V i R
source source
<<
V V
source

kV V V V
source p
2 . 2 = =
A i i
source p
6 . 58 = =
10 =
s p
N N ; thus, in the secondary circuit
the output voltage is Hz V V
s
60 @ 220 = and
the current is A i
s
586 = . Consequently, the
source output power is
kW i V P
s s
9 . 128 = =
Note that, in order to initializing the
Gravitational EMF Source, is used an
external source, which is removed after the
initialization of the Gravitational EMF
Source.
Now it will be shown that this
Gravitational EMF source can be
miniaturized.
We start making and mm x
B
10 =
mm 5 . 0 = ; mm 2 = , , mm d
A
8 = mm d
D
16 =
and mm r 5 . 1
0
= (See Fig. 5). The sphere with
2mm diameter is now of Tungsten carbide
(W+Cobalt) with density.
Then
3
/ 630 , 15 m kg
kg M
gs
5
10 54 . 6

= and
2 6
10 14 . 3 m S

=

.
Thus, for Hz f 1 = Eq.(21) gives
( )
( ) 57 1 10 03 2 1 2 1
4 3

+ =

rms A
E .
For
( )
mV V
rms A
5 93. = and mm d
A
8 = we
get , and Eq. (57) yields
( )
m V E
rms A
/ .688 11 =
236 . 6 =
For
( )
mV V
rms D
5 93. = and mm d
D
16 = we get
and
( )
m V E
rms D
/ .844 5 = 01 0.
d
.

The impedances are respectively,

( ) = = 36 . 14 2 2
2
0 p p p r p p
l A N f fL Z
( ) = =
4 2
0
10 154 . 6 2 2
s s s r s s
l A N f fL Z
( )
( ) = + = + = 56 . 37
s s p p reflected p total p
Z N N Z Z Z Z
where 60 =
r
(iron cast), 100 =
p
N , 10 =
s
N ,
, m l l
s p
18 . 0 = = mm
p
6 . 107 = , mm
s
8 . 136 = ,
, .
2
0091 . 0 m A
p
=
2
0147 . 0 m A
s
=

Since and m S
iron
/ 10 03 . 1
7
=
3 . 3666 =
Be
, then the value of is
e
j
2 5
2
0
19
/ 10 29 . 5 m A
r
M
G
e
m
j
gs
Be
e
iron e
=
=

=
and
A S j i
e source
66 . 1 =


The resistance of the iron rod is given by
=

=
4
10 1 . 3

S
x
R
iron
B
source
Thus, the dissipated power by the Iron rod is
mW i R P
source source d
9 . 0
2
=
In the case of the miniaturized source, the
iron rod has 2mm diameter and 10mm
height, then we obtain the factor
5 2 / 10 = = mm mm which gives
06 . 0 =
m
N (See table V[12]). Therefore, we
obtain
( )
6 . 16 =
eff r
.
Since mV V V V
rms D rms A s
5 93.
) ( ) (
= = =
and the resistance of the resistor
1
R is
mW m 31 / 6 . 21 (See Fig.5), then the current
from the first source is A i 2 . 1 = . Thus, we get
( )
mT x i B
B eff r
5 . 2
0
= = .
Since the current through the second
source is A i
source
66 . 1 = , and, if the voltage
required by the charge, is V V 7 . 3 = (usual
lithium batteries voltage), then the source
voltage is given by
V V i R V
source source source
7 . 3 + =
Consequently, the miniaturized source can
provide the power:
( ) W A V i V P
sorce source
1 . 6 66 . 1 7 . 3 = =
This is the magnitude of the power of lithium
batteries used in mobiles. Note that the
miniaturized source of Gravitational EMF
does not need to be recharged and it
occupies a volume (8mm x 70mm x 80mm.
See Fig.6) similar to the volume of the
mobile batteries. In addition, note that the
dimensions of this miniaturized source can
be further reduced (possibly down to a few
millimeters or less).


10


































R
1












Fig. 5 A Miniaturized Source of Gravitational EMF


E
= 0.5 mm
1
2
17
18
1
2
18
19
1
2
17
18
=2mm
d
D
= 16 mm
M
g
Metallic ring
(0.5 mm thickness)
Lead sphere
(2 mm diameter)
Iron rod
(2 mm diameter,
10 mm height)
Dielectric tube

r
1
D
D
E
D(rms)
E
A(rms)
Air
Air
Air
Air
1 atm 300K
r
0
=1.5mm
Air
Air
Air
70 mm
93.5mV
1Hz
93.5mV
1Hz
93.5mV
1Hz
2.5m T
Printed circuit board

B
Cylindrical Inductor
1 turn (inner radius: r = 2mm)
A
d
A
= 8 mm
R1
B
2.5m T
x
B
= 10 mm
Full
wave
rectifier
D
A
D
M
g
3.7V DC
6.1W
1
2
17
18
Air
Air
19
18
2
1
Air
=2mm
d
D
= 16 mm
d
A
= 8 mm
1
Air
2
17
18
V=3.7V
i
s
=1.66A
Tungsten carbide sphere
(2 mm diameter)
V
s
=V=3.7V
V
s
=93.5mV
i=1.2 A
Initialization
source
~
93.5mV
1Hz
80mm
mW m 31 / 6 . 21


11























High-power Source



















Low-power Source


Fig. 6 Schematic Diagram in 3D of the Gravitational EMF Sources

134,72V/60Hz
273.98V/60Hz
2.2kV/60Hz
Transformers and
Converter (60Hz/1Hz)
(inside)
Full wave
rectifier
93.5mV
1Hz
Cross-section
Cross-section
8 3 3
18mm
18mm
2
12mm
1
1
12
6
1
1
80mm
70mm 8mm thickness
Aluminum
Iron rod
(8 mm diameter,
100mm height)
Inductor
1 turn (inner radius:
R=5mm)
20V
1Hz
B
93.5mV
1Hz
4 . 49
5 ; 4
5 . 2
2
0

= =
= =
r
r
mm r A i
mT
r
i
B

6 . 16
2 ; 2 . 1
5 . 2
2
0

= =
= =
r
r
mm r A i
mT
r
i
B

5
80W
220V 60Hz
128.9 kW
Initialization
source
R1
3.7V DC
6.1W

Initialization
source


12



Appendix A: The Geometrical Radii of Electron and Proton

It is known that the frequency of
oscillation of a simple spring oscillator is

( ) 1
2
1
A
m
K
f

=

where is the inertial mass attached to the
spring and
m
K is the spring constant (in
Nm
1
). In this case, the restoring force
exerted by the spring is linear and given by

( ) 2 A Kx F =

where x is the displacement from the
equilibrium position.
Now, consider the gravitational force:
For example, above the surface of the Earth,
the force follows the familiar Newtonian
function, i.e.,
2
r m GM F
g g
= , where
the mass of Earth is, is the
gravitational mass of a particle and
g
M
g
m
r is the
distance between the centers. Below Earths
surface the force is linear and given by
( ) 3
3
A r
R
m GM
F
g g

=
where is the radius of Earth.

R
By comparing (A3) with (A2) we
obtain
( ) 4
3
A
x
r
R
GM
m
K
m
K g
g

= =

Making , and substituting (A4)

into (A1) gives

= = R r x

( ) 5
2
1
3
A
R
GM
f
g

In the case of an electron and a positron, we
substitute by ,
g
M
ge
m by
e
and by
, where is the radius of electron (or
positron). Thus, Eq. (A5) becomes

R
e
R
e
R


( ) 6
2
1
3
A
R
Gm
f
e
e ge

=
The value of
e
varies with the density of
energy [1]. When the electron and the
positron are distant from each other and the
local density of energy is small, the value of
e
becomes very close to 1. However, when
the electron and the positron are penetrating
one another, the energy densities in each
particle become very strong due to the
proximity of their electrical charges e and,
consequently, the value of
e
strongly
increases. In order to calculate the value of
e
under these conditions ( ), we
start from the expression of correlation
between electric charge and gravitational
mass, obtained in a previous work [
e
R r x = =
q
1]:

( )
( ) 7 4
0
A i m G q
imaginary g
=

where is the imaginary
gravitational mass, and
(imaginary g
m
)
1 = i .

In the case of electron, Eq. (A7) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( ) 8 10 6 . 1 4
4
4
4
19
0
3
2
0
2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
A C m G
i m G
i m G
i m G q
real e i e
real e i e
imaginary e i e
imaginary ge e

= =
= =
= =
= =

where we obtain

( ) 9 10 8 . 1
21
A
e
=

This is therefore, the value of
e
increased
by the strong density of energy produced by
the electrical charges of the two particles,
under previously mentioned conditions.
e
13
Given that
e i e ge
m m
0
= , Eq. (A6)
yields
( ) 10
2
1
3
0
2
A
R
m G
f
e
e i e

=

From Quantum Mechanics, we know that

( ) 11
2
0
A c m hf
i
=

where is the Plancks constant. Thus, in
the case of we get
h
e i i
m m
0 0
=

( ) 12
2
0
A
h
c m
f
e i
=

By comparing (A10) and (A12) we
conclude that

( ) 13
2
1
3
0
2 2
0
A
R
m G
h
c m
e
e i e e i

=

Isolating the radius , we get:
e
R

( ) 14 10 87 . 6
2
14
2
0
3
2
3
1
A m
c
h
m
G
R
e
e i
e

Compare this value with the Compton sized
electron, which predicts
and also with standardized result recently
obtained of [
m R
e
13
10 86 . 3

=
m R
e
13
10 7 4

= 13].
In the case of proton, we have

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( ) 15 10 6 . 1 4
4
4
4
19
0
3
2
0
2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
A C m G
i m G
i m G
i m G q
real p i p
real p i p
imaginary p i p
imaginary gp p

= =
= =
= =
= =

where we obtain

( ) 16 10 7 . 9
17
A
p
=

Thus, the result is

( ) 17 10 72 . 3
2
17
2
0
3
2
3
1
A m
c
h
m
G
R
p
p i
p

Note that these radii, given by
Equations ( ) 14 A and ( , are the radii of
free electrons and free protons (when the
particle and antiparticle (in isolation)
penetrate themselves mutually).
) 17 A
Inside the atoms (nuclei) the radius of
protons is well-known. For example, protons,
as the hydrogen nuclei, have a radius given
by [ m R
p
15
10 2 . 1

14, 15]. The strong
increase in respect to the value given by Eq.
(A17) is due to the interaction with the
electron of the atom.

































14

Appendix B: An Experimental Setup for Testing a GCC with Air Nucleus





































~
5 mm
d = 14 mm
Metallic rings
Dielectric tube
(Acrylic)
= 8 mm
5 mm
10 mm
Rectangular
plate

g
g
g g =
Digital Force Gauge
( ) N N 01 . 0 ; 2
Dielectric tube
Metallic ring
d = 14 mm
8 mm
Metallic plate
20 mm
888888
Acrylic
plates
GCC

15



DETAILS OF PARTS












































5 mm
Metal
5 mm
5 mm
30 mm
20 mm
8 mm
10 mm
12 mm
5 mm
Metal
Acrylic
Metal


16
DETAIS OF THE BOX















































2 mm
20 mm
26 mm
5 mm
2 mm
20 mm
20mm
26 mm
26 mm
20 mm
20 mm
2 mm
20 mm
5 mm
5 mm
10 mm
Acrylic
3 plates 20mm x 26 mm x 2mm
2 plates 20mm x 20mm x 2mm
2 plates 20mm x 20mm x 1mm (inner plates)
4 plates 20mm x 5mm x 2mm
Aluminum
2 plates 20mm x 10mm
1 mm
1 mm






17


References

[1] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of
the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific
Journal of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-
232.
[2] Valkengurg, V., (1992) Basic Electricity, Prompt
Publications, 1-38.

[3] Fischer-Cripps, A., (2004) The electronics companion.
CRC Press, p. 13, ISBN 9780750310123.

[4] De Aquino, F. (2008) Process and Device for
Controlling the Locally the Gravitational Mass and the
Gravity Acceleration, BR Patent Number: PI0805046-5,
July 31, 2008.

[5] De Aquino, F. (2010) Gravity Control by means of
Electromagnetic Field through Gas at Ultra-Low
Pressure, Pacific Journal of Science and Technology,
11(2) November 2010, pp.178-247, Physics/0701091.

[6] Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo, McGraw-
Hill, p. 270.

[7] Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968) Physics, J. Willey &
Sons, Portuguese Version, Ed. USP, p.1124.

[8] Chalmers, J.A., (1967) Atmospheric Electricity,
Pergamon press, Oxford, London; Kamsali, N. et al.,
(2011) Advanced Air Pollution, chapter 20, DOI:
10.5772/17163, edited by Farhad Nejadkoorki, Publisher:
InTech, ISBN 978-953-307-511-2, under CC BY-NC-
SA 3.0 license.

[9] Kundu, J. et al., (2007) Semiconductor Physics,
Quantum Electronics& Optoelectronics, 10, 1, pp.1-3.

[10] Alonso, M. and Finn, E. (1967) Fundamental University
Physics, Addison-Wesley Co., Portuguese version Ed
Edgard Blcher (1972), p. 153.

[11] Marshall, S. V. and Skitec, G.G. (1980 ) Electromagnetic
Concepts and Applications, Prentice-Hall, NJ, Second
Edition, p.287

[12] Chen, D. et al., (1991) Demagnetizing Factors for
Cylinders, IEE Transactions on Magnetics, Vol. 27,
Number,4, p. 3601. Table V, p. 3610.

[13] Mac Gregor. M. H., (1992) The Enigmatic Electron.
Boston: Klurer Academic, 1992, pp. 4-5.

[14] N.D. Cook (2010). Models of the Atomic Nucleus (2nd
ed.). Springer. p. 57 ff.. ISBN 978-3-642-14736-4.

[15] K.S. Krane (1987). Introductory Nuclear Physics.
Wiley-VCH. ISBN 0-471-80553-X.



Superconducting State generated by Cooper Pairs bound by
Intensified Gravitational Interaction

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2012 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.

We show that by intensifying the gravitational interaction between electron pairs it is possible to produce
pair binding energies on the order of 10
1
eV, enough to keep electrons pairs (Cooper Pairs) at ambient
temperatures. By means of this method, metals can be transformed into superconductors at ambient
temperature.

Key words: Modified theories of gravity, Theories and models of superconducting state, superconducting materials,
Nonconventional mechanisms.
PACS: 04.50.Kd, 74.20.-z, 74.70.-b, 74.20.Mn.

1. Introduction

A pair of weakly bound electrons in a
superconductor is called Cooper pair; it was
first described in 1956 by Leon Cooper [1].
As showed by Cooper, an attraction between
electrons in a metal can cause a paired state
of electrons to have a lower energy than the
Fermi energy, which implies that the pair is
bound. In conventional superconductors, this
attraction is due to the electronphonon
interaction. The Cooper pair state is
responsible for superconductivity, as
described in the BCS theory developed by
John Bardeen, John Schrieffer and Leon
Cooper for which they shared the 1972 Nobel
Prize [2].
In spite of Cooper pairing to be a
quantum effect the reason for the pairing can
be seen from a simplified classical
explanation [3]. In order to understand how
an attraction between two electrons can
occur, it is necessary to consider the
interaction with the positive ions lattice of
the metal. Usually an electron in a metal
behaves as a free particle. Its negative charge
causes attraction between the positive ions
that make up the rigid lattice of the metal.
This attraction distorts the ion lattice, moving
the ions slightly toward the electron,
increasing the positive charge density of the
lattice in the local (See gray glow in Fig.1
(a)). Then, another electron is attracted to the
positive charge density (gray glow) created
by the first electron distorting the lattice
around itself. This attraction can overcome
the electrons' repulsion due to their negative
charge and create a binding between the two

+ + + +



+ +
+ +
-
+ +
+ +



+ + + +

(a)

+ + + +



+ +
+ +
-
+ +
+ +



+ + + +

(b)

+ + + +



+ + + +

- -

+ + + +



+ + + +

(c)
Fig. 1 Cooper Pair Formation
-

2
electrons (See Fig.1 (b)). The electrons can
then travel through the lattice as a single
entity, known as a Cooper Pair (See Fig.1
(c)). While conventional conduction is
resisted by thermal vibrations within the
lattice, Cooper Pairs carry the supercurrent
relatively unresisted by thermal vibrations.
The energy of the pairing interaction is
quite weak, of the order of 10
3
eV, and
thermal energy can easily break the pairs. So
only at low temperatures, are a significant
number of the electrons in a metal in Cooper
pairs.
Here is showed that, by intensifying the
gravitational interaction
*
[4] between
electrons pairs, it is possible to produce pair
binding energies on the order of 10
1
eV,
enough to keep them paired at ambient
temperatures. Thus, by this way, metals at
ambient temperature can have a significant
number of the electrons in Cooper pairs,
transforming such metals in superconductors
at ambient temperature.

2. Theory

The quantization of gravity showed
that the gravitational mass m
g
and the
inertial mass m
i
are correlated by means of
the following factor [4]:

( ) 1 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ = =
c m
p
m
m
i i
g

where is the rest inertial mass of the
particle and is the variation in the
particles kinetic momentum; is the speed
of light.
0 i
m
p
c
When is produced by the
absorption of a photon with wavelength
p
, it
is expressed by h p = . In this case, Eq.
(1) becomes

*
De Aquino, F. (2008) Process and Device for Controlling
the Locally the Gravitational Mass and the Gravity
Acceleration, BR Patent Number: PI0805046-5, July 31,
2008.
( ) 2 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
0

+ =

+ =

c m h
m
m
i
i
g

where c m h
i0 0
= is the DeBroglie
wavelength for the particle with rest inertial
mass .
0 i
m
In general, the momentum variation
p is expressed by t F p = where is the
applied force during a time interval
F
t . Note
that there is no restriction concerning the
nature of the force, i.e., it can be mechanical,
electromagnetic, etc. For example, we can
look on the momentum variation as due
to absorption or emission of electromagnetic
energy by the particle.
p
This means that, by means of
electromagnetic fields, the gravitational mass
can be decreased down to become negative
and increased (independently of the inertial
mass ). In this way, the gravitational
forces can be intensified. Consequently, we
can use, for example, oscillating magnetic
fields in order to intensify the gravitational
interaction between electrons pairs, in order
to produce pair binding energies enough to
keep them paired at ambient temperatures.
We will show that the magnetic field used in
this case must have extremely-low frequency
(ELF).
i
m
From Electrodynamics we know that
when an electromagnetic wave with
frequency and velocity incides on a
material with relative permittivity
f c
r
,
relative magnetic permeability
r
and
electrical conductivity , its velocity is
reduced to
r
n c v = where is the index of
refraction of the material, given by [
r
n
5]

( ) ( ) 3 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n


3
If >> , f 2 = , Eq. (3) reduces to

( ) 4
4
0
f
n
r
r

=

Thus, the wavelength of the incident
radiation (See Fig. 2) becomes

( ) 5
4
mod

f n n
f c
f
v
r r
= = = =











Fig. 2 Modified Electromagnetic Wave. The
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave can be
strongly reduced, but its frequency remains the same.
v = c v = c/n
r
= c/f

mod
= v/f = c/n
r
f
n
r


If a lamina with thickness equal to
contains atoms/m n
3
,

then the number of
atoms per area unit is n . Thus, if the
electromagnetic radiation with frequency
incides on an area of the lamina it
reaches
f S
nS atoms. If it incides on the total
area of the lamina, , then the total number
of atoms reached by the radiation is
f
S

f
nS N = . The number of atoms per unit of
volume, , is given by n

( ) 6
0
A
N
n

=

where is the
Avogadros number;
kmole atoms N / 10 02 . 6
26
0
=
is the matter density
of the lamina (in kg/m
3
) and A is the molar
mass(kg/kmole).
When an electromagnetic wave incides
on the lamina, it strikes front atoms,
where
f
N
( )
m f f
S n N ,
m
is the diameter of
the atom. Thus, the electromagnetic wave
incides effectively on an area , where
m f
S N S=
2
4
1
m m
S = is the cross section area of one atom.
After these collisions, it carries out
with the other atoms (See Fig.3).
collisions
n










Fig. 3 Collisions inside the lamina.
atom
S
m
Wave


Thus, the total number of collisions in the
volume S is

( )
( ) 7

S n
S n S n S n n N N
m
m m l m l collisions f collisions
=
= + = + =


The power density, , of the radiation on the
lamina can be expressed by
D
( ) 8
m f
S N
P
S
P
D = =
We can express the total mean number
of collisions in each atom, , by means of
the following equation
1
n

( ) 9
1
N
N n
n
collisions photons total
=

Since in each collision a momentum h is
transferred to the atom, then the total
momentum transferred to the lamina will be
( ) h N n p
1
= . Therefore, in accordance
with Eq. (1), we can write that

( )
( )
( )
( ) 10 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
1
0

+ =
=

+ =

collisions photons total

l i
l g
N n
N n
m
m


4
Since Eq. (7) gives S n N
l collisions
= , we get
( ) (11
2
S n
hf
P
N n
l collisions photons total

= )

Substitution of Eq. (11) into Eq. (10) yields

( )
( )
( ) ( ) 12 1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

S n
hf
P
m
m
l
l i
l g


Substitution of P given by Eq. (8) into Eq.
(12) gives

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 13 1
1
1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

c m
S n
f
D S N
m
m
l i
l
m f
l i
l g


Substitution of ( )
m f l f
S n N and
m f
S N S =
into Eq. (13) results

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 14 1
1
1 2 1
2
2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

cf m
D S S n
m
m
l i
m m f l
l i
l g

where
( ) ( ) ( ) l l l i
V m =
0
.

Now, considering that the lamina is
inside an ELF electromagnetic field with
E and B , then we can write that [6]
( )
( ) 15
2
0
2
c
E n
D
l r

=
Substitution of Eq. (15) into Eq. (14) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 16 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
2 2
0 0
2 2 2 2 3
0

+ =


f c m
E S S n n
m
m
l i
m m f l l r
l i
l g

Note that t E E
m
sin = .The average value
for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E because E varies
sinusoidaly ( is the maximum value
for
m
E
E ). On the other hand, 2
m rms
E E = .
Consequently we can replace
4
E for .
Thus, for
4
rms
E
mod
= , the equation above can
be rewritten as follows

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 17 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
mod
2 2
0 0
2 2 2 2 3
0

+ =


f c m
E S S n n
m
m
l i
rms m m f l l r
l i
l g

Electrodynamics tells us that
( )
( )
rms l r rms rms
B n c vB E = = . Substitution of
this expression into Eq. (17) gives

( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) 18 1
4
1 2 1
2 2
mod
4 2
0
2
0
4 2 4 4 4 6
0

+ = =
l r l i
rms m m f l
l i
l g
n f m
B S S n
m
m

Since
( ) l r
n =
mod
then Eq. (18) can be
rewritten in the following form

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 19 1
4
1 2 1
2 2 2
0
2
0
4 2 4 4 4 6
0

+ = =
f c m
B S S n
m
m
l i
rms m m f l
l i
l g

In order to calculate the expressions of
Be
for the particular case of a free electron
inside a conductor, subjected to an external
magnetic field with frequency , we
must consider the interaction with the
positive ions that make up the rigid lattice of
the metal.
rms
B f
The negative charge of the free
electron causes attraction between the
positive ions lattice of the metal. This
attraction distorts the ion lattice, moving the
ions slightly toward the electron, increasing
the positive charge density of the lattice in
the local (See gray glow in Fig.1 (a)). Then,
another electron is attracted to the positive
charge density (gray glow) created by the
first electron distorting the lattice around
itself, which produces a strong attraction
upon the electron deforming its surface as
showed in Fig. 4. Under these circumstances,
the volume of the electron does not vary, but
its external surface is strongly increased,
becomes equivalent to the external area of a
sphere with radius ( is the radius
of the free electron out of the ions gage
e xe
r r >>
e
r
5
showed in Fig. 1 (a)). Based on such
conclusions, we substitute in Eq.(19) by
l
n




















Fig. 4 Schematic diagram of Electrons
structure inside the ion lattice. The positive ions
lattice around the electron produces a strong
attraction upon the electron deforming its surface.
The volume of the electron does not vary, but its
external surface is increased and becomes
equivalent to the area of a sphere with radius
e xe
r r >> .
r
e
2
4
x e
r A
3
3
4
e e
r V =
electron

+ +
+ +
xe
r
















Fig. 5 The deformation of the proton.
xp
r
-
F
e
F
e
v
e
K

v
e
r
p
r
0
3
3
4
1 1
e e
r V = , by ( )
f
S
e e e
V SSA ( is the
specific surface area for electrons in this
case:
e
SSA
e e xe e e e e e e
SSA = V r V A m A
2
2
1
2
1
2 = = ),
by ,
m
S
2
xe e
r S = by
xe m
r 2 = and
by . The result is
( ) l i
m
0
e
m

( ) 20 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 18 2 2
0
2
4 22 2

+ =
f r m c
B r
e e
rms xe
Be

In order to calculate the value of we
start considering a hydrogen atom, where the
electron spins around the proton with a
velocity . The electrical
force acting on the proton is
xe
r
1 6
. 10 3

= s m v
e
2
1 0
2
4 r e F
e
= ,
which is equal to the centrifuge force
where
0
2
r m F
e p c
=
e
is the angular velocity
of the electron and is the distance between
the inertial center of the proton and the center
0
r
of the moving proton (See Fig. 5, where we
conclude that ( )
p xp p
r r r r + = +
0
2 ; is the
radius of the sphere whose external area is
equivalent to the increased area of the
proton). Thus, we get
xp
r
( )
p xp
r r r =
2
1
0
.
Substitution of this value into expression of
e c
F F = gives
m r
v m
e
r
p
e p
xp
14
2
0
2
10 2 . 3
4

= + =

Therefore, we can write that
p xp xp
r k r = ,
where

6 . 25 = =
p
xp
xp
r
r
k

The electron is similarly deformed by the
relative movement of the proton in respect to
the electron. In this case, by analogy, we can
write that
m r
v m
e
r
e
e e
xe
11
2
0
2
10 4 . 6
4

= + =

and
e xe xe
r k r = , where is the radius of the
sphere whose external area is equivalent to
the increased area of the electron. The radius
of free electron is
xe
r
m r
e
14
10 87 . 6

= (See
Appendix A). However, for electrons in the
atomic eletrosphere the value of can be
calculated starting from Quantum Mechanics.
e
r
6
The wave packet that describes the electron
satisfies an uncertainty principle
( ) h
2
1
x p , where and k p = h k is
the approximate extension of the wave
packet. Thus, we can write that (
2
1
x k ).
For the ``square'' packet the full width in is k
0
2 = k ( c m h
e
=
0
is the average
wavelength). The width in x is a little harder
to define, but, lets use the first node in the
probability found at ( ) = 2 2
0
x or
0
= x . So, the width of the wave packet is
twice this or
0
2 = x . Obviously,
cannot be greater than
e
r 2
x , i.e., must be
smaller and close to
e
r
m c m h
e
12
0
10 43 . 2

= = .
Then, assuming that , we
get
m r
e
12
10 4 . 2


6 . 26 = =
e
xe
xe
r
r
k

Note that . In the case of electrons
inside the ion lattice (See Fig. 4), we can note
that, in spite of the electron speed be null, the
deformations are similar, in such way that, in this
case, we can take the values above.
xp xe
k k
e
v
Substitution of these values into Eq.
(20) gives

( ) 21 1 10 8 . 2 1 2 1
1 10 8 . 3 1 2 1
2
4
42
2
4 4 22
57

+ =
=

+ =
f
B
f
B r k
rms
rms e xe
Be

Similarly, in the case of proton and neutron
we can write that

( ) 22 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 2 2
0
2
4 4 22 2

+ =
f m c
B r k
p
rms p xp
Bp

( ) 23 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 2 2 2
0
4 4 2

+ =
f c m
B r
n
rms n
Bn

In the case of the neutron, due to its
electric charge be null. The radius of protons
inside the atoms (nuclei) is
1 =
xn
k
m r
p
15
10 2 . 1

=
[7,8],
p n
r r , then we obtain from Eqs. (22)
and (23) following expressions:
( ) 24 1 10 2 . 2 1 2 1
2
4
22

+ =
f
B
rms
Bp

( ) a
f
B
rms
Bn
24 1 10 35 . 2 1 2 1
2
4
9

+ =

Since
e Be ge
m m = ,
p Bp gp
m m = and
n Bn gn
m m = , it easy to see, by means of
Eqs. (21), (24) and (24a), that is much
greater than and . This means that, in
the calculation of the gravitational force
(between the positive ions + electron and
the external electron), we can
ge
m
gp
m
gp
m
g
F
disregard the
effects of the gravitational masses of the
ions. Thus, the expression of reduces to
the expression of the gravitational forces
between the two electrons, i.e.,
g
F

( ) 25
2
2
2
2
2
r
m
G
r
m
G F
e
Be
ge
g
= =

For the creation of the Cooper Pairs
must overcome the electrons' repulsion due
to their negative charge
g
F
( )
2
0
2
4 r e . Thus, we
must have
0
2 2 2
4 e Gm
e Be
> or

( )
( ) 26 10 2
4
21
0
= >
G
m e
e
Be

For the Cooper Pairs not be destructed by the
thermal vibrations due to the temperature T ,
we must have kT r Gm
e Be
>
2 2
whence we
conclude that r Gm T
e Be
2 2
< . Consequently,
the transition temperature, , can be
expressed by the following expression
c
T

7
( ) 27
2 2

k
Gm
T
e Be
c
=

where is the size of the Cooper pair, which
is given by the coherence length of the
Cooper-pair wavefunction. It is known that
the coherence length is typically 1000
(though it can be as small as 30 in the
copper oxides). The coherence length of the
Cooper-pair in Aluminum superconductor is
quite large ( [ micron 1 9]). Substitution
of this value into Eq. (27) gives

( ) 28 10 4
2 42
Be c
T

=

For we obtain ( C K T
c
= 127 ~ 400 )

( ) 29 10 1
22
=
Be

By comparing (29) with (26), we can
conclude that this value of
e
is sufficient
for the creation of the Cooper Pairs, and also
in order that they do not be destructed by the
thermal vibrations due to the temperature up
to . ( ) C K T
c
= 127 ~ 400
In order to calculate the intensity of the
magnetic field with frequency ,
necessary to produce the value given by
Eq.(29), it is necessary the substitution of Eq.
(29) into Eq. (21). Thus, we get
m
B f

( ) 30 10 1 1 10 8 . 2 1 2 1
22
2
4
42

+
f
B
rms

For Hz f 2 = the value of is
rms
B

T B
rms
3 >

Therefore, if a magnetic field with frequency
Hz f 2 = and intensity T B
rms
3 >

is applied
upon an Aluminum wire it becomes
superconductor at ambient temperature
( ( C K T
c
= 127 ~ 400 )

). Note that the

Modern magnetic resonance imaging systems work

with magnetic fields up to 8T [10, 11].
magnetic field is used only during a time
interval sufficient to transform the Aluminum
into a superconductor. This means that the
process is a some sort of magnetization
that transforms a conductor into a
permanent superconductor. After the
magnetization the magnetic field can be
turned off, similarly to the case of
magnetization that transforms an iron rod
into a permanent magnet.









































8




Appendix A: The Geometrical Radii of Electron and Proton

It is known that the frequency of
oscillation of a simple spring oscillator is

( ) 1
2
1
A
m
K
f

=

where is the inertial mass attached to the
spring and
m
K is the spring constant (in
Nm
1
). In this case, the restoring force
exerted by the spring is linear and given by

( ) 2 A Kx F =

where x is the displacement from the
equilibrium position.
Now, consider the gravitational force:
For example, above the surface of the Earth,
the force follows the familiar Newtonian
function, i.e.,
2
r m GM F
g g
= , where
is the mass of Earth, is the
gravitational mass of a particle and
g
M
g
m
r is the
distance between the centers. Below Earths
surface the force is linear and given by
( ) 3
3
A r
R
m GM
F
g g

=
where is the radius of Earth.

R
By comparing (A3) with (A2) we
obtain
( ) 4
3
A
x
r
R
GM
m
K
m
K g
g

= =

Making , and substituting (A4)

into (A1) gives

= = R r x

( ) 5
2
1
3
A
R
GM
f
g

In the case of an electron and a positron, we
substitute by ,
g
M
ge
m by
e
and by
, where is the radius of electron (or
positron). Thus, Eq. (A5) becomes

R
e
R
e
R


( ) 6
2
1
3
A
R
Gm
f
e
e ge

=
The value of
e
varies with the density of
energy [4]. When the electron and the
positron are distant from each other and the
local density of energy is small, the value of
e
becomes very close to 1. However, when
the electron and the positron are penetrating
one another, the energy densities in each
particle become very strong due to the
proximity of their electrical charges e and,
consequently, the value of
e
strongly
increases. In order to calculate the value of
e
under these conditions ( ), we
start from the expression of correlation
between electric charge and gravitational
mass, obtained in a previous work [
e
R r x = =
q
4]:

( )
( ) 7 4
0
A i m G q
imaginary g
=

where is the imaginary
gravitational mass, and
(imaginary g
m
)
1 = i .

In the case of electron, Eq. (A7) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( ) 8 10 6 . 1 4
4
4
4
19
0
3
2
0
2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
A C m G
i m G
i m G
i m G q
real e i e
real e i e
imaginary e i e
imaginary ge e

= =
= =
= =
= =

where we obtain

( ) 9 10 8 . 1
21
A
e
=

This is therefore, the value of
e
increased
by the strong density of energy produced by
the electrical charges of the two particles,
under previously mentioned conditions.
e
9
Given that
e i e ge
m m
0
= , Eq. (A6)
yields
( ) 10
2
1
3
0
2
A
R
m G
f
e
e i e

=

From Quantum Mechanics, we know that

( ) 11
2
0
A c m hf
i
=

where is the Plancks constant. Thus, in
the case of we get
h
e i i
m m
0 0
=

( ) 12
2
0
A
h
c m
f
e i
=

By comparing (A10) and (A12) we
conclude that

( ) 13
2
1
3
0
2 2
0
A
R
m G
h
c m
e
e i e e i

=

Isolating the radius , we get:
e
R

( ) 14 10 87 . 6
2
14
2
0
3
2
3
1
A m
c
h
m
G
R
e
e i
e

Compare this value with the Compton sized
electron, which predicts
and also with standardized result recently
obtained of [
m R
e
13
10 86 . 3

=
m R
e
13
10 7 4

= 12].
In the case of proton, we have

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( ) 15 10 6 . 1 4
4
4
4
19
0
3
2
0
2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
A C m G
i m G
i m G
i m G q
real p i p
real p i p
imaginary p i p
imaginary gp p

= =
= =
= =
= =

where we obtain

( ) 16 10 7 . 9
17
A
p
=

Thus, the result is

( ) 17 10 72 . 3
2
17
2
0
3
2
3
1
A m
c
h
m
G
R
p
p i
p

Note that these radii, given by
Equations ( ) 14 A and ( , are the radii of
free electrons and free protons (when the
particle and antiparticle (in isolation)
penetrate themselves mutually).
) 17 A
Inside the atoms (nuclei) the radius of
protons is well-known. For example, protons,
as the hydrogen nuclei, have a radius given
by [ m R
p
15
10 2 . 1

7, 8]. The strong
increase in respect to the value given by Eq.
(A17) is due to the interaction with the
electron of the atom.

































10
References


[1] Cooper, Leon N. (1956). "Bound electron pairs in a
degenerate Fermi gas". Physical Review 104 (4): 1189
1190.

[2] Bardeen, J.; Cooper, L. N., Schrieffer, J. R. (April 1957).
"Microscopic Theory of Superconductivity". Physical
Review 106 (1): 162164. Bardeen, J.; Cooper, L. N.;
Schrieffer, J. R. (December 1957). "Theory of
Superconductivity". Physical Review 108 (5): 1175
1204.

[3] Nave, Carl R. (2006). "Cooper Pairs". Hyperphysics.
Dept. of Physics and Astronomy, Georgia State Univ..
Retrieved 2008-07-24; Kadin, Alan M. (2005). "Spatial
Structure of the Cooper Pair". Journal of
Superconductivity and Novel Magnetism 20 (4): 285.

[4] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of
the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific
Journal of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-
232.

[5] Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo, McGraw-
Hill, p. 270.

[6] Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968) Physics, J. Willey &
Sons, Portuguese Version, Ed. USP, p.1124.

[7] N.D. Cook (2010). Models of the Atomic Nucleus (2nd
ed.). Springer. p. 57 ff.. ISBN 978-3-642-14736-4.

[8] K.S. Krane (1987). Introductory Nuclear Physics.
Wiley-VCH. ISBN 0-471-80553-X.

[9] Fujiki, H. et al. Nonlinear resistivity in the mixed state of
superconducting aluminum films. Physica C 297, 309
(1998).

[10] Smith, Hans-Jrgen. "Magnetic resonance imaging".
Medcyclopaedia Textbook of Radiology. GE
Healthcare. Retrieved 2007-03-26.

[11]Orenstein, Beth W. (2006-02-16). "Ultra High-Field
MRI The Pull of Big Magnets". Radiology Today 7
(3): pp. 10. Archived from the original on March 15,
2008. Retrieved 2008-07-10

[12] Mac Gregor. M. H., (1992) The Enigmatic Electron.
Boston: Klurer Academic, 1992, pp. 4-5.











Gravitational Separator of Isotopes

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2012 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.

In this work we show a gravitational separator of isotopes which can be much more effective than those used
in the conventional processes of isotopes separation. It is based on intensification of the gravitational
acceleration, and can generate accelerations tens of times more intense than those generated in the most
powerful centrifuges used for Uranium enrichment.


Key words: Modified theories of gravity, Isotope separation and enrichment, Nonconventional mechanisms.
PACS: 04.50.Kd, 28.60.+ s, 74.20.Mn.



1. Introduction

A conventional gas centrifuge is
basically a cylinder that spins around its
central axis with ultra-high angular speed
while a gas is injected inside it. Under these
conditions, the heavier molecules of the gas
move towards the cylinder wall and the
lighter ones remain close to the center. In
addition, if one creates a thermal gradient in
a perpendicular direction by keeping the top
of the rotating column cool and the bottom
hot, the resulting convection current carries
the lighter molecules to the top while the
heavier ones settle at the bottom, from which
they can be continuously withdrawn.
An important use of gas centrifuges is
for the separation of uranium-235 from
uranium-238. As a first step, the uranium
metal is turned into a gas (uranium
hexafluoride, UF
6
). Next, the UF
6
is injected
inside a gas centrifuge, which spins at about
100.000 rpm in order to produce a strong
centrifugal force upon the UF
6
molecules.
Thus, the UF
6
is separated by the difference
in molecular weight between
235
UF
6
and
238
UF
6
[1]. The heavier molecules of the gas
(
238
UF
6
) move towards the cylinder wall and
the lighter ones (
235
UF
6
) remain close to the
center. The convection current carries the
lighter molecules (
235
UF
6
) to the top while
the heavier ones (
238
UF
6
) settle at the bottom.
However, the gas at the top is not composed
totally by
235
UF
6
it contains also
238
UF
6
, in
such way that we can say that the gas at the
top is only a gas rich in
235
U. In practice,
several of such centrifuges are connected in



series. A cascade of identical stages produces
successively higher concentrations of
235
U.
This process is called Uranium enrichment.
Uranium occurs naturally as two
isotopes: 99.3% is Uranium-238 and 0.7% is
Uranium-235. Their atoms are identical
except for the number of neutrons in the
nucleus: Uranium-238 has three more and
this makes it less able to fission. Uranium
enrichment is used to increase the percentage
of the fissile U-235. Nuclear reactors
typically require uranium fuel enriched to
about 3% to 5% U-235. Nuclear bombs
typically use Highly Enriched Uranium,
enriched to 90% U-235 [2].
In order to extract the
235
U

from the
235
UF
6
it is necessary to add Calcium. The
Calcium reacts with the gas producing a salt
and pure
235
U.
The conventional gas centrifuges used
in the Uranium enrichment are very
expensive, and they consume much energy
during the process. Here, it is proposed a new
type of separator of isotopes based on the
intensification the gravitational acceleration
*
[3]. It can generate accelerations tens times
more intense than those generated in the most
powerful centrifuges used for Uranium
enrichment.


*
De Aquino, F. (2008) Process and Device for Controlling
the Locally the Gravitational Mass and the Gravity
Acceleration, BR Patent Number: PI0805046-5, July 31,
2008.

2
2. Theory

From the quantization of gravity
it follows that the gravitational mass m
g
and
the inertial mass m
i
are correlated by means
of the following factor [3]:
( ) 1 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ = =
c m
p
m
m
i i
g

where is the rest inertial mass of the

particle and is the variation in the
particles kinetic momentum; is the speed
of light.
0 i
m
p
c
When is produced by the
absorption of a photon with wavelength
p
, it
is expressed by h p = . In this case, Eq.
(1) becomes
( ) 2 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
0

+ =

+ =

c m h
m
m
i
i
g
where c m h
i0 0
= is the De Broglie
wavelength for the particle with rest inertial
mass .
0 i
m
It has been shown that there is an
additional effect - Gravitational Shielding
effect - produced by a substance whose
gravitational mass was reduced or made
negative [4]. The effect extends beyond
substance (gravitational shielding) , up to a
certain distance from it (along the central
axis of gravitational shielding). This effect
shows that in this region the gravity
acceleration, , is reduced at the same
proportion, i.e.,
1
g
g g
1
1
= where
0
1
i g
m m = and g is the gravity
acceleration before the gravitational
shielding). Consequently, after a second
gravitational shielding, the gravity will be
given by g g g
2 1 1 2
2
= = , where
2
is
the value of the ratio
0 i g
m m for the second
gravitational shielding. In a generalized way,
we can write that after the nth gravitational
shielding the gravity, , will be given by
n
g

( ) 3 ...
3 2 1
g g
n
n
=

This possibility shows that, by means
of a battery of gravitational shieldings, we
can make particles acquire enormous
accelerations.
From Electrodynamics we know that
when an electromagnetic wave with
frequency and velocity incides on a
material with relative permittivity
f c
r
,
relative magnetic permeability
r
and
electrical conductivity , its velocity is
reduced to
r
n c v = where is the index of
refraction of the material, given by [
r
n
5]
( ) ( ) 4 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n
If >> f , 2 = , Eq. (4) reduces to
( ) 5
4
0
f
n
r
r

=
Thus, the wavelength of the incident
radiation (See Fig. 1) becomes
( ) 6
4
mod

f n n
f c
f
v
r r
= = = =










Fig. 1 Modified Electromagnetic Wave. The
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave can be
strongly reduced, but its frequency remains the same.
v = c v = c/n
r
= c/f

mod
= v/f = c/n
r
f
n
r

If a lamina with thickness equal to
contains atoms/m n
3
,

then the number of
atoms per area unit is n . Thus, if the
electromagnetic radiation with frequency
incides on an area of the lamina it
reaches
f S
nS atoms. If it incides on the total
area of the lamina, , then the total number
of atoms reached by the radiation is
f
S

f
nS N = . The number of atoms per unit of
volume, , is given by n
3

( ) 7
0
A
N
n

=
where is the
Avogadros number;
kmole atoms N / 10 02 . 6
26
0
=
is the matter density
of the lamina (in kg/m
3
) and A is the molar
mass(kg/kmole).
When an electromagnetic wave incides
on the lamina, it strikes front atoms,
where
f
N
( )
m f f
S n N ,
m
is the diameter of
the atom. Thus, the electromagnetic wave
incides effectively on an area , where
m f
S N S=
2
4
1
m m
S = is the cross section area of one atom.
After these collisions, it carries out
with the other atoms (See Fig.2).
collisions
n










Fig. 2 Collisions inside the lamina.
atom
S
m
Wave


Thus, the total number of collisions in the
volume S is

( )
( ) 8

S n
S n S n S n n N N
m
m m l m l collisions f collisions
=
= + = + =


The power density, , of the radiation on the
lamina can be expressed by
D

( ) 9
m f
S N
P
S
P
D = =

We can express the total mean number
of collisions in each atom, , by means of
the following equation
1
n

( ) 10
1
N
N n
n
collisions photons total
=

Since in each collision a momentum h is
transferred to the atom, then the total
momentum transferred to the lamina will be
( ) h N n p
1
= . Therefore, in accordance
with Eq. (1), we can write that

( )
( )
( )
( ) 11 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
1
0

+ =
=

+ =

collisions photons total

l i
l g
N n
N n
m
m

Since Eq. (8) gives S n N
l collisions
= , we get
( ) (12
2
S n
hf
P
N n
l collisions photons total

= )

Substitution of Eq. (12) into Eq. (11) yields

( )
( )
( ) ( ) 13 1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

S n
hf
P
m
m
l
l i
l g

Substitution of P given by Eq. (9) into Eq.
(13) gives

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 14 1
1
1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

c m
S n
f
D S N
m
m
l i
l
m f
l i
l g

Substitution of ( )
m f l f
S n N and
m f
S N S =
into Eq. (14) results

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 15 1
1
1 2 1
2
2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

cf m
D S S n
m
m
l i
m m f l
l i
l g

where
( ) ( ) ( ) l l l i
V m =
0
.
Now, considering that the lamina is
inside an ELF electromagnetic field with
E and B , then we can write that [6]

( )
( ) 16
2
0
2
c
E n
D
l r

=
4
Substitution of Eq. (16) into Eq. (15) gives
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 17 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
2 2
0 0
2 2 2 2 3
0

+ =


f c m
E S S n n
m
m
l i
m m f l l r
l i
l g
In the case in which the area is just the
area of the cross-section of the lamina
f
S
( )

S ,
we obtain from Eq. (17), considering that
( ) ( )


S m
l l i
=
0
, the following expression

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 18 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
2 2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
m m l l r
l i
l g

According to Eq. (6) we have
( )
( ) 19
f n
c
f
v
l r
= = =
mod

Substitution of Eq. (19) into Eq. (18) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 20 1
4
1 2 1
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4
0

+ =
f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
m m
l l r
l i
l g

Note that t E E
m
sin = .The average value
for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E because E varies
sinusoidaly ( is the maximum value
for
m
E
E ). On the other hand, 2
m rms
E E = .
Consequently we can replace
4
E for ,
and the equation above can be rewritten as
follows
4
rms
E

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 21 1
4
1 2 1
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4
0

+ =
= =
f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
rms m m
l l r
l i
l g

Now consider the system shown in
Fig.3. It was originally designed to convert
Gravitational Energy directly into Electrical
Energy [7]. Here, it works as Separator of
Isotopes. These systems are basically similar,
except in the core. The core of the original
system has been replaced by the one shown
in Fig.3 and Fig.4 (detailed).
Inside the Gravitational Separator of
Isotopes there is a dielectric tube ( 1
r
) with
the following characteristics: mm 60 = ,
2 3 2
10 83 . 2 4 m S

= =

. Inside the
tube there is an Aluminum sphere with 30mm
radius and mass kg M
gs
30536 . 0 = . The tube
is filled with air at ambient temperature and
1atm. Thus, inside the tube, the air density is

( ) 22 . 2 . 1
3
= m kg
air

The number of atoms of air (Nitrogen) per
unit of volume, , according to Eq.(7), is
given by
air
n

( ) 23 / 10 16 . 5
3 25 0
m atoms
A
N
n
N
air
air
= =

The parallel metallic plates (p), shown in
Fig.3 are subjected to different drop voltages.
The two sets of plates (D), placed on the
extremes of the tube, are subjected to
( )
V V
rms D
22 16. = at Hz f 1 = , while the central
set of plates (A) is subjected to
( )
V V
rms A
98 191. = at Hz f 1 = . Since mm d 98 = ,
then the intensity of the electric field, which
passes through the 36 cylindrical air laminas
(each one with 5mm thickness) of the two
sets (D), is

( ) ( )
m V d V E
rms D rms D
/ .53 165 = =

and the intensity of the electric field, which
passes through the 7 cylindrical air laminas
of the central set (A), is given by

( ) ( )
m V d V E
rms A rms A
/ .
3
10 959 1 = =

Note that the metallic rings (5mm
thickness) are positioned in such way to
block the electric field out of the cylindrical
air laminas. The objective is to turn each one
of these laminas into a Gravity Control Cells
(GCC) [4]. Thus, the system shown in Fig. 3
has 3 sets of GCC. Two with 18 GCC each,
and one with 7 GCC. The two sets with 18
5
GCC each are positioned at the extremes of
the tube (D). They work as gravitational
decelerator while the other set with 7 GCC
(A) works as a gravitational accelerator,
intensifying the gravity acceleration
produced by the mass of the Aluminum
sphere. According to Eq. (3), this gravity,
after the GCC becomes
gs
M
th
7
2
0
7
7
r GM g
gs
= ,
where
( ) ( ) l i l g
m m = given by Eq. (21) and
mm r 35
0
= is the distance between the
center of the Aluminum sphere and the
surface of the first GCC of the set (A).
The objective of the sets (D), with 18
GCC each, is to reduce strongly the value of
the external gravity along the axis of the
tube. In this case, the value of the external
gravity, , is reduced by the factor ,
where
ext
g
ext d
g
18

2
10

=
d
. For example, if the base
BS of the system is positioned on the Earth
surface, then is reduced
to and, after the set A, it is increased
by . Since the system is designed for
2
/ 81 . 9 s m g
ext
=
ext d
g
18

5 . 308 = (See Eq. (26)), then the gravity

acceleration on the sphere becomes
. This value is much
smaller than
2 18 18 7
/ 10 6 . 2 s m g
ext d

=
2 8 2
/ 10 26 . 2 s m r GM g
s gs sphere

= = .
Note that there is a uniform magnetic
field, B , through the core of the
Gravitational Separator of Isotopes (a
cylindrical Dielectric Chamber with 60mm
external diameter; 50mm internal diameter
and 100mm height).
The values of and
d
, according to Eq.
(21) are given by

( ) ( )
( )
( )
( ) 24 1 10 645 1 1 2 1
1
4
1 2 1
4 9
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4

+ =
=

+ =

rms A
l
rms A
m m
l l r
E
f c
E S S n n
.

( ) ( )
( )
( )
( ) 25 1 10 645 1 1 2 1
1
4
1 2 1
4 9
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4

+ =
=

+ =

rms D
l
rms D
m m
l l r
d
E
f c
E S S n n
.

where
( )
1 =
r r air r
n , since ( ) <<

;
, ,
3 25
/ 10 16 . 5 m atoms n
air
= m
m
10
10 55 . 1

=
2 20 2
10 88 . 1 4 m S
m m

= = and Hz f 1 = . Since
and
, we get
( )
m V E
rms A
/ .
3
10 959 1 =
( )
m V E
rms D
/ .53 165 =

( ) 26 5 . 308 =

and

( ) 27 10
2

d


It is important to note that the set with
7 GCC (A) cannot be turned on before the
magnetic field B is on. Because the
gravitational accelerations on the dielectric
chamber and Al sphere will be enormous
( )
2 9 2
0
7
/ 10 4 . 4 s m r GM
gs
, and will
explode the device.
The isotopes inside the Dielectric
Chamber are subjected to the gravity
acceleration produced by the sphere, and
increased by the 7 GCC in the region (A). Its
value is

( ) 28 / 10 0 . 6
2 9
2
7 7
s m
r
M
G g a
s
gs
s i
= =

Comparing this value with the produced in
the most powerful centrifuges (at 100,000
rpm), which is of the order of 10
7
m/s
2
, we
conclude that the accelerations in the
Gravitational Separator of Isotopes is about
600 times greater than the values of the
centrifuges.

The electrical conductivity of air, inside the

dielectric tube, is equal to the electrical conductivity
of Earths atmosphere near the land, whose average
value is m S
air
/ 10 1
14
[8].
6
In the case of Uranium enrichment, the
gas UF
6
is injected inside this core where it is
strongly accelerated. Thus, the UF
6
is
separated by the difference in molecular
weight between
235
UF
6
and
238
UF
6
(See
Fig.4). The heavier molecules of the gas
(
238
UF
6
) move towards the cylinder bottom
and the lighter ones (
235
UF
6
) remain close to
the center. The convection current, produced
by a thermal gradient of about 300C
between the bottom and the top of the
cylinder, carries the lighter molecules
(
235
UF
6
) to the top while the heavier ones
(
238
UF
6
) settle at the bottom, from which they
can be continuously withdrawn. The gas
withdrawn at the top of the cylinder is a gas
rich in
235
U.
The gravitational forces due to the
gravitational mass of the sphere ( )
gs
M acting
on electrons ( , protons )
e
F ( )
p
F and neutrons
( )
p
F of the dielectric of the Dielectric
Chamber, are respectively expressed by the
following relations

( ) 29
2
0
7

= =
r
M
G m a m F
gs
e Be e ge e


( ) 30
2
0
7

= =
r
M
G m a m F
gs
p Bp p gp p


( ) 31
2
0
7

= =
r
M
G m a m F
gs
n Bn n gn n


In order to make null the resultant of these
forces in the Dielectric Chamber (and also in
the sphere) we must have , i.e.,
n p e
F F F + =

( ) 32
Bn n Bp p Be e
m m m + =

In order to calculate the expressions of
Be
,
Bp
and
Bn
we start from Eq. (17),
for the particular case of single electron in
the region subjected to the magnetic field B.
In this case, we must substitute by
( ) l r
n
( )
2
1
0
4 f n
r r
= ; by
l
n
3
3
4
1 1
e e
r V = ( is
the electrons radius), by
e
r
f
S ( )
e e e
V SSA
( is the specific surface area for
electrons in this case:
e
SSA
e e e e e e e e e
V r V A m A SSA
2
2
1
2
1
2 = = = ),
by ,
m
S
2
e e
r S = by
e m
r 2 = and
by . The result is
( ) l i
m
0
e
m

( ) 33 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 4 4 2 2
0
4 2 4 2

+ =

f c m
E n r
e
r e
Be

Electrodynamics tells us that
( )
rms r rms rms
B n c vB E = = , and Eq. (19) gives
( ) f
r
4
mod
= = . Substitution of these
expressions into Eq. (33) yields

( ) 34 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 2 2 2
0
4 4 2

+ =
f c m
B r
e
rms e
Be

Similarly, in the case of proton and neutron
we can write that
( ) 35 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 2 2 2
0
4 4 2

+ =
f c m
B r
p
rms p
Bp

( ) 36 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 2 2 2
0
4 4 2

+ =
f c m
B r
n
rms n
Bn

The radius of free electron is m r
e
14
10 87 . 6

=
(See Appendix A) and the radius of protons
inside the atoms (nuclei) is m r
p
15
10 2 . 1

= ,
p n
r r [9, 10], then we obtain from Eqs. (34)
(35) and (36) the following expressions:

( ) 37 1 10 49 . 8 1 2 1
2
4
4

+ =
f
B
rms
Be

( ) 38 1 10 35 . 2 1 2 1
2
4
9

+ =

f
B
rms
Bp Bn


Then, from Eq. (32) it follows that

7
( ) 39 2
Bp p Be e
m m

Substitution of Eqs. (37) and (38) into Eq.
(39) gives

( ) 40 3 . 3666
1 10 35 . 2 1 2 1
1 10 49 . 8 1 2 1
2
4
9
2
4
4
=

f
B
f
B
rms
rms

For Hz f 1 . 0 = , we get
[ ] { }
[ ] { }
( ) 41 3 . 3666
1 10 35 . 2 1 2 1
1 10 49 . 8 1 2 1
4 7
4 6
=
+
+

rms
rms
B
B

whence we obtain

( ) 42 793 . 0 T B
rms
=

Consequently, Eq. (37) and (38) yields

( ) 43 3 . 3666 =
Be

and
( ) 44 999 . 0
Bp Bn


In order for the forces and have
contrary direction (such as it occurs in the
case, in which the nature of the electromotive
force is electrical) we must have
e
F
p
F
0 <
Be

and 0 >
Bp Bn
(See equations (29) (30)
and (31)), i.e.,
( ) 45 0 1 10 49 . 8 1 2 1
2
4
4
<

+
f
B
rms
and
( ) 46 0 1 10 35 . 2 1 2 1
2
4
9
>

+

f
B
rms

This means that we must have

( ) 47 86 . 151 06 . 0 f B f
rms
< <

In the case of Hz f 1 . 0 = the result is

( ) 48 02 . 48 01 . 0 T B T
rms
< <
















































8












































Fig. 3 Schematic Diagram of a Gravitational Separator of Isotopes (Based on a process of gravity
control patented in July, 31 2008, PI0805046-5). In the case of Uranium enrichment, the gas UF
6
is injected inside the
core of the Gravitational Separator of Isotopes where it is strongly accelerated. Thus, the UF
6
is separated by the
difference in molecular weight between
235
UF
6
and
238
UF
6
. The heavier molecules of the gas (
238
UF
6
) move towards the
cylinder bottom and the lighter ones (
235
UF
6
) remain close to the center. The convection current, produced by a thermal
gradient of about 300C between the bottom and the top of the cylinder, carries the lighter molecules (
235
UF
6
) to the top
while the heavier ones (
238
UF
6
) settle at the bottom, from which they can be continuously withdrawn. The gas
withdrawn at the top of the cylinder is a gas rich in
235
U.

E
= 5 mm
Parallel plate
capacitor (p)
Fe
Fe
1
2
17
18
1
2
6
7
1
2
17
18
=60mm
d = 98 mm
M
g
Metallic ring
(5 mm thickness)
Electric field of
capacitor
Aluminum sphere
(60 mm diameter)
Coil
(f = 0.1Hz)
Dielectric tube

r
1
BS
A
D
D
E
D(rms)
E
A(rms)
Air
Air
Air
Air
Air
1 atm 300K

Air
r
0
=35mm
Air
Air
Air
UF
6
238
UF
6

Core of the
Gravitational
Separator of Isotopes
(Dielectric Chamber)
235
UF
6

235
UF
6

9




























235
UF
6















Fig. 4 Details of the core of the Gravitational Separator of Isotopes. In the case of Uranium enrichment,
the heavier molecules of the gas (
238
UF
6
) move towards the cylinder bottom and the lighter ones (
235
UF
6
) remain close
to the center. The convection current, produced by a thermal gradient of about 300C between the bottom and the top of
the Dielectric Chamber, carries the lighter molecules (
235
UF
6
) to the top while the heavier ones (
238
UF
6
) settle at the
bottom, from which they can be continuously withdrawn. The gas withdrawn at the top of the chamber is a gas rich in
235
U.
Fe
Fe
Coil
A
D
UF
6
235
UF
6
235
UF
6

238
UF
6

Coil
330C
235
UF
6
235
UF
6
238
UF
6
238
UF
6
Dielectric
Chamber




10



Appendix A: The Geometrical Radii of Electron and Proton

It is known that the frequency of
oscillation of a simple spring oscillator is

( ) 1
2
1
A
m
K
f

=

where is the inertial mass attached to the
spring and
m
K is the spring constant (in
Nm
1
). In this case, the restoring force
exerted by the spring is linear and given by

( ) 2 A Kx F =

where x is the displacement from the
equilibrium position.
Now, consider the gravitational force:
For example, above the surface of the Earth,
the force follows the familiar Newtonian
function, i.e.,
2
r m GM F
g g
= , where
is the mass of Earth, is the
gravitational mass of a particle and
g
M
g
m
r is the
distance between the centers. Below Earths
surface the force is linear and given by
( ) 3
3
A r
R
m GM
F
g g

=
where is the radius of Earth.

R
By comparing (A3) with (A2) we
obtain
( ) 4
3
A
x
r
R
GM
m
K
m
K g
g

= =

Making , and substituting (A4)

into (A1) gives

= = R r x

( ) 5
2
1
3
A
R
GM
f
g

In the case of an electron and a positron, we
substitute by ,
g
M
ge
m by
e
and by
, where is the radius of electron (or
positron). Thus, Eq. (A5) becomes

R
e
R
e
R


( ) 6
2
1
3
A
R
Gm
f
e
e ge

=
The value of
e
varies with the density of
energy [3]. When the electron and the
positron are distant from each other and the
local density of energy is small, the value of
e
becomes very close to 1. However, when
the electron and the positron are penetrating
one another, the energy densities in each
particle become very strong due to the
proximity of their electrical charges e and,
consequently, the value of
e
strongly
increases. In order to calculate the value of
e
under these conditions ( ), we
start from the expression of correlation
between electric charge and gravitational
mass, obtained in a previous work [
e
R r x = =
q
3]:

( )
( ) 7 4
0
A i m G q
imaginary g
=

where is the imaginary
gravitational mass, and
(imaginary g
m
)
1 = i .

In the case of electron, Eq. (A7) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( ) 8 10 6 . 1 4
4
4
4
19
0
3
2
0
2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
A C m G
i m G
i m G
i m G q
real e i e
real e i e
imaginary e i e
imaginary ge e

= =
= =
= =
= =

where we obtain

( ) 9 10 8 . 1
21
A
e
=

11
This is therefore, the value of
e
increased
by the strong density of energy produced by
the electrical charges of the two particles,
under previously mentioned conditions.
e
Given that
e i e ge
m m
0
= , Eq. (A6)
yields
( ) 10
2
1
3
0
2
A
R
m G
f
e
e i e

=

From Quantum Mechanics, we know that

( ) 11
2
0
A c m hf
i
=

where is the Plancks constant. Thus, in
the case of we get
h
e i i
m m
0 0
=

( ) 12
2
0
A
h
c m
f
e i
=

By comparing (A10) and (A12) we
conclude that

( ) 13
2
1
3
0
2 2
0
A
R
m G
h
c m
e
e i e e i

=

Isolating the radius , we get:
e
R

( ) 14 10 87 . 6
2
14
2
0
3
2
3
1
A m
c
h
m
G
R
e
e i
e

Compare this value with the Compton sized
electron, which predicts
and also with standardized result recently
obtained of [
m R
e
13
10 86 . 3

=
m R
e
13
10 7 4

= 11].
In the case of proton, we have

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( ) 15 10 6 . 1 4
4
4
4
19
0
3
2
0
2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
A C m G
i m G
i m G
i m G q
real p i p
real p i p
imaginary p i p
imaginary gp p

= =
= =
= =
= =

where we obtain

( ) 16 10 7 . 9
17
A
p
=

Thus, the result is

( ) 17 10 72 . 3
2
17
2
0
3
2
3
1
A m
c
h
m
G
R
p
p i
p

Note that these radii, given by
Equations ( ) 14 A and ( , are the radii of
free electrons and free protons (when the
particle and antiparticle (in isolation)
penetrate themselves mutually).
) 17 A
Inside the atoms (nuclei) the radius of
protons is well-known. For example, protons,
as the hydrogen nuclei, have a radius given
by [ m R
p
15
10 2 . 1

9, 10]. The strong
increase in respect to the value given by Eq.
(A17) is due to the interaction with the
electron of the atom.





























12




References


[1] Emsley, John (2001). "Uranium". Nature's Building
Blocks: An A to Z Guide to the Elements. Oxford:
Oxford University Press. p. 478.

[2] "Uranium Enrichment". Argonne National Laboratory.
Retrieved 2007-02-11.

[3] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of
the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific
Journal of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-
232.

[4] De Aquino, F. (2010) Gravity Control by means of
Electromagnetic Field through Gas at Ultra-Low
Pressure, Pacific Journal of Science and Technology,
11(2) November 2010, pp.178-247, Physics/0701091.

[5] Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo, McGraw-
Hill, p. 270.

[6] Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968) Physics, J. Willey &
Sons, Portuguese Version, Ed. USP, p.1124.

[7] De Aquino, F. (2012) A System to convert Gravitational
Energy directly into Electrical Energy,
http://viXra.org/abs/1205.0119

[8] Chalmers, J.A., (1967) Atmospheric Electricity,
Pergamon press, Oxford, London; Kamsali, N. et al.,
(2011) Advanced Air Pollution, chapter 20, DOI:
10.5772/17163, edited by Farhad Nejadkoorki, Publisher:
InTech, ISBN 978-953-307-511-2, under CC BY-NC-
SA 3.0 license.

[9] N.D. Cook (2010). Models of the Atomic Nucleus (2nd
ed.). Springer. p. 57 ff.. ISBN 978-3-642-14736-4.

[10] K.S. Krane (1987). Introductory Nuclear Physics.
Wiley-VCH. ISBN 0-471-80553-X.

[11] Mac Gregor. M. H., (1992) The Enigmatic Electron.
Boston: Klurer Academic, 1992, pp. 4-5.




Gravitational Atomic Synthesis at Room Temperature

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2012 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.


It is described a process for creating new atoms starting from pre-existing atoms. We show that all the elements of
the periodic table can be synthesized, at room temperature, by a gravitational process based on the intensification of
the gravitational interaction by means of electromagnetic fields.

Key words: Modified theories of gravity, Atom manipulation, Atomic forces.
PACS: 04.50.Kd, 37.90.+j, 34.20.-b.


1. Introduction

Rutherford [1] was the first to observe
the transmutation of the atoms, and also the
first to perform transmutation of the atoms.
That gave him a double justification for
being labeled an alchemist.
It is currently believed that the
synthesis of precious metals, a symbolic goal
long sought by alchemists, is only possible
with methods involving either nuclear
reactors or particle accelerators. However, it
will be shown here that all the elements of
the periodic table can be synthesized, at room
temperature, by a gravitational process based
on the intensification of the gravitational
interaction by means of electromagnetic
fields. The process is very simple, but it
requires extremely-low frequency (ELF)
magnetic field with very strong intensity
(BB
rms
> 2,500T).
The strongest continuous magnetic
field yet produced in a laboratory had 45 T
(Florida State University's National High
Magnetic Field Laboratory in Tallahassee,
USA) [2]. The strongest (pulsed) magnetic
field yet obtained non-destructively in a
laboratory had about 100T. (National High
Magnetic Field Laboratory, Los Alamos
National Laboratory, USA) [3]. The strongest
pulsed magnetic field yet obtained in a
laboratory, destroying the used equipment,
but not the laboratory itself (Institute for
Solid State Physics, Tokyo) reached 730 T .
The strongest (pulsed) magnetic field ever
obtained (with explosives) in a laboratory
(VNIIEF in Sarov, Russia, 1998) reached
2,800T

[4].



2. Theory

The quantization of gravity showed
that the gravitational mass m
g
and the
inertial mass m
i
are correlated by means of
the following factor [5]:

( ) 1 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ = =
c m
p
m
m
i i
g

where is the rest inertial mass of the
particle and
0 i
m
p is the variation in the
particles kinetic momentum; is the speed
of light.
c
When p is produced by the
absorption of a photon with wavelength , it
is expressed by h p = . In this case, Eq.
(1) becomes
( ) 2 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
0

+ =

+ =

c m h
m
m
i
i
g

where c m h
i0 0
= is the DeBroglie
wavelength for the particle with rest inertial
mass .
0 i
m
In general, the momentum variation
p is expressed by t F p = where is the
applied force during a time interval
F
t . Note
that there is no restriction concerning the
nature of the force, i.e., it can be mechanical,
electromagnetic, etc. For example, we can
2
look on the momentum variation as due
to absorption or emission of electromagnetic
energy by the particle.
p
This means that, by means of
electromagnetic fields, the gravitational mass
can be decreased down to become negative
and increased (independently of the inertial
mass ). In this way, the gravitational
forces can be intensified. Consequently, we
can use, for example, oscillating magnetic
fields in order to intensify the gravitational
interaction between electrons and protons.
i
m
From Electrodynamics we know that
when an electromagnetic wave with
frequency and velocity incides on a
material with relative permittivity
f c
r
,
relative magnetic permeability
r
and
electrical conductivity , its velocity is
reduced to
r
n c v = where is the index of
refraction of the material, given by [
r
n
6]

( ) ( ) 3 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n


If >> , f 2 = , Eq. (3) reduces to

( ) 4
4
0
f
n
r
r

=

Thus, the wavelength of the incident
radiation (See Fig. 2) becomes

( ) 5
4
mod

f n n
f c
f
v
r r
= = = =










Fig. 2 Modified Electromagnetic Wave. The
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave can be
strongly reduced, but its frequency remains the same.
v = c v = c/n
r
= c/f

mod
= v/f = c/n
r
f
n
r

If a lamina with thickness equal to
contains atoms/m n
3
,

then the number of
atoms per area unit is n . Thus, if the
electromagnetic radiation with frequency
incides on an area of the lamina it
reaches
f S
nS atoms. If it incides on the total
area of the lamina, , then the total number
of atoms reached by the radiation is
f
S

f
nS N = . The number of atoms per unit of
volume, , is given by n
( ) 6
0
A
N
n

=
where is the
Avogadros number;
kmole atoms N / 10 02 . 6
26
0
=
is the matter density
of the lamina (in kg/m
3
) and A is the molar
mass(kg/kmole).
When an electromagnetic wave incides
on the lamina, it strikes front atoms,
where
f
N
( )
m f f
S n N ,
m
is the diameter of
the atom. Thus, the electromagnetic wave
incides effectively on an area , where
m f
S N S=
2
4
1
m m
S = is the cross section area of one atom.
After these collisions, it carries out
with the other atoms (See Fig.3).
collisions
n










Fig. 3 Collisions inside the lamina.
atom
S
m
Wave


Thus, the total number of collisions in the
volume S is

( )
( ) 7

S n
S n S n S n n N N
m
m m l m l collisions f collisions
=
= + = + =


The power density, , of the radiation on the
lamina can be expressed by
D
( ) 8
m f
S N
P
S
P
D = =
3
We can express the total mean number
of collisions in each atom, , by means of
the following equation
1
n

( ) 9
1
N
N n
n
collisions photons total
=

Since in each collision a momentum h is
transferred to the atom, then the total
momentum transferred to the lamina will be
( ) h N n p
1
= . Therefore, in accordance
with Eq. (1), we can write that

( )
( )
( )
( ) 10 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
1
0

+ =
=

+ =

collisions photons total

l i
l g
N n
N n
m
m


Since Eq. (7) gives S n N
l collisions
= , we get
( ) (11
2
S n
hf
P
N n
l collisions photons total

= )

Substitution of Eq. (11) into Eq. (10) yields

( )
( )
( ) ( ) 12 1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

S n
hf
P
m
m
l
l i
l g


Substitution of given by Eq. (8) into Eq.
(12) gives
P

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 13 1
1
1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

c m
S n
f
D S N
m
m
l i
l
m f
l i
l g


Substitution of ( )
m f l f
S n N and
m f
S N S =
into Eq. (13) results

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 14 1
1
1 2 1
2
2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

cf m
D S S n
m
m
l i
m m f l
l i
l g

where
( ) ( ) ( ) l l l i
V m =
0
.
Now, considering that the lamina is
inside an ELF electromagnetic field with
E and B , then we can write that [7]
( )
( ) 15
2
0
2
c
E n
D
l r

=
Substitution of Eq. (15) into Eq. (14) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 16 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
2 2
0 0
2 2 2 2 3
0

+ =


f c m
E S S n n
m
m
l i
m m f l l r
l i
l g

Note that t E E
m
sin = .The average value
for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E because E varies
sinusoidaly ( is the maximum value
for
m
E
E ). On the other hand, 2
m rms
E E = .
Consequently we can replace
4
E for .
Thus, for
4
rms
E
mod
= , the equation above can
be rewritten as follows

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 17 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
mod
2 2
0 0
2 2 2 2 3
0

+ =


f c m
E S S n n
m
m
l i
rms m m f l l r
l i
l g

Electrodynamics tells us that
( )
( )
rms l r rms rms
B n c vB E = = . Substitution of
this expression into Eq. (17) gives

( )
( ) ( ) ( )
( ) 18 1
4
1 2 1
2 2
mod
4 2
0
2
0
4 2 4 4 4 6
0

+ = =
l r l i
rms m m f l
l i
l g
n f m
B S S n
m
m

Since
( ) l r
n =
mod
then Eq. (18) can be
rewritten in the following form

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 19 1
4
1 2 1
2 2 2
0
2
0
4 2 4 4 4 6
0

+ = =
f c m
B S S n
m
m
l i
rms m m f l
l i
l g

In order to calculate the expressions of
Be
for the particular case of a electron of
the electrophere of a atom, subjected to an
external magnetic field with frequency
rms
B
4
f , we must substitute in Eq. (19)
for
l
n
3
3
4
1 1
e e
r V = , for
f
S ( )
e e e
V SSA ( is
the specific surface area for electrons in this
case:
e
SSA
e e xe e e e e e e
V r V A m A SSA
2
2
1
2
1
2 = = = ),
by ,
m
S
2
xe e
r S = by
xe m
r 2 = and
by . The result is
( ) l i
m
0
e
m

( ) 20 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 18 2 2
0
2
4 22 2

+ =
f r m c
B r
e e
rms xe
Be

In order to calculate the value of we
start considering a hydrogen atom, where the
electron spins around the proton with a
velocity . The electrical
force acting on the proton is
xe
r
1 6
. 10 3

= s m v
e
2
1 0
2
4 r e F
e
= ,
which is equal to the centrifuge force
where
0
2
r m F
e p c
=
e
is the angular velocity
of the electron and is the distance between
the inertial center of the proton and the center
of the moving proton (See Fig. 5, where we
conclude that
0
r
( )
p xp p
r r r r + = +
0
2 , where
is the radius of the sphere whose external
area is equivalent to the increased area of the
proton). Thus, we get
xp
r
( )
p xp
r r r =
2
1
0
.














Fig. 5 The deformation of the proton.
xp
r
-
F
e
F
e
v
e
K

v
e
r
p
r
0
Substitution of this value into expression of
gives
e c
F F =
m r
v m
e
r
p
e p
xp
14
2
0
2
10 2 . 3
4

= + =

Therefore, we can write that
p xp xp
r k r = ,
where
6 . 25 = =
p
xp
xp
r
r
k
The electron is similarly deformed by the
relative movement of the proton in respect to
it. In this case, by analogy, we can write that
m r
v m
e
r
e
e e
xe
11
2
0
2
10 4 . 6
4

= + =

and
e xe xe
r k r = , where is the radius of the
sphere whose external area is equivalent to
the increased area of the electron. The radius
of free electron is
xe
r
m r
e
14
10 87 . 6

= (See
Appendix A). However, for electrons in the
atomic eletrosphere of atoms the value of
must be calculated starting from Quantum
Mechanics. The wave packet that describes
the electron satisfies an uncertainty principle
e
r
( ) h
2
1
x p , where and k p = h k is
the approximate extension of the wave
packet. Thus, we can write that ( )
2
1
x k .
For the ``square'' packet the full width in is k
0
2 = k ( c m h
e
=
0
is the average
wavelength). The width in x is a little harder
to define, but, lets use the first node in the
probability found at ( ) = 2 2
0
x or
0
= x . So, the width of the wave packet is
twice this or
0
2 = x . Obviously,
cannot be greater than , i.e., must be
smaller and close to
e
r 2
x
e
r
m c m h
e
12
0
10 43 . 2

= = .
Then, assuming that , we
get
m r
e
12
10 4 . 2



6 . 26 = =
e
xe
xe
r
r
k

Note that
xp xe
k k .
Substitution of these values into Eq.
(20) gives

5
( ) 21 1 10 8 . 2 1 2 1
1 10 8 . 3 1 2 1
2
4
42
2
4 4 22
57

+ =
=

+ =
f
B
f
B r k
rms
rms e xe
Be

Similarly, in the case of proton and neutron

we can write that
( ) 22 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 2 2
0
2
4 4 22 2

+ =
f m c
B r k
p
rms p xp
Bp

( ) 23 1
56 . 45
1 2 1
2 2 2 2
0
4 4 2

+ =
f c m
B r
n
rms n
Bn

In the case of the neutron, due to its

electric charge be null. The radius of protons
inside the atoms (nuclei) is
1 =
xn
k
m r
p
15
10 2 . 1

=
[8,9], , then we obtain from Eqs. (22)
and (23) the following expressions:
p n
r r
( ) 24 1 10 2 . 2 1 2 1
2
4
22

+ =
f
B
rms
Bp

( ) 25 1 10 35 . 2 1 2 1
2
4
9

+ =

f
B
rms
Bn

When a strong magnetic field is applied
on the atom, the enormous value of
rms
B
Be
(See
Eq. 21) makes the gravitational force
between the electrons greater than the
electric force due to its charges, and
consequently, the electrons are joined in pairs
(Cooper pairs)[10]. However, due to the
vales of
Be
and
Bp
, the gravitational
attraction between the electrons of the K
shell and the protons of the nucleus becomes
greater than the nuclear force, i.e.,
( ) 26
2
1
2
1
N
e p
Be Bp
ge gp
F
r
m m
G
r
m m
G > =
Then, the proton more weakly bound to the
nucleus is ejected towards the nearest
electron. When they collide, there occurs the
formation of one neutron and one neutrino,
according the well-known reaction
e
n e p + + . Since the neutron is beyond
the reach of the nuclear force, it is not
attracted to the nucleus and leaves the atom.
The final result is that the atom loses a
proton and an electron and is transformed in
a new atom. But the transmutation is not
completed until the magnetic field is turned
off. When this occurs the Cooper pairs are
broken, and the new atom leaves the
transitory state, and passes to the normal
state.
In order to satisfy the condition
expressed by Eq. (26), we must have

( ) 27 10 3
48
2
1
>
e p
N
Be Bp
m Gm
r F


By substitution of Eq. (21) and (22) into Eq.
(27), we obtain
7
2
10 6 >
f
B
rms
Thus, for Hz f 1 . 0 = we conclude that the
required value of is
rms
B

T B
rms
500 , 2 >

This means that, if we subject, for
example, an amount of
198
Hg (80 electrons,
80 protons, 118 neutrons) to a magnetic field
with BB
rms
>2,500 T and frequency 0.1Hz the
Hg loses 1 proton and 1 electron and
consequently will be transmuted to Au (79
electrons, 79 protons, 118 neutrons) when the
magnetic field is turned off. Besides the
transformation of mercury into gold, we can
make several transmutations. For example, if
the Au is after subjected to the same
magnetic field it will be transmuted to Pt
(78 electrons, 78 protons, 118 neutrons).
Similarly, if Cd (48 electrons, 48 protons,
62 neutrons) is subjected to the mentioned
field it will be transmuted to Ag (47
electrons, 47 protons, 62 neutrons). Also U
can be easily obtained by this process, i.e., if
we subject an amount of Np (93 electrons,
93 protons, 143 neutrons) to the magnetic
field with >2,500 T and frequency 0.1Hz,
the Np loses 1 proton and 1 electron and
consequently will be transmuted to U (92
electrons, 92 protons, 143 neutrons).
198
197
197
196
110
109
235
236
236
235

6

Appendix A: The Geometrical Radii of Electron and Proton

It is known that the frequency of
oscillation of a simple spring oscillator is

( ) 1
2
1
A
m
K
f

=

where is the inertial mass attached to the
spring and
m
K is the spring constant (in
Nm
1
). In this case, the restoring force
exerted by the spring is linear and given by

( ) 2 A Kx F =

where x is the displacement from the
equilibrium position.
Now, consider the gravitational force:
For example, above the surface of the Earth,
the force follows the familiar Newtonian
function, i.e.,
2
r m GM F
g g
= , where
is the mass of Earth, is the
gravitational mass of a particle and
g
M
g
m
r is the
distance between the centers. Below Earths
surface the force is linear and given by
( ) 3
3
A r
R
m GM
F
g g

=
where is the radius of Earth.

R
By comparing (A3) with (A2) we
obtain
( ) 4
3
A
x
r
R
GM
m
K
m
K g
g

= =

Making , and substituting (A4)

into (A1) gives

= = R r x

( ) 5
2
1
3
A
R
GM
f
g

In the case of an electron and a positron, we
substitute by ,
g
M
ge
m by
e
and by
, where is the radius of electron (or
positron). Thus, Eq. (A5) becomes

R
e
R
e
R



( ) 6
2
1
3
A
R
Gm
f
e
e ge

=
The value of
e
varies with the density of
energy [5]. When the electron and the
positron are distant from each other and the
local density of energy is small, the value of
e
becomes very close to 1. However, when
the electron and the positron are penetrating
one another, the energy densities in each
particle become very strong due to the
proximity of their electrical charges e and,
consequently, the value of
e
strongly
increases. In order to calculate the value of
e
under these conditions ( ), we
start from the expression of correlation
between electric charge and gravitational
mass, obtained in a previous work [
e
R r x = =
q
5]:

( )
( ) 7 4
0
A i m G q
imaginary g
=

where is the imaginary
gravitational mass, and
(imaginary g
m
)
1 = i .

In the case of electron, Eq. (A7) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( ) 8 10 6 . 1 4
4
4
4
19
0
3
2
0
2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
A C m G
i m G
i m G
i m G q
real e i e
real e i e
imaginary e i e
imaginary ge e

= =
= =
= =
= =

where we obtain

( ) 9 10 8 . 1
21
A
e
=

This is therefore, the value of
e
increased
by the strong density of energy produced by
the electrical charges of the two particles,
under previously mentioned conditions.
e
7
Given that
e i e ge
m m
0
= , Eq. (A6)
yields
( ) 10
2
1
3
0
2
A
R
m G
f
e
e i e

=

From Quantum Mechanics, we know that

( ) 11
2
0
A c m hf
i
=

where is the Plancks constant. Thus, in
the case of we get
h
e i i
m m
0 0
=

( ) 12
2
0
A
h
c m
f
e i
=

By comparing (A10) and (A12) we
conclude that

( ) 13
2
1
3
0
2 2
0
A
R
m G
h
c m
e
e i e e i

=

Isolating the radius , we get:
e
R

( ) 14 10 87 . 6
2
14
2
0
3
2
3
1
A m
c
h
m
G
R
e
e i
e

Compare this value with the Compton sized
electron, which predicts
and also with standardized result recently
obtained of [
m R
e
13
10 86 . 3

=
m R
e
13
10 7 4

= 11].
In the case of proton, we have

( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) ( ) 15 10 6 . 1 4
4
4
4
19
0
3
2
0
2
0
3
2
0
0 0
0
A C m G
i m G
i m G
i m G q
real p i p
real p i p
imaginary p i p
imaginary gp p

= =
= =
= =
= =

where we obtain

( ) 16 10 7 . 9
17
A
p
=

Thus, the result is

( ) 17 10 72 . 3
2
17
2
0
3
2
3
1
A m
c
h
m
G
R
p
p i
p

Note that these radii, given by
Equations ( ) 14 A and ( , are the radii of
free electrons and free protons (when the
particle and antiparticle (in isolation)
penetrate themselves mutually).
) 17 A
Inside the atoms (nuclei) the radius of
protons is well-known. For example, protons,
as the hydrogen nuclei, have a radius given
by [ m R
p
15
10 2 . 1

8,9]. The strong
increase in respect to the value given by Eq.
(A17) is due to the interaction with the
electron of the atom.































8

References

[1] Rutherford, E. (1933) The Artificial Transmutation of
the Elements; Rutherford, E. (1937)The Newer Alchemy.

[2] "World's Most Powerful Magnet Tested Ushers in New
Era for Steady High Field Research". National High
Magnetic Field Laboratory.
http://www.magnet.fsu.edu/mediacenter/news/
pressreleases/1999december17.html

[3] http://gizmodo.com/5896092/the-worlds-most-
powerful-non+destructive-magnet-screams-like-a-
banshee.

[4] Bykov, A.I et al., Pulsed Power Conference, 1999.
Digest of Technical Papers. 12th IEEE International, 2,
pp. 746 749.

[5] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of
the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific
Journal of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-
232.

[6] Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo, McGraw-
Hill, p. 270.

[7] Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968) Physics, J. Willey &
Sons, Portuguese Version, Ed. USP, p.1124.

[8] N.D. Cook (2010). Models of the Atomic Nucleus (2nd
ed.). Springer. p. 57 ff.. ISBN 978-3-642-14736-4.

[9] K.S. Krane (1987). Introductory Nuclear Physics.
Wiley-VCH. ISBN 0-471-80553-X.

[10] De Aquino, F. (2012) Superconducting State generated
by Cooper Pairs bound by Intensified Gravitational
Interaction, http://vixra.org/abs/1207.0008.

[11] Mac Gregor. M. H., (1992) The Enigmatic Electron.
Boston: Klurer Academic, 1992, pp. 4-5.














Ultrafast Conversion of Graphite to Diamond in
Gravitational Pressure Apparatus

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2012 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.

Currently the artificial production of diamond is very expensive because it consumes large amounts of energy in order
to produce a single diamond. Here, we propose a new type of press based on the intensification of the gravitational
acceleration. This Gravitational Press can generate pressures several times more intense than the 80GPa required for
ultrafast transformation of graphite into diamond. In addition, due to the enormous pressure that the Gravitational
Press can produce, the "synthesis capsule" may be very large (up to about 1000 cm
3
in size). This is sufficient to
produce diamonds with up to 100 carats (20g) or more. On the other hand, besides the ultrafast conversion, the energy
required for the Gravitational Presses is very low, in such a way that the production cost of the diamonds becomes
very low, what means that they could be produced on a large scale.

Key words: Modified theories of gravity, High-pressure apparatus, Graphite, Diamond.
PACS: 04.50.Kd, 07.35.+k, 81.05.uf , 81.05.ug


1. Introduction

After the discovery that diamond was
pure carbon, many attempts were made to
convert various carbon forms into diamond.
Converting graphite into diamond has been a
long held dream of alchemists. The artificial
production of diamond was first achieved by
H.T Hall in 1955. He used a press capable of
producing pressures above 10 GPa and
temperatures above 2,000 C [1].
Today, there are several methods to
produce synthetic diamond. The more widely
utilized method uses high pressure and high
temperature (HPHT) of the order of 10 GPa
and 2500C during many hours in order to
produce a single diamond. The fact that this
process requires high pressure and high
temperatures during a long time means that it
consumes large amounts of energy, and this
is the reason why the production cost of
artificial diamond is so expensive. The
second method, using chemical vapor
deposition (CVD), creates a carbon plasma
over a substrate onto which the carbon atoms
deposit to form diamond. Other methods
include explosive formation and sonication
of graphite solutions [2,3,4].
In the HPHT method, there are three
main press designs used to supply the
pressure and temperature necessary to
produce synthetic diamond: the Belt press,



the Cubic press and the split-sphere (BARS)
press. Typical pressures and temperatures
achievable are of the order of 10 GPa and
2500C [5].
Diamonds may be formed in the
Earths mantle mainly by direct transition,
graphite to diamond or by systems involving
carbon dissolved in molten metals. The
classic high-pressure, high-temperature
synthesis of diamond utilizes molten
transition metals as solvent/catalysts.
Converting diamond from graphite in the
absence of a catalyst requires pressures that
are significantly higher than those at
equilibrium coexistence [6-12]. At lower
temperatures, the formation of the metastable
hexagonal polymorph of diamond is favored
instead of the more stable cubic diamond [7,
10-12]. These phenomena cannot be
explained by the concerted mechanism
suggested in previous theoretical studies [13-
17]. However, recently Michele Parrinello,
Professor of Computational Science at ETH
Zurich, and his team have developed a
method by which they have successfully
simulated this phase transition accurately and
adequately using computer models [18].
Instead of happening concerted, all at once,
the conversion evidently takes place in a step
by step process involving the formation of a
2
diamond seed in the graphite, which is then
transformed completely at high pressure. In
quantitative agreement with the ab initio
calculations of Tateyama at al. [19], the
stability of diamond relative to graphite
increases with pressure whereas the barrier
separating two phases decreases. Parrinellos
work shows that at a pressure of 80 GPa and
temperature between 0 and 1,000K graphite
reaches a lattice instability point and
undergoes an ultrafast transformation to
diamond as was previously observed in ab
initio simulations by Scandolo et al [20].
Here, we propose a new type of press
based on the intensification of the gravitational
acceleration
*
. This press can generate pressures
several times more intense

than the 80GPa

required for the ultrafast transformation of
graphite to diamond. In addition, due to the
enormous pressure that the Gravitational Press
can produce (>>80GPa), the ceramic cube
("synthesis capsule") can be very large (up to
about 1000 cm
3
in size). This is sufficient to
produce diamonds up to 100 carats (20g) or
more. On the other hand, besides the ultrafast
conversion, the energy required for the
Gravitational Presses is very low, in such a way
that the production cost of the diamonds becomes
very low, what means that they could be
produced on a large scale.

2. Theory

From the quantization of gravity it
follows that the gravitational mass m
g
and
the inertial mass m
i
are correlated by means
of the following factor
[21]:
( ) 1 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ = =
c m
p
m
m
i i
g

*
De Aquino, F. (2008) Process and Device for Controlling
the Locally the Gravitational Mass and the Gravity
Acceleration, BR Patent Number: PI0805046-5, J uly 31,
2008.

The limit is basically determined by the compression

resistance of the material of the piston and anvils of the
Gravitational Press since it can produce pressures far beyond
1000 GPa.

where is the rest inertial mass of the
particle and
0 i
m
p is the variation in the
particles kinetic momentum; is the speed
of light.
c
When p is produced by the
absorption of a photon with wavelength , it
is expressed by h p = . In this case, Eq.
(1) becomes
( ) 2 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
0

+ =

+ =

c m h
m
m
i
i
g
where c m h
i0 0
= is the De Broglie
wavelength for the particle with rest inertial
mass .
0 i
m
It has been shown that there is an
additional effect - Gravitational Shielding
effect - produced by a substance whose
gravitational mass was reduced or made
negative [22]. The effect extends beyond
substance (gravitational shielding) , up to a
certain distance from it (along the central
axis of gravitational shielding). This effect
shows that in this region the gravity
acceleration, , is reduced at the same
proportion, i.e.,
1
g
g g
1
1
= where
0
1
i g
m m = and g is the gravity
acceleration before the gravitational
shielding). Consequently, after a second
gravitational shielding, the gravity will be
given by g g g
2 1 1 2
2
= = , where
2
is
the value of the ratio
0 i g
m m for the second
gravitational shielding. In a generalized way,
we can write that after the nth gravitational
shielding the gravity, , will be given by
n
g

( ) 3 ...
3 2 1
g g
n
n
=

This possibility shows that, by means
of a battery of gravitational shieldings, we
can make particles acquire enormous
accelerations. In practice, this is the basis to
the conception of the Gravitational Press.
3
From Electrodynamics we know that
when an electromagnetic wave with
frequency and velocity incides on a
material with relative permittivity
f c
r
,
relative magnetic permeability
r
and
electrical conductivity , its velocity is
reduced to
r
n c v = where is the index of
refraction of the material, given by [
r
n
23]
( ) ( ) 4 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n
If >> f , 2 = , Eq. (4) reduces to
( ) 5
4
0
f
n
r
r

=
Thus, the wavelength of the incident
radiation (See Fig. 1) becomes
( ) 6
4
mod

f n n
f c
f
v
r r
= = = =











Fig. 1 Modified Electromagnetic Wave. The
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave can be
strongly reduced, but its frequency remains the same.
v =c v =c/n
r
=c/f

mod
=v/f =c/n
r
f
n
r

If a lamina with thickness equal to
contains atoms/m n
3
,

then the number of
atoms per area unit is n . Thus, if the
electromagnetic radiation with frequency
incides on an area of the lamina it
reaches
f S
nS atoms. If it incides on the total
area of the lamina, , then the total number
of atoms reached by the radiation is
f
S

f
nS N = . The number of atoms per unit of
volume, , is given by n

( ) 7
0
A
N
n

=

where is the
Avogadros number;
kmole atoms N / 10 02 . 6
26
0
=
is the matter density
of the lamina (in kg/m
3
) and A is the molar
mass(kg/kmole).
When an electromagnetic wave incides
on the lamina, it strikes front atoms,
where
f
N
( )
m f f
S n N ,
m
is the diameter of
the atom. Thus, the electromagnetic wave
incides effectively on an area , where
m f
S N S=
2
4
1
m m
S = is the cross section area of one atom.
After these collisions, it carries out
with the other atoms (See Fig.2).
collisions
n










Fig. 2 Collisions inside the lamina.
atom
S
m
Wave


Thus, the total number of collisions in the
volume S is

( )
( ) 8

S n
S n S n S n n N N
m
m m l m l collisions f collisions
=
= + = + =


The power density, , of the radiation on the
lamina can be expressed by
D

( ) 9
m f
S N
P
S
P
D = =

We can express the total mean number
of collisions in each atom, , by means of
the following equation
1
n

( ) 10
1
N
N n
n
collisions photons total
=

Since in each collision a momentum h is
transferred to the atom, then the total
momentum transferred to the lamina will be
4
( ) h N n p
1
= . Therefore, in accordance
with Eq. (1), we can write that

( )
( )
( )
( ) 11 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
1
0

+ =
=

+ =

collisions photons total

l i
l g
N n
N n
m
m

Since Eq. (8) gives S n N
l collisions
= , we get
( ) (12
2
S n
hf
P
N n
l collisions photons total

= )

Substitution of Eq. (12) into Eq. (11) yields

( )
( )
( ) ( ) 13 1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

S n
hf
P
m
m
l
l i
l g

Substitution of given by Eq. (9) into Eq.
(13) gives
P

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 14 1
1
1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

c m
S n
f
D S N
m
m
l i
l
m f
l i
l g

Substitution of ( )
m f l f
S n N and
m f
S N S =
into Eq. (14) results

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 15 1
1
1 2 1
2
2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

cf m
D S S n
m
m
l i
m m f l
l i
l g

where
( ) ( ) ( ) l l l i
V m =
0
.
Now, considering that the lamina is
inside an ELF electromagnetic field with
E andB , then we can write that [24]

( )
( ) 16
2
0
2
c
E n
D
l r

=

Substitution of Eq. (16) into Eq. (15) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 17 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
2 2
0 0
2 2 2 2 3
0

+ =


f c m
E S S n n
m
m
l i
m m f l l r
l i
l g

In the case in which the area is just the
area of the cross-section of the lamina
f
S
( )

S ,
we obtain from Eq. (17), considering that
( ) ( )


S m
l l i
=
0
, the following expression

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 18 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
2 2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
m m l l r
l i
l g

According to Eq. (6) we have
( )
( ) 19
f n
c
f
v
l r
= = =
mod

Substitution of Eq. (19) into Eq. (18) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 20 1
4
1 2 1
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4
0

+ =
f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
m m
l l r
l i
l g

Note that t E E
m
sin = .The average value
for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E because E varies
sinusoidaly ( is the maximum value
for
m
E
E ). On the other hand, 2
m rms
E E = .
Consequently we can change
4
E by ,
and the equation above can be rewritten as
follows
4
rms
E

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 21 1
4
1 2 1
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4
0

+ =
= =
f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
rms m m
l l r
l i
l g

Now consider the system
(Gravitational Press) shown in Fig.3.
Inside the system there is a dielectric
tube ( 1
r
) with the following characteristics:
mm 60 = ,
2 3 2
10 83 . 2 4 m S

= =

.
Inside the tube there is an Aluminum sphere
5
with 30mm radius and mass
kg M
gs
30536 . 0 = . The tube is filled with air
at ambient temperature and 1atm. Thus,
inside the tube, the air density is

( ) 22 . 2 . 1
3
= m kg
air

The number of atoms of air (Nitrogen) per
unit of volume, , according to Eq.(7), is
given by
air
n

( ) 23 / 10 16 . 5
3 25 0
m atoms
A
N
n
N
air
air
= =


The parallel metallic plates (p), shown
in Fig.3 are subjected to different drop
voltages. The two sets of plates (D), placed
on the extremes of the tube, are subjected to
( )
V V
rms D
896 14. = at Hz f 1 = , while the
central set of plates (A) is subjected to
( )
V V
rms A
55 183. = at Hz f 1 = . Since ,
then the intensity of the electric field, which
passes through the 36 cylindrical air laminas
(each one with 5mm thickness) of the two
sets (D), is
mm d 98 =

( ) ( )
m V d V E
rms D rms D
/ .
2
10 582 1 = =

and the intensity of the electric field, which
passes through the 7 cylindrical air laminas
of the central set (A), is given by

( ) ( )
m V d V E
rms A rms A
/ .
3
10 873 1 = =

Note that the metallic rings (5mm
thickness) are positioned in such way to
block the electric field out of the cylindrical
air laminas. The objective is to turn each one
of these laminas into a Gravity Control Cell
(GCC) [22]. Thus, the system shown in Fig.
3 has 3 sets of GCC. Two with 18 GCC each
and one with 7 GCC. The two sets with 18
GCC each are positioned at the extremes of
the tube (D). They work as gravitational
decelerator while the other set with 7 GCC
(A) works as a gravitational accelerator,
intensifying the gravity acceleration
produced by the mass of the
Aluminum sphere. According to Eq. (3), this
gravity, after the GCC becomes
gs
M
th
7
2
0
7
7
r GM g
gs
= , where
( ) ( ) l i l g
m m =
given by Eq. (21) and mm r
0
35 = is the
distance between the center of the Aluminum
sphere and the surface of the first GCC of the
set (A).
The objective of the sets (D), with 18
GCC each, is to reduce strongly the value of
the external gravity along the axis of the
tube. In this case, the value of the external
gravity, , is reduced by the factor ,
where
ext
g
ext d
g
18

2
10

=
d
. For example, if the base
BS of the system is positioned on the Earth
surface, then is reduced
to and, after the set A, it is increased
by . Since the system is designed for
2
/ 81 . 9 s m g
ext
=
ext d
g
18

5 . 308 = , then the gravity acceleration on

the sphere becomes ,
this value is much smaller than
2 18 18 7
/ 10 6 . 2 s m g
ext d

=
2 8 2
/ 10 26 . 2 s m r GM g
s gs sphere

= = .
This values of and
d
, according to
Eq. (21) are given by

( ) ( )
( )
( ) 24 1 10 97 1 1 2 1
1
4
1 2 1
4 9
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4

+ =
=

+ =

rms A
air
rms A
m m
air air r
E
f c
E S S n n
.

( ) ( )
( )
( ) 25 1 10 97 1 1 2 1
1
4
1 2 1
4 9
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4

+ =
=

+ =

rms D
air
rms D
m m
air air r
d
E
f c
E S S n n
.

6
where , since
( )
1
air r
n ( ) <<

;
, ,
3 25
/ 10 16 . 5 m atoms n
air
= m
m
10
10 55 . 1

=
2 20 2
10 88 . 1 4 m S
m m

= = and Hz f 1 = .





Since and
, Eq. (24) and (25) ,
given the following values
( )
m V E
rms A
/ .
3
10 873 1 =
( )
m V E
rms D
/ .
2
10 582 1 =






( ) 26 5 . 308 =



and



( ) 27 10
2

d



Then, the gravitational acceleration
upon the piston of the Gravitational Press
shown in Fig. 3 is equal to the value of the
gravitational acceleration after the 7
th

gravitational shielding, i.e.,






( ) 28 / 10 4 . 4
2 9
2
0
7 7
7
s m
r
GM
g g
gs
= =




If the mass of the piston is kg m
piston
15 =
with 20cm diameter then the pressure upon
the cubic-anvil apparatus (Fig. 4) is





( )
GPa m N
g m
S
F
p
piston
2000 / 10 2
1 . 0
2 12
2
7
= = = =

It is important to note that the pressure can be
easily increased by increasing the value of .
However, the pressure limit is basically
determined by the compression resistance of
the material of the piston and anvils of the
Gravitational Press since it can produce
pressures far beyond 2000 GPa.

The electrical conductivity of air, inside the

dielectric tube, is equal to the electrical conductivity
of Earths atmosphere near the land, whose average
value is m S
air
/ 10 1
14
[25].


7











































To Cubic-Anvil Apparatus (Fig.4)


Fig. 3 Gravitational Press (Developed from a process patented in July, 31 2008, PI0805046-5)

E
=5 mm
Parallel plate
capacitor (p)
1
2
17
18
1
2
6
7
1
2
17
18
=60mm
d =98 mm
M
g
Metallic ring
(5 mm thickness)
Electric field of
capacitor
Aluminum sphere
(60 mm diameter)
Dielectric tube

r
1
A
D
D
E
D(rms)
Air
Air
Air
Air
Air
1 atm300K

Air
r
0
=35mm
Air
Air
Air
Piston
of
Gravitational Press
(Tungsten Carbide)
g
7
2
0
7 7
7
r
GM
g g
gs
= =


8












Fig.4 - Diagram of Cubic-Anvil Apparatus for the Gravitational
Press. In the center of the apparatus, is placed a ceramic cube
("synthesis capsule") of pyrophyllite ceramics, which contains
graphite and is pressed by the anvils made from cemented carbide
(e.g., tungsten carbide or VK10 hard alloy). Note that, due to the
enormous pressure that the Gravitational Press can produce
(>>80GPa), the "synthesis capsule" can be very large (up to about
1000 cm
3
in size). This is sufficient to produce diamonds with up to
100 carats (20g) or more.


Gravitational Press Piston
(Tungsten Carbide)
Anvils
(Tungsten Carbide or
VK10 hard alloy)




































9

References

[1] Hall, H. T. (1960). "Ultra-high pressure apparatus". Rev.
Sci. Instr. 31 (2): 125.
[2] Werner, M; Locher, R (1998). "Growth and application
of undoped and doped diamond films". Rep. Prog. Phys.
61 (12): 1665.
[3] Osawa, E (2007). "Recent progress and perspectives in
single-digit nanodiamond". Diamond and Related
Materials 16 (12): 2018.
[4] Galimov, . M.; Kudin, A. M.; Skorobogatskii, V. N.;
Plotnichenko, V. G.; Bondarev, O. L.; Zarubin, B. G.;
Strazdovskii, V. V.; Aronin, A. S. et al. (2004).
"Experimental Corroboration of the Synthesis of Diamond
in the Cavitation Process". Doklady Physics 49 (3): 150.
[5] N. Pal'yanov et al. (2002). "Fluid-bearing alkaline
carbonate melts as the medium for the formation of
diamonds in the Earth's mantle: an experimental study".
Lithos 60: 145.
[6] F. P. Bundy(1963) J . Chem. Phys. 38, 631.
[7] F. P. Bundy and J . S. Kasper(1967) J . Chem. Phys. 46, 3437.
[8] F. P. Bundy,W. A. Bassett, M. S.Weathers, R. J . Hemley,
H. K. Mao, and A. F. Goncharov (1996) Carbon, 34, 141.
[9] T. Irifune, A. Kurio, S. Sakamoto, T. Inoue, and
H. Sumiya(2003) Nature 421, 806.
[10] V. F. Britun, A. V. Kurdyumov, and I. A. Petrusha
(2004) Powder Metall. Met. Ceram. 43, 87.
[11] H. Sumiya, H. Yusa, T. Inoue, H. Ofuji, and T. Irifune
(2006) High Pressure Res. 26, 63.
[12] H. Ohfuji and K. Kuroki(2009) J . Mineral. Petrol. Sci.
104, 307.
[13] S. Fahy, S. G. Louie, and M. L. Cohen (1986) Phys.
Rev. B 34, 1191.
[14] S. Fahy, S. G. Louie, and M. L. Cohen (1987) Phys.
Rev. B 35, 7623.
[15]Y. Tateyama, T. Ogitsu, K. Kusakabe, and S. Tsuneyuki
(1996) Phys. Rev. B 54, 14994.
[16] S. Scandolo, M. Bernasconi, G. L. Chiarotti, P. Focher,
and E. Tosatti (1995) Phys. Rev. Lett. 74, 4015.
[17] F. Zipoli, M. Bernasconi, and R. Martonak (2004) Eur.
Phys. J . B 39, 41.
[18] Khaliullin, RZ, Eshet, H, Khne, TD, J rg Behler, J &
Parrinello, M. (2011) Nucleation mechanism for the
direct graphite-to-diamond phase transition, Nature
Materials, 10, 693697.
[19] Y. Tateyama, T. Ogitsu, K. Kusakabe, and S.
Tsuneyuki (1996) Phys. Rev. B 54, 14994.
[20] S. Scandolo, M. Bernasconi, G. L. Chiarotti, P. Focher
and E. Tosatti (1995) Phys. Rev. Lett. 74, 4015.
[21] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of
the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific
J ournal of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-232.
[22] De Aquino, F. (2010) Gravity Control by means of
Electromagnetic Field through Gas at Ultra-Low
Pressure, Pacific J ournal of Science and Technology,
11(2) November 2010, pp.178-247, Physics/0701091.
[23] Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo, McGraw-
Hill, p. 270.
[24] Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968) Physics, J . Willey
& Sons, Portuguese Version, Ed. USP, p.1124.
[25] Chalmers, J .A., (1967) Atmospheric Electricity,
Pergamon press, Oxford, London; Kamsali, N. et al.,
(2011) Advanced Air Pollution, chapter 20, DOI:
10.5772/17163, edited by Farhad Nejadkoorki, Publisher:
InTech, ISBN 978-953-307-511-2, under CC BY-NC-
SA 3.0 license.






















Artificial Gravitational Lenses

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2012 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.

We show that it is possible to produce gravitational lenses at laboratory scale by means of a toroidal
device which strongly intensifies the radial gravitational acceleration at its nucleus, and can make the
acceleration repulsive besides attractive. This means that a light flux through the toroid can become
convergent or divergent from its central axis. These lenses are similar to optical lenses and can be very
useful for telescopes, microscopes, and for the concentration of solar light in order to convert solar
energy into thermal energy.

Key words: Modified theories of gravity, Gravitational lenses, Solar instruments.
PACS: 04.50.Kd, 98.62.Sb, 95.55.Ev.


1. Introduction

It is known that Gravitational fields
can bend light. This effect was confirmed in
1919 during a solar eclipse, when Arthur
Eddington observed the light from stars
passing close to the sun was slightly bent, so
that stars appeared slightly out of position
[1]. Einstein realized that a massive
astronomical object can bend light making
what is called a gravitational lens. The
gravitational lensing is one of the predictions
of Einstein's general theory of relativity.
Although this phenomenon was first
mentioned in 1924 by Orest Chwolson [2],
the effect is more commonly associated with
Einstein, who published a more famous
article on the subject in 1936 [3, 4].
Here we show that it is possible to
produce gravitational lenses at laboratory
scale, by means of a toroidal device which
strongly intensifies the radial gravitational
acceleration at its nucleus, and can make the
acceleration repulsive besides attractive
*
[5].
This means that a light flux through the
toroid can becomes convergent or divergent
from its central axis. These lenses are similar
to optical lenses and can be very useful for
telescopes, microscopes, and for the
concentration of solar light in order to
convert solar energy into thermal energy.



*
De Aquino, F. (2008) Process and Device for Controlling
the Locally the Gravitational Mass and the Gravity
Acceleration, BR Patent Number: PI0805046-5, J uly 31,
2008.
2. Theory

From the quantization of gravity it
follows that the gravitational mass m
g
and
the inertial mass m
i
are correlated by means
of the following factor [5]:

( ) 1 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ = =
c m
p
m
m
i i
g

where is the rest inertial mass of the
particle and
0 i
m
p is the variation in the
particles kinetic momentum; is the speed
of light.
c
When p is produced by the
absorption of a photon with wavelength , it
is expressed by h p = . In this case, Eq.
(1) becomes
( ) 2 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
0

+ =

+ =

c m h
m
m
i
i
g
where c m h
i0 0
= is the De Broglie
wavelength for the particle with rest inertial
mass .
0 i
m
It has been shown that there is an
additional effect - Gravitational Shielding
effect - produced by a substance whose
gravitational mass was reduced or made
negative [6]. The effect extends beyond
2
substance (gravitational shielding) , up to a
certain distance from it (along the central
axis of gravitational shielding). This effect
shows that in this region the gravity
acceleration, , is reduced at the same
proportion, i.e.,
1
g
g g
1
1
= where
0
1
i g
m m = and is the gravity
acceleration before the gravitational
shielding). Consequently, after a second
gravitational shielding, the gravity will be
given by
g
g g g
2 1 1 2
2
= = , where
2
is
the value of the ratio
0 i g
m m for the second
gravitational shielding. In a generalized way,
we can write that after the nth gravitational
shielding the gravity, , will be given by
n
g

( ) 3 ...
3 2 1
g g
n
n
=

This possibility shows that, by means
of a battery of gravitational shieldings, we
can strongly intensify the gravitational
acceleration.
From Electrodynamics we know that
when an electromagnetic wave with
frequency and velocity incides on a
material with relative permittivity
f c
r
,
relative magnetic permeability
r
and
electrical conductivity , its velocity is
reduced to
r
n c v = where is the index of
refraction of the material, given by [
r
n
7]

( ) ( ) 4 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n

If >> , f 2 = , Eq. (4) reduces to

( ) 5
4
0
f
n
r
r

=

Thus, the wavelength of the incident
radiation (See Fig. 1) becomes

( ) 6
4
mod

f n n
f c
f
v
r r
= = = =











Fig. 1 Modified Electromagnetic Wave. The
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave can be
strongly reduced, but its frequency remains the same.
v =c v =c/n
r
=c/f

mod
=v/f =c/n
r
f
n
r




If a lamina with thickness equal to
contains atoms/m n
3
,

then the number of
atoms per area unit is n . Thus, if the
electromagnetic radiation with frequency
incides on an area of the lamina it
reaches
f S
nS atoms. If it incides on the total
area of the lamina, , then the total number
of atoms reached by the radiation is
f
S

f
nS N = . The number of atoms per unit of
volume, , is given by n

( ) 7
0
A
N
n

=

where is the
Avogadros number;
kmole atoms N / 10 02 . 6
26
0
=
is the matter density
of the lamina (in kg/m
3
) and A is the molar
mass(kg/kmole).
When an electromagnetic wave incides
on the lamina, it strikes front atoms,
where
f
N
( )
m f f
S n N ,
m
is the diameter of
the atom. Thus, the electromagnetic wave
incides effectively on an area
m f
S N S= ,
where
2
4
1
m m
S = is the cross section area of
one atom. After these collisions, it carries out
with the other atoms (See Fig.2).
collisions
n

3









Fig. 2 Collisions inside the lamina.
atom
S
m
Wave


Thus, the total number of collisions in the
volume S is

( )
( ) 8

S n
S n S n S n n N N
m
m m l m l collisions f collisions
=
= + = + =


The power density, , of the radiation on the
lamina can be expressed by
D

( ) 9
m f
S N
P
S
P
D = =

We can express the total mean number
of collisions in each atom, , by means of
the following equation
1
n

( ) 10
1
N
N n
n
collisions photons total
=

Since in each collision a momentum h is
transferred to the atom, then the total
momentum transferred to the lamina will be
( ) h N n p
1
= . Therefore, in accordance
with Eq. (1), we can write that

( )
( )
( )
( ) 11 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
1
0

+ =
=

+ =

collisions photons total

l i
l g
N n
N n
m
m

Since Eq. (8) gives S n N
l collisions
= , we get
( ) (12
2
S n
hf
P
N n
l collisions photons total

=
Substitution of Eq. (12) into Eq. (11) yields

( )
( )
( ) ( ) 13 1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

S n
hf
P
m
m
l
l i
l g

Substitution of P given by Eq. (9) into Eq.
(13) gives

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 14 1
1
1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

c m
S n
f
D S N
m
m
l i
l
m f
l i
l g

Substitution of ( )
m f l f
S n N and
m f
S N S =
into Eq. (14) results

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 15 1
1
1 2 1
2
2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

cf m
D S S n
m
m
l i
m m f l
l i
l g

where
( ) ( ) ( ) l l l i
V m =
0
.
Now, considering that the lamina is
inside an ELF electromagnetic field with
E andB , then we can write that [8]

( )
( ) 16
2
0
2
c
E n
D
l r

=

Substitution of Eq. (16) into Eq. (15) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 17 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
2 2
0 0
2 2 2 2 3
0

+ =


f c m
E S S n n
m
m
l i
m m f l l r
l i
l g

In the case in which the area is just the
area of the cross-section of the lamina
f
S
( )

S ,
we obtain from Eq. (17), considering that
( ) ( )


S m
l l i
=
0
, the following expression

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 18 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
2 2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
m m l l r
l i
l g

)

4
According to Eq. (6) we have
( )
( ) 19
f n
c
f
v
l r
= = =
mod

Substitution of Eq. (19) into Eq. (18) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 20 1
4
1 2 1
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4
0

+ =
f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
m m
l l r
l i
l g

Note that t E E
m
sin = .The average value
for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E because E varies
sinusoidaly ( is the maximum value
for
m
E
E ). On the other hand, 2
m rms
E E = .
Consequently we can change
4
E by ,
and the equation above can be rewritten as
follows
4
rms
E

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 21 1
4
1 2 1
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4
0

+ =
= =
f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
rms m m
l l r
l i
l g

Now consider the Artificial
Gravitational Lenses shown in Fig.3.
Basically they are rectangular toroids.
Inside them there are two dielectric rings
with 1
r
and an Aluminum ring with mass
density (See Fig.3). The
rectangular toroid is filled with air at ambient
temperature and 1atm. Thus, inside the tube,
the air density is
3
. 2700

= m kg

( ) 22 . 2 . 1
3
m kg
air

The number of atoms of air (Nitrogen) per
unit of volume, , according to Eq.(7), is
given by
air
n

( ) 23 / 10 16 . 5
3 25 0
m atoms
A
N
n
N
air
air
= =


Here, the area refers to the area of the ring
inside the air toroid, with average radius

S
2
i e
r r r + = and height , i.e.,

( ) ( )
e i e i
r r r r S + = + =

2 2

where is the inner radius and the outer
radius of the rectangular toroid. For
i
r
e
r
mm r
i
400 = , mm r
e
650 = and mm 60 = ,
we get

( ) ( ) 24 198 . 0
2
m r r S
e i
= + =

The parallel metallic plates (p), shown
in Fig.3 are subjected to different drop
voltages. The two sets of plates (D), placed
on the extremes of the toroid, are subjected to
( )
V V
rms D
065 3. = at Hz f 5 . 2 = , while the central
set of plates (A) is subjected to
( )
V V
rms A
623 51. = at Hz f 5 . 2 = .Since mm d 98 = ,
then the intensity of the electric field, which
passes through the 36 cylindrical air laminas
(each one with 5mm thickness) of the two
sets (D), is
( ) ( )
m V d V E
rms D rms D
/ .28 31 = =
and the intensity of the electric field, which
passes through the 9 cylindrical air laminas
of the two sets (A), is given by
( ) ( )
m V d V E
rms A rms A
/ .77 526 = =
Note that the metallic rings (5mm thickness)
are positioned in such way to block the
electric field out of the cylindrical air
laminas (also 5mm thickness). The objective
is to turn each one of these laminas into a
Gravity Control Cell (GCC) [6]. Thus, the
system shown in Fig. 3 has 4 sets of GCC.
Two with 18 GCC each and two with 9 GCC
each. The two sets with 18 GCC each are
positioned at the extremes of the tube (D).
They work as gravitational decelerator while
the other two set with 9 GCC (A) each works
as a gravitational accelerator, intensifying
the gravity acceleration produced by the
Aluminum ring. According to Eq. (3), this
gravity after the GCC becomes ,
where
th
9
0
9
9
g g =
( ) ( ) l i l g
m m = given by Eq. (21), and
can be calculated starting from the
expression of the gravitational mass of the
half-toroid of Aluminum,
0
g
( toroid g
M
2
1
)
, which is
given by
5

( )
( )
( )
( ) (25
2
1
2
1
0 0
i i e
toroid g
r
i e
M
toroid g
r r r M
whence
dz r r dM
i g
=
=

)

On the other hand, we have that

( )


= =
i g
r
i e
M
g
g
dz
r
r r G
dM
r
G
dg

0
2
0 0
2


whence we get

( )
( ) 26
2
r
r r r G
g
i i e

=


which gives the value of produced by the
half-toroid at a point inside the nucleus of the
toroid, distant
g
r from the center of the cross-
section of the rectangular toroid. Thus, the
value of , due to the first half-
toroid is
0
g ( )
0
r r =

i
i e
r
r
r r
G g

2
0
0


The value of , due to the opposite half-
toroid is
0
g

( )

2
0
0
2 2
2
i e i e
e
i i e
r r
r
r r
r
r r r
G g

Consequently, the resultant is

( )
( )
( )

2
0
2
0
2
0
0
2 2
2
r r
r r r
G
r r
r
r r
r
r r r
G
r
r
r r
G g
i
i i e
i e i e
e
i i e
i
i e

In the case of , the equation above
reduces to
0
r r
i
>>
( ) 27
2
0
0 i
i e
r
r
r r
G g

where is the inner radius of the toroid;
is the distance between the center of the
cross-section of the Aluminum ring and the
surface of the first GCC of the set (A);
i
r
0
r
is
the thickness of the Aluminum ring. Here,
mm r 35
0
= and mm 60 = (See Fig. 3 (a)).
The objective of the sets (D), with 18
GCC each, is to reduce strongly the value of
the external gravity along the rectangular
toroid of air in D region. In this case, the
value of the external gravity, , is reduced
by the factor , where
ext
g
ext d
g
18

2
10

=
d
. For
example, if then this value is
reduced to and, after the set A, it is
increased by . Since the system is
designed for
2
/ 81 . 9 s m g
ext
=
ext d
g
18

1 . 627 = , then the gravity

acceleration on the Aluminum ring
becomes ,
this value is smaller than
2 10 18 9
/ 10 47 . 1 s m g
ext d

=
( ) [ ]
2 8 2
0 0
. 10 9 . 9

= s m r r r r G g
i i e
.
The values of and
d
, according to
Eq. (21) are given by

6
( ) ( )
( )
( ) 24 1 10 289 1 1 2 1
1
4
1 2 1
4 6
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4

+ =
=

+ =

rms A
air
rms A
m m
air air r
E
f c
E S S n n
.

( ) ( )
( )
( ) 25 1 10 289 1 1 2 1
1
4
1 2 1
4 6
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4

+ =
=

+ =

rms D
air
rms D
m m
air air r
d
E
f c
E S S n n
.

where
( )
1 =
r r air r
n , since( ) <<

;
, ,
3 25
/ 10 16 . 5 m atoms n
air
= m
m
10
10 55 . 1

=
2 20 2
10 88 . 1 4 m S
m m

= = and Hz f 5 . 2 = .
Since , ,
we get
( )
m V E
rms A
/ .77 526 =
( )
m V E
rms D
/ .28 31 =

( ) 30 1 . 627 =

and

( ) 31 10
2

Then the gravitational acceleration
after the 9
th
gravitational shielding is

( )
( ) 32
2
0
9
0
9
9

= =
r
r r r
G g g
i i e


It is known that gravitational fields can
bend light, and that due to this effect, a light
ray that passes very close to a body with
gravitational mass is deviated of an
angle
g
M
(deflection angle) given by [3]

The electrical conductivity of air, inside the

dielectric tube, is equal to the electrical conductivity
of Earths atmosphere near the land, whose average
value is m S
air
/ 10 1
14
[9].
( ) 33
4
2
d c
GM
g
=

where is the distance of closest approach. d
Here, we can obtain the expression of
as follows: by comparing Eq. (26) with Eq.
(25) we obtain . Substitution of
this expression into Eq. (33) leads to the
following equation
2
gr GM
g
=

( ) 34
4
2
2
d c
gr
=

For
0
r r = we have and equation above
can be rewritten as follows
0
g g =

( ) 35
4
2
2
0 0
d c
r g
=

However, considering the symmetry of the
gravitational lenses shown in Fig.3, it is easy
to see that Eq. (35) must be rewritten as
follows

( ) 36
4 4
2
2
0 0
2
2
0 0
d c
r g
d c
r g

=

where d and d are respectively, the
distances of closest approach of the light ray
with respect to the two sides of the
Aluminum ring (See Fig 3 (b)).
When the gravitational lenses are
activated the value of is amplified to
, then Eq. (36) becomes
0
g
0
9
g

( ) 37
4 4
2
2
0 0
9
2
2
0 0
9
d c
r g
d c
r g

Note that, for d d = (light ray at the center
of the Gravitational lens) Eq. (37) gives
0 = ( null deflection). On the other hand, if
d d < we have 0 > (the light ray is
gravitationally attracted to the inner edge of
rectangular toroid). Under these conditions,
when a light flux crosses the gravitational
lens (nucleus of the rectangular toroid), it
becomes divergent in respect to the central
axis of the toroid (See Fig. 3(c)). If
7
d d > then Eq. (37) shows that 0 < (the
light ray is gravitationally repelled from the
inner edge of rectangular toroid). In this case,
when a light flux crosses the gravitational
lens, it becomes convergent in respect to the
central axis of the toroid (See Fig. 3(b)).
Substitution of the known values into
Eq. (37) yields

( ) 38
1 1
1 . 0

d d


Note that the values of can be easily
controlled simply by controlling of the value
of . Also note that the curvatures of the
light rays are proportional to the distances
and , similarly to the curvature of the
light rays in the optical lenses. Then it is easy
to see that these gravitational lenses can be
very useful in building of telescopes,
microscopes, and in concentrating solar light
in order to convert solar energy into thermal
energy.
d d



I would like to thank Physicist Andr
Luis Martins (RJ , Brazil) who came up with
the original idea to build Artificial
Gravitational Lens using sets of Gravitational
Shieldings, as shown in my previous papers.






































































8













(a)















(b)














(c)

Fig. 3 Artificial Gravitational Lens. (a) Cross-section of the Artificial Gravitational Lens. (b)
Cross-section of a Convergent Gravitational Lens. The light rays are gravitationally repelled from
the inner edge of toroid (c) Cross-section of a Divergent Gravitational Lens. The light rays are
gravitationally attracted to the inner edge of toroid.
=5 mm
Parallel plate capacitor (p)
(Metallic ring)
1 2 17 18
88
Dielectric rings
r 1
D
M
g 1 2 6 9
A
Air Air
d =98 mm
=60mm
Rectangular Toroid
Metallic ring
(5 mm thickness)
r
0
=35mm
E
D(rms)
E
A(rms)
Air
1 atm300K
Gravitational Lens
Rectangular Toroid
Rectangular Toroid
M
g D A D A M
g
D and A Sets
of
Gravitational Shieldings
D D A A M
g
M
g
Gravitational Lens
Gravitational Lens
Light
Light
g g
g g
Aluminum ring
r
e
r
i
d d

9


References

[1] Dyson, F.W., Eddington, A.S., and Davidson, C.R.
(1920). A Determination of the Deflection of Light
by the Sun's Gravitational Field, from Observations
Made at the Solar eclipse of May 29, 1919. Phil.
Trans. Roy. Soc. A 220 (571-581): 291333.

[2] Chwolson, O (1924). ber eine mgliche Form
fiktiver Doppelsterne. Astronomische Nachrichten
221 (20): 329.

[3] Einstein, A. (1936). Lens-like Action of a Star
by the Deviation of Light in the Gravitational
Field. Science 84 (2188): 5067.

[4] Renn, J ., Tilman S., and Stachel, J ., (1997). The
Origin of Gravitational Lensing: A Postscript to
Einstein's 1936 Science paper. Science 275
(5297): 1846.

[5] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of
the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific
J ournal of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-
232.

[6] De Aquino, F. (2010) Gravity Control by means of
Electromagnetic Field through Gas at Ultra-Low
Pressure, Pacific J ournal of Science and Technology,
11(2) November 2010, pp.178-247, Physics/0701091.

[7] Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo, McGraw-
Hill, p. 270.

[8] Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968) Physics, J. Willey
& Sons, Portuguese Version, Ed. USP, p.1124.

[9] Chalmers, J .A., (1967) Atmospheric Electricity,
Pergamon press, Oxford, London; Kamsali, N. et al.,
(2011) Advanced Air Pollution, chapter 20, DOI:
10.5772/17163, edited by Farhad Nejadkoorki, Publisher:
InTech, ISBN 978-953-307-511-2, under CC BY-NC-
SA 3.0 license.





Gravitational Blueshift and Redshift
generated at Laboratory Scale

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2012 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.

In this paper we show that it is possible to produce gravitational blueshift and redshift at laboratory scale
by means of a device that can strongly intensify the local gravitational potential. Thus, by using this
device, it is possible to generate electromagnetic radiation of any frequency, from ELF radiation (f <
10Hz) up to high energy gamma-rays. In this case, several uses, such as medical imaging, radiotherapy
and radioisotope production for PET (positron emission tomography) scanning, could be realized. The
device is smaller and less costly than conventional sources of gamma rays.

Key words: Modified theories of gravity, Relativity and Gravitation, Gravitational Redshift and Blueshift.
PACS: 04.50.Kd, 95.30.Sf, 98.62.Py.


1. Introduction

It is known that electromagnetic
radiation is blueshifted when propagating
from a region of weaker gravitational field to
a region of stronger gravitational field. In this
case the radiation is blueshifted because it
gains energy during propagation. In the
contrary case, the radiation is redshifted. This
effect was predicted by Einsteins Relativity
Theory [1, 2] and was widely confirmed by
several experiments [3, 4]. It was first
confirmed in 1959 in the Pound and Rebka
experiment [3].
Here we show that it is possible to
produce gravitational blueshift and redshift at
laboratory scale by means of a device that
can strongly intensify the local gravitational
potential
*
[5]. Thus, by using this device, it is
possible to generate electromagnetic
radiation of any frequency, from ELF
radiation (f < 10Hz) up to high energy
gamma-rays. In this case, several uses, such
as in medical imaging, radiotherapy and
radioisotope production for PET (positron
emission tomography) scanning and others,
could be devised. The device is smaller and
less costly than conventional sources of
gamma rays.


*
De Aquino, F. (2008) Process and Device for Controlling
the Locally the Gravitational Mass and the Gravity
Acceleration, BR Patent Number: PI0805046-5, J uly 31,
2008.
2. Theory

From the quantization of gravity it
follows that the gravitational mass m
g
and
the inertial mass m
i
are correlated by means
of the following factor [5]:

( ) 1 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ = =
c m
p
m
m
i i
g

where is the rest inertial mass of the
particle and
0 i
m
p is the variation in the
particles kinetic momentum; is the speed
of light.
c
When p is produced by the
absorption of a photon with wavelength , it
is expressed by h p = . In this case, Eq.
(1) becomes
( ) 2 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
0

+ =

+ =

c m h
m
m
i
i
g
where c m h
i0 0
= is the De Broglie
wavelength for the particle with rest inertial
mass .
0 i
m
It has been shown that there is an
additional effect - Gravitational Shielding
2
effect - produced by a substance whose
gravitational mass was reduced or made
negative [6]. The effect extends beyond
substance (gravitational shielding) , up to a
certain distance from it (along the central
axis of gravitational shielding). This effect
shows that in this region the gravity
acceleration, , is reduced at the same
proportion, i.e.,
1
g
g g
1
1
= where
0
1
i g
m m = and is the gravity
acceleration before the gravitational
shielding). Consequently, after a second
gravitational shielding, the gravity will be
given by
g
g g g
2 1 1 2
2
= = , where
2
is
the value of the ratio
0 i g
m m for the second
gravitational shielding. In a generalized way,
we can write that after the nth gravitational
shielding the gravity, , will be given by
n
g

( ) 3 ...
3 2 1
g g
n
n
=

This possibility shows that, by means
of a battery of gravitational shieldings, we
can strongly intensify the gravitational
acceleration.
In order to measure the extension of
the shielding effect, samples were placed
above a superconducting disk with radius
, which was producing a
gravitational shielding. The effect has been
detected up to a distance of about 3m from
the disk (along the central axis of disk) [
m r
D
1375 . 0 =
7].
This means that the gravitational shielding
effect extends, beyond the disk by
approximately 20 times the disk radius.
From Electrodynamics we know that
when an electromagnetic wave with
frequency and velocity incides on a
material with relative permittivity
f c
r
,
relative magnetic permeability
r
and
electrical conductivity , its velocity is
reduced to
r
n c v = where is the index of
refraction of the material, given by [
r
n
8]

( ) ( ) 4 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n

If >> , f 2 = , Eq. (4) reduces to
( ) 5
4
0
f
n
r
r

=
Thus, the wavelength of the incident
radiation (See Fig. 1) becomes

( ) 6
4
mod

f n n
f c
f
v
r r
= = = =











Fig. 1 Modified Electromagnetic Wave. The
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave can be
strongly reduced, but its frequency remains the same.
v =c v =c/n
r
=c/f

mod
=v/f =c/n
r
f
n
r

If a lamina with thickness equal to
contains atoms/m n
3
,

then the number of
atoms per area unit is n . Thus, if the
electromagnetic radiation with frequency
incides on an area of the lamina it
reaches
f S
nS atoms. If it incides on the total
area of the lamina, , then the total number
of atoms reached by the radiation is
f
S

f
nS N = . The number of atoms per unit of
volume, , is given by n

( ) 7
0
A
N
n

=

where is the
Avogadros number;
kmole atoms N / 10 02 . 6
26
0
=
is the matter density
of the lamina (in kg/m
3
) and A is the molar
mass(kg/kmole).
When an electromagnetic wave incides
on the lamina, it strikes front atoms,
where
f
N
( )
m f f
S n N ,
m
is the diameter of
the atom. Thus, the electromagnetic wave
incides effectively on an area
m f
S N S= ,
where
2
4
1
m m
S = is the cross section area of
3
one atom. After these collisions, it carries out
with the other atoms (See Fig.2).
collisions
n










Fig. 2 Collisions inside the lamina.
atom
S
m
Wave


Thus, the total number of collisions in the
volume S is

( )
( ) 8

S n
S n S n S n n N N
m
m m l m l collisions f collisions
=
= + = + =


The power density, , of the radiation on the
lamina can be expressed by
D

( ) 9
m f
S N
P
S
P
D = =

We can express the total mean number
of collisions in each atom, , by means of
the following equation
1
n

( ) 10
1
N
N n
n
collisions photons total
=

Since in each collision a momentum h is
transferred to the atom, then the total
momentum transferred to the lamina will be
( ) h N n p
1
= . Therefore, in accordance
with Eq. (1), we can write that

( )
( )
( )
( ) 11 1 1 2 1
1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0
1
0

+ =
=

+ =

collisions photons total

l i
l g
N n
N n
m
m

Since Eq. (8) gives S n N
l collisions
= , we get
( ) (12
2
S n
hf
P
N n
l collisions photons total

= )

Substitution of Eq. (12) into Eq. (11) yields

( )
( )
( ) ( ) 13 1 1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

S n
hf
P
m
m
l
l i
l g

Substitution of P given by Eq. (9) into Eq.
(13) gives

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 14 1
1
1 2 1
2
0
2
0

+ =

c m
S n
f
D S N
m
m
l i
l
m f
l i
l g

Substitution of ( )
m f l f
S n N and
m f
S N S =
into Eq. (14) results

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 15 1
1
1 2 1
2
2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

cf m
D S S n
m
m
l i
m m f l
l i
l g

where
( ) ( ) ( ) l l l i
V m =
0
.
Now, considering that the lamina is
inside an ELF electromagnetic field with
E andB , then we can write that [9]

( )
( ) 16
2
0
2
c
E n
D
l r

=

Substitution of Eq. (16) into Eq. (15) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 17 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
2 2
0 0
2 2 2 2 3
0

+ =


f c m
E S S n n
m
m
l i
m m f l l r
l i
l g

In the case in which the area is just the
area of the cross-section of the lamina
f
S
( )

S ,
we obtain from Eq. (17), considering that
( ) ( )


S m
l l i
=
0
, the following expression

4
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 18 1
1
2
1 2 1
2
2 2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
m m l l r
l i
l g
According to Eq. (6) we have
( )
( ) 19
f n
c
f
v
l r
= = =
mod

Substitution of Eq. (19) into Eq. (18) gives

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 20 1
4
1 2 1
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4
0

+ =
f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
m m
l l r
l i
l g

Note that t E E
m
sin = .The average value
for
2
E is equal to
2
2
1
m
E because E varies
sinusoidaly ( is the maximum value
for
m
E
E ). On the other hand, 2
m rms
E E = .
Consequently we can change
4
E by ,
and the equation above can be rewritten as
follows
4
rms
E
( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 21 1
4
1 2 1
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4
0

+ =
= =
f c
E S S n n
m
m
l
rms m m
l l r
l i
l g

Now consider the Gravitational Shift

Device shown in Fig.3.
Inside the device there is a dielectric
tube ( 1
r
) with the following characteristics:
mm 60 = ,
2 3 2
10 83 . 2 4 m S

= =

.
Inside the tube there is an Aluminum sphere
with 30mm radius and mass
kg M
gs
30536 . 0 = . The tube is filled with air
at ambient temperature and 1atm. Thus,
inside the tube, the air density is
( ) 22 . 2 . 1
3
= m kg
air

The number of atoms of air (Nitrogen) per

unit of volume, , according to Eq.(7), is
given by
air
n

( ) 23 / 10 16 . 5
3 25 0
m atoms
A
N
n
N
air
air
= =


The parallel metallic plates (p),
shown in Fig.3 are subjected to different drop
voltages. The two sets of plates (D), placed
on the extremes of the tube, are subjected to
( )
V V
rms D
22 16. = at Hz f 1 = , while the central
set of plates (A) is subjected to
( )
V V
rms A
98 191. = at Hz f 1 = . Since mm d 98 = ,
then the intensity of the electric field, which
passes through the 36 cylindrical air laminas
(each one with 5mm thickness) of the two
sets (D), is

( ) ( )
m V d V E
rms D rms D
/ .53 165 = =

and the intensity of the electric field, which
passes through the 7 cylindrical air laminas
of the central set (A), is given by

( ) ( )
m V d V E
rms A rms A
/ .
3
10 959 1 = =

Note that the metallic rings (5mm
thickness) are positioned in such way to
block the electric field out of the cylindrical
air laminas. The objective is to turn each one
of these laminas into a Gravity Control Cells
(GCC) [10]. Thus, the system shown in Fig.
3 has 3 sets of GCC. Two with 18 GCC each,
and one with 19 GCC. The two sets with 18
GCC each are positioned at the extremes of
the tube (D). They work as gravitational
decelerator while the other set with 19 GCC
(A) works as a gravitational accelerator,
intensifying the gravity acceleration and the
gravitational potential produced by the mass
of the Aluminum sphere. According to
Eq. (3) the gravity, after the GCC
becomes
gs
M
th
19
2
1
19
19
r GM g
gs
= , and the
gravitational potential
1
19
r GM
gs
=
where
( ) ( ) l i l g
m m = is given by Eq. (21)
and mm r 35
1
= is the distance between the
center of the Aluminum sphere and the
surface of the first GCC of the set (A).
The objective of the sets (D), with 18
GCC each, is to reduce strongly the value of
the external gravity along the axis of the
tube. In this case, the value of the external
gravity, , is reduced by the factor ,
ext
g
ext d
g
18

5
where
2
10

=
d
. For example, if the base
BS of the system is positioned on the Earth
surface, then is reduced
to and, after the set A, it is increased
by . Since the system is designed for
2
/ 81 . 9 s m g
ext
=
ext d
g
18

19

5 . 308 = , then the gravity acceleration on

the sphere
becomes , this
value is much smaller than
2 12 18 19
/ 10 4 . 2 s m g
ext d

=
2 8 2
/ 10 26 . 2 s m r GM g
s gs sphere

= = .
The values of and
d
, according to
Eq. (21) are given by
( ) ( )
( )
( )
( ) 24 1 10 645 1 1 2 1
1
4
1 2 1
4 9
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4

+ =
=

+ =

rms A
l
rms A
m m
l l r
E
f c
E S S n n
.

( ) ( )
( )
( )
( ) 25 1 10 645 1 1 2 1
1
4
1 2 1
4 9
2 6 2 2
0
4 4 4 2 6 4

+ =
=

+ =

rms D
l
rms D
m m
l l r
d
E
f c
E S S n n
.

where
( )
1 =
r r air r
n , since ( ) <<

;
, ,
3 25
/ 10 16 . 5 m atoms n
air
= m
m
10
10 55 . 1

=
2 20 2
10 88 . 1 4 m S
m m

= = and Hz f 1 = .
Since and
, we get
( )
m V E
rms A
/ .
3
10 959 1 =
( )
m V E
rms D
/ .53 165 =

( ) 26 5 . 308 =

and

( ) 27 10
2

The electrical conductivity of air, inside the

dielectric tube, is equal to the electrical conductivity
of Earths atmosphere near the land, whose average
value is m S
air
/ 10 1
14
[11].
Then the gravitational acceleration
after the 19
th
gravitational shielding of the
set A (See Fig.3)

is

( ) 28
2
1
19
1
19
19
r GM g g
gs
= =

and the gravitational potential is

( ) 29
1
19
1
19
r GM
gs
= =

Thus, if photons with frequency are
emitted from a point 0 near the Earths
surface, where the gravitational potential is
0
f

r GM
0
(See photons source in
Fig.3), and these photons pass through the
region in front of the 19
th
gravitational
shielding, where the gravitational potential is
increased to the value expressed by Eq. (29)
then the frequency of the photons in this
region, according to Einsteins relativity
theory, becomes , where f f f + =
0
f is
given by

( ) 30
2
1
19
0
2
0
c
r GM r GM
f
c
f
gs
+
=

=



If 0 < , then and 0
19
<
0 > f (blueshift). Note that, if the number
of Gravitational Shieldings in the set A is
odd (
n
,... 7 , 5 , 3 , 1 = n ) then the result is
0 > f (blueshift). But, if is even
(
n
,... 8 , 6 , 4 , 2 = n ) and

> r M r M
gs
n
1
then
the result is 0 < f (redshift). Note that to
reduce down to it is
necessary that . This
precision is not easy to be obtained in
practice. On the other hand, if for example,
Hz f
14
0
10 = Hz f
11
10
Hz f
14
10 999 . 0 =

The gravitational shielding effect extends beyond the

gravitational shielding by approximately 20 times its
radius (along the central axis of the gravitational
shielding). [7] Here, this means that, in absence of the
set D (bottom of the device), the gravitational
shielding effect extends, beyond the 19
th
gravitational
shielding, by approximately 20 (/2) 600mm.

6

Hz f
14
0
10 = and then
i.e., the redshift is
negligible. However, the device can be
useful to generate ELF radiation by redshift.
For example, if
Hz f
10
10 =
Hz f f f
14
0
10 + =
GHz f 1
0
= , and 18 = n
15278521 . 95 = , then we obtain ELF
radiation with frequency . Radiation
of any frequency can be generated by
gravitational blueshift. For example, if
and then
. What means that a
light beam with frequency was
converted into a gamma-ray beam with
frequency . Similarly, if
and
Hz f 1
Hz f
14
0
10 = Hz f
18
10 + =
Hz f f f
18
0
10 + =
Hz
14
10
Hz
18
10 MHz f 1
0
=
MHz f 9 + = , then ,
and so on.
MHz f f f 10
0
+ =


















Now, consider the device shown in
Fig. 3, where 5 . 308 = , kg M
gs
30536 . 0 = ,
mm r 35
1
= . According to Eq. (30), it can
produce a given by f







( ) 31 10 6 . 3
22
2
1
19
Hz
c
r GM
f
gs

Thus, we get

( ) 32 10 6 . 3
22
0
Hz f f f + =



What means that the device is able to convert
any type of electromagnetic radiation
(frequency ) into a gamma-ray beam with
frequency . Thus, by controlling
the value of



0
f
Hz
22
10 6 . 3
and , it is possible to
generate radiation of any frequency.
0
f














7











































Fig. 3 Schematic diagram of the Gravitational Shift Device (Blueshift and Redshift) The device
can generate electromagnetic radiation of any frequency, since ELF radiation (f <10Hz) up to high energy gamma-rays.
E
=5 mm
Parallel plate capacitor (p)
1
2
17
18
1
2
18
19
1
2
17
18
=60mm
d =98 mm
M
g
Metallic ring
(5 mm thickness)
Electric field of capacitor
Aluminum sphere
(60 mm diameter)
Dielectric tube

r
1
A
D
D
E
D(rms)
E
A(rms)
Air
Air
Air
Air Air
1 atm300K

r
1
=35mm
Air
Air
Air
Photons Source
(frequency f
0
)
Photons Beam
(frequency f )
0
f
0
19
<

= r GM
0

1 1
, g
s s
g ,
r
s

0

f
Region with potential
1
19
=
2
1
19
0
2
0
c
r GM r GM
f
c
f
gs
+
=

=







8

References

[1] Misner, Charles W.; Thorne, Kip S.; Wheeler, J ohn
Archibald (1973-09-15 1973). Gravitation. San
Francisco: W. H. Freeman.

[2] Bonometto, Silvio; Gorini, Vittorio; Moschella, Ugo
(2002). Modern Cosmology. CRC Press.


[3] R.V. Pound and G.A. Rebka, J r. (1959) Gravitational
Red-Shift in Nuclear Resonance, Phys. Rev. Lett. 3 439
441.

[4] Vessot, R. F. C., et al., (1980) Test of Relativistic
Gravitation with a Space-Borne Hydrogen Maser.
Physical Review Letters 45 (26): 20812084.

[5] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of
the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific
J ournal of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-
232.

[6] De Aquino, F. (2010) Gravity Control by means of
Electromagnetic Field through Gas at Ultra-Low
Pressure, Pacific J ournal of Science and Technology,
11(2) November 2010, pp.178-247, Physics/0701091.

[7] Modanese, G., (1996), Updating the Theoretical
Analysis of the Weak Gravitational Shielding
Experiment, supr-con/9601001v2.

[8] Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo, McGraw-
Hill, p. 270.

[9] Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968) Physics, J. Willey
& Sons, Portuguese Version, Ed. USP, p.1124.

[10] De Aquino, F. (2010) Gravity Control by means of
Electromagnetic Field through Gas at Ultra-Low
Pressure, Pacific J ournal of Science and Technology,
11(2) November 2010, pp.178-247, Physics/0701091.

[11] Chalmers, J .A., (1967) Atmospheric Electricity,
Pergamon press, Oxford, London; Kamsali, N. et al.,
(2011) Advanced Air Pollution, chapter 20, DOI:
10.5772/17163, edited by Farhad Nejadkoorki, Publisher:
InTech, ISBN 978-953-307-511-2, under CC BY-NC-
SA 3.0 license.









Quantum Reversal of Soul Energy

Fran De Aquino
Maranhao State University, Physics Department, S.Luis/MA, Brazil.
Copyright 2012 by Fran De Aquino. All Rights Reserved.


In the last decades, the existence of the Soul has been seriously considered by Quantum Physics. It has
been frequently described as a body of unknown energy coupled to human body by means of a mutual
interaction. The Quantum Physics shows that energy is quantized, i.e., it has discrete values that are
defined as energy levels. Thus, along the life of a person, the energy of its soul is characterized by
several quantum levels of energy. Here, we show by means of application of specific electromagnetic
radiations on the human body, that it is possible to revert the energy of the soul to previous energy levels.
This process can have several therapeutic applications.

Key words: Modified theories of gravity, Microwave fields effects, Therapeutic applications, Quantum information.
PACS: 04.50.Kd, 87.50.S-,87.50.st, 03.67.-a.


1. Introduction

Since long the Soul has remained an
element of strongly consideration by
Religion. Some authors claim that Religion is
the science of the Soul [1]. Others claim that
Soul and Religion are related to evolution.
Sir Julian Huxley, a leading evolutionary
biologist, the first Director-General of
UNESCO and signatory to the Humanist
Manifesto II, wrote: Human Soul and
Religion are just the product of evolution
[2]. This show how important the Soul is for
the Religion. Philosophy also realizes the
importance of the Soul. Plato, drawing on the
words of his teacher Socrates, considered the
Soul the essence of a person, being that
which decides how we behave. As bodies
die, the Soul is continually reborn in
subsequent bodies.
Nowadays, Quantum Physics and other
branches of Science are seriously considering
the existence of the Soul.
It has been frequently described as a
body of unknown energy coupled to human
body by means of a mutual interaction. This
type of energy from the viewpoint of Physics
has been considered as Imaginary Energy.
The term imaginary are borrowed from
Mathematics (real and imaginary numbers) [3].
Quantum Physics shows that energy is
quantized, i.e., that it has discrete values that
are defined as discrete energy levels that
correspond to all positive integer values of


the quantum number , [ n ( ) ,... 3 , 2 , 1 = n 4].
Thus, along the life of a person, the energy of
its Soul is characterized by several quantum
levels of energy. Here, we show that, by
means of application of specific
electromagnetic radiations on the human
body (its Soul), it is possible to revert the
energy of the Soul to previous energy levels.
This process can have several therapeutic
applications.
2. Theory
From the quantization of gravity it
follows that the imaginary gravitational mass
m
g (im)
and the imaginary inertial mass m
i0 (im)

are correlated by means of the following
factor [5]:

( )
( )
( )
( )
( ) 1 1 1 2 1
2
0 0

+ = =
c m
p
m
m
im i
im
im i
im g

where
( )
i m m
i im i 0
3
2
0
= is the imaginary
inertial mass at rest of the particle and
( ) ( )
( ) c n Ui c n U p
r r im im
= = is the variation
in the particles imaginary kinetic
momentum; is the speed of light. Thus, Eq.
(1) can be rewritten as follows
c

2
( )
( )
( ) 2 1
4
3
1 2 1
2
2
0 0

+ = =
c m
Un
m
m
i
r
im i
im g

When is produced by the

absorption of a photon with wavelength
p
,
i.e., , Eq. (2) becomes hf U =
( )
( )
( ) 3 1
4
3
1 2 1
2
mod
0
0

+ = =

im i
im g
m
m

where c m h
i0 0
= is the De Broglie
wavelength for the particle with rest inertial
mass (real) and
0 i
m
r
n =
mod
.
From Electrodynamics we know that
when an electromagnetic wave with
frequency and velocity incides on a
material with relative permittivity
f c
r
,
relative magnetic permeability
r
and
electrical conductivity , its velocity is
reduced to
r
n c v = where is the index of
refraction of the material, given by [
r
n
6]

( ) ( ) 4 1 1
2
2

+ + = =

r r
r
v
c
n

If >> , f 2 = , Eq. (4) reduces to
( ) 5
4
0
f
n
r
r

=
Thus, the wavelength of the incident
radiation (See Fig. 1) becomes

( ) 6
4
mod

f n n
f c
f
v
r r
= = = =










Fig. 1 Modified Electromagnetic Wave. The
wavelength of the electromagnetic wave can be
strongly reduced, but its frequency remains the same.
v = c v = c/n
r
= c/f

mod
= v/f = c/n
r
f
n
r

If an imaginary lamina with thickness
equal to contains imaginary
molecules/m
n
3
,

then the number of molecules
per unit area is n . Thus, if the
electromagnetic radiation with frequency
incides on an area of the lamina it
reaches
f S
nS molecules. If it incides on the
total area of the lamina, , then the total
number of molecules reached by the
radiation is
f
S

f
nS N = . The number of
molecules per unit volume, , is given by n

( ) 7
0
A
N
n

=
where is
the Avogadros number;
kmole moleculess N / 10 02 . 6
26
0
=
is the matter
density of the lamina (in kg/m
3
) and A is the
molar mass(kg/kmole).
When an electromagnetic wave incides
on the lamina, it strikes front molecules,
where
f
N
( )
m f f
S n N ,
m
is the diameter of
the molecule. Thus, the electromagnetic
wave incides effectively on an area
m f
S N S= ,
where
2
4
1
m m
S = is the cross section area of
one molecule. After these collisions, it
carries out with the other molecules
(See Fig.2).
collisions
n










Fig. 2 Collisions inside the imaginary lamina.
Imaginary molecule
S
m
Wave


Thus, the total number of collisions in the
volume S is

( )
( ) 8

S n
S n S n S n n N N
m
m m l m l collisions f collisions
=
= + = + =


3
The power density, , of the radiation on the
lamina can be expressed by
D
( ) 9
m f
S N
P
S
P
D = =
We can express the total mean number
of collisions in each molecule, , by means
of the following equation
1
n
( ) 10
1
N
N n
n
collisions photons total
=
Since in each collision a momentum h is
transferred to the molecule, then the total
momentum transferred to the lamina will be
( ) h N n p
1
= , i.e., ( ) ( )
mod 1 1
h N n h n N n c Un
r r
= =
Therefore, in accordance with Eq. (2), we
can write that
( )
( )
( )
( ) 11 1
4
3
1 2 1
1
4
3
1 2 1
2
mod
0
2
mod
0
1
0

+ =
=

+ =

collisions photons total

im l i
im l g
N n
N n
m
m
Since Eq. (8) gives S n N
l collisions
= , we get
( ) (12
2
S n
hf
P
N n
l collisions photons total

= )
Substitution of Eq. (12) into Eq. (11) yields
( )
( )
( ) ( ) 13 1
4
3
1 2 1
2
mod
0
2
0

+ =

S n
hf
P
m
m
l
im l i
im l g
Substitution of given by Eq. (9) into Eq.
(13) gives
P
( )
( ) ( )
( ) 14 1
1
4
3
1 2 1
2
mod 0
2
0

+ =

c m
S n
f
D S N
m
m
l i
l
m f
im l i
im l g
Substitution of ( )
m f l f
S n N and
m f
S N S =
into Eq. (14) results

( )
( ) ( )
( ) 15 1
1
4
3
1 2 1
2
mod
2
0
2 2 2 3
0

+ =

cf m
D S S n
m
m
l i
m m f l
im l i
im l g
where
( ) ( ) ( ) l l l i
V m =
0
.
The case in which the area is just
the area of the cross-section of the
lamina( , we obtain from Eq. (15),
considering that
f
S
)

S
( ) ( )


S m
l l i
=
0
, the following
expression
( )
( ) ( )
( ) 16 1
1
4
3
1 2 1
2
mod
2
2 2 3
0

+ =

cf
D S S n
m
m
l
m m l
im l i
im l g
If the electrical conductivity of the lamina,
( ) l
, is such that
( )
>>
l
, then the value of
is given by Eq. (6), i.e.,
( ) 17
4
mod

f
= =
Substitution of Eq. (17) into Eq. (16) gives
( )
( )
( ) 18 1
16
3
1 2 1
3 2 2
2 4 4 2 6
0

+ = =
f c
D S S n
m
m
m m l
im l i
im l g

The Soul has been frequently described
as a body of unknown energy coupled to
human body by means of a mutual
interaction. This type of energy from the
viewpoint of Physics, has been considered as
Imaginary Energy. The term imaginary is
borrowed from Mathematics (real and
imaginary numbers) [3]. As imaginary
energy, the Soul can be now defined as an
imaginary body, made of imaginary particles
each one them described by imaginaries
wavefunctions
im
, by similarity to the real
bodies, which are made of real particles
described in Quantum Mechanics by its real
wavefunction . The extension of the
imaginary wavefunction to the relativistic
form can be then made in a consistent way
with the Lorentz transformations equations of
the special theory of relativity [7, 8],
similarly to the real wavefunction [4]. In
addition, the Souls energy can be now
expressed by the well-known Einsteins
energy expression ( )
2
mc E = extended to the
imaginary form, i.e., .
Therefore, we can say that the Soul has an
imaginary energy where
is the imaginary gravitational mass of
Soul, which according to Eq. (18), is
correlated to imaginary inertial mass of Soul
at rest, , by means of the following
expression:
( ) ( )
2
c m E
im S g im S g
=
( ) ( )
2
c m E
im S g im S g
=
( )im S g
m
( )im S i
m
0
( ) ( )im S i im S g S
m m
0
= . This
4
means that the value of can be
decreased and also made negative by means
of absorption of energy of radiation incident
upon the Soul (See Eq.18).
( )im S g
E
As widely mentioned in the literature
of Spiritualistic Philosophy, the Soul has 2
parts: Perispirit and Spirit (See Fig.1). The
Spirit is inside the human body (HB); the
Perispirit is an involucre of the spirit, its
boundaries coincide with the boundaries of
the human body. The perispirit density
( ) ( )
( ) real V m
im pe im pe i pe
= =
0
is equal to the
density of the mean where the Soul is [9].
This occurs by the imaginary mass decrease
or by the imaginary mass increase, resultant,
respectively, from the emission or absorption
of imaginary energy from the Universe.
Thus, in the human body the perispirit density is
3
. 1000

= m kg
HB pe

Therefore, according to Eq. (7), we can write
that the density of molecules in the perispirit
is given by

( )
3 28
0
. 10 3 . 3

= m molecules A N n
pe pe


where . Out of the
Earths atmosphere (outer space) the density
of the perispirit is equal to the density of the
spirit
kg/kmole 18
2
= =
O H
A A
( ) ( )
( ) real V m
im s im s i s
= =
0
. In the outer
space, the Earth's atmospheric pressure drops
to about 3.2 10
7
atm [10]. Thus using the
well-known Equation of State
( ZT PM
0
= ) , we can write the following
correlation expression:
( )
( )
atm
atm
space outer air
atm air
7
1
10 2 . 3
1

This means that the density of spirit is given by
( ) ( )
3 7
. 10 8 . 3

=
= = =
m kg
space outer air space outer pe
s

Thus, inside the human body the perispirit
density is and the
spirit density is . Since
the Perispirit is just an involucre of the spirit,
we can assume that
3
. 1000

= m kg
HB pe

3 7
. 10 8 . 3

= m kg
s

s S
.
The gravitational mass of the
Soul, , is given by the sum of the
spirits gravitational mass with the
perispirits gravitational mass, i.e.,
( )im S g
m
( ) ( ) ( )im pe g im s g im S g
m m m + =
As the perispirit is the unique part of
the Soul with sufficient density to absorb
measurable amounts of electromagnetic
energy, we can neglect the contribution of
the energy absorbed by the spirit in the
calculation of the total energy absorbed by
the Soul making . Under these
conditions, we can write that the
gravitational mass of the Soul, , is
given by
( )
0 =
im s g
m
( )im S g
m
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ) 19
0
im pe g im pe g im s g im S g
m m m m = + =
3 2 1
By analogy, the expression of the inertial
mass of the Soul, can be written as
follows
( )im s i
m
0
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
( ) 20
0 0
0
0 0 im pe i im pe i im s i im S i
m m m m + =
3 2 1
Based on Eq. (19) we can write that
( ) ( )im pe pe im S S
V V = , where
( ) ( ) pe im im pe
x S V =

;
pe
x is the thickness of perispirit. Since
s S
and
( ) ( )im s im S
V V , we can write that
( ) ( ) ( )im pe pe im s s im S S
V V V = . In addition, we have
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
m m m S V S V S V
HB HB im im s im im S
4 . 0 1 . 1 4 . 0
2 3
=

.
Thus, we can conclude that
( )
( )
( ) 21 10 2
10
m
S
V
x
im
im s
pe
s
pe

Fig. 3 Perispirit and Spirit. The Spirit is inside the
human body; the Perispirit is an involucre of the spirit, its
boundaries coincide with the boundaries of the human body.
Spirit
Perispirit
Human body
~2x10
-10
m

5
The power density of radiation, ,
absorbed by the perispirit can be expressed
by
pe
D
( )D x D
pe pe pe
= where
pe
is length
scale for total absorption of the radiation
with frequency f 2 = . As we know, if the
electrical conductivity of the mean, , is
such that >> , where is the
permittivity of the mean, then is given by
[11]:
( ) 22 10 5 . 2
3
f =
Therefore, we can write that
( ) ( ) 23 10 8
14
D f D x D
pe pe pe pe


=
where is the total power density of the
incident radiation on the perispirit.
D
By dividing Eq. (19) by Eq. (20) we
obtain
( )
( )
( )
( )
pe
im pe i
im pe g
im S i
im S g
S
m
m
m
m
= = =
0 0

Thus, based on Eq. (18), we can write that
( )
( )
( ) 24 1
16
3
1 2 1
3 2 2
2
0
4 4 2 6
0

+ =
= = =
f c
D S S n
m
m
pe
pe pe m m pe
im pe i
im pe g
pe S

Further on, we will show that the electrical

conductivity of perispirit is enormous (10
trillion times greater than that of the metals),
what shows that it contains a plasma. For the
population of excited states for the elements
in the plasma to be predominately caused by
collisions with electrons and not by
radioactive processes, it requires a minimal
electron density to ensure these collisions.
This minimal electron density is known as
the McWhirter criterion and is defined as [12]:

( ) (25 10 6 . 1
3 18
2
1
E T N
e
)

where E (in eV) is the largest gap between
2 adjacent energy levels; T (in K) is the
plasma temperature, and is in
electrons/m
e
N
3
.
This condition is deduced for hydrogen
and hydrogen-like atoms in an optically thin,
stationary and homogenous plasma [13].
The largest gap for hydrogen is indeed
between the ground state and the first excited
energy state and corresponds to 4 eV. This is
not always the case for other elements. The
largest energy gap for oxygen does not
include the ground state and is 10 eV. In
order to calculate the value of for the
perispirit at the human body, we must take
these values:
e
n
eV E 10 = , . The
result is
K T 300

( ) 26 . 10 3
3 22
m electrons N
e

As we have already shown
. Thus, we can
assume that
3 28
. 10 3 . 3

m molecules n
pe

3 28
. 10

m ions N
pe

It is known that the electrical
conductivity is proportional to both the
concentration and the mobility of the ions
and the free electrons, and is expressed by
i i e e
n n + =
where and express respectively the
concentrations
e
n
i
n
( )
3
m C of electrons and
atom-ions;
e
and
i
are respectively the
mobilities of the electrons and the ions.
In order to calculate the electrical
conductivity of the perispirit, we first need to
calculate the concentrations and . We
start by calculating the value of , which is
given by
e
n
i
n
i
n

3 9
/ 10 m C e N n n
pe e i
= =

This corresponds to the concentration level in
the case of conducting materials. For these
materials, at temperature of 300K, the
mobilities
e
and
i
are of the order of
[
1 1 2 1
10

s V m 14]. Very high mobility has
been found in several low-dimensional
systems, such as two-dimensional electron
gases (2DEG) ( ), [
1 1 2
300

s V m 15] carbon
nanotubes ( ) [
1 1 2
10

s V m 16] and more
6
recently, graphene ( )[
1 1 2
20

s V m 17]. It is
known that the mobility
d
is related to the
drift velocity by means of the following
equation:
d
v

E v
d d
=

where E is the electric field. Thus, based on
this equation, we can relate the mobility of
free electrons of the Soul,
e
, with the
typical mobility of conductors,
, by means of the
following expression:
1 1 2 1
10

s V m
cond

( )
( )
( ) 27
cond
cond d
pe d
e
v
v
=

where the typical drift velocity in conductors
is [
( )
s m v
cond d
/ 10
4
18], and the drift
velocity in perispirit is (since there
are no collisions among the imaginary
electrons). Thus, we get
( )
c v
pe d

1 1 2 12
10

s V m
e

Consequently, we can write that the electrical

conductivity of perispirit is given by

( ) 28 . 10
1 21
+ = m S n n
i i e e pe


By substitution of this value into Eq. (22), we
get

( ) 29 10
7
f
pe

By substitution of m S
HB
/ 1 . 0
(conductivity of human body) into Eq. (22),
we obtain

( ) 30 10
4
f
HB


Substitution of the values of ,
pe
n
pe
,
pe
, , ,(average diameter
of the molecules),
pe
D m
m
10
10 55 . 1

=
2 20 2
10 88 . 1 4 m S
m m

= =
and into Eq. (24), gives
2
1 . 1 m S

( ) 31 1
10 ~
1 2 1
2
2 39

+ =
f
D
S

In this expression, the minimum value of
is limited by the uncertainty principle, i.e.,
by the amount of energy
D
E that can be
detectable by our instruments. According to
the uncertainty principle, . Thus, h t E
t E h
max min
t E = h . Since we can write that
2
t S t S E D =

h
2
max min
t S D =

h ,
we obtain

S E D h
2
min min
= . Here,
kT E =
min
, because if , then the action
of the incident radiation will be hidden by the
action of the thermal radiation
kT <
( ) kT .
Consequently, we can write that

S T k D h
2 2
min
= . Therefore, for K T 300 =
and , we get
2
1 . 1 m S

2 7
min
/ 10 5 . 1 m W D


.
Based on Eq.(31), we can write that the
Soul imaginary energy can
be expressed by
( ) ( )
2
c m E
im S g im S g
=

( ) ( ) ( )
( )
( ) 32 1
10
1 2 1
2
0
2
2 39
2
0
2
c m
f
D
c m c m E
im S i
im S i S im S g im S g

+
= =

This energy varies along the time, having a
minimum value at the beginning of life and a
maximum value, , in a specific
instant of the life of the person. After this
maximum value, the energy decreases
progressively down to the instant of the death
of the person. This means that the average
variation of this energy along the time can be
expressed by the well-known bell curve
(probability curve [
( )
2 max
c m
im S g
19]), in the following form

( ) ( )
( ) 33
2 2 2
4 2 max 2 t b
im S g im S g
e c m c m

=

7
where is a time-constant to be defined.
Since
b
( ) ( )im S i im S g
m m
0
= and
Eq. (33) can be rewritten as follows
( ) ( )
max
0
max
im S i S g
m m =

( ) ( )
( ) 34
2 2 2
4 max
0 0
t b
S i S i
e m m

=
















Fig.4 - The variation of the gravitational mass of
the Soul (Soul energy m
g(S)
c
2
) along the life of a
person, and Quantum Reversal from the current
energy level to a previous energy level.
( )
max
S g
m
( )
a
S g
m

t
t
R
t
a
( )
0
S g
m
( )
R
S g
m
( ) S g
m


Making (current time in the life of the
person), and after (reversal time
a
t t =
R
t t =
*
, see
Fig.4) into Eq. (34), we obtain the following
expressions

( ) ( )
( ) 35
2 2 2
4 max
0 0
a
t b
S i
a
S i
e m m

=
and
( ) ( )
( ) 36
2 2 2
4 max
0 0
R
t b
S i
R
S i
e m m

=

By dividing Eq.(35) by Eq. (36), we get

( ) ( )
( )
( ) 37
2 2 2 2
4
0 0
R a
t t b R
S i
a
S i
e m m

=


Positive values of the Soul energy express
the progress of the energy levels and
obviously, a given positive value cannot to
cause reversion. Thus, in order to occur the
reversion it is necessary that 0 <
S
, When

*
This is not a return in time. It is only return to energy
level that the Soul had at a specific time of its life.
this occurs, the energy of the Soul
( ) becomes positive
and returns to the corresponding value
(
( ) ( )
2
0
2
c m c m
a
im S i S
a
im S g
=
( ) ( )
2
0
2
0
c m c m
a
im S i S
R
im S i
= ). Thus, we can write
that
( ) ( )
a
S i S
R
S i
m m
0 0
= . Substitution of this
expression into Eq. (37) gives

( ) ( )
( )
( ) 38
2 2 2 2
4
0 0
R a
t t b a
S i S
a
S i
e m m

=

or
( )
( ) 39
2 2 2 2
4
R a
t t b
S
e

=

Note that the time-constant must be a very
big number, because the values of
2
b
( )
2 2
R a
t t
e

are
enormous in the case of 0<< t
a
< 3.1 x 10
9
s
(100years). Thus, if the value of is not
very big then the values of
2
b
S
lose their
meaning. A very big number related to the
time is, certainly, the age of the Universe.
Thus, we will define the time-constant as
follows
2
b

Universe of age current s b = =
17 2
10 26 . 4

For example, if a person is exactly 62 years
old ( ), and wants to revert
its Soul energy to the energy that it had at 5
years ago (57 years old, ),
then the value of
s t
a
9
10 928 . 1 =
s t
R
9
10 774 . 1 =
S
, according Eq.(39),
must be given by
( )
( ) 40 10 9 . 1
22 32 . 51 4
2 2 2 2
=

e e
R a
t t b
S

Equation (31) shows that, in order to

obtain , is necessary to apply
on the Soul (body) an electromagnetic
radiation with frequency f and power density
D, given by
22
10 9 . 1 =
S

( ) 41 300 f D
Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE)
levels have been established by ANSI Z136.1
[20] for various laser wavelengths and
exposure durations. The MPE is the level of
laser radiation to which a person may be
exposed without hazardous effect or adverse
biological changes in the eye or skin. This
limit is ~1000 W/m
2
. Here, considering this
limit, we can conclude that, according to Eq.
8
(41), the maximum value for the frequency is
about 3.3Hz.
Now, we can verify the effect of the
ELF radiation upon the gravitational mass of
the human body. By substitution of
,
pe HB
n n =
pe HB
= , m S
HB
/ 1 . 0 ~ ,
, m
m
10
10 55 . 1

=
2 20 2
10 88 . 1 4 m S
m m

= =
and into Eq. (18) we obtain
2
1 . 1 m S

( ) 42 1
10 ~
1 2 1
3
2 23

+ =
f
D
HB HB
HB

The expression of can be obtained from
the following relation
HB
D
( ) 43
HB
pe
pe
HB
D
D

=
where D f D
pe pe

14
10 8

(Eq. 23).
Thus, Eq. (43) can be rewritten as follows
( ) 44 10
14
D f D
HB

Substitution of this equation into Eq. (42), gives
( ) 45 1
10 ~
1 2 1
2
2 6

+ =

f
D
HB

Substitution of Eq. (41) into (45) yields

9 . 0 >
HB
. This corresponds to a weight
decrease of less than 10%, which shows that,
here, in the case of f D 300 , the effect of
the ELF radiation upon the gravitational
mass of the human body is negligible.
Quantum Physics shows that the
energy is quantized, i.e., it has discrete values
that are defined as discrete energy levels that
correspond to all positive integer values of
the quantum number n, . Thus,
along the life of a person, the energy of its
Soul is characterized by several quantum
levels of energy. Then, we can say that, when
occurs a reversal of soul energy, it carries out
a quantum reversal to a previous level of
energy.
( ) ,... 3 , 2 , 1 = n
Any action once performed leaves an
impression on the Soul (its energy). Thus,
each energy level of a Soul expresses, at the
corresponding moment, the human being in
its totality. This means, for example, that our
current human shape results from the current
energy level (spectrum) of our Soul. Imagine
that a person break a leg when it is 50 years
old. If he is subjected to an electromagnetic
radiation flux with Hz at m W D 1 / 300
2
,
then its Soul carries out a quantum reversal
to the energy level that he had 5 years ago.
At this energy level the leg was not broken in
the human body. Consequently, we can
expect that the broken part disappears, and
the leg returns to the form that it had in this
energy level. By means of this process it
seems possible the immediate cure of any
wound, any kind of disease, and also the
resuscitation of persons who have died some
seconds ago (before the spirit leaves the
human body).
It is known that the brain is able to
generate electromagnetic waves with
frequencies smaller than 100HZ. The
brainwaves of lowest frequencies are the
Delta waves. Delta waves are defined as
having a frequency between 0.5 and 2 hertz.
They are the highest amplitude brainwaves.
In adults they are radiated from their
forehead [21]. Also, it is known that the total
electromagnetic power (all the frequencies)
generated by the brain can reach up to 25Wor
more [22]. This means that at a distance of
1m from the brain a maximum power density
is about 2W/m
2
. Substitution of this value
and Hz f 1 = into Eq. (31) gives
( ) 46 10 265 . 1
20
=
S

Comparing with Eq. (40), yields

( )
( ) 47 10 265 . 1
20 286 . 46 4
2 2 2 2
=

e e
R a
t t b
S

whence we obtain
( ) 48 10 994 . 4
17 2
=
a R
t t
For , we obtain years s t
a
62 10 928 . 1
9
= =
( ) 49 58 10 794 . 1
9
years s t
R

This means a return of approximately 4 years
in the Soul energy level. Note that, while it is
necessary 2W/m
2
at 1Hz to return 4 years, it
is necessary 300W/m
2
at 1Hz to return 5
years.
However, only a small part of the 25W is
due to the delta waves. This means that the
return is yet smaller. It obvious that the
power densities of the delta waves radiated
from the brains vary of persons for persons.
Possibly, for most the persons the power
9
densities of delta waves radiated from its
brains are negligible (smaller than the
critical value ). Since
we can relate the radiation density, , with
the intensity of the electric field,
2 7
min
/ 10 5 . 1 m W D


D
E , by
means of the following expression
c E n D
r 0
2
2 = [23], then, considering that
the value of electric field in the forehead of a
person (when emitting delta waves) is
r V E = , where V is the local electric
potential (for ordinary persons V V 150
[24]), and r is the radius of the sphere with
the same volume of the brain ,
then we can write that
( ) m r 1 . 0
min
2 9
2
0
2
0
2
/ 10
2 2
D m W
cr
V
c
E
D << = =


This shows why the ordinary persons cannot
to produce immediate cures. Equation above
shows that to produce is necessary
that (approximately 10 times
greater than that of ordinary persons).
min
D D >
mV V 1 >
Note that, if ,
and we want to return 1 year, then for 1Hz
the necessary value of
years s t
a
6 10 866 . 1
8
= =
S
, according to Eq.
(39) is
986 . 0
e
S
= 68 . 2 =
S
. Thus,
according to Eq. (31) the value of is
. However, as we have
already seen, the value of is limited to
D
2 20
/ 10 4 . 8 m W

D
2 7
min
/ 10 5 . 1 m W D

. This means that the
return of 1 year, in the case what
, is impossible. Also,
note that for
years s t
a
6 10 866 . 1
8
= =
min
D D the values of
become imaginaries. What means that it is
impossible to return the soul energy of a
child with 6 years old. In general, it is
impossible to return the soul energy of any
person with
R
t
2 2
4 ln b t
S a
< .
Since and
2 3
max
/ 10 m W D Hz f 1 . 0
min
,
we obtain from Eqs. (31) and (39) the
following expression:
( ) 50 10 914 . 5
17 2 max
=
a R
t t
For , we get years s t
a
62 10 928 . 1
9
= =
years s t
R
8 . 56 10 768 . 1
9 max
= . This means a
maximum return of ~ 5.2 years in the soul
energy level. For
, Eq. (50) gives years s t
a
30 10 330 . 9
8
= =
years s t
R
17 10 282 . 5
8 max
= . Therefore, a return
of approximately 13 years, in the soul energy
level. Note that, the maximum return possible,
, occurs for . years 8 . 13 ~ years t
a
29

Fig. 5 The immediate Cure or Resuscitation.
Delta waves are defined as having a frequency
between 0.5 and 2 hertz. They are the highest
amplitude brainwaves. In adults they are radiated
from their forehead.
Delta waves

The building of ELF transmitters is
very difficult because the length of the
antenna is enormous. In the case of 1Hz the
antenna length must be of the order of
100.000km. However, by using the process
of gravitational redshift at laboratory scale,
shown in a previous paper [25] it is possible
for example, to reduce frequencies
GHz f 1 down to ~1Hz. In order to
produce a power density at
~1Hz, by the mentioned redshift process, it is
necessary an initial flux with
at ~1GHz, what corresponds to the minimum
frequency band of MASERS. These devices
were invented before the laser, but have
languished in obscurity because they required
high magnetic fields and difficult cooling
schemes. Hydrogen masers oscillate at a
frequency at around 1.42GHZ and have a
typical power of ~ 10
2 6
/ 10 m W D

2 3
/ 10 m W D
-13
W [26]. They are
very complex and expensive devices.
Recently, it was discovered a room-
temperature solid-state maser, which
oscillates at frequency of 1.45GHZ.
Basically, it is a simple crystal called p-
terphenyl. This new device is very simple to
10
build and operate, and removes totally the
masers complexity. When configured as an
oscillator, this solid-state masers measured
output power density of around 1mW/mm
2

1000W/m
2
(approximately 100 million times
greater than that of an atomic hydrogen
maser) [27].




















Fig. 6 Schematic diagram of a system, using solid-
state masers, to produce an ELF radiation flux with 10
-6
W/m
2
at 1.45Hz.
10
6
masers each one with 10
-3
W/mm
2
at 1.45GHz
10m x 10m
10 W/m
2
at 1.45GHz
1000 W/m
2
at 1.45GHz
10
-6
W/m
2
at 1.45Hz
Deflection System
Redshift System
Considering that each one of these
masers radiates 1mW/mm
2
,

then it is
necessary a set of 10
6
masers placed inside
an area of 10mx10m (See Fig.6), and after
concentrated into an area of 1m
2
(by means
of the process of deflection of
electromagnetic waves at laboratory scale
[28]), in order to obtain a flux of 10
3
W/m
2
at
1.45 GHz, which is posteriorly redshifted to a
flux of 10
-6
W/m
2
at 1.45Hz
( )
2 7
min
/ 10 5 . 1 m W D

. Substitution of these
values into Eq. (31) gives . By
substitution of this value into Eq. (39), we get
13
10 4
S

( ) 51 10 3
17 2
=
a R
t t
This equation shows that the system will only
be useful to produce short returns in the soul
energy of persons with .
Similar systems with higher power densities
can provide higher returns, for persons with
.
years t
a
18 >
years t
a
18 >>
Probably all human brains are able to
generate delta waves. But, only few brains
can generate fluxes of this kind of radiation
with the necessary power density to return
the energy of the Soul to a previous
energy level, sufficient to carry out the
immediate cure of any wound, any kind of
disease, or the resuscitation of persons. The
history shows the existence of several
persons who have realized immediate cures,
and someone that has carried out even
resuscitations. Among them, the most known
is Jesus of Nazareth.
As we have already shown, the ordinary
persons usually are not able to produce fluxes
of delta waves with power densities
sufficient to carry out immediate cures
( ). Also, we have
shown that, in order to carry out these cures
is necessary power densities about 100 times
more intense then those produced by the
ordinary persons
2 7
min
/ 10 5 . 1 m W D D

>
( )
2 9
/ 10 m W D

. In
addition, it is very rare to remain conscious
during the emission of delta waves. Thus, the
persons who, at conscious state, are able to
radiate fluxes of delta waves with power
densities 100 times more high than those
produced by the ordinary persons - which
just radiate delta waves at sleep state - are
really extraordinary persons.
What is necessary for the brain of a
person acquire this capacity? A special diet?
Specific physical exercises? Or the persons
only acquire this capacity by means of the
evolution? That is, all persons have this
capacity on a latent stage, but it is only
awakened at a specific evolution level.
Recently, it was proved that the state
of mature cells, with a specific disease, can
be reverted to a previous state (pluripotent
stem cell state), where the cells become
healthy

[29,30]. This is in agreement with

the process of quantum reversal of the soul
energy, proposed in this work, which shows
that it is possible to revert the current state of
a human body to a healthy previous state.
This matter is unprecedented in the
literature. It is necessary more than one paper
to deepen it. We will return to this matter in a
future work.

This work, initiated by Gurdon (1962) and concluded by

Yamanaka (2006), has been awarded with the 2012 Nobel
Prize in Medicine.
11



References


[1] Falk, G. D., (2004) The Science of the Soul, Blue
Dolphin Publishing, Inc. , USA.

[2] Huxley, J. (1969) Essays of a Humanist, Penguin Books,
UK, pp. 8283.

[3] De Aquino, F., (2012) Beyond the Material Universe,
Journal for Interdisciplinary Research on Religion and
Science, No. 10, pp.83-128.

[4] Schiff, L. I., (1981) Quantum Mechanics, McGraw-Hill,
third edition, pp.39-41.

[5] De Aquino, F. (2010) Mathematical Foundations of
the Relativistic Theory of Quantum Gravity, Pacific
Journal of Science and Technology, 11 (1), pp. 173-232.

[6] Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo, McGraw-
Hill, p. 270.

[7] Schwartz, H. M. (1968) Introduction to Special
Relativity, chaps. 3, 4, 8, McGraw-Hill, NY.

[8] Bergmann, P. G. (1946) Introduction to the Theory of
Relativity, pt I, Prentice-Hall, N.J.

[9] Kardec, A., (1954) Le Livre des Espirits, ditions de
LU.S.K.B., q.187.

[10] Squire, Tom (2000), "U.S. Standard Atmosphere,
1976", Thermal Protection Systems Expert and
Material Properties Database (NASA), retrieved
2011-10-23.

[11] Quevedo, C. P. (1977) Eletromagnetismo,
McGraw-Hill, p. 270.

[12] G. Cristoforetti, A. De Giacomo, M. Dell'Aglio,
S. Legnaioli, E. Tognoni, V.Palleschi and N.
Omenetto (2010) Local Thermodynamic
Equilibrium in Laser-Induced Breakdown
Spectroscopy: Beyond the McWhirter criterion,
Spectrochimica Acta Part B: 65, 86-95.

[13] N. Omenetto, EMSLIBS TALK, Rome 2009

[14] E. O. Knutson and K. T. Whitby (1975). "Aerosol
classification by electric mobility: Apparatus, theory,
and applications". J. Aerosol Sci. 6 (6): 443451.

[15] Harris, J. J.; Foxon, C. T.; Barnham, K. W. J.;
Lacklison, D. E.; Hewett, J.; White, C. (1987). "Two-
dimensional electron gas structures with mobilities
in excess of 3106 cm2 V1 s1". Journal of Applied
Physics 61: 1219.

[16] Drkop, T., Getty, S. A., Cobas, E., Fuhrer, M. S.
(2004). "Extraordinary Mobility in Semiconducting
Carbon Nanotubes". Nano Letters 4: 35.







[17] Bolotin, K., Sikes, K., Jiang, Z., Klima, M.,Fudenberg,
G., Hone, J., Kim, P., Stormer, H., (2008). "Ultrahigh
electron mobility in suspended graphene". Solid State
Communications 146: 351.

[18] Knutson, E. O. and Whitby, K. T. (1975). "Aerosol
classification by electric mobility: Apparatus, theory,
and applications". J. Aerosol Sci. 6 (6): 443451.

[19] Casella, G., Berger, R. L. (2001) Statistical inference
(2nd ed.). Duxbury; Patel, J. K.; Read, C. B., (1996)
Handbook of the normal distribution(2
nd
ed.) CRC Press.

[20] Laser Institute of America - Secretariat and Publisher
of the ANSI Z136 Series of Laser Safety Standards.
http://www.lia.org/publications/ansi/Z136-1

[21] H. Aurlien, I.O. Gjerde, J. H. Aarseth, B. Karlsen, H.
Skeidsvoll, N. E. Gilhus (March 2004). "EEG
background activity described by a large computerized
database" Clinical Neurophysiology 115 (3): 665673.

[22] Kandel, E. R., and Schwartz, J, H., (1985)
Principles of Neural Science, 2nd edition,
Elsevier.

[23] Halliday, D. and Resnick, R. (1968) Physics, J. Willey
& Sons, Portuguese Version, Ed. USP, p.1124.

[24] Pilon M; Zadra A; Joncas S et al. Hypersynchronous
delta waves and somnambulism: brain topography and
effect of sleep deprivation. SLEEP 2006;29(1): 77-84.

[25] De Aquino, F., (2012) Gravitational Blueshift and
Redshift generated at Laboratory Scale,
http://vixra.org/abs/1208.0239

[26] Klepper, D., Goldenberg, H.M., Ramsey, N.F., (1962)
Properties of the hydrogen maser, Appl. Opt., 1,55-60.

[27] Oxborrow, M. et al., (16 August 2012) Room- temperature
solid-state maser, Nature 488,353356.

[28] De Aquino, F., (2012) Artificial Gravitational Lenses,
http://vixra.org/abs/1208.0221

[29] Takahashi K., Yamanaka, S. (2006).Induction of
pluripotent stem cells from mouse embryonic and adult
fibroblast cultures by defined factors.Cell126:663-676.

[30] Gurdon JB (1962). Developmental Capacity of Nuclei
Taken from Intestinal Epithelium Cells of Feeding
Tadpoles. J Embryol Exp Morph 10: 622-640.